SH7145

REJ09B0108-0400 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 32 SH7144 Group, SH7145 Group Hardware Manual Renesas 32-Bit RISC Microcomputer SuperH RISC engine Family/SH7144 Series TM SH7114 HD64F7144 HD6437144 HD6417144 SH7145 HD64F7145 HD6437145 HD6417145 Rev.4.00 Revision Date: Mar. 27, 2008 Notes regarding these materials 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page ii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed usage notes on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If the descriptions under General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the body of the manual differ from each other, the description in the body of the manual takes precedence. 1. Handling of Unused Pins Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. ⎯ The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In operation with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is induced in the vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and malfunctions may occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal. Unused pins should be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. 2. Processing at Power-on The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied. ⎯ The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied. In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the states of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the reset process is completed. In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on reset function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the power reaches the level at which resetting has been specified. 3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses Access to reserved addresses is prohibited. ⎯ The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are accessed. 4. Clock Signals After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has become stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the target clock signal has stabilized. ⎯ When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization of the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an external resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress, wait until the target clock signal is stable. 5. Differences between Products Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number, confirm that the change will not lead to problems. ⎯ The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern. When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation test for each of the products. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page iii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Configuration of This Manual This manual comprises the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products Configuration of This Manual Preface Contents Overview Description of Functional Modules • CPU and System-Control Modules • On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 7. List of Registers 8. Electrical Characteristics 9. Appendix 10. Main Revisions for this Edition (only for revised versions) The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 11. Index Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page iv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Preface The SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group single-chip RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) microcomputers integrate a Renesas Technology Corp. original RISC CPU core with peripheral functions required for system configuration. Target users: This manual was written for users who will be using this LSI in the design of application systems. Users of this manual are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of this LSI to the above users. Refer to the SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: • Product names The following products are covered in this manual. Product Classifications and Abbreviations Basic Classification SH7144 (112-pin version) On-Chip ROM Classification SH7144F SH7144M Flash memory version (ROM: 256 kbytes) Masked ROM version (ROM: 256 kbytes) ROM less version SH7145 (144-pin version) SH7145F SH7145M Flash memory version (ROM: 256 kbytes) Masked ROM version (ROM: 256 kbytes) ROM less version Part No. HD64F7144 HD6437144 HD6417144 HD64F7145 HD6437145 HD6417145 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page v of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 • • • • In this manual, the product abbreviations are used to distinguish products. For example, 112pin products are collectively referred to as the SH7144, an abbreviation of the basic type's classification code, while 144-pin products are collectively referred to as the SH7145. There are three versions of each: a flash memory version, masked ROM version, and ROM less version. When a description is limited to the flash memory version alone, the character F is added at the end of the abbreviation, such as SH7144F. When a description is limited to the masked ROM version or ROM less version, the character M is added at the end of the abbreviation, such as SH7144M. The typical product The HD64F7144 is taken as the typical product for the descriptions in this manual. Accordingly, when using an HD6437144, HD6417144, HD64F7145, HD6437145, or HD6417145 simply replace the HD64F7144 in those references where no differences between products are pointed out with HD6437144, HD6417144, HD64F7145, HD6437145, or HD6417145. Where differences are indicated, be aware that each specification applies to the products as indicated. In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions, and electrical characteristics. In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Read the SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Software Manual. In order to understand the details of a register when the user knows its name Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the register. The addresses, bit names, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 25, List of Registers. Rules: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. serial communication, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Numerical expression: Binary is B′xxxx, hexadecimal is H′xxxx, and decimal is xxxx. Signal expression: Low active signals are expressed as xxxx. The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/ Related Manuals: Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page vi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 SH7144 Group, SH7145 Group manuals: Document Title SH7144 Group, SH7145 Group Hardware Manual SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Software Manual Document No. This manual REJ09B0171 User's manuals for development tools: Document Title C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimized Linkage Editor User's Manual Simulator/Debugger (for Windows) User's Manual High-performance Embedded Workshop User's Manual Document No. REJ10B0047 ADE-702-283 REJ10J1737 Application Notes: Document Title C/C++ Compiler Edition Document No. REJ05B0463 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page vii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page viii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Contents Section 1 Overview........................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features .............................................................................................................................2 Internal Block Diagram.....................................................................................................4 Pin Arrangement ...............................................................................................................6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................................8 Section 2 CPU................................................................................................... 15 2.1 2.2 Features .............................................................................................................................15 Register Configuration ......................................................................................................15 2.2.1 General Registers (Rn).........................................................................................15 2.2.2 Control Registers .................................................................................................17 2.2.3 System Registers..................................................................................................18 2.2.4 Initial Values of Registers....................................................................................18 Data Formats .....................................................................................................................19 2.3.1 Data Format in Registers......................................................................................19 2.3.2 Data Formats in Memory .....................................................................................19 2.3.3 Immediate Data Format .......................................................................................20 Instruction Features...........................................................................................................21 2.4.1 RISC-Type Instruction Set...................................................................................21 2.4.2 Addressing Modes ...............................................................................................25 2.4.3 Instruction Format................................................................................................29 Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................32 2.5.1 Instruction Set by Classification ..........................................................................32 Processing States...............................................................................................................45 2.6.1 State Transitions...................................................................................................45 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes..................................................................... 47 3.1 3.2 3.3 Selection of Operating Modes...........................................................................................47 Input/Output Pins ..............................................................................................................49 Operating Modes...............................................................................................................50 3.3.1 Mode 0 (MCU Extension Mode 0) ......................................................................50 3.3.2 Mode 1 (MCU Extension Mode 1) ......................................................................50 3.3.3 Mode 2 (MCU Extension Mode 2) ......................................................................50 3.3.4 Mode 3 (Single Chip Mode) ................................................................................50 3.3.5 Clock Mode..........................................................................................................50 Address Map .....................................................................................................................51 Initial State in This LSI .....................................................................................................52 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page ix of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 3.4 3.5 3.6 Note on Changing Operating Mode .................................................................................. 52 Section 4 Clock Pulse Generator .......................................................................53 4.1 Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 55 4.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ............................................................................. 55 4.1.2 External Clock Input Method............................................................................... 56 Function for Detecting Oscillator Halt.............................................................................. 57 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 58 4.3.1 Note on Crystal Resonator ................................................................................... 58 4.3.2 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................ 58 4.2 4.3 Section 5 Exception Processing.........................................................................61 5.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 61 5.1.1 Types of Exception Processing and Priority ........................................................ 61 5.1.2 Exception Processing Operations......................................................................... 62 5.1.3 Exception Processing Vector Table ..................................................................... 63 Resets ................................................................................................................................ 65 5.2.1 Types of Reset ..................................................................................................... 65 5.2.2 Power-On Reset ................................................................................................... 65 5.2.3 Manual Reset ....................................................................................................... 66 Address Errors .................................................................................................................. 67 5.3.1 Cause of Address Error Exception....................................................................... 67 5.3.2 Address Error Exception Processing.................................................................... 68 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 69 5.4.1 Interrupt Sources.................................................................................................. 69 5.4.2 Interrupt Priority Level ........................................................................................ 70 5.4.3 Interrupt Exception Processing ............................................................................ 70 Exceptions Triggered by Instructions ............................................................................... 71 5.5.1 Types of Exceptions Triggered by Instructions ................................................... 71 5.5.2 Trap Instructions .................................................................................................. 71 5.5.3 Illegal Slot Instructions ........................................................................................ 72 5.5.4 General Illegal Instructions.................................................................................. 72 Cases when Exception Sources Are not Accepted............................................................ 73 5.6.1 Immediately after Delayed Branch Instruction .................................................... 73 5.6.2 Immediately after Interrupt-Disabled Instruction ................................................ 73 Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends .................................................................. 74 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 75 5.8.1 Value of Stack Pointer (SP) ................................................................................. 75 5.8.2 Value of Vector Base Register (VBR) ................................................................. 75 5.8.3 Address Errors Caused by Stacking of Address Error Exception Processing...... 75 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page x of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 6 Interrupt Controller (INTC) .............................................................. 77 6.1 6.2 6.3 Features .............................................................................................................................77 Input/Output Pins ..............................................................................................................79 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................79 6.3.1 Interrupt Control Register 1 (ICR1).....................................................................80 6.3.2 Interrupt Control Register 2 (ICR2).....................................................................82 6.3.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR)....................................................................................84 6.3.4 Interrupt Priority Registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ)...............................................85 Interrupt Sources ...............................................................................................................87 6.4.1 External Interrupts ...............................................................................................87 6.4.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts ................................................................88 6.4.3 User Break Interrupt ............................................................................................88 6.4.4 H-UDI Interrupt ...................................................................................................89 Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors Table ..................................................................90 Operation...........................................................................................................................93 6.6.1 Interrupt Sequence ...............................................................................................93 6.6.2 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing ..........................................................95 Interrupt Response Time ...................................................................................................96 Data Transfer with Interrupt Request Signals ...................................................................98 6.8.1 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Sources for DTC Activating and CPU Interrupt, but Not DMAC Activating ..........................................................99 6.8.2 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Sources for Activating DMAC, but Not CPU Interrupt and DTC Activating ........................................................99 6.8.3 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Source for DTC Activating, but Not CPU Interrupt and DMAC Activating ....................................................99 6.8.4 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Source for CPU Interrupt but Not DMAC and DTC Activating ...................................................................100 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 Section 7 User Break Controller (UBC) ........................................................... 101 7.1 7.2 Features .............................................................................................................................101 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................103 7.2.1 User Break Address Register (UBAR) ................................................................103 7.2.2 User Break Address Mask Register (UBAMR) ...................................................103 7.2.3 User Break Bus Cycle Register (UBBR) .............................................................104 7.2.4 User Break Control Register (UBCR)..................................................................105 Operation...........................................................................................................................106 7.3.1 Flow of User Break Operation .............................................................................106 7.3.2 Break on On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch Cycle ...........................................108 7.3.3 Program Counter (PC) Values Saved...................................................................108 Examples of Use ...............................................................................................................109 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 7.3 7.4 7.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 111 7.5.1 Simultaneous Fetching of Two Instructions ........................................................ 111 7.5.2 Instruction Fetches at Branches ........................................................................... 111 7.5.3 Contention between User Break and Exception Processing ................................ 112 7.5.4 Break at Non-Delay Branch Instruction Jump Destination.................................. 112 7.5.5 Module Standby Mode Setting ............................................................................ 112 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) ........................................................113 8.1 8.2 Features............................................................................................................................. 113 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 115 8.2.1 DTC Mode Register (DTMR).............................................................................. 116 8.2.2 DTC Source Address Register (DTSAR) ............................................................ 118 8.2.3 DTC Destination Address Register (DTDAR) .................................................... 118 8.2.4 DTC Initial Address Register (DTIAR)............................................................... 118 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (DTCRA) ......................................................... 118 8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (DTCRB) ......................................................... 119 8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTER)............................................................................ 119 8.2.8 DTC Control/Status Register (DTCSR)............................................................... 120 8.2.9 DTC Information Base Register (DTBR) ............................................................ 121 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 122 8.3.1 Activation Sources............................................................................................... 122 8.3.2 Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table ................................... 122 8.3.3 DTC Operation .................................................................................................... 125 8.3.4 Interrupt Source ................................................................................................... 132 8.3.5 Operation Timing................................................................................................. 132 8.3.6 DTC Execution State Counts ............................................................................... 133 Procedures for Using DTC................................................................................................ 134 8.4.1 Activation by Interrupt......................................................................................... 134 8.4.2 Activation by Software ........................................................................................ 134 8.4.3 DTC Use Example ............................................................................................... 135 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 136 8.5.1 Prohibition against DMAC/DTC Register Access by DTC................................. 136 8.5.2 Module Standby Mode Setting ............................................................................ 136 8.5.3 On-Chip RAM ..................................................................................................... 136 8.3 8.4 8.5 Section 9 Bus State Controller (BSC) ...............................................................137 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Features............................................................................................................................. 137 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 139 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 140 Address Map ..................................................................................................................... 141 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 9.5 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................144 9.5.1 Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1) ...........................................................................144 9.5.2 Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2) ...........................................................................147 9.5.3 Wait Control Register 1 (WCR1).........................................................................152 9.5.4 Wait Control Register 2 (WCR2).........................................................................153 9.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)...................................................................153 9.6 Accessing External Space .................................................................................................154 9.6.1 Basic Timing........................................................................................................154 9.6.2 Wait State Control................................................................................................155 9.6.3 CS Assert Period Extension .................................................................................157 9.7 Waits between Access Cycles...........................................................................................158 9.7.1 Prevention of Data Bus Conflicts.........................................................................158 9.7.2 Simplification of Bus Cycle Start Detection ........................................................160 9.8 Bus Arbitration..................................................................................................................161 9.9 Memory Connection Example ..........................................................................................163 9.10 Access to On-chip Peripheral I/O Registers......................................................................166 9.11 Cycles of No-Bus Mastership Release ..............................................................................166 9.12 CPU Operation when Program Is Located in External Memory.......................................166 Section 10 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) .................................. 167 10.1 Features .............................................................................................................................167 10.2 Input/Output Pins ..............................................................................................................169 10.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................170 10.3.1 DMA Source Address Registers_0 to 3 (SAR_0 to SAR_3) ...............................170 10.3.2 DMA Destination Address Registers_0 to 3 (DAR_0 to DAR_3).......................171 10.3.3 DMA Transfer Count Registers_0 to 3 (DMATCR_0 to DMATCR_3)..............171 10.3.4 DMA Channel Control Registers_0 to 3 (CHCR_0 to CHCR_3)........................172 10.3.5 DMAC Operation Register (DMAOR) ................................................................178 10.4 Operation...........................................................................................................................180 10.4.1 DMA Transfer Flow ............................................................................................180 10.4.2 DMA Transfer Requests ......................................................................................182 10.4.3 Channel Priority ...................................................................................................184 10.4.4 DMA Transfer Types ...........................................................................................187 10.4.5 Number of Bus Cycle States and DREQ Pin Sample Timing..............................197 10.4.6 Source Address Reload Function .........................................................................203 10.4.7 DMA Transfer Ending Conditions.......................................................................204 10.4.8 DMAC Access from CPU....................................................................................205 10.5 Examples of Use ...............................................................................................................206 10.5.1 Example of DMA Transfer between On-Chip SCI and External Memory ..........206 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xiii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 10.5.2 Example of DMA Transfer between External RAM and External Device with DACK .......................................................................................................... 207 10.5.3 Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and On-chip Memory (Address Reload On)............................................................................................ 208 10.5.4 Example of DMA Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Transmit Side (Indirect Address On) .......................................................................................... 210 10.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 211 Section 11 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU)........................................213 11.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 213 11.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 217 11.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 218 11.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 220 11.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................ 224 11.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ..................................................................... 226 11.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 244 11.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................ 246 11.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 249 11.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................ 249 11.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ............................................................................... 250 11.3.9 Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR).................................................................. 250 11.3.10 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) ................................................... 252 11.3.11 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR) .............................................................. 253 11.3.12 Timer Gate Control Register (TGCR) ................................................................. 255 11.3.13 Timer Subcounter (TCNTS) ................................................................................ 257 11.3.14 Timer Dead Time Data Register (TDDR)............................................................ 257 11.3.15 Timer Period Data Register (TCDR) ................................................................... 257 11.3.16 Timer Period Buffer Register (TCBR)................................................................. 257 11.3.17 Bus Master Interface ............................................................................................ 258 11.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 259 11.4.1 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 259 11.4.2 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................ 264 11.4.3 Buffer Operation .................................................................................................. 266 11.4.4 Cascaded Operation ............................................................................................. 269 11.4.5 PWM Modes ........................................................................................................ 271 11.4.6 Phase Counting Mode .......................................................................................... 276 11.4.7 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode......................................................................... 282 11.4.8 Complementary PWM Mode............................................................................... 285 11.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 310 11.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priorities............................................................................ 310 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xiv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.5.2 DTC/DMAC Activation.......................................................................................312 11.5.3 A/D Converter Activation....................................................................................312 Operation Timing..............................................................................................................313 11.6.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................313 11.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing........................................................................................318 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................321 11.7.1 Module Standby Mode Setting.............................................................................321 11.7.2 Input Clock Restrictions.......................................................................................321 11.7.3 Caution on Period Setting ....................................................................................322 11.7.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations .....................................322 11.7.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations..............................323 11.7.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match .........................................324 11.7.7 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match ........................325 11.7.8 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture..............................................326 11.7.9 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture.............................................327 11.7.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture ............................328 11.7.11 TCNT2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention in Cascade Connection......328 11.7.12 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop ...................................330 11.7.13 Buffer Operation Setting in Complementary PWM Mode...................................330 11.7.14 Reset Sync PWM Mode Buffer Operation and Compare Match Flag .................331 11.7.15 Overflow Flags in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode ............................................332 11.7.16 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing........................333 11.7.17 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow...............................334 11.7.18 Cautions on Transition from Normal Operation or PWM Mode 1 to Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode..........................................................................334 11.7.19 Output Level in Complementary PWM Mode and Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode..........................................................................................................335 11.7.20 Interrupts in Module Standby Mode ....................................................................335 11.7.21 Simultaneous Capture of TCNT_1 and TCNT_2 in Cascade Connection...........335 11.7.22 Note on Buffer Operation Setting ........................................................................335 MTU Output Pin Initialization ..........................................................................................336 11.8.1 Operating Modes..................................................................................................336 11.8.2 Reset Start Operation ...........................................................................................336 11.8.3 Operation in Case of Re-Setting Due to Error During Operation, Etc. ................337 11.8.4 Overview of Initialization Procedures and Mode Transitions in Case of Error during Operation, etc. .................................................................................338 Port Output Enable (POE).................................................................................................368 11.9.1 Features................................................................................................................368 11.9.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................370 11.9.3 Register Descriptions ...........................................................................................370 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 11.9.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 375 11.9.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... 377 Section 12 Watchdog Timer (WDT) .................................................................379 12.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 379 12.2 Input/Output Pin................................................................................................................ 380 12.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 381 12.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 381 12.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 382 12.3.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................ 384 12.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 385 12.4.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ........................................................................................ 385 12.4.2 Interval Timer Mode ............................................................................................ 386 12.4.3 Clearing Software Standby Mode ........................................................................ 387 12.4.4 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) ............................................................. 387 12.4.5 Timing of Setting Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) ............................. 388 12.5 Interrupt Source ................................................................................................................ 388 12.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 389 12.6.1 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 389 12.6.2 TCNT Write and Increment Contention .............................................................. 390 12.6.3 Changing CKS2 to CKS0 Bit Values .................................................................. 391 12.6.4 Changing between Watchdog Timer and Interval Timer Modes ......................... 391 12.6.5 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal...................................................................... 391 12.6.6 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode............................................................. 391 12.6.7 Manual Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode ............................................................. 392 12.6.8 Note on Using WDTOVF Signal ......................................................................... 392 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) ............................................393 13.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 393 13.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 395 13.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 396 13.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 398 13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 398 13.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 398 13.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 398 13.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 399 13.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 402 13.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 407 13.3.8 Serial Direction Control Register (SDCR)........................................................... 415 13.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 416 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xvi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 13.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................................426 13.4.1 Data Transfer Format ...........................................................................................427 13.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................................................................428 13.4.3 Clock....................................................................................................................429 13.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) .............................................................430 13.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)...........................................................431 13.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)......................................................433 13.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function.........................................................................437 13.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................439 13.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................440 13.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................................443 13.6.1 Clock....................................................................................................................443 13.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .................................................444 13.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ....................................445 13.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..........................................447 13.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .............................................................................449 13.7 Smart Card Interface .........................................................................................................451 13.7.1 Pin Connection Example......................................................................................451 13.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode) ..................................................452 13.7.3 Block Transfer Mode ...........................................................................................453 13.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin.......................................454 13.7.5 Initialization .........................................................................................................455 13.7.6 Serial Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)..............................456 13.7.7 Clock Output Control...........................................................................................459 13.8 Interrupt Sources ...............................................................................................................460 13.8.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode...............................460 13.8.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode .............................................................462 13.9 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................463 13.9.1 TDR Write and TDRE Flag .................................................................................463 13.9.2 Module Standby Mode Setting.............................................................................463 13.9.3 Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only).............................463 13.9.4 Sending Break Signal (Asynchronous Mode Only) .............................................463 13.9.5 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only).....................................................................464 13.9.6 Notes on DMAC and DTC Use ...........................................................................464 13.9.7 Notes on Clocked Synchronous External Clock Mode ........................................464 13.9.8 Note on Clocked Synchronous Internal Clock Mode...........................................465 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xvii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 14 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option.........................................................467 14.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 468 14.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 470 14.3 Description of Registers.................................................................................................... 471 14.3.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 471 14.3.2 Slave-Address Register (SAR)............................................................................. 472 14.3.3 Second Slave-Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 473 14.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)........................................................................... 474 14.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)......................................................................... 477 14.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 486 14.3.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX)....................................................................... 490 14.3.8 ICDRE Flag (Internal Flag) ................................................................................. 492 14.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 493 14.4.1 I2C Bus Data Formats........................................................................................... 493 14.4.2 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 495 14.4.3 Operations in Master Transmission ..................................................................... 496 14.4.4 Operations in Master Reception........................................................................... 501 14.4.5 Operations in Slave Reception............................................................................. 509 14.4.6 Operations in Slave Transmission........................................................................ 518 14.4.7 Timing for Setting IRIC and the Control of SCL................................................. 521 14.4.8 DTC Operation .................................................................................................... 524 14.4.9 Noise Canceller.................................................................................................... 526 14.4.10 Initialization of Internal State .............................................................................. 526 14.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 528 14.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 539 Section 15 A/D Converter .................................................................................541 15.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 541 15.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 543 15.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 544 15.3.1 A/D Data Registers 0 to 7 (ADDR0 to ADDR7) ................................................. 544 15.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register_0, 1 (ADCSR_0, ADCSR_1) ................................ 545 15.3.3 A/D Control Register_0, 1 (ADCR_0, ADCR_1)................................................ 547 15.3.4 A/D Trigger Select Register (ADTSR) ................................................................ 548 15.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 549 15.4.1 Single Mode......................................................................................................... 549 15.4.2 Continuous Scan Mode ........................................................................................ 549 15.4.3 Single-Cycle Scan Mode...................................................................................... 550 15.4.4 Input Signal Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .............................................. 550 15.4.5 A/D Converter Activation by MTU ..................................................................... 552 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xviii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 15.4.6 External Trigger Input Timing .............................................................................552 15.5 Interrupt Sources and DTC, DMAC Transfer Requests....................................................553 15.6 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy .........................................................................554 15.7 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................556 15.7.1 Module Standby Mode Setting.............................................................................556 15.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................556 15.7.3 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ........................................................................556 15.7.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings ......................................557 15.7.5 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................557 15.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ........................................................................557 Section 16 Compare Match Timer (CMT)........................................................ 559 16.1 Features .............................................................................................................................559 16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................560 16.2.1 Compare Match Timer Start Register (CMSTR) .................................................560 16.2.2 Compare Match Timer Control/Status Register_0, 1 (CMCSR_0, CMCSR_1) .....................................................................................561 16.2.3 Compare Match Timer Counter_0, 1 (CMCNT_0, CMCNT_1) .........................562 16.2.4 Compare Match Timer Constant Register_0, 1 (CMCOR_0, CMCOR_1) .........562 16.3 Operation...........................................................................................................................563 16.3.1 Compare Match Counter Operation .....................................................................563 16.3.2 CMCNT Count Timing........................................................................................563 16.4 Interrupts ...........................................................................................................................564 16.4.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation ................................................................564 16.4.2 Compare Match Flag Set Timing.........................................................................564 16.4.3 Compare Match Flag Clear Timing .....................................................................565 16.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................566 16.5.1 Contention between CMCNT Write and Compare Match ...................................566 16.5.2 Contention between CMCNT Word Write and Counter Incrementation.............567 16.5.3 Contention between CMCNT Byte Write and Counter Incrementation ..............568 Section 17 Pin Function Controller (PFC)........................................................ 569 17.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................595 17.1.1 Port A I/O Register L, H (PAIORL, PAIORH) ...................................................596 17.1.2 Port A Control Registers L2, L1, H (PACRL2, PACRL1, PACRH) ...................597 17.1.3 Port B I/O Register (PBIOR) ...............................................................................605 17.1.4 Port B Control Registers 1, 2 (PBCR1, PBCR2) .................................................605 17.1.5 Port C I/O Register (PCIOR) ...............................................................................609 17.1.6 Port C Control Register (PCCR) ..........................................................................609 17.1.7 Port D I/O Registers L, H (PDIORL, PDIORH)..................................................611 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xix of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 17.1.8 Port D Control Registers L1, L2, H1, H2 (PDCRL1, PDCRL2, PDCRH1, PDCRH2)......................................................... 612 17.1.9 Port E I/O Register L (PEIORL).......................................................................... 621 17.1.10 Port E Control Registers L1, L2 (PECRL1, PECRL2) ........................................ 622 17.1.11 High-Current Port Control Register (PPCR)........................................................ 630 17.2 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 631 Section 18 I/O Ports...........................................................................................633 18.1 Port A................................................................................................................................ 634 18.1.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 636 18.1.2 Port A Data Registers H and L (PADRH and PADRL)....................................... 636 18.2 Port B ................................................................................................................................ 639 18.2.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 639 18.2.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) .............................................................................. 640 18.3 Port C ................................................................................................................................ 642 18.3.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 642 18.3.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) .............................................................................. 643 18.4 Port D................................................................................................................................ 645 18.4.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 647 18.4.2 Port D Data Registers H and L (PDDRH and PDDRL)....................................... 647 18.5 Port E ................................................................................................................................ 650 18.5.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 651 18.5.2 Port E Data Register L (PEDRL)......................................................................... 652 18.6 Port F................................................................................................................................. 654 18.6.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 654 18.6.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) ............................................................................... 654 Section 19 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version)...................................................657 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 Features............................................................................................................................. 657 Mode Transitions .............................................................................................................. 659 Block Configuration.......................................................................................................... 663 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 664 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 665 19.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 665 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 666 19.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................... 667 19.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ........................................................................... 668 19.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)................................................................... 668 19.6 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 670 19.6.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 671 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xx of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 19.6.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode.....................................................673 19.7 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM....................................................................................674 19.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ...............................................................................676 19.8.1 Program/Program-Verify Mode ...........................................................................676 19.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify Mode.....................................................................................678 19.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory..........................678 19.9 Program/Erase Protection..................................................................................................680 19.9.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................680 19.9.2 Software Protection..............................................................................................681 19.9.3 Error Protection....................................................................................................681 19.10 PROM Programmer Mode ................................................................................................682 19.11 Usage Note........................................................................................................................682 19.11.1 Module Standby Mode Setting.............................................................................682 19.11.2 Notes when Converting the F-ZTAT Versions to the Masked-ROM Versions ...............................................................................................................682 19.11.3 Notes on Flash Memory Programming and Erasing ............................................683 Section 20 Mask ROM...................................................................................... 689 20.1 Usage Note........................................................................................................................689 Section 21 RAM ............................................................................................... 691 21.1 Usage Note........................................................................................................................691 Section 22 User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) ................................................ 693 22.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................693 22.1.1 Features................................................................................................................693 22.1.2 Block Diagram .....................................................................................................694 22.2 Input/Output Pins ..............................................................................................................695 22.3 Register Description..........................................................................................................696 22.3.1 Instruction Register (SDIR) .................................................................................697 22.3.2 Status Register (SDSR)........................................................................................698 22.3.3 Data Register (SDDR) .........................................................................................699 22.3.4 Bypass Register (SDBPR) ...................................................................................699 22.4 Operation...........................................................................................................................700 22.4.1 H-UDI Interrupt ...................................................................................................700 22.4.2 Bypass Mode........................................................................................................703 22.4.3 H-UDI Reset ........................................................................................................703 22.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................704 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 23 Advanced User Debugger (AUD) ...................................................705 23.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 705 23.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 705 23.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 706 23.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 707 23.2.1 Pin Descriptions................................................................................................... 707 23.3 Branch Trace Mode........................................................................................................... 710 23.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 710 23.3.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 710 23.4 RAM Monitor Mode ......................................................................................................... 712 23.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 712 23.4.2 Communication Protocol ..................................................................................... 712 23.4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 713 23.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 715 23.5.1 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 715 23.5.2 Operation in Software Standby Mode.................................................................. 715 23.5.3 Setting the PA15/CK pin ..................................................................................... 715 23.5.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 716 23.5.5 AUD Start-up Sequence....................................................................................... 716 23.5.6 RAM Monitor Operation Using the PD22/AUDCK Pin ..................................... 716 23.5.7 Settings of AUD-Related Pins when Using E10A ............................................... 717 Section 24 Power-Down Modes ........................................................................719 24.1 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 721 24.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 721 24.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 722 24.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 724 24.2.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 and 2 (MSTCR1 and MSTCR2)................. 725 24.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 727 24.3.1 Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 727 24.3.2 Software Standby Mode....................................................................................... 728 24.3.3 Module Standby Mode......................................................................................... 730 24.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 731 24.4.1 I/O Port Status...................................................................................................... 731 24.4.2 Current Consumption during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period.................... 731 24.4.3 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt.................................................................. 731 24.4.4 Writing to MSTCR1 and MSTCR2 ..................................................................... 731 24.4.5 DMAC, DTC, or AUD Operation in Sleep Mode................................................ 731 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 25 List of Registers .............................................................................. 733 25.1 Register Address Table (In the Order from Lower Addresses).........................................734 25.2 Register Bit List ................................................................................................................745 25.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode...........................................................................758 Section 26 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................ 767 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................767 26.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................768 26.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................771 26.3.1 Test conditions for the AC characteristics ...........................................................771 26.3.2 Clock timing ........................................................................................................772 26.3.3 Control Signal Timing .........................................................................................774 26.3.4 Bus Timing ..........................................................................................................777 26.3.5 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Timing ...........................................781 26.3.6 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU)Timing.................................................783 26.3.7 I/O Port Timing....................................................................................................784 26.3.8 Watchdog Timer (WDT)Timing ..........................................................................785 26.3.9 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing....................................................786 26.3.10 I2C Bus Interface Timing .....................................................................................788 26.3.11 Port Output Enable (POE) Timing.......................................................................789 26.3.12 A/D Converter Timing .........................................................................................790 26.3.13 H-UDI Timing .....................................................................................................791 26.3.14 AUD Timing ........................................................................................................793 26.4 A/D Converter Characteristics ..........................................................................................795 26.5 Flash Memory Characteristics...........................................................................................796 Appendix A Pin States ...................................................................................... 799 A. Pin State ............................................................................................................................799 Appendix B Pin States of Bus Related Signals................................................. 809 B. Pin States of Bus Related Signals .....................................................................................809 Appendix C Product Code Lineup.................................................................... 812 Appendix D I/O Port Block Diagrams.............................................................. 813 Appendix E Package Dimensions..................................................................... 870 Main Revisions for this Edition .......................................................................... 873 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxiii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Index .........................................................................................................879 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxiv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figures Section 1 Figure 1.1 Figure 1.2 Figure 1.3 Figure 1.4 Section 2 Figure 2.1 Figure 2.2 Figure 2.3 Figure 2.4 Overview Internal Block Diagram of SH7144...............................................................................4 Block Diagram of SH7145 ............................................................................................5 SH7144 Pin Arrangement..............................................................................................6 SH7145 Pin Arrangement..............................................................................................7 CPU CPU Internal Registers ................................................................................................16 Data Format in Registers .............................................................................................19 Data Formats in Memory.............................................................................................19 Transitions between Processing States ........................................................................45 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Figure 3.1 Address Map for Each Operating Mode......................................................................51 Figure 3.2 Reset Input Timing when Changing Operating Mode.................................................52 Section 4 Figure 4.1 Figure 4.2 Figure 4.3 Figure 4.4 Figure 4.5 Figure 4.6 Section 6 Figure 6.1 Figure 6.2 Figure 6.3 Figure 6.4 Figure 6.5 Figure 6.6 Clock Pulse Generator Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ...................................................................53 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) ...............................................................55 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit ..........................................................................55 Example of External Clock Connection ......................................................................56 Cautions for Oscillator Circuit Board Design..............................................................58 Recommended External Circuitry around PLL ...........................................................59 Interrupt Controller (INTC) INTC Block Diagram ..................................................................................................78 Block Diagram of IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts Control ...................................................88 Interrupt Sequence Flowchart......................................................................................94 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing..................................................................95 Example of Pipeline Operation when IRQ Interrupt Is Accepted ...............................97 Interrupt Control Block Diagram ................................................................................98 Section 7 User Break Controller (UBC) Figure 7.1 User Break Controller Block Diagram ......................................................................102 Figure 7.2 Break Condition Determination Method ...................................................................107 Section 8 Figure 8.1 Figure 8.2 Figure 8.3 Figure 8.4 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Block Diagram of DTC .............................................................................................114 Activating Source Control Block Diagram................................................................122 DTC Register Information Allocation in Memory Space..........................................123 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Transfer Information ...............123 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 8.5 DTC Operation Flowchart......................................................................................... 126 Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode .......................................................................... 127 Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode ........................................................................... 128 Figure 8.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode............................................................... 130 Figure 8.9 Chain Transfer........................................................................................................... 131 Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing Example (Normal Mode) .................................................. 132 Section 9 Figure 9.1 Figure 9.2 Figure 9.3 Figure 9.4 Figure 9.5 Bus State Controller (BSC) BSC Block Diagram.................................................................................................. 138 Address Format ......................................................................................................... 141 Basic Timing of External Space Access.................................................................... 154 Wait State Timing of External Space Access (Software Wait Only) ........................ 155 Wait State Timing of External Space Access (Two Software Wait States + WAIT Signal Wait State)........................................... 156 Figure 9.6 CS Assert Period Extension Function ....................................................................... 157 Figure 9.7 Example of Idle Cycle Insertion................................................................................ 159 Figure 9.8 Example of Idle Cycle Insertion at Same Space Consecutive Access....................... 160 Figure 9.9 Bus Mastership Release Procedure............................................................................ 162 Figure 9.10 Example of 8-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection .............................................. 163 Figure 9.11 Example of 16-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection ............................................ 163 Figure 9.12 Example of 32-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection (only for SH7145).............. 164 Figure 9.13 Example of 8-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection............................................ 164 Figure 9.14 Example of 16-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection.......................................... 165 Figure 9.15 Example of 32-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection (only for SH7145)............ 165 Figure 9.16 One Bus Cycle......................................................................................................... 166 Section 10 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Figure 10.1 DMAC Block Diagram............................................................................................ 168 Figure 10.2 DMAC Transfer Flowchart ..................................................................................... 181 Figure 10.3 (1) Round Robin Mode............................................................................................ 185 Figure 10.3 (2) Example of Changes in Priority in Round Robin Mode .................................... 186 Figure 10.4 Data Flow in Single Address Mode......................................................................... 188 Figure 10.5 Example of DMA Transfer Timing in Single Address Mode.................................. 189 Figure 10.6 Direct Address Operation during Dual Address Mode............................................ 190 Figure 10.7 Example of Direct Address Transfer Timing in Dual Address Mode ..................... 191 Figure 10.8 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Operation (When External Memory Space Is 16 Bits)............................................................. 192 Figure 10.9 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example (External Memory Space to External Memory Space, 16-Bit Width)..................... 193 Figure 10.10 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example (On-chip Memory Space to On-chip Memory Space)........................................... 194 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxvi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 10.11 Figure 10.12 Figure 10.13 Figure 10.14 Figure 10.15 Figure 10.16 Figure 10.17 Figure 10.18 Figure 10.19 Figure 10.20 Figure 10.21 Figure 10.22 Figure 10.23 Figure 10.24 Figure 10.25 DMA Transfer Example in Cycle-Steal Mode ......................................................195 DMA Transfer Example in Burst Mode ................................................................195 Bus Handling when Multiple Channels Are Operating .........................................197 Cycle Steal, Dual Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) ....................200 Cycle Steal, Dual Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) ...................200 Cycle Steal, Single Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)..................200 Cycle Steal, Single Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation).................200 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)....................201 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation)...................201 Burst Mode, Single Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) .................201 Burst Mode, Single Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) ................202 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Edge Detection ....................................................202 Burst Mode, Single Address and Edge Detection..................................................202 Source Address Reload Function...........................................................................203 Source Address Reload Function Timing Chart ....................................................203 Section 11 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of MTU ..........................................................................................216 Figure 11.2 Complementary PWM Mode Output Level Example .............................................254 Figure 11.3 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure ..................................................259 Figure 11.4 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................260 Figure 11.5 Periodic Counter Operation .....................................................................................261 Figure 11.6 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match ..............261 Figure 11.7 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation................................................................262 Figure 11.8 Example of Toggle Output Operation .....................................................................262 Figure 11.9 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure .........................................263 Figure 11.10 Example of Input Capture Operation.....................................................................264 Figure 11.11 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure.........................................265 Figure 11.12 Example of Synchronous Operation......................................................................266 Figure 11.13 Compare Match Buffer Operation .........................................................................267 Figure 11.14 Input Capture Buffer Operation.............................................................................267 Figure 11.15 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure ...................................................267 Figure 11.16 Example of Buffer Operation (1)...........................................................................268 Figure 11.17 Example of Buffer Operation (2)...........................................................................269 Figure 11.18 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure .................................................................270 Figure 11.19 Example of Cascaded Operation ...........................................................................270 Figure 11.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure ..........................................................273 Figure 11.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) .................................................................273 Figure 11.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) .................................................................274 Figure 11.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) .................................................................275 Figure 11.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure...........................................276 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxvii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 11.25 Figure 11.26 Figure 11.27 Figure 11.28 Figure 11.29 Figure 11.30 Figure 11.31 Figure 11.32 Figure 11.33 Figure 11.34 Figure 11.35 Figure 11.36 Figure 11.37 Figure 11.38 Figure 11.39 Figure 11.40 Figure 11.41 Figure 11.42 Figure 11.43 Figure 11.44 Figure 11.45 Figure 11.46 Figure 11.47 Figure 11.48 Figure 11.49 Figure 11.50 Figure 11.51 Figure 11.52 Figure 11.53 Figure 11.54 Figure 11.55 Figure 11.56 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation .................................................... 277 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation .................................................... 278 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation .................................................... 279 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation .................................................... 280 Phase Counting Mode Application Example......................................................... 281 Procedure for Selecting Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode.................................... 283 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Operation Example (When TOCR’s OLSN = 1 and OLSP = 1) ........................................................... 284 Block Diagram of Channels 3 and 4 in Complementary PWM Mode .................. 287 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure................................ 288 Complementary PWM Mode Counter Operation.................................................. 290 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation ............................................ 292 Example of PWM Cycle Updating........................................................................ 294 Example of Data Update in Complementary PWM Mode .................................... 296 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (1)............................. 297 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (2)............................. 298 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (1) ......................... 300 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (2) ......................... 300 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (3) ......................... 301 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (1) .......................................................................................................................... 301 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (2) .......................................................................................................................... 302 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (3) .......................................................................................................................... 302 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (4) .......................................................................................................................... 303 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (5) .......................................................................................................................... 303 Example of Toggle Output Waveform Synchronized with PWM Output............. 304 Counter Clearing Synchronized with Another Channel ........................................ 305 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (1)................................... 306 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (2)................................... 307 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (1) .......................................................................................................................... 307 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (2) .......................................................................................................................... 308 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................ 313 Count Timing in External Clock Operation........................................................... 313 Count Timing in External Clock Operation (Phase Counting Mode).................... 313 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxviii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 11.57 Output Compare Output Timing (Normal Mode/PWM Mode).............................314 Figure 11.58 Output Compare Output Timing (Complementary PWM Mode/ Reset Synchronous PWM Mode) ..........................................................................315 Figure 11.59 Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................315 Figure 11.60 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)...............................................................316 Figure 11.61 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) ..................................................................316 Figure 11.62 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)..........................................................317 Figure 11.63 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) .............................................................317 Figure 11.64 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ...............................................................318 Figure 11.65 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) ...................................................................318 Figure 11.66 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing..............................................................................319 Figure 11.67 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing..............................................................................319 Figure 11.68 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU...............................................................320 Figure 11.69 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC/DMAC Activation................................320 Figure 11.70 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................321 Figure 11.71 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations .......................................322 Figure 11.72 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ...............................323 Figure 11.73 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match...........................................324 Figure 11.74 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match (Channel 0) ......325 Figure 11.75 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match (Channels 3 and 4).................................................................................................326 Figure 11.76 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ...............................................326 Figure 11.77 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture ..............................................327 Figure 11.78 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture..............................328 Figure 11.79 TCNT_2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention with Cascade Connection.............................................................................................................329 Figure 11.80 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop.....................................330 Figure 11.81 Buffer Operation and Compare-Match Flags in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode......................................................................................................................331 Figure 11.82 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Overflow Flag ...................................................332 Figure 11.83 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing............................................333 Figure 11.84 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow...................................................334 Figure 11.85 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode ...........................339 Figure 11.86 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1...........................340 Figure 11.87 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2...........................341 Figure 11.88 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode ..............342 Figure 11.89 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode......................................................................................................................343 Figure 11.90 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode......................................................................................................................344 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxix of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 11.91 Figure 11.92 Figure 11.93 Figure 11.94 Figure 11.95 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Normal Mode........................... 345 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 .......................... 346 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 .......................... 347 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode.............. 348 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode ..................................................................................................................... 349 Figure 11.96 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode ..................................................................................................................... 350 Figure 11.97 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Normal Mode........................... 351 Figure 11.98 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 .......................... 352 Figure 11.99 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 .......................... 353 Figure 11.100 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode............ 354 Figure 11.101 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode ............ 355 Figure 11.102 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1............ 356 Figure 11.103 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2............ 357 Figure 11.104 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode ................................................................................................................... 358 Figure 11.105 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode ................................................................................................................... 359 Figure 11.106 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 ................................................................................................................ 360 Figure 11.107 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode .............................................................................. 361 Figure 11.108 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode .............................................................................. 362 Figure 11.109 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode......................................................................... 363 Figure 11.110 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode ................................................................................................................... 364 Figure 11.111 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 ................................................................................................................ 365 Figure 11.112 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode .............................................................................. 366 Figure 11.113 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode......................................................................... 367 Figure 11.114 POE Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 369 Figure 11.115 Low-Level Detection Operation.......................................................................... 376 Figure 11.116 Output-Level Detection Operation ...................................................................... 376 Figure 11.117 Falling Edge Detection Operation ....................................................................... 377 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxx of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 12 Figure 12.1 Figure 12.2 Figure 12.3 Figure 12.4 Figure 12.5 Figure 12.6 Figure 12.7 Figure 12.8 Figure 12.9 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Block Diagram of WDT ..........................................................................................380 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode.......................................................................386 Operation in Interval Timer Mode...........................................................................386 Timing of Setting OVF............................................................................................387 Timing of Setting WOVF ........................................................................................388 Writing to TCNT and TCSR ...................................................................................389 Writing to RSTCSR.................................................................................................390 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment....................................................390 Example of System Reset Circuit Using WDTOVF Signal ....................................391 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI .............................................................................................394 Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ..................................................426 Figure 13.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ........................................428 Figure 13.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) .............................................................................................429 Figure 13.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart .......................................................................430 Figure 13.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit).....................................................431 Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ...................................................................432 Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ...........................................................................................................433 Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) ..........................................................435 Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) ..........................................................436 Figure 13.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) ..........................................438 Figure 13.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................439 Figure 13.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) .........................................................................440 Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) ........................................441 Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) ........................................442 Figure 13.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) ..............443 Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart .....................................................................444 Figure 13.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ..................446 Figure 13.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart .................................................................446 Figure 13.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception ...............................................................447 Figure 13.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart.......................................................................448 Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations.......450 Figure 13.21 Example of Pin Connections for Smart Card Interface .........................................451 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxxi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 13.22 Figure 13.23 Figure 13.24 Figure 13.25 Figure 13.26 Figure 13.27 Figure 13.28 Figure 13.29 Figure 13.30 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format ........................................................... 452 Direct Convention (DIR = SINV = O/E = 0)......................................................... 452 Inverse Convention (DIR = SINV = O/E = 1)....................................................... 453 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Interface Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times Bit Rate).................................................................... 454 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode......................................................... 457 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmit Operation......................................... 457 Example of Transmit Processing Flow.................................................................. 458 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level.................................................................. 459 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission with DMAC/DTC .................... 464 Section 14 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Figure 14.1 A Block Diagram of the I2C Bus Interface .............................................................. 469 Figure 14.2 Example of the Connection of I2C Bus Interfaces (This LSI Is the Master Device).............................................................................. 470 Figure 14.3 I2C Bus Data Format (I2C Bus Format) ................................................................... 493 Figure 14.4 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) ...................................................................... 493 Figure 14.5 I2C Bus Timing ........................................................................................................ 494 Figure 14.6 An Example of IIC Initialization Flowchart............................................................ 495 Figure 14.7 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Master Transmit Mode .......................... 497 Figure 14.8 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) ................................................................................................. 499 Figure 14.9 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) ................................................................................................. 500 Figure 14.10 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Master Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) ..... 502 Figure 14.11 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) ............................................................................ 504 Figure 14.12 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) ............................................................................ 504 Figure 14.13 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Master Receive Mode (Multiple Bytes Reception) (WAIT = 1) ............................................................... 505 Figure 14.14 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Master Receive Mode (One Byte Reception) (WAIT = 1)........................................................................ 506 Figure 14.15 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ............................................................................ 508 Figure 14.16 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ............................................................................ 509 Figure 14.17 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) ....... 510 Figure 14.18 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 1 (MLS = 0, HNDS = 1)........................................................................................... 512 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxxii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 14.19 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 2 (MLS = 0, HNDS = 1)...........................................................................................513 Figure 14.20 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode (HNDS = 0)............514 Figure 14.21 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 1 (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0)............................................................................516 Figure 14.22 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 2 (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0)............................................................................517 Figure 14.23 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode ................................518 Figure 14.24 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode (MLS = 0) ....520 Figure 14.25 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (1) ................................................521 Figure 14.26 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (2) ................................................522 Figure 14.27 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (3) ................................................523 Figure 14.28 Block Diagram of the Noise Canceller ..................................................................526 Figure 14.29 Points for Caution in Reading Data Received by Master Reception .....................533 Figure 14.30 Flowchart and Timing of the Execution of the Instruction that Sets the Start Condition for Re-Transmission .............................................................................534 Figure 14.31 Timing for the Setting of the Stop Condition ........................................................535 Figure 14.32 IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation .......................................................536 Figure 14.33 Timing for Clearing IRIC Flag When WAIT = 1..................................................536 Figure 14.34 Timing for Reading ICDR and Accessing ICCR in Slave Transmit Mode ...........537 Figure 14.35 Timing for Setting TRS Bit in Slave Mode ...........................................................538 Section 15 Figure 15.1 Figure 15.2 Figure 15.3 Figure 15.4 Figure 15.5 Figure 15.6 Figure 15.7 Section 16 Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3 Figure 16.4 Figure 16.5 Figure 16.6 Figure 16.7 Figure 16.8 A/D Converter Block Diagram of A/D Converter............................................................................542 A/D Conversion Timing ..........................................................................................551 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................552 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy ...............................................................555 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy ...............................................................555 Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................556 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit ...........................................................558 Compare Match Timer (CMT) CMT Block Diagram...............................................................................................559 Counter Operation ...................................................................................................563 Count Timing ..........................................................................................................563 CMF Set Timing......................................................................................................564 Timing of CMF Clear by CPU ................................................................................565 CMCNT Write and Compare Match Contention.....................................................566 CMCNT Word Write and Increment Contention ....................................................567 CMCNT Byte Write and Increment Contention......................................................568 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxxiii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 18 Figure 18.1 Figure 18.2 Figure 18.3 Figure 18.4 Figure 18.5 Figure 18.6 Figure 18.7 Figure 18.8 Figure 18.9 I/O Ports Port A (SH7144)...................................................................................................... 634 Port A (SH7145)...................................................................................................... 635 Port B....................................................................................................................... 639 Port C....................................................................................................................... 642 Port D (SH7144)...................................................................................................... 645 Port D (SH7145)...................................................................................................... 646 Port E (SH7144) ...................................................................................................... 650 Port E (SH7145) ...................................................................................................... 651 Port F ....................................................................................................................... 654 Section 19 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory............................................................................ 658 Figure 19.2 Flash Memory State Transitions.............................................................................. 659 Figure 19.3 Boot Mode............................................................................................................... 661 Figure 19.4 User Program Mode ................................................................................................ 662 Figure 19.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration........................................................................ 663 Figure 19.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode ........................ 673 Figure 19.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ................................................... 674 Figure 19.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation (RAM[2:0] = B'000).................................... 675 Figure 19.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart........................................................................ 677 Figure 19.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ............................................................................... 679 Figure 19.11 Power On/Off Timing (Boot Mode)...................................................................... 685 Figure 19.12 Power On/Off Timing (User Program Mode)........................................................ 686 Figure 19.13 Mode Transit Timing (Example: Boot Mode → User Mode ⇔ User Program Mode) ............................ 687 Section 20 Mask ROM Figure 20.1 Mask ROM Block Diagram..................................................................................... 689 Section 22 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4 Figure 22.5 Section 23 Figure 23.1 Figure 23.2 Figure 23.3 Figure 23.4 User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) H-UDI Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 694 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (1)........................................................................ 701 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (2)........................................................................ 702 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (3)........................................................................ 702 Serial Data Input/Output.......................................................................................... 704 Advanced User Debugger (AUD) AUD Block Diagram............................................................................................... 706 Example of Data Output (32-Bit Output) ................................................................ 711 Example of Output in Case of Successive Branches ............................................... 711 AUDATA Input Format .......................................................................................... 712 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxxiv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure 23.5 Example of Read Operation (Byte Read) ................................................................714 Figure 23.6 Example of Write Operation (Longword Write) .....................................................714 Figure 23.7 Example of Error Occurrence (Longword Read).....................................................714 Section 24 Power-Down Modes Figure 24.1 NMI Timing in Software Standby Mode (Application Example) ...........................730 Section 26 Electrical Characteristics Figure 26.1 Output Load Circuit.................................................................................................771 Figure 26.2 System Clock Timing ..............................................................................................773 Figure 26.3 EXTAL Clock Input Timing ...................................................................................773 Figure 26.4 Oscillation Settling Time.........................................................................................773 Figure 26.5 Reset Input Timing ..................................................................................................775 Figure 26.6 Interrupt Signal Input Timing..................................................................................775 Figure 26.7 Interrupt Signal Output Timing ...............................................................................776 Figure 26.8 Bus Release Timing.................................................................................................776 Figure 26.9 Basic Cycle (No Waits) ........................................................................................... 778 Figure 26.10 Basic Cycle (One Software Wait)..........................................................................779 Figure 26.11 Basic Cycle (Two Software Waits + Waits by WAIT Signal) ..............................780 Figure 26.12 DREQ0, DREQ1 Input Timing (1)........................................................................781 Figure 26.13 DREQ0, DREQ1 Input Timing (2)........................................................................782 Figure 26.14 DRAK Output Delay Time....................................................................................782 Figure 26.15 MTU Input/Output timing .....................................................................................783 Figure 26.16 MTU Clock Input Timing.......................................................................................783 Figure 26.17 I/O Port Input/Output timing .................................................................................784 Figure 26.18 WDT Timing .........................................................................................................785 Figure 26.19 SCI Input Timing...................................................................................................787 Figure 26.20 SCI Input/Output Timing.......................................................................................787 Figure 26.21 I2C Bus Interface Timing .......................................................................................789 Figure 26.22 POE Input/Output Timing .....................................................................................789 Figure 26.23 External Trigger Input Timing ..............................................................................790 Figure 26.24 H-UDI Clock Timing ............................................................................................791 Figure 26.25 H-UDI TRST Timing ............................................................................................792 Figure 26.26 H-UDI Input/Output Timing .................................................................................792 Figure 26.27 AUD Reset Timing................................................................................................794 Figure 26.28 Branch Trace Timing.............................................................................................794 Figure 26.29 RAM Monitor Timing ...........................................................................................794 Appendix D I/O Port Block Diagrams Figure D.1 PAn/RXDm ..............................................................................................................813 Figure D.2 PAn/TXDm...............................................................................................................814 Figure D.3 PAn/SCKm/DREQm/IRQm .....................................................................................815 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxxv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure D.4 PAn/TCLKm/CSx .................................................................................................... 816 Figure D.5 PAn/TCLKm/IRQx .................................................................................................. 817 Figure D.6 PAn/Function 1......................................................................................................... 818 Figure D.7 PA15/CK .................................................................................................................. 819 Figure D.8 PA16/AUDSYNC..................................................................................................... 820 Figure D.9 PA17/WAIT ............................................................................................................. 821 Figure D.10 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0............................................................................................. 822 Figure D.11 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 ............................................................................................ 823 Figure D.12 PAn......................................................................................................................... 824 Figure D.13 PAn/Function 2....................................................................................................... 825 Figure D.14 PBn/Am .................................................................................................................. 826 Figure D.15 PBn/IRQm/POEm/Function 1 ................................................................................ 827 Figure D.16 PBn/IRQm/POEm .................................................................................................. 828 Figure D.17 PBn/IRQm/POEm/CSx .......................................................................................... 829 Figure D.18 PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK ........................................................................................... 830 Figure D.19 PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ............................................................................................ 831 Figure D.20 PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT ............................................................................................ 832 Figure D.21 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG ........................................................................................ 833 Figure D.22 PCn/An ................................................................................................................... 834 Figure D.23 PDn/Dn................................................................................................................... 835 Figure D.24 PDn/Dn/AUDATAm .............................................................................................. 836 Figure D.25 PDn/Dn/Function 1................................................................................................. 837 Figure D.26 PDn/Dn/Function 2................................................................................................. 838 Figure D.27 PDn/Dn/IRQm ........................................................................................................ 839 Figure D.28 PDn/Dn/IRQm/AUDATAm................................................................................... 840 Figure D.29 PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 1...................................................................................... 841 Figure D.30 PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 2...................................................................................... 842 Figure D.31 PDn/Dn/Function 3................................................................................................. 843 Figure D.32 PDn/Dn/Function 4................................................................................................. 844 Figure D.33 PDn/Dn/CSm .......................................................................................................... 845 Figure D.34 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1......................................................................................... 846 Figure D.35 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 2......................................................................................... 847 Figure D.36 PEn/TIOCxx/SCKm ............................................................................................... 848 Figure D.37 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 ............................................................................................... 849 Figure D.38 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3............................................................................................. 850 Figure D.39 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3............................................................................................. 851 Figure D.40 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES ............................................................................................ 852 Figure D.41 PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 .......................................................................................... 853 Figure D.42 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT.......................................................................... 854 Figure D.43 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/Function 2....................................................................... 855 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxxvi of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Figure D.44 Figure D.45 Figure D.46 Figure D.47 Figure D.48 Figure D.49 Figure D.50 Figure D.51 Figure D.52 Figure D.53 Figure D.54 Figure D.55 Figure D.56 Figure D.57 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST .................................................................................856 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO...................................................................................857 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK .............................................................................858 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD ............................................................................859 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST............................................................................860 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/AUDATAm....................................................................861 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2...........................................................................862 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0............................................................................863 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS ......................................................................................864 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST .....................................................................................865 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI .....................................................................................866 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO ...................................................................................867 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK....................................................................................868 PFn/ANn.................................................................................................................869 Appendix E Package Dimensions Figure E.1 FP-112B ....................................................................................................................870 Figure E.2 FP-144F.....................................................................................................................871 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxxvii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xxxviii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Tables Section 2 CPU Table 2.1 Initial Values of Registers.......................................................................................18 Table 2.2 Sign Extension of Word Data .................................................................................21 Table 2.3 Delayed Branch Instructions...................................................................................22 Table 2.4 T Bit ........................................................................................................................22 Table 2.5 Immediate Data Accessing......................................................................................23 Table 2.6 Absolute Address Accessing...................................................................................23 Table 2.7 Displacement Accessing .........................................................................................24 Table 2.8 Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses...........................................................25 Table 2.9 Instruction Formats .................................................................................................29 Table 2.10 Classification of Instructions ..................................................................................32 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Table 3.1 Selection of Operating Modes.................................................................................47 Table 3.2 Clock Mode Setting ................................................................................................48 Table 3.3 Pin Configuration....................................................................................................49 Section 4 Clock Pulse Generator Table 4.1 Operating Clock for Each Module ..........................................................................54 Table 4.2 Damping Resistance Values (Recommended Values) ............................................55 Table 4.3 Crystal Resonator Characteristics ...........................................................................56 Section 5 Exception Processing Table 5.1 Types of Exception Processing and Priority Order .................................................61 Table 5.2 Timing for Exception Source Detection and Start of Exception Processing...........62 Table 5.3 Exception Processing Vector Table ........................................................................63 Table 5.4 Calculating Exception Processing Vector Table Addresses....................................64 Table 5.5 Reset Status.............................................................................................................65 Table 5.6 Bus Cycles and Address Errors...............................................................................67 Table 5.7 Interrupt Sources.....................................................................................................69 Table 5.8 Interrupt Priority .....................................................................................................70 Table 5.9 Types of Exceptions Triggered by Instructions ......................................................71 Table 5.10 Generation of Exception Sources Immediately after Delayed Branch Instruction or Interrupt-Disabled Instruction ..........................................................73 Table 5.11 Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends ........................................................74 Section 6 Interrupt Controller (INTC) Table 6.1 Pin Configuration....................................................................................................79 Table 6.2 Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities............................................90 Table 6.3 Interrupt Response Time.........................................................................................96 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xxxix of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.1 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTEs ................. 124 Table 8.2 Normal Mode Register Functions ......................................................................... 127 Table 8.3 Repeat Mode Register Functions .......................................................................... 128 Table 8.4 Block Transfer Mode Register Functions ............................................................. 129 Table 8.5 Execution State of DTC ........................................................................................ 133 Table 8.6 State Counts Needed for Execution State ............................................................. 133 Section 9 Bus State Controller (BSC) Table 9.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 139 Table 9.2 Address Map ......................................................................................................... 142 Table 9.3 Access to On-chip Peripheral I/O Registers.......................................................... 166 Section 10 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Table 10.1 DMAC Pin Configuration..................................................................................... 169 Table 10.2 Selecting External Request Modes with RS Bits .................................................. 182 Table 10.3 Selecting On-Chip Peripheral Module Request Modes with RS Bits ................... 183 Table 10.4 Supported DMA Transfers.................................................................................... 187 Table 10.5 Relationship of Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer Category ..... 196 Table 10.6 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between On-chip SCI and External Memory ........................................................ 206 Table 10.7 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External RAM and External Device with DACK................................... 207 Table 10.8 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between A/D Converter (A/D1) and On-chip Memory ........................................ 208 Table 10.9 DMAC Internal Status .......................................................................................... 209 Table 10.10 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Transmit Side............................................. 210 Section 11 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.1 MTU Functions..................................................................................................... 214 Table 11.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 217 Table 11.3 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 0, 3, and 4) ............................................................ 221 Table 11.4 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 1 and 2) ................................................................. 221 Table 11.5 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 0) .............................................................................. 222 Table 11.6 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 1) .............................................................................. 222 Table 11.7 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 2) .............................................................................. 223 Table 11.8 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channels 3 and 4) ................................................................... 223 Table 11.9 MD0 to MD3 ........................................................................................................ 225 Table 11.10 TIORH_0 (Channel 0) .......................................................................................... 228 Table 11.11 TIORL_0 (Channel 0)........................................................................................... 229 Table 11.12 TIOR_1 (Channel 1) ............................................................................................. 230 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xl of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Table 11.13 Table 11.14 Table 11.15 Table 11.16 Table 11.17 Table 11.18 Table 11.19 Table 11.20 Table 11.21 Table 11.22 Table 11.23 Table 11.24 Table 11.25 Table 11.26 Table 11.27 Table 11.28 Table 11.29 Table 11.30 Table 11.31 Table 11.32 Table 11.33 Table 11.34 Table 11.35 Table 11.36 Table 11.37 Table 11.38 Table 11.39 Table 11.40 Table 11.41 Table 11.42 Table 11.43 Table 11.44 Table 11.45 TIOR_2 (Channel 2) .............................................................................................231 TIORH_3 (Channel 3) ..........................................................................................232 TIORL_3 (Channel 3)...........................................................................................233 TIORH_4 (Channel 4) ..........................................................................................234 TIORL_4 (Channel 4)...........................................................................................235 TIORH_0 (Channel 0) ..........................................................................................236 TIORL_0 (Channel 0)...........................................................................................237 TIOR_1 (Channel 1) .............................................................................................238 TIOR_2 (Channel 2) .............................................................................................239 TIORH_3 (Channel 3) ..........................................................................................240 TIORL_3 (Channel 3)...........................................................................................241 TIORH_4 (Channel 4) ..........................................................................................242 TIORL_4 (Channel 4)...........................................................................................243 Output Level Select Function ...............................................................................253 Output Level Select Function ...............................................................................254 Output level Select Function.................................................................................256 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation .........................................................266 Cascaded Combinations........................................................................................269 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins ..............................................................272 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins ...............................................................276 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1......................................277 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2......................................278 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3......................................279 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4......................................280 Output Pins for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode ................................................282 Register Settings for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode ........................................282 Output Pins for Complementary PWM Mode.......................................................285 Register Settings for Complementary PWM Mode ..............................................286 Registers and Counters Requiring Initialization ...................................................293 MTU Interrupts .....................................................................................................311 Mode Transition Combinations ............................................................................337 Pin Configuration..................................................................................................370 Pin Combinations..................................................................................................370 Section 12 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Table 12.1 Pin Configuration..................................................................................................380 Table 12.2 WDT Interrupt Source (in Interval Timer Mode) .................................................388 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.1 Pin Configuration..................................................................................................395 Table 13.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Effective Bit Rate B0 ....................416 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xli of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Table 13.3 Table 13.3 Table 13.3 Table 13.3 Table 13.4 Table 13.5 Table 13.6 Table 13.6 Table 13.6 Table 13.6 Table 13.7 Table 13.8 Table 13.9 Table 13.10 Table 13.11 Table 13.12 Table 13.13 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ........................... 418 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ........................... 418 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) ........................... 419 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (4) ........................... 419 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency when Using Baud Rate Generator (Asynchronous Mode) .......................................................................................... 420 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) ................ 421 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (1) ............... 422 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (2) ............... 422 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (3) ............... 423 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (4) ............... 423 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .... 424 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When n = 0 and S = 372)..................................................................................... 425 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when S = 372)...................................................................................................... 425 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode).................................................... 427 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling ...................................................... 434 Interrupt Sources in Serial Communication Interface Mode ................................ 461 Interrupt Sources in Smart Card Interface Mode .................................................. 462 Section 14 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 470 Table 14.2 Transfer Format .................................................................................................... 473 Table 14.3 Setting of the Transfer Rate .................................................................................. 476 Table 14.4 The Relationship between Flags and Transfer States (Master Mode)................... 483 Table 14.5 The Relationship between Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode)..................... 484 Table 14.6 I2C Bus Data Format: Description of Symbols ..................................................... 494 Table 14.7 Examples of Operations in which the DTC Is Used ............................................. 525 Table 14.8 I2C Bus Timing (output of SCL and SDA) ........................................................... 528 Table 14.9 Tolerance of the SCL Rise Time (tSr) .................................................................... 529 Table 14.10 I2C Bus Timing (when the effect of tSr/tSf Is at its maximum)................................ 531 Section 15 A/D Converter Table 15.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 543 Table 15.2 Channel Select List ............................................................................................... 546 Table 15.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 551 Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) ..................................................................... 552 Table 15.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Sources .......................................................................... 553 Table 15.6 Analog Pin Specifications..................................................................................... 558 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xlii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 17 Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.1 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port A) .......................................................................569 Table 17.2 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port B) .......................................................................570 Table 17.3 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port C) .......................................................................570 Table 17.4 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port D) .......................................................................571 Table 17.5 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port E) .......................................................................572 Table 17.6 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port F)........................................................................572 Table 17.7 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port A) .......................................................................573 Table 17.8 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port B) .......................................................................574 Table 17.9 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port C) .......................................................................574 Table 17.10 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port D) .......................................................................575 Table 17.11 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port E) .......................................................................576 Table 17.12 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port F)........................................................................576 Table 17.13 SH7144 Pin Functions in Each Mode (1) .............................................................577 Table 17.13 SH7144 Pin Functions in Each Mode (2) .............................................................581 Table 17.14 SH7145 Pin Functions in Each Mode (1) .............................................................585 Table 17.14 SH7145 Pin Functions in Each Mode (2) .............................................................590 Table 17.15 Transmit Forms of Input Functions Allocated to Multiple Pins ...........................631 Section 18 I/O Ports Table 18.1 Port A Data Register (PADR) Read/Write Operations .........................................638 Table 18.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) Read/Write Operations..........................................641 Table 18.3 Port C Data Register (PCDR) Read/Write Operations..........................................644 Table 18.4 Port D Data Register (PDDR) Read/Write Operations .........................................649 Table 18.5 Port E Data Register L (PEDRL) Read/Write Operations ....................................653 Table 18.6 Port F Data Register (PFDR) Read/Write Operations...........................................655 Section 19 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode...................................660 Table 19.2 Pin Configuration..................................................................................................664 Table 19.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes................................................................670 Table 19.4 Boot Mode Operation ...........................................................................................672 Table 19.5 Peripheral Clock (Pφ) Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is Possible ........................................................................................672 Section 22 User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) Table 22.1 H-UDI Pins ...........................................................................................................695 Table 22.2 Serial Transfer Characteristics of H-UDI Registers..............................................696 Section 23 Advanced User Debugger (AUD) Table 23.1 AUD Pin Configuration ........................................................................................707 Table 23.2 Ready Flag Format................................................................................................713 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008, Page xliii of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 Section 24 Power-Down Modes Table 24.1 Internal Operation States in Each Mode ............................................................... 720 Table 24.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 721 Section 26 Electrical Characteristics Table 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 767 Table 26.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 768 Table 26.3 Permitted Output Current Values.......................................................................... 770 Table 26.4 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 772 Table 26.5 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 774 Table 26.6 Bus Timing ........................................................................................................... 777 Table 26.7 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing ........................................................... 781 Table 26.8 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit Timing ............................................................. 783 Table 26.9 I/O Port Timing..................................................................................................... 784 Table 26.10 Watchdog Timer Timing....................................................................................... 785 Table 26.11 Serial Communication Interface Timing............................................................... 786 Table 26.12 I2C Bus Interface Timing ...................................................................................... 788 Table 26.13 Port Output Enable Timing................................................................................... 789 Table 26.14 A/D Converter Timing.......................................................................................... 790 Table 26.15 H-UDI Timing ...................................................................................................... 791 Table 26.16 AUD Timing......................................................................................................... 793 Table 26.17 A/D Converter Characteristics .............................................................................. 795 Table 26.18 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 796 Appendix A Table A.1 Table A.2 Table A.3 Table A.4 Table A.5 Appendix B Table B.1 Table B.1 Table B.1 Pin States Pin States (SH7144).............................................................................................. 799 Pin States (SH7145).............................................................................................. 803 Pin States .............................................................................................................. 807 Pin States .............................................................................................................. 807 Pin States .............................................................................................................. 808 Pin States of Bus Related Signals Pin States of Bus Related Signals (1).................................................................... 809 Pin States of Bus Related Signals (2).................................................................... 810 Pin States of Bus Related Signals (3).................................................................... 811 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page xliv of xliv REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Section 1 Overview The SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group single-chip RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) microcomputers integrate a Renesas Technology original RISC CPU core with peripheral functions required for system configuration. The SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group CPU has a RISC-type instruction set. Most instructions can be executed in one state (one system clock cycle), which greatly improves instruction execution speed. In addition, the 32-bit internal-bus architecture enhances data processing power. With this CPU, it has become possible to assemble low cost, high performance/high-functioning systems, even for applications that were previously impossible with microcomputers, such as realtime control, which demands high speeds. In addition, the SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group includes on-chip peripheral functions necessary for system configuration, such as a direct memory access controller (DMAC), largecapacity ROM and RAM, timers, a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, an interrupt controller (INTC), and I/O ports. As an option, an I2C bus interface can also be incorporated. ROM and SRAM can be directly connected to the SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group MCU by means of an external memory access support function. This greatly reduces system cost. There are two versions of on-chip ROM: F-ZTATTM* (Flexible Zero Turn Around Time) that includes flash memory, and masked ROM. The flash memory can be programmed with a programmer that supports SH7144 Group and SH7145 Group programming, and can also be programmed and erased by software. This enables LSI chip to be re-programmed at a user side while mounted on a board. Note: * F-ZTAT is a registered trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 1 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview 1.1 Features • Central processing unit with an internal 32-bit RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) architecture ⎯ Instruction length: 16-bit fixed length for improved code efficiency ⎯ Load-store architecture (basic operations are executed between registers) ⎯ Sixteen 32-bit general registers ⎯ Five-stage pipeline ⎯ On-chip multiplier: multiplication operations (32 bits × 32 bits → 64 bits) executed in two to four cycles ⎯ C language-oriented 62 basic instructions • Various peripheral functions ⎯ Direct memory access controller (DMAC) ⎯ Data transfer controller (DTC) ⎯ Multifunction timer/pulse unit (MTU) ⎯ Compare match timer (CMT) ⎯ Watchdog timer (WDT) ⎯ Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface (SCI) ⎯ I2C bus interface (IIC)*1 ⎯ 10-bit A/D converter ⎯ Clock pulse generator ⎯ User break controller (UBC) ⎯ User debugging interface (H-UDI)*2 ⎯ Advanced user debugger (AUD)*2 Notes: 1. Option 2. Supported only for flash memory version. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 2 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview • On-chip memory ROM Flash memory version Part No. HD64F7144F50 HD64F7145F50 Masked ROM version HD6437144F50 HD6437145F50 ROM less version HD6417144F50 HD6417145F50 ROM 256 kbytes 256 kbytes 256 kbytes 256 kbytes ⎯ ⎯ RAM 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes • I/O ports Part No. HD64F7144F50/ HD6437144F50/ HD6417144F50 HD64F7145F50/ HD6437145F50/ HD6417145F50 No. of I/O Pins 74 No. of Input-Only Pins 8 98 8 • Supports various power-down states • Compact package Part No. HD64F7144F50/ HD6437144F50/ HD6417144F50 HD64F7145F50/ HD6437145F50/ HD6417145F50 Package QFP-112 (Code) FP-112B Body Size 20.0 Pin Pitch 0.65 mm × 20.0 mm × 20.0 mm LQFP-144 FP-144F 20.0 0.5 mm Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 3 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview 1.2 Internal Block Diagram PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6 PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA3/RXD1 PA0/RXD0 PA4/TXD1 PA1/TXD0 PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA14/RD PA15/CK PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT PB1/A17 RES WDTOVF MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 NMI EXTAL XTAL PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss FWP* Vcc Vcc Vcc Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss AVcc AVss DBGMD ASEBRKAK I2C bus interface Compare match timer (× 2 channels) Serial communication interface (× 4 channels) Interrupt controller User break controller PB0/A16 PC15/A15 PC14/A14 PC13/A13 PC12/A12 PC11/A11 PC10/A10 PC9/A9 PC8/A8 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC PD14/D14/AUDCK PD13/D13/AUDMD PD12/D12/AUDRST PD11/D11/AUDATA3 PD10/D10/AUDATA2 PD9/D9/AUDATA1 PD8/D8/AUDATA0 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 Peripheral address bus (12bits) Peripheral data bus (16bits) Internal address bus (32bits) Internal upper data bus (16bits) Internal lower data bus (16bits) AUD* Flash ROM/ mask ROM 256kB RAM 8kB P L L Data transfer Controller CPU Direct memory access controller Bus state controller Multifunction timer pulse unit A/D converter Watchdog timer H-UDI* Note: * Pin and modules for the F-ZTAT reision only Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of SH7144 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 4 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/TCK PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/TDI PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/TMS PF7/AN7 PF6/AN6 PF5/AN5 PF4/AN4 PF3/AN3 PF2/AN2 PF1/AN1 PF0/AN0 1. Overview PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PC15/A15 PC14/A14 PC13/A13 PC12/A12 PB1/A17 PB0/A16 PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA23/WRHH PA22/WRHL PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA16/AUDSYNC PA17/WAIT PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA3/RXD1 PA11/CS1 PA21/CS5 PA20/CS4 PA10/CS0 PA14/RD PA15/CK PA4/TXD1 PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6 PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT PC11/A11 PC10/A10 PC9/A9 PC8/A8 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 RES WDTOVF MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 NMI EXTAL XTAL PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss FWP* Vcc Vcc Vcc Vcc Vcc Vcc Vcc Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss Vss AVcc AVref AVss PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/AUDATA1 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/AUDATA3 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK PF7/AN7 PF6/AN6 PF5/AN5 PF4/AN4 PF3/AN3 PF2/AN2 PF1/AN1 PF0/AN0 I2C bus interface Compare match timer (× 2 channels) Serial communication interface (× 4 channels) Interrupt controller User break controller PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 Flash ROM/ mask ROM 256kB PC1/A1 RAM 8kB PD31/D31/ADTRG PD30/D30/IRQOUT PD29/D29/CS3 PD28/D28/CS2 Data transfer Controller AUD* PC0/A0 P L L CPU PD27/D27/DACK1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD24/D24/DREQ0 PD23/D23/IRQ7/AUDSYNC PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST PD19/D19/IRQ3/AUDATA3 PD18/D18/IRQ2/AUDATA2 PD17/D17/IRQ1/AUDATA1 PD16/D16/IRQ0/AUDATA0 Direct memory access controller Bus state controller Multifunction timer pulse unit A/D converter Watchdog timer PD15/D15 PD14/D14 PD13/D13 H-UDI* PD12/D12 PD11/D11 PD10/D10 PD9/D9 PD8/D8 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 DBGMD ASEBRKAK Peripheral address bus (12bits) Peripheral data bus (16bits) Internal address bus (32bits) Internal upper data bus (16bits) Internal lower data bus (16bits) Note: * Pin and modules for the F-ZTAT reision only Figure 1.2 Block Diagram of SH7145 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 5 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview 1.3 Pin Arrangement PD10/D10/AUDATA2*4 PD11/D11/AUDATA3*4 PD8/D8/AUDATA0*4 PD9/D9/AUDATA1*4 Vcc(FWP*1) PA15/CK PLLCAP PD0/D0 PD1/D1 PD2/D2 PD3/D3 PD4/D4 PD5/D5 PD6/D6 PLLVss PLLVcc MD0 MD1 RES PD7/D7 EXTAL XTAL MD2 MD3 NMI Vss Vcc 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/TMS*4 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST* 4 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/TDI* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO* 4 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/TCK* Vss PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 AVss PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 AVcc Vss PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 Vcc PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 Vss PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES 4 4 Vss 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 1 PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 PD12/D12/AUDRST*4 Vss PD13/D13/AUDMD*4 PD14/D14/AUDCK*4 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC*4 PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA10/CS0 PA11/CS1 Vss PA12/WRL Vcc PA13/WRH WDTOVF PA14/RD Vss(DBGMD*3) PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK QFP-112 (Top view) 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT 3 Vss 4 PC0/A0 5 PC1/A1 6 PC2/A2 7 PC3/A3 8 PC4/A4 9 PC5/A5 29 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Vcc PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 Vss PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6*5 2 Notes : 1. Fixed as Vcc in the masked ROM version and ROM less version, and used as an FWP input pin in the F-ZTAT version (used as an FWE in programmer mode). 2. Used for E10A debugging mode. Used as an ASEBRKAK output pin in the F-ZTAT version. Refer to the table below for processing the ASEBRKAK pin. 3. Used for E10A debugging mode. Fixed to Vss in the masked ROM version and ROM less version, or used as a DBGMD input pin in the F-ZTAT version. 4. Valid only in the F-ZTAT version (invalid only in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). 5. Valid only in the masked ROM version and ROM less version (invalid in the F-ZTAT version and emulator). ASEBRKAK Processing Product type Masked ROM version and ROM less version F-ZTAT version (when using E10A) F-ZTAT version (Not when using E10A) Fixed to Vcc Yes No Yes Fixed to Vss Yes No Yes Processing Pull-up Yes Yes Yes Pull-down Yes No Yes NC No No No Figure 1.3 SH7144 Pin Arrangement Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 6 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7*5 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 ASEBRKAK* 1. Overview PA16/AUDSYNC*4 Vcc(FWP*1) PA17/WAIT PD10/D10 PD11/D11 PD12/D12 PD13/D13 PD14/D14 108 107106 105 104 103102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK*4 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD*4 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/AUDATA3* 4 PD15/D15 PA15/CK PLLCAP PD0/D0 PD1/D1 PD2/D2 PD3/D3 PD4/D4 PD5/D5 PD6/D6 PD7/D7 PD8/D8 PD9/D9 PLLVss PLLVcc EXTAL XTAL MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 RES NMI Vss Vss Vcc Vss Vcc 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 1 23 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 PD16/D16/IRQ0/AUDATA0*4 Vss PD17/D17/IRQ1/AUDATA1*4 PD18/D18/IRQ2/AUDATA2*4 PD19/D19/IRQ3/AUDATA3*4 PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST*4 PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD*4 PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK*4 PD23/D23/IRQ7/AUDSYNC*4 Vcc PD24/D24/DERQ0 Vss PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD27/D27/DACK1 PD28/D28/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 Vss PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA10/CS0 PA11/CS1 PA12/WRL PA13/WRH PD30/D30/IRQOUT PD31/D31/ADTRG WDTOVF PA14/RD Vss(DBGMD*3 ) PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG Vcc PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK Vcc 4 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2*4 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/AUDATA1* 4 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0*4 Vss PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 AVss PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 AVref AVcc Vss PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 Vcc PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS*4 PE9/TIOC3B/TRST*4/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI*4 Vss PE11/TIOC3D/TDO*4/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TCK*4/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES LQFP-144 (Top view) 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 PA23/WRHH Vcc Vss Vcc Vss Vss PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 5 5 5 2 PA22/WRHL PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 Notes : 1. Fixed as Vcc in the masked ROM version and ROM less version, and used as an FWP input pin in the F-ZTAT version (used as an FWE in programmer mode). 2. Used for E10A debugging mode. Used as an ASEBRKAK output pin in the F-ZTAT version. Refer to the table below for processing the ASEBRKAK pin. 3. Used for E10A debugging mode. Fixed to Vss in the masked ROM version and ROM less version, or used as a DBGMD input pin in the F-ZTAT version. 4. Valid only in the F-ZTAT version (invalid only in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). 5. Valid only in the masked ROM version and ROM less version (invalid in the F-ZTAT version and emulator). ASEBRKAK Processing Product type Masked ROM version and ROM less version F-ZTAT version (when using E10A) F-ZTAT version (Not when using E10A) Processing Pull-up Yes Yes Yes NC No No No Fixed to Vcc Yes No Yes Fixed to Vss Yes No Yes Pull-down Yes No Yes Figure 1.4 SH7145 Pin Arrangement Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 7 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* ASEBRKAK* PA21/CS5* PA20/CS4* 5 1. Overview 1.4 Type Power Supply Pin Functions Symbol VCC I/O Input Name Power supply Function Power supply pins. Connect all these pins to the system power supply. The chip does not operate when some of these pins are opened. Ground pins. Connect all these pins to the system power supply (0 V). The chip does not operate when some of these pins are opened. Power supply pin for supplying power to on-chip PLL. On-chip PLL oscillator ground pin. External capacitance pin for an on-chip PLL oscillator. VSS Input Ground Clock PLLVCC PLLVSS PLLCAP EXTAL Input Input Input Input Power supply for PLL Ground for PLL Capacitance for PLL External clock For connection to a crystal resonator. (An external clock can be supplied from the EXTAL pin.) For examples of crystal resonator connection and external clock input, see section 4, Clock Pulse Generator. Crystal For connection to a crystal resonator. For examples of crystal resonator connection and external clock input, see section 4, Clock Pulse Generator. Supplies the system clock to external devices. Set the operating mode. Inputs at these pins should not be changed during operation. Pin for the flash memory. This pin is only used in the F-ZTAT version. Programming or erasing of flash memory can be protected. This pin is used as Vcc in the masked ROM version and ROM less version. XTAL Input CK Operating MD3 to MD0 mode control FWP Output Input System clock output Set the mode Input Protection against write operation into flash memory Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 8 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Type System control Symbol RES MRES WDTOVF I/O Input Input Output Name Power on reset Manual reset Watchdog timer overflow Function When this pin is driven low, the chip becomes to power on reset state. When this pin is driven low, the chip becomes to manual reset state. Output signal for the watchdog timer overflow. If this pin needs to be pulled-down, the resistance value must be 1 MΩ or higher. External device can request the release of the bus mastership by setting this pin low. Shows that the bus mastership has been released for the external device. The device that had issued the BREQ signal can know that bus mastership has been released for itself by receiving the BACK signal. BREQ BACK Input Output Bus request Bus acknowledge Interrupts NMI Input Non-maskable Non-maskable interrupt pin. If this pin is interrupt not used, it should be fixed high or low. Interrupt request 7 to 0 These pins request a maskable interrupt. One of the level input or edge input can be selected In case of the edge input, one of the rising edge, falling edge, or both can be selected. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Input IRQOUT Output Interrupt Shows that an interrupt cause has request output occurred. The interrupt cause can be recognized even in the bus release state. Address bus Data bus Output the address. SH7144: Bi-directional 16-bit bus SH7145: Bi-directional 32-bit bus Address bus A21 to A0 Data bus SH7144: D15 to D0 SH7145: D31 to D0 Output Input/ Output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 9 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Type Bus control Symbol CS3 to CS0 I/O Output Name Chip select 3 to 0 Chip select 5, 4 Function Chip select signal for external memory or devices. CS5, CS4 Output (SH7145 masked ROM version and ROM less version only) CS7, CS6 Output (masked ROM version and ROM less version only) RD WRHH (SH7145 only) WRHL (SH7145 only) WRH WRL WAIT Direct memory access controller (DMAC) DREQ0, DREQ1 DRAK0, DRAK1 DACK0, DACK1 Output Output Input Input Output Output Output Output Chip select 7, 6 Read Write HH Shows reading from external devices. Shows writing into the HH 8 bits (bits 31 to 24) of the external data. Shows writing into the HL 8 bits (bits 23 to 16) of the external data. Shows writing into the upper 8 bits (bits 15 to 8) of the external data. Shows writing into the lower 8 bits (bit7 to bit0) of the external data. Inserts the wait cycles into the bus cycle when accessing the external spaces. DMA request input pins from an external device. Write HL Write upper half Write lower half Wait DMA transfer request DREQ request Outputs an acknowledge signal to the acknowledge external device that has input a DMA transfer request signal. DMA transfer strobe Outputs a strobe to the I/O of the external device that has input a DMA transfer request signal. Output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 10 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Type Multifunction timer-pulse unit (MTU) Symbol TCLKA to TCLKD TIOC0A to TIOC0D I/O Input Name Function External clock These pins input an external clock. input for MTU timer MTU input The TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 input capture capture/output input/output compare output/PWM output compare pins. (channel 0) MTU input The TGRA_1 to TGRB_1 input capture capture/output input/output compare output/PWM output compare pins. (channel 1) MTU input The TGRA_2 to TGRB_2 input capture capture/output input/output compare output/PWM output compare pins. (channel 2) MTU input The TGRA_3 to TGRD_3 input capture capture/output input/output compare output/PWM output compare pins. (channel 3) MTU input The TGRA_4 to TGRB_4 input capture capture/output input/output compare output/PWM output compare pins. (channel 4) Transmitted data Data output pins. Input/ Output TIOC1A, TIOC1B Input/ Output TIOC2A, TIOC2B Input/ Output TIOC3A to TIOC3D Input/ Output TIOC4A to TIOC4D Input/ Output Serial TXD3 to communication TXD0 interface (SCI) RXD3 to RXD0 SCK3 to SCK0 I2C bus interface (option) SCL0 Output Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Received data Data input pins. Serial clock I2C clock input/ output Clock input/output pins. I2C bus clock input/output pins, which drive a bus. Output a clock in the NMOS open-drain method. I2C bus data input/output pins, which drive a bus. Output data in the NMOS open-drain method. SDA0 Input/ Output I2C data input/ output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 11 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Type Symbol I/O Input Name Port output control Analog input pins Function Input pins for the signal to request the output pins of MTU waveforms to become high impedance state. Analog input pins. Output control POE3 to for MTU POE0 A/D converter AN7 to AN0 Input ADTRG Input Input of trigger Pin for input of an external trigger to start for A/D A/D conversion conversion Analog reference power supply Analog power supply Analog reference power supply pin, (In SH7144, this pin is internally connected to the AVcc pin). Power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to the system power supply (+3.3 V). AVref (SH7145 only) AVCC Input Input AVSS Input Analog ground The ground pin for the A/D converter. Connect this pin to the system power supply (0 V). General purpose port SH7144: 16-bit general purpose input/output pins. SH7145: 24-bit general purpose input/output pins. General purpose port General purpose port General purpose port 10-bit general purpose input/output pins. 16-bit general purpose input/output pins. SH7144: 16-bit general purpose input/output pins. SH7145: 32-bit general purpose input/output pins. I/O port SH7144 Input/ PA15 to PA0 Output SH7145 PA23 to PA0 PB9 to PB0 Input/ Output PC15 to PC0 SH7144: PD15 to PD0 SH7145: PD31 to PD0 PE15 to PE0 Input/ Output PF7 to PF0 Input Input/ Output Input/ Output General purpose port General purpose port 16-bit general purpose input/output pins. 8-bit general purpose input pins. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 12 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Type User debugging interface (H-UDI) (flash version only) Symbol TCK TMS TDI TDO TRST I/O Input Input Input Output Input Name Test clock Test mode select Test data input Test data output Test reset AUD data Function Test clock input pin. Test mode select signal input pin. Instruction/data serial input pin. Instruction/data serial output pin. Initialization signal input pin. Branch trace mode: Branch destination address output pins. RAM monitor mode: Monitor address input/data input/output pins. AUD reset AUD mode Reset signal input pin. Mode select signal input pin. Branch trace mode: Low RAM monitor mode: High AUDCK Input/ Output AUD clock Branch trace mode: Synchronous clock output pin. RAM monitor mode: Synchronous clock input pin. AUDSYNC Input/ Output AUD synchronization signal Break mode acknowledge Branch trace mode: Data start position identification signal output pin. RAM monitor mode: Data start position identification signal input pin. Shows that E10A has entered to the break mode. Refer to “SH7144F E10A Emulator User’s Manual” for the detail of the connection to E10A. Enables the functions of E10A emulator. Input low to the pin in normal operation (other than the debug mode). In debug mode, input high to the pin on the user board. Refer to “SH7144F E10A Emulator User’s Manual” for the detail of the connection to E10A. Advanced AUDATA3 to Input/ user debugger AUDATA0 Output (AUD) (flash version only) AUDRST Input AUDMD Input E10 interface (flash version only) ASEBRKAK Output DBGMD Input Debug mode [Caution] Do not pull-down the WDTOVF pin. If this pin needs to be pulled-down, however, the resistor value must be 1 MΩ or higher. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 13 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 1. Overview Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 14 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Section 2 CPU 2.1 Features • General-register architecture ⎯ Sixteen 32-bit general registers • Sixty-two basic instructions • Eleven addressing modes ⎯ Register direct [Rn] ⎯ Register indirect [@Rn] ⎯ Register indirect with post-increment [@Rn+] ⎯ Register indirect with pre-decrement [@-Rn] ⎯ Register indirect with displacement [@disp:4,Rn] ⎯ Register indirect with index [@R0, Rn] ⎯ GBR indirect with displacement [@disp:8,GBR] ⎯ GBR indirect with index [@R0,GBR] ⎯ Program-counter relative with displacement [@disp:8,PC] ⎯ Program-counter relative [disp:8/disp:12/Rn] ⎯ Immediate [#imm:8] 2.2 Register Configuration The register set consists of sixteen 32-bit general registers, three 32-bit control registers, and four 32-bit system registers. 2.2.1 General Registers (Rn) The sixteen 32-bit general registers (Rn) are numbered R0 to R15. General registers are used for data processing and address calculation. R0 is also used as an index register. Several instructions have R0 fixed as their only usable register. R15 is used as the hardware stack pointer (SP). Saving and recovering the status register (SR) and program counter (PC) in exception processing is accomplished by referencing the stack using R15. CPUS201A_020020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 15 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU General registers (Rn) 31 R0*1 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15, SP (hardware stack pointer)*2 0 Status register (SR) 31 9 8765 43 210 M Q I3 I2 I1 I0 ST Global base register (GBR) 31 GBR 0 Vector base register (VBR) 31 VBR 0 Multiply-accumulate register (MAC) 31 MACH MACL 0 Procedure register 31 PR 0 Program counter (PC) 31 PC 0 Notes: 1. R0 functions as an index register in the indirect indexed register addressing mode and indirect indexed GBR addressing mode. In some instructions, R0 functions as a fixed source register or destination register. 2. R15 functions as a hardware stack pointer (SP) during exception processing. Figure 2.1 CPU Internal Registers Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 16 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.2.2 Control Registers The control registers consist of three 32-bit registers: status register (SR), global base register (GBR), and vector base register (VBR). The status register indicates processing states. The global base register functions as a base address for the indirect GBR addressing mode to transfer data to the registers of on-chip peripheral modules. The vector base register functions as the base address of the exception processing vector area (including interrupts). Status Register (SR): Bit 31 to 10 9 8 Bit Name — Initial Value All 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. M Q Undefined Undefined R/W R/W Used by the DIV0U, DIV0S, and DIV1 instructions. Used by the DIV0U, DIV0S, and DIV1 instructions. Bit 7 6 5 4 3, 2 Bit Name I3 I2 I1 I0 — Initial Value 1 1 1 1 All 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Interrupt mask bits. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 1 0 S T Undefined Undefined R/W R/W S bit Used by the MAC instruction. T bit The MOVT, CMP/cond, TAS, TST, BT (BT/S), BF (BF/S), SETT, and CLRT instructions use the T bit to indicate true (1) or false (0). The ADDV, ADDC, SUBV, SUBC, DIV0U, DIV0S, DIV1, NEGC, SHAR, SHAL, SHLR, SHLL, ROTR, ROTL, ROTCR, and ROTCL instructions also use the T bit to indicate carry/borrow or overflow/underflow. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 17 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Global Base Register (GBR): Indicates the base address of the indirect GBR addressing mode. The indirect GBR addressing mode is used in data transfer for on-chip peripheral modules register areas and in logic operations. Vector Base Register (VBR): Indicates the base address of the exception processing vector area. 2.2.3 System Registers System registers consist of four 32-bit registers: high and low multiply and accumulate registers (MACH and MACL), the procedure register (PR), and the program counter (PC). Multiply-and-Accumulate Registers (MAC): Registers to store the results of multiply-andaccumulate operations. Procedure Register (PR): Registers to store the return address from a subroutine procedure. Program Counter (PC): Registers to indicate the sum of current instruction addresses and four, that is, the address of the second instruction after the current instruction. 2.2.4 Initial Values of Registers Table 2.1 lists the values of the registers after reset. Table 2.1 Initial Values of Registers Register R0 to R14 R15 (SP) Control registers SR GBR VBR System registers MACH, MACL, PR PC Initial Value Undefined Value of the stack pointer in the vector address table Bits I3 to I0 are 1111 (H'F), reserved bits are 0, and other bits are undefined Undefined H'00000000 Undefined Value of the program counter in the vector address table Classification General registers Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 18 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.3 2.3.1 Data Formats Data Format in Registers Register operands are always longwords (32 bits). If the size of memory operand is a byte (8 bits) or a word (16 bits), it is changed into a longword by expanding the sign-part when loaded into a register. 31 Longword 0 Figure 2.2 Data Format in Registers 2.3.2 Data Formats in Memory Memory data formats are classified into bytes, words, and longwords. Byte data can be accessed from any address. Locate, however, word data at an address 2n, longword data at 4n. Otherwise, an address error will occur if an attempt is made to access word data starting from an address other than 2n or longword data starting from an address other than 4n. In such cases, the data accessed cannot be guaranteed. The hardware stack area, pointed by the hardware stack pointer (SP, R15), uses only longword data starting from address 4n because this area holds the program counter and status register. Address m + 1 Address m 31 Byte Address 2n Address 4n Word Longword 23 Byte Address m + 3 Address m + 2 15 Byte Word 7 Byte 0 Figure 2.3 Data Formats in Memory Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 19 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.3.3 Immediate Data Format Byte (8 bit) immediate data resides in an instruction code. Immediate data accessed by the MOV, ADD, and CMP/EQ instructions is sign-extended and handled in registers as longword data. Immediate data accessed by the TST, AND, OR, and XOR instructions is zero-extended and handled as longword data. Consequently, AND instructions with immediate data always clear the upper 24 bits of the destination register. Word or longword immediate data is not located in the instruction code, but instead is stored in a memory table. An immediate data transfer instruction (MOV) accesses the memory table using the PC relative addressing mode with displacement. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 20 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.4 2.4.1 Instruction Features RISC-Type Instruction Set All instructions are RISC type. This section details their functions. 16-Bit Fixed Length: All instructions are 16 bits long, increasing program code efficiency. One Instruction per State: The microcomputer can execute basic instructions in one state using the pipeline system. One state is 25 ns at 40 MHz. Data Length: Longword is the standard data length for all operations. Memory can be accessed in bytes, words, or longwords. Byte or word data accessed from memory is sign-extended and handled as longword data. Immediate data is sign-extended for arithmetic operations or zeroextended for logic operations. It also is handled as longword data. Table 2.2 Sign Extension of Word Data Description Example of Conventional CPU ADD.W #H'1234,R0 CPU of This LSI MOV.W ADD .DATA.W @(disp,PC),R1 Data is sign-extended to 32 bits, and R1 becomes R1,R0 H'00001234. It is next ......... operated upon by an ADD instruction. H'1234 Note: @(disp, PC) accesses the immediate data. Load-Store Architecture: Basic operations are executed between registers. For operations that involve memory access, data is loaded to the registers and executed (load-store architecture). Instructions such as AND that manipulate bits, however, are executed directly in memory. Delayed Branch Instructions: Unconditional branch instructions are delayed branch instructions. With a delayed branch instruction, the branch is taken after execution of the instruction following the delayed branch instruction. This reduces the disturbance of the pipeline control in case of branch instructions. There are two types of conditional branch instructions: delayed branch instructions and ordinary branch instructions. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 21 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Table 2.3 Delayed Branch Instructions Description Executes the ADD before branching to TRGET. Example of Conventional CPU ADD.W BRA R1,R0 TRGET CPU of This LSI BRA ADD TRGET R1,R0 Multiply/Multiply-and-Accumulate Operations: 16-bit × 16-bit → 32-bit multiply operations are executed in one and two states. 16-bit × 16-bit + 64-bit → 64-bit multiply-and-accumulate operations are executed in two and three states. 32-bit × 32-bit → 64-bit multiply and 32-bit × 32bit + 64-bit → 64-bit multiply-and-accumulate operations are executed in two to four states. T Bit: The T bit in the status register changes according to the result of the comparison. Whether a conditional branch is taken or not taken depends upon the T bit condition (true/false). The number of instructions that change the T bit is kept to a minimum to improve the processing speed. Table 2.4 T Bit Description T bit is set when R0 ≥ R1. The program branches to TRGET0 when R0 ≥ R1 and to TRGET1 when R0 < R1. T bit is not changed by ADD. T bit is set when R0 = 0. The program branches if R0 = 0. Example of Conventional CPU CMP.W BGE BLT SUB.W BEQ R1,R0 TRGET0 TRGET1 #1,R0 TRGET CPU of This LSI CMP/GE BT BF ADD CMP/EQ BT R1,R0 TRGET0 TRGET1 #−1,R0 #0,R0 TRGET Immediate Data: Byte (8-bit) immediate data is located in an instruction code. Word or longword immediate data is not located in instruction codes but in a memory table. An immediate data transfer instruction (MOV) accesses the memory table using the PC relative addressing mode with displacement. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 22 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Table 2.5 Immediate Data Accessing CPU of This LSI MOV MOV.W #H'12,R0 @(disp,PC),R0 ................. .DATA.W H'1234 @(disp,PC),R0 ................. .DATA.L H'12345678 MOV.L #H'12345678,R0 Example of Conventional CPU MOV.B MOV.W #H'12,R0 #H'1234,R0 Classification 8-bit immediate 16-bit immediate 32-bit immediate MOV.L Note: @(disp, PC) accesses the immediate data. Absolute Address: When data is accessed by absolute address, the value in the absolute address is placed in the memory table in advance. That value is transferred to the register by loading the immediate data during the execution of the instruction, and the data is accessed in the indirect register addressing mode. Table 2.6 Absolute Address Accessing CPU of This LSI MOV.L MOV.B @(disp,PC),R1 @R1,R0 .................. .DATA.L H'12345678 Note: @(disp,PC) accesses the immediate data. Example of Conventional CPU MOV.B @H'12345678,R0 Classification Absolute address 16-Bit/32-Bit Displacement: When data is accessed by 16-bit or 32-bit displacement, the displacement value is placed in the memory table in advance. That value is transferred to the register by loading the immediate data during the execution of the instruction, and the data is accessed in the indirect indexed register addressing mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 23 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Table 2.7 Displacement Accessing CPU of This LSI MOV.W MOV.W @(disp,PC),R0 @(R0,R1),R2 .................. .DATA.W H'1234 Example of Conventional CPU MOV.W @(H'1234,R1),R2 Classification 16-bit displacement Note: @(disp,PC) accesses the immediate data. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 24 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.4.2 Addressing Modes Table 2.8 describes addressing modes and effective address calculation. Table 2.8 Addressing Mode Direct register addressing Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Rn The effective address is register Rn. (The operand is the contents of register Rn.) Equation — Indirect register @Rn addressing Post-increment @Rn+ indirect register addressing The effective address is the contents of register Rn. Rn Rn Rn The effective address is the contents of register Rn. A constant is added to the content of Rn after the instruction is executed. 1 is added for a byte operation, 2 for a word operation, and 4 for a longword operation. Rn Rn + 1/2/4 1/2/4 + Rn Rn (After the instruction executes) Byte: Rn + 1 → Rn Word: Rn + 2 → Rn Longword: Rn + 4 → Rn Pre-decrement @-Rn indirect register addressing The effective address is the value obtained by subtracting a constant from Rn. 1 is subtracted for a byte operation, 2 for a word operation, and 4 for a longword operation. Rn Rn – 1/2/4 1/2/4 – Rn – 1/2/4 Byte: Rn – 1 → Rn Word: Rn – 2 → Rn Longword: Rn – 4 → Rn (Instruction is executed with Rn after this calculation) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 25 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Addressing Mode Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Equation Byte: Rn + disp Word: Rn + disp × 2 Longword: Rn + disp × 4 Indirect register @(disp:4, The effective address is the sum of Rn and a 4-bit addressing with Rn) displacement (disp). The value of disp is zerodisplacement extended, and remains unchanged for a byte operation, is doubled for a word operation, and is quadrupled for a longword operation. Rn disp (zero-extended) × 1/2/4 + Rn + disp × 1/2/4 Indirect indexed @(R0, Rn) The effective address is the sum of Rn and R0. register Rn addressing + R0 Rn + R0 Rn + R0 Indirect GBR @(disp:8, The effective address is the sum of GBR value and addressing with GBR) an 8-bit displacement (disp). The value of disp is displacement zero-extended, and remains unchanged for a byte operation, is doubled for a word operation, and is quadrupled for a longword operation. GBR disp (zero-extended) × 1/2/4 + GBR + disp × 1/2/4 Byte: GBR + disp Word: GBR + disp × 2 Longword: GBR + disp × 4 Indirect indexed @(R0, GBR GBR) addressing The effective address is the sum of GBR value and GBR + R0 R0. GBR + R0 GBR + R0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 26 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Addressing Mode Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Equation Word: PC + disp × 2 Longword: PC & H'FFFFFFFC + disp × 4 Indirect PC @(disp:8, The effective address is the sum of PC value and addressing with PC) an 8-bit displacement (disp). The value of disp is displacement zero-extended, and is doubled for a word operation, and quadrupled for a longword operation. For a longword operation, the lowest two bits of the PC value are masked. PC & H'FFFFFFFC disp (zero-extended) × 2/4 (for longword) PC + disp × 2 or PC & H'FFFFFFFC + disp × 4 + PC relative addressing disp:8 The effective address is the sum of PC value and the value that is obtained by doubling the signextended 8-bit displacement (disp). PC disp (sign-extended) × 2 + PC + disp × 2 PC + disp × 2 disp:12 The effective address is the sum of PC value and the value that is obtained by doubling the signextended 12-bit displacement (disp). PC disp (sign-extended) × 2 + PC + disp × 2 PC + disp × 2 Rn The effective address is the sum of the register PC and Rn. PC + Rn PC + Rn PC + Rn Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 27 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Addressing Mode Immediate addressing Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation #imm:8 #imm:8 #imm:8 The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the TST, AND, OR, and XOR instructions is zero-extended. The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the MOV, ADD, and CMP/EQ instructions is sign-extended. The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the TRAPA instruction is zero-extended and then quadrupled. Equation — — — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 28 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.4.3 Instruction Format The instruction formats and the meaning of source and destination operand are described below. The meaning of the operand depends on the instruction code. The symbols used are as follows: • • • • • xxxx: Instruction code mmmm: Source register nnnn: Destination register iiii: Immediate data dddd: Displacement Instruction Formats Source Operand — 0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Table 2.9 Instruction Formats 0 format 15 Destination Operand — Example NOP n format 15 xxxx nnnn xxxx xxxx 0 — Control register or system register Control register or system register nnnn: Direct register nnnn: Direct register nnnn: Indirect predecrement register Control register or system register Control register or system register — MOVT STS Rn MACH,Rn STC.L SR,@-Rn LDC Rm,SR m format 15 xxxx mmmm xxxx xxxx 0 mmmm: Direct register mmmm: Indirect post-increment register mmmm: Indirect register LDC.L @Rm+,SR JMP BRAF @Rm Rm mmmm: PC relative — using Rm Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 29 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Source Operand 0 xxxx nnnn mmmm xxxx Instruction Formats nm format 15 Destination Operand nnnn: Direct register nnnn: Indirect register MACH, MACL Example ADD Rm,Rn mmmm: Direct register mmmm: Direct register mmmm: Indirect post-increment register (multiplyand-accumulate) nnnn*: Indirect post-increment register (multiplyand-accumulate) mmmm: Indirect post-increment register mmmm: Direct register mmmm: Direct register MOV.L Rm,@Rn MAC.W @Rm+,@Rn+ nnnn: Direct register nnnn: Indirect predecrement register nnnn: Indirect indexed register MOV.L @Rm+,Rn MOV.L Rm,@-Rn MOV.L Rm,@(R0,Rn) MOV.B @(disp,Rn),R0 md format 15 xxxx xxxx mmmm dddd 0 mmmmdddd: R0 (Direct Indirect register with register) displacement nd4 format 15 xxxx xxxx nnnn dddd 0 R0 (Direct register) nnnndddd: MOV.B Indirect register with R0,@(disp,Rn) displacement mmmm: Direct register nnnndddd: Indirect register with displacement MOV.L Rm,@(disp,Rn) MOV.L @(disp,Rm),Rn nmd format 15 xxxx nnnn mmmm dddd 0 mmmmdddd: nnnn: Direct Indirect register with register displacement Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 30 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Source Operand 0 xxxx xxxx dddd dddd Instruction Formats d format 15 Destination Operand Example dddddddd: Indirect GBR with displacement R0 (Direct register) MOV.L @(disp,GBR),R0 MOV.L R0,@(disp,GBR) R0 (Direct register) dddddddd: Indirect GBR with displacement dddddddd: PC relative with displacement — d12 format 15 xxxx dddd dddd dddd 0 R0 (Direct register) MOVA @(disp,PC),R0 dddddddd: PC relative BF label — dddddddddddd: PC BRA label relative (label = disp + PC) nnnn: Direct register Indirect indexed GBR MOV.L @(disp,PC),Rn AND.B #imm,@(R0,GBR) #imm,R0 #imm #imm,Rn nd8 format 15 xxxx nnnn dddd dddd 0 dddddddd: PC relative with displacement iiiiiiii: Immediate i format 15 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii 0 iiiiiiii: Immediate iiiiiiii: Immediate R0 (Direct register) AND — nnnn: Direct register TRAPA ADD ni format 15 xxxx nnnn iiii iiii 0 iiiiiiii: Immediate Note: In multiply-and-accumulate instructions, nnnn is the source register. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 31 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.5 2.5.1 Instruction Set Instruction Set by Classification Table 2.10 lists the instructions according to their classification. Table 2.10 Classification of Instructions Classification Types Data transfer 5 Operation Code Function MOV Data transfer, immediate data transfer, peripheral module data transfer, structure data transfer Effective address transfer T bit transfer Swap of upper and lower bytes Extraction of the middle of registers connected Binary addition Binary addition with carry Binary addition with overflow check 33 No. of Instructions 39 MOVA MOVT SWAP XTRCT Arithmetic operations 21 ADD ADDC ADDV CMP/cond Comparison DIV1 DIV0S DIV0U DMULS DMULU DT EXTS EXTU MAC MUL MULS MULU NEG NEGC SUB Division Initialization of signed division Initialization of unsigned division Signed double-length multiplication Unsigned double-length multiplication Decrement and test Sign extension Zero extension Multiply-and-accumulate, double-length multiply-and-accumulate operation Double-length multiply operation Signed multiplication Unsigned multiplication Negation Negation with borrow Binary subtraction Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 32 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Operation Code Function SUBC SUBV 6 AND NOT OR TAS TST XOR Shift 10 ROTL ROTR ROTCL ROTCR SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLLn SHLR SHLRn Branch 9 BF BT BRA BRAF BSR BSRF JMP JSR RTS Binary subtraction with borrow Binary subtraction with underflow Logical AND Bit inversion Logical OR Memory test and bit set Logical AND and T bit set Exclusive OR One-bit left rotation One-bit right rotation One-bit left rotation with T bit One-bit right rotation with T bit One-bit arithmetic left shift One-bit arithmetic right shift One-bit logical left shift n-bit logical left shift One-bit logical right shift n-bit logical right shift Conditional branch, conditional branch with delay (Branch when T = 0) Conditional branch, conditional branch with delay (Branch when T = 1) Unconditional branch Unconditional branch Branch to subroutine procedure Branch to subroutine procedure Unconditional branch Branch to subroutine procedure Return from subroutine procedure 11 14 14 No. of Instructions 33 Classification Types Arithmetic operations Logic operations Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 33 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Operation Code Function CLRT CLRMAC LDC LDS NOP RTE SETT SLEEP STC STS TRAPA Total: 62 T bit clear MAC register clear Load to control register Load to system register No operation Return from exception processing T bit set Transition to power-down mode Store control register data Store system register data Trap exception handling 142 No. of Instructions 31 Classification Types System control 11 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 34 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU The table below shows the format of instruction codes, operation, and execution states. They are described by using this format according to their classification. • Instruction Code Format Item Instruction Format Described in mnemonic. OP.Sz SRC,DEST Explanation OP: Operation code Sz: Size SRC: Source DEST: Destination Rm: Source register Rn: Destination register imm: Immediate data 2 disp: Displacement* Instruction code Outline of the Operation Described in MSB ↔ mmmm: Source register nnnn: Destination register LSB order 0000: R0 0001: R1 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ 1111: R15 iiii: Immediate data dddd: Displacement →, ← Direction of transfer (xx) M/Q/T & | ^ ~ n Memory operand Flag bits in the SR Logical AND of each bit Logical OR of each bit Exclusive OR of each bit Logical NOT of each bit n-bit left shift n-bit right shift Value when no wait states are inserted*1 Value of T bit after instruction is executed. An em-dash (—) in the column means no change. Execution states T bit — — Notes: 1. Instruction execution states: The execution states shown in the table are minimums. The actual number of states may be increased when (1) contention occurs between instruction fetches and data access, or (2) when the destination register of the load instruction (memory → register) equals to the register used by the next instruction. 2. Depending on the operand size, displacement is scaled by ×1, ×2, or ×4. For details, refer the SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Software Manual. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 35 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • Data Transfer Instructions Instruction MOV MOV.W MOV.L MOV MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L #imm,Rn @(disp,PC),Rn @(disp,PC),Rn Rm,Rn Rm,@Rn Rm,@Rn Rm,@Rn @Rm,Rn @Rm,Rn @Rm,Rn Rm,@–Rn Rm,@–Rn Rm,@–Rn @Rm+,Rn @Rm+,Rn @Rm+,Rn R0,@(disp,Rn) R0,@(disp,Rn) Rm,@(disp,Rn) @(disp,Rm),R0 @(disp,Rm),R0 @(disp,Rm),Rn Rm,@(R0,Rn) Rm,@(R0,Rn) Rm,@(R0,Rn) Instruction Code 1110nnnniiiiiiii 1001nnnndddddddd 1101nnnndddddddd 0110nnnnmmmm0011 0010nnnnmmmm0000 0010nnnnmmmm0001 0010nnnnmmmm0010 0110nnnnmmmm0000 0110nnnnmmmm0001 0110nnnnmmmm0010 0010nnnnmmmm0100 0010nnnnmmmm0101 0010nnnnmmmm0110 0110nnnnmmmm0100 0110nnnnmmmm0101 0110nnnnmmmm0110 10000000nnnndddd 10000001nnnndddd 0001nnnnmmmmdddd 10000100mmmmdddd 10000101mmmmdddd 0101nnnnmmmmdddd 0000nnnnmmmm0100 0000nnnnmmmm0101 0000nnnnmmmm0110 Operation Execution T States Bit — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — #imm → Sign extension → 1 Rn (disp × 2 + PC) → Sign extension → Rn (disp × 4 + PC) → Rn Rm → Rn Rm → (Rn) Rm → (Rn) Rm → (Rn) 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Rm) → Sign extension → 1 Rn (Rm) → Sign extension → 1 Rn (Rm) → Rn Rn–1 → Rn, Rm → (Rn) Rn–2 → Rn, Rm → (Rn) Rn–4 → Rn, Rm → (Rn) 1 1 1 1 (Rm) → Sign extension → 1 Rn,Rm + 1 → Rm (Rm) → Sign extension → 1 Rn,Rm + 2 → Rm (Rm) → Rn,Rm + 4 → Rm 1 R0 → (disp + Rn) R0 → (disp × 2 + Rn) Rm → (disp × 4 + Rn) (disp + Rm) → Sign extension → R0 (disp × 2 + Rm) → Sign extension → R0 (disp × 4 + Rm) → Rn Rm → (R0 + Rn) Rm → (R0 + Rn) Rm → (R0 + Rn) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 36 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Execution T States Bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Instruction MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOV.B MOV.W MOV.L MOVA MOVT @(R0,Rm),Rn @(R0,Rm),Rn @(R0,Rm),Rn Instruction Code 0000nnnnmmmm1100 0000nnnnmmmm1101 0000nnnnmmmm1110 Operation (R0 + Rm) → Sign extension → Rn (R0 + Rm) → Sign extension → Rn (R0 + Rm) → Rn R0 → (disp + GBR) R0 → (disp × 2 + GBR) R0 → (disp × 4 + GBR) (disp + GBR) → Sign extension → R0 (disp × 2 + GBR) → Sign extension → R0 (disp × 4 + GBR) → R0 disp × 4 + PC → R0 T → Rn Rm → Swap bottom two bytes → Rn Rm → Swap two consecutive words → Rn Rm: Middle 32 bits of Rn → Rn R0,@(disp,GBR) 11000000dddddddd R0,@(disp,GBR) 11000001dddddddd R0,@(disp,GBR) 11000010dddddddd @(disp,GBR),R0 11000100dddddddd @(disp,GBR),R0 11000101dddddddd @(disp,GBR),R0 11000110dddddddd @(disp,PC),R0 Rn 11000111dddddddd 0000nnnn00101001 0110nnnnmmmm1000 0110nnnnmmmm1001 0010nnnnmmmm1101 SWAP.B Rm,Rn SWAP.W Rm,Rn XTRCT Rm,Rn Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 37 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • Arithmetic Operation Instructions Instruction ADD ADD ADDC ADDV CMP/EQ CMP/EQ CMP/HS CMP/GE CMP/HI CMP/GT CMP/PL CMP/PZ Rm,Rn Instruction Code 0011nnnnmmmm1100 Operation Rn + Rm → Rn Rn + imm → Rn Execution States T Bit 1 1 — — Carry Overflow Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Comparison result Calculation result Calculation result 0 — #imm,Rn 0111nnnniiiiiiii Rm,Rn Rm,Rn 0011nnnnmmmm1110 0011nnnnmmmm1111 Rn + Rm + T → Rn, Carry 1 →T Rn + Rm → Rn, Overflow →T If R0 = imm, 1 → T If Rn = Rm, 1 → T If Rn≥Rm with unsigned data, 1 → T If Rn ≥ Rm with signed data, 1 → T If Rn > Rm with unsigned data, 1 → T If Rn > Rm with signed data, 1 → T If Rn > 0, 1 → T If Rn ≥ 0, 1 → T If Rn and Rm have an equivalent byte, 1 → T Single-step division (Rn ÷ Rm) MSB of Rn → Q, MSB of Rm → M, M ^ Q → T 0 → M/Q/T Signed operation of Rn × Rm → MACH, MACL 32 × 32 → 64 bits 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 to 4* #imm,R0 10001000iiiiiiii Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rn Rn 0011nnnnmmmm0000 0011nnnnmmmm0010 0011nnnnmmmm0011 0011nnnnmmmm0110 0011nnnnmmmm0111 0100nnnn00010101 0100nnnn00010001 0010nnnnmmmm1100 0011nnnnmmmm0100 0010nnnnmmmm0111 0000000000011001 0011nnnnmmmm1101 CMP/STR Rm,Rn DIV1 DIV0S DIV0U DMULS.L Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn DMULU.L Rm,Rn 0011nnnnmmmm0101 Unsigned operation of 2 to 4* Rn × Rm → MACH, MACL 32 × 32 → 64 bits — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 38 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Execution States T Bit Comparison result — — — — Instruction DT Rn Instruction Code 0100nnnn00010000 Operation Rn – 1 → Rn, when Rn 1 is 0, 1 → T. When Rn is nonzero, 0 → T Byte in Rm is signextended → Rn Word in Rm is signextended → Rn Byte in Rm is zeroextended → Rn Word in Rm is zeroextended → Rn Signed operation of (Rn) × (Rm) + MAC → MAC 32 × 32 + 64 → 64 bits Signed operation of (Rn) × (Rm) + MAC → MAC 16 × 16 + 64 → 64 bits Rn × Rm → MACL, 32 × 32 → 32 bits 1 1 1 1 EXTS.B EXTS.W EXTU.B EXTU.W MAC.L Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn 0110nnnnmmmm1110 0110nnnnmmmm1111 0110nnnnmmmm1100 0110nnnnmmmm1101 @Rm+,@Rn+ 0000nnnnmmmm1111 3/(2 to 4)* — MAC.W @Rm+,@Rn+ 0100nnnnmmmm1111 3/(2)* — MUL.L MULS.W Rm,Rn Rm,Rn 0000nnnnmmmm0111 0010nnnnmmmm1111 2 to 4* — — Signed operation of 1 to 3* Rn × Rm → MACL 16 × 16 → 32 bits Unsigned operation of 1 to 3* Rn × Rm → MACL 16 × 16 → 32 bits 0 – Rm → Rn 0 – Rm – T → Rn, Borrow → T Rn – Rm → Rn Rn – Rm – T → Rn, Borrow → T Rn – Rm → Rn, Underflow → T 1 1 1 1 1 MULU.W Rm,Rn 0010nnnnmmmm1110 — NEG NEGC SUB SUBC SUBV Note: * Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn Rm,Rn 0110nnnnmmmm1011 0110nnnnmmmm1010 0011nnnnmmmm1000 0011nnnnmmmm1010 0011nnnnmmmm1011 — Borrow — Borrow Overflow The normal number of execution states is shown. (The number in parentheses is the number of states when there is contention with the preceding or following instructions.) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 39 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • Logic Operation Instructions Instruction AND AND AND.B NOT OR OR OR.B TAS.B TST TST TST.B XOR XOR XOR.B Rm,Rn #imm,R0 Instruction Code 0010nnnnmmmm1001 11001001iiiiiiii Operation Rn & Rm → Rn R0 & imm → R0 (R0 + GBR) & imm → (R0 + GBR) ~Rm → Rn Rn | Rm → Rn R0 | imm → R0 (R0 + GBR) | imm → (R0 + GBR) Execution States T Bit 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 — — — — — — — Test result Test result Test result Test result — — — #imm,@(R0,GBR) 11001101iiiiiiii Rm,Rn Rm,Rn #imm,R0 0110nnnnmmmm0111 0010nnnnmmmm1011 11001011iiiiiiii #imm,@(R0,GBR) 11001111iiiiiiii @Rn Rm,Rn #imm,R0 0100nnnn00011011 0010nnnnmmmm1000 11001000iiiiiiii If (Rn) is 0, 1 → T; 1 → 4 MSB of (Rn) Rn & Rm; if the result is 1 0, 1 → T R0 & imm; if the result is 0, 1 → T (R0 + GBR) & imm; if the result is 0, 1 → T Rn ^ Rm → Rn R0 ^ imm → R0 (R0 + GBR) ^ imm → (R0 + GBR) 1 3 1 1 3 #imm,@(R0,GBR) 11001100iiiiiiii Rm,Rn #imm,R0 0010nnnnmmmm1010 11001010iiiiiiii #imm,@(R0,GBR) 11001110iiiiiiii Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 40 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • Shift Instructions Instruction ROTL ROTR ROTCL ROTCR SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR SHLL2 SHLR2 SHLL8 SHLR8 Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Rn Instruction Code 0100nnnn00000100 0100nnnn00000101 0100nnnn00100100 0100nnnn00100101 0100nnnn00100000 0100nnnn00100001 0100nnnn00000000 0100nnnn00000001 0100nnnn00001000 0100nnnn00001001 0100nnnn00011000 0100nnnn00011001 0100nnnn00101000 0100nnnn00101001 Operation T ← Rn ← MSB LSB → Rn → T T ← Rn ← T T → Rn → T T ← Rn ← 0 MSB → Rn → T T ← Rn ← 0 0 → Rn → T Rn2 → Rn Rn8 → Rn Rn16 → Rn Execution States T Bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB — — — — — — SHLL16 Rn SHLR16 Rn Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 41 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • Branch Instructions Instruction BF label Instruction Code 10001011dddddddd 10001111dddddddd 10001001dddddddd 10001101dddddddd 1010dddddddddddd 0000mmmm00100011 1011dddddddddddd 0000mmmm00000011 0100mmmm00101011 0100mmmm00001011 0000000000001011 * Operation If T = 0, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T = 1, nop Delayed branch, if T = 0, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T = 1, nop If T = 1, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T = 0, nop Delayed branch, if T = 1, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T = 0, nop Delayed branch, disp × 2 + PC → PC Delayed branch, Rm + PC → PC Delayed branch, PC → PR, disp × 2 + PC → PC Delayed branch, PC → PR, Rm + PC → PC Delayed branch, Rm → PC Delayed branch, PC → PR, Rm → PC Delayed branch, PR → PC Execution States T Bit 3/1* 2/1* 3/1* 2/1* 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — — — — — — — — — BF/S label BT label BT/S label BRA label BRAF Rm BSR label BSRF Rm JMP JSR RTS Note: @Rm @Rm One state when the program does not branch. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 42 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU • System Control Instructions Instruction CLRT CLRMAC LDC LDC LDC LDC.L LDC.L LDC.L LDS LDS LDS LDS.L LDS.L LDS.L NOP RTE SETT SLEEP STC STC STC STC.L STC.L STC.L STS STS STS STS.L STS.L STS.L SR,Rn GBR,Rn VBR,Rn SR,@–Rn GBR,@–Rn VBR,@–Rn MACH,Rn MACL,Rn PR,Rn Rm,SR Rm,GBR Rm,VBR @Rm+,SR @Rm+,GBR @Rm+,VBR Rm,MACH Rm,MACL Rm,PR Instruction Code 0000000000001000 0000000000101000 0100mmmm00001110 0100mmmm00011110 0100mmmm00101110 0100mmmm00000111 0100mmmm00010111 0100mmmm00100111 0100mmmm00001010 0100mmmm00011010 0100mmmm00101010 Operation 0→T 0 → MACH, MACL Rm → SR Rm → GBR Rm → VBR (Rm) → SR, Rm + 4 → Rm (Rm) → GBR, Rm + 4 → Rm (Rm) → VBR, Rm + 4 → Rm Rm → MACH Rm → MACL Rm → PR (Rm) → MACH, Rm + 4 → Rm (Rm) → MACL, Rm + 4 → Rm (Rm) → PR, Rm + 4 → Rm No operation Delayed branch, stack area → PC/SR 1→T Sleep SR → Rn GBR → Rn VBR → Rn Rn – 4 → Rn, SR → (Rn) Rn – 4 → Rn, GBR → (Rn) Rn – 4 → Rn, BR → (Rn) MACH → Rn MACL → Rn PR → Rn Rn – 4 → Rn, MACH → (Rn) Rn – 4 → Rn, MACL → (Rn) Rn – 4 → Rn, PR → (Rn) Execution States T Bit 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3* 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 — LSB — — LSB — — — — — — — — — — 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — @Rm+,MACH 0100mmmm00000110 @Rm+,MACL 0100mmmm00010110 @Rm+,PR 0100mmmm00100110 0000000000001001 0000000000101011 0000000000011000 0000000000011011 0000nnnn00000010 0000nnnn00010010 0000nnnn00100010 0100nnnn00000011 0100nnnn00010011 0100nnnn00100011 0000nnnn00001010 0000nnnn00011010 0000nnnn00101010 MACH,@–Rn 0100nnnn00000010 MACL,@–Rn 0100nnnn00010010 PR,@–Rn 0100nnnn00100010 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 43 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Execution States T Bit — Instruction TRAPA Note: * #imm Instruction Code 11000011iiiiiiii Operation PC/SR → stack area, (imm × 4 + 8 VBR) → PC The number of execution states before the chip enters sleep mode: The execution states shown in the table are minimums. The actual number of states may be increased when (1) contention occurs between instruction fetches and data access, or (2) when the destination register of the load instruction (memory → register) equals to the register used by the next instruction. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 44 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU 2.6 2.6.1 Processing States State Transitions The CPU has five processing states: reset, exception processing, bus release, program execution and power-down. Figure 2.4 shows the transitions between the states. From any state when RES = 0 From any state when RES = 1, MRES = 0, Power-on reset state RES = 0 Manual reset state RES = 1 When an internal power-on reset by WDT or internal manual reset by WDT occurs Interrupt sources generated or DMAC/DTC address error occurs* Bus request cleared RES = 1, MRES = 1 Reset state Exception processing state Bus request generated Exception processing source occurs Exception processing ends NMI or IRQ interrupt source occurs Bus release state Bus request generated Bus request generated Bus request cleared Bus request cleared Program execution state SSBY bit set for SLEEP instruction SSBY bit cleared for SLEEP instruction Sleep mode Software standby mode Power-down state Note: * Enabled only in masked ROM version and ROM less version. Disabled in F-ZTAT version and emulator. Figure 2.4 Transitions between Processing States Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 45 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 2. CPU Reset State: The CPU resets in the reset state. When the RES pin level goes low, the power-on reset state is entered. When the RES pin is high and the MRES pin is low, the manual reset state is entered. Exception Processing State: The exception processing state is a transient state that occurs when exception processing sources such as resets or interrupts alter the CPU’s processing state flow. For a reset, the initial values of the program counter (PC) (execution start address) and stack pointer (SP) are fetched from the exception processing vector table and stored; the CPU then branches to the execution start address and execution of the program begins. For an interrupt, the stack pointer (SP) is accessed and the program counter (PC) and status register (SR) are saved to the stack area. The exception service routine start address is fetched from the exception processing vector table; the CPU then branches to that address and the program starts executing, thereby entering the program execution state. Program Execution State: In the program execution state, the CPU sequentially executes the program. Power-Down State: In the power-down state, the CPU operation halts and power consumption declines. The SLEEP instruction places the CPU in the sleep mode or the software standby mode. Bus Release State: In the bus release state, the CPU releases bus mastership to the device that has requested them. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 46 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 Selection of Operating Modes This LSI has four operating modes and four clock modes. The operating mode is determined by the setting of MD3 to MD0, and FWP pins. Do not set these pins in the other way than the combination shown in table 3.1. When power is applied to the system, be sure to conduct poweron reset. Table 3.1 Selection of Operating Modes Pin Setting FWP MD3* x 1 Mode No. Bus Width of CS0, CS4 Area MD1 MD0 Mode Name 0 0 MCU extension mode 0 MCU extension mode 1 MCU extension mode 2 Single chip mode Boot mode*2 On-Chip ROM SH7144 SH7145 Not active 8 bits 16 bits MD2*1 x Mode 0 1 Mode 1 1 x x 0 1 Not active 16 bits 32 bits Mode 2 1 x x 1 0 Active Set by BCR1 of BSC ⎯ Set by BCR1 of BSC ⎯ Mode 3 1 *2 *2 * 2 x x x x x x x x x x 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 Active Active 0 0 0 0 *2 User programming mode*2 Active Set by BCR1 of BSC — [Legend] x: Don’t care Notes: 1. MD3 and MD2 pins are used to select clock mode. 2. User programming mode for flash memory. Supported in only F-ZTAT version. There are two modes as the MCU operating modes: MCU extension mode and single chip mode. There are two modes to program the flash memory (on-board programming mode): boot mode and user programming mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 47 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes The clock mode is selected by the input of MD2 and MD3 pins. Table 3.2 Clock Mode Setting Pin Setting Clock Mode No. 0 1 2 3 Note: * MD3 0 0 1 1 MD2 0 1 0 1 Clock Ratio (when input clock is 1) System clock (φ) ×1 ×2 ×4 ×4 Peripheral clock (Pφ) ×1 ×2 ×4* ×2 System clock output (CK) ×1 ×2 ×4 ×4 The maximum clock input frequency is 10MHz because the pφ is specified as 40MHz or less. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 48 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes 3.2 Input/Output Pins Table 3.3 describes the configuration of operating mode related pin. Table 3.3 Pin Name MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 FWP Pin Configuration Input/Output Input Input Input Input Input Function Designates operating mode through the level applied to this pin Designates operating mode through the level applied to this pin Designates clock mode through the level applied to this pin Designates clock mode through the level applied to this pin Pin for the hardware protection against programming/erasing the on-chip flash memory Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 49 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes 3.3 3.3.1 Operating Modes Mode 0 (MCU Extension Mode 0) CS0 space and CS4 space become external memory spaces with 8-bit bus width in SH7144 or 16bit bus width in SH7145. 3.3.2 Mode 1 (MCU Extension Mode 1) CS0 space and CS4 space become external memory spaces with 16-bit bus width in SH7144 or 32-bit bus width in SH7145. 3.3.3 Mode 2 (MCU Extension Mode 2) The on-chip ROM is active and CS0 space can be used in this mode. 3.3.4 Mode 3 (Single Chip Mode) All ports can be used in this mode, however the external address cannot be used. 3.3.5 Clock Mode The input waveform frequency can be used as is, doubled or quadrupled as system clock frequency in mode 0 to mode 3. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 50 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes 3.4 Address Map The address map for the operating modes are shown in figure 3.1. Modes 0 and 1 On-chip ROM disabled mode H'00000000 CS0 space H'003FFFFF H'00400000 CS1 space H'007FFFFF H'00800000 CS2 space H'00BFFFFF H'00C00000 CS3 space H'00FFFFFF H'01000000 CS4 space* H'013FFFFF H'01400000 CS5 space* H'017FFFFF H'01800000 CS6 space* H'01BFFFFF H'01C00000 CS7 space* H'01FFFFFF H'02000000 H'FFFF7FFF H'FFFF8000 H'FFFFBFFF H'FFFFC000 H'FFFFDFFF H'FFFFE000 H'FFFFFFFF Reserved area H'FFFF7FFF H'FFFF8000 On-chip peripheral I/O registers Reserved area On-chip RAM (8 kbytes) H'FFFFDFFF H'FFFFE000 H'FFFFFFFF H'FFFFBFFF H'FFFFC000 On-chip peripheral I/O registers Reserved area On-chip RAM (8 kbytes) H'FFFFDFFF H'FFFFE000 H'FFFFFFFF H'01FFFFFF H'02000000 Reserved area H'FFFF7FFF H'FFFF8000 H'FFFFBFFF H'FFFFC000 On-chip peripheral I/O registers Reserved area On-chip RAM (8 kbytes) H'01BFFFFF H'01C00000 CS7 space* H'017FFFFF H'01800000 CS6 space* H'00FFFFFF H'01000000 Reserved area H'011FFFFF H'01200000 H'013FFFFF H'01400000 CS4 space* Reserved area H'00BFFFFF H'00C00000 CS3 space H'007FFFFF H'00800000 CS2 space Mode 2 On-chip ROM enabled mode H'00000000 On-chip ROM (256 kbytes) H'0003FFFF H'00040000 Reserved area H'00200000 CS0 space H'003FFFFF H'00400000 CS1 space Mode 3 Single-chip mode H'00000000 On-chip ROM (256 kbytes) H'0003FFFF H'00040000 CS5 space* Note: * CS4 space to CS7 space are available only in the masked ROM version and ROM less version. These spaces are reserved in the flash memory version and emulator. Figure 3.1 Address Map for Each Operating Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 51 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 3. MCU Operating Modes 3.5 Initial State in This LSI In the initial state of this LSI, some of on-chip modules are set in module standby state for saving power. When operating these modules, clear module standby state according to the procedure in section 24, Power-Down Modes. 3.6 Note on Changing Operating Mode When changing operating mode while power is applied to this LSI, make sure to do it in the power-on reset state (that is, the low level is applied to the RES pin). In addition, when changing clock mode, secure the reset oscillation stabilization time (tOSC1) after clock mode change. When changing other than clock mode When changing clock mode CK MD3 to MD0 tMDS*1 RES tOSC1*2 Notes: 1. See section 26.3.3, Control Signal Timing. 2. See section 26.3.2, Clock Timing. Figure 3.2 Reset Input Timing when Changing Operating Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 52 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator Section 4 Clock Pulse Generator This LSI has an on-chip clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (φ) and the peripheral clock (Pφ), and then makes internal clock (φ/2 to φ/8192 and Pφ/2 to Pφ/1024) out of this generated clock. The CPG consists of an oscillator, PLL circuit, and pre-scaler. A block diagram of the clock pulse generator is shown in figure 4.1. The frequency from the oscillator can be modified by the PLL circuit. PLLCAP CK EXTAL Oscillator XTAL PLL circuit Clock divider (× 1/2) MD2 Clock mode control circuitry MD3 Pre-scaler Pre-scaler φ φ/2 to φ/8192 Pφ/2 to Pφ/1024 Pφ for internal circuit Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator CPG0111A_010120030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 53 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator Table 4.1 shows the operating clock for each module. Table 4.1 Operating Clock for Each Module Operating Module CPU UBC DTC BSC DMAC WDT AUD ROM RAM Peripheral clock (Pφ) MTU POE SCI IC A/D CMT H-UDI 2 Operating clock System clock (φ) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 54 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator 4.1 Oscillator Clock pulses can be supplied from a connected crystal resonator or an external clock. 4.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in figure 4.2. Use the damping resistance (Rd) listed in table 4.2. Use an crystal resonator that has a resonance frequency of 4 to 12.5 MHz. It is recommended to consult the crystal resonator manufacturer concerning the compatibility of the crystal resonator and the LSI. CL1 EXTAL XTAL Rd CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 18–22 pF (Recommended value) Figure 4.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) Table 4.2 Damping Resistance Values (Recommended Values) 4 500 8 200 10 0 12.5 0 Frequency (MHz) Rd (Ω) Figure 4.3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator with the characteristics listed in table 4.3. CL L XTAL C0 Rs EXTAL Figure 4.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 55 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator Table 4.3 Crystal Resonator Characteristics 4 120 7 8 80 7 10 60 7 12.5 50 7 Frequency (MHz) Rs max (Ω) C0 max (pF) 4.1.2 External Clock Input Method Figure 4.4 shows an example of an external clock input connection. In this case, make the external clock high level to stop it when in software standby mode. During operation, make the external input clock frequency 4 to 12.5 MHz. When leaving the XTAL pin open, make sure the parasitic capacitance is less than 10 pF. Even when inputting an external clock, be sure to wait at least the oscillation stabilization time in power-on sequence or in releasing software standby mode, in order to ensure the PLL stabilization time. EXTAL XTAL Open state External clock input Figure 4.4 Example of External Clock Connection Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 56 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator 4.2 Function for Detecting Oscillator Halt This CPG can detect a clock halt and automatically cause the timer pins to become highimpedance when any system abnormality causes the oscillator to halt. That is, when a change of EXTAL has not been detected, the high-current 6 pins (PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST*, PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO*, PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK*, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT) can be set to high-impedance regardless of PFC setting. Refer to section 17.1.11, High-Current Port Control Register (PPCR), for more details. Even in software standby mode, these 6 pins can be set to high-impedance regardless of PFC setting. Refer to section 17.1.11, High-Current Port Control Register (PPCR), for more details. These pins enter the normal state after software standby mode is released. When abnormalities that halt the oscillator occur except in software standby mode, other LSI operations become undefined. In this case, LSI operations, including these 6 pins, become undefined even when the oscillator operation starts again. In the case of using E10A, the high-impedance function is disabled when an oscillation stop is detected, or when in software standby state for the three pins of PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST, PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO, and PE12/TIOC4A/TxD3/TCK of the SH7145. Note: * Only in the SH7145. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 57 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator 4.3 4.3.1 Usage Notes Note on Crystal Resonator A sufficient evaluation at the user’s site is necessary to use the LSI, by referring the resonator connection examples shown in this section, because various characteristics related to the crystal resonator are closely linked to the user’s board design. As the oscillator circuit's circuit constant will depend on the resonator and the floating capacitance of the mounting circuit, the value of each external circuit’s component should be determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the maximum rating is not applied to the oscillator pin. 4.3.2 Notes on Board Design Measures against radiation noise are taken in this LSI. If further reduction in radiation noise is needed, it is recommended to use a multiple layer board and provide a layer exclusive to the system ground. When using a crystal resonator, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Do not route any signal lines near the oscillator circuitry as shown in figure 4.5. Otherwise, correct oscillation can be interfered by induction. Avoid CL2 Signal A Signal B This LSI XTAL EXTAL CL1 Figure 4.5 Cautions for Oscillator Circuit Board Design Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 58 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator A circuitry shown in figure 4.6 is recommended as an external circuitry around the PLL. Place oscillation stabilization capacitor C1 close to the PLLCAP pin, and ensure that no other signal lines cross this line. Separate the PLL power lines (PLLVcc, PLLVss) and the system power lines (Vcc, Vss) at the board power supply source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CB and CPB close to the pins. R1=3kΩ PLLCAP PLLVCC PLLVSS C1: 470 pF Rp=200Ω CPB = 0.1 μF* VCC CB = 0.1 μF* VSS (Values are recommended values.) Note: * CB and CPB are laminated ceramic type. Figure 4.6 Recommended External Circuitry around PLL In principle, electromagnetic waves are emitted from an LSI in operation. This LSI regards the lower of the system clock (φ) and the peripheral clock (Pφ) as fundamental (for example, if φ = 40 MHz and Pφ = 40 MHz, then 40 MHz), and the peak of electromagnetic waves is in the high frequency band. When this LSI is used adjacent to apparatuses sensible to electromagnetic waves such as FM/VHF band receivers, it is recommended to use a board with at least four layers and provide a layer exclusive to the system ground. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 59 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4. Clock Pulse Generator Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 60 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing Section 5 Exception Processing 5.1 5.1.1 Overview Types of Exception Processing and Priority Exception processing is started by four sources: resets, address errors, interrupts and instructions and have the priority, as shown in table 5.1. When several exception processing sources occur at once, they are processed according to the priority. Table 5.1 Exception Reset Types of Exception Processing and Priority Order Source Power-on reset Manual reset CPU address error or AUD address error*1 DMAC/DTC address error NMI User break H-UDI IRQ On-chip peripheral modules: • • • • • • • • • • Direct memory access controller (DMAC) Multifunction timer unit (MTU) Serial communication interface 0 and 1(SCI0 and SCI1) A/D converter 0 and 1 (A/D0, A/D1) Data transfer controller (DTC) Compare match timer 0 and 1 (CMT0, CMT1) Watchdog timer (WDT) Input/output port (I/O) (MTU) Serial communication interface 2 and 3 (SCI2 and SCI3) IIC bus interface (IIC) Priority High Address error Interrupt Instructions Trap instruction (TRAPA instruction) General illegal instructions (undefined code) Illegal slot instructions (undefined code placed directly after a delayed branch instruction*2 or instructions that rewrite the PC*3) Low Notes: 1. Only in the F-ZTAT version. 2. Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, and BRAF. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 61 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 3. Instructions that rewrite the PC: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BT, BF, TRAPA, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, and BRAF. 5.1.2 Exception Processing Operations The exception processing sources are detected and begin processing according to the timing shown in table 5.2. Table 5.2 Exception Reset Timing for Exception Source Detection and Start of Exception Processing Source Power-on reset Manual reset Timing of Source Detection and Start of Processing Starts when the RES pin changes from low to high or when WDT overflows. Starts when the MRES pin changes from low to high. Detected when instruction is decoded and starts when the execution of the previous instruction is completed. Trap instruction General illegal instructions Illegal slot instructions Starts from the execution of a TRAPA instruction. Starts from the decoding of undefined code anytime except after a delayed branch instruction (delay slot). Starts from the decoding of undefined code placed in a delayed branch instruction (delay slot) or of instructions that rewrite the PC. Address error Interrupts Instructions When exception processing starts, the CPU operates as follows: 1. Exception processing triggered by reset: The initial values of the program counter (PC) and stack pointer (SP) are fetched from the exception processing vector table (PC and SP are respectively the H'00000000 and H'00000004 addresses for power-on resets and the H'00000008 and H'0000000C addresses for manual resets). See section 5.1.3, Exception Processing Vector Table, for more information. H'00000000 is then written to the vector base register (VBR), and H'F (B'1111) is written to the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) of the status register (SR). The program begins running from the PC address fetched from the exception processing vector table. 2. Exception processing triggered by address errors, interrupts and instructions: SR and PC are saved to the stack indicated by R15. For interrupt exception processing, the interrupt priority level is written to the SR’s interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0). For address error and instruction exception processing, the I3 to I0 bits are not affected. The start address is then fetched from the exception processing vector table and the program begins running from that address. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 62 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.1.3 Exception Processing Vector Table Before exception processing begins running, the exception processing vector table must be set in memory. The exception processing vector table stores the start addresses of exception service routines. (The reset exception processing table holds the initial values of PC and SP.) All exception sources are given different vector numbers and vector table address offsets. The vector table addresses are calculated from these vector numbers and vector table address offsets. During exception processing, the start addresses of the exception service routines are fetched from the exception processing vector table that is indicated by this vector table address. Table 5.3 shows the vector numbers and vector table address offsets. Table 5.4 shows how vector table addresses are calculated. Table 5.3 Exception Processing Vector Table Vector Numbers PC SP Manual reset PC SP General illegal instruction (Reserved by system) Slot illegal instruction (Reserved by system) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CPU address error or AUD address error*1 DMAC/DTC address error Interrupts NMI User break (Reserved by system) H-UDI (Reserved by system) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 : 31 Vector Table Address Offset H'00000000 to H'00000003 H'00000004 to H'00000007 H'00000008 to H'0000000B H'0000000C to H'0000000F H'00000010 to H'00000013 H'00000014 to H'00000017 H'00000018 to H'0000001B H'0000001C to H'0000001F H'00000020 to H'00000023 H'00000024 to H'00000027 H'00000028 to H'0000002B H'0000002C to H'0000002F H'00000030 to H'00000033 H'00000034 to H'00000037 H'00000038 to H'0000003B H'0000003C to H'0000003F : H'0000007C to H'0000007F Exception Sources Power-on reset Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 63 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing Exception Sources Trap instruction (user vector) Vector Numbers 32 : 63 Interrupts IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 On-chip peripheral module*2 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 : 255 Vector Table Address Offset H'00000080 to H'00000083 : H'000000FC to H'000000FF H'00000100 to H'00000103 H'00000104 to H'00000107 H'00000108 to H'0000010B H'0000010C to H'0000010F H'00000110 to H'00000113 H'00000114 to H'00000117 H'00000118 to H'0000011B H'0000011C to H'0000011F H'00000120 to H'00000123 : H'000003FC to H'000003FF Notes: 1. Only in the F-ZTAT version. 2. The vector numbers and vector table address offsets for each on-chip peripheral module interrupt are given in table 6.2. Table 5.4 Calculating Exception Processing Vector Table Addresses Vector Table Address Calculation Vector table address = (vector table address offset) = (vector number) × 4 Vector table address = VBR + (vector table address offset) = VBR + (vector number) × 4 Exception Source Resets Address errors, interrupts, instructions Notes: 1. VBR: Vector base register 2. Vector table address offset: See table 5.3. 3. Vector number: See table 5.3. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 64 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.2 5.2.1 Resets Types of Reset Resets have the highest priority of any exception source. There are two types of resets: manual resets and power-on resets. As table 5.5 shows, both types of resets initialize the internal status of the CPU. In power-on resets, all registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized; in manual resets, they are not. Table 5.5 Reset Status Conditions for Transition to Reset Status WDT Overflow MRES — Overflow — — High Low Internal Status On-Chip Peripheral Module Initialized Initialized POE, PFC, IO Port Initialized Not initialized Type Power-on reset RES Low High CPU/INTC Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset High Not initialized Not initialized 5.2.2 Power-On Reset Power-On Reset by RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, the LSI becomes to be a poweron reset state. To reliably reset the LSI, the RES pin should be kept at low for at least the duration of the oscillation settling time when applying power or when in software standby mode (when the clock circuit is halted) or at least 25 tcyc when the clock circuit is running. During power-on reset, CPU internal status and all registers of on-chip peripheral modules are initialized. See appendix A, Pin States, for the status of individual pins during the power-on reset status. In the power-on reset status, power-on reset exception processing starts when the RES pin is first driven low for a set period of time and then returned to high. The CPU will then operate as follows: 1. The initial value (execution start address) of the program counter (PC) is fetched from the exception processing vector table. 2. The initial value of the stack pointer (SP) is fetched from the exception processing vector table. 3. The vector base register (VBR) is cleared to H'00000000 and the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) of the status register (SR) are set to H'F (B'1111). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 65 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 4. The values fetched from the exception processing vector table are set in PC and SP, then the program begins executing. Be certain to always perform power-on reset processing when turning the system power on. Power-On Reset by WDT: When a setting is made for a power-on reset to be generated in the WDT’s watchdog timer mode, and the WDT’s TCNT overflows, the LSI becomes to be a poweron reset state. The POE (Port Output Enable) function registers in the MTU, the pin function controller (PFC) registers, and I/O port registers are not initialized by the reset signal generated by the WDT (these registers are only initialized by a power-on reset from outside of the chip). If reset caused by the input signal at the RES pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur simultaneously, the RES pin reset has priority, and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. When WDT-initiated power-on reset processing is started, the CPU operates as follows: 1. The initial value (execution start address) of the program counter (PC) is fetched from the exception processing vector table. 2. The initial value of the stack pointer (SP) is fetched from the exception processing vector table. 3. The vector base register (VBR) is cleared to H'00000000 and the interrupt mask bits (I3-I0) of the status register (SR) are set to H'F (B'1111). 4. The values fetched from the exception processing vector table are set in the PC and SP, then the program begins executing. 5.2.3 Manual Reset When the RES pin is high and the MRES pin is driven low, the LSI becomes to be a manual reset state. To reliably reset the LSI, the MRES pin should be kept at low for at least the duration of the oscillation settling time that is set in WDT when in software standby mode (when the clock is halted) or at least 25 tcyc when the clock is operating. During manual reset, the CPU internal status is initialized. Registers of on-chip peripheral modules are not initialized. When the LSI enters manual reset status in the middle of a bus cycle, manual reset exception processing does not start until the bus cycle has ended. Thus, manual resets do not abort bus cycles. However, once MRES is driven low, hold the low level until the CPU becomes to be a manual reset mode after the bus cycle ends. (Keep at low level for at least the longest bus cycle). See appendix A, Pin States, for the status of individual pins during manual reset mode. In the manual reset status, manual reset exception processing starts when the MRES pin is first kept low for a set period of time and then returned to high. The CPU will then operate in the same procedures as described for power-on resets. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 66 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.3 5.3.1 Address Errors Cause of Address Error Exception Address errors occur when instructions are fetched or data read or written, as shown in table 5.6. Table 5.6 Bus Cycles and Address Errors Bus Cycle Type Instruction fetch Bus Master CPU Bus Cycle Description Instruction fetched from even address Instruction fetched from odd address Instruction fetched from other than on-chip peripheral module space* Instruction fetched from on-chip peripheral module space* Instruction fetched from external memory space when in single chip mode Data read/write CPU, DMAC, Word data accessed from even address AUD, or DTC Word data accessed from odd address Longword data accessed from a longword boundary Longword data accessed from other than a long-word boundary Byte or word data accessed in on-chip peripheral module space* Longword data accessed in 16-bit on-chip peripheral module space* Longword data accessed in 8-bit on-chip peripheral module space* External memory space accessed when in single chip mode Note: * Address Errors None (normal) Address error occurs None (normal) Address error occurs Address error occurs None (normal) Address error occurs None (normal) Address error occurs None (normal) None (normal) Address error occurs Address error occurs See section 9, Bus State Controller (BSC), for more information on the on-chip peripheral module space. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 67 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.3.2 Address Error Exception Processing When an address error occurs, the bus cycle in which the address error occurred ends, the current instruction finishes, and then address error exception processing starts. The CPU operates as follows: 1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack. 2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the start address of the instruction to be executed after the last executed instruction. 3. The start address of the exception service routine is fetched from the exception processing vector table that corresponds to the occurred address error, and the program starts executing from that address. The jump in this case is not a delayed branch. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 68 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.4 5.4.1 Interrupts Interrupt Sources Table 5.7 shows the sources that start the interrupt exception processing. They are NMI, user breaks, H-UDI, IRQ, and on-chip peripheral modules. Table 5.7 Type NMI User break H-UDI IRQ On-chip peripheral module Interrupt Sources Request Source NMI pin (external input) User break controller (UBC) User debugging interface (H-UDI) IRQ0 to IRQ7 pins (external input) Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Multifunction timer unit (MTU) Data transfer controller (DTC) Compare match timer (CMT) A/D converter (A/D0 and A/D1) Serial communication interface (SCI0−SCI3) Watchdog timer (WDT) Input/output Port IIC bus interface (IIC) Number of Sources 1 1 1 8 4 23 1 2 2 16 1 1 1 Each interrupt source is allocated a different vector number and vector table offset. See table 6.2 for more information on vector numbers and vector table address offsets. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 69 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.4.2 Interrupt Priority Level The interrupt priority order is predetermined. When multiple interrupts occur simultaneously (overlapped interruptions), the interrupt controller (INTC) determines their relative priorities and starts the exception processing according to the results. The priority order of interrupts is expressed as priority levels 0 to 16, with priority 0 the lowest and priority 16 the highest. The NMI interrupt has priority 16 and cannot be masked, so it is always accepted. The priority level of user break interrupt and H-UDI is 15. IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupt priority levels can be set freely using the INTC’s interrupt priority registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ) as shown in table 5.8. The priority levels that can be set are 0 to 15. Level 16 cannot be set. See section 6.3.4, Interrupt Priority Registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ), for more information on IPRA to IPRJ. Table 5.8 Type NMI User break H-UDI IRQ On-chip peripheral module Interrupt Priority Priority Level 16 15 15 0 to 15 Comment Fixed priority level. Cannot be masked. Fixed priority level. Fixed priority level. Set with interrupt priority registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ). 5.4.3 Interrupt Exception Processing When an interrupt occurs, the interrupt controller (INTC) ascertains its priority level. NMI is always accepted, but other interrupts are only accepted if they have a priority level higher than the priority level set in the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) of the status register (SR). When an interrupt is accepted, exception processing begins. In interrupt exception processing, the CPU saves SR and the program counter (PC) to the stack. The priority level value of the accepted interrupt is written to SR bits I3 to I0. For NMI, however, the priority level is 16, but the value set in I3 to I0 is H'F (level 15). Next, the start address of the exception service routine is fetched from the exception processing vector table for the accepted interrupt, that address is jumped to and execution begins. See section 6.6, Operation, for more information on the interrupt exception processing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 70 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.5 5.5.1 Exceptions Triggered by Instructions Types of Exceptions Triggered by Instructions Exception processing can be triggered by trap instruction, illegal slot instructions, and general illegal instructions, as shown in table 5.9. Table 5.9 Type Trap instruction Illegal slot instructions Types of Exceptions Triggered by Instructions Source Instruction TRAPA Undefined code placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction (delay slot) or instructions that rewrite the PC Comment — Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, BRAF Instructions that rewrite the PC: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BT, BF, TRAPA, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, BRAF — General illegal instructions Undefined code anywhere besides in a delay slot 5.5.2 Trap Instructions When a TRAPA instruction is executed, trap instruction exception processing starts. The CPU operates as follows: 1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack. 2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the start address of the instruction to be executed after the TRAPA instruction. 3. The start address of the exception service routine is fetched from the exception processing vector table that corresponds to the vector number specified in the TRAPA instruction. That address is jumped to and the program starts executing. The jump in this case is not a delayed branch. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 71 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.5.3 Illegal Slot Instructions An instruction placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction is called “instruction placed in a delay slot”. When the instruction placed in the delay slot is an undefined code, illegal slot exception processing starts after the undefined code is decoded. Illegal slot exception processing also starts when an instruction that rewrites the program counter (PC) is placed in a delay slot and the instruction is decoded. The CPU handles an illegal slot instruction as follows: 1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack. 2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the target address of the delayed branch instruction immediately before the undefined code or the instruction that rewrites the PC. 3. The start address of the exception service routine is fetched from the exception processing vector table that corresponds to the exception that occurred. That address is jumped to and the program starts executing. The jump in this case is not a delayed branch. 5.5.4 General Illegal Instructions When undefined code placed anywhere other than immediately after a delayed branch instruction (i.e., in a delay slot) is decoded, general illegal instruction exception processing starts. The CPU handles the general illegal instructions in the same procedures as in the illegal slot instructions. Unlike processing of illegal slot instructions, however, the program counter value that is stacked is the start address of the undefined code. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 72 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.6 Cases when Exception Sources Are not Accepted When an address error or interrupt is generated directly after a delayed branch instruction or interrupt-disabled instruction, it is sometimes not accepted immediately but stored instead, as shown in table 5.10. In this case, it will be accepted when an instruction that can accept the exception is decoded. Table 5.10 Generation of Exception Sources Immediately after Delayed Branch Instruction or Interrupt-Disabled Instruction Exception Source Point of Occurrence Immediately after a delayed branch instruction* 1 2 Address Error Not accepted Accepted Interrupt Not accepted Not accepted Immediately after an interrupt-disabled instruction* Notes: 1. Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, and BRAF 2. Interrupt-disabled instructions: LDC, LDC.L, STC, STC.L, LDS, LDS.L, STS, and STS.L 5.6.1 Immediately after Delayed Branch Instruction When an instruction placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction (delay slot) is decoded, neither address errors nor interrupts are accepted. The delayed branch instruction and the instruction placed immediately after it (delay slot) are always executed consecutively, so no exception processing occurs during this period. 5.6.2 Immediately after Interrupt-Disabled Instruction When an instruction placed immediately after an interrupt-disabled instruction is decoded, interrupts are not accepted. Address errors can be accepted. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 73 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.7 Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends The status of the stack after exception processing ends is shown in table 5.11. Table 5.11 Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends Types Address error SP Address of instruction 32 bits after executed instruction SR 32 bits Stack Status Trap instruction SP Address of instruction after TRAPA instruction SR 32 bits 32 bits General illegal instruction SP Address of instruction after general illegal instruction 32 bits SR 32 bits Interrupt SP Address of instruction after executed instruction 32 bits SR 32 bits Illegal slot instruction SP Jump destination address of delay branch instruction 32 bits SR 32 bits Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 74 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing 5.8 5.8.1 Usage Notes Value of Stack Pointer (SP) The value of the stack pointer must always be a multiple of four. If it is not, an address error will occur when the stack is accessed during exception processing. 5.8.2 Value of Vector Base Register (VBR) The value of the vector base register must always be a multiple of four. If it is not, an address error will occur when the stack is accessed during exception processing. 5.8.3 Address Errors Caused by Stacking of Address Error Exception Processing When the value of the stack pointer is not a multiple of four, an address error will occur during stacking of the exception processing (interrupts, etc.) and address error exception processing will start after the first exception processing is ended. Address errors will also occur in the stacking for this address error exception processing. To ensure that address error exception processing does not go into an endless loop, no address errors are accepted at that point. This allows program control to be shifted to the service routine for address error exception and enables error processing. When an address error occurs during exception processing stacking, the stacking bus cycle (write) is executed. During stacking of the status register (SR) and program counter (PC), the value of SP is reduced by 4 for both of SR and PC, therefore the value of SP is still not a multiple of four after the stacking. The address value output during stacking is the SP value, so the address itself where the error occurred is output. This means that the write data stacked is undefined. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 75 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 5. Exception Processing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 76 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Section 6 Interrupt Controller (INTC) The interrupt controller (INTC) ascertains the priority of interrupt sources and controls interrupt requests to the CPU. 6.1 Features • 16 levels of interrupt priority • NMI noise canceler function • Occurrence of interrupt can be reported externally (IRQOUT pin) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 77 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the INTC. IRQOUT NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 UBC DMAC H-UDI DTC MTU CMT A/D SCI WDT IIC I/O Input control CPU/DTC request determination Comparator Interrupt request Priority determination (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) (Interrupt request) SR I3 I2 I1 I0 CPU DTER ICR1 ICR2 ISR IPRA to IPRJ IPR DTC Module bus Bus interface INTC [Legend] UBC: DMAC: H-UDI: DTC: MTU: CMT: A/D: User break controller Direct memory access controller User debug interface Data transfer controller Multifunction timer unit Compare match timer A/D converter SCI: WDT: IIC: I/O: ICR1, ICR2: ISR: IPRA to IPRJ: SR: Serial communication interface Watchdog timer IIC bus interface I/O port (port output control unit) Interrupt control register IRQ status register Interrupt priority registers A to J Status register Figure 6.1 INTC Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 78 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal bus 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.2 Input/Output Pins Table 6.1 shows the INTC pin configuration. Table 6.1 Name Non-maskable interrupt input pin Interrupt request input pins Interrupt request output pin Pin Configuration Abbreviation NMI IRQ0 to IRQ7 IRQOUT I/O I I O Function Input of non-maskable interrupt request signal Input of maskable interrupt request signals Output of notification signal when an interrupt has occurred 6.3 Register Descriptions The interrupt controller has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Interrupt control register 1 (ICR1) Interrupt control register 2 (ICR2) IRQ status register (ISR) Interrupt priority register A (IPRA) Interrupt priority register B (IPRB) Interrupt priority register C (IPRC) Interrupt priority register D (IPRD) Interrupt priority register E (IPRE) Interrupt priority register F (IPRF) Interrupt priority register G (IPRG) Interrupt priority register H (IPRH) Interrupt priority register I (IPRI) Interrupt priority register J (IPRJ) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 79 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.3.1 Interrupt Control Register 1 (ICR1) ICR1 is a 16-bit register that sets the input signal detection mode of the external interrupt input pins NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ7 and indicates the input signal level at the NMI pin. Bit 15 Bit Name Initial Value NMIL 1/0 R/W R Description NMI Input Level Sets the level of the signal input to the NMI pin. This bit can be read to determine the NMI pin level. This bit cannot be modified. 0: NMI input level is low 1: NMI input level is high 14 to 9 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 8 NMIE 0 R/W NMI Edge Select 0: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of NMI input 1: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of NMI input 7 IRQ0S 0 R/W IRQ0 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ0 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ0 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ0 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 6 IRQ1S 0 R/W IRQ1 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ1 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ1 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ1 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 5 IRQ2S 0 R/W IRQ2 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ2 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ2 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ2 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 80 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Bit 4 Bit Name Initial Value IRQ3S 0 R/W R/W Description IRQ3 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ3 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ3 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ3 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 3 IRQ4S 0 R/W IRQ4 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ4 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ4 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ4 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 2 IRQ5S 0 R/W IRQ5 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ5 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ5 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ5 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 1 IRQ6S 0 R/W IRQ6 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ6 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ6 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ6 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) 0 IRQ7S 0 R/W IRQ7 Sense Select This bit sets the IRQ7 interrupt request detection mode. 0: Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ7 input 1: Interrupt request is detected on edge of IRQ7 input (edge direction is selected by ICR2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 81 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.3.2 Interrupt Control Register 2 (ICR2) ICR2 is a 16-bit register that sets the edge detection mode of the external interrupt input pins IRQ0 to IRQ7. ICR2 is, however, valid only when IRQ interrupt request detection mode is set to the edge detection mode by the sense select bits of IRQ0 to IRQ 7 in Interrupt control register 1 (ICR1). If the IRQ interrupt request detection mode has been set to low level detection mode, the setting of ICR2 is ignored. Bit 15 14 Bit Name IRQ0ES1 IRQ0ES0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description This bit sets the IRQ0 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ0 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ0 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ0 input 11: Cannot be set 13 12 IRQ1ES1 IRQ1ES0 0 0 R/W R/W This bit sets the IRQ1 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ1 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ1 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ1 input 11: Cannot be set 11 10 IRQ2ES1 IRQ2ES0 0 0 R/W R/W This bit sets the IRQ2 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ2 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ2 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ2 input 11: Cannot be set Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 82 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Bit 9 8 Bit Name IRQ3ES1 IRQ3ES0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description This bit sets the IRQ3 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ3 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ3 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ3 input 11: Cannot be set 7 6 IRQ4ES1 IRQ4ES0 0 0 R/W R/W This bit sets the IRQ4 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ4 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ4 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ4 input 11: Cannot be set 5 4 IRQ5ES1 IRQ5ES0 0 0 R/W R/W This bit sets the IRQ5 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ5 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ5 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ5 input 11: Cannot be set 3 2 IRQ6ES1 IRQ6ES0 0 0 R/W R/W This bit sets the IRQ6 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ6 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ6 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ6 input 11: Cannot be set Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 83 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Bit 1 0 Bit Name IRQ7ES1 IRQ7ES0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description This bit sets the IRQ7 interrupt request edge detection mode. 00: Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ7 input 01: Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of IRQ7 input 10: Interrupt request is detected on both of falling and rising edge of IRQ7 input 11: Cannot be set 6.3.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ISR is a 16-bit register that indicates the interrupt request status of the external interrupt input pins IRQ0 to IRQ7. When IRQ interrupts are set to edge detection, held interrupt requests can be cleared by writing 0 to IRQnF after reading IRQnF = 1. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ0F IRQ1F IRQ2F IRQ3F IRQ4F IRQ5F IRQ6F IRQ7F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W [Clearing conditions] • • When 0 is written after reading IRQnF = 1 When interrupt exception processing has been executed at high level of IRQn input under the low level detection mode. When IRQn interrupt exception processing has been executed under the edge detection mode of falling edge, rising edge or both of falling and rising edge. When the DISEL bit of DTMR of DTC is 0, after DTC has been started by IRQn interrupt. IRQ0 to IRQ7 Flags These bits display the IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt request status. [Setting condition] • When interrupt source that is selected by ICR 1 and ICR2 has occurred. 15 to 8 — • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 84 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.3.4 Interrupt Priority Registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ) Interrupt priority registers are ten 16-bit readable/writable registers that set priority levels from 0 to 15 for interrupts except NMI. For the correspondence between interrupt request sources and IPR, refer to table 6.2. Each of the corresponding interrupt priority ranks are established by setting a value from H'0 to H'F in each of the four-bit groups 15 to 12, 11 to 8, 7 to 4 and 3 to 0. Reserved bits that are not assigned should be set H'0 (B'0000.) Bit 15 14 13 12 Bit Name Initial Value IPR15 IPR14 IPR13 IPR12 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description These bits set priority levels for the corresponding interrupt source. 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: Priority level 0 (lowest) Priority level 1 Priority level 2 Priority level 3 Priority level 4 Priority level 5 Priority level 6 Priority level 7 Priority level 8 Priority level 9 Priority level 10 Priority level 11 Priority level 12 Priority level 13 Priority level 14 Priority level 15 (highest) 11 10 9 8 IPR11 IPR10 IPR9 IPR8 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W These bits set priority levels for the corresponding interrupt source. 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: Priority level 0 (lowest) Priority level 1 Priority level 2 Priority level 3 Priority level 4 Priority level 5 Priority level 6 Priority level 7 Priority level 8 Priority level 9 Priority level 10 Priority level 11 Priority level 12 Priority level 13 Priority level 14 Priority level 15 (highest) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 85 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name Initial Value IPR7 IPR6 IPR5 IPR4 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description These bits set priority levels for the corresponding interrupt source. 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: Priority level 0 (lowest) Priority level 1 Priority level 2 Priority level 3 Priority level 4 Priority level 5 Priority level 6 Priority level 7 Priority level 8 Priority level 9 Priority level 10 Priority level 11 Priority level 12 Priority level 13 Priority level 14 Priority level 15 (highest) 3 2 1 0 IPR3 IPR2 IPR1 IPR0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W These bits set priority levels for the corresponding interrupt source. 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: Priority level 0 (lowest) Priority level 1 Priority level 2 Priority level 3 Priority level 4 Priority level 5 Priority level 6 Priority level 7 Priority level 8 Priority level 9 Priority level 10 Priority level 11 Priority level 12 Priority level 13 Priority level 14 Priority level 15 (highest) Note: Name in the tables above is represented by a general name. Name in the list of register is, on the other hand, represented by a module name. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 86 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.4 Interrupt Sources There are five types of interrupt sources: NMI, user breaks, H-UDI, IRQ, and on-chip peripheral modules. Each interrupt has a priority expressed as a priority level (0 to 16, with 0 the lowest and 16 the highest). Giving an interrupt a priority level of 0 masks it. 6.4.1 External Interrupts NMI Interrupts: The NMI interrupt has priority 16 and is always accepted. Input at the NMI pin is detected by edge. Use the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) in the interrupt control register 1 (ICR1) to select either the rising or falling edge. NMI interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits (I3 to I0) in the status register (SR) to level 15. IRQ Interrupts: IRQ interrupts are requested by input from pins IRQ0 to IRQ7. Set the IRQ sense select bits (IRQ0S to IRQ7S) of the interrupt control register 1 (ICR1) and IRQ edge select bit (IRQ0ES[1:0] to IRQ7ES[1:0]) of the interrupt control register 2 (ICR2) to select low level detection, falling edge detection, or rising edge detection for each pin. The priority level can be set from 0 to 15 for each pin using the interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB). When IRQ interrupts are set to low level detection, an interrupt request signal is sent to the INTC during the period the IRQ pin is low level. Interrupt request signals are not sent to the INTC when the IRQ pin becomes high level. Interrupt request levels can be confirmed by reading the IRQ flags (IRQ0F to IRQ7F) of the IRQ status register (ISR). When IRQ interrupts are set to falling edge detection, interrupt request signals are sent to the INTC upon detecting a change on the IRQ pin from high to low level. The results of detection for IRQ interrupt request are maintained until the interrupt request is accepted. It is possible to confirm that IRQ interrupt requests have been detected by reading the IRQ flags (IRQ0F to IRQ7F) of the IRQ status register (ISR), and by writing a 0 after reading a 1, IRQ interrupt request detection results can be cleared In IRQ interrupt exception processing, the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) of the status register (SR) are set to the priority level value of the accepted IRQ interrupt. Figure 6.2 shows the block diagram of this IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupts. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 87 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) IRQnS IRQnES ISR.IRQnF DTC IRQ pins Level detection Edge detection S Q determination Selection CPU interrupt request RESIRQn R DTC starting request (Acceptance of IRQn interrupt/DTC transfer end/ writing 0 after reading IRQnF = 1) Figure 6.2 Block Diagram of IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts Control 6.4.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts On-chip peripheral module interrupts are interrupts generated by the following on-chip peripheral modules. As a different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, the exception service routine does not have to decide which interrupt has occurred. Priority levels between 0 and 15 can be assigned to individual on-chip peripheral modules in interrupt priority registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ). On-chip peripheral module interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits (I3 to I0) in the status register (SR) to the priority level value of the on-chip peripheral module interrupt that was accepted. 6.4.3 User Break Interrupt A user break interrupt has a priority of level 15, and occurs when the break condition set in the user break controller (UBC) is satisfied. User break interrupt requests are detected by edge and are held until accepted. User break interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits (I3 to I0) in the status register (SR) to level 15. For more details on the user break interrupt, see section 7, User Break Controller (UBC). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 88 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.4.4 H-UDI Interrupt The user debugging interface (H-UDI) interrupt has a priority level of 15, and occurs when an HUDI interrupt instruction is serially input. H-UDI interrupt requests are detected by edge and are held until accepted. H-UDI exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits (I3-I0) in the status register (SR) to level 15. For more details on the H-UDI interrupt, see section 22, User Debugging Interface (H-UDI). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 89 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.5 Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors Table Table 6.2 lists interrupt sources and their vector numbers, vector table address offsets and interrupt priorities. Each interrupt source is allocated a different vector number and vector table address offset. Vector table addresses are calculated from the vector numbers and address offsets. In interrupt exception processing, the exception service routine start address is fetched from the vector table indicated by the vector table address. For the details of calculation of vector table address, see table 5.4. IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupt priorities can be set freely between 0 and 15 for each pin or module by setting interrupt priority registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ). However, the smaller vector number has interrupt source, the higher priority ranking is assigned among two or more interrupt sources specified by the same IPR, and the priority ranking cannot be changed. A power-on reset assigns priority level 0 to IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupts. If the same priority level is assigned to two or more interrupt sources and interrupts from those sources occur simultaneously, they are processed by the default priority order indicated in table 6.2. Table 6.2 Interrupt Source External pin User break H-UDI — Interrupts Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities Name NMI Vector No. 11 12 14 Reserved by system 15 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 Vector Table Starting Address IPR H'0000002C H'00000030 H'00000038 H'0000003C H'00000100 H'00000104 H'00000108 H'0000010C H'00000110 H'00000114 H'00000118 H'0000011C — — — — IPRA15 to IPRA12 IPRA11 to IPRA8 IPRA7 to IPRA4 IPRA3 to IPRA0 IPRB15 to IPRB12 IPRB11 to IPRB8 IPRB7 to IPRB4 IPRB3 to IPRB0 Low Default Priority High Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 90 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Interrupt Source DMAC Vector No. 72 76 80 84 88 89 90 91 92 96 97 100 101 104 105 108 109 112 113 114 115 116 120 121 122 123 124 128 129 130 131 Vector Table Starting Address IPR H'00000120 H'00000130 H'00000140 H'00000150 H'00000160 H'00000164 H'00000168 H'0000016C H'00000170 H'00000180 H'00000184 H'00000190 H'00000194 H'000001A0 H'000001A4 H'000001B0 H'000001B4 H'000001C0 H'000001C4 H'000001C8 H'000001CC H'000001D0 H'000001E0 H'000001E4 H'000001E8 H'000001EC H'000001F0 H'00000200 H'00000204 H'00000208 H'0000020C Low IPRF11 to IPRF8 IPRF7 to IPRF4 IPRE3 to IPRE0 IPRF15 to IPRF12 IPRE7 to IPRE4 IPRE11 to IPRE8 IPRE15 to IPRE12 IPRD3 to IPRD0 IPRD11 to IPRD8 IPRD7 to IPRD4 IPRC15 to IPRC12 IPRC11 to IPRC8 IPRC7 to IPRC4 IPRC3 to IPRC0 IPRD15 to IPRD12 Default Priority High Name DEI0 DEI1 DEI2 DEI3 MTU channel 0 TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 TCIV_0 MTU channel 1 TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1 MTU channel 2 TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2 MTU channel 3 TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3 TCIV_3 MTU channel 4 TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TGIC_4 TGID_4 TCIV_4 SCI channel 0 ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 TEI_0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 91 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Interrupt Source SCI channel 1 Vector No. 132 133 134 135 136 137 140 144 148 152 Vector Table Starting Address IPR H'00000210 H'00000214 H'00000218 H'0000021C H'00000220 H'00000224 H'00000230 H'00000240 H'00000250 H'00000260 H'00000264 H'00000270 H'00000290 to H'0000029C H'000002A0 H'000002A4 H'000002A8 H'000002AC H'000002B0 H'000002B4 H'000002B8 H'000002BC H'000002C0 to H'000002FC H'00000300 H'00000304 to H'000003DC ⎯ IPRJ7 to IPRJ4 Low IPRI11 to IPRI8 IPRG11 to IPRG8 IPRG7 to IPRG4 IPRG3 to IPRG0 IPRH15 to IPRH12 ⎯ IPRH11 to IPRH8 ⎯ IPRI15 to IPRI12 IPRG15 to IPRG12 IPRF3 to IPRF0 Default Priority High Name ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 TEI_1 A/D ADI0 ADI1 DTC CMT SWDTEND CMI0 CMI1 Watchdog timer ⎯ I/O (MTU) ⎯ SCI channel 2 ITI Reserved by system 153 MTUOEI 156 Reserved by system 160 to 167 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 TEI_2 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 SCI channel 3 ERI_3 RXI_3 TXI_3 TEI_3 ⎯ IIC ⎯ Reserved by system 176 to 188 ICI 192 Reserved by system 196 to 247 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 92 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.6 6.6.1 Operation Interrupt Sequence The sequence of interrupt operations is explained below. Figure 6.3 is a flowchart of the operations. 1. The interrupt request sources send interrupt request signals to the interrupt controller. 2. The interrupt controller selects the highest priority interrupt in the interrupt requests sent, according to the priority levels set in interrupt priority level setting registers A to J (IPRA to IPRJ). Interrupts that have lower-priority than that of the selected interrupt are ignored.* If interrupts that have the same priority level or interrupts within a same module occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the highest priority is selected according to the default priority order indicated in table 6.2. 3. The interrupt controller compares the priority level of the selected interrupt request with the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) in the CPU’s status register (SR). If the request priority level is equal to or less than the level set in I3 to I0, the request is ignored. If the request priority level is higher than the level in bits I3 to I0, the interrupt controller accepts the interrupt and sends an interrupt request signal to the CPU. 4. When the interrupt controller accepts an interrupt, a low level is output from the IRQOUT pin. 5. The CPU detects the interrupt request sent from the interrupt controller when CPU decodes the instruction to be executed. Instead of executing the decoded instruction, the CPU starts interrupt exception processing (figure 6.5). 6. SR and PC are saved onto the stack. 7. The priority level of the accepted interrupt is copied to the interrupt mask level bits (I3 to I0) in the status register (SR). 8. When the accepted interrupt is sensed by level or is from an on-chip peripheral module, a high level is output from the IRQOUT pin. When the accepted interrupt is sensed by edge, a high level is output from the IRQOUT pin at the moment when the CPU starts interrupt exception processing instead of instruction execution as noted in (5) above. However, if the interrupt controller accepts an interrupt with a higher priority than the interrupt just to be accepting, the IRQOUT pin holds low level. 9. The CPU reads the start address of the exception service routine from the exception vector table for the accepted interrupt, jumps to that address, and starts executing the program. This jump is not a delay branch. Note: * Interrupt requests that are designated as edge-detect type are held pending until the interrupt requests are accepted. IRQ interrupts, however, can be cancelled by accessing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 93 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) the IRQ status register (ISR). Interrupts held pending due to edge detection are cleared by a power-on reset or a manual reset. Program execution state Interrupt? Yes NMI? Yes No No User break? Yes No H-UDI interrupt? Yes No Level 15 interrupt? Yes Yes I3 to I0 ≤ level 14? No Yes No Level 14 interrupt? Yes I3 to I0 ≤ level 13? No Yes No Level 1 interrupt? Yes I3 to I0 = level 0? No No IRQOUT = low Save SR to stack Save PC to stack Copy accept-interrupt level to I3 to I0 IRQOUT = high Read exception vector table Branch to exception service routine *1 *2 Notes: I3 to I0 are Interrupt mask bits of status register (SR) in the CPU 1. IRQOUT is the same signal as interrupt request signal to the CPU (see figure 6.1). Therefore, IRQOUT is output when the request priority level is higher than the level in bits I3–I0 of SR. 2. When the accepted interrupt is sensed by edge, a high level is output from the IRQOUT pin at the moment when the CPU starts interrupt exception processing instead of instruction execution (namely, before saving SR to stack). However, if the interrupt controller accepts an interrupt with a higher priority than the interrupt just to be accepted and has output an interrupt request to the CPU, the IRQOUT pin holds low level. Figure 6.3 Interrupt Sequence Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 94 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.6.2 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing Figure 6.4 shows the stack after interrupt exception processing. Address 4n–8 4n–4 4n PC*1 SR 32 bits 32 bits SP*2 Notes: 1. PC: Start address of the next instruction (return destination instruction) after the executing instruction 2. Always make sure that SP is a multiple of 4 Figure 6.4 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 95 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.7 Interrupt Response Time Table 6.3 lists the interrupt response time, which is the time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the interrupt exception processing starts and fetching of the first instruction of the interrupt service routine begins. Figure 6.5 shows an example of the pipeline operation when an IRQ interrupt is accepted. Table 6.3 Interrupt Response Time Number of States Item DMAC/DTC active judgment NMI, Peripheral Module 0 or 1 IRQ 1 Remarks 1 state required for interrupt signals for which DMAC/DTC activation is possible Interrupt priority judgment 2 and comparison with SR mask bits Wait for completion of sequence currently being executed by CPU X (≥ 0) 3 X (≥ 0) The longest sequence is for interrupt or address-error exception processing (X = 4 + m1 + m2 + m3 + m4). If an interrupt-masking instruction follows, however, the time may be even longer. Performs the saving PC and SR, and vector address fetch. Time from start of interrupt exception processing until fetch of first instruction of exception service routine starts Interrupt Total: response time Minimum: 5 + m1 + m2 + m3 5 + m1 + m2 + m3 (7 or 8) + m1 + m2 + m3+X 9 + m1 + m2 + m3 + X 12 13 + 2 (m1 + m2 + m3) + m4 0.20 to 0.24 µs at 50 MHz 0.38 to 0.40 µs at 50 MHz* 10 Maximum: 12 + 2 (m1 + m2 + m3) + m4 Note: m1 to m4 are the number of states needed for the following memory accesses. m1: SR save (longword write) m2: PC save (longword write) m3: Vector address read (longword read) m4: Fetch first instruction of interrupt service routine * 0.38 to 0.40 µs at 50 MHz is the value in the case that m1 = m2 = m3 = m4 = 1. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 96 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) Interrupt acceptance 5 + m1 + m2 + m3 1 IRQ Instruction (instruction replaced by interrupt exception processing) Overrun fetch Interrupt service routine start instruction F D E E MM E M E E 3 3 m1 m2 1 m3 1 F F D E F: Instruction fetch (instruction fetched from memory where program is stored). D: Instruction decoding (fetched instruction is decoded). E: Instruction execution (data operation and address calculation is performed according to the results of decoding). M: Memory access (data in memory is accessed). Figure 6.5 Example of Pipeline Operation when IRQ Interrupt Is Accepted Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 97 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.8 Data Transfer with Interrupt Request Signals The following data transfers can be done using interrupt request signals: • Activate DMAC only, CPU interrupts do not occur • Activate DTC only, CPU interrupts according to DTC settings Interrupt sources that are activated by DMAC are masked without being input to INTC. Mask condition is as follows: Mask condition = DME • (DE0 • interrupt source select 0 + DE1 • interrupt source select 1 + DE2 • interrupt source select 2 + DE3 • interrupt source select 3) The INTC masks CPU interrupts when the corresponding DTE bit is 1. The conditions for clearing DTE and interrupt source flag are listed below. DTE clear condition = DTC transfer end • DTECLR Interrupt source flag clear condition = DTC transfer end • DTECLR+DMAC transfer end Where: DTECLR = DISEL + counter 0. Figure 6.6 shows a control block diagram. Interrupt source Interrupt source Flag clear (by DMAC) DMAC Interrupt source (not designated as DMAC activation source) CPU interrupt request DTC activation request DTER DTE clear DTECLR Transfer end Interrupt source flag clear (by DTC) Figure 6.6 Interrupt Control Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 98 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.8.1 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Sources for DTC Activating and CPU Interrupt, but Not DMAC Activating 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not select DMAC activating sources or clear the DTE bit to 0. For DTC, set the corresponding DTE bits and DISEL bits to 1. Activating sources are applied to the DTC when interrupts occur. When the DTC performs a data transfer, it clears the DTE bit to 0 and sends an interrupt request to the CPU. The activating source is not cleared. 5. The CPU clears interrupt sources in the interrupt processing routine then confirms the transfer counter value. When the transfer counter value is not 0, the CPU sets the DTE bit to 1 and allows the next data transfer. If the transfer counter value = 0, the CPU performs the necessary end processing in the interrupt processing routine. Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Sources for Activating DMAC, but Not CPU Interrupt and DTC Activating 6.8.2 1. Select DMAC activating sources and set the DME bit to 1. Then, CPU interrupt and DTC activating sources are masked regardless of the settings of the interrupt priority register and the DTC register. 2. Activating sources are applied to the DMAC when interrupts occur. 3. The DMAC clears the interrupt sources when starting transfer. 6.8.3 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Source for DTC Activating, but Not CPU Interrupt and DMAC Activating Do not select DMAC activating sources or clear the DME bit to 0. For DTC, set the corresponding DTE bits to 1 and clear the DISEL bits to 0. Activating sources are applied to the DTC when interrupts occur. When the DTC performs a data transfer, it clears the activating source. An interrupt request is not sent to the CPU, because the DTE bit is hold to 1. 5. However, when the transfer counter value = 0 the DTE bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. 6. The CPU performs the necessary end processing in the interrupt processing routine. 1. 2. 3. 4. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 99 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 6. Interrupt Controller (INTC) 6.8.4 Handling Interrupt Request Signals as Source for CPU Interrupt but Not DMAC and DTC Activating 1 2. 3. 4. Do not select DMAC activating sources or clear the DME bit to 0. For DTC, clear the corresponding DTE bits to 0. When interrupts occur, interrupt requests are sent to the CPU. The CPU clears the interrupt source and performs the necessary processing in the interrupt processing routine. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 100 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) Section 7 User Break Controller (UBC) The user break controller (UBC) provides functions that make program debugging easier. By setting break conditions in the UBC, a user break interrupt is generated according to the contents of the bus cycle generated by the CPU or DMAC/DTC. This function makes it easy to design an effective self-monitoring debugger, and customers of the chip can easily debug their programs without using a large in-circuit emulator. 7.1 Features • There are 5 types of break compare conditions as follows: ⎯ Address ⎯ CPU cycle or DMAC/DTC cycle ⎯ Instruction fetch or data access ⎯ Read or write ⎯ Operand size: longword/word/byte • User break interrupt generated upon satisfying break conditions • User break interrupt generated before an instruction is executed by selecting break in the CPU instruction fetch. • Module standby mode can be set UBC0001A_000020010800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 101 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the UBC. Module bus Bus interface UBCR UBBR UBAMRH UBAMRL UBARH UBARL Break condition comparator User break interrupt generating circuit UBC [Legend] UBARH, UBARL: UBAMRH, UBAMRL: UBBR: UBCR: User break address registers H, L User break address mask registers H, L User break bus cycle register User break control register Figure 7.1 User Break Controller Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 102 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal bus Interrupt request Interrupt controller 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.2 Register Descriptions The UBC has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • User break address register H (UBARH) User break address register L (UBARL) User break address mask register H (UBAMRH) User break address mask register L (UBAMRL) User break bus cycle register (UBBR) User break control register (UBCR) User Break Address Register (UBAR) 7.2.1 The user break address register (UBAR) consists of two registers: user break address register H (UBARH) and user break address register L (UBARL). Both are 16-bit readable/writable registers. UBARH specifies the upper bits (bits 31 to 16) of the address for the break condition, while UBARL specifies the lower bits (bits 15 to 0). The initial value of UBAR is H'00000000. • UBARH Bits 15 to 0: specifies user break address 31 to 16 (UBA31 to UBA16) • UBARL Bits 15 to 0: specifies user break address 15 to 0 (UBA15 to UBA0) 7.2.2 User Break Address Mask Register (UBAMR) The user break address mask register (UBAMR) consists of two registers: user break address mask register H (UBAMRH) and user break address mask register L (UBAMRL). Both are 16-bit readable/writable registers. UBAMRH specifies whether to mask any of the break address bits set in UBARH, and UBAMRL specifies whether to mask any of the break address bits set in UBARL. • UBAMRH Bits 15 to 0: specifies user break address mask 31 to 16 (UBM31 to UBM16) • UBAMRL Bits 15 to 0: specifies user break address mask 15 to 0 (UBM15 to UBM0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 103 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) Bit UBAMRH15 to UBAMRH0 Bit Name UBM31 to UBM16 Initial Value R/W All 0 R/W Description User Break Address Mask 31 to 16 0: Corresponding UBA bit is included in the break conditions 1: Corresponding UBA bit is not included in the break conditions UBAMRL15 to UBAMRL0 UBM15 to UBM0 All 0 R/W User Break Address Mask 15 to 0 0: Corresponding UBA bit is included in the break conditions 1: Corresponding UBA bit is not included in the break conditions 7.2.3 User Break Bus Cycle Register (UBBR) The user break bus cycle register (UBBR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that sets the four break conditions. Bit 15 to 8 Bit Name — Initial Value R/W All 0 R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 7 6 CP1 CP0 0 0 R/W R/W CPU Cycle/DMAC, DTC Cycle Select 1 and 0 These bits specify break conditions for CPU cycles or DMAC/DTC cycles. 00: No user break interrupt occurs 01: Break on CPU cycles 10: Break on DTC or DMAC cycles 11: Break on both CPU and DMAC or DTC cycles 5 4 ID1 ID0 0 0 R/W R/W Instruction Fetch/Data Access Select1 and 0 These bits select whether to break on instruction fetch and/or data access cycles. 00: No user break interrupt occurs 01: Break on instruction fetch cycles 10: Break on data access cycles 11: Break on both instruction fetch and data access cycles Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 104 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) Bit 3 2 Bit Name Initial Value RW1 RW0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Read/Write Select 1 and 0 These bits select whether to break on read and/or write cycles 00: No user break interrupt occurs 01: Break on read cycles 10: Break on write cycles 11: Break on both read and write cycles 1 0 SZ1 SZ0 0 0 R/W R/W Operand Size Select 1 and 0* These bits select operand size as a break condition. 00: Operand size is not a break condition 01: Break on byte access 10: Break on word access 11: Break on longword access Note: * When breaking on an instruction fetch, clear the SZ0 bit to 0. All instructions are considered to be accessed in word-size (even when there are instructions in on-chip memory and two instruction fetches are performed simultaneously in one bus cycle). Operand size is word for instructions or determined by the operand size specified for the CPU/DTC, DMAC data access. It is not determined by the bus width of the space being accessed. 7.2.4 User Break Control Register (UBCR) The user break control register (UBCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables user break interrupts. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 UBID 0 R/W User Break Disable Enables or disables user break interrupt request generation in the event of a user break condition match. 0: User break interrupt request is enabled 1: User break interrupt request is disabled 15 to 1 — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 105 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.3 7.3.1 Operation Flow of User Break Operation The flow from setting of break conditions to user break interrupt exception processing is described below: 1. The user break addresses are set in the user break address register (UBAR), the desired masked bits in the addresses are set in the user break address mask register (UBAMR) and the breaking bus cycle type is set in the user break bus cycle register (UBBR). If even one of the three groups of the UBBR’s CPU cycle/DMAC, DTC cycle select bits (CP1, CP0), instruction fetch/data access select bits (ID1, ID0), and read/write select bits (RW1, RW0) is set to 00 (no user break generated), no user break interrupt will be generated even if all other conditions are satisfied. When using user break interrupts, always be certain to establish bit conditions for all of these three groups. 2. The UBC uses the method shown in figure 7.2 to determine whether set conditions have been satisfied or not. When the set conditions are satisfied, the UBC sends a user break interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller (INTC). 3. The interrupt controller checks the accepted user break interrupt request signal’s priority level. The user break interrupt has priority level 15, so it is accepted only if the interrupt mask level in bits I3 to I0 in the status register (SR) is 14 or lower. When the I3 to I0 bit level is 15, the user break interrupt cannot be accepted but it is held pending until user break interrupt exception processing can be carried out. Consequently, user break interrupts within NMI exception service routines cannot be accepted, since the I3 to I0 bit level is 15. However, if the I3 to I0 bit level is changed to 14 or lower at the start of the NMI exception service routine, user break interrupts become acceptable thereafter. See section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC), for the details on the handling of priority levels. 4. The INTC sends the user break interrupt request signal to the CPU, which begins user break interrupt exception processing upon receipt. See section 6.6, Operation, for the details on interrupt exception processing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 106 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) UBARH/UBARL UBAMRH/UBAMRL 32 32 32 Internal address bits 31–0 32 32 CP1 CP0 CPU cycle DMAC/DTC cycle ID1 ID0 Instruction fetch User break interrupt Data access RW1 Read cycle RW0 Write cycle SZ1 SZ0 Byte size Word size Longword size UBID Figure 7.2 Break Condition Determination Method Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 107 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.3.2 Break on On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch Cycle Data in on-chip memory (on-chip ROM and/or RAM) is always accessed as 32-bits data in one bus cycle. Therefore, two instructions can be retrieved in one bus cycle when fetching instructions from on-chip memory. At such times, only one bus cycle is generated, but it is possible to cause independent breaks by setting the start addresses of both instructions in the user break address register (UBAR). In other words, when wanting to effect a break using the latter of two addresses retrieved in one bus cycle, set the start address of that instruction in UBAR. The break will occur after execution of the former instruction. 7.3.3 Program Counter (PC) Values Saved Break on Instruction Fetch: The program counter (PC) value saved to the stack in user break interrupt exception processing is the address that matches the break condition. The user break interrupt is generated before the fetched instruction is executed. If a break condition is set in an instruction fetch cycle placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction (delay slot), or on an instruction that follows an interrupt-disabled instruction, however, the user break interrupt is not accepted immediately, but the break condition establishing instruction is executed. The user break interrupt is accepted after execution of the instruction that has accepted the interrupt. In this case, the PC value saved is the start address of the instruction that will be executed after the instruction that has accepted the interrupt. Break on Data Access (CPU/DTC, DMAC): The program counter (PC) value is the top address of the next instruction after the last instruction executed before the user break exception processing started. When data access (CPU/DTC, DMAC) is set as a break condition, the place where the break will occur cannot be specified exactly. The break will occur at the instruction fetched close to where the data access that is to receive the break occurs. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 108 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.4 Examples of Use Break on CPU Instruction Fetch Cycle 1. Register settings: UBARH = H'0000 UBARL = H'0404 UBBR = H'0054 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'00000404 Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, read (operand size is not included in conditions) Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt will occur before the instruction at address H'00000404. If it is possible for the instruction at H'00000402 to accept an interrupt, the user break exception processing will be executed after execution of that instruction. The instruction at H'00000404 is not executed. The PC value saved is H'00000404. 2. Register settings: UBARH = H'0015 UBARL = H'389C UBBR = H'0058 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'0015389C Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, write (operand size is not included in conditions) Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt does not occur because the instruction fetch cycle is not a write cycle. 3. Register settings: UBARH = H'0003 UBARL = H'0147 UBBR = H'0054 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'00030147 Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, read (operand size is not included in conditions) Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt does not occur because the instruction fetch was performed for an even address. However, if the first instruction fetch address after the branch is an odd address set by these conditions, user break interrupt exception processing will be carried out after address error exception processing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 109 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) Break on CPU Data Access Cycle 1. Register settings: UBARH = H'0012 UBARL = H'3456 UBBR = H'006A UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'00123456 Bus cycle: CPU, data access, write, word Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt occurs when word data is written into address H'00123456. 2. Register settings: UBARH = H'00A8 UBARL = H'0391 UBBR = H'0066 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'00A80391 Bus cycle: CPU, data access, read, word Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt does not occur because the word access was performed on an even address. Break on DMAC/DTC Cycle 1. Register settings: UBARH = H'0076 UBARL = H'BCDC UBBR = H'00A7 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'0076BCDC Bus cycle: DMAC/DTC, data access, read, longword Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt occurs when longword data is read from address H'0076BCDC. 2. Register settings: UBARH = H'0023 UBARL = H'45C8 UBBR = H'0094 UBCR = H'0000 Conditions set: Address: H'002345C8 Bus cycle: DMAC/DTC, instruction fetch, read (operand size is not included in conditions) Interrupt requests enabled A user break interrupt does not occur because no instruction fetch is performed in the DMAC/DTC cycle. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 110 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.5 7.5.1 Usage Notes Simultaneous Fetching of Two Instructions Two instructions may be simultaneously fetched in instruction fetch operation. Once a break condition is set on the latter of these two instructions, a user break interrupt will occur before the latter instruction, even though the contents of the UBC registers are modified to change the break conditions immediately after the fetching of the former instruction. 7.5.2 Instruction Fetches at Branches When a conditional branch instruction or TRAPA instruction causes a branch, the order of instruction fetching and execution is as follows: 1. When branching with a conditional branch instruction: BT and BF instructions When branching with a TRAPA instruction: TRAPA instruction a. Instruction fetch order Branch instruction fetch → next instruction overrun fetch → overrun fetch of instruction after the next → branch destination instruction fetch b. Instruction execution order Branch instruction execution → branch destination instruction execution 2. When branching with a delayed conditional branch instruction: BT/S and BF/S instructions a. Instruction fetch order Branch instruction fetch → next instruction fetch (delay slot) → overrun fetch of instruction after the next → branch destination instruction fetch b. Instruction execution order Branch instruction execution → delay slot instruction execution → branch destination instruction execution Thus, when a conditional branch instruction or TRAPA instruction causes a branch, the branch destination instruction will be fetched after an overrun fetch of the next instruction or the instruction after the next. However, as the instruction that is the object of the break does not break until fetching and execution of the instruction have been confirmed, the overrun fetches described above do not become objects of a break. If data accesses are also included in break conditions besides instruction fetch, a break will occur because the instruction overrun fetch is also regarded as satisfying the data break condition. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 111 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 7. User Break Controller (UBC) 7.5.3 Contention between User Break and Exception Processing If a user break is set for the fetch of a particular instruction, and exception processing with higher priority than a user break is in contention and is accepted in the decode stage for that instruction (or the next instruction), user break exception processing may not be performed after completion of the higher-priority exception service routine (on return by RTE). Thus, if a user break condition is specified to the branch destination instruction fetch after a branch (BRA, BRAF, BT, BF, BT/S, BF/S, BSR, BSRF, JMP, JSR, RTS, RTE, exception processing), and that branch instruction accepts an exception processing with higher priority than a user break interrupt, user break exception processing is not performed after completion of the exception service routine. Therefore, a user break condition should not be set for the fetch of the branch destination instruction after a branch. 7.5.4 Break at Non-Delay Branch Instruction Jump Destination When a branch instruction without delay slot (including exception processing) jumps to the destination instruction by executing the branch, a user break will not be generated even if a user break condition has been set for the first jump destination instruction fetch. 7.5.5 Module Standby Mode Setting The UBC can set the module disable/enable by using the module standby control register 2 (MSTCR2). By releasing the module standby mode, register access becomes to be enabled. By setting the MSTP0 bit of MSTCR2 to 1, the UBC is in the module standby mode in which the clock supply is halted. See section 24, Power-Down Modes, for further details. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 112 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) This LSI includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. 8.1 Features • Transfer possible over any number of channels • Three transfer modes Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available • One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) • Direct specification of 32-bit address space possible • Activation by software is possible • Transfer can be set in byte, word, or longword units • The interrupt that activated the DTC can be requested to the CPU • Module standby mode can be set DTCSH21A_010020020700 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 113 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) On-chip ROM On-chip RAM Register control DTMR DTCR DTSAR Activation control DTDAR DTIAR CPU interrupt request source clear control Internal bus On-chip peripheral module Peripheral bus Interrupt request External memory External device (memorymapped) Request priority control DTER DTCSR DTBR External bus Bus interface DTC module bus DTC Bus controller [Legend] DTMR: DTCR: DTSAR: DTDAR: DTC mode register DTC transfer count register DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTIAR: DTER: DTCSR: DTBR: DTC initial address register DTC enable register DTC control/status register DTC information base register Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 114 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2 Register Descriptions The DTC has the following registers. • • • • • • DTC mode register (DTMR) DTC source address register (DTSAR) DTC destination address register (DTDAR) DTC initial address register (DTIAR) DTC transfer count register A (DTCRA) DTC transfer count register B (DTCRB) These six registers cannot be directly accessed from the CPU. When activated, the DTC transfer desired set of register information that is stored in an on-chip RAM to the corresponding DTC registers. After the data transfer, it writes a set of updated register information back to the RAM. • • • • • • • • DTC enable register A (DTEA) DTC enable register B (DTEB) DTC enable register C (DTEC) DTC enable register D (DTED) DTC enable register E (DTEE) DTC enable register G (DTEG) DTC control/status register (DTCSR) DTC information base register (DTBR) For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 115 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.1 DTC Mode Register (DTMR) DTMR is a 16-bit register that selects the DTC operating mode. Bit 15 14 Bit Name SM1 SM0 Initial Value Undefined Undefined R/W — — Description Source Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify a DTSAR operation after a data transfer. 0x: DTSAR is fixed 10: DTSAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz 1 and 0 = 00; by +2 when Sz 1 and 0 = 01; by +4 when Sz 1 and 0 = 10) 11: DTSAR is decremented after a transfer (by –1 when Sz 1 and 0 = 00; by –2 when Sz 1 and 0 = 01; by –4 when Sz 1 and 0 = 10) 13 12 DM1 DM0 Undefined Undefined — — Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify a DTDAR operation after a data transfer. 0x: DTDAR is fixed 10: DTDAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz 1 and 0 = 00; by +2 when Sz 1 and 0 = 01; by +4 when Sz 1 and 0 = 10) 11: DTDAR is decremented after a transfer (by –1 when Sz 1 and 0 = 00; by –2 when Sz 1 and 0 = 01; by –4 when Sz 1 and 0 = 10) 11 10 MD1 MD0 Undefined Undefined — — DTC Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. 00: Normal mode 01: Repeat mode 10: Block transfer mode 11: Setting prohibited 9 8 Sz1 Sz0 Undefined Undefined — — DTC Data Transfer Size 1 and 0 Specify the size of data to be transferred. 00: Byte-size transfer 01: Word-size transfer 10: longword-size transfer 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 116 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Bit 7 Bit Name DTS Initial Value Undefined R/W — Description DTC Transfer Mode Select Specifies whether the source or the destination is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. 0: Destination is repeat area or block area 1: Source is repeat area or block area 6 CHNE Undefined — DTC Chain Transfer Enable When this bit is set to 1, a chain transfer will be performed. 0: Chain transfer is canceled 1: Chain transfer is set In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the activation source flag, and clearing of DTER is not performed. 5 DISEL Undefined — DTC Interrupt Select When this bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt request is generated every time a data transfer ends. When this bit is set to 0, a CPU interrupt request is generated at the time when the specified number of data transfer ends. 4 NMIM Undefined — DTC NMI Mode This bit designates whether to terminate transfers when an NMI is input during DTC transfers. 0: Terminate DTC transfer upon an NMI 1: Continue DTC transfer until end of transfer being executed 3 to 0 — Undefined — Reserved These bits have no effect on DTC operation. The write value should always be 0. [Legend] x: Don’t care Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 117 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.2 DTC Source Address Register (DTSAR) The DTC source address register (DTSAR) is a 32-bit register that specifies the DTC transfer source address. For the word size transfer, specify an even source address. For the longword size transfer, specify a multiple-of-four address. The initial value of DTSAR is undefined. 8.2.3 DTC Destination Address Register (DTDAR) The DTC destination address register (DTDAR) is a 32-bit register that specifies the DTC transfer destination address. For the word size transfer, specify an even source address. For the longword size transfer, specify a multiple-of-four address. The initial value of DTDAR is undefined. 8.2.4 DTC Initial Address Register (DTIAR) The DTC initial address register (DTIAR) is a 32-bit register that specifies the initial transfer source/transfer destination address in repeat mode. In repeat mode, when the DTS bit is set to 1, specify the initial transfer source address in the repeat area, and when the DTS bit is cleared to 0, specify the initial transfer destination address in the repeat area. The initial value of DTIAR is undefined. 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (DTCRA) DTCRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the DTCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. The number of transfers is 1 when the set value is H'0001, 65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000. In repeat mode, upper 8-bit DTCRAH maintains the transfer count value and lower 8-bit DTCRAL functions as an 8-bit transfer counter. The number of transfers is 1 when the set value is DTCRAH = DTCRAL = H'01, 255 when they are H'FF, and 256 when it is H'00. In block transfer mode, the DTCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. The number of transfers is 1 when the set value is H'0001, 65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 118 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) The initial value of DTCRA is undefined. 8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (DTCRB) The DTCRB is a 16-bit register that designates the block length in block transfer mode. The block length is 1 when the set value is H'0001, 65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000. The initial value of DTCRB is undefined. 8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTER) DTER which is comprised of six registers, DTEA to DTEE, DTEG, is a register that specifies DTC activation interrupt sources. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTE bits is shown in table 8.1. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTE*7 DTE*6 DTE*5 DTE*4 DTE*3 DTE*2 DTE*1 DTE*0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description DTC Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 specifies the corresponding interrupt source to a DTC activation source. [Clearing conditions] • • • When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended When the specified number of transfers have ended 0 is written to the bit to be cleared after 1 has been read from the bit These bits are not cleared when the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended. [Setting condition] 1 is written to the bit to be set after a 0 has been read from the bit Note: * The last character of the DTC enable register’s name comes here. Example: DTEB3 in DTEB, etc. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 119 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.8 DTC Control/Status Register (DTCSR) DTCSR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to disable/enable DTC activation by software and to set the DTC vector addresses for software activation. It also indicates the DTC transfer status. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits have no effect on DTC operation. The write value should always be 0. 0 R/(W)*1 NMI Flag Bit This bit indicates that an NMI interrupt has occurred. 0: No NMI interrupts [Clearing condition] • Write 0 after reading the NMIF bit 15 to — 11 10 NMIF 1: NMI interrupt has been generated When the NMIF bit is set, DTC transfers are not allowed even if the DTER bit is set to 1. If, however, a transfer has already started with the NMIM bit of the DTMR set to 1, execution will continue until that transfer ends. 9 AE 0 R/(W)*1 Address Error Flag This bit indicates that an address error by the DTC has occurred. 0: No address error by the DTC [Clearing condition] • Write 0 after reading the AE bit 1: An address error by the DTC occurred When the AE bit is set, DTC transfers are not allowed even if the DTER bit is set to 1. 8 SWDTE 0 R/W*2 DTC Software Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 activates DTC. 0: DTC activation by software disabled 1: DTC activation by software enabled Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 120 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTVEC7 DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description DTC Software Activation Vectors 7 to 0 These bits specify the lower eight bits of the vector addresses for DTC activation by software. A vector address is calculated as H'0400 + DTVEC (7:0). Always specify 0 for DTVEC0. For example, when DTVEC7 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0410. When the bit SWDTE is 0, these bits can be written to. Notes: 1. For the NMIF and AE bits, only a 0 write after a 1 read is possible. 2. For the SWDTE bit, a 1 write is always possible, but a 0 write is possible only after a 1 is read. 8.2.9 DTC Information Base Register (DTBR) The DTBR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the upper 16 bits of the memory address containing DTC transfer information. Always access the DTBR in word or longword units. If it is accessed in byte units the register contents will become undefined at the time of a write, and undefined values will be read out upon reads. The initial value of DTBR is undefined. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 121 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.3 8.3.1 Operation Activation Sources The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTCSR by software. An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTER bit. At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source interrupt flag or corresponding DTER bit is cleared. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI_2, for example, is the RDRF flag of SCI2. When a DTC is activated by an interrupt, existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities. Figure 8.2 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC). Interrupt requests (those not designated as DMAC activating sources) Interrupt requests IRQ on-chip peripheral DMAC Source flag clear Source flag clear Clear DTC DTER DTC activation request INTC CPU interrupt requests (those not designated as DTC activating sources) DTC control Figure 8.2 Activating Source Control Block Diagram 8.3.2 Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table Figure 8.3 shows the allocation of register information in memory space. The register information start addresses are designated by DTBR for the upper 16 bits, and the DTC vector table for the lower 16 bits. The allocation in order from the register information start address in normal mode is DTMR, DTCRA, 4 bytes empty (no effect on DTC operation), DTSAR, then DTDAR. In repeat mode it is DTMR, DTCRA, DTIAR, DTSAR, and DTDAR. In block transfer mode, it is DTMR, DTCRA, 2 bytes empty (no effect on DTC operation), DTCRB, DTSAR, then DTDAR. Fundamentally, certain RAM areas are designated for addresses storing register information. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 122 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Memory space Register information start address Memory space Memory space DTMR DTCRA DTMR DTCRA DTIAR DTMR DTCRA DTCRB DTSAR DTDAR Register information DTSAR DTDAR DTSAR DTDAR Normal mode Repeat mode Block transfer mode Figure 8.3 DTC Register Information Allocation in Memory Space Figure 8.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information allocation. For each DTC activating source there are 2 bytes in the DTC vector table, which contain the register information start address. Table 8.1 shows the correspondence between activating sources and vector addresses. When activating with software, the vector address is calculated as H'0400 + DTVEC[7:0]. Through DTC activation, a register information start address is read from the vector table, then register information placed in memory space is read from that register information start address. Always designate register information start addresses in multiples of four. DTBR Transfer information start address (upper 16 bits) DTC vector table Register information DTC vector address Register information start address (lower 16 bits) Memory space Figure 8.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Transfer Information Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 123 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.1 Activating Source Generator MTU (CH4) Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTEs Activating Source TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TGIC_4 TGID_4 TCIV_4 DTC Vector Address H'00000400 H'00000402 H'00000404 H'00000406 H'00000408 H'0000040A H'0000040C H'0000040E H'00000410 H'00000412 H'00000414 H'00000416 H'00000418 H'0000041A H'0000041C H'0000041E H'00000420 H'00000422 H'00000424 H'00000426 H'00000428 H'0000042A H'0000042C H'0000042E H'00000430 H'00000432 H'00000434 H'00000436 Transfer Source Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* ADDR0 Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Transfer Destination Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Arbitrary* Low DTE Bit DTEA7 DTEA6 DTEA5 DTEA4 DTEA3 DTEA2 DTEA1 DTEA0 DTEB7 DTEB6 DTEB5 DTEB4 DTEB3 DTEB2 DTEB1 DTEB0 DTEC7 DTEC6 DTEC5 DTEC4 DTEC3 DTEC2 DTEC1 DTEC0 DTED7 DTED6 DTED5 DTED4 Priority High MTU (CH3) TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3 MTU (CH2) TGIA_2 TGIB_2 MTU (CH1) TGIA_1 TGIB_1 MTU (CH0) TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 A/D converter (CH0) External pin ADI0 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 CMT (CH0) CMT (CH1) CMI0 CMI1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 124 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Activating Source Generator SCI0 Activating Source RXI_0 TXI_0 DTC Vector Address H'00000438 H'0000043A H'0000043C H'0000043E DTE Bit DTED3 DTED2 DTED1 DTED0 Transfer Source RDR_0 Arbitrary* RDR_1 Arbitrary* — ADDR1 — RDR_2 Arbitrary* RDR_3 Arbitrary* — ICDR (receive) Arbitrary* (transmit) Transfer Destination Arbitrary* TDR_0 Arbitrary* TDR_1 — Arbitrary* — Arbitrary* TDR_2 Arbitrary* TDR_3 — Arbitrary* (receive) ICDR (transmit) — Arbitrary* Priority High SCI1 RXI_1 TXI_1 Reserved A/D converter (CH1) Reserved SCI2 — ADI1 — RXI_2 TXI_2 H'00000440 to — H'00000443 H'00000444 H'00000446 H'00000448 H'0000044A H'0000044C H'0000044E DTEE5 — DTEE3 DTEE2 DTEE1 DTEE0 SCI3 RXI_3 TXI_3 Reserved IIC — ICI H'00000450 to — H'0000045F H'00000460 DTEG7 Reserved Software Note: * — Write to DTCSR H'00000462 to — H'0000049F H'0400+ DTVEC[7:0] — — Arbitrary* Low External memory, memory-mapped external devices, on-chip memory, on-chip peripheral modules (excluding DMAC and DTC) 8.3.3 DTC Operation Register information is stored in an on-chip RAM. When activated, the DTC reads register information in an on-chip RAM and transfers data. After the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to the RAM. Pre-storage of register information in the RAM makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. The transfer mode can be specified as normal, repeat, and block transfer mode. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation source (chain transfer). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 125 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) The 32-bit DTSAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 32-bit DTDAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, DTSAR and DTDAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed depending on its register information. Start Initial settings DTMR, DTCR, DTIAR, DTSAR, DTDAR NMIF = AE = 0? Yes Transfer request generated? Yes DTC vector read No No Transfer information read DTCRA = DTCRA – 1 (normal/block transfer mode) DTCRAL = DTCRAL – 1 (repeat mode) Transfer (1 transfer unit) DTSAR, DTDAR update DTCRB = DTCRB – 1 (block transfer mode) Block transfer mode and DTCRB ≠ 0? No Transfer information write NMIF • NMIM + AE = 1? Yes Transfer information write No Yes NMI or address error CHNE = 0? Yes No CPU interrupt request When DISEL = 1 or DTCRA = 0 (normal/block transfer mode) When DISEL = 1 (repeat transfer mode) End Figure 8.5 DTC Operation Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 126 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Normal Mode: Performs the transfer of one byte, one word, or one longword for each activation. The total transfer count is 1 to 65536. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 8.2 lists the register functions in normal mode. Figure 8.6 shows a memory map in normal mode. Table 8.2 Normal Mode Register Functions Values Written Back upon Transfer Information Write Register DTMR DTCRA DTSAR DTDAR Function Operation mode control Transfer count Transfer source address Transfer destination address When DTCRA is other than 1 DTMR DTCRA – 1 Increment/decrement/fixed Increment/decrement/fixed When DTCRA is 1 DTMR DTCRA – 1 (= H'0000) Increment/decrement/fixed Increment/decrement/fixed DTSAR Transfer DTDAR Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode Repeat Mode: Performs the transfer of one byte, one word, or one longword for each activation. Either the transfer source or transfer destination is designated as the repeat area. Table 8.3 lists the register functions in repeat mode. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored, and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Figure 8.7 shows a memory map in repeat mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 127 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.3 Repeat Mode Register Functions Values Written Back upon Transfer Information Write Register DTMR DTCRAH DTCRAL DTIAR DTSAR Function Operation mode control Transfer count save Transfer count Initial address Transfer source address Transfer destination address When DTCRA is other than 1 When DTCRA is 1 DTMR DTCRAH DTCRAL – 1 (Not written back) Increment/decrement/fixed DTMR DTCRAH DTCRAH (Not written back) (DTS = 0) Increment/ decrement/fixed (DTS = 1) DTIAR (DTS = 0) DTIAR (DTS = 1) Increment/ decrement/fixed DTDAR Increment/decrement/fixed DTSAR or DTDAR Repeat area Transfer DTDAR or DTSAR Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 128 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Block Transfer Mode: Performs the transfer of one block for each one activation. Either the transfer source or transfer destination is designated as the block area. The block length is specified between 1 and 65536. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 8.4 lists the register functions in block transfer mode. Figure 8.8 shows a memory map in block transfer mode. Table 8.4 Register DTMR DTCRA DTCRB DTSAR DTDAR Block Transfer Mode Register Functions Function Operation mode control Transfer count Block length Transfer source address Transfer destination address Values Written Back upon Transfer Information Write DTMR DTCRA – 1 (Not written back) (DTS = 0) Increment/ decrement/ fixed (DTS = 1) DTSAR initial value (DTS = 0) DTDAR initial value (DTS = 1) Increment/ decrement/ fixed Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 129 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) First block DTSAR or DTDAR • • • Block area Transfer DTDAR or DTSAR Nth block Figure 8.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode Chain Transfer: Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in a single activation source. DTSAR, DTDAR, DTMR, DTCRA, and DTCRB can be set independently. Figure 8.9 shows the chain transfer. When activated, the DTC reads the register information start address stored at the vector address, and then reads the first register information at that start address. After the data transfer, the CHNE bit will be tested. When it has been set to 1, DTC reads next register information located in a consecutive area and performs the data transfer. These sequences are repeated until the CHNE bit is cleared to 0. In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 130 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Source Register information CHNE = 1 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information CHNE = 0 Destination Source Destination Figure 8.9 Chain Transfer Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 131 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.3.4 Interrupt Source An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. Note: When the DTCR contains a value equal to or greater than 2, the SWDTE bit is automatically cleared to 0. When the DTCR is set to 1, the SWDTE bit is again set to 1. 8.3.5 Operation Timing When register information is located in on-chip RAM, each mode requires 4 cycles for transfer information reads, and 3 cycles for writes. φ Activating source DTC request Address Vector read Transfer information read R W Data transfer Transfer information write Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing Example (Normal Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 132 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.3.6 DTC Execution State Counts Table 8.5 shows the execution state for one DTC data transfer. Furthermore, table 8.6 shows the state counts needed for execution state. Table 8.5 Execution State of DTC Register Information Vector Read I Read/Write J 1 1 1 7 7 7 Internal Operation M 1 1 1 Mode Normal Repeat Block transfer N: Data Read K 1 1 N Data Write L 1 1 N block size (default set values of DTCRB) Table 8.6 State Counts Needed for Execution State On-chip On-chip Internal I/O RAM ROM Register 32 1 SI SJ SK SK SK SL SL SL SM — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 or 16 2* 1 2 Access Objective Bus width Access state Execution Vector read state Register information read/write Byte data read Word data read Long word data read Byte data write Word data write Longword data write Internal operation External Device 8 2 4 8 2 4 8 2 4 8 16 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2 4 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3* — — 2 2 4 2 2 4 1 — — 3 3 6 3 3 6 Notes: 1. Two state access module: port, INT, CMT, SCI, etc. 2. Three state access module: WDT, UBC, etc. The execution state count is calculated using the following formula. Σ indicates the number of transfers by one activating source (count + 1 when CHNE bit is set to 1). Execution state count = I · SI + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 133 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.4 8.4.1 Procedures for Using DTC Activation by Interrupt The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: 1. Set the DTMR, DTCRA, DTSAR, DTDAR, DTCRB, and DTIAR register information in memory space. 2. Specify the register information start address with DTBR and the DTC vector table. 3. Set the corresponding DTER bit to 1. 4. The DTC is activated when an interrupt source occurs. 5. When interrupt requests are not made to the CPU, the interrupt source is cleared, but the DTER is not. When interrupts are requested, the interrupt source is not cleared, but the DTER is. 6. Interrupt sources are cleared within the CPU interrupt routine. When doing continuous DTC data transfers, set the DTER to 1 after reading DTER = 0. 8.4.2 Activation by Software The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: 1. Set the DTMR, DTCRA, DTSAR, DTDAR, DTCRB, and DTIAR register information in memory space. 2. Set the start address of the register information in the DTBR register and the DTC vector address. 3. Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. 4. Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVEC. 5. Check the vector number written to DTVEC. 6. After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested. 7. The SWDTE bit is cleared to 0 within the CPU interrupt routine. For continuous DTC data transfer, set the SWDTE bit to 1 after confirming that its current value is 0. Then write the vector number to DTVEC for continuous DTC transfer. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 134 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.4.3 DTC Use Example The following is a DTC use example of a 128-byte data reception by the SCI: 1. The settings are: DTMR source address fixed (SM1 = SM0 = 0), destination address incremented (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), byte size (SZ1 = SZ0 = 0), one transfer per activating source (CHNE = 0), and a CPU interrupt request after the designated number of data transfers (DISEL = 0). DTS bit can be set to any value. 128 (H'0080) is set in DTCRA, the RDR address of the SCI is set in DTSAR, and the start address of the RAM storing the receive data is set in DTDAR. DTCRB can be set to any value. 2. Set the register information start address with DTBR and the DTC vector table. 3. Set the corresponding DTER bit to 1. 4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. 5. Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DTDAR is incremented and DTCRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 6. When DTCRA is 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the corresponding bit in DTER is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine should perform completion processing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 135 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 8. Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.5 8.5.1 Usage Notes Prohibition against DMAC/DTC Register Access by DTC DMAC and DTC register access by the DMAC is prohibited. 8.5.2 Module Standby Mode Setting DTC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module standby control register. The initial setting is for DTC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module standby mode. When the MSTP24 and MSTP25 bits in MSTCR1 are set to 1, the DTC clock is halted and the DTC enters module standby mode. The MSTP24 and MSTP25 bit cannot be set to 1 during activation of the DTC. In addition, when the module standby mode is entered, clear all the DTER bits to 0. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down Modes. 8.5.3 On-Chip RAM The DTMR, DTSAR, DTDAR, DTCRA,DTCRB and DTIAR registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 136 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Section 9 Bus State Controller (BSC) The bus state controller (BSC) divides up the address spaces and outputs control signals for various types of memory. This enables memories like SRAM and ROM to be connected directly to the chip without external circuitry. 9.1 Features The BSC has the following features: • Address space is divided into four spaces ⎯ A maximum linear 2 Mbytes for on-chip ROM enabled mode, and a maximum 4 Mbytes for on-chip ROM disabled mode, for address spaces CS0 and CS4 ⎯ A maximum linear 4 Mbytes for address space CS1 to CS3 and CS5 to CS7 ⎯ Bus width (8, 16, or 32 bits) can be selected for each space ⎯ Wait states can be inserted by software for each space ⎯ Wait state insertion with WAIT pin in external memory space access ⎯ Outputs control signals for each space according to the type of memory connected • On-chip ROM and RAM interfaces ⎯ On-chip ROM and RAM access of 32 bits in 1 state BSC1001A_020020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 137 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Figure 9.1 shows the BSC block diagram. Bus interface On-chip memory control unit RAMER WAIT Wait control unit WCR2 BCR1 CS0 to CS7 Area control unit BCR2 RD WRHH, WRHL WRH, WRL Memory control unit BSC WCR1: WCR2: BCR1: BCR2: RAMER: Wait control register 1 Wait control register 2 Bus control register 1 Bus control register 2 RAM emulation register Note: Refer to section 19, Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version), for RAMER. Pins CS4 to CS7 are available only for the masked ROM version and ROMless version. Figure 9.1 BSC Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 138 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Module bus WCR1 Internal bus 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.2 Input/Output Pins Table 9.1 shows the bus state controller pin configuration. Table 9.1 Name Address bus Pin Configuration Abbr. A21 to A0 I/O Description Output Address output (Address bus A21 to A18 pins are disabled and I/O port function is enabled after power-on-reset.) I/O 32-bit data bus Data bus Chip select Read Write D31 to D0 CS0 to CS7* Output Chip select signal indicating the area being accessed RD WRHH WRHL WRH WRL Output Strobe that indicates the read cycle Output Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the first byte (D31 to D24) Output Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the second byte (D23 to D16) Output Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the third byte (D15 to D8) Output Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the fourth byte (D7 to D0) Input Input Wait state request signal Bus request input Wait Bus request Bus acknowledge Note: * WAIT BREQ BACK Output Bus use enable output Pins CS4 to CS7 are available only for the masked ROM version and ROMless version. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 139 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.3 Register Configuration The BSC has five registers. For details on these register addresses and register states in each processing states, refer to section 25, List of Registers. These registers are used to control wait states, bus width, and interfaces with memories like ROM and SRAM. All registers are 16 bits. • • • • • Bus control register 1 (BCR1) Bus control register 2 (BCR2) Wait control register 1 (WCR1) Wait control register 2 (WCR2) RAM emulation register (RAMER) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 140 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.4 Address Map Figure 9.2 shows the address format used by this LSI. A31 to A24 A23, A22 A21 A0 Output address: Output from the address pins CS space selection: Decoded, outputs CS0 to CS7 when A31 to A24 = 00000000 or 00000001 Space selection: Not output externally; used to select the type of space On-chip ROM space or CS space when 00000000 or 00000001 (H'00 or H'01) Reserved (do not access) when 00000010 to 11111110 (H'02 to H'FE) On-chip peripheral module space or on-chip RAM space when 11111111 (H'FF) Figure 9.2 Address Format This chip uses 32-bit addresses: • Bits A31 to A24 are used to select the type of space and are not output externally. • Bits A23 and A22 are decoded and output as chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) for the corresponding areas when bits A31 to A24 are 00000000 or 00000001. • Bits A21 to A0 are output externally. Table 9.2 shows the address map. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 141 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Table 9.2 Address Map • On-chip ROM enabled mode Address H'00000000 to H'0003FFFF H'00040000 to H'001FFFFF H'00200000 to H'003FFFFF H'00400000 to H'007FFFFF H'00800000 to H'00BFFFFF H'00C00000 to H'00FFFFFF H'01000000 to H'011FFFFF H'01200000 to H'013FFFFF H'01400000 to H'017FFFFF H'01800000 to H'01BFFFFF H'01C00000 to H'01FFFFFF H'02000000 to H'FFFF7FFF H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFBFFF H'FFFFC000 to H'FFFFDFFF H'FFFFE000 to H'FFFFFFFF Space On-chip ROM Reserved CS0 space CS1 space CS2 space CS3 space Reserved CS4 space* CS5 space* CS6 space* CS7 space* Reserved On-chip peripheral module Reserved On-chip RAM 3 Memory On-chip ROM Reserved External space External space External space External space Reserved External space External space External space External space Reserved On-chip peripheral module Reserved On-chip RAM Size 256 kbytes Bus Width 32 bits 2 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 1 1 1 1 2 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 16 kbytes 8/16 bits 8 kbytes 32 bits Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 142 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) • On-chip ROM disabled mode Address H'00000000 to H'003FFFFF H'00400000 to H'007FFFFF H'00800000 to H'00BFFFFF H'00C00000 to H'00FFFFFF H'01000000 to H'013FFFFF H'01400000 to H'017FFFFF H'01800000 to H'01BFFFFF H'01C00000 to H'01FFFFFF H'02000000 to H'FFFF7FFF H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFBFFF H'FFFFC000 to H'FFFFDFFF H'FFFFE000 to H'FFFFFFFF Space CS0 space CS1 space CS2 space CS3 space CS4 space* CS5 space* CS6 space* CS7 space* Reserved On-chip peripheral module Reserved On-chip RAM 3 Memory External space External space External space External space External space External space External space External space Reserved On-chip peripheral module Reserved On-chip RAM Size 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes 4 Mbytes Bus Width 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 2 1 1 1 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 8/16/32 bits* 2 3 1 3 1 3 1 16 kbytes 8/16 bits 8 kbytes 32 bits Notes: Do not access reserved spaces. Operation cannot be guaranteed if they are accessed. Spaces other than on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and on-chip peripheral modules cannot be used in single-chip mode. 1. Selected by setting the on-chip register. 2. Selected by the mode pin: 8 or 16 bits in SH7144 (112 pins) 16 or 32 bits in SH7145 (144 pins) 3. Spaces CS4 to CS7 are available only for the masked ROM version and ROMless version. These spaces are reserved for the flash memory version and emulator. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 143 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.5 9.5.1 Register Descriptions Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1) BCR1 is a 16-bit readable/writable register that enables access to the MTU control registers and specifies the bus size of each CS space. When using the SH7144, specify the bus size as word (16bit) or smaller size. Write bits 7 to 0 of BCR1 during the initialization stage after a power-on reset, and do not change the values thereafter. In on-chip ROM enabled mode, do not access any of each CS space until completion of register initialization. In on-chip ROM disabled mode, do not access CS spaces other than CS0 and CS4 until completion of register initialization. Bit 15 Bit Name Initial Value R/W ⎯ 0 R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 14 ⎯ 1 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 13 MTURWE 1 R/W MTU read/write enable This bit enables MTU control register access. For details, refer to section 11, Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU). 0: MTU control register access is disabled 1: MTU control register access is enabled 12 to 8 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 7 A3LG 0 R/W CS3 and CS7 space longword This bit specifies the CS3 and CS7 space bus size. This bit is valid only for the SH7145. This bit is reserved in SH7144. This bit is always read as 0 and should always be written with 0. 0: Depends on the value set with the A3SZ bit in this register. 1: Longword (32 bits) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 144 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 6 Bit Name Initial Value R/W A2LG 0 R/W Description CS2 and CS6 space longword This bit specifies the CS2 and CS6 space bus size. This bit is valid only for the SH7145. This bit is reserved in SH7144. This bit is always read as 0 and should always be written with 0. 0: Depends on the value set with the A2SZ bit in this register. 1: Longword (32 bits) 5 A1LG 0 R/W CS1 and CS5 space longword This bit specifies the CS1 and CS5 space bus size. This bit is valid only for the SH7145. This bit is reserved in SH7144. This bit is always read as 0 and should always be written with 0. 0: Depends on the value set with the A1SZ bit in this register. 1: Longword (32 bits) 4 A0LG 0 R/W CS0 and CS4 space longword This bit specifies the CS0 and CS4 space bus size. This bit is valid only for the SH7145. This bit is reserved in SH7144. This bit is always read as 0 and should always be written with 0. 0: Depends on the value set with the A0SZ bit in this register. 1: Longword (32 bits) Note: A0LG is valid only in on-chip ROM enabled mode. The CS0 and CS4 space bus size is specified with the mode pin in on-chip ROM disabled mode. 3 A3SZ 1 R/W CS3 and CS7 space size This bit specifies the CS3 and CS7 space bus size in A3LG = 0. 0: Byte (8 bits) 1: Word (16 bits) Note: In A3LG = 1, this bit is ignored and the CS3 and CS7 space bus size is longword (32 bits). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 145 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 2 Bit Name Initial Value R/W A2SZ 1 R/W Description CS2 and CS6 space size This bit specifies the CS2 and CS6 space bus size in A2LG = 0. 0: Byte (8 bits) 1: Word (16 bits) Note: In A2LG = 1, this bit is ignored and the CS2 and CS6 space bus size is longword (32 bits). 1 A1SZ 1 R/W CS1 and CS5 space size This bit specifies the CS1 and CS5 space bus size in A1LG = 0. 0: Byte (8 bits) 1: Word (16 bits) Note: In A1LG = 1, this bit is ignored and the CS1 and CS5 space bus size is longword (32 bits). 0 A0SZ 1 R/W CS0 and CS4 space size This bit specifies the CS0 and CS4 space bus size in A0LG = 0. 0: Byte (8 bits) 1: Word (16 bits) Note: This bit is valid only in on-chip ROM enabled mode. The CS0 and CS4 space bus size is specified with the mode pin in on-chip ROM disabled mode. Even in on-chip ROM enabled mode, this bit is ignored in A0LG = 1, and the CS0 and CS4 space bus size is longword (32 bits). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 146 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.5.2 Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2) BCR2 is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of idle cycles and CS signal assert extension of each CS space. Bit 15 14 Bit Name Initial Value R/W IW31 IW30 1 1 R/W R/W Description Idle cycles in CS3 and CS7 space cycles After read access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces, these bits insert idle cycles (1) when the write cycle to the CS3 space continues, (2) when the write cycle to the CS7 space continues, or (3) when continuous access is made to CS spaces except for the CS3 and CS7 spaces. 00: No idle cycle inserted after access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces 01: One idle cycle inserted after access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces 10: Two idle cycles inserted after access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces 11: Three idle cycles inserted after access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces 13 12 IW21 IW20 1 1 R/W R/W Idle cycles in CS2 and CS6 space cycles After read access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces, these bits insert idle cycles (1) when the write cycle to the CS2 space continues, (2) when the write cycle to the CS6 space continues, or (3) when continuous access is made to CS spaces except for the CS2 and CS6 spaces. 00: No idle cycle inserted after access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces 01: One idle cycle inserted after access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces 10: Two idle cycles inserted after access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces 11: Three idle cycles inserted after access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 147 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 11 10 Bit Name Initial Value R/W IW11 IW10 1 1 R/W R/W Description Idle cycles in CS1 and CS5 space cycles After read access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces, these bits insert idle cycles (1) when the write cycle to the CS1 space continues, (2) when the write cycle to the CS5 space continues, or (3) when continuous access is made to CS spaces except for the CS1 and CS5 spaces. 00: No idle cycle inserted after access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces 01: One idle cycle inserted after access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces 10: Two idle cycles inserted after access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces 11: Three idle cycles inserted after access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces 9 8 IW01 IW00 1 1 R/W R/W Idle cycles in CS0 and CS4 space cycles After read access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces, these bits insert idle cycles (1) when the write cycle to the CS0 space continues, (2) when the write cycle to the CS4 space continues, or (3) when continuous access is made to CS spaces except for the CS0 and CS4 spaces. 00: No idle cycle inserted after access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces 01: One idle cycle inserted after access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces 10: Two idle cycles inserted after access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces 11: Three idle cycles inserted after access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 148 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value R/W CW3 1 R/W Description Idle cycles at continuous access to CS3 and CS7 spaces This bit inserts an idle cycle and negates the CS3 signal to make the bus cycle end obvious when accessing the CS3 space continuously. An idle cycle set by this bit is also inserted when access is made to the CS7 space after access to the CS3 space. In addition, an idle cycle set by this bit is inserted when continuous access is made to the CS7 space, and when access is made to the CS3 space after access to the CS7 space. 0: No idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces. 1: One idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS3 and CS7 spaces. When the write cycle follows the read cycle, the larger of the value specified with IW and that specified with CW is used as the idle cycles to be inserted. 6 CW2 1 R/W Idle cycles at continuous access to CS2 and CS6 spaces This bit inserts an idle cycle and negates the CS2 signal to make the bus cycle end obvious when accessing the CS2 space continuously. An idle cycle set by this bit is also inserted when access is made to the CS6 space after access to the CS2 space. In addition, an idle cycle set by this bit is inserted when continuous access is made to the CS6 space, and when access is made to the CS2 space after access to the CS6 space. 0: No idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces. 1: One idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS2 and CS6 spaces. When the write cycle follows the read cycle, the larger of the value specified with IW and that specified with CW is used as the idle cycles to be inserted. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 149 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 5 Bit Name Initial Value R/W CW1 1 R/W Description Idle cycles at continuous access to CS1 and CS5 spaces This bit inserts an idle cycle and negates the CS1 signal to make the bus cycle end obvious when accessing the CS1 space continuously. An idle cycle set by this bit is also inserted when access is made to the CS5 space after access to the CS1 space. In addition, an idle cycle set by this bit is inserted when continuous access is made to the CS5 space, and when access is made to the CS1 space after access to the CS5 space. 0: No idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces. 1: One idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS1 and CS5 spaces. When the write cycle follows the read cycle, the larger of the value specified with IW and that specified with CW is used as the idle cycles to be inserted. 4 CW0 1 R/W Idle cycles at continuous access to CS0 and CS4 spaces This bit inserts an idle cycle and negates the CS0 signal to make the bus cycle end obvious when accessing the CS0 space continuously. An idle cycle set by this bit is also inserted when access is made to the CS4 space after access to the CS0 space. In addition, an idle cycle set by this bit is inserted when continuous access is made to the CS4 space, and when access is made to the CS0 space after access to the CS4 space. 0: No idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces. 1: One idle cycle inserted at continuous access to the CS0 and CS4 spaces. When the write cycle follows the read cycle, the larger of the value specified with IW and that specified with CW is used as the idle cycles to be inserted. 3 SW3 1 R/W CS assert period extension for CS3 and CS7 spaces This bit inserts a cycle to prevent the assert period of RD and WRx from extending the assert period of CS3 and CS7. 0: No cycle inserted for CS assert period for CS3 and CS7 spaces. 1: CS assert extension for CS3 and CS7 spaces. (Each one cycle inserted before and after the bus cycle) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 150 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) Bit 2 Bit Name Initial Value R/W SW2 1 R/W Description CS assert period extension for CS2 and CS6 spaces This bit inserts a cycle to prevent the assert period of RD and WRx from extending the assert period of CS2 and CS6. 0: No cycle inserted for CS assert period for CS2 and CS6 spaces. 1: CS assert extension for CS2 and CS6 spaces. (Each one cycle inserted before and after the bus cycle) 1 SW1 1 R/W CS assert period extension for CS1 and CS5 spaces This bit inserts a cycle to prevent the assert period of RD and WRx from extending the assert period of CS1 and CS5. 0: No cycle inserted for CS assert period for CS1 and CS5 spaces. 1: CS assert extension for CS1 and CS5 spaces. (Each one cycle inserted before and after the bus cycle) 0 SW0 1 R/W CS assert period extension for CS0 and CS4 spaces This bit inserts a cycle to prevent the assert period of RD and WRx from extending the assert period of CS0 and CS4. 0: No cycle inserted for CS assert period for CS0 and CS4 spaces. 1: CS assert extension for CS0 and CS4 spaces. (Each one cycle inserted before and after the bus cycle) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 151 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.5.3 Wait Control Register 1 (WCR1) WCR1 is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of wait cycles (0 to 15) for each CS space. Bit 15 14 13 12 Bit Name W33 W32 W31 W30 Initial Value 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description CS3 and CS7 Space Wait Specification These bits specify the number of waits for CS3 and CS7 space access. 0000: No wait (external wait input disabled) 0001: One wait (external wait input enabled) . . . 1111: 15 waits (external wait input enabled) 11 10 9 8 W23 W22 W21 W20 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W CS2 and CS6 Space Wait Specification These bits specify the number of waits for CS2 and CS6 space access. 0000: No wait (external wait input disabled) 0001: One wait (external wait input enabled) . . . 1111: 15 waits (external wait input enabled) 7 6 5 4 W13 W12 W11 W10 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W CS1 and CS5 Space Wait Specification These bits specify the number of waits for CS1 and CS5 space access. 0000: No wait (external wait input disabled) 0001: One wait (external wait input enabled) . . . 1111: 15 waits (external wait input enabled) 3 2 1 0 W03 W02 W01 W00 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W CS0 and CS4 Space Wait Specification These bits specify the number of waits for CS0 and CS4 space access. 0000: No wait (external wait input disabled) 0001: One wait (external wait input enabled) . . . 1111: 15 waits (external wait input enabled) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 152 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.5.4 Wait Control Register 2 (WCR2) WCR2 is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of access cycles to the CS space in DMA single address mode transfer. Do not perform DMA single address transfer before setting WCR2. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 3 2 1 0 DSW3 DSW2 DSW1 DSW0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Number of wait cycles for access to CS space in DMA single address mode These bits specify the number of wait cycles (0 to 15) for access to the CS space in DMA single address mode. These bits are independent of the W bit in WCR1. 0000: No wait (external wait insertion disabled) 0001: One wait (external wait insertion enabled) : 1111: 15 waits (external waits insertion enabled) 15 to 4 ⎯ 9.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) RAMER is a 16-bit readable/writable register that selects the RAM area to be used when emulating realtime programming of flash memory. For details, refer to section 19.5.5, RAM Emulation Register (RAMER). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 153 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.6 Accessing External Space A strobe signal is output in external space accesses to provide primarily for SRAM or ROM direct connections. 9.6.1 Basic Timing External access bus cycles are performed in 2 states. Figure 9.3 shows the basic timing of external space access. T1 CK Address CSn RD Read Data WRxx Write Data T2 DACK Figure 9.3 Basic Timing of External Space Access During a read, irrespective of operand size, all bits in the data bus width for the access space (address) accessed by RD signal are fetched by the LSI. During a write, the WRHH (bits 31 to 24), the WRHL (bits 23 to 16), the WRH (bits 15 to 8), and the WRL (bits 7 to 0) signal indicate the byte location to be written. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 154 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.6.2 Wait State Control The number of wait states inserted into external space access states can be controlled using the WCR settings. The specified number of Tw cycles are inserted as software cycles at the timing shown in figure 9.4. T1 CK Address CSn RD Read Data WRxx Write Data DACK Tw T2 Figure 9.4 Wait State Timing of External Space Access (Software Wait Only) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 155 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) When the wait is specified by software using WCR, the wait input WAIT signal from outside is sampled. Figure 9.5 shows the WAIT signal sampling. The WAIT signal is sampled at the clock rise one cycle before the clock rise when the Tw state shifts to the T2 state. T1 CK Address CSn RD Read Data WRxx Write Data WAIT DACK Tw Tw Two T2 Figure 9.5 Wait State Timing of External Space Access (Two Software Wait States + WAIT Signal Wait State) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 156 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.6.3 CS Assert Period Extension Idle cycles can be inserted to prevent extension of the RD or WRxx signal assert period beyond the length of the CSn signal assert period by setting the SW3 to SW0 bits of BCR2. This allows for flexible interfaces with external circuitry. The timing is shown in figure 9.6. Th and Tf cycles are added respectively before and after the normal cycle. Only CSn is asserted in these cycles; RD and WRxx signals are not. Further, data is extended up to the Tf cycle, which is effective for gate arrays and the like, which have slower write operations. Th CK Address CSn RD Read Data WRxx Write Data DACK T1 T2 Tf Figure 9.6 CS Assert Period Extension Function Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 157 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.7 Waits between Access Cycles When a read from a slow device is completed, data buffers may not go off in time, causing conflict with the next access data. If there is a data conflict during memory access, the problem can be solved by inserting a wait in the access cycle. To enable detection of bus cycle starts, waits can be inserted between access cycles during continuous accesses of the same CS space by negating the CSn signal once. 9.7.1 Prevention of Data Bus Conflicts Wait cycles are inserted in the following cases so that the number of idle cycles specified with the IW31 to IW00 bits are inserted: • The write cycle to the same CS space continues after the cycle read • The continuous access is made to the different CS space after the read access If there are idle cycles between the access cycles, the number of wait cycles is inserted that is obtained by subtracting the existing idle cycles from the number of idle cycles specified. Figure 9.7 shows the example of idle cycle insertion. In this example, when one idle cycle insertion is specified between CSn space cycles, the specified one idle cycle is inserted when the write access is performed to the CSm space immediately after the read cycle of the CSn space. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 158 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) T1 CK T2 Tidle T1 T2 Address CSn CSm RD WRxx Data CSn space read Idle cycles CSm space write Figure 9.7 Example of Idle Cycle Insertion Bits IW31 and IW30 in BCR2 specify the number of idle cycles inserted in the case of a write cycle to CS3 and CS7 spaces or a read access to different space after CS3 and CS7 space read. Bits IW21 and IW20 specify the number of idle cycles inserted for CS2 and CS6 spaces, bits IW11 and IW10 specify for CS1 and CS5 spaces, and bits IW01 and IW00 specify for CS0 and CS4 spaces, respectively. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 159 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.7.2 Simplification of Bus Cycle Start Detection For consecutive accesses to the same CS space, waits are inserted to provide the number of idle cycles designated by bits CW3 to CW0 in BCR2. However, in the case of a write cycle after a read, the number of idle cycles inserted will be the larger of the two values designated by the IW and CW bits. When idle cycles already exist between access cycles, waits are not inserted. Figure 9.8 shows an example. A continuous access idle is specified for CSn space, and CSn space is consecutively write-accessed. T1 CK Address CSn RD WRxx Data T2 Tidle T1 T2 CSn space access Idle cycle CSn space access Figure 9.8 Example of Idle Cycle Insertion at Same Space Consecutive Access Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 160 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.8 Bus Arbitration This LSI has a bus arbitration function that, when a bus release request is received from an external device, releases the bus to that device. It also has four internal bus masters, the CPU, DMAC, DTC, and AUD. The priority for arbitrate the bus mastership between these bus masters is: Bus request from external device > AUD > DTC > DMAC > CPU AUD does not acquire the bus mastership during DTC or DMAC burst transfer; it acquires the bus mastership after DTC or DMAC burst transfer. AUD has the priority for the bus mastership to DTC and DMAC if the CPU has the bus mastership. DMAC, continues operating even if DTC requests the bus mastership during the read or the write period in DMAC dual address mode, during burst transfer, or during operation in indirect address transfer mode. A bus request by an external device should be input to the BREQ pin. When the BREQ pin is asserted, this LSI releases the bus immediately after executing the current bus cycle. The signal indicating that the bus has been released is output from the BACK pin. However, the bus arbitration is not performed at the timing between the read cycle and the write cycle of TAS instruction. In addition, bus arbitration is not performed during bus cycle if the access size is greater than the data-bus size, for example, when a long-word access is made for an 8-bit size memory. When an interrupt is generated and the CPU must process this interrupt, the LSI must take back the bus mastership. For this purpose, this LSI has the IRQOUT pin used for the bus mastership request signal. Before the LSI takes back the bus mastership, the IRQOUT signal is asserted. When the IRQOUT signal is asserted, the device that asserted the external bus release request negates the BREQ signal to release the bus mastership. This allows the bus mastership to return to the CPU, and the LSI processes the interrupt. The IRQOUT pin is asserted when a cause of interrupt is generated and the interrupt request level is higher than the interrupt mask bits (I3 to I0) of the status register (SR). Figure 9.9 shows a bus mastership release procedure. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 161 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) This LSI External device BREQ accepted BREQ = Low Bus mastership request Strobe pin: high-level output Address, data, strobe pin: high impedance BACK = Low BACK confirmation Bus mastership release response Bus mastership release status Bus mastership acquisition Figure 9.9 Bus Mastership Release Procedure Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 162 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.9 Memory Connection Example Since A21 to A18 function as input ports at power-on reset, take the procedure such as pulling down as required. This LSI CSn RD A0 to A14 D0 to D7 32k × 8-bit ROM CE OE A0 to A14 I/O0 to I/O7 Figure 9.10 Example of 8-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection 256k × 16-bit ROM CSn RD A0 A1 to 18 D0 to 15 A0 to 17 I/O0 to 15 CE OE This LSI Figure 9.11 Example of 16-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 163 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 256k × 16-bit ROM CSn RD A0 A1 A2 to19 D16 to 31 D0 to 15 CE OE A0 to 17 I/O0 to 15 CE OE This LSI A0 to 17 I/O0 to 15 Figure 9.12 Example of 32-bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection (only for SH7145) 128k × 8-bit SRAM CSn RD A0 to 16 WRL D0 to 7 CE OE A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 This LSI Figure 9.13 Example of 8-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 164 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 128k × 8-bit SRAM CSn RD A0 A1 to 17 WRH D8 to 15 WRL D0 to 7 CS OE A0 to16 WE I/O0 to 7 This LSI CS OE A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 Figure 9.14 Example of 16-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection 128k × 8-bit SRAM CS OE This LSI CSn RD A0 A1 A2 to 18 WRHH D24 to 31 WRHL D16 to 23 WRH D8 to 15 WRL D0 to 7 A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 CS OE A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 CS OE A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 CS OE A0 to 16 WE I/O0 to 7 Figure 9.15 Example of 32-bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection (only for SH7145) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 165 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 9. Bus State Controller (BSC) 9.10 Access to On-chip Peripheral I/O Registers On-chip peripheral I/O registers are accessed from the bus state controller as shown in table 9.3. Refer to section 25, List of Registers, for more details. Table 9.3 Access to On-chip Peripheral I/O Registers MTU, POE PFC, PORT On-chip peripheral module SCI Connection 8 bits bus width INTC CMT A/D UBC WDT DMAC DTC IIC H-UDI 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits 2 cyc 2 cyc 2 cyc 2 cyc 3 cyc 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits 3 cyc 3 cyc 3 cyc 3 cyc 2 cyc 16 bits 2 cyc Number of 2 cyc access cycles 9.11 Cycles of No-Bus Mastership Release The bus mastership is not released during one bus cycle. For example, when the longword read (or write) access is performed to the 8-bit normal space, four memory accesses to the 8-bit normal space are regarded as one bus cycle. In this bus cycle, the bus mastership is not released. In this case, assuming that one memory access takes two states, the bus mastership is not released in eight states. 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits Cycle in which the bus mastership is not released Figure 9.16 One Bus Cycle 9.12 CPU Operation when Program Is Located in External Memory In this LSI, two words (two instructions) are fetched in one instruction fetch. This also applies to the cases where program is located in external memory or the bus width of that external memory is 8 or 16 bits. Also, if the program counter value is the odd word (2n+1) address or the program counter value before branch is the even word (2n) address, 32 bits (two instructions) including each word instruction are always fetched. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 166 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Section 10 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) This LSI includes an on-chip four-channel direct memory access controller (DMAC). The DMAC can be used in place of the CPU to perform high-speed data transfers among external devices equipped with DACK (transfer request acknowledge signal), external memories, memory-mapped external devices, and on-chip peripheral modules (except for the DMAC, DTC, BSC, and UBC). Using the DMAC reduces the burden on the CPU and increases operating efficiency of the LSI as a whole. 10.1 • • • • • Features • • • • • • Four channels Four Gbytes of address space in the architecture Byte, word, or longword selectable data transfer unit 16,777,216 transfers, maximum Address mode ⎯ Dual address mode or single address mode can be selected. ⎯ Direct access or indirect access can be selected in dual address mode. Channel function: Transfer modes that can be set are different for each channel. ⎯ Channel 0: Single or dual address mode. External requests are accepted. ⎯ Channel 1: Single or dual address mode. External requests are accepted. ⎯ Channel 2: Dual address mode only. Source address reload function is available. ⎯ Channel 3: Dual address mode only. Direct address transfer mode and indirect address transfer mode selectable. Transfer requests: There are three DMAC transfer activation requests, as indicated below. ⎯ External request: From two DREQ pins. DREQ can be detected either by falling edge or by low level. ⎯ Requests from on-chip peripheral modules: Transfer requests from on-chip modules such as SCI (request made to SCI_0 and SCI_1) or A/D (request made to A/D 1). ⎯ Auto-request: The transfer request is generated automatically within the DMAC. Selectable bus modes: Cycle-steal mode or burst mode Two types of DMAC channel priority ranking: Fixed priority mode or round robin mode CPU can be interrupted when the specified number of data transfers are complete. Module standby mode can be set. DMASH20A_010020020700 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 167 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Figure 10.1 is a block diagram of the DMAC. DMAC module On-chip ROM Transfer count control Register control Peripheral bus Internal bus SARn On-chip RAM On-chip peripheral module DARn DMATCRn Activation control CHCRn DREQ0, DREQ1 MTU SCI0, SCI1 A/D 1 DEIn DACK0, DACK1 DRAK0, DRAK1 External ROM External RAM External I/O (memory mapped) External I/O (with acknowledge) Bus state controller DMAOR Request priority control Bus interface SARn: DARn: DMATCRn: CHCRn: DMAOR: n: DMAC source address register DMAC destination address register DMAC transfer count register DMAC channel control register DMAC operation register 0, 1, 2, 3 Figure 10.1 DMAC Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 168 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.2 Input/Output Pins Table 10.1 shows the DMAC pin configuration. Table 10.1 DMAC Pin Configuration Channel Name 0 DMA transfer request DMA transfer request acknowledge DREQ0 acceptance confirmation 1 DMA transfer request DMA transfer request acknowledge DREQ1 acceptance confirmation Symbol DREQ0 DACK0 DRAK0 I/O I O O Function DMA transfer request input from external device to channel 0 DMA transfer strobe output from channel 0 to external device Sampling receive acknowledge output for DMA transfer request input from external source DMA transfer request input from external device to channel 1 DMA transfer strobe output from channel 1 to external device Sampling receive acknowledge output for DMA transfer request input from external source DREQ1 DACK1 DRAK1 I O O Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 169 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.3 Register Descriptions The DMAC has the following registers. The DMAC has a total of 17 registers. Each channel has four control registers. One other control register is shared by all channels. For register address and their states in each operating mode, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • DMA source address register_0 (SAR_0) DMA destination address register_0 (DAR_0) DMA transfer count register_0 (DMATCR_0) DMA channel control register_0 (CHCR_0) DMA source address register_1 (SAR_1) DMA destination address register_1 (DAR_1) DMA transfer count register_1 (DMATCR_1) DMA channel control register_1 (CHCR_1) DMA source address register_2 (SAR_2) DMA destination address register_2 (DAR_2) DMA transfer count register_2 (DMATCR_2) DMA channel control register_2 (CHCR_2) DMA source address register_3 (SAR_3) DMA destination address register_3 (DAR_3) DMA transfer count register_3 (DMATCR_3) DMA channel control register_3 (CHCR_3) DMA operation register (DMAOR) DMA Source Address Registers_0 to 3 (SAR_0 to SAR_3) 10.3.1 DMA source address registers_0 to 3 (SAR_0 to SAR_3) are 32-bit readable/writable registers that specify the source address of a DMA transfer. These registers have a count function, and during a DMA transfer, they indicate the next source address. In single-address mode, SAR values are ignored when a device with DACK has been specified as the transfer source. Specify a 16-bit or 32-bit boundary address when doing 16-bit or 32-bit data transfers. Operation cannot be guaranteed on any other addresses. When this register is accessed in 16 bits, the value of another 16 bits that are not accessed is retained. The initial value of SAR is undefined. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 170 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.3.2 DMA Destination Address Registers_0 to 3 (DAR_0 to DAR_3) DMA destination address registers_0 to 3 (DAR_0 to DAR_3) are 32-bit readable/writable registers that specify the destination address of a DMA transfer. These registers have a count function, and during a DMA transfer, they indicate the next destination address. In single-address mode, DAR values are ignored when a device with DACK has been specified as the transfer destination. Specify a 16-bit or 32-bit boundary address when doing 16-bit or 32-bit data transfers. Operation cannot be guaranteed on any other address. When this register is accessed in 16 bits, the value of another 16 bits that are not accessed is retained. The initial value of DAR is undefined. 10.3.3 DMA Transfer Count Registers_0 to 3 (DMATCR_0 to DMATCR_3) DMA transfer count registers_0 to 3 (DMATCR_0 to DMATCR_3) are 32-bit readable/writable registers that specify the transfer count for each channel (byte count, word count, or longword count) with lower 24 bits. Specifying a H'000001 gives a transfer count of 1, while H'000000 gives the maximum setting, 16,777,216 transfers. While DMAC is in operation, the number of transfers to be performed is indicated. Upper eight bits of this register are read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. When this register is accessed in 16 bits, the value of another 16 bits that are not accessed is retained. The initial value of DMATCR is undefined. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 171 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.3.4 DMA Channel Control Registers_0 to 3 (CHCR_0 to CHCR_3) DMA channel control registers_0 to 3 (CHCR_0 to CHCR_3) are 32-bit readable/writable registers where the operation and transmission of each channel is designated. Bit 31 to 21 20 Bit Name Initial Value R/W ⎯ All 0 R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. DI 0 (R/W)*2 Direct/Indirect Specifies either direct address mode operation or indirect address mode operation for channel 3 source address. This bit is valid only in CHCR_3. For CHCR_0 to CHCR_2, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Direct access mode operation for channel 3 1: Indirect access mode operation for channel 3 19 RO 0 (R/W)* Source Address Reload Selects whether to reload the source address initial value during channel 2 transfer. This bit is valid only for CHCR_2. For CHCR_0, CHCR_1, and CHCR_3, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Does not reload source address 1: Reloads source address 18 RL 0 (R/W)*2 Request Check Level Selects whether to output DRAK notifying external device of DREQ received, with active high or active low. This bit is valid only for CHCR_0 and CHCR_1. For CHCR_2 and CHCR_3, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Output DRAK with active high 1: Output DRAK with active low 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 172 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 17 Bit Name AM Initial Value 0 R/W (R/W)* 2 Description Acknowledge Mode In dual address mode, selects whether to output DACK in the data write cycle or data read cycle. In single address mode, DACK is always output irrespective of the setting of this bit. This bit is valid only for CHCR_0 and CHCR_1. For CHCR_2 and CHCR_3, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Outputs DACK during read cycle 1: Outputs DACK during write cycle 16 AL 0 (R/W)* 2 Acknowledge Level Specifies whether to set DACK (acknowledge) signal output to active high or active low. This bit is valid only with CHCR_0 and CHCR_1. For CHCR_2 and CHCR_3, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Active high output 1: Active low output 15 14 DM1 DM0 0 0 R/W R/W Destination Address Mode 1, 0 These bits specify increment/decrement of the DMA transfer destination address. These bit specifications are ignored when transferring data from an external device to address space in single address mode. 00: Destination address fixed 01: Destination address incremented (+1 during 8-bit transfer, +2 during 16-bit transfer, +4 during 32bit transfer) 10: Destination address decremented (–1 during 8-bit transfer, –2 during 16-bit transfer, –4 during 32-bit transfer) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 173 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 13 12 Bit Name SM1 SM0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Source Address Mode 1, 0 These bits specify increment/decrement of the DMA transfer source address. These bit specifications are ignored when transferring data from an external device to address space in single address mode. 00: Source address fixed 01: Source address incremented (+1 during 8-bit transfer, +2 during 16-bit transfer, +4 during 32-bit transfer) 10: Source address decremented (–1 during 8-bit transfer, –2 during 16-bit transfer, –4 during 32bit transfer) 11: Setting prohibited When the transfer source is specified at an indirect address, specify in source address register 3 (SAR_3) the actual storage address of the data you want to transfer as the data storage address (indirect address). During indirect address mode, SAR_3 obeys the SM1/SM0 setting for increment/decrement. In this case, SAR_3’s increment/decrement is fixed at +4/–4 or 0, irrespective of the transfer data size specified by TS1 and TS0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 174 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 11 10 9 8 Bit Name RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Resource Select 3, 2, 1, 0 These bits specify the transfer request source. 0000: External request, dual address mode 0001: Prohibited 0010: External request, single address mode. External address space → external device. 0011: External request, single address mode. External device → external address space. 0100: Auto-request 0101: Prohibited 0110: MTU TGIA_0 0111: MTU TGIA_1 1000: MTU TGIA_2 1001: MTU TGIA_3 1010: MTU TGIA_4 1011: A/D1 ADI1 1100: SCI0 TXI_0 1101: SCI0 RXI_0 1110: SCI1 TXI_1 1111: SCI1 RXI_1 Note: External request designations are valid only for channels 0 and 1. No transfer request sources can be set for channels 2 or 3. 7 ⎯ 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 175 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 6 Bit Name DS Initial Value 0 R/W (R/W)* 2 Description DREQ Select Sets the sampling method for the DREQ pin in external request mode to either low-level detection or falling-edge detection. This bit is valid only with CHCR_0 and CHCR_1. For CHCR_2 and CHCR_3, this bit is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. Even with channels 0 and 1, when specifying an onchip peripheral module or auto-request as the transfer request source, this bit setting is ignored. The sampling method is fixed at falling-edge detection in cases other than auto-request. 0: Low-level detection 1: Falling-edge detection 5 TM 0 R/W Transfer Mode Specifies the bus mode for data transfer. 0: Cycle steal mode 1: Burst mode 4 3 TS1 TS0 0 0 R/W R/W Transfer Size 1, 0 Specify size of data for transfer. 00: Specifies byte size (8 bits) 01: Specifies word size (16 bits) 10: Specifies longword size (32 bits) 11: Prohibited 2 IE 0 R/W Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests are generated after the number of data transfers specified in the DMATCR (when TE = 1). 0: Interrupt request not generated after DMATCRspecified transfer count 1: Interrupt request enabled on completion of DMATCR specified number of transfers Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 176 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 1 Bit Name TE Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Transfer End Flag This bit is set to 1 after the number of data transfers specified by the DMATCR. At this time, if the IE bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. If data transfer ends before TE is set to 1 (for example, due to an NMI or address error, or clearing of the DE bit or DME bit of the DMAOR) the TE is not set to 1. With this bit set to 1, data transfer is disabled even if the DE bit is set to 1. 0: DMATCR-specified transfer count not ended [Clearing condition] 0 write after TE = 1 read, power-on reset, software standby mode 1: DMATCR specified number of transfers completed 0 DE 0 R/W DMAC Enable DE enables operation in the corresponding channel. 0: Operation of the corresponding channel disabled 1: Operation of the corresponding channel enabled Transfer mode is entered if this bit is set to 1 when auto-request is specified (RS3 to RS0 settings). With an external request or on-chip module request, when a transfer request occurs after this bit is set to 1, transfer is enabled. If this bit is cleared during a data transfer, transfer is suspended. If the DE bit has been set, but TE = 1, then if the DME bit of the DMAOR is 0, and the NMI or AE bit of the DMAOR is 1, transfer enable mode is not entered. Notes: 1. TE bit: Allows only 0 write after reading 1. 2. The DI, RO, RL, AM, AL, or DS bit may be absent, depending on the channel. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 177 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.3.5 DMAC Operation Register (DMAOR) The DMAOR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the transfer mode of the DMAC Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W All 0 R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 9 8 PR1 PR0 0 0 R/W R/W Priority Mode 1 and 0 These bits determine the priority level of channels for execution when transfer requests are made for several channels simultaneously. 00: CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 01: CH0 > CH2 > CH3 > CH1 10: CH2 > CH0 > CH1 > CH3 11: Round robin mode 7 to 3 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 2 AE 0 R/(W)* Address Error Flag Indicates that an address error has occurred during DMA transfer. If this bit is set during a data transfer, transfers on all channels are suspended. The CPU cannot write a 1 to the AE bit. Clearing is effected by 0 write after 1 read. 0: No address error, DMA transfer enabled [Clearing condition] Write AE = 0 after reading AE = 1 1: Address error, DMA transfer disabled [Setting condition] Address error due to DMAC 15 to 10 ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 178 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bit 1 Bit Name Initial Value NMIF 0 R/W R/(W)* Description NMI Flag Indicates input of an NMI. This bit is set irrespective of whether the DMAC is operating or suspended. If this bit is set during a data transfer, transfers on all channels are suspended. The CPU is unable to write a 1 to the NMIF. Clearing is effected by a 0 write after 1 read. 0: No NMI interrupt, DMA transfer enabled [Clearing condition] Write NMIF = 0 after reading NMIF = 1 1: NMI has occurred, DMA transfer prohibited [Setting condition] NMI interrupt occurrence 0 DME 0 R/W DMAC Master Enable This bit enables activation of the entire DMAC. When the DME bit and DE bit of the CHCR for the corresponding channel are set to 1, that channel is transfer-enabled. If this bit is cleared during a data transfer, transfers on all channels are suspended. 0: Disable operation on all channels 1: Enable operation on all channels Even when the DME bit is set, when the TE bit of the CHCR is 1, or its DE bit is 0, transfer is disabled when NMI of the DMAOR = 1 or when AE = 1. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 179 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.4 Operation When there is a DMA transfer request, the DMAC starts the transfer according to the predetermined channel priority order; when the transfer end conditions are satisfied, it ends the transfer. Transfers can be requested in three modes: auto-request, external request, and on-chip peripheral module request. Transfer can be in either the single address mode or the dual address mode, and dual address mode can be either direct or indirect address transfer mode. The bus mode can be either burst or cycle steal. 10.4.1 DMA Transfer Flow After the DMA source address registers (SAR), DMA destination address registers (DAR), DMA transfer count register (DMATCR), DMA channel control registers (CHCR), and DMA operation register (DMAOR) are set to the desired transfer conditions, the DMAC transfers data according to the following procedure: 1. The DMAC checks to see if transfer is enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0, AE = 0). 2. When a transfer request comes and transfer has been enabled, the DMAC transfers 1 transfer unit of data (determined by TS0 and TS1 setting). For an auto-request, the transfer begins automatically when the DE bit and DME bit are set to 1. The DMATCR value will be decremented by 1 upon each transfer. The actual transfer flows vary by address mode and bus mode. 3. When the specified number of transfers have been completed (when DMATCR reaches 0), the transfer ends normally. If the IE bit of the CHCR is set to 1 at this time, a DEI interrupt is sent to the CPU. 4. When an address error occurs in the DMAC or an NMI interrupt is generated, the transfer is aborted. Transfers are also aborted when the DE bit of the CHCR or the DME bit of the DMAOR are changed to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 180 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Figure 10.2 is a flowchart of this procedure. Start Initial settings (SAR, DAR, DMATCR, CHCR, DMAOR) DE, DME = 1 and NMIF, AE, TE = 0? Yes No Transfer request occurs?*1 Yes Transfer (1 transfer unit); DMATCR – 1 → DMATCR, SAR and DAR updated No *2 *3 Bus mode, transfer request mode, DREQ detection selection system DMATCR = 0? Yes No Does NMIF = 1, AE = 1, DE = 0, or DME = 0? Yes Transfer aborted No DEI interrupt request (when IE = 1) Does NMIF = 1, AE = 1, DE = 0, or DME = 0? Yes Transfer ends Notes: No Normal end 1. In auto-request mode, transfer begins when NMIF, AE, and TE are all 0, and the DE and DME bits are set to 1. 2. DREQ = level detection in burst mode (external request) or cycle-steal mode. 3. DREQ = edge detection in burst mode (external request), or auto-request mode in burst mode. Figure 10.2 DMAC Transfer Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 181 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.4.2 DMA Transfer Requests DMA transfer requests are usually generated in either the data transfer source or destination, but they can also be generated by devices and on-chip peripheral modules that are neither the source nor the destination. Transfers can be requested in three modes: auto-request, external request, and on-chip peripheral module request. The request mode is selected in the RS3 to RS0 bits of the DMA channel control registers_0 to 3 (CHCR_0 to CHCR_3). Auto-Request Mode: When there is no transfer request signal from an external source, as in a memory-to-memory transfer or a transfer between memory and an on-chip peripheral module unable to request a transfer, the auto-request mode allows the DMAC to automatically generate a transfer request signal internally. When the DE bits of CHCR_0 to CHCR_3 and the DME bit of the DMAOR are set to 1, the transfer begins (so long as the TE bits of CHCR_0 to CHCR_3 and the NMIF and AE bits of DMAOR are all 0). External Request Mode: In this mode a transfer is performed at the request signal (DREQ) of an external device. Choose one of the modes shown in table 10.2 according to the application system. When this mode is selected, if the DMA transfer is enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0, AE = 0), a transfer is performed upon a request at the DREQ input. Choose to detect DREQ by either the falling edge or low level of the signal input with the DS bit of CHCR_0 to CHCR_3 (DS = 0 is level detection, DS = 1 is edge detection). The source of the transfer request does not have to be the data transfer source or destination. Table 10.2 Selecting External Request Modes with RS Bits RS3 0 0 RS2 0 0 RS1 0 1 RS0 0 0 Address Mode Dual address mode Single address mode Single address mode Source Any* External memory or memory-mapped external device External device with DACK Destination Any* External device with DACK External memory or memory-mapped external device 0 0 1 1 Note: * External memory, memory-mapped external device, on-chip memory, and on-chip peripheral module (excluding DMAC, DTC, BSC, UBC). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 182 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) On-Chip Peripheral Module Request Mode: In this mode a transfer is performed at the transfer request signal (interrupt request signal) of an on-chip peripheral module. As indicated in table 10.3, there are ten transfer request signals: five from the multifunction timer pulse unit (MTU), which are compare match or input capture interrupts; the receive data full interrupts (RXI) and transmit data empty interrupts (TXI) of the two serial communication interfaces (SCI); and the A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI1) of the A/D converter. When DMA transfers are enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0, AE = 0), a transfer is performed upon the input of a transfer request signal. The transfer request source need not be the data transfer source or transfer destination. However, when the transfer request is set by RXI (transfer request because SCI’s receive data is full), the transfer source must be the SCI’s receive data register (RDR). When the transfer request is set by TXI (transfer request because SCI’s transmit data is empty), the transfer destination must be the SCI’s transmit data register (TDR). Also, if the transfer request is set to the A/D converter, the data transfer destination must be the A/D converter register. Table 10.3 Selecting On-Chip Peripheral Module Request Modes with RS Bits DMAC Transfer RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 Request Source 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 MTU MTU MTU MTU MTU A/D1 DMA Transfer DestiRequest Signal Source nation Bus Mode TGIA_0 TGIA_1 TGIA_2 TGIA_3 TGIA_4 ADI1 Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Any* Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal Burst/cycle steal ADDR1 Any* Any* RDR0 Any* RDR1 TDR0 Any* TDR1 Any* SCI0 transmit block TXI_0 SCI0 receiver block RXI_0 SCI1 transmit block TXI_1 SCI1 receiver block RXI_1 Notes: MTU: Multifunction timer pulse unit. SCI0, SCI1: Serial communications interface channels 0 and 1. ADDR1: A/D converter’s A/D register. TDR_0, TDR_1: SCI_0 and SCI_1 transmit data registers. RDR_0, RDR_1: SCI_0 and SCI_1 receive data registers. * External memory, memory-mapped external device, on-chip memory, and on-chip peripheral module (excluding DMAC, DTC, BSC, and UBC). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 183 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) In order to output a transfer request from an on-chip peripheral module, set the relevant interrupt enable bit for each module, and output an interrupt signal. When an on-chip peripheral module’s interrupt request signal is used as a DMA transfer request signal, interrupts for the CPU are not generated. When a DMA transfer is conducted corresponding with one of the transfer request signals in table 10.3, it is automatically discontinued. In cycle steal mode this occurs in the first transfer, and in burst mode in the last transfer. 10.4.3 Channel Priority When the DMAC receives simultaneous transfer requests on two or more channels, it selects a channel according to a predetermined priority order, either in a fixed mode or in round robin mode. These modes are selected by priority bits PR1 and PR0 in the DMA operation register (DMAOR). Fixed Mode: In this mode, the priority levels among the channels remain fixed. The following priority orders are available for fixed mode: • CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 • CH0 > CH2 > CH3 > CH1 • CH2 > CH0 > CH1 > CH3 These are selected by settings of the PR1 and PR0 bits of the DMA operation register (DMAOR). Round Robin Mode: In round robin mode, each time the transfer of one transfer unit (byte, word or long word) ends on a given channel, that channel receives the lowest priority level (figure 10.3 (1)). The priority level in round robin mode immediately after a reset is CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 184 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Transfer on channel 0 Initial priority setting CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 CH1 > CH2 > CH3 > CH0 Channel 0 is given the lowest priority. Priority after transfer Transfer on channel 1 Initial priority setting CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 Priority after transfer CH2 > CH3 > CH0 > CH1 When channel 1 is given the lowest priority, the priority of channel 0, which was above channel 1, is also shifted simultaneously. Transfer on channel 2 CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 Initial priority setting When channel 2 receives the lowest priority, the priorities of channel 0 and 1, which were above channel 2, are also shifted simultaneously. ImmediPriority after transfer CH3 > CH0 > CH1 > CH2 ately thereafter, if there is a transfer request for channel 1 only, channel 1 is given the lowest priority, and the priorities of channels 3 Priority after transfer due to issue of a transfer CH2 > CH3 > CH0 > CH1 and 0 are simultaneously shifted down. request for channel 1 only. Transfer on channel 3 Initial priority setting CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 No change in priority. Priority after transfer CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 Figure 10.3 (1) Round Robin Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 185 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Figure 10.3 (2) shows the changes in priority levels when transfer requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0 and 3, and channel 1 receives a transfer request during a transfer on channel 0. The DMAC operates in the following manner under these circumstances: 1. Transfer requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0 and 3. 2. Since channel 0 has a higher priority level than channel 3, the channel 0 transfer is conducted first (channel 3 is on transfer standby). 3. A transfer request is issued for channel 1 during a transfer on channel 0 (channels 1 and 3 are on transfer standby). 4. At the end of the channel 0 transfer, channel 0 shifts to the lowest priority level. 5. At this point, channel 1 has a higher priority level than channel 3, so the channel 1 transfer comes first (channel 3 is on transfer standby). 6. When the channel 1 transfer ends, channel 1 shifts to the lowest priority level. 7. Channel 3 transfer begins. 8. When the channel 3 transfer ends, channel 3 and channel 2 priority levels are lowered, giving channel 3 the lowest priority. Transfer request Issued for channels 0 and 3 Issued for channel 1 3 Channel waiting DMAC operation Channel priority Channel 0 transfer begins Change of priority 0>1>2>3 1,3 Channel 0 transfer ends Channel 1 transfer begins 1>2>3>0 3 Channel 1 transfer ends Channel 3 transfer begins Change of priority 2>3>0>1 None Channel 3 transfer ends Change of priority 0>1>2>3 Figure 10.3 (2) Example of Changes in Priority in Round Robin Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 186 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.4.4 DMA Transfer Types The DMAC supports the transfers shown in table 10.4. It can operate in the single address mode, in which either the transfer source or destination is accessed using an acknowledge signal, or dual access mode, in which both the transfer source and destination addresses are output. The dual access mode consists of a direct address mode, in which the output address value is the object of a direct data transfer, and an indirect address mode, in which the output address value is not the object of the data transfer, but the value stored at the output address becomes the transfer object address. The actual transfer operation timing varies with the bus mode. The DMAC has two bus modes: cycle-steal mode and burst mode. Table 10.4 Supported DMA Transfers Destination MemoryMapped External Device External External with DACK Memory Device Single Dual Dual Dual Dual Single Dual Dual Dual Dual On-Chip Peripheral Module Source On-Chip Memory External device with DACK Not available External memory Memory-mapped external device On-chip memory Note: Single Single Not available Not available Not available Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual On-chip peripheral module Not available Dual address mode includes both direct address mode and indirect address mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 187 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Address Modes: • Single Address Mode In the single address mode, both the transfer source and destination are external; one is accessed by a DACK signal while the other is accessed by an address. In this mode, the DMAC performs the DMA transfer in 1 bus cycle by simultaneously outputting a transfer request acknowledge DACK signal to one external device to access it while outputting an address to the other end of the transfer. Figure 10.4 shows an example of a transfer between an external memory and an external device with DACK in which the external device outputs data to the data bus while that data is written in external memory in the same bus cycle. External address bus This LSI DMAC External memory External data bus External device with DACK DACK DREQ : Data flow Figure 10.4 Data Flow in Single Address Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 188 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Two types of transfers are possible in the single address mode: (a) transfers between external devices with DACK and memory-mapped external devices, and (b) transfers between external devices with DACK and external memory. The only transfer requests for either of these is the external request (DREQ). Figure 10.5 shows the DMA transfer timing for the single address mode. CK A21–A0 CSn D15–D0 WRH WRL DACK Data that is output from the external device with DACK WR signal to external memory space DACK signal to external devices with DACK (active low) a. External device with DACK to external memory space Address output to external memory space CK A21–A0 CSn D15–D0 RD DACK Data that is output from external memory space RD signal to external memory space DACK signal to external device with DACK (active low) b. External memory space to external device with DACK Address output to external memory space Figure 10.5 Example of DMA Transfer Timing in Single Address Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 189 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Dual Address Mode: Dual address mode is used for access of both the transfer source and destination by address. Transfer source and destination can be accessed either internally or externally. Dual address mode is subdivided into two other modes: direct address transfer mode and indirect address transfer mode. • Direct Address Transfer Mode Data is read from the transfer source during the data read cycle, and written to the transfer destination during the write cycle, so transfer is conducted in two bus cycles. At this time, the transfer data is temporarily stored in the DMAC. With the kind of external memory transfer shown in figure 10.6, data is read from one of the memories by the DMAC during a read cycle, then written to the other external memory during the subsequent write cycle. Figure 10.7 shows the timing for this operation. 1st bus cycle DMAC SAR Memory Address bus DAR Data bus Transfer source module Data buffer Transfer destination module The SAR value is taken as the address, and data is read from the transfer source module and stored temporarily in the DMAC. 2nd bus cycle DMAC SAR DAR Memory Address bus Data bus Transfer source module Data buffer Transfer destination module The DAR value is taken as the address, and data stored in the DMAC's data buffer is written to the transfer destination module. Figure 10.6 Direct Address Operation during Dual Address Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 190 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) CK Transfer source address Transfer destination address A21–A0 CSn D15–D0 RD WRH, WRL DACK Data read cycle (1st cycle) Note: Data write cycle (2nd cycle) Transfer between external memories with DACK are output during read cycle. Figure 10.7 Example of Direct Address Transfer Timing in Dual Address Mode • Indirect Address Transfer Mode In this mode the memory address storing the data you actually want to transfer is specified in DMAC internal transfer source address register (SAR3). Therefore, in indirect address transfer mode, the DMAC internal transfer source address register value is read first. This value is stored once in the DMAC. Next, the read value is output as the address, and the value stored at that address is again stored in the DMAC. Finally, the subsequent read value is written to the address specified by the transfer destination address register, ending one cycle of DMA transfer. In indirect address mode (figure 10.8), transfer destination, transfer source, and indirect address storage destination are all 16-bit external memory locations, and transfer in this example is conducted in 16-bit or 8-bit units. Timing for this transfer example is shown in figure 10.9. In indirect address mode, one NOP cycle (figure 10.9) is required until the data read as the indirect address is output to the address bus. When transfer data is 32-bit, the third and fourth bus cycles each need to be doubled, giving a required total of six bus cycles and one NOP cycle for the whole operation. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 191 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 1st, 2nd bus cycles DMAC SAR3 Data bus Memory Address bus DAR3 Temporary buffer Data buffer Transfer source module Transfer destination module The SAR3 value is taken as the address, memory data is read, and the value is stored in the temporary buffer. Since the value read at this time is used as the address, it must be 32 bits. When external connection data bus is 16 bits, two bus cycles are required. 3rd bus cycle DMAC SAR3 DAR3 Temporary buffer Data buffer Address bus Memory Data bus Transfer source module Transfer destination module The value in the temporary buffer is taken as the address, and data is read from the transfer source module to the data buffer. 4th bus cycle DMAC SAR3 DAR3 Temporary buffer Data buffer Address bus Memory Data bus Transfer source module Transfer destination module The DAR3 value is taken as the address, and the value in the data buffer is written to the transfer destination module. Note: Memory, transfer source, and transfer destination modules are shown here. In practice, connection can be made anywhere if there is address space. Figure 10.8 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Operation (When External Memory Space Is 16 Bits) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 192 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) CK A21–A0 Transfer source address (H) Transfer source address (L) Indirect address Transfer destination address NOP CSn D15–D0 Internal address bus Internal data bus DMAC indirect address buffer DMAC data buffer RD WRH, WRL Indirect address (H) Indirect address (L) Indirect address Transfer data Transfer data Transfer source address ∗1 NOP Indirect address ∗2 Transfer data Indirect address Transfer data Transfer data Address read cycle (1st) NOP cycle Data read cycle (3rd) Data write cycle (4th) (2nd) Notes: 1. 2. The internal address bus is controlled by the port and does not change. DMAC does not fetch value until 32-bit data is read from the internal data bus. Figure 10.9 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example (External Memory Space to External Memory Space, 16-Bit Width) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 193 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Figure 10.10 shows an example of timing in indirect address mode when transfer source and indirect address storage locations are in internal memory, the transfer destination is an on-chip peripheral module with 2-cycle access space, and transfer data is 8-bit. Since the indirect address storage destination and the transfer source are in internal memory, these can be accessed in one cycle. The transfer destination is 2-cycle access space, so two data write cycles are required. One NOP cycle is required until the data read as the indirect address is output to the address bus. CK Internal address bus Transfer source address Indirect address Transfer destination address NOP Internal data bus DMAC indirect address buffer Indirect address NOP Transfer data Transfer data Indirect address DMAC data buffer Address read cycle (1st) NOP cycle (2nd) Data read cycle (3rd) Transfer data Data write cycle (4th) Figure 10.10 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example (On-chip Memory Space to On-chip Memory Space) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 194 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bus Modes: Select the appropriate bus mode in the TM bits of CHCR_0 to CHCR_3. There are two bus modes: cycle steal and burst. • Cycle-Steal Mode In the cycle steal mode, the bus mastership is given to another bus master after each onetransfer-unit (byte, word, or longword) DMAC transfer. When the next transfer request occurs, the bus mastership are obtained from the other bus master and a transfer is performed for one transfer unit. When that transfer ends, the bus mastership is passed to the other bus master. This is repeated until the transfer end conditions are satisfied. The cycle steal mode can be used with all categories of transfer destination, transfer source and transfer request. Figure 10.11 shows an example of DMA transfer timing in the cycle steal mode. Transfer conditions are dual address mode and DREQ level detection. DREQ Bus control returned to CPU Bus cycle CPU CPU CPU DMAC Read DMAC Write CPU DMAC Read DMAC Write CPU CPU Figure 10.11 DMA Transfer Example in Cycle-Steal Mode • Burst Mode Once the bus mastership is obtained, the transfer is performed continuously until the transfer end condition is satisfied. In the external request mode with low level detection of the DREQ pin, however, when the DREQ pin is driven high, the bus passes to the other bus master after the bus cycle of the DMAC that currently has an acknowledged request ends, even if the transfer end conditions have not been satisfied. Figure 10.12 shows an example of DMA transfer timing in the burst mode. Transfer conditions are single address mode and DREQ level detection. DREQ Bus cycle CPU CPU CPU DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC CPU Figure 10.12 DMA Transfer Example in Burst Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 195 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Relationship between Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer Category: Table 10.5 shows the relationship between request modes and bus modes by DMA transfer category. Table 10.5 Relationship of Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer Category Address Mode Transfer Category Single External device with DACK and external memory External device with DACK and memory-mapped external device Dual External memory and external memory External memory and memory-mapped external device Memory-mapped external device and memory-mapped external device External memory and on-chip memory External memory and on-chip peripheral module Memory-mapped external device and on-chip memory Request Mode External External Any*1 Any*1 Any*1 Any*1 Any*2 Any*1 Bus Mode B/C B/C B/C B/C B/C B/C B/C*3 B/C B/C*3 B/C B/C*3 B/C*3 Transfer Usable Size (Bits) Channels 8/16/32 8/16/32 8/16/32 8/16/32 8/16/32 8/16/32 8/16/32*4 8/16/32 8/16/32*4 8/16/32 8/16/32*4 8/16/32*4 0, 1 0, 1 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 0 to 3*5 Memory-mapped external device and on- Any*2 chip peripheral module On-chip memory and on-chip memory On-chip memory and on-chip peripheral module On-chip peripheral module and onchip peripheral module Any*1 Any*2 Any*2 B: Burst C: Cycle steal Notes: 1. External request, auto-request or on-chip peripheral module request enabled. However, in the case of on-chip peripheral module request, it is not possible to specify the SCI or A/D converter for the transfer request source. 2. External request, auto-request or on-chip peripheral module request possible. However, if transfer request source is also the SCI or A/D converter, the transfer source or transfer destination must be the SCI or A/D converter. 3. When the transfer request source is the SCI, only cycle steal mode is possible. 4. Access size permitted by register of on-chip peripheral module that is the transfer source or transfer destination. 5. When the transfer request is an external request, channels 0 and 1 only can be used. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 196 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Bus Mode and Channel Priority: When a given channel is transferring in burst mode, and a transfer request is issued to channel 0, which has a higher priority ranking, transfer on channel 0 begins immediately. If the priority level setting is fixed mode (CH0 > CH1), channel 1 transfer is continued after transfer on channel 0 are completely ended, whether the channel 0 setting is cycle steal mode or burst mode. When the priority level setting is for round robin mode, transfer on channel 1 begins after transfer of one transfer unit on channel 0, whether channel 0 is set to cycle steal mode or burst mode. Thereafter, bus mastership alternates in the order: channel 1 → channel 0 → channel 1 → channel 0. Whether the priority level setting is for fixed mode or round robin mode, since channel 1 is set to burst mode, the bus mastership is not given to the CPU. An example of round robin mode is shown in figure 10.13. CPU DMAC CH1 DMAC CH1 DMAC CH0 CH0 DMAC CH1 CH1 DMAC CH0 CH0 DMAC CH1 DMAC CH1 CPU CPU DMAC CH1 burst mode DMAC CH0 and CH1 round-robin mode DMAC CH1 burst mode CPU Priority: Round-robin mode CH0: Cycle-steal mode CH1: Burst mode Figure 10.13 Bus Handling when Multiple Channels Are Operating 10.4.5 Number of Bus Cycle States and DREQ Pin Sample Timing Number of States in Bus Cycle: The number of states in the bus cycle when the DMAC is the bus master is controlled by the bus state controller (BSC) just as it is when the CPU is the bus master. For details, see section 9, Bus State Controller (BSC). DREQ Pin Sampling Timing and DRAK Signal: In external request mode, the DREQ pin is sampled by either falling edge or low-level detection. When a DREQ input is detected, a DMAC bus cycle is issued and DMA transfer effected, at the earliest, after three states. However, in burst mode when single address operation is specified, a dummy cycle is inserted for the first bus cycle. In this case, the actual data transfer starts from the second bus cycle. Data is transferred continuously from the second bus cycle. The dummy cycle is not counted in the number of transfer cycles, so there is no need to recognize the dummy cycle when setting the TCR. DREQ sampling from the second time begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle prior to the DMAC transfer generated by the previous sampling. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 197 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) DRAK is output once for the first DREQ sampling, irrespective of transfer mode or DREQ detection method. In burst mode, using edge detection, DREQ is sampled for the first cycle only, so DRAK is also output for the first cycle only. Therefore, the DREQ signal negate timing can be ascertained, and this facilitates handshake operations of transfer requests with the DMAC. Cycle Steal Mode Operations: In cycle steal mode, DREQ sampling timing is the same irrespective of dual or single address mode, or whether edge or low-level DREQ detection is used. For example, DMAC transfer begins (figure 10.14), at the earliest, three cycles from the first sampling timing. The second sampling begins at the start of the transfer one bus cycle prior to the start of the DMAC transfer initiated by the first sampling (i.e., from the start of the CPU(3) transfer). At this point, if DREQ detection has not occurred, sampling is executed every cycle thereafter. As in figure 10.15, whatever cycle the CPU transfer cycle is, the next sampling begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle before the DMAC transfer begins. Figure 10.14 shows an example of output during DACK read and figure 10.15 an example of output during DACK write. Figures 10.16 and 10.17 show cycle steal mode and single address mode. In this case, transfer begins at earliest three cycles after the first DREQ sampling. The second sampling begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle before the start of the first DMAC transfer. In single address mode, the DACK signal is output during the DMAC transfer period. Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Level Detection: Figures 10.18 and 10.19 show the DREQ sampling timing in burst mode with dual address and level detection. DREQ sampling timing in this mode is virtually the same as that of cycle steal mode. For example, DMAC transfer begins (figure 10.18), at the earliest, three cycles after the timing of the first sampling. The second sampling also begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle before the start of the first DMAC transfer. In burst mode, as long as transfer requests are issued, DMAC transfer continues. Therefore, the “transfer one bus cycle before the start of the DMAC transfer” may be a DMAC transfer. In burst mode, the DACK output period is the same as that of cycle steal mode. Burst Mode, Single Address, and Level Detection: DREQ sampling timing in burst mode with single address and level detection is shown in figures 10.20 and 10.21. In burst mode with single address and level detection, a dummy cycle is inserted as one bus cycle, at the earliest, three cycles after timing of the first sampling. Data during this period is undefined, Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 198 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) and the DACK signal is not output. Nor is the number of DMAC transfers counted. The actual DMAC transfer begins after one dummy bus cycle output. The dummy cycle is not counted either at the start of the second sampling (transfer one bus cycle before the start of the first DMAC transfer). Therefore, the second sampling is not conducted from the bus cycle starting the dummy cycle, but from the start of the CPU(3) bus cycle. Thereafter, as long the DREQ is continuously sampled, no dummy cycle is inserted. DREQ sampling timing during this period begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle before the start of DMAC transfer, in the same way as with cycle steal mode. As with the fourth sampling in figure 10.20, once DMAC transfer is interrupted, a dummy cycle is again inserted at the start as soon as DMAC transfer is resumed. The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode. Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Edge Detection: In burst mode with dual address and edge detection, DREQ sampling is conducted only on the first cycle. In figure 10.22, DMAC transfer begins, at the earliest, three cycles after the timing of the first sampling. Thereafter, DMAC transfer continues until the end of the data transfer count set in the DMATCR. DREQ sampling is not conducted during this period. Therefore, DRAK is output on the first cycle only. When DMAC transfer is resumed after being halted by an NMI or address error, be sure to reinput an edge request. The remaining transfer restarts after the first DRAK output. The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode. Burst Mode, Single Address, and Edge Detection: In burst mode with single address and edge detection, DREQ sampling is conducted only on the first cycle. In figure 10.23, a dummy cycle is inserted, at the earliest, three cycles after the timing for the first sampling. During this period, data is undefined, and DACK is not output. Nor is the number of DMAC transfers counted. Thereafter, DMAC transfer continues until the data transfer count set in the DMATCR has ended. DREQ sampling is not conducted during this period. Therefore, DRAK is output on the first cycle only. When DMAC transfer is resumed after being halted by an NMI or address error, be sure to reinput an edge request. DRAK is output once, and the remaining transfer restarts after output of one dummy cycle. The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 199 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 1st sampling CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK 2nd sampling CPU(1) CPU(2) CPU(3) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) CPU(4) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) CPU(5) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) Figure 10.14 Cycle Steal, Dual Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) 1st sampling CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC(R) DMAC(W) CPU DMAC (R) 2nd sampling Figure 10.15 Cycle Steal, Dual Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) Note: With cycle-steal and dual address operation, sampling timing is the same regardless of whether DREQ detection is by level or by edge. CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC CPU DMAC CPU DMAC Figure 10.16 Cycle Steal, Single Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC CPU DMAC CPU Figure 10.17 Cycle Steal, Single Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 200 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Note: With cycle steal and single address operation, sampling timing is the same regardless of whether DREQ detection is by level or by edge. CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) CPU DMAC(R) Figure 10.18 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) Figure 10.19 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) 1st sampling CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU(1) CPU(2) CPU(3) Dummy DMAC DMAC DMAC CPU(4) Dummy 2nd sampling 3rd sampling 4th sampling Figure 10.20 Burst Mode, Single Address and Level Detection (Fastest Operation) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 201 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU Dummy DMAC DMAC DMAC Figure 10.21 Burst Mode, Single Address and Level Detection (Normal Operation) CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) Figure 10.22 Burst Mode, Dual Address and Edge Detection CK DREQ DRAK Bus cycle DACK CPU CPU CPU Dummy DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC Figure 10.23 Burst Mode, Single Address and Edge Detection Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 202 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.4.6 Source Address Reload Function Channel 2 has a source address reload function. This returns to the first value set in the source address register (SAR_2) every four transfers by setting the RO bit of CHCR_2 to 1. Figure 10.24 illustrates this operation. Figure 10.25 is a timing chart for reload ON mode, with burst mode, autorequest, 16-bit transfer data size, SAR_2 increment, and DAR_2 fixed mode. DMAC DMAC control block RO bit = 1 CHCR_2 Count signal Reload signal Reload control Reload signal 4th count SAR_2 (initial value) SAR_2 Figure 10.24 Source Address Reload Function CK Internal address bus Internal data bus SAR2 DAR2 SAR2+2 DAR2 SAR2+4 DAR2 SAR2+6 DAR2 SAR2 Address bus DAR2 SAR2 data 5th channel 2 transfer SAR2 output DAR2 output Transfer request DMATCR_2 SAR2 data SAR2+2 data SAR2+4 data SAR2+6 data 1st channel 2 transfer SAR2 output DAR2 output 2nd channel 2 transfer SAR2+2 output DAR2 output 3rd channel 2 transfer SAR2+4 output DAR2 output 4th channel 2 transfer SAR2+6 output DAR2 output After SAR2+6 output, SAR2 is reloaded Bus mastership is returned one time in four Figure 10.25 Source Address Reload Function Timing Chart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 203 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) The reload function can be executed whether the transfer data size is 8, 16, or 32 bits. DMATCR_2, which specifies the number of transfers, is decremented by 1 at the end of every single-transfer-unit transfer, regardless of whether the reload function is on or off. Therefore, when using the reload function in the on state, a multiple of 4 must be specified in DMATCR_2. Operation will not be guaranteed if any other value is set. Also, the counter which counts the occurrence of four transfers for address reloading is reset by clearing of the DME bit in DMAOR or the DE bit in CHCR_2, setting of the transfer end flag (the TE bit in CHCR_2), NMI input, and setting of the AE flag (address error generation in DMAC transfer), as well as by a reset and in software standby mode, but SAR_2, DAR_2, DMATCR_2, and other registers are not reset. Consequently, when one of these sources occurs, there is a mixture of initialized counters and uninitialized registers in the DMAC, and incorrect operation may result if a restart is executed in this state. Therefore, when one of the above sources, other than TE setting, occurs during use of the address reload function, SAR_2, DAR_2, and DMATCR_2 settings must be carried out before re-execution. 10.4.7 DMA Transfer Ending Conditions The DMA transfer ending conditions vary for individual channels ending and for all channels ending together. Individual Channel Ending Conditions: There are two ending conditions. A transfer ends when the value of the channel’s DMA transfer count register (DMATCR) is 0, or when the DE bit of the channel’s CHCR is cleared to 0. • When DMATCR is 0: When the DMATCR value becomes 0 and the corresponding channel's DMA transfer ends, the transfer end flag bit (TE) is set in the CHCR. If the IE (interrupt enable) bit has been set, a DMAC interrupt (DEI) is requested of the CPU. • When DE of CHCR is 0: Software can halt a DMA transfer by clearing the DE bit in the channel’s CHCR. The TE bit is not set when this happens. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 204 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Conditions for Ending All Channels Simultaneously: Transfers on all channels end when the NMIF (NMI flag) bit or AE (address error flag) bit is set to 1 in the DMAOR, or when the DME bit in the DMAOR is cleared to 0. • When the NMIF or AE bit is set to 1 in DMAOR: When an NMI interrupt or DMAC address error occurs, the NMIF or AE bit is set to 1 in the DMAOR and all channels stop their transfers. The DMAC obtains the bus mastership, and if these flags are set to 1 during execution of a transfer, DMAC halts operation when the transfer processing currently being executed ends, and transfers the bus mastership to the other bus master. Consequently, even if the NMIF or AE bits are set to 1 during a transfer, the DMA source address register (SAR), designation address register (DAR), and transfer count register (TCR) are all updated. The TE bit is not set. To resume the transfers after NMI interrupt or address error processing, clear the appropriate flag bit to 0. To avoid restarting a transfer on a particular channel, clear its DE bit to 0. Transfer is halted when the processing of a one unit transfer is complete. In a dual address mode direct address transfer, even if an address error occurs or the NMI flag is set during read processing, the transfer will not be halted until after completion of the following write processing. In such a case, SAR, DAR, and TCR values are updated. In the same manner, the transfer is not halted in dual address mode indirect address transfers until after the final write processing has ended. • When DME is cleared to 0 in DMAOR: Clearing the DME bit to 0 in the DMAOR aborts the transfers on all channels. The TE bit is not set. 10.4.8 DMAC Access from CPU The space addressed by the DMAC is 3-cycle space. Therefore, when the CPU becomes the bus master and accesses the DMAC, a minimum of three system clock (φ) cycles are required for one bus cycle. Also, since the DMAC is located in word space, while a word-size access to the DMAC is completed in one bus cycle, a longword-size access is automatically divided into two word accesses, requiring two bus cycles (six basic clock cycles). These two bus cycles are executed consecutively; a different bus cycle is never inserted between the two word accesses. This applies to both write accesses and read accesses. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 205 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.5 10.5.1 Examples of Use Example of DMA Transfer between On-Chip SCI and External Memory In this example, on-chip serial communication interface channel 0 (SCI0) received data is transferred to external memory using the DMAC channel 3. Table 10.6 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers. Table 10.6 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between On-chip SCI and External Memory Transfer Conditions Transfer source: RDR0 of on-chip SCI0 Transfer destination: external memory Transfer count: 64 times Transfer source address: fixed Transfer destination address: incremented Transfer request source: SCI0 (RDR0) Bus mode: cycle steal Transfer unit: byte Interrupt request generation at end of transfer Channel priority ranking: 0 > 1 > 2 > 3 DMAOR H'0001 Register SAR_3 DAR_3 DMATCR_3 CHCR_3 Value H'FFFF81A5 H'00400000 H'00000040 H'00004D05 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 206 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.5.2 Example of DMA Transfer between External RAM and External Device with DACK Below is an transfer example in which the transfer source is an external memory and the transfer destination is an external device with DACK, using channel 1 of the DMAC which requires an external request in single address mode. Table 10.7 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers. Table 10.7 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External RAM and External Device with DACK Transfer Conditions Transfer source: external RAM Transfer destination: external device with DACK Transfer count: 32 times Transfer source address: decremented Transfer destination address: (setting ineffective) Transfer request source: external pin (DREQ1) edge detection Bus mode: burst Transfer unit: word No interrupt request generation at end of transfer Channel priority ranking: 2 > 0 > 1 > 3 DMAOR H'0201 Register SAR_1 DAR_1 DMATCR_1 CHCR_1 Value H'00400000 (access by DACK) H'00000020 H'00002269 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 207 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.5.3 Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and On-chip Memory (Address Reload On) In this example, the on-chip A/D converter channel 0 is the transfer source and on-chip memory is the transfer destination, and the address reload function is on. Table 10.8 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers. Table 10.8 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between A/D Converter (A/D1) and On-chip Memory Transfer Conditions Transfer source: on-chip A/D converter (A/D1) Transfer destination: on-chip memory Transfer count: 128 times (reload count 32 times) Transfer source address: incremented Transfer destination address: incremented Transfer request source: A/D converter (A/D 1) Bus mode: burst Transfer unit: byte Interrupt request generation at end of transfer Channel priority ranking: 0 > 2 > 3 > 1 DMAOR H'0101 Register SAR_2 DAR_2 DMATCR_2 CHCR_2 Value H'FFFF8428 H'FFFFF000 H'00000080 H'00085B25 When address reload is on, the SAR value returns to its initially established value every four transfers. In the above example, when a transfer request is input from the A/D converter (A/D1), the byte size data is first read from the H'FFFF8482 register of the A/D converter (AD1) and that data is written to the on-chip memory address H'FFFFF000. Because a byte size transfer was performed, the SAR and DAR values at this point are H'FFFF8429 and H'FFFFF001, respectively. Also, because this is a burst transfer, the bus mastership remain secured, so continuous data transfer is possible. When four transfers are completed, if the address reload is off, execution continues with the fifth and sixth transfers and the SAR value continues to increment from H'FFFF842B to H'FFFF842C to H'FFFF842D and so on. However, when the address reload is on, the DMAC transfer is halted upon completion of the fourth one and the bus mastership request signal to the CPU is cleared. At this time, the value stored in SAR is not H'FFFF842B to H'FFFF842C, but H'FFFF842B to H'FFFF8428, a return to the initially established address. The DAR value always continues to be incremented regardless of whether the address reload is on or off. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 208 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) The DMAC internal status, due to the above operation after completion of the fourth transfer, is indicated in table 10.9 for both address reload on and off. Table 10.9 DMAC Internal Status Item SAR DAR DMATCR Bus mastership DMAC operation Interrupts Address Reload On H'FFFF8428 H'FFFFF004 H'0000007C Released Halted Not issued Address Reload Off H'FFFF842C H'FFFFF004 H'0000007C Maintained Processing continues Not issued Not executed Transfer request source flag clear Executed Notes: 1. Interrupts are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0, and if the IE bit of the CHCR is set to 1, are issued regardless of whether the address reload is on or off. 2. If transfer request source flag clears are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0, they are executed regardless of whether the address reload is on or off. 3. Designate burst mode when using the address reload function. There are cases where abnormal operation will result if it is executed in cycle steal mode. 4. Designate a multiple of four for the DMATCR value when using the address reload function. There are cases where abnormal operation will result if anything else is designated. To execute transfers after the fifth one when the address reload is on, make the transfer request source issue another transfer request signal. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 209 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) 10.5.4 Example of DMA Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Transmit Side (Indirect Address On) In this example, DMAC channel 3 is used, an indirect address designated external memory is the transfer source and the SCI1 transmit side is the transfer destination. Table 10.10 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers. Table 10.10 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Transmit Side Transfer Conditions Transfer source: external memory Value stored in address H'00400000 Value stored in address H'00450000 Transfer destination: on-chip SCI1 (TDR1) Transfer count: 10 times Transfer source address: incremented Transfer destination address: fixed Transfer request source: SCI1 (TDR1) Bus mode: cycle steal Transfer unit: byte Interrupt request not generated at end of transfer Channel priority ranking: 0 > 1 > 2 > 3 DMAOR H'0001 Register SAR_3 — — DAR_3 DMATCR_3 CHCR_3 Value H'00400000 H'00450000 H'55 H'FFFF81B3 H'0000000A H'00011E01 When indirect address mode is on, the data stored in the address established in SAR is not used as the transfer source data. In the case of indirect addressing, the value stored in the SAR address is read, then that value is used as the address and the data read from that address is used as the transfer source data, then that data is stored in the address designated by the DAR. In the table 10.10 example, when a transfer request from the TDR_1 of SCI_1 is generated, a read of the address located at H'00400000, which is the value set in SAR_3, is performed first. The data H'00450000 is stored at this H'00400000 address, and the DMAC first reads this H'00450000 value. It then uses this read value of H'00450000 as an address and reads the value of H'55 that is stored in the H'00450000 address. It then writes the value H'55 to the address H'FFFF81B3 designated by DAR_3 to complete one indirect address transfer. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 210 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) With indirect addressing, the first executed data read from the address established in SAR_3 always results in a longword size transfer regardless of the TS0, TS1 bit designations for transfer data size. However, the transfer source address fixed and increment or decrement designations are as according to the SM0, SM1 bits. Consequently, despite the fact that the transfer data size designation is byte in this example, the SAR_3 value at the end of one transfer is H'00400004. The write operation is exactly the same as an ordinary dual address transfer write operation. 10.6 Usage Notes 1. The DMA operation register (DMAOR) can be accessed only in word (16-bit) units. The other registers can be accessed in word (16-bit) or longword (32-bit) units. 2. When rewriting the RS0 to RS3 bits of CHCR_0 to CHCR_3, first clear the DE bit to 0 (set the DE bit to 0 before doing rewrites with CHCR). 3. When an NMI interrupt is input, the NMIF bit of the DMAOR is set even when the DMAC is not operating. 4. Set the DME bit of the DMAOR to 0 and make certain that any DMAC received transfer request processing has been completed before entering standby mode. 5. Do not access the DMAC, DTC, BSC, or UBC on-chip peripheral modules from the DMAC. 6. When activating the DMAC, do the CHCR or DMAOR setting as the final step. There are instances where abnormal operation will result if any other registers are established last. 7. After the DMATCR count becomes 0 and the DMA transfer ends normally, always write a 0 to the DMATCR, even when executing the maximum number of transfers on the same channel. There are instances where abnormal operation will result if this is not done. 8. Designate burst mode as the transfer mode when using the address reload function. There are instances where abnormal operation will result in cycle steal mode. 9. Designate a multiple of four for the DMATCR value when using the address reload function. There are instances where abnormal operation will result if anything else is designated. 10. When detecting external requests by falling edge, maintain the external request pin at high level when performing the DMAC establishment. 11. When operating in single address mode, establish an external address as the address. There are instances where abnormal operation will result if an internal address is established. 12. Do not access DMAC register empty addresses (H'FFFF86B2 to H'FFFF86BF). Operation cannot be guaranteed when empty addresses are accessed. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 211 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 10. Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 212 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Section 11 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) This LSI has an on-chip multi-function timer pulse unit (MTU) that comprises five 16-bit timer channels. The block diagram is shown in figure 11.1. 11.1 Features • Maximum 16-pulse input/output • Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel • The following operations can be set for each channel: ⎯ Waveform output at compare match ⎯ Input capture function ⎯ Counter clear operation ⎯ Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously ⎯ Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture is possible ⎯ Register simultaneous input/output is possible by synchronous counter operation ⎯ A maximum 12-phase PWM output is possible in combination with synchronous operation • Buffer operation settable for channels 0, 3, and 4 • Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1 and 2 • Cascade connection operation • Fast access via internal 16-bit bus • 23 interrupt sources • Automatic transfer of register data • A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated • Module standby mode can be settable • A total of six-phase waveform output, which includes complementary PWM output, and positive and negative phases of reset PWM output by interlocking operation of channels 3 and 4, is possible. • AC synchronous motor (brushless DC motor) drive mode using complementary PWM output and reset PWM output is settable by interlocking operation of channels 0, 3, and 4, and the selection of two types of waveform outputs (chopping and level) is possible. TIMMTU1A_020020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 213 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.1 MTU Functions Item Count clock Channel 0 Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TGRA_0 TGRB_0 Channel 1 Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 Pφ/256 TCLKA TCLKB TGRA_1 TGRB_1 — TIOC1A TIOC1B Channel 2 Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 Pφ/1024 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TGRA_2 TGRB_2 — TIOC2A TIOC2B Channel 3 Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 Pφ/256 Pφ/1024 TCLKA TCLKB TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3C TIOC3D Channel 4 Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 Pφ/256 Pφ/1024 TCLKA TCLKB TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TIOC4A TIOC4B TIOC4C TIOC4D General registers General registers/ TGRC_0 buffer registers TGRD_0 I/O pins TIOC0A TIOC0B TIOC0C TIOC0D Counter clear function Compare match output 0 output 1 output Toggle output Input capture function Synchronous operation PWM mode 1 PWM mode 2 Complementary PWM mode TGR compare TGR compare TGR compare TGR compare TGR compare match or input match or input match or input match or input match or input capture capture capture capture capture — — — — — — — — — — — Reset PMW mode — AC synchronous motor drive mode Phase counting mode — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 214 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Item Buffer operation DMAC activation TGRA_0 compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture Channel 0 Channel 1 — TGRA_1 compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 2 — TGRA_2 compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_3 compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGRA_4 compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture and TCNT overflow or underflow TGRA_4 compare match or input capture 5 sources • Compare match or input capture 4A Compare match or input capture 4B Compare match or input capture 4C Compare match or input capture 4D Overflow or underflow DTC activation A/D converter start TGRA_0 trigger compare match or input capture Interrupt sources 5 sources • Compare match or input capture 0A Compare match or input capture 0B Compare match or input capture 0C Compare match or input capture 0D Overflow TGRA_1 compare match or input capture 4 sources • Compare match or input capture 1A • Compare match or input capture 1B • Overflow • Underflow TGRA_2 compare match or input capture 4 sources • TGRA_3 compare match or input capture 5 sources • • • • [Legend] Possible : —: Not possible Compare Compare • match or match or input input capture 3A capture 2A Compare • Compare • match or match or input input capture 3B capture 2B • Overflow • Compare match or • Underflow input capture 3C • Compare match or input capture 3D • Overflow • • • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 215 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TIORH TIORL TMDR Channel 3 TSR TGRC TGRD TGRA TGRB TCNT TIER Interrupt request signals Channel 3: TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TGIC_3 TGID_3 TCIV_3 Channel 4: TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TGIC_4 TGID_4 TCIV_4 TOCR TGCR Input/output pins Channel 3: TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3C TIOC3D Channel 4: TIOC4A TIOC4B TIOC4C TIOC4D Control logic for channels 3 and 4 TCR TMDR TIORH TIORL Channel 4 TSR TGRC TDDR TIER TCR TCNTS TCDR TMDR Channel 2 TSR TGRA TGRB TCNT Clock input Pφ/1 Pφ/4 Pφ/16 Pφ/64 Pφ/256 Pφ/1024 External clock: TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD Internal clock: Control logic for channel 0 to 2 TOER TCBR TGRD TGRA TGRB TCNT TSYR Module data bus Internal data bus BUS I/F Control logic Common TSTR A/D converter conversion start signal TIOR TIER TCR Interrupt request signals Channel 0: TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGIC_0 TGID_0 TCIV_0 Channel 1: TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1 Channel 2: TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2 Input/output pins Channel 0: TIOC0A TIOC0B TIOC0C TIOC0D Channel 1: TIOC1A TIOC1B Channel 2: TIOC2A TIOC2B TMDR Channel 1 TSR TGRA TIOR TIORH TIORL TMDR Channel 0 TSR TIER TCR TGRB TGRC TCNT [Legend] TSTR: TSYR: TCR: TMDR: TIOR (H, L): Timer start register Timer synchro register Timer control register Timer mode register Timer I/O control registers (H, L) TIER TCR TIER: TSR: TCNT: TGR (A, B, C, D): Timer interrupt enable register Timer status register Timer counter Timer general registers (A, B, C, D) Figure 11.1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 216 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Block Diagram of MTU TGRD TGRA TGRB TCNT 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.2 Input/Output Pins Table 11.2 Pin Configuration Channel Symbol Common TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD 0 TIOC0A TIOC0B TIOC0C TIOC0D 1 TIOC1A TIOC1B 2 TIOC2A TIOC2B 3 TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3C TIOC3D 4 TIOC4A TIOC4B TIOC4C TIOC4D I/O Input Input Input Input I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Function External clock A input pin (Channel 1 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock B input pin (Channel 1 phase counting mode B phase input) External clock C input pin (Channel 2 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock D input pin (Channel 2 phase counting mode B phase input) TGRA_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 217 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3 Register Descriptions The MTU has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each process, refer to section 25, List of Registers. To distinguish registers in each channel, an underscore and the channel number are added as a suffix to the register name; TCR for channel 0 is expressed as TCR_0. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0) Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0) Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0) Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0) Timer status register_0 (TSR_0) Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0) Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0) Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0) Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0) Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1) Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1) Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1) Timer status register_1 (TSR_1) Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1) Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1) Timer control register_2 (TCR_2) Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2) Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2) Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2) Timer status register_2 (TSR_2) Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2) Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2) Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2) Timer control register_3 (TCR_3) Timer mode register_3 (TMDR_3) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 218 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Timer I/O control register H_3 (TIORH_3) Timer I/O control register L_3 (TIORL_3) Timer interrupt enable register_3 (TIER_3) Timer status register_3 (TSR_3) Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3) Timer general register A_3 (TGRA_3) Timer general register B_3 (TGRB_3) Timer general register C_3 (TGRC_3) Timer general register D_3 (TGRD_3) Timer control register_4 (TCR_4) Timer mode register_4 (TMDR_4) Timer I/O control register H_4 (TIORH_4) Timer I/O control register L_4 (TIORL_4) Timer interrupt enable register_4 (TIER_4) Timer status register_4 (TSR_4) Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4) Timer general register A_4 (TGRA_4) Timer general register B_4 (TGRB_4) Timer general register C_4 (TGRC_4) Timer general register D_4 (TGRD_4) Common Registers • Timer start register (TSTR) • Timer synchronous register (TSYR) Common Registers for timers 3 and 4 • • • • • • • Timer output master enable register (TOER) Timer output control enable register (TOCR) Timer gate control register (TGCR) Timer cycle data register (TCDR) Timer dead time data register (TDDR) Timer subcounter (TCNTS) Timer cycle buffer register (TCBR) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 219 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) The TCR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TCNT operation for each channel. The MTU has a total of five TCR registers, one for each channel (channel 0 to 4). TCR register settings should be conducted only when TCNT operation is stopped. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit Name CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Counter Clear 0 to 2 These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source. See tables 11.3 and 11.4 for details. Clock Edge 0 and 1 These bits select the input clock edge. When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. Pφ/4 both edges = Pφ/2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1 and 2, this setting is ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority. Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is Pφ/4 or slower. When Pφ/1, or the overflow/underflow of another channel is selected for the input clock, although values can be written, counter operation compiles with the initial value. 00: Count at rising edge 01: Count at falling edge 1X: Count at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care 2 1 0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Time Prescaler 0 to 2 These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. See tables 11.5 to 11.8 for details. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 220 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.3 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 0, 3, and 4) Channel 0, 3, 4 Bit 7 CCLR2 0 Bit 6 CCLR1 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1 TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input 2 capture* TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input capture*2 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ 1 synchronous operation* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is set by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. Table 11.4 CCLR0 to CCLR2 (Channels 1 and 2) Channel 1, 2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Reserved*2 CCLR1 0 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1 Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1 and 2. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 221 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.5 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 0) Channel 0 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input Table 11.6 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 1) Channel 1 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input Internal clock: counts on Pφ/256 Counts on TCNT_2 overflow/underflow Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 222 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.7 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channel 2) Channel 2 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1024 Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. Table 11.8 TPSC0 to TPSC2 (Channels 3 and 4) Channel 3, 4 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/256 Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1024 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 223 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode of each channel. The MTU has five TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR register settings should be changed only when TCNT operation is stopped. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name — Initial Value All 1 R/W — Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 5 BFB 0 R/W Buffer Operation B Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRB and TGRD operate normally 1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation 4 BFA 0 R/W Buffer Operation A Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRA and TGRC operate normally 1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation 3 2 1 0 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Modes 0 to 3 These bits are used to set the timer operating mode. See table 11.9 for details. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 224 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.9 MD0 to MD3 Bit 3 MD3 0 Bit 2 MD2 0 Bit 1 MD1 0 Bit 0 MD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 X 0 1 1 0 1 Description Normal operation Setting prohibited PWM mode 1 PWM mode 2*1 Phase counting mode 1*2 Phase counting mode 2*2 Phase counting mode 3*2 Phase counting mode 4*2 Reset synchronous PWM mode*3 Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Complementary PWM mode 1 (transmit at peak)*3 Complementary PWM mode 2 (transmit at valley)*3 Complementary PWM mode 2 (transmit at peak and valley)*3 [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. PWM mode 2 can not be set for channels 3 and 4. 2. Phase counting mode can not be set for channels 0, 3, and 4. 3. Reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode can only be set for channel 3. When channel 3 is set to reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode, the channel 4 settings become ineffective and automatically conform to the channel 3 settings. However, do not set channel 4 to reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. Reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode cannot be set for channels 0, 1, and 2. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 225 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) The TIOR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TGR registers. The MTU has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0, 3, and 4, and one each for channels 1 and 2. Care is required as TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified. When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. • TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2, TIORH_3, TIORH_4 Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control B0 to B3 Specify the function of TGRB. See the following tables. TIORH_0: TIOR_1: TIOR_2: TIORH_3: TIORH_4: Table 11.10 Table 11.12 Table 11.13 Table 11.14 Table 11.16 3 2 1 0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W I/O Control A0 to A3 Specify the function of TGRA. See the following tables. TIORH_0: TIOR_1: TIOR_2: TIORH_3: TIORH_4: Table 11.18 Table 11.20 Table 11.21 Table 11.22 Table 11.24 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 226 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) • TIORL_0, TIORL_3, TIORL_4 Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control D0 to D3 Specify the function of TGRD. See the following tables. TIORL_0: Table 11.11 TIORL_3: Table 11.15 TIORL_4: Table 11.17 I/O Control C0 to C3 Specify the function of TGRC. See the following tables. TIORL_0: Table 11.19 TIORL_3: Table 11.23 TIORL_4: Table 11.25 3 2 1 0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 227 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.10 TIORH_0 (Channel 0) Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register TGRB_0 Function Output compare register TIOC0B Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count- up/count-down [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 228 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.11 TIORL_0 (Channel 0) Description Bit 7 IOD3 0 Bit 6 IOD2 0 Bit 5 IOD1 0 Bit 4 IOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register*2 TGRD_0 Function Output compare register*2 TIOC0D Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 229 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.12 TIOR_1 (Channel 1) Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register TGRB_1 Function Output compare register TIOC1B Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Input capture at generation of TGRC_0 compare match/input capture [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 230 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.13 TIOR_2 (Channel 2) Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRB_2 Function Output compare register TIOC2B Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 231 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.14 TIORH_3 (Channel 3) Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRB_3 Function Output compare register TIOC3B Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 232 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.15 TIORL_3 (Channel 3) Description Bit 7 IOD3 0 Bit 6 IOD2 0 Bit 5 IOD1 0 Bit 4 IOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register*2 TGRD_3 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOC3D Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRD_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 233 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.16 TIORH_4 (Channel 4) Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRB_4 Function Output compare register TIOC4B Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 234 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.17 TIORL_4 (Channel 4) Description Bit 7 IOD3 0 Bit 6 IOD2 0 Bit 5 IOD1 0 Bit 4 IOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register*2 TGRD_4 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOC4D Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_4 is set to 1 and TGRD_4 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 235 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.18 TIORH_0 (Channel 0) Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register TGRA_0 Function Output compare register TIOC0A Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 236 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.19 TIORL_0 (Channel 0) Description Bit 3 IOC3 0 Bit 2 IOC2 0 Bit 1 IOC1 0 Bit 0 IOC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register*2 TGRC_0 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOC0C Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 237 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.20 TIOR_1 (Channel 1) Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X Input capture register TGRA_1 Function Output compare register TIOC1A Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Input capture at generation of channel 0/TGRA_0 compare match/input capture [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 238 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.21 TIOR_2 (Channel 2) Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRA_2 Function Output compare register TIOC2A Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 239 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.22 TIORH_3 (Channel 3) Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRA_3 Function Output compare register TIOC3A Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 240 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.23 TIORL_3 (Channel 3) Description Bit 3 IOC3 0 Bit 2 IOC2 0 Bit 1 IOC1 0 Bit 0 IOC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register*2 TGRC_3 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOC3C Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFA bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRC_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 241 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.24 TIORH_4 (Channel 4) Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register TGRA_4 Function Output compare register TIOC4A Pin Function Output retained* Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Note: * After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 242 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.25 TIORL_4 (Channel 4) Description Bit 3 IOC3 0 Bit 2 IOC2 0 Bit 1 IOC1 0 Bit 0 IOC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X Input capture register*2 TGRC_4 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOC4C Pin Function Output retained*1 Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 Toggle output at compare match Output retained Initial output is 1 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 Toggle output at compare match Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges [Legend] X: Don’t care Notes: 1. After power-on reset, 0 is output until TIOR is set. 2. When the BFA bit in TMDR_4 is set to 1 and TGRC_4 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 243 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) The TIER registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The MTU has five TIER registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 Bit Name TTGE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description A/D Conversion Start Request Enable Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match. 0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled 1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled 6 — 1 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 5 TCIEU 0 R/W Underflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1 and 2. In channels 0, 3, and 4, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled 4 TCIEV 0 R/W Overflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled 3 TGIED 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable D Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0, 3, and 4. In channels 1 and 2, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 244 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 2 Bit Name TGIEC Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TGR Interrupt Enable C Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0, 3, and 4. In channels 1 and 2, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled 1 TGIEB 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable B Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled 0 TGIEA 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable A Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 245 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR) The TSR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that indicate the status of each channel. The MTU has five TSR registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value R/W TCFD 1 R Description Count Direction Flag Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT counts in channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. In channel 0, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and the write value should always be 1. 0: TCNT counts down 1: TCNT counts up Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 5 TCFU 0 R/(W)* Underflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred when channels 1 and 2 are set to phase counting mode. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 0, 3, and 4, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. [Setting condition] • When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF) [Clearing condition] • 4 TCFV 0 When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1 R/(W)* Overflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting condition] • When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000) In channel 4, when the TCNT_4 value underflows (changes from H'0001 to H'0000) in complementary PWM mode, this flag is also set. [Clearing condition] • When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1 In cannel 4, when DTC is activated by TCIV interrupt and the DISEL bit of DTMR in DTC is 0, this flag is also cleared. 6 — 1 R Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 246 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 3 Bit Name TGFD Initial Value R/W 0 Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0, 3, and 4. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1 and 2, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. [Setting conditions] • • When TCNT = TGRD and TGRD is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal and TGRD is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt and the DISEL bit of DTMR in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1 [Clearing conditions] • • 2 TGFC 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0, 3, and 4. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1 and 2, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. [Setting conditions] • • When TCNT = TGRC and TGRC is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal and TGRC is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt and the DISEL bit of DTMR in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1 [Clearing conditions] • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 247 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 1 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Bit Name TGFB Initial Value R/W 0 R/(W)* Description Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting conditions] • • When TCNT = TGRB and TGRB is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal and TGRB is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt and the DISEL bit of DTMR in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1 [Clearing conditions] • • 0 TGFA 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. [Setting conditions] • • When TCNT = TGRA and TGRA is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal and TGRA is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt and the DISEL bit of DTMR in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1 [Clearing conditions] • • Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 248 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT) The TCNT registers are 16-bit readable/writable counters. The MTU has five TCNT counters, one for each channel. The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset. The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. 11.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) The TGR registers are dual function 16-bit readable/writable registers, functioning as either output compare or input capture registers. The MTU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0, 3, and 4 and two each for channels 1 and 2. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0, 3, and 4 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA and TGRC and TGRB and TGRD. The initial value of TGR is H'FFFF. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 249 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 4. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter. Bit 7 6 Bit Name CST4 CST3 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Counter Start 4 and 3 These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT. If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. 0: TCNT_4 and TCNT_3 count operation is stopped 1: TCNT_4 and TCNT_3 performs count operation 5 to 3 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 2 1 0 CST2 CST1 CST0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Counter Start 2 to 0 These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT. If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. 0: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 count operation is stopped 1: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 performs count operation 11.3.9 Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR) TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the channel 0 to 4 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 250 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 7 6 Bit Name SYNC4 SYNC3 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Timer Synchronous operation 4 and 3 These bits are used to select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. When synchronous operation is selected, the TCNT synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous clearing by counter clearing on another channel, are possible. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit , the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR. 0: TCNT_4 and TCNT_3 operate independently (TCNT presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) 1: TCNT_4 and TCNT_3 performs synchronous operation TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible 5 to 3 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 2 1 0 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Timer Synchronous operation 2 to 0 These bits are used to select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. When synchronous operation is selected, the TCNT synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous clearing by counter clearing on another channel, are possible. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit, the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR. 0: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 operates independently (TCNT presetting /clearing is unrelated to other channels) 1: TCNT_2 to TCNT_0 performs synchronous operation TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 251 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.10 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) TOER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables/disables output settings for output pins TIOC4D, TIOC4C, TIOC3D, TIOC4B, TIOC4A, and TIOC3B. These pins do not output correctly if the TOER bits have not been set. Set TOER of CH3 and CH4 prior to setting TIOR of CH3 and CH4. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name — Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 5 OE4D 0 R/W Master Enable TIOC4D This bit enables/disables the TIOC4D pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Master Enable TIOC4C This bit enables/disables the TIOC4C pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Master Enable TIOC3D This bit enables/disables the TIOC3D pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Master Enable TIOC4B This bit enables/disables the TIOC4B pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Master Enable TIOC4A This bit enables/disables the TIOC4A pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Master Enable TIOC3B This bit enables/disables the TIOC3B pin MTU output. 0: MTU output is disabled 1: MTU output is enabled Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 252 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4 OE4C 0 R/W 3 OE3D 0 R/W 2 OE4B 0 R/W 1 OE4A 0 R/W 0 OE3B 0 R/W 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.11 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR) TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables/disables PWM synchronized toggle output in complementary PWM mode/reset synchronized PWM mode, and controls output level inversion of PWM output. Bit 7 Bit Name — Initial value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 6 PSYE 0 R/W PWM Synchronous Output Enable This bit selects the enable/disable of toggle output synchronized with the PWM period. 0: Toggle output is disabled 1: Toggle output is enabled 5 to 2 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 1 OLSN 0 R/W Output Level Select N This bit selects the reverse phase output level in reset-synchronized PWM mode/complementary PWM mode. See table 11.26 0 OLSP 0 R/W Output Level Select P This bit selects the positive phase output level in reset-synchronized PWM mode/complementary PWM mode. See table 11.27 Table 11.26 Output Level Select Function Bit 1 Function Compare Match Output OLSN 0 1 Initial Output High level Low level Active Level Low level High level Up Count High level Low level Down Count Low level High level Note: The reverse phase waveform initial output value changes to active level after elapse of the dead time after count start. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 253 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.27 Output Level Select Function Bit 0 Function Compare Match Output OLSP 0 1 Initial Output High level Low level Active Level Low level High level Up Count Low level High level Down Count High level Low level Figure 11.2 shows an example of complementary PWM mode output (1 phase) when OLSN = 1, OLSP = 1. TCNT_3, and TCNT_4 values TGRA_3 TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TGRA_4 TDDR H'0000 Initial output Initial output Active level Compare match output (up count) Active level Compare match output (down count) Compare match output (down count) Compare match output (up count) Active level Time Positive phase output Reverse phase output Figure 11.2 Complementary PWM Mode Output Level Example Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 254 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.12 Timer Gate Control Register (TGCR) TGCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the waveform output necessary for brushless DC motor control in reset-synchronized PWM mode/complementary PWM mode. These register settings are ineffective for anything other than complementary PWM mode/resetsynchronized PWM mode. Bit 7 Bit Name — Initial value 1 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 6 BDC 0 R/W Brushless DC Motor This bit selects whether to make the functions of this register (TGCR) effective or ineffective. 0: Ordinary output 1: Functions of this register are made effective 5 N 0 R/W Reverse Phase Output (N) Control This bit selects whether the level output or the resetsynchronized PWM/complementary PWM output while the reverse pins (TIOC3D, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D) are output. 0: Level output 1: Reset synchronized PWM/complementary PWM output 4 P 0 R/W Positive Phase Output (P) Control This bit selects whether the level output or the resetsynchronized PWM/complementary PWM output while the positive pin (TIOC3B, TIOC4A, and TIOC4B) are output. 0: Level output 1: Reset synchronized PWM/complementary PWM output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 255 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 3 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Bit Name FB Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description External Feedback Signal Enable This bit selects whether the switching of the output of the positive/reverse phase is carried out automatically with the MTU/channel 0 TGRA, TGRB, TGRC input capture signals or by writing 0 or 1 to bits 2 to 0 in TGCR. 0: Output switching is external input (Input sources are channel 0 TGRA, TGRB, TGRC input capture signal) 1: Output switching is carried out by software (TGCR's UF, VF, WF settings). 2 1 0 WF VF UF 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Output Phase Switch 2 to 0 These bits set the positive phase/negative phase output phase on or off state. The setting of these bits is valid only when the FB bit in this register is set to 1. In this case, the setting of bits 2 to 0 is a substitute for external input. See table 11.28. Table 11.28 Output level Select Function Function Bit 2 WF 0 Bit 1 VF 0 Bit 0 UF 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 TIOC3B U Phase OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF TIOC4A V Phase OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF TIOC4B TIOC3D TIOC4C V Phase OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF TIOC4D W Phase OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF W Phase U Phase OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 256 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.13 Timer Subcounter (TCNTS) TCNTS is a 16-bit read-only counter that is used only in complementary PWM mode. The initial value of TCNTS is H'0000. Note: Accessing the TCNTS in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units. 11.3.14 Timer Dead Time Data Register (TDDR) TDDR is a 16-bit register, used only in complementary PWM mode, that specifies the TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 counter offset values. In complementary PWM mode, when the TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 counters are cleared and then restarted, the TDDR register value is loaded into the TCNT_3 counter and the count operation starts. The initial value of TDDR is H'FFFF. Note: Accessing the TDDR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units. 11.3.15 Timer Period Data Register (TCDR) TCDR is a 16-bit register used only in complementary PWM mode. Set half the PWM carrier sync value as the TCDR register value. This register is constantly compared with the TCNTS counter in complementary PWM mode, and when a match occurs, the TCNTS counter switches direction (decrement to increment). The initial value of TCDR is H'FFFF. Note: Accessing the TCDR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units. 11.3.16 Timer Period Buffer Register (TCBR) The timer period buffer register (TCBR) is a 16-bit register used only in complementary PWM mode. It functions as a buffer register for the TCDR register. The TCBR register values are transferred to the TCDR register with the transfer timing set in the TMDR register. Note: Accessing the TCBR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 257 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.3.17 Bus Master Interface The timer counters (TCNT), general registers (TGR), timer subcounter (TCNTS), timer period buffer register (TCBR), and timer dead time data register (TDDR), and timer period data register (TCDR) are 16-bit registers. A 16-bit data bus to the bus master enables 16-bit read/writes. 8-bit read/write is not possible. Always access in 16-bit units. All registers other than the above registers are 8-bit registers. These are connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, so 16-bit read/writes and 8-bit read/writes are both possible. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 258 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.4 11.4.1 Operation Basic Functions Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting. Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register. Always select MTU external pins set function using the pin function controller (PFC). Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST4 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for the corresponding channel begins counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, for example. 1. Example of Count Operation Setting Procedure Figure 11.3 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure. [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Free-running counter [2] For periodic counter operation, select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. [3] Designate the TGR selected in [2] as an output compare register by means of TIOR. [4] Set the periodic counter cycle in the TGR selected in [2]. Start count operation [5] [5] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the counter operation. Operation selection Select counter clock [1] Periodic counter Select counter clearing source Select output compare register Set period [2] [3] [4] Start count operation [5] Figure 11.3 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 259 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 2. Free-Running Count Operation and Periodic Count Operation: Immediately after a reset, the MTU’s TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000), the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 11.4 illustrates free-running counter operation. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 Time CST bit TCFV Figure 11.4 Free-Running Counter Operation When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts up-count operation as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000. If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 260 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Figure 11.5 illustrates periodic counter operation. Counter cleared by TGR compare match TCNT value TGR H'0000 Time CST bit Flag cleared by software or DTC/DMAC activation TGF Figure 11.5 Waveform Output by Compare Match: Periodic Counter Operation The MTU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using compare match. 1. Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match Figure 11.6 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match Output selection Select waveform output mode [1] [1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and compare match output value 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the first compare match occurs. [2] Set the timing for compare match generation in TGR. Set output timing [2] [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start count operation [3] Figure 11.6 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 261 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 2. Examples of Waveform Output Operation: Figure 11.7 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made such that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change. TCNT value H'FFFF TGRA TGRB H'0000 TIOCA TIOCB No change No change Time No change No change 1 output 0 output Figure 11.7 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation Figure 11.8 shows an example of toggle output. In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing on compare match B), and settings have been made such that the output is toggled by both compare match A and compare match B. TCNT value Counter cleared by TGRB compare match H'FFFF TGRB TGRA H'0000 TIOCB TIOCA Time Toggle output Toggle output Figure 11.8 Example of Toggle Output Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 262 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0 and 1, it is also possible to specify another channel's counter input clock or compare match signal as the input capture source. Note: When another channel's counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels 0 and 1, Pφ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input. Input capture will not be generated if Pφ/1 is selected. 1. Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure Figure 11.9 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure. [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input capture source and input signal edge. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Input selection Select input capture input [1] Start count [2] Figure 11.9 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure 2. Example of Input Capture Operation: Figure 11.10 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge, the falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 263 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Counter cleared by TIOCB input (falling edge) TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0010 H'0005 H'0000 Time TIOCA TGRA H'0005 H'0160 H'0010 TIOCB TGRB H'0180 Figure 11.10 11.4.2 Synchronous Operation Example of Input Capture Operation In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing). Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base. Channels 0 to 4 can all be designated for synchronous operation. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 264 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 11.11 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure. Synchronous operation selection Set synchronous operation [1] Synchronous presetting Synchronous clearing Set TCNT [2] Clearing source generation channel? Yes Select counter clearing source [3] Set synchronous counter clearing [4] No Start count [5] Start count [5] [1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous operation. [2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters. [3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare, etc. [4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source. [5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation. Figure 11.11 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 11.12 shows an example of synchronous operation. In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to 2, TGRB_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match, are performed for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_0 is used as the PWM cycle. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 265 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) For details of PWM modes, see section 11.4.5, PWM Modes. Synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match TCNT0 to TCNT2 values TGRB_0 TGRB_1 TGRA_0 TGRB_2 TGRA_1 TGRA_2 H'0000 TIOC0A TIOC1A TIOC2A Time Figure 11.12 11.4.3 Buffer Operation Example of Synchronous Operation Buffer operation, provided for channels 0, 3, and 4, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer registers. Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture register or as a compare match register. Table 11.29 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. Table 11.29 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation Channel 0 Timer General Register TGRA_0 TGRB_0 3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 Buffer Register TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 266 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) • When TGR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is transferred to the timer general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 11.13. Compare match signal Buffer register Timer general register Comparator TCNT Figure 11.13 Compare Match Buffer Operation • When TGR is an input capture register When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is illustrated in figure 11.14. Input capture signal Buffer register Timer general register TCNT Figure 11.14 Input Capture Buffer Operation Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 11.15 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure. [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or output compare register by means of TIOR. [1] [2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits BFA and BFB in TMDR. [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count operation. Set buffer operation [2] Buffer operation Select TGR function Start count [3] Figure 11.15 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 267 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Examples of Buffer Operation: 1. When TGR is an output compare register Figure 11.16 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0 output at compare match B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA. This operation is repeated each time that compare match A occurs. For details of PWM modes, see section 11.4.5, PWM Modes. TCNT value TGRB_0 H'0200 TGRA_0 H'0000 TGRC_0 H'0200 Transfer TGRA_0 H'0200 H'0450 H'0450 H'0520 Time H'0520 H'0450 TIOCA Figure 11.16 Example of Buffer Operation (1) 2. When TGR is an input capture register Figure 11.17 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon the occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 268 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. TCNT value H'0F07 H'09FB H'0532 H'0000 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Time TIOCA TGRA H'0532 H'0F07 H'0532 H'09FB H'0F07 TGRC Figure 11.17 11.4.4 Cascaded Operation Example of Buffer Operation (2) In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit counter. This function works by counting the channel 1 counter clock upon overflow/underflow of TCNT_2 as set in bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR. Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode. Table 11.30 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation. Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1, the counter clock setting is invalid and the counters operates independently in phase counting mode. Table 11.30 Cascaded Combinations Combination Channels 1 and 2 Upper 16 Bits TCNT_1 Lower 16 Bits TCNT_2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 269 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 11.18 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation. [1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1 TCR to B'1111 to select TCNT_2 overflow/ underflow counting. [1] [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower channel to 1 to start the count operation. Cascaded operation Set cascading Start count [2] Figure 11.18 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 11.19 illustrates the operation when TCNT_2 overflow/underflow counting has been set for TCNT_1 and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2. TCNT_1 is incremented by TCNT_2 overflow and decremented by TCNT_2 underflow. TCLKC TCLKD TCNT_2 FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0001 0000 FFFF TCNT_1 0000 0001 0000 Figure 11.19 Example of Cascaded Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 270 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.4.5 PWM Modes In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. The output level can be selected as 0, 1, or toggle output in response to a compare match of each TGR. TGR registers settings can be used to output a PWM waveform in the range of 0% to 100% duty. Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is also possible. There are two PWM modes, as described below. 1. PWM mode 1 PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA0 to IOA3 and IOC0 to IOC3 in TIOR is output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output specified by bits IOB0 to IOB3 and IOD0 to IOD3 in TIOR is output at compare matches B and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible. 2. PWM mode 2 PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 2, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible in combination use with synchronous operation. The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 11.31. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 271 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.31 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins Output Pins Channel 0 Registers TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TIOC4C TIOC4A TIOC3C TIOC3A TIOC2A TIOC1A TIOC0C PWM Mode 1 TIOC0A PWM Mode 2 TIOC0A TIOC0B TIOC0C TIOC0D TIOC1A TIOC1B TIOC2A TIOC2B Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 272 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 11.20 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure. [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source. [3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output compare register, and select the initial value and output value. [3] [4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set the duty in the other TGR. [5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. [6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Set PWM mode [5] PWM mode Select counter clock [1] Select counter clearing source [2] Select waveform output level Set TGR [4] Start count [6] Figure 11.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 11.21 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation. In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value. In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in the TGRB registers are used as the duty levels. TCNT value TGRA Counter cleared by TGRA compare match TGRB H'0000 TIOCA Time Figure 11.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 273 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Figure 11.22 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGRB_1 compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers (TGRA_0 to TGRD_0, TGRA_1), outputting a 5-phase PWM waveform. In this case, the value set in TGRB_1 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs are used as the duty levels. Counter cleared by TGRB_1 compare match TCNT value TGRB_1 TGRA_1 TGRD_0 TGRC_0 TGRB_0 TGRA_0 H'0000 Time TIOC0A TIOC0B TIOC0C TIOC0D TIOC1A Figure 11.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 274 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Figure 11.23 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM mode. TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB H'0000 TGRB rewritten TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA 0% duty Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty 0% duty TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA Figure 11.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 275 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.4.6 Phase Counting Mode In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1 and 2. When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 and bits CKEG0 and CKEG1 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR0 and CCLR1 in TCR, and of TIOR, TIER, and TGR, are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used. This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. If overflow occurs when TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; if underflow occurs when TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set. The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag reveals whether TCNT is counting up or down. Table 11.32 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels. Table 11.32 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins External Clock Pins Channels When channel 1 is set to phase counting mode When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode A-Phase TCLKA TCLKC B-Phase TCLKB TCLKD Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 11.24 shows an example of the phase counting mode setting procedure. [1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Phase counting mode Select phase counting mode [1] Start count [2] Figure 11.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 276 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes, according to the count conditions. 1. Phase counting mode 1 Figure 11.25 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 11.33 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channel 1) TCLKC (channel 2) TCLKB (channel 1) TCLKD (channel 2) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation Table 11.33 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1 TCLKA (Channel 1) TCLKC (Channel 2) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge Down-count TCLKB (Channel 1) TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation Up-count Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 277 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 2. Phase counting mode 2 Figure 11.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 11.34 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channel 1) TCLKC (channel 2) TCLKB (channel 1) TCLKD (channel 2) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation Table 11.34 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2 TCLKA (Channel 1) TCLKC (Channel 2) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge TCLKB (Channel 1) TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation Don’t care Don’t care Don’t care Up-count Don’t care Don’t care Don’t care Down-count Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 278 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 3. Phase counting mode 3 Figure 11.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 11.35 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channel 1) TCLKC (channel 2) TCLKB (channel 1) TCLKD (channel 2) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation Table 11.35 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3 TCLKA (Channel 1) TCLKC (Channel 2) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge TCLKB (Channel 1) TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation Don’t care Don’t care Don’t care Up-count Down-count Don’t care Don’t care Don’t care Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 279 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 4. Phase counting mode 4 Figure 11.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 11.36 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channel 1) TCLKC (channel 2) TCLKB (channel 1) TCLKD (channel 2) TCNT value Down-count Up-count Time Figure 11.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation Table 11.36 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4 TCLKA (Channel 1) TCLKC (Channel 2) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level [Legend] : Rising edge : Falling edge Don’t care Down-count Don’t care TCLKB (Channel 1) TCLKD (Channel 2) Operation Up-count Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 280 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 11.29 shows an example in which channel 1 is in phase counting mode, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect position or speed. Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input to TCLKA and TCLKB. Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGRC_0 compare match; TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 are used for the compare match function and are set with the speed control period and position control period. TGRB_0 is used for input capture, with TGRB_0 and TGRD_0 operating in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGRB_0 input capture source, and the pulse widths of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses are detected. TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 for channel 1 are designated for input capture, and channel 0 TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 compare matches are selected as the input capture source and store the up/down-counter values for the control periods. This procedure enables the accurate detection of position and speed. Channel 1 TCLKA TCLKB Edge detection circuit TCNT_1 TGRA_1 (speed period capture) TGRB_1 (position period capture) TCNT_0 + + - TGRA_0 (speed control period) TGRC_0 (position control period) TGRB_0 (pulse width capture) TGRD_0 (buffer operation) Channel 0 Figure 11.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 281 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.4.7 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode In the reset-synchronized PWM mode, three-phase output of positive and negative PWM waveforms that share a common wave transition point can be obtained by combining channels 3 and 4. When set for reset-synchronized PWM mode, the TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4C, TIOC4B, and TIOC4D pins function as PWM output pins and TCNT3 functions as an upcounter. Table 11.37 shows the PWM output pins used. Table 11.38 shows the settings of the registers. Table 11.37 Output Pins for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Channel 3 Output Pin TIOC3B TIOC3D 4 TIOC4A TIOC4C TIOC4B TIOC4D Description PWM output pin 1 PWM output pin 1' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 1) PWM output pin 2 PWM output pin 2' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 2) PWM output pin 3 PWM output pin 3' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 3) Table 11.38 Register Settings for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Register TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 Description of Setting Initial setting of H'0000 Initial setting of H'0000 Set count cycle for TCNT_3 Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC3B and TIOC3D pins Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC4A and TIOC4C pins Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC4B and TIOC4D pins Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 282 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Procedure for Selecting the Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Figure 11.30 shows an example of procedure for selecting the reset synchronized PWM mode. [1] Clear the CST3 and CST4 bits in the TSTR to 0 to halt the counting of TCNT. The reset-synchronized PWM mode must be set up while TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 are halted. [1] [2] Set bits TPSC2-TPSC0 and CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TCR_3 to select the counter clock and clock edge for channel 3. Set bits CCLR2-CCLR0 in the TCR_3 to select TGRA compare-match as a counter clear source. [3] When performing brushless DC motor control, set bit BDC in the timer gate control register (TGCR) and set the feedback signal input source and output chopping or gate signal direct output. [4] Reset TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 to H'0000. [5] [5] TGRA_3 is the period register. Set the waveform period value in TGRA_3. Set the transition timing of the PWM output waveforms in TGRB_3, TGRA_4, and TGRB_4. Set times within the compare-match range of TCNT_3. X ≤ TGRA_3 (X: set value). [6] Select enabling/disabling of toggle output synchronized with the PMW cycle using bit PSYE in the timer output control register (TOCR), and set the PWM output level with bits OLSP and OLSN. [7] Set bits MD3-MD0 in TMDR_3 to B'1000 to select the reset-synchronized PWM mode. Do not set to TMDR_4. PFC setting [9] [8] Set the enabling/disabling of the PWM waveform output pin in TOER. Start count operation Reset-synchronized PWM mode [10] [9] Set the port control register and the port I/O register. [10] Set the CST3 bit in the TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Reset-synchronized PWM mode Stop counting Select counter clock and counter clear source [2] Brushless DC motor control setting [3] Set TCNT [4] Set TGR PWM cycle output enabling, PWM output level setting [6] Set reset-synchronized PWM mode [7] Enable waveform output [8] Note: The output waveform starts to toggle operation at the point of TCNT_3 = TGRA_3 = X by setting X = TGRA, i.e., cycle = duty. Figure 11.30 Procedure for Selecting Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 283 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Operation: Figure 11.31 shows an example of operation in the reset-synchronized PWM mode. TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 operate as upcounters. The counter is cleared when a TCNT_3 and TGRA_3 compare-match occurs, and then begins incrementing from H'0000. The PWM output pin output toggles with each occurrence of a TGRB_3, TGRA_4, TGRB_4 compare-match, and upon counter clears. TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 values TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 H'0000 Time TIOC3B TIOC3D TIOC4A TIOC4C TIOC4B TIOC4D Figure 11.31 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Operation Example (When TOCR’s OLSN = 1 and OLSP = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 284 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.4.8 Complementary PWM Mode In the complementary PWM mode, three-phase output of non-overlapping positive and negative PWM waveforms can be obtained by combining channels 3 and 4. In complementary PWM mode, TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D pins function as PWM output pins, the TIOC3A pin can be set for toggle output synchronized with the PWM period. TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 function as up/down counters. Table 11.39 shows the PWM output pins used. Table 11.40 shows the settings of the registers used. A function to directly cut off the PWM output by using an external signal is supported as a port function. Table 11.39 Output Pins for Complementary PWM Mode Channel 3 Output Pin TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3C TIOC3D 4 TIOC4A TIOC4B TIOC4C TIOC4D Note: * Description Toggle output synchronized with PWM period (or I/O port) PWM output pin 1 I/O port* PWM output pin 1 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of PWM output 1) PWM output pin 2 PWM output pin 3 PWM output pin 2 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of PWM output 2) PWM output pin 3 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of PWM output 3) Avoid setting the TIOC3C pin as a timer I/O pin in the complementary PWM mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 285 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.40 Register Settings for Complementary PWM Mode Channel 3 Counter/Register TCNT_3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 4 TCNT_4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 Timer dead time data register (TDDR) Timer cycle data register (TCDR) Timer cycle buffer register (TCBR) Subcounter (TCNTS) Temporary register 1 (TEMP1) Temporary register 2 (TEMP2) Temporary register 3 (TEMP3) Note: * Description Start of up-count from value set in dead time register Set TCNT_3 upper limit value (1/2 carrier cycle + dead time) PWM output 1 compare register TGRA_3 buffer register PWM output 1/TGRB_3 buffer register Up-count start, initialized to H'0000 PWM output 2 compare register PWM output 3 compare register PWM output 2/TGRA_4 buffer register PWM output 3/TGRB_4 buffer register Set TCNT_4 and TCNT_3 offset value (dead time value) Set TCNT_4 upper limit value (1/2 carrier cycle) TCDR buffer register Subcounter for dead time generation PWM output 1/TGRB_3 temporary register PWM output 2/TGRA_4 temporary register PWM output 3/TGRB_4 temporary register Read/Write from CPU Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Always readable/writable Always readable/writable Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Always readable/writable Always readable/writable Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Maskable by BSC/BCR1 setting* Always readable/writable Read-only Not readable/writable Not readable/writable Not readable/writable Access can be enabled or disabled according to the setting of bit 13 (MTURWE) in BSC/BCR1 (bus controller/bus control register 1). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 286 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TCNT_4 underflow interrupt TGRA_3 comparematch interrupt TGRC_3 TCBR TDDR TGRA_3 TCDR Comparator Output controller Match signal PWM cycle output PWM output 1 PWM output 2 PWM output 3 PWM output 4 PWM output 5 PWM output 6 External cutoff input POE0 POE1 POE2 POE3 Comparator Match signal TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRD_3 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TGRB_4 Temp 2 Temp 3 Temp 1 External cutoff interrupt : Registers that can always be read or written from the CPU : Registers that can be read or written from the CPU (but for which access disabling can be set by the bus controller) : Registers that cannot be read or written from the CPU (except for TCNTS, which can only be read) Figure 11.32 Block Diagram of Channels 3 and 4 in Complementary PWM Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 287 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Output protection circuit TCNT_3 TCNTS TCNT_4 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure: An example of the complementary PWM mode setting procedure is shown in figure 11.33. [1] Clear bits CST3 and CST4 in the timer start register (TSTR) to 0, and halt timer counter (TCNT) operation. Perform complementary PWM mode setting when TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 are stopped. [1] [2] Set the same counter clock and clock edge for channels 3 and 4 with bits TPSC2-TPSC0 and bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the timer control register (TCR). Use bits CCLR2-CCLR0 to set synchronous clearing only when restarting by a synchronous clear from another channel during complementary PWM mode operation. [3] When performing brushless DC motor control, set bit BDC in the timer gate control register (TGCR) and set the feedback signal input source and output chopping or gate signal direct output. [4] Set the dead time in TCNT_3. Set TCNT_4 to H'0000. Complementary PWM mode Stop count operation Counter clock, counter clear source selection [2] Brushless DC motor control setting [3] TCNT setting [4] Inter-channel synchronization setting [5] TGR setting [6] [5] Set only when restarting by a synchronous clear from another channel during complementary PWM mode operation. In this case, synchronize the channel generating the synchronous clear with channels 3 and 4 using the timer synchro register (TSYR). [6] Set the output PWM duty in the duty registers (TGRB_3, TGRA_4, TGRB_4) and buffer registers (TGRD_3, TGRC_4, TGRD_4). Set the same initial value in each corresponding TGR. [7] Set the dead time in the dead time register (TDDR), 1/2 the carrier cycle in the carrier cycle data register (TCDR) and carrier cycle buffer register (TCBR), and 1/2 the carrier cycle plus the dead time in TGRA_3 and TGRC_3. [8] Select enabling/disabling of toggle output synchronized with the PWM cycle using bit PSYE in the timer output control register (TOCR), and set the PWM output level with bits OLSP and OLSN. [9] Select complementary PWM mode in timer mode register 3 (TMDR_3). Do not set in TMDR_4. Dead time, carrier cycle setting PWM cycle output enabling, PWM output level setting Complementary PWM mode setting [7] [8] [9] Enable waveform output [10] PFC setting [11] [10] Set enabling/disabling of PWM waveform output pin output in the timer output master enable register (TOER). Start count operation [12] [11] Set the port control register and the port I/O register. [12] Set bits CST3 and CST4 in TSTR to 1 simultaneously to start the count operation. Figure 11.33 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 288 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Outline of Complementary PWM Mode Operation: In complementary PWM mode, 6-phase PWM output is possible. Figure 11.34 illustrates counter operation in complementary PWM mode, and figure 11.35 shows an example of complementary PWM mode operation. 1. Counter Operation In complementary PWM mode, three counters—TCNT_3, TCNT_4, and TCNTS—perform up/down-count operations. TCNT_3 is automatically initialized to the value set in TDDR when complementary PWM mode is selected and the CST bit in TSTR is 0. When the CST bit is set to 1, TCNT_3 counts up to the value set in TGRA_3, then switches to down-counting when it matches TGRA_3. When the TCNT3 value matches TDDR, the counter switches to up-counting, and the operation is repeated in this way. TCNT_4 is initialized to H'0000. When the CST bit is set to 1, TCNT4 counts up in synchronization with TCNT_3, and switches to down-counting when it matches TCDR. On reaching H'0000, TCNT4 switches to up-counting, and the operation is repeated in this way. TCNTS is a read-only counter. It need not be initialized. When TCNT_3 matches TCDR during TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 up/down-counting, downcounting is started, and when TCNTS matches TCDR, the operation switches to up-counting. When TCNTS matches TGRA_3, it is cleared to H'0000. When TCNT_4 matches TDDR during TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 down-counting, up-counting is started, and when TCNTS matches TDDR, the operation switches to down-counting. When TCNTS reaches H'0000, it is set with the value in TGRA_3. TCNTS is compared with the compare register and temporary register in which the PWM duty is set during the count operation only. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 289 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TCNT_3 TCNT_4 Counter value TCNTS TGRA_3 TCDR TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TDDR H'0000 Time TCNTS Figure 11.34 Complementary PWM Mode Counter Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 290 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 2. Register Operation: In complementary PWM mode, nine registers are used, comprising compare registers, buffer registers, and temporary registers. Figure 11.35 shows an example of complementary PWM mode operation. The registers which are constantly compared with the counters to perform PWM output are TGRB_3, TGRA_4, and TGRB_4. When these registers match the counter, the value set in bits OLSN and OLSP in the timer output control register (TOCR) is output. The buffer registers for these compare registers are TGRD_3, TGRC_4, and TGRD_4. Between a buffer register and compare register there is a temporary register. The temporary registers cannot be accessed by the CPU. Data in a compare register is changed by writing the new data to the corresponding buffer register. The buffer registers can be read or written at any time. The data written to a buffer register is constantly transferred to the temporary register in the Ta interval. Data is not transferred to the temporary register in the Tb interval. Data written to a buffer register in this interval is transferred to the temporary register at the end of the Tb interval. The value transferred to a temporary register is transferred to the compare register when TCNTS for which the Tb interval ends matches TGRA_3 when counting up, or H'0000 when counting down. The timing for transfer from the temporary register to the compare register can be selected with bits MD3 to MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR). Figure 11.35 shows an example in which the mode is selected in which the change is made in the trough. In the tb interval (tb1 in figure 11.35) in which data transfer to the temporary register is not performed, the temporary register has the same function as the compare register, and is compared with the counter. In this interval, therefore, there are two compare match registers for one-phase output, with the compare register containing the pre-change data, and the temporary register containing the new data. In this interval, the three counters—TCNT_3, TCNT_4, and TCNTS—and two registers—compare register and temporary register—are compared, and PWM output controlled accordingly. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 291 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Transfer from temporary register to compare register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Tb2 TGRA_3 Ta Tb1 Ta Tb2 Ta TCNTS TCDR TCNT_3 TGRA_4 TCNT_4 TGRC_4 TDDR H'0000 Buffer register TGRC_4 Temporary register TEMP2 H'6400 H'0080 H'6400 H'0080 Compare register TGRA_4 H'6400 H'0080 Output waveform Output waveform (Output waveform is active-low) Figure 11.35 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 292 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 3. Initialization In complementary PWM mode, there are six registers that must be initialized. Before setting complementary PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR), the following initial register values must be set. TGRC_3 operates as the buffer register for TGRA_3, and should be set with 1/2 the PWM carrier cycle + dead time Td. The timer cycle buffer register (TCBR) operates as the buffer register for the timer cycle data register (TCDR), and should be set with 1/2 the PWM carrier cycle. Set dead time Td in the timer dead time data register (TDDR). Set the respective initial PWM duty values in buffer registers TGRD_3, TGRC_4, and TGRD_4. The values set in the five buffer registers excluding TDDR are transferred simultaneously to the corresponding compare registers when complementary PWM mode is set. Set TCNT_4 to H'0000 before setting complementary PWM mode. Table 11.41 Registers and Counters Requiring Initialization Register/Counter TGRC_3 TDDR TCBR TGRD_3, TGRC_4, TGRD_4 TCNT_4 Set Value 1/2 PWM carrier cycle + dead time Td Dead time Td 1/2 PWM carrier cycle Initial PWM duty value for each phase H'0000 Note: The TGRC_3 set value must be the sum of 1/2 the PWM carrier cycle set in TCBR and dead time Td set in TDDR. 4. PWM Output Level Setting In complementary PWM mode, the PWM pulse output level is set with bits OLSN and OLSP in the timer output control register (TOCR). The output level can be set for each of the three positive phases and three negative phases of 6phase output. Complementary PWM mode should be cleared before setting or changing output levels. 5. Dead Time Setting In complementary PWM mode, PWM pulses are output with a non-overlapping relationship between the positive and negative phases. This non-overlap time is called the dead time. The non-overlap time is set in the timer dead time data register (TDDR). The value set in TDDR is used as the TCNT_3 counter start value, and creates non-overlap between TCNT_3 and TCNT_4. Complementary PWM mode should be cleared before changing the contents of TDDR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 293 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 6. PWM Cycle Setting In complementary PWM mode, the PWM pulse cycle is set in two registers—TGRA_3, in which the TCNT_3 upper limit value is set, and TCDR, in which the TCNT_4 upper limit value is set. The settings should be made so as to achieve the following relationship between these two registers: TGRA_3 set value = TCDR set value + TDDR set value The TGRA_3 and TCDR settings are made by setting the values in buffer registers TGRC_3 and TCBR. The values set in TGRC_3 and TCBR are transferred simultaneously to TGRA_3 and TCDR in accordance with the transfer timing selected with bits MD3 to MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR). The updated PWM cycle is reflected from the next cycle when the data update is performed at the crest, and from the current cycle when performed in the trough. Figure 11.36 illustrates the operation when the PWM cycle is updated at the crest. See the following section, Register Data Updating, for the method of updating the data in each buffer register. Counter value TGRC_3 update TGRA_3 update TCNT_3 TGRA_3 TCNT_4 Time Figure 11.36 Example of PWM Cycle Updating Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 294 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 7. Register Data Updating In complementary PWM mode, the buffer register is used to update the data in a compare register. The update data can be written to the buffer register at any time. There are five PWM duty and carrier cycle registers that have buffer registers and can be updated during operation. There is a temporary register between each of these registers and its buffer register. When subcounter TCNTS is not counting, if buffer register data is updated, the temporary register value is also rewritten. Transfer is not performed from buffer registers to temporary registers when TCNTS is counting; in this case, the value written to a buffer register is transferred after TCNTS halts. The temporary register value is transferred to the compare register at the data update timing set with bits MD3 to MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR). Figure 11.37 shows an example of data updating in complementary PWM mode. This example shows the mode in which data updating is performed at both the counter crest and trough. When rewriting buffer register data, a write to TGRD_4 must be performed at the end of the update. Data transfer from the buffer registers to the temporary registers is performed simultaneously for all five registers after the write to TGRD_4. A write to TGRD_4 must be performed after writing data to the registers to be updated, even when not updating all five registers, or when updating the TGRD_4 data. In this case, the data written to TGRD_4 should be the same as the data prior to the write operation. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 295 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Figure 11.37 : Compare register : Buffer register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Transfer from temporary register to compare register Data update timing: counter crest and trough Transfer from temporary register to compare register Counter value Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 296 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Time data2 data2 data1 data2 data3 data3 data3 data4 data4 data5 data5 data4 data6 data6 data6 TGRA_3 TGRC_4 TGRA_4 H'0000 BR data1 Temp_R data1 Example of Data Update in Complementary PWM Mode GR 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 8. Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode: In complementary PWM mode, the initial output is determined by the setting of bits OLSN and OLSP in the timer output control register (TOCR). This initial output is the PWM pulse non-active level, and is output from when complementary PWM mode is set with the timer mode register (TMDR) until TCNT_4 exceeds the value set in the dead time register (TDDR). Figure 11.38 shows an example of the initial output in complementary PWM mode. An example of the waveform when the initial PWM duty value is smaller than the TDDR value is shown in figure 11.39. Timer output control register settings OLSN bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low) OLSP bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low) TCNT3, 4 value TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TGR4_A TDDR Time Initial output Positive phase output Negative phase output Dead time Active level Active level Complementary PWM mode (TMDR setting) TCNT3, 4 count start (TSTR setting) Figure 11.38 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 297 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Timer output control register settings OLSN bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low) OLSP bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low) TCNT_3, 4 value TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TDDR TGRA_4 Time Initial output Positive phase output Negative phase output Active level Complementary PWM mode (TMDR setting) TCNT_3, 4 count start (TSTR setting) Figure 11.39 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 298 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 9. Complementary PWM Mode PWM Output Generation Method: In complementary PWM mode, 3-phase output is performed of PWM waveforms with a nonoverlap time between the positive and negative phases. This non-overlap time is called the dead time. A PWM waveform is generated by output of the output level selected in the timer output control register in the event of a compare-match between a counter and data register. While TCNTS is counting, data register and temporary register values are simultaneously compared to create consecutive PWM pulses from 0 to 100%. The relative timing of on and off comparematch occurrence may vary, but the compare-match that turns off each phase takes precedence to secure the dead time and ensure that the positive phase and negative phase on times do not overlap. Figures 11.40 to 11.42 show examples of waveform generation in complementary PWM mode. The positive phase/negative phase off timing is generated by a compare-match with the solidline counter, and the on timing by a compare-match with the dotted-line counter operating with a delay of the dead time behind the solid-line counter. In the T1 period, compare-match a that turns off the negative phase has the highest priority, and compare-matches occurring prior to a are ignored. In the T2 period, compare-match c that turns off the positive phase has the highest priority, and compare-matches occurring prior to c are ignored. In normal cases, compare-matches occur in the order a → b → c → d (or c → d → a' → b'), as shown in figure 11.40. If compare-matches deviate from the a → b → c → d order, since the time for which the negative phase is off is less than twice the dead time, the figure shows the positive phase is not being turned on. If compare-matches deviate from the c → d → a' → b' order, since the time for which the positive phase is off is less than twice the dead time, the figure shows the negative phase is not being turned on. If compare-match c occurs first following compare-match a, as shown in figure 11.41, compare-match b is ignored, and the negative phase is turned off by compare-match d. This is because turning off of the positive phase has priority due to the occurrence of compare-match c (positive phase off timing) before compare-match b (positive phase on timing) (consequently, the waveform does not change since the positive phase goes from off to off). Similarly, in the example in figure 11.42, compare-match a' with the new data in the temporary register occurs before compare-match c, but other compare-matches occurring up to c, which turns off the positive phase, are ignored. As a result, the positive phase is not turned on. Thus, in complementary PWM mode, compare-matches at turn-off timings take precedence, and turn-on timing compare-matches that occur before a turn-off timing compare-match are ignored. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 299 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) T1 period TGR3A_3 c TCDR d T2 period T1 period a b a' b' TDDR H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase Figure 11.40 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (1) T1 period T2 period T1 period TGRA_3 c TCDR a b d a b TDDR H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase Figure 11.41 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 300 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. T1 period TGRA_3 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) T1 period T2 period TCDR a b TDDR c a' H'0000 Positive phase b' d Negative phase Figure 11.42 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (3) T1 period T2 period c d T1 period TGRA_3 TCDR a b a' TDDR b' H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase Figure 11.43 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 301 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) T1 period TGRA_3 T2 period T1 period TCDR a b a TDDR b H'0000 Positive phase c d Negative phase Figure 11.44 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (2) T1 period TGRA_3 c d T2 period T1 period TCDR a b TDDR H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase Figure 11.45 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (3) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 302 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) T1 period T2 period T1 period TGRA_3 TCDR a b TDDR H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase c b' d a' Figure 11.46 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (4) T1 period TGRA_3 c ad b T2 period T1 period TCDR TDDR H'0000 Positive phase Negative phase Figure 11.47 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (5) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 303 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 10. Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Duty Output: In complementary PWM mode, 0% and 100% duty cycles can be output as required. Figures 11.43 to 11.47 show output examples. 100% duty output is performed when the data register value is set to H'0000. The waveform in this case has a positive phase with a 100% on-state. 0% duty output is performed when the data register value is set to the same value as TGRA_3. The waveform in this case has a positive phase with a 100% off-state. On and off compare-matches occur simultaneously, but if a turn-on compare-match and turnoff compare-match for the same phase occur simultaneously, both compare-matches are ignored and the waveform does not change. 11. Toggle Output Synchronized with PWM Cycle In complementary PWM mode, toggle output can be performed in synchronization with the PWM carrier cycle by setting the PSYE bit to 1 in the timer output control register (TOCR). An example of a toggle output waveform is shown in figure 11.48. This output is toggled by a compare-match between TCNT_3 and TGRA_3 and a comparematch between TCNT4 and H'0000. The output pin for this toggle output is the TIOC3A pin. The initial output is 1. TGRA_3 TCNT_3 TCNT_4 H'0000 Toggle output TIOC3A pin Figure 11.48 Example of Toggle Output Waveform Synchronized with PWM Output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 304 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 12. Counter Clearing by another Channel In complementary PWM mode, by setting a mode for synchronization with another channel by means of the timer synchronous register (TSYR), and selecting synchronous clearing with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the timer control register (TCR), it is possible to have TCNT_3, TCNT_4, and TCNTS cleared by another channel. Figure 11.49 illustrates the operation. Use of this function enables counter clearing and restarting to be performed by means of an external signal. TGRA_3 TCDR TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TDDR H'0000 Channel 1 Input capture A TCNTS TCNT_1 Synchronous counter clearing by channel 1 input capture A Figure 11.49 Counter Clearing Synchronized with Another Channel Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 305 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 13. Example of AC Synchronous Motor (Brushless DC Motor) Drive Waveform Output In complementary PWM mode, a brushless DC motor can easily be controlled using the timer gate control register (TGCR). Figures 11.50 to 11.53 show examples of brushless DC motor drive waveforms created using TGCR. When output phase switching for a 3-phase brushless DC motor is performed by means of external signals detected with a Hall element, etc., clear the FB bit in TGCR to 0. In this case, the external signals indicating the polarity position are input to channel 0 timer input pins TIOC0A, TIOC0B, and TIOC0C (set with PFC). When an edge is detected at pin TIOC0A, TIOC0B, or TIOC0C, the output on/off state is switched automatically. When the FB bit is 1, the output on/off state is switched when the UF, VF, or WF bit in TGCR is cleared to 0 or set to 1. The drive waveforms are output from the complementary PWM mode 6-phase output pins. With this 6-phase output, in the case of on output, it is possible to use complementary PWM mode output and perform chopping output by setting the N bit or P bit to 1. When the N bit or P bit is 0, level output is selected. The 6-phase output active level (on output level) can be set with the OLSN and OLSP bits in the timer output control register (TOCR) regardless of the setting of the N and P bits. External input TIOC0A pin TIOC0B pin TIOC0C pin 6-phase output TIOC3B pin TIOC3D pin TIOC4A pin TIOC4C pin TIOC4B pin TIOC4D pin When BDC = 1, N = 0, P = 0, FB = 0, output active level = high Figure 11.50 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 306 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) External input TIOC0A pin TIOC0B pin TIOC0C pin 6-phase output TIOC3B pin TIOC3D pin TIOC4A pin TIOC4C pin TIOC4B pin TIOC4D pin When BDC = 1, N = 1, P = 1, FB = 0, output active level = high Figure 11.51 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (2) TGCR UF bit VF bit WF bit 6-phase output TIOC3B pin TIOC3D pin TIOC4A pin TIOC4C pin TIOC4B pin TIOC4D pin When BDC = 1, N = 0, P = 0, FB = 1, output active level = high Figure 11.52 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 307 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TGCR UF bit VF bit WF bit 6-phase output TIOC3B pin TIOC3D pin TIOC4A pin TIOC4C pin TIOC4B pin TIOC4D pin When BDC = 1, N = 1, P = 1, FB = 1, output active level = high Figure 11.53 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (2) 14. A/D Conversion Start Request Setting: In complementary PWM mode, an A/D conversion start request can be issued using a TGRA_3 compare-match or a compare-match on a channel other than channels 3 and 4. When start requests using a TGRA_3 compare-match are set, A/D conversion can be started at the center of the PWM pulse. A/D conversion start requests can be set by setting the TTGE bit to 1 in the timer interrupt enable register (TIER). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 308 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Complementary PWM Mode Output Protection Function: Complementary PWM mode output has the following protection functions. 1. Register and counter miswrite prevention function With the exception of the buffer registers, which can be rewritten at any time, access by the CPU can be enabled or disabled for the mode registers, control registers, compare registers, and counters used in complementary PWM mode by means of the MTURWE bit in the bus controller’s bus control register 1 (BCR1). The applicable registers are some (21 in total) of the registers in channels 3 and 4 shown in the following: ⎯ TCR_3 and TCR_4, TMDR_3 and TMDR_4, TIORH_3 and TIORH_4, TIORL_3 and TIORL_4, TIER_3 and TIER_4, TCNT_3 and TCNT_4, TGRA_3 and TGRA_4, TGRB_3 and TGRB_4, TOER, TOCR, TGCR, TCDR, and TDDR. This function enables miswriting due to CPU runaway to be prevented by disabling CPU access to the mode registers, control registers, and counters. When the applicable registers are read in the access-disabled state, undefined values are returned. Writing to these registers is ignored. 2. Halting of PWM output by external signal The 6-phase PWM output pins can be set automatically to the high-impedance state by inputting specified external signals. There are four external signal input pins. See section 11.9, Port Output Enable (POE), for details. 3. Halting of PWM output when oscillator is stopped If it is detected that the clock input to this LSI has stopped, the 6-phase PWM output pins automatically go to the high-impedance state. The pin states are not guaranteed when the clock is restarted. See section 4.2, Function for Detecting Oscillator Halt. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 309 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.5 11.5.1 Interrupt Sources Interrupt Sources and Priorities There are three kinds of MTU interrupt source; TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled bit, allowing the generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, however the priority order within a channel is fixed. For details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC). Table 11.42 lists the MTU interrupt sources. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 310 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Table 11.42 MTU Interrupts Channel Name Interrupt Source Interrupt DMAC Flag Activation Possible DTC Activation Possible Priority High 0 TGIA_0 TGIB_0 TGRA_0 input capture/compare match TGFA_0 TGRB_0 input capture/compare match TGFB_0 Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible TGIC_0 TGRC_0 input capture/compare match TGFC_0 TGID_0 TGRD_0 input capture/compare match TGFD_0 TCIV_0 1 TGIA_1 TGIB_1 TCIV_1 TCIU_1 2 TGIA_2 TGIB_2 TCIV_2 TCIU_2 3 TGIA_3 TGIB_3 TCNT_0 overflow TCFV_0 TGRA_1 input capture/compare match TGFA_1 TGRB_1 input capture/compare match TGFB_1 TCNT_1 overflow TCNT_1 underflow TCFV_1 TCFU_1 Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible TGRA_2 input capture/compare match TGFA_2 TGRB_2 input capture/compare match TGFB_2 TCNT_2 overflow TCNT_2 underflow TCFV_2 TCFU_2 Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible TGRA_3 input capture/compare match TGFA_3 TGRB_3 input capture/compare match TGFB_3 Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible TGIC_3 TGRC_3 input capture/compare match TGFC_3 TGID_3 TGRD_3 input capture/compare match TGFD_3 TCIV_3 4 TGIA_4 TGIB_4 TCNT_3 overflow TCFV_3 TGRA_4 input capture/compare match TGFA_4 TGRB_4 input capture/compare match TGFB_4 Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Not possible Possible Low TGIC_4 TGRC_4 input capture/compare match TGFC_4 TGID_4 TGRD_4 input capture/compare match TGFD_4 TCIV_4 TCNT_4 overflow/underflow TCFV_4 Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 311 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The MTU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0, 3, and 4, and two each for channels 1 and 2. Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The MTU has five overflow interrupts, one for each channel. Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The MTU has two underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1 and 2. 11.5.2 DTC/DMAC Activation DTC Activation: The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt in each channel. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). A total of 17 MTU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1 and 2, and five for channel 4. DMAC Activation: The DMAC can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupt in each channel. For details, see section 10, Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC). A total of five MTU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DMAC activation sources, one for each channel. 11.5.3 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match in each channel. If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the MTU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter at this time, A/D conversion starts. In the MTU, a total of five TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D converter conversion start sources, one for each channel. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 312 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.6 11.6.1 Operation Timing Input/Output Timing TCNT Count Timing: Figure 11.54 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 11.55 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation (normal mode), and figure 11.56 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation (phase counting mode). Pφ Internal clock TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2 Falling edge Rising edge Figure 11.54 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation Pφ External clock TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2 Falling edge Rising edge Falling edge Figure 11.55 Count Timing in External Clock Operation Pφ External clock TCNT input clock Falling edge Rising edge Falling edge TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 11.56 Count Timing in External Clock Operation (Phase Counting Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 313 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin (TIOC pin). After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 11.57 shows output compare output timing (normal mode and PWM mode) and figure 11.58 shows output compare output timing (complementary PWM mode and reset synchronous PWM mode). Pφ TCNT input clock N N+1 TCNT TGR Compare match signal TIOC pin N Figure 11.57 Output Compare Output Timing (Normal Mode/PWM Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 314 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 TGR N Compare match signal TIOC pin Figure 11.58 Output Compare Output Timing (Complementary PWM Mode/Reset Synchronous PWM Mode) Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 11.59 shows input capture signal timing. Pφ Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT N N+1 N+2 TGR N N+2 Figure 11.59 Input Capture Input Signal Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 315 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 11.60 shows the timing when counter clearing on compare match is specified, and figure 11.61 shows the timing when counter clearing on input capture is specified. Pφ Compare match signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 TGR N Figure 11.60 Pφ Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) N H'0000 TGR N Figure 11.61 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 316 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 11.62 and 11.63 show the timing in buffer operation. Pφ TCNT Compare match buffer signal TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD n n+1 n N N Figure 11.62 Pφ Input capture signal Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match) TCNT TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD N N+1 n N N+1 n N Figure 11.63 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 317 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 11.64 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on compare match, and TGI interrupt request signal timing. Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 TGR Compare match signal TGF flag N TGI interrupt Figure 11.64 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 11.65 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on input capture, and TGI interrupt request signal timing. Pφ Input capture signal TCNT N TGR N TGF flag TGI interrupt Figure 11.65 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 318 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 11.66 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR on overflow, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing. Figure 11.67 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR on underflow, and TCIU interrupt request signal timing. Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT (overflow) Overflow signal H'FFFF H'0000 TCFV flag TCIV interrupt Figure 11.66 Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT (underflow) Underflow signal TCFU flag H'0000 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing H'FFFF TCIU interrupt Figure 11.67 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 319 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. When the DTC/DMAC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 11.68 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 11.69 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the DTC/DMAC. TSR write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address TSR address Write signal Status flag Interrupt request signal Figure 11.68 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU DTC/DMAC read cycle T1 T2 DTC/DMAC write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Destination address Address Source address Status flag Interrupt request signal Figure 11.69 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC/DMAC Activation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 320 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7 11.7.1 Usage Notes Module Standby Mode Setting MTU operation can be disabled or enabled using the module standby register. The initial setting is for MTU operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module standby mode. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down Modes. 11.7.2 Input Clock Restrictions The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The MTU will not operate properly at narrower pulse widths. In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 11.70 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode. Phase Phase differdifference Overlap ence Overlap TCLKA (TCLKC) TCLKB (TCLKD) Pulse width Pulse width Pulse width Pulse width Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more Pulse width : 2.5 states or more Figure 11.70 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 321 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.3 Caution on Period Setting When counter clearing on compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula: f= Where Pφ (N + 1) f: Counter frequency Pφ: Peripheral clock operating frequency N: TGR set value Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations 11.7.4 If the counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 11.71 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Write signal Counter clear signal TCNT TCNT address N H'0000 Figure 11.71 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 322 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 11.72 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address TCNT address Write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N TCNT write data M Figure 11.72 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 323 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write is executed and the compare match signal is also generated. Figure 11.73 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T2 T1 Pφ Address Write signal Compare match signal TCNT TGR N N TGR write data N+1 M TGR address Figure 11.73 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 324 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.7 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data that is transferred to TGR by the buffer operation differs depending on channel 0 and channels 3 and 4: data on channel 0 is that after write, and on channels 3 and 4, before write. Figures 11.74 and 11.75 show the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T2 T1 Pφ Address Write signal Compare match signal Compare match buffer signal Buffer register write data Buffer register TGR N M M Buffer register address Figure 11.74 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match (Channel 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 325 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) TGR write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Buffer register address Write signal Compare match signal Compare match buffer signal Buffer register write data Buffer register N M TGR N Figure 11.75 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match (Channels 3 and 4) 11.7.8 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture If an input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be that in the buffer after input capture transfer. Figure 11.76 shows the timing in this case. TGR read cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Read signal Input capture signal TGR Internal data bus X M M TGR address Figure 11.76 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 326 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.9 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed. Figure 11.77 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT TGR M M TGR address Figure 11.77 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 327 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed. Figure 11.78 shows the timing in this case. Buffer register write cycle T2 T1 Pφ Address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT TGR Buffer register M N N M Buffer register address Figure 11.78 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture 11.7.11 TCNT2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention in Cascade Connection With timer counters TCNT1 and TCNT2 in a cascade connection, when a contention occurs during TCNT_1 count (during a TCNT_2 overflow/underflow) in the T2 state of the TCNT_2 write cycle, the write to TCNT_2 is conducted, and the TCNT_1 count signal is disabled. At this point, if there is match with TGRA_1 and the TCNT_1 value, a compare signal is issued. Furthermore, when the TCNT_1 count clock is selected as the input capture source of channel 0, TGRA_0 to D_0 carry out the input capture operation. In addition, when the compare match/input capture is selected as the input capture source of TGRB_1, TGRB_1 carries out input capture operation. The timing is shown in figure 11.79. For cascade connections, be sure to synchronize settings for channels 1 and 2 when setting TCNT clearing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 328 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. TCNT write cycle T1 Pφ Address Write signal TCNT_2 H'FFFE H'FFFF TCNT_2 write data TGRA_2 to TGRB_2 Ch2 comparematch signal A/B TCNT_1 input clock TCNT_1 TGRA_1 Ch1 comparematch signal A TGRB_1 Ch1 input capture signal B TCNT_0 TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 Ch0 input capture signal A to D P N M M H'FFFF TCNT_2 address T2 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) N N+1 Disabled M Q P Figure 11.79 TCNT_2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention with Cascade Connection Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 329 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.12 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop When counting operation is suspended with TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 in complementary PWM mode, TCNT_3 has the timer dead time register (TDDR) value, and TCNT_4 is held at H'0000. When restarting complementary PWM mode, counting begins automatically from the initialized state. This explanatory diagram is shown in figure 11.80. When counting begins in another operating mode, be sure that TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 are set to the initial values. TGRA_3 TCDR TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TDDR H'0000 Complementary PWM mode operation Counter operation stop Complementary PWM mode operation Complementary PMW restart Figure 11.80 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop 11.7.13 Buffer Operation Setting in Complementary PWM Mode In complementary PWM mode, conduct rewrites by buffer operation for the PWM cycle setting register (TGRA_3), timer cycle data register (TCDR), and duty setting registers (TGRB_3, TGRA_4, and TGRB_4). In complementary PWM mode, channel 3 and channel 4 buffers operate in accordance with bit settings BFA and BFB of TMDR_3. When TMDR_3’s BFA bit is set to 1, TGRC_3 functions as a buffer register for TGRA_3. At the same time, TGRC_4 functions as the buffer register for TGRA_4, while the TCBR functions as the TCDR’s buffer register. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 330 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.14 Reset Sync PWM Mode Buffer Operation and Compare Match Flag When setting buffer operation for reset sync PWM mode, set the BFA and BFB bits of TMDR_4 to 0. The TIOC4C pin will be unable to produce its waveform output if the BFA bit of TMDR_4 is set to 1. In reset sync PWM mode, the channel 3 and channel 4 buffers operate in accordance with the BFA and BFB bit settings of TMDR_3. For example, if the BFA bit of TMDR_3 is set to 1, TGRC_3 functions as the buffer register for TGRA_3. At the same time, TGRC_4 functions as the buffer register for TGRA_4. The TGFC bit and TGFD bit of TSR_3 and TSR_4 are not set when TGRC_3 and TGRD_3 are operating as buffer registers. Figure 11.81 shows an example of operations for TGR_3, TGR_4, TIOC3, and TIOC4, with TMDR_3’s BFA and BFB bits set to 1, and TMDR_4’s BFA and BFB bits set to 0. TGRA_3 TCNT3 TGRC_3 Point a Buffer transfer with compare match A3 TGRA_3, TGRC_3 TGRB_3, TGRA_4, TGRB_4 Point b TGRD_3, TGRC_4, TGRD_4 H'0000 TGRB_3, TGRD_3, TGRA_4, TGRC_4, TGRB_4, TGRD_4 TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D TIOC4A TIOC4C TIOC4B TIOC4D TGFC TGFD Not set Not set Figure 11.81 Buffer Operation and Compare-Match Flags in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 331 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.15 Overflow Flags in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode When set to reset synchronous PWM mode, TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 start counting when the CST3 bit of TSTR is set to 1. At this point, TCNT_4’s count clock source and count edge obey the TCR_3 setting. In reset synchronous PWM mode, with cycle register TGRA_3’s set value at H'FFFF, when specifying TGR3A compare-match for the counter clear source, TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 count up to H'FFFF, then a compare-match occurs with TGRA_3, and TCNT_3 and TCNT_4 are both cleared. At this point, TSR’s overflow flag TCFV bit is not set. Figure 11.82 shows a TCFV bit operation example in reset synchronous PWM mode with a set value for cycle register TGRA_3 of H'FFFF, when a TGRA_3 compare-match has been specified without synchronous setting for the counter clear source. Counter cleared by compare match 3A TGRA_3 (H'FFFF) TCNT_3 = TCNT_4 H'0000 TCFV_3 TCFV_4 Not set Not set Figure 11.82 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Overflow Flag Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 332 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.16 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence. Figure 11.83 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing source, and when H'FFFF is set in TGR. Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT Counter clear signal TGF Disabled H'FFFF H'0000 TCFV Figure 11.83 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 333 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.17 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow If there is an up-count or down-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set. Figure 11.84 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and overflow. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Write signal TCNT address TCNT write data TCNT H'FFFF M TCFV flag Figure 11.84 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 11.7.18 Cautions on Transition from Normal Operation or PWM Mode 1 to ResetSynchronous PWM Mode When making a transition from channel 3 or 4 normal operation or PWM mode 1 to resetsynchronous PWM mode, if the counter is halted with the output pins (TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4C, TIOC4B, TIOC4D) in the high-impedance state, followed by the transition to reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation in that mode, the initial pin output will not be correct. When making a transition from normal operation to reset-synchronous PWM mode, write H'11 to registers TIORH_3, TIORL_3, TIORH_4, and TIORL_4 to initialize the output pins to low level output, then set an initial register value of H'00 before making the mode transition. When making a transition from PWM mode 1 to reset-synchronous PWM mode, first switch to normal operation, then initialize the output pins to low level output and set an initial register value of H'00 before making the transition to reset-synchronous PWM mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 334 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.7.19 Output Level in Complementary PWM Mode and Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode When channels 3 and 4 are in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode, the PWM waveform output level is set with the OLSP and OLSN bits in the timer output control register (TOCR). In the case of complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode, TIOR should be set to H'00. 11.7.20 Interrupts in Module Standby Mode If module standby mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC/DMAC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module standby mode. 11.7.21 Simultaneous Capture of TCNT_1 and TCNT_2 in Cascade Connection When timer counters 1 and 2 (TCNT_1 and TCNT_2) are operated as a 32-bit counter in cascade connection, the cascade counter value cannot be captured successfully even if input-capture input is simultaneously done to TIOC1A and TIOC2A or to TIOC1B and TIOC2B. This is because the input timing of TIOC1A and TIOC2A or of TIOC1B and TIOC2B may not be the same when external input-capture signals to be input into TCNT_1 and TCNT_2 are taken in synchronization with the internal clock. For example, TCNT_1 (the counter for upper 16 bits) does not capture the count-up value by overflow from TCNT_2 (the counter for lower 16 bits) but captures the count value before the count-up. In this case, the values of TCNT_1 = H'FFF1 and TCNT_2 = H'0000 should be transferred to TGRA_1 and TGRA_2 or to TGRB_1 and TGRB_2, but the values of TCNT_1 = H'FFF0 and TCNT_2 = H'0000 are erroneously transferred. 11.7.22 Note on Buffer Operation Setting When enabling buffer operation, clear to 0 bits TGIEC and TGIED (corresponding to TGRC and TGRD, which are used as buffer registers) in the timer interrupt enable register (TIER). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 335 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.8 11.8.1 MTU Output Pin Initialization Operating Modes The MTU has the following six operating modes. Waveform output is possible in all of these modes. • • • • • • Normal mode (channels 0 to 4) PWM mode 1 (channels 0 to 4) PWM mode 2 (channels 0 to 2) Phase counting modes 1 to 4 (channels 1 and 2) Complementary PWM mode (channels 3 and 4) Reset-synchronous PWM mode (channels 3 and 4) The MTU output pin initialization method for each of these modes is described in this section. 11.8.2 Reset Start Operation The MTU output pins (TIOC*) are initialized low by a reset and in standby mode. Since MTU pin function selection is performed by the pin function controller (PFC), when the PFC is set, the MTU pin states at that point are output to the ports. When MTU output is selected by the PFC immediately after a reset, the MTU output initial level, low, is output directly at the port. When the active level is low, the system will operate at this point, and therefore the PFC setting should be made after initialization of the MTU output pins is completed. Note: Channel number and port notation are substituted for *. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 336 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.8.3 Operation in Case of Re-Setting Due to Error During Operation, Etc. If an error occurs during MTU operation, MTU output should be cut by the system. Cutoff is performed by switching the pin output to port output with the PFC and outputting the inverse of the active level. For large-current pins, output can also be cut by hardware, using port output enable (POE). The pin initialization procedures for re-setting due to an error during operation, etc., and the procedures for restarting in a different mode after re-setting, are shown below. The MTU has six operating modes, as stated above. There are thus 36 mode transition combinations, but some transitions are not available with certain channel and mode combinations. Possible mode transition combinations are shown in table 11.43. Table 11.43 Mode Transition Combinations After Before Normal PWM1 PWM2 PCM CPWM RPWM Normal (1) (7) (13) (17) (21) (26) PWM1 (2) (8) (14) (18) (22) (27) PWM2 (3) (9) (15) (19) None None PCM (4) (10) (16) (20) None None CPWM (5) (11) None None (23) (24) (28) RPWM (6) (12) None None (25) (29) [Legend] Normal: Normal mode PWM1: PWM mode 1 PWM2: PWM mode 2 PCM: Phase counting modes 1 to 4 CPWM: Complementary PWM mode RPWM: Reset-synchronous PWM mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 337 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.8.4 Overview of Initialization Procedures and Mode Transitions in Case of Error during Operation, etc. • When making a transition to a mode (Normal, PWM1, PWM2, PCM) in which the pin output level is selected by the timer I/O control register (TIOR) setting, initialize the pins by means of a TIOR setting. • In PWM mode 1, since a waveform is not output to the TIOC*B (TIOC *D) pin, setting TIOR will not initialize the pins. If initialization is required, carry it out in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 1. • In PWM mode 2, since a waveform is not output to the cycle register pin, setting TIOR will not initialize the pins. If initialization is required, carry it out in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 2. • In normal mode or PWM mode 2, if TGRC and TGRD operate as buffer registers, setting TIOR will not initialize the buffer register pins. If initialization is required, clear buffer mode, carry out initialization, then set buffer mode again. • In PWM mode 1, if either TGRC or TGRD operates as a buffer register, setting TIOR will not initialize the TGRC pin. To initialize the TGRC pin, clear buffer mode, carry out initialization, then set buffer mode again. • When making a transition to a mode (CPWM, RPWM) in which the pin output level is selected by the timer output control register (TOCR) setting, switch to normal mode and perform initialization with TIOR, then restore TIOR to its initial value, and temporarily disable channel 3 and 4 output with the timer output master enable register (TOER). Then operate the unit in accordance with the mode setting procedure (TOCR setting, TMDR setting, TOER setting). Note: Channel number is substituted for * indicated in this article. Pin initialization procedures are described below for the numbered combinations in table 11.43. The active level is assumed to be low. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 338 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.85 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (normal) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.85 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. After a reset, the TMDR setting is for normal mode. For channels 3 and 4, enable output with TOER before initializing the pins with TIOR. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on compare-match occurrence.) Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. Output goes low on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. Not necessary when restarting in normal mode. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 339 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.86 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (normal) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.86 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.85. 11. Set PWM mode 1. 12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized. If initialization is required, initialize in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 1.) 13. Set MTU output with the PFC. 14. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 340 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 11.87 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (normal) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.87 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.85. 11. Set PWM mode 2. 12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized. If initialization is required, initialize in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 2.) 13. Set MTU output with the PFC. 14. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Note: PWM mode 2 can only be set for channels 0 to 2, and therefore TOER setting is not necessary. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 341 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 11.88 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (normal) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 Error PFC TSTR TMDR occurs (PORT) (0) (PCM) 12 13 14 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.88 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.85. 11. 12. 13. 14. Set phase counting mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Note: Phase counting mode can only be set for channels 1 and 2, and therefore TOER setting is not necessary. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 342 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 11.89 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in complementary PWM mode after resetting. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 (16) (17) (18) 13 14 RESET TMDR TOER TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (normal) (1) (1 init (MTU) (1) occurs (PORT) (0) (0 init (disabled) (0) (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 0 out) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.89 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.85. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Initialize the normal mode waveform generation section with TIOR. Disable operation of the normal mode waveform generation section with TIOR. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. Set complementary PWM. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 343 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 11.90 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 4 RESET TMDR TOER TIOR (normal) (1) (1 init 0 out) 5 6 PFC TSTR (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 Error PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) 13 14 11 12 15 16 17 18 TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) (0 init (disabled) (0) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.90 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode 1 to 13 are the same as in figure 11.89. 14. Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. 15. Set reset-synchronous PWM. 16. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 17. Set MTU output with the PFC. 18. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 344 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.91 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (PWM1) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.91 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Normal Mode After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. Set PWM mode 1. For channels 3 and 4, enable output with TOER before initializing the pins with TIOR. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on compare-match occurrence. In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. Output goes low on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. Set normal mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 345 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.92 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (PWM1) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.92 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.91. 11. 12. 13. 14. Not necessary when restarting in PWM mode 1. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 346 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 11.93 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (PWM1) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.93 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.91. 11. 12. 13. 14. Set PWM mode 2. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Note: PWM mode 2 can only be set for channels 0 to 2, and therefore TOER setting is not necessary. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 347 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 11.94 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TOER (PWM1) (1) 5 4 6 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 Error PFC TSTR TMDR occurs (PORT) (0) (PCM) 12 13 14 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.94 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.91. 11. 12. 13. 14. Set phase counting mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Note: Phase counting mode can only be set for channels 1 and 2, and therefore TOER setting is not necessary. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 348 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 11.95 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in complementary PWM mode after resetting. 14 1 2 3 4 5 15 16 17 18 19 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 RESET TMDR TOER TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (PWM1) (1) (1 init (MTU) (1) (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0 init (disabled) (0) 0 out) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC3B) Not initialized (TIOC3D) Figure 11.95 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.91. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. Set normal mode for initialization of the normal mode waveform generation section. Initialize the PWM mode 1 waveform generation section with TIOR. Disable operation of the PWM mode 1 waveform generation section with TIOR. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. Set complementary PWM. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 349 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 11.96 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode after re-setting. 14 1 2 3 4 5 15 16 17 18 19 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 RESET TMDR TOER TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (PWM1) (1) (1 init (MTU) (1) (RPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0 init (disabled) (0) 0 out) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC3B) Not initialized (TIOC3D) Figure 11.96 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode 1 to 14 are the same as in figure 11.95. 15. Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. 16. Set reset-synchronous PWM. 17. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 18. Set MTU output with the PFC. 19. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 350 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.97 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TIOR (PWM2) (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.97 1. 2. 3. Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Normal Mode 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. Set PWM mode 2. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on compare-match occurrence. In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized. In the example, TIOC *A is the cycle register.) Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. Output goes low on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. Set normal mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 351 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.98 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TIOR (PWM2) (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.98 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.97. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set PWM mode 1. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 352 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 11.99 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TIOR (PWM2) (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.99 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.97. 10. 11. 12. 13. Not necessary when restarting in PWM mode 2. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 353 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 11.100 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TIOR (PWM2) (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PCM) 11 12 13 TIOR PFC TSTR (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.100 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.97. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set phase counting mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 354 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.101 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 RESET TMDR (PCM) 3 TIOR (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.101 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. Set phase counting mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on compare-match occurrence.) Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. Output goes low on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. Set in normal mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 355 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.102 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 RESET TMDR (PCM) 3 TIOR (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC*B) Figure 11.102 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.101. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set PWM mode 1. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 356 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 11.103 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting. 1 2 RESET TMDR (PCM) 3 TIOR (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (cycle register) Figure 11.103 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.101. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set PWM mode 2. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 357 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 11.104 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 RESET TMDR TIOR (PCM) (1 init 0 out) 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR (1) (MTU) occurs (PORT) (0) (PCM) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC*A TIOC*B Port output PEn PEn n=0 to 15 Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.104 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode 1 to 9 are the same as in figure 11.101. 10. 11. 12. 13. Not necessary when restarting in phase counting mode. Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 358 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.105 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.105 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. Set complementary PWM. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. The complementary PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. (MTU output becomes the complementary PWM output initial value.) Set normal mode. (MTU output goes low.) Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 359 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.106 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC3B) Not initialized (TIOC3D) Figure 11.106 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.105. 11. 12. 13. 14. Set PWM mode 1. (MTU output goes low.) Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 360 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 11.107 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting (when operation is restarted using the cycle and duty settings at the time the counter was stopped). 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 Error PFC TSTR PFC TSTR Match occurs (PORT) (0) (MTU) (1) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.107 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.105. 11. Set MTU output with the PFC. 12. Operation is restarted by TSTR. 13. The complementary PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 361 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 11.108 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting (when operation is restarted using completely new cycle and duty settings). 1 2 3 15 16 17 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0) (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.108 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.105. 11. Set normal mode and make new settings. (MTU output goes low.) 12. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 13. Select the complementary PWM mode output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. 14. Set complementary PWM. 15. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 16. Set MTU output with the PFC. 17. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 362 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 11.109 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR Match Error PFC TSTR TMDR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0) (RPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.109 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.105. 11. Set normal mode. (MTU output goes low.) 12. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 13. Select the reset-synchronous PWM mode output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. 14. Set reset-synchronous PWM. 15. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 16. Set MTU output with the PFC. 17. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 363 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 11.110 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.110 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state. Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. Set reset-synchronous PWM. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. Set MTU output with the PFC. The count operation is started by TSTR. The reset-synchronous PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence. An error occurs. Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level. The count operation is stopped by TSTR. (MTU output becomes the reset-synchronous PWM output initial value.) Set normal mode. (MTU positive phase output is low, and negative phase output is high.) Initialize the pins with TIOR. Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 364 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 11.111 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting. 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (RPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Error PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU) (1) 0 out) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Not initialized (TIOC3B) Not initialized (TIOC3D) Figure 11.111 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.110. 11. 12. 13. 14. Set PWM mode 1. (MTU positive phase output is low, and negative phase output is high.) Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.) Set MTU output with the PFC. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 365 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 11.112 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 4 5 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (RPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Error PFC TSTR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR occurs (PORT) (0) (0) (CPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.112 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.110. 11. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 12. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with TOCR. 13. Set complementary PWM. (The MTU cyclic output pin goes low.) 14. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER. 15. Set MTU output with the PFC. 16. Operation is restarted by TSTR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 366 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 11.113 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode after re-setting. 1 2 3 5 4 6 RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR (RPWM) (1) (MTU) (1) 7 Match 8 9 10 11 12 13 Error PFC TSTR PFC TSTR Match occurs (PORT) (0) (MTU) (1) MTU module output TIOC3A TIOC3B TIOC3D Port output PE8 PE9 PE11 Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Figure 11.113 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode 1 to 10 are the same as in figure 11.110. 11. Set MTU output with the PFC. 12. Operation is restarted by TSTR. 13. The reset-synchronous PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 367 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.9 Port Output Enable (POE) The port output enable (POE) can be used to establish a high-impedance state for high-current pins, by changing the POE0 to POE3 pin input, depending on the output status of the high-current pins (PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST*, PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO*, PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK*, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT). It can also simultaneously generate interrupt requests. The high-current pins can also be set to high-impedance regardless of whether these pin functions are selected in cases such as when the oscillator stops or in software standby mode. For details, refer to section 17.1.11, High-Current Port Control Register (PPCR). However, when using the E10A, the high-impedance function is disabled when an oscillation stop is detected, port output enable (POE), or in the software standby state for the three pins of PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST, PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO, and PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK of the SH7145. Note: * Only in the SH7145. 11.9.1 Features • Each of the POE0 to POE3 input pins can be set for falling edge, Pφ/8 × 16, Pφ/16 × 16, or Pφ/128 × 16 low-level sampling. • High-current pins can be set to high-impedance state by POE0 to POE3 pin falling-edge or low-level sampling. • High-current pins can be set to high-impedance state when the high-current pin output levels are compared and simultaneous low-level output continues for one cycle or more. • Interrupts can be generated by input-level sampling or output-level comparison results. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 368 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) The POE has input-level detection circuitry and output-level detection circuitry, as shown in the block diagram of figure 11.114. TIOC3B TIOC3D TIOC4A TIOC4C TIOC4B TIOC4D Output level detection circuit Output level detection circuit Output level detection circuit OCSR Highimpedance request control signal Interrupt request ICSR1 Input level detection circuit Falling-edge detection circuit Low-level detection circuit POE3 POE2 POE1 POE0 φ/8 φ/16 φ/128 [Legend] OCSR: Output level control/status register ICSR1: Input level control/status register Figure 11.114 POE Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 369 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 11.9.2 Pin Configuration Table 11.44 Pin Configuration Name Abbreviation I/O Input Description Input request signals to make highcurrent pins high-impedance state Port output enable input pins POE0 to POE3 Table 11.45 shows output-level comparisons with pin combinations. Table 11.45 Pin Combinations Pin Combination PE9/TIOC3B and PE11/TIOC3D I/O Output Description All high-current pins are made high-impedance state when the pins simultaneously output low-level for longer than 1 cycle. All high-current pins are made high-impedance state when the pins simultaneously output low-level for longer than 1 cycle. All high-current pins are made high-impedance state when the pins simultaneously output low-level for longer than 1 cycle. PE12/TIOC4A and PE14/TIOC4C Output PE13/TIOC4B/MRES and PE15/TIOC4D/IRQOUT Output 11.9.3 Register Descriptions The POE has the two registers. The input level control/status register 1 (ICSR1) controls both POE0 to POE3 pin input signal detection and interrupts. The output level control/status register (OCSR) controls both the enable/disable of output comparison and interrupts. Input Level Control/Status Register 1 (ICSR1): The input level control/status register (ICSR1) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that selects the POE0 to POE3 pin input modes, controls the enable/disable of interrupts, and indicates status. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 370 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 15 Bit Name Initial value POE3F 0 R/W Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) R/(W)* POE3 Flag This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input to the POE3 pin [Clearing condition] • • By writing 0 to POE3F after reading a POE3F = 1 When the input set by ICSR1 bits 7 and 6 occurs at the POE3 pin [Setting condition] 14 POE2F 0 R/(W)* POE2 Flag This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input to the POE2 pin [Clearing condition] • • By writing 0 to POE2F after reading a POE2F = 1 When the input set by ICSR1 bits 5 and 4 occurs at the POE2 pin [Setting condition] 13 POE1F 0 R/(W)* POE1 Flag This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input to the POE1 pin [Clearing condition] • • By writing 0 to POE1F after reading a POE1F = 1 When the input set by ICSR1 bits 3 and 2 occurs at the POE1 pin [Setting condition] 12 POE0F 0 R/(W)* POE0 Flag This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input to the POE0 pin [Clear condition] • • By writing 0 to POE0F after reading a POE0F = 1 When the input set by ICSR1 bits 1 and 0 occurs at the POE0 pin [Set condition] 11 to 9 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 371 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 8 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Bit Name Initial value PIE 0 R/W R/W Description Port Interrupt Enable This bit enables/disables interrupt requests when any of the POE0F to POE3F bits of the ICSR1 are set to 1 0: Interrupt requests disabled 1: Interrupt requests enabled 7 6 POE3M1 POE3M0 0 0 R/W R/W POE3 mode 1, 0 These bits select the input mode of the POE3 pin 00: Accept request on falling edge of POE3 input 01: Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level. 10: Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level. 11: Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level. 5 4 POE2M1 POE2M0 0 0 R/W R/W POE2 mode 1, 0 These bits select the input mode of the POE2 pin 00: Accept request on falling edge of POE2 input 01: Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level. 10: Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level. 11: Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 372 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 3 2 Bit Name Initial value POE1M1 POE1M0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) POE1 mode 1, 0 These bits select the input mode of the POE1 pin 00: Accept request on falling edge of POE1 input 01: Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level. 10: Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level. 11: Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level. 1 0 POE0M1 POE0M0 0 0 R/W R/W POE0 mode 1, 0 These bits select the input mode of the POE0 pin 00: Accept request on falling edge of POE0 input 01: Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level. 10: Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level. 11: Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16 Pφ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 373 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Output Level Control/Status Register (OCSR): The output level control/status register (OCSR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls the enable/disable of both output level comparison and interrupts, and indicates status. If the OSF bit is set to 1, the high current pins become high impedance. Bit 15 Bit Name OSF Initial value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Output Short Flag This flag indicates that any one pair of the three pairs of 2 phase outputs compared have simultaneously become low level outputs. [Clearing condition] • By writing 0 to OSF after reading an OSF = 1 [Setting condition] • 14 to ⎯ 10 9 OCE All 0 R When any one pair of the three 2-phase outputs simultaneously become low level Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 R/W Output Level Compare Enable This bit enables the start of output level comparisons. When setting this bit to 1, pay attention to the output pin combinations shown in table 11.43, Mode Transition Combinations. When 0 is output, the OSF bit is set to 1 at the same time when this bit is set, and output goes to high impedance. Accordingly, bits 15 to 11 and bit 9 of the port E data register (PEDR) are set to 1. For the MTU output comparison, set the bit to 1 after setting the MTU's output pins with the PFC. Set this bit only when using pins as outputs. When the OCE bit is set to 1, if OIE = 0 a highimpedance request will not be issued even if OSF is set to 1. Therefore, in order to have a highimpedance request issued according to the result of the output level comparison, the OIE bit must be set to 1. When OCE = 1 and OIE = 1, an interrupt request will be generated at the same time as the high-impedance request: however, this interrupt can be masked by means of an interrupt controller (INTC) setting. 0: Output level compare disabled 1: Output level compare enabled; makes an output high impedance request when OSF = 1. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 374 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Bit 8 Bit Name OIE Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Output Short Interrupt Enable This bit makes interrupt requests when the OSF bit of the OCSR is set. 00: Interrupt requests disabled 01: Interrupt request enabled 7 to 0 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Note: * Only 0 can be written to write the flag. 11.9.4 Operation Input Level Detection Operation: If the input conditions set by the ICSR1 occur on any of the POE pins, all high-current pins become high-impedance state. Note however, that these high-current pins become high-impedance state only when general input/output function or MTU function is selected in these pins. 1. Falling Edge Detection When a change from high to low level is input to the POE pins. 2. Low-Level Detection Figure 11.115 shows the low-level detection operation. Sixteen continuous low levels are sampled with the sampling clock established by the ICSR1. If even one high level is detected during this interval, the low level is not accepted. Sampling starts when detecting the falling edge of the POE pin. Thereby, negate the POE pin when using POE function after sampling. Furthermore, the timing when the large-current pins enter the high-impedance state from the sampling clock is the same in both falling-edge detection and in low-level detection. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 375 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) 8/16/128 clock cycles Pφ Sampling clock POE input PE9/ TIOC3B When low level is sampled at all points When high level is sampled at least once High-impedance state* 1 1 2 2 3 16 13 Flag set (POE received) Flag not set Note: * Other large-current pins (PE11/TIOC3D, PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C, PE15/TIOC4D/IRQOUT) also go to the high-impedance state at the same timing. Figure 11.115 Output-Level Compare Operation: Low-Level Detection Operation Figure 11.116 shows an example of the output-level compare operation for the combination of PE9/TIOC3B and PE11/TIOC3D. The operation is the same for the other pin combinations. Pφ PE9/ TIOC3B PE11/ TIOC3D Low level overlapping detected High impedance state Figure 11.116 Output-Level Detection Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 376 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Release from High-Impedance State: High-current pins that have entered high-impedance state due to input-level detection can be released either by returning them to their initial state with a power-on reset, or by clearing all of the bit 12 to 15 (POE0F to POE3F) flags of the ICSR1. High-current pins that have become highimpedance due to output-level detection can be released either by returning them to their initial state with a power-on reset, or by first clearing bit 9 (OCE) of the OCSR to disable output-level compares, then clearing the bit 15 (OSF) flag. However, when returning from high-impedance state by clearing the OSF flag, always do so only after outputting a high level from the highcurrent pins (TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D). High-level outputs can be achieved by setting the MTU internal registers. POE Timing: Figure 11.117 shows an example of timing from POE input to high impedance of pin. CK CK falling POE input Falling edge detected PE9/ TIOC3B High impedance state* Note: * Other large-current pins (PE11/TIOC3D, PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C, PE15/TIOC4D/IRQOUT) also goes to the high impedance state at the same timing Figure 11.117 11.9.5 Usage Notes Falling Edge Detection Operation 1. Make sure to set the input to the POE pin high, before detecting the level of the POE pin. 2. To clear the POE3F to POE0F bits in the input level control/status register 1 (ICSR1) and the OSF bit in the output level control/status register (OCSR) to 0, read ICSR1, ICSR2, and OCSR first. If there are bits which are read as 1, clear those bits to 0. Then write 1 to the other bits. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 377 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 11. Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 378 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer Section 12 Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that can reset this LSI internally if the counter overflows without rewriting the counter value due to a system crash or the like. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. The block diagram of the WDT is shown in figure 12.1. 12.1 Features • Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode In watchdog timer mode • Output WDTOVF signal If the counter overflows, it is possible to select whether this LSI is internally reset or not. A power-on reset or manual reset can be selected as an in internal reset. In interval timer mode • If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (ITI). • Clears software standby mode • Selectable from eight counter input clocks. WDT0400A_030020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 379 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer Overflow ITI (interrupt request signal) Interrupt control Clock Clock select WDTOVF*1 Internal reset signal*2 Reset control φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/256 φ/512 φ/1024 φ/4096 φ/8192 Internal clock sources Internal bus RSTCSR TCNT TSCR Bus interface Module bus WDT [Legend] TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Notes: 1. 2. If this pin needs to be pulled-down,the resistance value must be 1MΩ or higher. The internal reset signal can be generated by register setting. Power-on reset or manual reset can be selected. Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of WDT 12.2 Input/Output Pin Table 12.1 shows the pin configuration. Table 12.1 Pin Configuration Pin Abbreviation I/O Output Function Outputs the counter overflow signal in watchdog timer mode Watchdog timer overflow WDTOVF Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 380 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.3 Register Descriptions The WDT has the following three registers. For details, see section 25, List of Registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR have to be written to in a method different from normal registers. For details, see section 12.6.1, Notes on Register Access. • Timer control/status register (TCSR) • Timer counter (TCNT) • Reset control/status register (RSTCSR) 12.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable upcounter. When the timer enable bit (TME) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1, TCNT starts counting pulses of an internal clock selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) in TCSR. When the value of TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), a watchdog timer overflow signal (WDTOVF) or interval timer interrupt (ITI) is generated, depending on the mode selected in the WT/IT bit of TCSR. The initial value of TCNT is H'00. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 381 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. Bit 7 Bit Name OVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Overflow Flag Indicates that TCNT has overflowed in interval timer mode. Only a write of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag. This flag is not set in watchdog timer mode. [Setting condition] • • When TCNT overflows in interval timer mode. When writing 0 to this bit after reading this bit or when writing 0 to the TME bit in interval timer mode. [Clearing condition] 6 WT/IT 0 R/W Timer Mode Select Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. When TCNT overflows, the WDT either generates an interval timer interrupt (ITI) or generates a WDTOVF signal, depending on the mode selected. 0: Interval timer mode Interval timer interrupt (ITI) request to the CPU when TCNT overflows 1: Watchdog timer mode WDTOVF signal output externally when TCNT overflows. For details on the TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode, see section 12.3.3, Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR). 5 TME 0 R/W Timer Enable Enables or disables the timer. 0: Timer disabled TCNT is initialized to H'00 and count-up stops 1: Timer enabled TCNT starts counting. A WDTOVF signal or interrupt is generated when TCNT overflows. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 382 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer Bit 4, 3 Bit Name — Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 2 1 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Clock Select 2 to 0 Select one of eight internal clock sources for input to TCNT. The clock signals are obtained by dividing the frequency of the system clock (φ). The overflow frequency for φ = 40 MHz is enclosed in parentheses*2. 000: Clock φ/2 (overflow interval: 12.8 μs) 001: Clock φ/64 (overflow interval: 409.6 μs) 010: Clock φ/128 (overflow interval: 0.8 ms) 011: Clock φ/256 (overflow interval: 1.6 ms) 100: Clock φ/512 (overflow interval: 3.3 ms) 101: Clock φ/1024 (overflow interval: 6.6 ms) 110: Clock φ/4096 (overflow interval: 26.2 ms) 111: Clock φ/8192 (overflow interval: 52.4 ms) Notes: 1. Only a 0 can be written after reading 1. 2. The overflow interval listed is the time from when the TCNT begins counting at H'00 until an overflow occurs. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 383 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.3.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the generation of the internal reset signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. Bit 7 Bit Name WOVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer mode. [Setting condition] • Set when TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode Cleared by reading WOVF, and then writing 0 to WOVF [Clearing condition] • 6 RSTE 0 R/W Reset Enable Specifies whether or not an internal reset signal is generated in the chip if TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. 0: Internal reset signal is not generated even if TCNT overflows (Though this LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in WDT are reset) 1: Internal reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows 5 RSTS 0 R/W Reset Select Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. 0: Power-on reset 1: Manual reset 4 to 0 — All 1 R Reserved These bits are always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. Note: * Only 0 can be written for flag clearing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 384 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.4 12.4.1 Operation Watchdog Timer Mode To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits of TCSR to 1. Software must prevent TCNT overflow by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. No TCNT overflows will occur while the system is operating normally, but if TCNT fails to be rewritten and overflows occur due to a system crash or the like, a WDTOVF signal is output externally. The WDTOVF signal can be used to reset the system. The WDTOVF signal is output for 128φ clock cycles. If the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, a signal to reset the chip will be generated internally simultaneous to the WDTOVF signal when TCNT overflows. Either a power-on reset or a manual reset can be selected by the RSTS bit in RSTCSR. The internal reset signal is output for 512 φ clock cycles. When a WDT overflow reset is generated simultaneously with a reset input at the RES pin, the RES reset takes priority, and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. The following are not initialized by a WDT reset signal: • • • • Port output enable (POE) registers of MTU Pin function controller (PFC) registers I/O port registers Reset control/status register (RSTCSR) of watchdog timer (WDT) These registers are initialized only by an external power-on reset. Besides, TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are not initialized by a manual reset from the MRES pin, but are initialized by an internal manual reset generated by a WDT overflow. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 385 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer TCNT value Overflow H'FF H'00 WT/IT = 1 TME = 1 H’00 written in TCNT WT/IT = 1 H’00 written TME = 1 in TCNT WDTOVF and internal reset generated WOVF = 1 Time WDTOVF signal Internal reset signal* 128 φ clocks 512 φ clocks WT/IT: Timer mode select bit TME: Timer enable bit Note: * Internal reset signal occurs only when the RSTE bit is set to 1. Figure 12.2 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode 12.4.2 Interval Timer Mode To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear WT/IT to 0 and set TME to 1 in TCSR. An interval timer interrupt (ITI) is generated each time the timer counter (TCNT) overflows. This function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals. TCNT value Overflow H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow H'00 WT/IT = 0 TME = 1 ITI ITI ITI ITI Time ITI: Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 12.3 Operation in Interval Timer Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 386 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.4.3 Clearing Software Standby Mode The watchdog timer has a special function to clear software standby mode with an NMI interrupt or IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupts. When using software standby mode, set the WDT as described below. Before Transition to Software Standby Mode: The TME bit in TCSR must be cleared to 0 to stop the watchdog timer counter before entering software standby mode. The chip cannot enter software standby mode while the TME bit is set to 1. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR so that the counter overflow interval is equal to or longer than the oscillation settling time. See section 26.3, AC Characteristics, for the oscillation settling time. Recovery from Software Standby Mode: When an NMI signal or IRQ0 to IRQ7 signals are received in software standby mode, the clock oscillator starts running and TCNT starts incrementing at the rate selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 before software standby mode was entered. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the clock is presumed to be stable and usable; clock signals are supplied to the entire chip and software standby mode ends. For details on software standby mode, see section 24, Power-Down Modes. 12.4.4 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) In interval timer mode, when TCNT overflows, the OVF bit of TCSR is set to 1 and an interval timer interrupt (ITI) is simultaneously requested. Figure 12.4 shows this timing. φ TCNT H’FF H’00 Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF Figure 12.4 Timing of Setting OVF Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 387 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.4.5 Timing of Setting Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) When TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit of RSTCSR is set to 1 and a WDTOVF signal is output. When the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, TCNT overflow enables an internal reset signal to be generated for the entire chip. Figure 12.5 shows this timing. φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) WOVF Figure 12.5 Timing of Setting WOVF 12.5 Interrupt Source During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (ITI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. Table 12.2 WDT Interrupt Source (in Interval Timer Mode) Name ITI Interrupt Source TCNT overflow Interrupt Flag OVF DMAC/DTC Activation Impossible Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 388 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.6 12.6.1 Usage Notes Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. The write data must be contained in the lower byte of the written word. The upper byte must be H'5A (for TCNT) or H'A5 (for TCSR) (figure 12.6). This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. • Writing to TCNT 15 Address: H'FFFF8610 H'5A 8 7 Write data 0 • Writing to TCSR 15 Address: H'FFFF8610 H'A5 8 7 Write data 0 Figure 12.6 Writing to TCNT and TCSR Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written by a word access to address H'FFFF8612. It cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. Procedures for writing 0 to WOVF (bit 7) and for writing to RSTE (bit 6) and RSTS (bit 5) are different, as shown in figure 12.7. To write 0 to the WOVF bit, the write data must be H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower byte. This clears the WOVF bit to 0. The RSTE and RSTS bits are not affected. To write to the RSTE and RSTS bits, the upper byte must be H'5A and the lower byte must be the write data. The values of bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte are transferred to the RSTE and RSTS bits, respectively. The WOVF bit is not affected. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 389 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer • Writing 0 to the WOVF bit 15 Address: H'FFFF8612 H'A5 8 7 H’00 0 • Writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits 15 Address: H'FFFF8612 H'5A 8 7 Write data 0 Figure 12.7 Writing to RSTCSR Reading from TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR are read like other registers. Use byte transfer instructions. The read addresses are H'FFFF8610 for TCSR, H'FFFF8611 for TCNT, and H'FFFF8613 for RSTCSR. 12.6.2 TCNT Write and Increment Contention If a timer counter increment clock pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to TCNT, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 12.8 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 12.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 390 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.6.3 Changing CKS2 to CKS0 Bit Values If the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0 in the timer control/status register (TCSR) are rewritten while the WDT is running, the count may not increment correctly. Always stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 12.6.4 Changing between Watchdog Timer and Interval Timer Modes To prevent incorrect operation, always stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching between interval timer mode and watchdog timer mode. 12.6.5 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal If a WDTOVF output signal is input to the RES pin, the chip cannot initialize correctly. Avoid inputting the WDTOVF signal to the RES pin directly. To reset the entire system with the WDTOVF signal, use the circuit shown in figure 12.9. This LSI Reset input RES Reset signal to entire system WDTOVF Figure 12.9 Example of System Reset Circuit Using WDTOVF Signal 12.6.6 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode If the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 in watchdog timer mode, the chip will not be reset internally when a TCNT overflow occurs, but TCNT and TCSR in the WDT will be reset. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 391 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 12. Watchdog Timer 12.6.7 Manual Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode When an internal reset is effected by TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode, the processor waits until the end of the bus cycle at the time of manual reset generation before making the transition to manual reset exception processing. Therefore, the bus cycle is retained in a manual reset, but if a manual reset occurs while the bus is released, manual reset exception processing will be deferred until the CPU acquires the bus. However, if the interval from generation of the manual reset until the end of the bus cycle is equal to or longer than the internal manual reset interval of 512 cycles, the internal manual reset source is ignored instead of being deferred, and manual reset exception processing is not executed. 12.6.8 Note on Using WDTOVF Signal Do not pull down the WDTOVF pin. If necessary, pull it down with resistance larger than 1 MΩ. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 392 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) This LSI has four independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). The SCI also supports a smart card (IC card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as an extension function for asynchronous mode. 13.1 Features • Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode • Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data. • On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected External clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for a smart card interface). • Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer* (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data) • Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources — transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error — that can issue requests. The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the direct memory access controller (DMAC) and the data transfer controller (DTC). • Module standby mode can be set Asynchronous mode • • • • • • Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Communication between multiprocessors Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 393 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 SCIS200B_030020030800 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Clocked synchronous mode • Data length: 8 bits • Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected Smart card interface • Data is automatically retransmitted if an error signal is received while data is being transmitted • Direct convention and inverse convention both supported Note: * The description in this section is based on LSB-first transfer. Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Bus interface Module data bus Internal data bus RDR TDR SSR SCR SMR SDCR Transmission/ reception control BRR Pφ Baud rate generator Pφ/8 Pφ/32 Pφ/128 Clock RxD RSR TSR TxD Parity check SCK Parity generation External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI [Legend] RSR: Receive shift register RDR: Receive data register TSR: Transmit shift register TDR: Transmit data register SMR: Serial mode register SCR: Serial control register SSR: Serial status register BRR: Bit rate register SDCR: Serial direction control register Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 394 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.2 Input/Output Pins Table 13.1 shows the pins for each SCI channel. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 Pin Name* SCK0 RxD0 TxD0 1 SCK1 RxD1 TxD1 2 SCK2 RxD2 TxD2 3 SCK3 RxD3 TxD3 Note: * I/O I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output Function SCI0 clock input/output SCI0 receive data input SCI0 transmit data output SCI1 clock input/output SCI1 receive data input SCI1 transmit data output SCI2 clock input/output SCI2 receive data input SCI2 transmit data output SCI3 clock input/output SCI3 receive data input SCI3 transmit data output Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel designation. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 395 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3 Register Descriptions The SCI has the following registers for each channel. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. The serial mode register (SMR), serial control register (SCR), and serial status register (SSR) are described separately for normal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode because their bit functions differ in part. Channel 0 • • • • • • • • • Serial mode register_0 (SMR_0) Bit rate register_0 (BRR_0) Serial control register_0 (SCR_0) Transmit data register_0 (TDR_0) Transmit shift register_0 (TSR_0) Serial status register_0 (SSR_0) Receive data register_0 (RDR_0) Receive shift register_0 (RSR_0) Serial direction control register_0 (SDCR_0) Channel 1 • • • • • • • • • Serial mode register_1 (SMR_1) Bit rate register_1 (BRR_1) Serial control register_1 (SCR_1) Transmit data register_1 (TDR_1) Transmit shift register_1 (TSR_1) Serial status register_1 (SSR_1) Receive data register_1 (RDR_1) Receive shift register_1 (RSR_1) Serial direction control register_1 (SDCR_1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 396 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Channel 2 • • • • • • • • • Serial mode register_2 (SMR_2) Bit rate register_2 (BRR_2) Serial control register_2 (SCR_2) Transmit data register_2 (TDR_2) Transmit shift register_2 (TSR_2) Serial status register_2 (SSR_2) Receive data register_2 (RDR_2) Receive shift register_2 (RSR_2) Serial direction control register_2 (SDCR_2) Channel 3 • • • • • • • • • Serial mode register_3 (SMR_3) Bit rate register_3 (BRR_3) Serial control register_3 (SCR_3) Transmit data register_3 (TDR_3) Transmit shift register_3 (TSR_3) Serial status register_3 (SSR_3) Receive data register_3 (RDR_3) Receive shift register_3 (RSR_3) Serial direction control register_3 (SDCR_3) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 397 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) RSR is a shift register used to receive serial data that is input to the RxD pin and convert it into parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive operations to be performed. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR for only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. The initial value of RDR is H'00. 13.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 13.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores transmit data. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered structures of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has already been written to TDR during serial transmission, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times, to achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR for only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. The initial value of TDR is H'FF. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 398 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is used to set the SCI’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. Some bit functions of SMR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode. • Normal serial communication interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name C/A Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Communication Mode 0: Asynchronous mode 1: Clocked synchronous mode 6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects 8 bits as the data length. 1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed and the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted in transmission. In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used. 5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking are not performed regardless of the PE bit setting. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 399 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 4 Bit Name O/E Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus parity bit is even. 1: Selects odd parity. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd. 3 STOP 0 R/W Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) Selects the stop bit length in transmission. 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. 2 MP 0 R/W Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The PE bit and O/E bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. 1 0 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Select 1 and 0 These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. 00: Pφ clock (n = 0) 01: Pφ/8 clock (n = 1) 10: Pφ/32 clock (n = 2) 11: Pφ/128 clock (n = 3) For the relation between the setting of CKS1 and CKS2 and the baud rate, see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 400 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) • Smart card interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name GM Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description GSM Mode When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in GSM mode. In GSM mode, the timing of the TEND setting is advanced by 11.0 etu, and clock output control function is added. For details, refer to section 13.7.7, Clock Output Control. 6 BLK 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in block transfer mode. For details on block transfer mode, refer to section 13.7.3, Block Transfer Mode. During reception in smart card interface mode, this bit must be set to 1. 5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data in transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. In smart card interface mode, this bit must be set to 1. 4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. For details on setting this bit in smart card interface mode, refer to section 13.7.2, Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode). 3 2 BCP1 BCP0 0 0 R/W R/W Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 0 These bits select the number of basic clock cycles in a 1-bit transfer interval in smart card interface mode. 00: 32 clocks (S = 32) 01: 64 clocks (S = 64) 10: 372 clocks (S = 372) 11: 256 clocks (S = 256) For details, refer to section 13.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin. S stands for the value of S in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 401 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Description Clock Select 1 and 0 These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. 00: Pφ clock (n = 0) 01: Pφ/8 clock (n = 1) 10: Pφ/32 clock (n = 2) 11: Pφ/128 clock (n = 3) For details on the relationship between the setting of these bits and the baud rate, refer to section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in BRR (see section 13.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Note: etu (Elementary Time Unit): Abbreviation for the transfer period for one bit. 13.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and selection of the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 13.8, Interrupt Sources. Some bit functions of SCR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode. • Normal serial communication interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is enabled. TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag in SSR, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 402 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 5 Bit Name TE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Enable When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be made to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit to 1. When this bit is cleared to 0, transmit operation is disabled, and the TDRE flag in SSR is fixed to 1. 4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or synchronous clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode. SMR setting must be made to decide the receive format before setting the RE bit to 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 disables reception and does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is prohibited. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 13.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR, are not performed. When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting are enabled. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 403 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 2 Bit Name TEIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit End Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is enabled. TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0. 1 0 CKE1 CKE0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Enable 1 and 0 Select the clock source and SCK pin function. Asynchronous mode: 00: Internal clock, SCK pin used for input pin (input signal is ignored) or output pin (output level is undefined) 01: Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output (The output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate) 10: External clock, SCK pin used for clock input (The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate) 11: External clock, SCK pin used for clock input (The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate) Clocked synchronous mode: 00: Internal clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock output 01: Internal clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock output 10: External clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock input 11: External clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock input Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 404 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) • Smart card interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is enabled. TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag in SSR, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0. 5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be made to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit to 1. When this bit is cleared to 0, transmit operation is disabled, and the TDRE flag in SSR is fixed to 1. 4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or synchronous clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode. SMR setting must be made to decide the receive format before setting the RE bit to 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 disables reception and does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 405 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 3 Bit Name Initial Value R/W MPIE 0 R/W Description Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode. When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR, are not performed. When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting are enabled. 2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode. TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0. 1 0 CKE1 CKE0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Enable 1 and 0 Enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The clock output can be dynamically switched in GSM mode. For details, refer to section 13.7.7, Clock Output Control. When the GM bit in SMR is 0: 00: Output disabled (SCK pin functions as an input pin (ignored) or as an output pin (level is undefined)) 01: Clock output 1X: Reserved When the GM bit in SMR is 1: 00: Output fixed low 01: Clock output 10: Output fixed high 11: Clock output [Legend] X: Don’t care Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 406 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Some bit functions of SSR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode. • Normal serial communication interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W Description R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] • • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt request. When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt request and transferred data to TDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of DTC is 0. [Clearing conditions] • • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 407 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 6 Bit Name RDRF Initial Value 0 R/W Description R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] • When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 • When the DMAC is activated by a RXI interrupt request. • When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and transferred data from RDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of DTC is 0. RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous states even if the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* Overrun Error Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. [Setting condition] • When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1 The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued either. [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1 The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 408 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 4 Bit Name FER Initial Value 0 R/W Description R/(W)* Framing Error Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. [Setting condition] • When the stop bit is 0 In 2 stop bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value to 1; the second stop bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1 The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 3 PER 0 R/(W)* Parity Error Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. [Setting condition] • When a parity error is detected during reception If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 409 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 2 Bit Name TEND Initial Value 1 R/W R Description Transmit End Indicates that transmission has been ended. [Setting conditions] • • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt request. When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and transmit data is written to TDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of DTC is 0. [Clearing conditions] • • • 1 MPB 0 R Multiprocessor Bit Stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0, its previous state is retained. 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer Sets the multiprocessor bit value to be added to the transmit data. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 410 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) • Smart card interface mode (when SMIF in SDCR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value TDRE 1 R/W Description R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] • • • • • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and transmit data is transferred to TDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of the DTC is 0 [Clearing conditions] 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the receive data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] • When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DMAC is activated by an RXI interrupt When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and data is transferred from RDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of the DTC is 0 [Clearing conditions] • • • • The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous value even if the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 411 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 5 Bit Name Initial Value ORER 0 R/W Description R/(W)* Overrun Error Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. [Setting condition] • When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1 The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1 The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state even if the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 4 ERS 0 R/(W)* Error Signal Status Indicates that the status of an error signal returned from the receive side at transmission. [Setting condition] • • • When the low level of the error signal is sampled Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1 [Clearing conditions] The ERS flag is not affected and retains its previous state even if the TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 412 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 3 Bit Name Initial Value R/W PER 0 Description R/(W)* Parity Error Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. [Setting condition] • When a parity error is detected during reception If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing conditions] • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state even if the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 413 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Bit 2 Bit Name Initial Value R/W TEND 1 R Description Transmit End This bit is set to 1 when no error signal has been sent back from the receive side and the next transmit data is ready to be transferred to TDR. [Setting conditions] • • • Power-on reset or software standby mode When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ESR bit is also 0 When the ESR bit is 0 and the TDRE bit is 1 after the specified interval following transmission of 1-byte data The timing of bit setting differs according to the register setting as follows: When GM = 0 and BLK = 0, 2.5 etu after transmission starts When GM = 0 and BLK = 1, 1.0 etu after transmission starts When GM = 1 and BLK = 0, 1.5 etu after transmission starts When GM = 1 and BLK = 1, 1.0 etu after transmission starts [Clearing conditions] • • • When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC is activated by a TXI interrupt When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and transmit data is transferred to TDR while the DISEL bit in DTMR of the DTC is 0 1 0 Note: MPB MPBT * 0 0 R R/W Multiprocessor This bit is not used in smart card interface mode. Multiprocessor Bit Transfer Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 414 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3.8 Serial Direction Control Register (SDCR) SDCR selects LSB-first or MSB-first transfer and sets the smart card interface. With an 8-bit data length, LSB-first/MSB-first selection is available regardless of the communication mode. With a 7-bit data length, LSB-first transfer must be selected. The description in this section assumes LSBfirst transfer. Bit 7 to 4 3 DIR 0 R/W Bit Name ⎯ Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved The write value should always be 1. Operation cannot be guaranteed if 0 is written. Data Transfer Direction Selects the serial/parallel conversion direction. 0: Transfer in LSB-first 1: Transfer in MSB-first The bit setting is valid only when the transfer data format is 8 bits. For 7-bit data, LSB-first is fixed. 2 SINV 0 R/W Smart Card Data Invert Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. To invert the parity bit, invert the O/E bit in SMR. This bit is valid only in smart card interface mode. In normal asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode, clear this bit to 0. 0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive data is stored as it is in RDR 1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted. Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR 1 0 ⎯ SMIF 1 0 R R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Smart Card Interface Mode Select This bit is set to 1 to make the SCI operate in smart card interface mode. 0: Normal asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode 1: Smart card interface mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 415 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 13.2 shows the relationships between the N setting in BRR and the effective bit rate B0 for asynchronous, clocked synchronous, and smart card interface modes. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and it can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times. Table 13.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Effective Bit Rate B0 Mode Asynchronous mode (n = 0) Asynchronous mode (n = 1 to 3) Clocked synchronous mode (n = 0) Clocked synchronous mode (n = 1 to 3) Smaet card interface mode (n = 0) Smaet card interface mode (n = 1 to 3) Bit Rate B0 = Pφ × 106 Error Error (%) = ⎞ B0 ⎞ – 1 × 100 ⎠B ⎠ 1 ⎞ B0 ⎞ – 1 × 100 ⎠B ⎠ 1 32 × 22n × (N + 1) Pφ × 106 32 × 22n+1 × (N + 1) Pφ × 106 4 × 22n × (N + 1) Pφ × 106 4 × 22n+1 × (N + 1) Pφ × 106 S × 22n+1 × (N + 1) Pφ × 106 S × 22n+2 × (N + 1) B0 = Error (%) = B0 = — B0 = — ⎞ ⎞ B0 – 1 × 100 ⎠ ⎠B 1 ⎞ ⎞ B0 – 1 × 100 ⎠ ⎠B 1 B0 = Error (%) = B0 = Error (%) = [Legend] Effective bit rate (bit/s) Actual transfer speed according to the register settings B0: B1: Logical bit rate (bit/s) Specified transfer speed of the target system N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255) Pφ: Peripheral clock operating frequency (MHz) n and S: Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following tables. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 416 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) SMR Setting CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 n 0 1 2 3 SMR Setting BCP1 0 0 1 1 BCP0 0 1 0 1 S 32 64 372 256 Table 13.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 13.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in normal asynchronous mode. Table 13.6 shows sample N settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Table 13.8 shows sample N settings in BRR in smart card interface mode. Table 13.9 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in smart card interface mode. For details, refer to section 13.4.2, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode and section 13.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin. Tables 13.5 and 13.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 417 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 31250 38400 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 N 140 103 51 25 12 51 25 12 8 6 3 3 2 Error (%) 0.74 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –3.55 –6.99 8.51 0.00 8.51 n 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 212 155 77 38 155 77 38 19 12 9 6 5 4 6 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –2.34 0.16 –2.34 –6.99 0.00 –2.34 n 2 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 51 25 12 25 12 51 25 16 12 8 7 6 8 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 2.12 0.16 –3.55 0.00 –6.99 n 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 32 129 64 32 21 15 10 9 7 10 Error (%) –0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 –1.36 0.16 0.16 –1.36 –1.36 1.73 –1.36 0.00 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 38 77 38 155 77 38 25 19 12 11 9 12 Error (%) –0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –2.34 0.16 0.00 –2.34 Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 31250 38400 2 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 N 123 90 45 22 45 22 90 45 29 22 14 13 10 Error (%) 0.23 0.16 –0.93 –0.93 –0.93 –0.93 0.16 –0.93 1.27 –0.93 1.27 0.00 3.57 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 141 103 51 103 51 207 103 51 34 25 16 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –0.79 0.16 2.12 0.00 0.16 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 159 116 58 116 58 233 116 58 38 28 19 17 14 18 Error (%) –0.12 0.16 –0.69 0.16 –0.69 0.16 0.16 –0.69 0.16 1.02 –2.34 0.00 –2.34 n 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 32 129 64 42 32 21 19 15 20 Error (%) –0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –1.36 0.16 0.16 0.94 –1.36 –1.36 0.00 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 194 142 71 142 71 35 142 71 47 35 23 21 17 22 Error (%) 0.16 0.16 –0.54 0.16 –0.54 –0.54 0.16 –0.54 –0.54 –0.54 –0.54 0.00 –0.54 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 418 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 31250 38400 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 N 212 155 77 155 77 38 155 77 51 38 25 23 19 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 –2.34 n 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 221 162 80 162 80 40 162 80 53 40 26 24 19 25 Error (%) –0.02 –0.15 0.47 –0.15 0.47 –0.76 –0.15 0.47 0.47 –0.76 0.47 0.00 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 230 168 84 168 84 41 168 84 55 41 27 25 20 26 Error (%) –0.08 0.16 –0.43 0.16 –0.43 0.76 0.16 –0.43 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.00 0.76 n 2 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 248 181 90 181 90 45 181 90 60 45 29 27 22 28 Error (%) –0.17 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –0.93 0.16 0.16 –0.39 –0.93 1.27 0.00 –0.93 n 3 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 66 194 97 48 97 48 194 97 64 48 32 29 23 30 Error (%) –0.62 0.16 –0.35 –0.35 –0.35 –0.35 0.16 –0.35 0.16 –0.35 –1.36 0.00 1.73 Table 13.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (4) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 31250 38400 3 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 N 70 207 103 51 103 51 207 103 68 51 34 31 25 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.64 0.16 –0.79 0.00 0.16 n 3 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 74 220 110 54 110 51 220 110 73 54 36 33 27 34 Error (%) 0.62 0.16 –0.29 0.62 –0.29 6.42 0.16 –0.29 –0.29 0.62 –0.29 0.00 –1.18 n 3 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 79 233 116 58 116 58 234 116 77 58 38 35 28 36 Error (%) –0.12 0.16 0.16 –0.69 0.16 –0.69 –0.27 0.16 0.16 –0.69 0.16 0.00 1.02 n 3 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 83 246 123 61 123 61 246 123 81 61 40 37 30 38 Error (%) 0.40 0.16 –0.24 –0.24 –0.24 –0.24 0.16 –0.24 0.57 –0.24 0.57 0.00 –0.24 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 129 86 64 42 39 32 40 Error (%) –0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –1.36 0.16 –0.22 0.16 0.94 0.00 –1.36 Note: Settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 419 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency when Using Baud Rate Generator (Asynchronous Mode) Pφ (MHz) 4 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 125000 250000 312500 375000 437500 500000 562500 625000 687500 750000 781250 812500 875000 937500 1000000 1062500 1125000 1187500 1250000 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 420 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) Pφ (MHz) 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 External Clock (MHz) 1.0000 1.5000 2.0000 2.5000 3.0000 3.5000 4.0000 4.5000 5.0000 5.5000 6.0000 6.2500 6.5000 7.0000 7.5000 8.0000 8.5000 9.0000 9.5000 10.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 62500 93750 125000 156250 187500 218750 250000 281250 312500 343750 375000 390625 406250 437500 468750 500000 531250 562500 593750 625000 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 421 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (1) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate (bit/s) 250 500 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 4 n 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — N 124 249 124 49 24 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* — — n 2 2 1 1 — 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — 6 N 187 93 187 74 — 149 59 29 14 5 2 — — — n 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — — 8 N 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 19 7 3 1 — — n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 — 0 — 10 N 77 155 77 124 61 249 99 49 24 9 4 — 0* — n 3 2 2 1 1 — 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — 12 N 93 187 93 149 74 — 14 59 29 11 5 2 — — Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (2) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate (bit/s) 250 500 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 14 n 3 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — — N 108 218 108 174 86 43 139 69 34 13 6 — — — n 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 — — 16 N 124 249 124 49 24 49 19 9 4 1 0 3 — — n 3 3 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — — 18 N 140 69 140 224 112 55 179 89 44 17 8 — — — n 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 N 155 77 155 249 124 62 24 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n 3 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — — 22 N 171 85 42 68 137 68 219 109 54 21 10 — — — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 422 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (3) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate (bit/s) 250 500 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 24 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — — N 187 93 187 74 149 74 29 14 59 23 11 5 — — n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 — — — — 25 N 194 97 194 77 155 77 249 124 62 24 — — — — n 3 3 2 2 1 1 — 0 0 0 0 — — — 26 N 202 101 202 80 162 80 — 129 64 25 12 — — — n 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — 28 N 218 108 218 86 174 86 34 139 69 27 13 6 — — n 3 3 2 2 1 1 — 0 0 0 0 — 0 — 30 N 233 116 233 93 187 93 — 149 74 29 14 — 2 — Table 13.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (4) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Logical Bit Rate (bit/s) 250 500 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 32 n 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 — — N 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 9 3 1 0 — — n — 3 3 2 1 1 — 0 0 0 0 — — — 34 N — 132 65 105 212 105 — 169 84 33 16 — — — n — 3 3 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — — 36 N — 140 69 112 224 112 44 179 89 35 17 8 — — n — 3 3 2 1 1 — 0 0 0 0 — — — 38 N — 147 73 118 237 118 — 189 94 37 18 — — — n — 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 N — 155 77 124 249 124 49 24 99 39 19 9 3 1 [Legend] — : Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. * : Continuous transfer is not possible. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 423 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Pφ (MHz) 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 External Clock (MHz) 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 2.3333 2.6667 3.0000 3.3333 3.6667 4.0000 4.1667 4.3333 4.6667 5.0000 5.3333 5.6667 6.0000 6.3333 6.6667 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 2333333.3 2666666.7 3000000.0 3333333.3 3666666.7 4000000.0 4166666.7 4333333.3 4666666.7 5000000.0 5333333.3 5666666.7 6000000.0 6333333.3 6666666.7 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 424 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (When n = 0 and S = 372) Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Bit Rate (bps) 9600 4 N 0 Error (%) 44 8 N 0 Error (%) 12 16 N 1 Error (%) 12 24 N 2 Error (%) 12 25 N 3 Error (%) 12 Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz) Bit Rate (bps) 9600 32 N 3 Error (%) 12 40 N 3 Error (%) 40 Table 13.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when S = 372) Pφ (MHz) 4 8 16 24 25 32 40 Maximum Bit Rate (bps) 5376 10753 21505 32258 33602 43011 53763 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 425 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 13.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data, a parity bit, and finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the communication line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit. Idle state (mark state) 1 Serial data 0 Start bit 1 bit LSB D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 MSB D7 0/1 Parity bit 1 bit or none 1 1 1 Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 or 2 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 426 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.1 Data Transfer Format Table 13.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor bit, refer to section 13.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Table 13.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 PE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X X X X MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S S S S S S S S S S S S 2 Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP STOP STOP P STOP 11 12 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data STOP P STOP STOP STOP STOP P P STOP STOP STOP MPB STOP MPB STOP STOP MPB STOP MPB STOP STOP [Legend] S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit X: Don’t care Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 427 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 13.3. Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below. M= 0.5 – (D – 0.5) 1 – – (L – 0.5) F N 2N × 100% ............................ Formula (1) Where M: N: D: L: F: Reception margin (%) Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin is given by formula below. M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875% However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 7 15 0 7 15 0 Internal basic clock Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Figure 13.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 428 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.3 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI’s serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 13.4. The clock must not be stopped during operation. SCK TxD 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 13.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 429 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. Start transmission Clear RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE,* TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE and RE bits are 0) Set data transfer format in SMR Set value in BRR Wait [1] [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set PFC of the external pin used SCK, TxD, RxD Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1 < Initialization completion> [4] [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Set PFC of the external pin used. Set RxD input during receiving and TxD output during transmitting. Set SCK input/output according to contents set by CKE1 and CKE0. When CKE1 and CKE0 are 0 in asynchronous mode, setting the SCK pin is unnecessary. Outputting clocks from the SCK pin starts at synchronous clock output setting. [5] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.* At this time, the TxD, RxD, and SCK pins can be used. The TxD pin is in a mark state during transmitting, and RxD pin is in an idle state for waiting the start bit during receiving. [5] Note: * In simultaneous transmit/receive operation, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 13.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 430 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 13.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is cleared to 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. 5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark state” is entered in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 TxD 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt processing routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 13.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 431 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Figure 13.7 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode. [1] SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin using the PFC. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame period of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. This action doesn't initiate immediate data transmission. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, first clear the port data register (DR) to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR and use the PFC to select the TxD pin as an Initialization Start transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 All data transmitted? Yes No [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1 Yes Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 No [4] Clear TE bit in SCR to 0; select the TxD pin as an output port with the PFC Figure 13.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 432 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 13.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the communication line, and if a start bit is detected, performs internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1) occurs, the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 4. If a framing error (when the stop bit is 0) is detected, the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 5. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt processing routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 RxD 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated 1 frame RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt processing routine ERI interrupt request generated by framing error Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 433 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.11 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.9 shows a sample flow chart for serial data reception. Table 13.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling SSR Status Flag RDRF* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * OER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Lost Transferred to RDR Transferred to RDR Lost Lost Transferred to RDR Lost Receive Error Type Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error The RDRF flag retains its state before data reception. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 434 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) [1] SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC. Initialization Start reception [1] [2] [3] Receive error processing and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to Read ORER, PER, and [2] identify the error. After performing the FER flags in SSR appropriate error processing, ensure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are Yes all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be PER∨FER∨ORER = 1 resumed if any of these flags are set to [3] 1. In the case of a framing error, a No Error processing break can be detected by reading the value of the input port corresponding to (Continued on next page) the RxD pin. Read RDRF flag in SSR No [4] [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when DMAC or DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and the RDR value is read. RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 435 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) [3] Error processing No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Break? No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Yes No PER = 1 Yes Parity error processing Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 13.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 436 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing communication lines by means of asynchronous serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle, and if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 13.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. The receiving station skips data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1, transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags, RDRF, FER, and OER to 1 are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On reception of receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated. When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is invalid. All other bit settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 437 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Transmitting station Serial transmission line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) Receiving station C (ID = 03) Receiving station D (ID = 04) H'01 (MPB = 1) ID transmission cycle = receiving station specification H'AA (MPB = 0) Data transmission cycle = Data transmission to receiving station specified by ID [Legend] MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 13.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 438 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Figure 13.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode. [1] SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin using the PFC. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame period of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. This action doesn't initiate immediate data transmission. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, first clear the port data register (DR) to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR and Initialization Start transmission Read TDRE flag in SSR No [1] [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No [3] TEND = 1 Yes Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 No No [4] Clear TE bit in SCR to 0; select the TxD pin as an output port with the PFC Figure 13.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 439 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Figure 13.13 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure 13.12 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. Start bit 0 D0 Data (ID1) MPB D1 D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data1) D1 D7 Stop MPB bit 0 1 RxD 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated ID1 RDR data read If not this station’s ID, and RDRF flag MPIE bit is set to 1 cleared to 0 in again RXI interrupt processing routine RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR retains its state (a) Data does not match station’s ID Start bit 0 D0 Data (ID2) D1 D7 Stop MPB bit 1 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data2) D1 D7 Stop MPB bit 0 1 RxD 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt processing routine ID2 Data2 Matches this station’s ID, MPIE bit is set to 1 so reception continues, again and data is received in RXI interrupt processing routine (b) Data matches station’s ID Figure 13.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 440 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) [1] SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC. [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. [2] [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station’s ID. If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station’s ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. [5] Receive error processing and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error processing, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. [4] No Initialization Start reception Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1 Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FER∨ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No [1] Yes [3] RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station’s ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FER∨ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Error processing (Continued on next page) Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 441 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) [5] Error processing No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Break? No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Yes Clear ORER and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 13.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 442 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Figure 13.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses. Data is transferred in 8-bit units. In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * Synchronization clock LSB Serial data Don’t care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don’t care * Figure 13.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) 13.6.1 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed, the clock is fixed high. However, during receive-only operation the synchronization clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. When receive operation in single-character units is desired, select an external clock as the clock source. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 443 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 13.15. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR. Clear RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE and RE bits in SCR to 0* Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE and RE bits are 0) Set data transfer format in SMR Set value in BRR Wait No Start initialization [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. [1] [4] Set PFC of the external pin used. Set RxD input during receiving and TxD output during transmitting. Set SCK input/output according to contents set by CKE1 and CKE0. [5] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.* At this time, the TxD, RxD, and SCK pins can be used. The TxD pin is in a mark state during transmitting. When synchronous clock output (clock master) is set during receiving in synchronous mode, outputting clocks from the SCK pin starts. [2] [3] 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set PFC of the external pin used SCK, TxD, RxD Set RIE, TIE, and TEIE bits Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1 [4] [5] Note: * In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 444 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 13.16 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode. In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty (TXI) interrupt request is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode has been specified and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has been specified. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). 5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TxD pin maintains the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high. Figure 13.17 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1. Make sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 445 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Transfer direction Synchronization clock Serial data TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt processing routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 13.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode [1] SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin using the PFC. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Initialization Start transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No [3] TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 No Figure 13.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 446 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 13.18 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with a synchronization clock input or output, starts receiving data, and stores the received data in RSR. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt processing routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. Synchronization clock Serial data RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt processing routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 13.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 447 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.19 shows a sample flowchart for serial data reception. An overrun error occurs or synchronous clocks are output until the RE bit is cleared to 0 when an internal clock is selected and only receive operation is possible. When reception will be carried out in a unit of one frame, be sure to carry out a dummy transmission with only one frame by the simultaneous transmit and receive operations at the same time. [1] SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC. [2] [3] Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. Initialization Start reception [1] Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [2] ORER = 1 No [3] No [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive (Continued below) data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. RDRF = 1 Error processing Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0 should be finished. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] [3] Error processing Overrun error processing Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0 Figure 13.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 448 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 13.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations after the SCI initialization. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 449 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) [1] SCI initialization: Set the TxD and RxD pins using the PFC. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. [3] Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible. Then write data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. Initialization Start transmission/reception [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] Error processing [4] ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 [5] Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously. Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 450 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7 Smart Card Interface The SCI supports an IC card (smart card) interface that conforms to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as an extension function for the serial communication interface. Switching to smart card interface mode is carried out by means of a register setting. 13.7.1 Pin Connection Example Figure 13.21 shows an example of connection with the smart card. In communication with an IC card, as both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, but the TxD pin is always fixed to output. Note that the following controls are needed to avoid signal collision: (1) control of data directions between TXD and I/O in the external circuit and (2) setting of the TXD pin to an input port except in transmission. Similarly, since the RxD pin is always fixed to input, connect a pull-up resistor to avoid the open state. When the clock generated by the SCI is supplied to an IC card, the SCK pin output is input to the CLK pin of the IC card. If an internal clock is used in an IC card, the connection between the SCK and CLK pins is unnecessary. This LSI port output can be used as the reset signal. Connection between the power supply and ground pins is also necessary. External circuit VCC TxD RxD SCK Port This LSI Reset line Data line Clock line I/O CLK RST IC card Figure 13.21 Example of Pin Connections for Smart Card Interface Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 451 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode) Figure 13.22 shows the transfer data format in smart card interface mode. • One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit in asynchronous mode. • In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary time unit: the time for transfer of one bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. • If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu period, 10.5 etu after the start bit. • If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted automatically after a delay of 2 etu or longer. When there is no parity error Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Transmitting station output When a parity error occurs Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Transmitting station output Receiving station output Start bit Data bits Parity bit Error signal [Legend] DS: D0 to D7: Dp: DE: Figure 13.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format Data transfer with other types of IC cards (direct convention and inverse convention) should be performed as described in the following. (Z) A Ds Z D0 Z D1 A D2 Z D3 Z D4 Z D5 A D6 A D7 Z Dp (Z) State Figure 13.23 Direct Convention (DIR = SINV = O/E = 0) With the direction convention type IC and the above sample start character, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. The above start character data is H'3B. For the direct convention type, clear the DIR and SINV Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 452 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) bits in SDCR to 0. According to smart card regulations, clear the O/E bit in SMR to 0 to select even parity mode. (Z) A Ds Z D7 Z D6 A D5 A D4 A D3 A D2 A D1 A D0 Z Dp (Z) State Figure 13.24 Inverse Convention (DIR = SINV = O/E = 1) With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level to state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The above start character data is H'3F. For the inverse convention type, set the DIR and SINV bits in SDCR to 1. According to smart card regulations, even parity mode is the logic 0 level of the parity bit, and corresponds to state Z. In this LSI, the SINV bit inverts only data bits D0 to D7. Therefore, set the O/E bit in SMR to 1 to invert the parity bit for both transmission and reception. 13.7.3 Block Transfer Mode Operation in block transfer mode is the same as that in the normal smart card interface mode, except for the following points. • In reception, though the parity check is performed, no error signal is output even if an error is detected. However, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and must be cleared before receiving the parity bit of the next frame. • In transmission, a guard time of at least 1 etu is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. • In transmission, because retransmission is not performed, the TEND flag is set to 1, 11.5 etu after transmission start. • As with the normal smart card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but since error signal transfer is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 453 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin In smart card interface mode an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can only be used as a transmit/receive clock. In this mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or 256 times the bit rate (fixed to 16 times in normal asynchronous mode) as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. As shown in figure 13.25, by sampling receive data at the rising edge of the 16th, 32nd, 186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock, data can be latched at the middle of the bit. The reception margin is given by the following formula. M = | (0.5 – 1 | D – 0.5 | ) – (L – 0.5) F – (1 + F) | × 100% 2N N Where M: Reception margin (%) N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256) D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) L: Frame length (L = 10) F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5, and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin formula is as follows. M = (0.5 – 1/2 × 372) × 100% = 49.866% 372 clocks 186 clocks 0 Internal basic clock 185 371 0 185 371 0 Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Data sampling timing Figure 13.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Interface Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times Bit Rate) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 454 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7.5 Initialization Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below. Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR to 0. Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0. Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP1, BCP0, CKS1, and CKS0 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1. Set the SMIF, DIR, and SINV bits in SDCR. Set the value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Set the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE and RIE bits in SCR. Make the pin function settings for the external pins (SCK, TxD, and RxD). Set the TE and RE bits in SCR. Except for self diagnosis, do not set the TE bit and RE bit at the same time. To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, initialize the SCI, and clear the RE bit to 0 and set the TE bit to 1. Whether the SCI has finished reception or not can be checked with the RDRF, PER, or ORER flag. To switch from transmit mode to receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission, initialize the SCI, and clear the TE bit to 0 and set the RE bit to 1. Whether the SCI has finished transmission or not can be checked with the TEND flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 455 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7.6 Serial Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode) As data transmission in smart card interface mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the operations are different from those in normal serial communication interface mode (except for block transfer mode). Figure 13.26 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in transmit mode. 1. If an error signal is sampled from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is completed, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be cleared to 0 by the time the next parity bit is sampled. 2. The TEND flag in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error signal is received. Data is retransferred from TDR to TSR, and retransmitted automatically. 3. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set. Transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is decided to have been completed, and the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE bit in SCR is set at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Writing transmit data to TDR transmits the next data. Figure 13.28 shows an example of a flowchart for transmission. A sequence of transmit operations can be performed automatically by specifying the DMAC or DTC to be activated with a TXI interrupt source. In a transmit operation, the TDRE flag is set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and a TXI interrupt request will be generated if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DMAC or DTC activation source, the DMAC or DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data is transferred by the DMAC or DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DMAC or DTC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DMAC or DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI interrupt request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared. When performing transfer using the DMAC or DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DMAC or DTC before carrying out SCI setting. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 456 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Transfer frame n+1 (DE) Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 nth transfer frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE TDRE Transfer to TSR from TDR TEND Retransferred frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Transfer to TSR from TDR Transfer to TSR from TDR FER/ERS Figure 13.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag generation timing is shown in figure 13.27. I/O data TXI (TEND interrupt) When GM = 0 Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Guard time 12.5etu 11.0etu When GM = 1 [Legend] Ds: D0 to D7: Dp: DE: Start bit Data bits Parity bit Error signal Figure 13.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmit Operation Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 457 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Start Initialization Start transmission ERS = 0? Yes No Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Write data to TDR, and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted ? Yes No ERS = 0? Yes Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit to 0 End Figure 13.28 Example of Transmit Processing Flow In smart card interface mode, data reception should be performed in block transfer mode. For details, refer to section 13.4, Operation in Asynchronous Mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 458 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.7.7 Clock Output Control When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be specified. Figure 13.29 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, the GM bit is set to 1, the CKE1 bit is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled. CKE0 SCK Specified pulse width Specified pulse width Figure 13.29 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 459 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.8 13.8.1 Interrupt Sources Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode Table 13.12 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt request can activate the DMAC or DTC to perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DMAC or DTC. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt request can activate the DMAC or DTC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DMAC or DTC. A TEI interrupt is generated when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are generated simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for acceptance. However, note that if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 460 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 13.12 Interrupt Sources in Serial Communication Interface Mode Channel 0 Name ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 TEI_0 1 ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 TEI_1 2 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 TEI_2 3 ERI_3 RXI_3 TXI_3 TEI_3 Interrupt Source Receive error Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmission end Receive error Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmission end Receive error Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmission end Receive error Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmission end Interrupt Flag ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND DMAC or DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 461 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.8.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode Table 13.13 shows the interrupt sources in smart card interface mode. The transmit end interrupt (TEI) request cannot be used in this mode. Note: In block transfer mode, refer to section 13.8.1, Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode. Table 13.13 Interrupt Sources in Smart Card Interface Mode Channel 0 Name ERI_0 RXI_0 TXI_0 1 ERI_1 RXI_1 TXI_1 2 ERI_2 RXI_2 TXI_2 3 ERI_3 RXI_3 TXI_3 Interrupt Source Interrupt Flag DMAC or DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Receive error, error signal ORER, PER, ERS detection Receive data full Transmit data empty RDRF TEND Receive error, error signal ORER, PER, ERS detection Receive data full Transmit data empty RDRF TEND Receive error, error signal ORER, PER, ERS detection Receive data full Transmit data empty RDRF TEND Receive error, error signal ORER, PER, ERS detection Receive data full Transmit data empty RDRF TEND Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 462 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.9 13.9.1 Usage Notes TDR Write and TDRE Flag The TDRE bit in the serial status register (SSR) is a status flag indicating transferring of transmit data from TDR into TSR. The SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 when it transfers data from TDR to TSR. Data can be written to TDR regardless of the TDRE bit status. If new data is written in TDR when TDRE is 0, however, the old data stored in TDR will be lost because the data has not yet been transferred to TSR. Before writing transmit data to TDR, be sure to check that the TDRE bit is set to 1. 13.9.2 Module Standby Mode Setting SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module standby control register. The initial setting is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module standby mode. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down Modes. 13.9.3 Break Detection and Processing (Asynchronous Mode Only) When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the PER flag may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. 13.9.4 Sending Break Signal (Asynchronous Mode Only) The TxD pin becomes of the I/O port general I/O pin with the I/O direction and level determined by the port data register (DR) and the port I/O register (IOR) of the pin function controller (PFC). These conditions allow break signals to be sent. The DR value is substituted for the marking status until the PFC is set. Consequently, the output port is set to initially output a 1. To send a break in serial transmission, first clear the DR to 0, then establish the TxD pin as an output port using the PFC. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 463 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmission section is initialized regardless of the present transmission status. 13.9.5 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. 13.9.6 Notes on DMAC and DTC Use 1. When using an external clock source for the serial clock, update TDR with the DMAC or the DTC, and then after the elapse of five peripheral clocks (Pφ) or more, input a transmit clock. If a transmit clock is input in the first four Pφ clocks after TDR is written, an error may occur (figure 13.30). 2. Before reading the receive data register (RDR) with the DMAC or the DTC, select the receivedata-full (RXI) interrupt of the SCI as a start-up source. SCK t TDRE D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Note: During external clock operation, an error may occur if t is 4 Pφ clocks or less. Figure 13.30 Example of Clocked Synchronous Transmission with DMAC/DTC 13.9.7 Notes on Clocked Synchronous External Clock Mode 1. Set TE = RE = 1 only when external clock SCK is 1. 2. Do not set TE = RE = 1 until at least four Pφ clocks after external clock SCK has changed from 0 to 1. 3. When receiving, RDRF is 1 when RE is cleared to 0 after 2.5 to 3.5 Pφ clocks from the rising edge of the RxD D7 bit SCK input, but copying to RDR is not possible. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 464 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 13.9.8 Note on Clocked Synchronous Internal Clock Mode When receiving, RDRF is 1 when RE is cleared to 0 after 1.5 Pφ clocks from the rising edge of the RxD D7 bit SCK output, but copying to RDR is not possible. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 465 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 13. Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 466 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Section 14 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The I2C bus interface is an optional feature. When using this optional feature, pay attention to the following point: • A “W” is added to the product-type name of a mask-ROM product which includes an optional feature. This LSI incorporates a single-channel I2C bus interface. The I2C bus interface conforms to the Philips I2C bus (Inter-IC bus) interface system and provides a subset of the functions. Note, however, that the configuration of the registers that control the I2C bus differs on some points from that of Phillips’. Data transfer is carried out by the data line (SDA0) and clock line (SCL0). This makes the interface efficient in terms of the use of area for connectors and printed circuits. IFIIC60A_010020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 467 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.1 Features • Selection of addressing or non-addressing format I2C bus format: addressing format with an acknowledge bit, master and slave operation Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without an acknowledge bit, and with master operation only • This I2C bus format complies with the I2C bus interface advocated by Phillips. • In the I2C bus format, two slave addresses are specifiable for a single device. • Automatic creation of start and stop conditions in master mode of the I2C bus format • Selectable acknowledge output level during reception in the I2C bus format • Automatic loading of the acknowledge bit is available during transmission in the I2C bus format. • A wait function is available in the I2C bus format in the master mode. After all data other than the acknowledge bit has been transferred, the system can be placed in the wait state by setting SCL low. The wait state can be cancelled by clearing the interrupt flag to 0. • A wait function is available in the I2C bus format. After all data other than the acknowledge bit has been transferred, a request to enter the wait state can be issued by setting SCL low. The request to enter the wait state is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible. • Interrupt sources Data transfer end (including when a transition to transmit mode is made in the I2C bus format, when data in ICDR is transferred, or during a wait state) Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in slave receive mode of the I2C bus format (including address reception after loss in master contention) Loss of arbitration Start condition detection (in master mode) Stop condition detection (in slave mode) • Sixteen variants of the internal clock are selectable in the master mode. • Direct bus drive (SCL/SDA pin) Pins SCL0 and SDA0 function as NMOS open-drain output. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 468 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Figure 14.1 is a block diagram of the I2C bus interface. Figure 14.2 shows an example of the connection of I2C bus interfaces. Since the I/O pins are driven only by the NMOS transistor, they operate in the same way as pins driven by an open-drain NMOS transistor. The voltage that can be applied to the I/O pins depends on the supply voltage of the LSI. SCRX Pφ SCL PS Clock control ICCR Noise canceller ICMR Bus state detection circuit ICSR Arbitration detection circuit ICDRT ICDRS ICDRR SDA Output data control cricuit Noise canceller Address comparater SAR, SARX [Legend] ICCR: ICMR: ICSR: ICDR: SCRX: SAR: SARX: PS: I2C control register I2C mode register I2C status register I2C data register Serial control register X Slave address register Slave address register X Prescaler Interrupt generation circuit Figure 14.1 A Block Diagram of the I2C Bus Interface Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 469 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus Interrupt request 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option VCC Vcc SCLin SCLout SDA SDA SCL SCL SDAin SDAout SCL SDA (Master) This LSI SCLin SCLout SCLin SCLout SDAin SDAout (Slave 1) SDAin SDAout (Slave 2) Figure 14.2 Example of the Connection of I2C Bus Interfaces (This LSI Is the Master Device) 14.2 Input/Output Pins The I/O pins of the I2C bus interface are listed in table 14.1. Table 14.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 Note: * Pin Name* SCL0 SDA0 I/O I/O I/O Function Serial clock I/O pin Serial data I/O pin In this manual, these pin names are abbreviated to SCL and SDA, respectively. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 470 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 SCL SDA 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3 Description of Registers The I2C bus interface includes the following registers for each channel. For the addresses of these registers and the states of the registers in each state of processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. Registers ICDR and SARX and registers ICMR and SAR are allocated to the same addresses, and accessible registers differ depending on the state of ICE bit in ICCR. When the ICE bit is 0, SAR and SARX can be accessed, and when the ICE bit is 1, ICMR and ICDR can be accessed. • • • • • • • I2C bus control register (ICCR) I2C bus status register (ICSR) I2C bus data register (ICDR) I2C bus mode register (ICMR) Slave-address register (SAR) Second slave-address register (SARX) Serial control register X (SCRX) I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) 14.3.1 ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that holds the data for transmission during transmission, and holds the received data during reception. Internally, ICDR consists of a shift register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmission buffer (ICDRT). Data is automatically transferred between these three registers according to the bus state; this affects the states of flags, such as the ICDRF flag in SCRX and the internal flag ICDRE. In master transmit mode of the I2C bus format, writing transmit data to ICDR should be performed after start condition is detected. When the start condition is detected, previous write data is ignored. In slave transmit mode, writing should be performed after the slave addresses match and the TRS bit is automatically changed to 1. When I2C is in transmit mode (TRS = 1) and the next transmit data is in ICDRT (the ICDRE flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS after successful transmission of one frame of data using ICDRS. When the ICDRE flag is 1 and the next transmit data writing is waited, data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS by writing to ICDR. In receive mode (TRS = 0), no data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. Note that data should not be written to ICDR in receive mode. Reading receive data from ICDR is performed after data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 471 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option When I2C is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the ICDRF flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR, following reception of one frame of data using ICDRS. When additional data is received while the ICDRF flag is 1, data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR by reading from ICDR. In transmit mode, no data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. Always set I2C to receive mode before reading from ICDR. When, excluding the acknowledge bit, there are fewer than 8 bits in one frame, the alignment of the data for transmission and of received data varies according to the setting of the MLS bit in ICMR. Data for transmission should span the selected number of bits from the MSB when MLS = 0. When MLS is 1, the data should span the selected number of bits from the LSB. Received data is read from the LSB when MLS is 0 and from the MSB when MLS is 1. ICDR is only accessible when the ICE bit in ICCR is set to 1. The ICDR is undefined at reset. 14.3.2 Slave-Address Register (SAR) SAR sets the transfer format and stores the slave address. In slave mode of the I2C bus format, if the FS bit is set to 0 and the upper seven bits of SAR match the upper seven bits of the first frame received after a start condition, this module operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR can be accessed only when the ICE bit in ICCR is set to 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Format Select In conjunction with the FSX bit in SARX, this bit selects the transfer format. See table 14.2. To identify the general call address, this bit should always be set to 0. Description Slave Address 6 to 0 Set slave address. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 472 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3.3 Second Slave-Address Register (SARX) SARX sets the transfer format and stores the second slave address. In slave mode of the I2C bus format, if the FS bit is set to 0 and the upper seven bits of SARX match the upper seven bits of the first frame received after a start condition, this module operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX can be accessed only when the ICE bit in ICCR is set to 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name SVAX6 SVAX5 SVAX4 SVAX3 SVAX2 SVAX1 SVAX0 FSX Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 R/W Description R/W Second Slave Address 6 to 0 R/W Set second slave address. R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Format Select X In conjunction with the FS bit in SAR, this bit selects the transfer format. See table 14.2. Table 14.2 Transfer Format SAR FS 0 SARX FSX 0 Operating Mode I2C bus format • • 1 • • • 1 0 2 Enables the slave addresses in SAR and SARX Enables the general call address Enables the slave address in SAR Disables the slave address in SARX Enables the general call address Disables the slave address in SAR Enables the slave address in SARX Disables the general call address Disables the slave addresses in SAR and SARX Disables the general call address Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 473 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 I2C bus format I C bus format • • • 1 Synchronous serial format • • 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option • I2C bus format: Addressing format with an acknowledge bit • Synchronous serial format: Non-addressing format without an acknowledge bit, and with master operation only 14.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ICMR sets the transfer format and transfer rate. ICMR is only accessible when the ICE bit in ICCR is set to 1. Bit 7 Bit Name MLS Initial Value 0 R/W Description R/W MSB First/LSB First Select 0: MSB first 1: LSB first When this module is used in the I C bus format, this bit should be set to 0. 6 WAIT 0 R/W Wait Insertion This bit is enabled only in master mode of the I C bus format. 0: A wait state is not inserted, and data and the acknowledge bit are transferred consecutively. 1: After the clock for the final bit of the data (8th cycle) become low, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1, and a wait state is entered (with SCL at the low level). Clearing the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0 cancels the wait state. The acknowledge bit is then transferred. For details, refer to section 14.4.7, Timing for Setting IRIC and the Control of SCL. 5 4 3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W Transfer Clock Select 2 to 0 R/W The CKS2 to CKS0 bits, together with the IICX0 bit in R/W SCRX, select the frequency of the transfer clock. This is used in the master mode. See table 14.3. 2 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 474 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name BC2 BC1 BC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W Description R/W Bit Counter R/W These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred R/W in the next transfer. Set the BC2 to BC0 bits in the intervals between the transfer of frames. Set the BC2 to BC0 bits to other than 000 when SCL is low. The bit counter is initialized to 000 on detection of the start condition. In addition, this counter returns to 000 on completion of the transfer of all data. I2C bus format 000: 9 bits 001: 2 bits 010: 3 bits 011: 4 bits 100: 5 bits 101: 6 bits 110: 7 bits 111: 8 bits Synchronous serial format 000: 8 bits 001: 1 bit 010: 2 bits 011: 3 bits 100: 4 bits 101: 5 bits 110: 6 bits 111: 7 bits Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 475 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.3 Setting of the Transfer Rate SCRX Bit5 IICX 0 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Pφ= 10MHz 357kHz 250kHz 208kHz 156kHz 125kHz 100kHz 89.3kHz 78.1kHz 179kHz 125kHz 104kHz 78.1kHz 62.5kHz 50.0kHz 44.6kHz 39.1kHz Pφ= 16MHz 571kHz* 400kHz 333kHz 250kHz 200kHz 160kHz 143kHz 125kHz 286kHz 200kHz 167kHz 125kHz 100kHz 80.0kHz 71.4kHz 62.5kHz Transfer Rate Pφ= 20MHz 714kHz* 500kHz* 417kHz* 313kHz 250kHz 200kHz 179kHz 156kHz 357kHz 250kHz 208kHz 156kHz 125kHz 100kHz 89.3kHz 78.1kHz Pφ= 25MHz 893kHz* 625kHz* 521kHz* 391kHz 313kHz 250kHz 223kHz 195kHz 446kHz* 313kHz 260kHz 195kHz 156kHz 125kHz 112kHz 97.7kHz Pφ= 33MHz Pφ= 40MHz CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Pφ/28 Pφ/40 Pφ/48 Pφ/64 Pφ/80 Pφ/100 Pφ/112 Pφ/128 Pφ/56 Pφ/80 Pφ/96 Pφ/128 Pφ/160 Pφ/200 Pφ/224 Pφ/256 1.18MHz* 1.43MHz* 825kHz* 688kHz* 516kHz* 413kHz* 330kHz 295kHz 258kHz 589kHz* 413kHz* 344kHz 258kHz 206kHz 165kHz 147kHz 129kHz 1.00MHz* 833kHz* 625kHz* 500kHz* 400kHz 357kHz 313kHz 714kHz 500kHz* 417kHz* 313kHz 250kHz 200kHz 177kHz 156kHz 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * Out of the I C bus interface specification (Normal mode: maximum100 kHz, High speed mode: maximum 400 kHz) Due to factors such as load conditions, it may not be possible to obtain the designated transfer rate when the value of IICX is 0 and the peripheral clock φ frequency exceeds 16 MHz. Set IICX to 1 when Pφ is greater than 16 MHz. 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 476 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ICCR controls I2C bus interface and confirms the state of interrupt flag. Bit 7 Bit Name ICE Initial Value 0 R/W Description R/W I2C Bus Interface Enable 0: This module is not operating. The internal state of the I C module is cleared. Access to SAR and SARX is enabled. 1: This module is in its transfer-enabled state 6 IEIC 0 R/W I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable 0: Disables the interrupt from the I C bus interface to the CPU 1: Enables the interrupt from the I C bus interface to the CPU 2 2 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 477 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 5 4 Bit Name MST TRS Initial Value R/W Description 0 0 R/W Master/Slave Select R/W Transmission/Reception Select 00: Slave receive mode 01: Slave transmit mode 10: Master receive mode 11: Master transmit mode Both MST and TRS bits will be cleared by hardware when they lose in a bus contention in master mode of the I2C bus format. The mode changes to slave receive mode. When 2 the I C bus format is used in the slave-receive mode, transmission or reception is automatically selected by the hardware, according to the setting of the R/ W bit of the first frame after the start condition has been satisfied. Even if an attempt is made to change the TRS bit during the transfer of data, the change is suspended until transmission of data has been completed; the bit is then changed. [MST clearing conditions] 1. Writing of 0 to this bit by software 2 2. Lose in a bus contention in master mode of the I C bus format [MST setting conditions] 1. Writing of 1 to this bit by software (MST clearing condition 1) 2. Writing of 1 to this bit after reading MST = 0 (MST clearing condition 2) [TRS clearing conditions] 1. Writing of 0 to this bit by software (except TRS setting condition 3) 2. Writing of 0 to this bit after TRS = 1 is read (TRS setting condition 3) 2 3. Lose in a bus contention in master mode of the I C bus format [TRS setting conditions] 1. Writing of 1 to this bit by software (except TRS clearing condition 3) 2. Writing of 1 to this bit after reading TRS = 0 (TRS clearing condition 3) 3. When 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame 2 address matched in the I C bus format in slave mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 478 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 3 Bit Name ACKE Initial Value 0 R/W Description R/W Enables/Disables Acknowledge Bit 0: The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored to allow the continuous transfer of data. The received value of the acknowledge bits that are received do not affect the ACKB bit; the value in the ACKB bit in ICSR remains at 0. 1: When the value of the acknowledge bits received in 2 the I C bus format is 1, transmission is suspended. The acknowledge bit is used in two different ways, depending on the situation. One case is that the acknowledge bit is used as a kind of flag to indicate whether or not processing for the reception of data has been completed. The other case is that acknowledge bit is fixed to 1. 2 0 BBSY SCP 0 1 R/W Bus Busy W Start/Stop Condition Issuance Disable Master mode: • • Write 0 to BBSY and SCP: Issuing stop condition Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP: Issuing start condition and re-transmitting start condition Slave mode: • Writing to the BBSY flag is disabled [BBSY setting condition] • When SDA changes from high to low while SCL is high, the system regards the start condition as having been set. [BBSY clearing condition] When SDA changes from low to high while SDA is high, the system regards the stop condition as having been set. The start and stop conditions are issued by using the MOV instruction. The I2C bus interface must be set to master transmit mode before the start condition is issued. Before writing 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP, set MST and TRS to 1. The BBSY flag may be read to confirm whether or not 2 the I C bus (SCL, SDA) has been released. The SCP bit is always read as 1. Data is not stored even if 0 is written to the SCP bit. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 479 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 • 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 1 Bit Name IRIC Initial Value R/W 0 Description 2 R/(W)* I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag The IRIC flag indicates that the I C bus interface has generated an interrupt request for the CPU. The timing with which the IRIC flag is set changes according to the combination of the values of the FS bit in SAR, the FSX bit in SARX and the WAIT bit in ICMR. Refer to section 14.4.7, Timing for Setting IRIC and the Control of SCL. In addition, the condition on which the IRIC flag is set changes according to the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR. [Setting conditions] • I C bus format in master mode When the start condition is detected from the bus line state after the start condition has been set. (i.e., when the ICDRE flag is set to 1 for transmission of the first frame). When WAIT = 1, a wait is inserted between the data bits and the acknowledge bit. (i.e., at the falling edge of the 8th transmit/receive clock) When the transfer of data has been completed. (i.e., at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of transmit/receive clock with no wait inserted) When a slave address is received after bus conflict is lost. (i.e., first frame following start condition) When the ACKE bit is 1, and 1 is received as an acknowledge bit. (i.e., when the ACKB bit is set to 1). When the AL flag is set to 1 because of a bus conflict. 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 480 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 1 Bit Name Initial Value R/W IRIC 0 Description I C bus format in the slave mode When a slave address (SVA or SVAX) matches (i.e., when the AAS or AASX flag is set to 1), and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (i.e., at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of transmission or receive clock) When the general call address has been detected (i.e., when 0 is received for R/W and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data reception up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (i.e., at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of receive clock) When the ACKE bit is 1, and 1 is received as an acknowledge bit (i.e., when the ACKB bit is set to 1) When the stop condition is detected while the STOPIM bit is 0 (i.e., when the STOP or the ESTP flag is set to 1) • Synchronous serial format When the transfer of data has been completed (i.e., at the rising edge of the 8th transmit/receive clock) When a start condition is detected with serial format • When a condition occurs in which the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set to 1 in any operating mode. When a start condition is detected in transmit mode (i.e., when a start condition is detected and the ICDRE flag is set to 1 in transmit mode) When transmitting the data in the ICDR register buffer (i.e., when data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDDRS in transmit mode and the ICDRE flag is set to 1, or data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR in receive mode and the ICDRF flag is set to 1.) [Clearing conditions] • • When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1 When ICDR is read or written to by DTC 2 R/(W)* • (This may not be a clearing condition. For details, see the following operation description on DTC.) Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 481 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option When the DTC is used, the IRIC flag is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously without CPU intervention. When the interface is in the I2C bus format and an interrupt is generated so that IRIC becomes 1, other flags must be checked to locate the cause of the IRIC bit becoming 1. Each possible cause has a corresponding flag. Precautions must be taken when the data transfer has been completed. When the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set, the IRTR flag may be set, but in some cases it will not be. In the I2C bus format in the slave mode, the IRTR flag, which is the DTC-activation request flag, is not set during the period between the completion of data transfer after a slave-address (SVA) match or a general call address match and the detection of the stop condition or transmission of the next start condition. Even when the IRIC or IRTR flag has been set, the ICDRE or ICDRF flag may not be set in some cases. When a continuous transfer is performed using the DTC, the IRIC or IRTR flag is not cleared when the specified number of transfers is completed. On the other hand, since the specified number of read/write operations has been completed, the ICDRE or the ICDRF flag will already have been cleared. The relationship between the flags and the various states of transfer is shown in table 14.4 and table 14.5. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 482 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.4 The Relationship between Flags and Transfer States (Master Mode) MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB ICDRF ICDRE State Idle state (flag clearing required) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ⎯ 1 1 1 1 1 0 1↑ 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0↓ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0↓ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 1↑ 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ 0↓ 1 0↓ Start condition detected Wait state Transmission end (ACKE = 1 and ACKB = 1) Transmission end with ICDRE = 0 ICDR write with the above state Transmission end with ICDRE = 1 ICDR write with the above state or after start condition detected 1 1 1 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 1↑ Automatic data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS with the above state 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ 0↓ 1 0↓ 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Reception end with ICDRF = 0 ICDR read with the above state Reception end with ICDRF = 1 ICDR read with the above state Automatic data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR with the above state 0↓ 1 0↓ ⎯ 1 0↓ 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ Arbitration lost Stop condition detected [Legend] 0: 0-state retained 1: 1-state retained ⎯: Previous state retained Cleared to 0 0↓: 1↑: Set to 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 483 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.5 The Relationship between Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode) MST TRS BBSY 0 0 0 ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB ICDRF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ICDRE State 0 Idle state (flag clearing required) 0 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0↓ 0 0 ⎯ 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 1↑ 1↑ 1 Start condition detected SAR match in the first frame (SARX ≠ SAR) 1 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 1↑ 1↑ 0 1↑ 1 General call address match in the first frame (SARX ≠ H'00) 0 1↑/0 1 (* ) 0 1 1 0 0 ⎯ 1↑/0 (*2) 0 1 1 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 0↓ 0 0 ⎯ 0↓ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ 1 1↑/0 1 (* ) 1 0 0 0 0 1↑ 1↑ ⎯ 0 0 0 1↑ 1 SARX match in the first frame (SAR ≠ SARX) Transmission end (ACKE = 1 and ACKB = 1) 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Transmission end with ICDRE = 0 ICDR write with the above state 0 1 1 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 0 ⎯ 1 Transmission end with ICDRE = 1 0 1 1 0 0 ⎯ 1↑/0 (* ) 2 ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 0↓ 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 1↑ ICDR write with the above state 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Automatic data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS in the above state Reception end with ICDRF = 0 ICDR read with the above state 0 0 1 0 0 1↑/0 (*2) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1↑ ⎯ 0 0 1 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 0↓ 0↓ ⎯ 0↓ ⎯ 0 0 1 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1 ⎯ Reception end with ICDRF = 1 0 0 1 0 0 ⎯ 1↑/0 (*2) ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 0↓ 0↓ ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ 1↑ ⎯ ⎯ ICDR read with the above state 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Automatic data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR with the above state Stop condition detected 0 ⎯ 0↓ 1↑/0 (* ) 3 0/1↑ (* ) 3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0↓ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 484 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option [Legend] 0: 0-state retained 1: 1-state retained ⎯: Previous state retained 0: Cleared to 0 1: Set to 1 Notes: 1. Set to 1 when 1 is received as a R/ W bit following an address. 2. Set to 1 when the AASX bit is set to 1. 3. STOP is 0 when ESTP = 1, or ESTP is 0 when STOP = 1. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 485 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ICSR includes flags that indicate bus states. See also table 14.4 and table 14.5. Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value R/W ESTP 0 Description 2 R/(W)* Erroneous Stop Condition Detection Flag This bit is enabled in the I C bus format in the slave mode. [Setting condition] • Detection of the stop condition during the transfer of one frame Writing of 0 to this bit after reading ESTP = 1 Clearing of the IRIC flag to 0 2 [Clearing conditions] • • 6 STOP 0 R/(W)* Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag This bit is enabled in the I C bus format in the slave mode. [Setting condition] • Detection of the stop condition after the transfer of one frame Writing of 0 to this bit after reading STOP = 1 Clearing of the IRIC flag to 0 [Clearing conditions] • • 5 IRTR 0 2 R/(W)* I C Bus Interface Continuous Transfer Interrupt Request Flag The IRTR flag indicates that the I C bus interface has generated an interrupt for the CPU at the end of transmission and reception one frame of data. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the same time as the IRTR flag is set to 1. [Setting conditions] • • Setting of the ICDRE or ICDRF flag to 1 while AASX is 2 1 in the I C bus interface in the slave mode. Setting of the ICDRE or ICDRF flag to 1, when in master mode in I2C bus interface or synchronous serial format Writing of 0 to this bit after reading IRTR = 1 Clearing of the IRIC flag to 0 with ICE = 0 2 [Clearing conditions] • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 486 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W 4 AASX 0 Description 2 R/(W)* Second Slave Address Detection Flag In the I C bus format in the slave mode, this bit indicates that the first frame after the start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX. [Setting condition] • Detection of the second slave address in the slave receive mode while FSX = 0. Writing of 0 to this bit after reading AASX = 1 Detection of the start condition. Entering master mode [Clearing conditions] • • • 3 AL 0 R/(W)* Arbitration Lost Flag The AL flag indicates that the device, in master mode, has failed to acquire bus-master status. [Setting conditions] • When the interface is in master transmit mode, the SDA value it is generating internally and the value on the SDA pin do not match on the rising edge of SCL. When the start condition instruction has been executed in master transmit mode, then the SDA is driven to low by another device before drives the pin to low. Writing of data to ICDR (during transmission) or reading of data from ICDR (during reception). Writing a 0 to this bit after reading it as 1 • [Clearing conditions] • • Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 487 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W 2 AAS 0 Description R/(W)* Slave Address Detection Flag When the first frame after the start condition matches the SVA6 to SVA0 bits of SAR or when the general-call address (H'00) is 2 detected in the I C bus format in the slave receive mode. [Setting condition] • Detection of the slave address or general call address (one frame, including the R/W bit, is H'00) while in the slavereceive mode and FS = 0. Writing of data to ICDR (during transmission) or reading of data from ICDR (during reception) Writing of 0 to this bit after reading it as 1 Entering the master mode 2 [Clearing conditions] • • • 1 ADZ 0 R/(W)* General Call Address Detection Flag In the I C bus format in the slave-reception mode, the general-call address (H'00) is detected in the first frame after the start condition. [Setting condition] • Detection of the general call address (one frame, including R/W bit, is H'00) in the slave-receive mode (FSX = 0 or FS = 0). Writing of data to ICDR (during transmission) or reading of data from ICDR (during reception). Writing 0 to this bit after reading it as 1 Entering the master mode [Clearing conditions] • • • When the general call address is detected while FS = 1 and FSX = 0, the ADZ flag is set to 1 but the general call address is not identified (the AAS flag is not set to 1). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 488 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W ACKB 0 R/W Description Acknowledge This bit stores the acknowledgements. Transmit mode: [Setting condition] • Reception of 1 as an acknowledge bit when ACKE is 1 in transmit mode. Reception of 0 as an acknowledge bit when ACKE is 1 in transmit mode. Writing 0 to the ACKE bit [Clearing conditions] • • Receive mode: 0: After reception of data, 0 is output as acknowledge data 1: After reception of data, 1 is output as acknowledge data When this bit is read, the value that was loaded here (the value returned from the receiving device) is read during transmission (TRS = 1). During receive operations (TRS = 0), the value that was set is read. When this bit is written, acknowledge data that is returned after receiving is rewritten regardless of the TRS value. If the ICSR register flag is written using bit-manipulation instructions, the acknowledge data should be set again since the acknowledge data setting is rewritten by the reading value of ACKB bit. Write the ACKE bit to 0 to clear the ACKB flag to 0, before transmission is ended and a stop condition is issued in master mode, or before transmission is ended and SDA is released to issue a stop condition by a master device. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 489 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX) SCRX enables or disables I2C bus interface interrupts and confirms the state of reception and transmission. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name ⎯ Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 5 IICX 0 R/W I2C Transfer Rate Select Along with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in the I C bus mode register (ICMR), this bit selects the transfer rate in the master mode. For details on setting the transfer rate, see table 14.3. 4 IICE 0 R/W I2C master Enable This bit controls access by the CPU to the I C bus interface registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, and 2 ICMR/SAR) of the I C bus interface. 0: Disables CPU access to the registers of the I C bus interface. 1: Enables CPU access to the registers of the I C bus interface. 3 HNDS 0 R/W Hand-Shake Receive Select This bit enables/disables continuous reception in receive mode. When the HNDS bit is cleared to 0, receive operation is performed continuously after data has been received successfully while ICDRF flag is 0. When the HNDS bit is set to 1, SCL is fixed to the low level thus disabling the next data to be transferred. The bus line is released and next frame receive operation is enabled by reading the receive data in ICDR. 2 ⎯ 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 2 2 2 2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 490 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Bit 1 Bit Name ICDRF0 Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Receive Data Read Request Flag Indicates the ICDR (ICDRR) state in receive mode. 0: Indicates that the data has already been read from ICDR (ICDRR) or ICDR is initialized. 1: Indicates that data has been received successfully and transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR, and the data is not read yet. [Setting condition] • When data is received successfully and transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. A. When data is received successfully while ICDRF = 0 (at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock). B. When ICDR is read in receive mode after data was received while ICDRF = 1. [Clearing conditions] • • When ICDR (ICDRR) is read. When 0 is written to the ICE bit. Due to the condition B above, ICDRF is temporarily cleared to 0 when ICDR (ICDRR) is read; however, since data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR immediately, ICDRF is set to 1 again. Note that ICDR cannot be read successfully in transmit mode (TRS = 1) because data is not transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. Read data from ICDR in receive mode (TRS = 0) to read data in ICDR. 0 STOPIM 0 R/W Stop Condition Detected Interrupt Mask This bit enables/disables the issuing of stop-condition2 detected interrupt requests in the I C bus format in the slave mode. 0: This setting enables the IRIC flag setting and the stop-condition-detected interrupt requests 2 (STOP = 1 or ESTP = 1) in the I C bus format in slave mode. 1: This setting disables the IRIC flag setting or the 2 stop-condition-detected interrupt requests in the I C bus format in slave mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 491 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.3.8 ICDRE Flag (Internal Flag) The ICDRE flag is set and cleared under the conditions as shown below. Since the ICDRE flag is an internal flag, it cannot be accessed. Bit Name ICDRE Initial Value 0 Description Transmit Data Write Request Flag This flag is an internal flag that indicates the ICDR (ICDRT) state in transmission mode. 0: Indicates that the data to be transmitted has been already written to ICDR (ICDRT) or ICDR is initialized. 1: Indicates that data has been transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and is being transmitted, or the start condition has been detected or transmission has been completed, thus allowing the next data to be written to. [Setting conditions] • • When the start condition is detected from the bus line state in I C bus format or serial format. When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. A. When data transmission is completed while ICDRE =0 (at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock). B. When ICDR is written to in transmit mode after data transmission is completed while ICDRE = 1. [Clearing conditions] • • • When transmit data is written to ICDR (ICDRT). When the stop condition is detected in I2C bus format or serial format. When 0 is written to the ICE bit. 2 2 Note that if the ACKE bit is set to 1 in I C bus format thus enabling acknowledge bit decision, ICDRE is not set when data transmission is completed while the acknowledge bit is 1. Due to the set condition B above, ICDRE is temporarily cleared to 0 when data is written to ICDR (ICDRT); however, since data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS immediately, ICDRE is set to 1 again. Do not write data to ICDR when TRS = 0 because the ICDRE flag value is invalid during the time. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 492 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4 Operation The I2C bus interface is capable of transferring data in either the serial format or the I2C bus format. 14.4.1 I2C Bus Data Formats The I2C bus format is referred to as an addressing format. The transfer of data in this addressing format includes the transfer of acknowledge bits. This is shown in figure 14.3. The first frame after the start condition always consists of nine bits. The serial format is referred to as a ‘non-addressing format’. The transfer of data in this nonaddressing format does not include the transfer of an acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 14.4. The I2C bus timing is shown in figure 14.5. The symbols used in figures 14.3 to 14.5 are described in table 14.6. (a) FS=0 or FSX=0 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 P 1 Number of bits being transferred (n=1 to 8) Number of frames being transferred (m=1 or above) (b) When the start condition is re-transmitted, FS=0 or FSX=0 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/A 1 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 A/A 1 P 1 Upper: Number of bits being transferred (n=1, n2=1 to 8) Lower: Number of frames being transferred (m=1, m2=1 or above) Figure 14.3 I2C Bus Data Format (I2C Bus Format) FS=1 and FSX=1 S 1 DATA 8 1 DATA n m P 1 Number of bits being transferred (n=1 to 8) Number of frames being transferred (m=1 or above) Figure 14.4 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 493 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option SDA SCL 1-7 S SLA 8 R/W 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A/A P Figure 14.5 I2C Bus Timing Table 14.6 I2C Bus Data Format: Description of Symbols S SLA R/W This represents the start condition. The master device changes the level on SDA from high to low while SCL is high. This represents the slave address. The master device sends this to select the slave device. This represents the direction of transmission/reception. When the R/W bit is 1, data is transferred from the slave to the master device. When the R/W bit is 0, data is transferred from the master to the slave device. This represents an acknowledgement. The receiving device sends this acknowledge bit by setting the level on SDA to low (during master transmission, the slave returns the acknowledge bits; during master reception, the master returns the acknowledge bits). This represents the transfer of data. The amount of bits to be transferred in each such operation is set by the BC2 to BC0 bits of ICMR. The MLS bit in ICMR determines whether the data is transferred MSB first or LSB first. This represents the stop condition. The master device changes the level on SDA from low to high while SCL is high. A DATA P Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 494 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.2 Initialization Initialize the IIC following the procedure shown below before starting the data transmission or reception. Initialization start Set MSTP21 = 0 (MSTCR1) Cancel module stop mode Enable the CPU access to the IIC control registerand data register. Enable SAR and SARX to be accessed Set the first slave address, second slave address,and IIC transfer format (SVA6 to SVA0, FS, SVAX6 to SVAX0, FSX) Enable ICMR and ICDR to be accessed Set IICE = 1 (SCRX) Set ICE = 0 (ICCR) Set SAR, SARX Set ICE = 1 (ICCR) Set PBCR1, PBCR2 Use SCL/SDA pin as an I2C port Set acknowledge bit (ACKB) Set transfer rate (IICX) Set transfer format, wait insertion, and transfer rate (MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0) Enable interrupt (STOPIM and HNDS) Set interrupt enable, transfer mode, and acknowledge decision (IEIC, MST, TRS, and ACKE) Set ICSR Set SCRX Set ICMR Set SCRX Set ICCR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 0? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Figure 14.6 An Example of IIC Initialization Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 495 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Note: The ICMR register should be modified after transmit/receive operation has been completed. If the ICMR register is modified during transmit/receive operation, bit counter BC2 to BC0 will be modified illegally, thus causing malfunction. 14.4.3 Operations in Master Transmission In I2C bus format in the master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and data for transmission, and the slave device acknowledges its reception of data. Figure 14.7 is a flowchart that gives an example of operations in master transmit mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 496 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Start Initial setting Read the BBSY flag in ICCR [1] Initial setting No [2] Determine the states of the SCL and SDA lines. BBSY = 0? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 (ICCR) Write BBSY= 1 and SCP = 0 (ICCR) Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [3] Set master transmit mode [4] Start condition issuance No [5] Wait for the start condition generation IRIC = 1? Yes Write transmit data to ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/ W) (After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC sequentially) No IRIC = 1? [7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Yes Read the ACKB bit in ICSR ACKB = 0? [8] Determine the acknowledge bit transferred from the specified slave device. No Yes Transmit mode? No Master receive mode Yes Write data for transmission to ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. [9] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. (After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC sequentially) No IRIC = 1? Yes Read the ACKB bit in ICSR Transmission completed? (ACKB = 1?) [11] Determine the end of transfer No Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Write 0 to the ACKE bit in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 (ICCR) End [12] Stop condition issua Figure 14.7 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Master Transmit Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 497 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The following description gives the procedures to transmit data serially in synchronization with ICDR (ICDRT) writing operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform initialization according to the procedure described in section 14.4.2, Initialization. Confirm that the bus is free by reading the BBSY flag in ICCR. Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR to 1 to select the master transmit mode. Then write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This changes the level on SDA from high to low while SCL is high, and is thus the generation of the start condition. 5. With the generation of the start condition, the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. When the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is generated for the CPU. 6. Write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR after the start condition is detected. In the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W). To determine the end of the transfer, the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC continuously in order that no other interrupt processing is executed. If the time for transmission of one frame of data has passed before the IRIC flag clearing, the end of transmission cannot be determined. The master device transmits the transmit clock signal and the data written in the ICDR. To acknowledge its selection, the slave device that has been selected (that matches the slave address) sets the level on SDA low in the 9th cycle of the transmit clock. 7. When the transmission of one frame has been completed, the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the transmit clock. The level on SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next data for transmission has been written to ICDR. 8. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm ACKB = 0. When the slave device does not return acknowledgement and ACKB = 1, execute transmit end processing in step 12 and carry out transmission again. 9. Write the transmit data to ICDR. The IRIC flag is cleared to 0 to determine the end of the transfer. Perform the ICDR writing and the IRIC flag clearing sequentially as in step 6. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the internal clock. 10. When the transmission of one frame has been completed, the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the transmit clock. The level on SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next data for transmission has been written to ICDR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 498 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 11. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR. Confirm that the slave device returns acknowledgement (ACKB bit is 0). When there is still data to be transmitted, go to step 9 to continue the next transmission. When the slave device does not return acknowledgement (ACKB bit is set to 1), follow step 12 to end transmission. 12. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Write 0 to the ACKE bit in ICCR, to clear the received ACKB bit to 0. Write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Start condition generation SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) ICDRE Interrupt request generation Interrupt request generation 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 Slave address [5] R/W [7] A Data 1 IRIC IRTR ICDRT Address + R/W Address + R/W Data 1 ICDRS Data 1 Note: Data should not be written to ICDR. User processing [4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP (start condition issuance) [6] ICDR write [6] IRIC clear [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear Figure 14.8 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 499 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Stop condition generation SCL (Master output) 8 9 1 bit 7 [7] A 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [10] A 9 SDA bit 0 (Master output) Data 1 SDA (Slave output) ICDRE Data 2 IRIC IRTR ICDR Data 1 Data 2 User processing [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear [11] ACKB read [12] IRIC clear [12] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP (stop condition issuance) Figure 14.9 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 500 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.4 Operations in Master Reception In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns acknowledgements of reception. The slave device transmits the data. The master device transmits data of the slave address + R/W (1: Read) in the first frame after start condition issuance in master transmit mode. After the slave device is selected, operation is changed to reception. Reception with HNDS Function (HNDS = 1): Figure 14.10 is a flowchart that gives an example of operations in master receive mode (HNDS = 1). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 501 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 (ICCR) Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) Set HNDS = 1 (SCRX) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [1] Set receive mode Final reception? No Read ICDR Yes [2] Dummy read for starting reception (first read) [5] Read the receive data (second and subsequent read) Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [3] Wait for 1 byte of data to be received. (Set IRIC at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock for the receive frame.) [4] Clear IRIC flag. Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR) Read ICDR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No [6] Set acknowledge data for the final reception. [7] Read the receive data. Dummy read for starting reception when the first frame is the final receive data. [8] Wait for 1 byte of data to be received. IRIC = 1? [9] Clear IRIC flag [10] Read the receive data. Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Set TRS = 1 (ICCR) Read ICDR Write 0 to BBSY and SCP (ICCR) End [11] Set stop condition issuance. Generate stop condition. Figure 14.10 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Master Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 502 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The following description gives the procedures for and operations of receiving data in one byte units by fixing SCL low for every data reception using the HNDS bit function. 1. Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to change from the transmit mode to the receive mode. Clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (setting of the acknowledge data). Set the HNDS bit in SCRX to 1. Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to confirm that reception has been completed. When the first frame is the final receive data, perform end processing in step 6 and subsequent steps. 2. When ICDR is read (a dummy read operation), the receiving of data starts; the receive clock is output in synchronization with the internal clock, and the first datum is then received. (Data of the SDA pin is stored in ICDRS in synchronization with the rising edge of receive clock.) 3. The master device sets SDA to low on the 9th cycle of the receive clock and returns the acknowledge bit. The receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the receive clock, and the ICDRF, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set to 1. When the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is generated for the CPU. The master devise fixes SCL low between at the falling edge of 9th cycle of the receive clock and read of ICDR data. 4. To identify the next interrupt, the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. When the next frame is the final receive data, perform end processing in step 6 and subsequent steps. 5. Read the receive data of ICDR. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0, and the master devise outputs the receive clock continuously for the reception of the next data. Data can be received by repeating the steps 3 to 5. 6. Set the ACKB bit to 1 (setting of acknowledge data for the final reception). 7. Read ICDR receive data. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. The master device outputs the receive clock to receive data. 8. When one frame of data has been received, the ICDRF, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set to 1 at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of receive clock. 9. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. 10. Read ICDR receives data after setting the TRS bit to 1. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. 11. Write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR to generate the stop condition. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 503 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Master transmit mode Master receive mode SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL (Master output) SDA (Slave output) SDA (Master output) IRIC IRTR ICDRF ICDRR Undefined Data 1 9 A 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [3] A SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 Data 1 Data 2 User processing [1] Clear TRS to 0 [2] ICDR read (dummy read) [4] IRIC clear [5] ICDR read (data 1) [1] IRIC clear Figure 14.11 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) Stop condition generation SCL is fixed low until stop condition is issued 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [8] A 9 SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL (Master output) SDA (Slave output) SDA (Master output) IRIC IRTR ICDRF ICDRR Data 1 [4] IRIC clear [7] ICDR read (data 2) Data 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [3] A 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 Data 2 Data 3 Data 3 User processing [9] IRIC clear [6] Set ACKB to 1 [11] Write 0 to BBSY and SCP (stop condition instruction issuance) [10] ICDR read (data 3) Figure 14.12 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) Receive Operation with Wait: Figure 14.13 and figure 14.14 are flowcharts that give examples of operations (WAIT = 1) in master receive mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 504 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 (ICCR) Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) Set HNDS = 0 (SCRX) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Set WAIT = 1 (ICMR) Read ICDR [2] Start receiving. Dummy read. [3] Wait for a receive wait (set IRIC at the falling edge of the 8th cycle) or, wait for 1 byte to be received (set IRIC at the rising edge of the 9th cycle). [4] Determine the end of data reception. IRTR = 1? Yes Final reception? No Read ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [5] Read the receive data. [6] Clear the IRIC flag (to cancel wait). Yes [1] Set receive mode. Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes No Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR) Wait for 1 cycle Set TRS = 1 (ICCR) Read ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [7] Set acknowledge data for the final reception. [8] Wait for TRS setting. [9] Set TRS for stop condition issuance. [10] Read the receive data. [11] Clear the IRIC flag (to cancel wait). [12] Wait for a receive wait (set IRIC at the falling edge of the 8th cycle) or, wait for 1 byte to be received (set IRIC at the rising edge of the 9th cycle). [13] Determine the end of data reception. Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes IRTR = 1? No Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Yes [14] Clear the IRIC flag (to cancel wait). Set WAIT = 0 (ICMR) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read ICDR Write 0 to BBSY and SCP (ICCR) End [15] Cancel wait mode. Clear the IRIC flag. (IRIC should be cleared to 0 after setting WAIT = 0) [16] Read final receive data. [17] Issue stop condition. Figure 14.13 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Master Receive Mode (Multiple Bytes Reception) (WAIT = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 505 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 (ICCR) Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) Set HNDS = 0 (SCRX) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Set WAIT = 1 (ICMR) Read ICDR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [2] Start receiving. Dummy read. [3] Wait for a receive wait (set IRIC at the falling edge of the 8th cycle). [1] Set receive mode. No IRIC = 1? Yes Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR) Set TRS = 1 (ICCR) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [7] Set acknowledge data for the final reception. [9] Set TRS for stop condition issuance. [11] Clear the IRIC flag (to cancel wait). Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [12] Wait for 1 byte to be received (set IRIC at the rising edge of the 9th cycle). No IRIC = 1? Yes Set WAIT = 0 (ICMR) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read ICDR Write 0 to BBSY and SCP (ICCR) [16] Read the final receive data. [15] Cancel wait mode. Clear the IRIC flag. (IRIC should be cleared to 0 after setting WAIT = 0) [17] Issue stop condition End Figure 14.14 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Master Receive Mode (One Byte Reception) (WAIT = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 506 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The following description gives the procedures to receive data serially in synchronization with ICDR (ICDRR) reading operation using wait operation (WAIT bit). The following description gives the procedures to receive multiple bytes. For the operation of receiving only one byte, see the flowchart in figure 14.14, since some procedures are omitted in the following description. 1. Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to change from the transmit mode to the receive mode. Clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (setting of the acknowledge data). Clear the HNDS bit in SCRX to 0 (canceling of the hand-shake function). Clear the IRIC flag to 0, and then set the WAIT bit to 1. 2. When ICDR is read (a dummy read operation), the receiving of data starts; the receive clock is output in synchronization with the internal clock, and the first datum is then received. 3. The IRIC flag is set to 1 according to the following two. In this case, if the IEIC bit in ICCR is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. A. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the falling edge of the 8th cycle of one frame of the receive clock. The SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. B. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of one frame of the receive clock. The IRTR and ICDRF flags are set to 1, indicating that one frame of data has been completely received. The master device continues outputting the receive clock for the next receive data. 4. Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. When the IRTR flag is 0, cancel the wait operation by clearing the IRIC flag as described in step 6. When the IRTR flag is 1 and the next data to be received is the final data, perform the end operation described in step 7. 5. When the IRTR flag is 1, read the receive data in ICDR. 6. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. In the case of step 3 A, the master devise outputs the 9th cycle of the receive clock, drives the SDA to low, and returns acknowledgement. Data can be received by repeating steps 3 to 6. 7. Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 and set the acknowledge data for the final reception. 8. Wait for at least one cycle of clock and the first cycle of the next receive data rises since the IRIC flag is set to 1. 9. Change the mode from receive to transmit by setting the TRS bit in ICCR to 1. The set value of the TRS bit becomes valid after the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock is input. 10. Read the receive data in ICDR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 507 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 11. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. 12. The IRIC flag is set to 1 according to the following two conditions. A. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the falling edge of the 8th cycle of one frame of the receive clock. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. B. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of one frame of the receive clock. The IRTR and ICDRF flags are set to 1, indicating that one frame of data have been completely received. The master devise continues outputting the receive clock for the next receive data. 13. Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. When the IRTR flag is 0, cancel wait mode by clearing the IRIC flag as described in step 14. When the IRTR flag is 1 and the receive operation has been completed, issue the stop condition as described in step 15. 14. When the IRTR flag is 0, clear the IRIC flag to 0 to cancel the wait operation. To detect the completion of receive operation, go back to step 12 and read the IRIC flag. 15. Clear the WAIT bit in ICMR to 0 to cancel the wait mode, and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. Clear the IRIC flag while WAIT is 0. (If the stop condition issuance instruction is executed by clearing the WAIT bit to 0 after clearing the IRIC flag to 0, the stop condition may not be output normally.) 16. Read the final receive data in ICDR. 17. Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 to ICCR. When SCL is high, SDA is driven from low to high, and the stop condition is generated. Master transmit mode SCL (Master output) SDA (Slave output) SDA (Master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR [4] IRTR=0 [4] IRTR=1 Data 1 9 A Master receive mode 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [3] A [3] 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 Data 1 Data 2 User processing [1] Clear TRS [2] ICDR read (dummy read) and IRIC to 0 [5] ICDR read (data 1) [6] IRIC clear (wait cancelled) [6] IRIC clear Figure 14.15 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 508 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option [8] Wait time for one cycle Stop condition generation SCL (Master output) 8 9 1 bit 7 [3] A [3] 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 [12] A [12] 9 SDA bit 0 (Slave data output) Data 2 SDA (Master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR Data 3 [4] IRTR=0 Data 1 [4] IRTR=1 Data 2 [13] IRTR=0 [13] IRTR=1 Data 3 User processing [6] IRIC clear [11] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (data 2) [9] Set TRS to 1 [14] IRIC clear [15] Clear WAIT to 0, IRIC clear [17] Stop condition issuance [16] ICDR read (data 3) [7] Set ACKB to 1 Figure 14.16 An Example of the Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) 14.4.5 Operations in Slave Reception In the slave receive mode of the I2C bus format, the master device transmits the transmit clock and data, and the slave device returns acknowledgements of reception. The slave device compares the address of the slave address and the slave address of the first frame issued after the start condition issuance by the master device. If the addresses match, the slave device operates as a slave device specified by the master device. Reception with HNDS Function (HNDS = 1): Figure 14.17 is a flowchart that gives an example of operations in slave receive mode (HNDS = 1). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 509 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Start Set initial value Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 (ICCR) [1] Initial setting. Set slave receive mode. Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) and HNDS = 1 (SCRX) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR ICDRF = 1? No [2] Read remained receive data. Yes Read ICDR and clear IRIC Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [3] to [7] Wait for one byte to be received (slave address + R/W). No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read AASX, AAS, and ADZ flags in ICSR [8] Clear the IRIC flag. AAS = 1 and ADZ = 1? Yes General call address processing No Read the TRS bit in ICCR TRS = 1? * Description omitted Yes Slave transmit mode No Yes Final reception? No Read ICDR [10] Read receive data. The first read is a dummy read. [5] to [7] Wait for completion of reception. Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [8] Clear the IRIC flag. Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR) Read ICDR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [9] Set acknowledge data for the final reception. [10] Read receive data. [11] Detect stop condition. No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR End [12] Clear the IRIC flag. Figure 14.17 Example: Flowchart of Operations in the Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 510 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The following description gives the procedures for and operations of receiving data in one byte units by fixing SCL low for every data reception using the HNDS bit function. 1. Perform initialization according to the procedure described in section 14.4.2, Initialization. Set slave receive mode by clearing the MST and TRS bits to 0. Set the HNDS bit to 1 and the ACKB bit to 0. To confirm the receive completion, clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. 2. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is 0. If the ICDRF flag is set to 1, read ICDR and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 3. When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. The master device then outputs the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W) data in synchronization with the transmit clock pulses. 4. When the slave address matches the address in the first frame following the start condition generation, the slave device operates as the slave devise specified by the master device. When the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit remains 0 and slave receive operation is performed. When the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1 and slave transmit operation is performed. When addresses do not match, data receive operation is not performed until the next start condition is detected. 5. The slave devise returns the data set in the ACKB bit as an acknowledgement at the 9th cycle of the receive frame of the clock. 6. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the 9th cycle of the clock. At this time, if the IEIC bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated for the CPU. If the AASX bit is also set to 1, the IRTR flag is set to 1. 7. At the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock, the receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and the ICDRF flag is set to 1. The slave device keeps SCL low from the falling edge of the 9th cycle of the receive clock until data in ICDR is read. 8. Confirm that the STOP bit is cleared to 0, and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 9. When the next frame is the final receive flame, clear the ACKB bit to 1. 10. After ICDR has been read, the ICDRF flag is cleared to 0 and the SCL bus line is released. This enables master device to transfer the next data. Receive operation can be continued by repeating steps 5 to 10. 11. After the stop condition (when SCL is high, the SDA is changed from low to high) is detected, the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 and the STOP bit is set to 1. At this time, if the STOPIM bit is cleared to 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. 12. Confirm that the STOP bit is set to 1, and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 511 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Start condition generation [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL (Pin waveform) SCL (Master output) SCL (Slave output) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 1 1 2 2 SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 R/W [6] bit 7 bit 6 Data 1 Slave address A Interrupt request generation IRIC ICDRF ICDRS Address + R/W ICDRR Undefined value Address + R/W User processing [2] ICDR read [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (dummy read) Figure 14.18 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 1 (MLS = 0, HNDS = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 512 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Stop condition generation [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Master output) Data (n -1) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit 0 [6] bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 Data (n -1) bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 [6] [11] SDA (Slave output) A A IRIC ICDRF ICDRS Data (n -1) Data (n) ICDRR Data (n -2) Data (n -1) Data (n) User processing [10] ICDR read (Data (n -1)) [8] IRIC clear [9] Set ACKB to 1 [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (Data (n)) [12] IRIC clear Figure 14.19 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 2 (MLS = 0, HNDS = 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 513 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Continuous Receive Operation: Figure 14.20 is a flowchart that gives an example of operations in slave receive mode (HNDS = 0). Start Initial setting Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 (ICCR) Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) Set HNDS = 0 (SCRX) Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR ICDRF = 1? Yes Read ICDR No [1] Initial setting. Set slave receive mode. [2] Read remained receive data. Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No [3] to [7] Wait for one byte to be received (slave address + R/W) (IRIC is set at the 9th cycle of the clock). IRIC = 1? [8] Clear the IRIC flag. Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read AASX, AAS, and ADZ flags in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ =1? Yes General call address processing * Description omitted No Read the TRS bit in ICCR TRS = 1? No Yes Slave transmit mode Receive (n -2)th byte? Yes No * n: Address + all receive byte Wait for one frame Set ACKB = 1 (ICSR) No [9] Wait for ACKB setting and set acknowledge data for the final reception (after the rise of the 9th cycle of (n-1)th byte data). [10] Read receive data. The first read is a dummy read. ICDRF = 1? Yes Read ICDR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR No [11] Wait for one byte to be received (IRIC is set at the 9 th cycle of the clock) IRIC = 1? Yes ESTP = 1 or STOP = 1? No Yes [12] Stop condition is detected Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR [13] Clear the IRIC flag. ICDRF = 1? Yes No [14] Read final receive data. Read ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR End [15] Clear the IRIC flag. Figure 14.20 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode (HNDS = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 514 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option The following description gives the procedures for and operations of receiving data in slave receive mode. 1. Perform initialization according to the procedure described in section 14.4.2, Initialization. Set slave receive mode by clearing the MST and TRS bits to 0. Set the HNDS and ACKB bits to 0. To confirm the receive completion, clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. 2. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is 0. If the ICDRF flag is set to 1, read ICDR and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 3. When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. The master device then outputs the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W) data in synchronization with the transmit clock pulses. 4. When the slave address matches the address in the first frame following the start condition generation, the slave device operates as the slave devise specified by the master device. When the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit remains 0 and slave receive operation is performed. When the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1 and slave transmit operation is performed. When addresses do not match, data receive operation is not performed until the next start condition is detected. 5. The slave devise returns the data set in the ACKB bit as an acknowledgement at the 9th cycle of the receive frame of the clock. 6. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the 9th cycle of the clock. At this time, if the IEIC bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated for the CPU. If the AASX bit is also set to 1, the IRTR flag is set to 1. 7. At the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock, the receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and the ICDRF flag is set to 1. 8. Confirm that the STOP bit is cleared to 0, and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 9. When the data to be read next is in two frames before the final receive frame, ensure at least one frame of wait time. Set the ACKB bit to 1 after the 9th cycle of the receive frame preceding the final receive frame. 10. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is set to 1, and then read ICDR. After ICDR has been read, the ICDRF flag is cleared to 0. 11. If the receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock or ICDR read, IRIC and ICDRF flags are set to 1. 12. After the stop condition (when SCL is high, the SDA is changed from low to high) is detected, the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 and the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1. At this time, if the STOPIM bit is cleared to 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. In this case, read the final receive data as described in step 14. 13. Clear IRIC flag to 0. Receive operation can be continued by repeating steps 9 to 13 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 515 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is set to 1, and then read ICDR. 15. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Start condition issuance SCL (Master output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 7 [6] bit 6 bit 5 Data 1 bit 4 Slave address R/W A IRIC ICDRF ICDRS Address + R/W [ 7] Data 1 ICDRR Address + R/W User processing [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read Figure 14.21 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 1 (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 516 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Stop condition detection SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) IRIC 8 bit 0 [11] A 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 [11] A bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 Data (n) bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 [11] [12] A Data (n-2) Data (n-1) ICDRF ICDRS Data (n-2) Data (n-1) Data (n) ICDRR Data (n-2) [9] Wait time for one frame Data (n-1) Data (n) User processing [13] IRIC clear [13] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (Data (n -1)) [10] ICDR read (Data (n -2)) [9] Set 1 to ACKB [13] IRIC clear [14] ICDR read (Data (n)) [15] IRIC clear Figure 14.22 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Receive Mode 2 (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 517 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.6 Operations in Slave Transmission When the address of the slave device matches the address which the master device transfers in the first frame (address receive frame) after start condition detection in slave receive mode, and the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 1 (read), the TRS bit in ICCR is automatically set to 1 and slave transmit mode is entered. Figure 14.23 is a flowchart that gives as example of operations in slave transmit mode. Slave transmit mode Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Write transmit data to ICDR Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [3], [4] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. [1], [2] If the slave address matches the address in the first frame following the start condition detection and the R/W bit is 1 in slave receive mode, the mode changes to slave transmit mode. [3], [5] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent frames. No IRIC = 1? Yes Read the ACKB bit in ICSR [4] Determine end of transfer. No Transmission completed? (ACKB = 1?) Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR Set ACKE to 0 (ICCR) (Clear ACKB to 0) Set TRS to 0 (ICCR) Read ICDR Read the IRIC flag in ICCR [6] Clear the IRIC flag. [7] Clear acknowledge bit data. [8] Set slave receive mode. [9] Dummy read (to release the SCL line). [10] Wait for stop condition No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR End Figure 14.23 Example: Flowchart of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 518 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option In the slave transmit mode, the slave device transmits data while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns acknowledgements of reception. The following description gives the procedures for and operations of transmitting in slave transmit mode. 1. Perform initialization of slave receive mode and wait for slave address reception. 2. When the slave address matches the address in the first frame following the start condition detection, the slave device drives SDA to low at the 9th cycle of the clock and returns acknowledgement. When the 8th bit of data (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1 and slave transmit mode is automatically entered. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock. At this time, if the IEIC bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated for the CPU. The ICDRE flag is set to 1. The slave device keeps SCL low to prevent the master device from outputting the next transmit clock from the falling edge of the 9th cycle of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. 3. After the IRIC flag is cleared to 0, the transmit data is written to ICDR. In this case, the ICDRE flag is cleared to 0. The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the ICDRE and IRIC flags are again set to 1. The slave device sequentially transmits the data transferred to ICDRS, on the basis of the clock from the master device. To detect the completion of transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0. After writing the ICDR register, sequentially clear the IRIC flag so that no other process is inserted. 4. The master device drives SDA to low at the 9th cycle of the transfer frame and returns the acknowledgement. Since the acknowledgement is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, it can be checked whether transfer operation is performed normally. One frame of data transmission is completed and the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the transmit clock. When the ICDRE flag is 0, data written to the ICDR is transferred to ICDRS and one frame of data transmission is started, and then the ICDRE and IRIC flags are again set to 1. If the ICDRE flag is set to 1, SCL is kept low from the falling edge of the 9th cycle of the transmit clock until the data is written to the ICDR. 5. To continue with the transmission, write the next data for transmission to ICDR. In this case, the ICDRE flag is cleared to 0. To detect the completion of transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0. Perform the ICDR register writing and the IRIC flag clearing sequentially so that no other process is inserted. Transmission can be continued by repeating steps 4 and 5. 6. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. 7. To end the transmission, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR and the acknowledge bit stored in the ACKB bit to 0. 8. For the next address reception, clear the TRS bit to 0 and enter slave receive mode. 9. To release SDA on the slave side, dummy read ICDR. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 519 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 10. When SCL is high and the stop condition is detected due to the change of SDA from low to high, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0 and the STOP flag in ICSR is set to 1. When the STOPIM bit in ICXR is 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. When the IRIC flag is set to 1, clear the flag to 0. Slave receive mode SCL (Master output) SDA (Slave output) Slave transmit mode 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 A bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 Data 1 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 [4] bit 7 bit 6 [2] SDA (Master output) R/W Data 2 A IRIC ICDRE ICDR Data 1 [3] IRIC clear [3] ICDR write [3] IRIC clear Data 2 User processing [5] IRIC clear [5] ICDR write Figure 14.24 An Example of the Timing of Operations in Slave Transmit Mode (MLS = 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 520 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.7 Timing for Setting IRIC and the Control of SCL The timing with which the interrupt-request flag (IRIC) is set varies according to the settings of the WAIT bit in ICMR, FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. When the ICDRE and ICDRF flags are set to 1, the level on SCL is automatically set low in synchronization with the internal clock after the transfer of one frame of data. Figures 14.25 to 14.27 show the timing with which IRIC is set and the control of SCL. When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait) SCL 7 8 9 1 2 3 SDA 7 8 A 1 2 3 IRIC User processing IRIC clear (a) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 0 at transmission, or ICDRF = 0 at reception. SCL 7 8 9 1 SDA 7 8 A 1 IRIC User processing IRIC clear ICDR write (during transmission) or ICDR read (during reception) IRIC clear (b) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 1 at transmission, or ICDRF = 1 at reception Figure 14.25 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 521 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted) SCL 8 9 1 2 3 SDA 8 A 1 2 3 IRIC User processing IRIC clear IRIC clear (a) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 0 at transmission, or ICDRF = 0 at reception. SCL 8 9 1 SDA 8 A 1 IRIC User processing IRIC clear ICDR write (during transmission) or ICDR read (during reception) IRIC clear (b) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 1 at transmission, or ICDRF = 1 at reception. Figure 14.26 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 522 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format) SCL 7 8 1 2 3 4 SDA 7 8 1 2 3 4 IRIC User processing IRIC clear (a) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 0 at transmission, or ICDRF = 0 at reception. SCL 7 8 1 SDA 7 8 1 IRIC User processing IRIC clear ICDR write (during transmission) IRIC clear or ICDR read (during reception) (b) When data transfer ends with ICDRE = 1 at transmission, or ICDRF = 1 at reception. Figure 14.27 IRIC Flag Set Timing and the Control of SCL (3) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 523 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.8 DTC Operation This LSI provides the DTC to allow continuous data transfer. The DTC is initiated when the IRTR flag is set to 1, which is one of the two interrupt flags (IRIC and IRTR). When the ACKE bit is 0, the ICDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set at the end of data transmission regardless of the acknowledge bit value. When the ACKE bit is 1, the ICDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set if data transmission is completed with the acknowledge bit value of 0, or only the IRIC flag is set if data transmission is completed with the acknowledge bit value of 1. When initiated, DTC transfers specified number of bytes, clears the ICDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags to 0. Therefore, no interrupt is generated during continuous data transfer; however, if data transmission is completed with the acknowledge bit value of 1 when the ACKE bit is 1, DTC is not initiated, thus allowing an interrupt to be generated if enabled. The acknowledge bit may indicate specific events such as completion of receive processing for some receiving device, and for other receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be held to 1, indicating no specific event. In the I2C bus format, since the slave device or the direction of transfer is selected by the slave address or the R/W bit, and the acknowledge bit may indicate the end of reception or reception of the final frame, the continuous transfer of data by the DTC must be combined with interruptdriven processing by the CPU. Table 14.7 shows examples of processes in which the DTC is used. For the slave-mode processes, it is assumed that the amount of data to be transferred is defined in advance. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 524 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.7 Examples of Operations in which the DTC Is Used Item Master Transmit Mode Master Receive Mode Slave Transmit Mode Slave Receive Mode CPU reception (ICDR read) Slave address + DTC transmission CPU transmission CPU reception R/W bit (ICDR write) (ICDR write) (ICDR read) transmission/recep tion Dummy data read ⎯ CPU processing (ICDR read) ⎯ ⎯ Main unit data DTC transmission DTC reception transmission/recep (ICDR write) (ICDR read) tion Final frame processing Setting the number of frames of data to be transferred in DTC Unnecessary CPU reception (ICDR read) DTC transmission DTC reception (ICDR write) (ICDR read) Unnecessary Transmission: Number of actual frames of data CPU reception (ICDR read) Reception: Number of actual frames of data Transmission: Reception: Number of actual Number of actual frames of data + 1 frames of data (+1 represents the frame for slave address + R/W bits) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 525 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.4.9 Noise Canceller The states on the SCL and SDA pins are fetched internally via the noise canceller. Figure 14.28 is a block diagram of the noise canceller. The noise canceller consists of a 2-stage latch circuit and match-detection circuit, which are connected in series. The input signal on the SCL pin (or on the SDA pin) is sampled on the system clock; when the two latch outputs match, the given level is then sent to the next stage. If the two values do not match, the existing value is maintained. Sampling clock C SCL input signal or SDA input signal D Latch Q D C Q Latch Match-detection circuit Internal SCL signal or Internal SDA signal System clock period Sampling clock Figure 14.28 Block Diagram of the Noise Canceller 14.4.10 Initialization of Internal State This IIC module has a function for forcible initialization of its internal state if a deadlock occurs during communication. Initialization is executed by clearing ICE bit. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 526 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Scope of Initialization: The initialization executed by this function covers the following items: • ICDRE and ICDRF internal flags • Transmit/receive sequencer and internal operating clock counter • Internal latches for retaining the output state of the SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data output, etc.) The following items are not initialized: • Actual register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, SCRX (except for the ICDRE and ICDRF flags) • Internal latches used to retain register read information for setting/clearing flags in the ICMR, ICCR, and ICSR registers • The value of the ICMR register bit counter (BC2 to BC0) • Generated interrupt sources (interrupt sources transferred to the interrupt controller) Notes on Initialization: • Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared; therefore, flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • Basically, other register flags are not cleared either; therefore, flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • If a flag clearing setting is made during transmission/reception, the IIC module will stop transmitting/receiving at that point and the SCL and SDA pins will be released. When transmission/reception is started again, register initialization, etc., must be carried out as necessary to enable correct communication as a system. The value of the BBSY bit cannot be modified directly by this module clear function, but since pin waveforms with stop condition may be generated depending on the state and release timing of the SCL and SDA pins, causing the BBSY bit to be cleared. Similarly, switching of the state may influence other bits and flags. To prevent problems caused by these factors, the following procedure should be used when initializing the IIC state. 1. Execute initialization of the internal state by clearing the ICE bit. 2. Execute a stop condition issue instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) to clear the BBSY bit to 0, and wait for two transfer rate clock cycles. 3. Re-execute initialization of the internal state by clearing the ICE bit. 4. Initialize (reset) the IIC registers. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 527 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14.5 Usage Notes 1. In master mode, when the instruction that generates the start condition is issued immediately after the instruction that generates the stop condition, neither the start condition nor the stop condition will be correctly output. For the consecutive output of the start condition and stop condition, read the port after issuing the instruction that generates the start condition, and make sure that the levels on both SCL and SDA are low. Then issue the instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not have completely reached its low level when BBSY becomes 1. 2. The following two conditions apply to the start of the next transfer: take note when reading from/writing to ICDR. ⎯ ICE = 1, TRS = 1, and data is written to ICDR (including automatic transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS) ⎯ ICE = 1, TRS = 0, and data is read from ICDR (including automatic transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR) 3. In synchronization with the internal clock, SCL and SDA are output with the timing shown in table 14.8. The timing on the bus is determined by the rise/fall times of the signals, and these are affected by the bus-load’s capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance. Table 14.8 I2C Bus Timing (output of SCL and SDA) Item SCL-output cycle time SCL-output high-pulse width SCL-output low-pulse width SDA-output bus-free time Start-condition-output hold time Output setup time for re-transmission of start condition Setup time for output of the stop condition Setup time for the output of data (master) Setup time for the output of data (slave) Data-output hold time Note: * tSDAHO Symbol tSCLO tSCLHO tSCLLO tBUFO tSTAHO tSTASO tSTOSO tSDASO Output Timing 28 tpcyc to 256 tpcyc 0.5 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO −1 tpcyc 0.5 tSCLO −1 tpcyc 1 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO +2 tpcyc 1 tSCLLO −3 tpcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Remarks 1 tSCLL −(6 tpcyc or 12 ns tpcyc *) 3 tpcyc ns When the IICX is 0, 6 tpcyc. When IICX is 1, 12 tpcyc. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 528 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 4. The SCL and SDA inputs are sampled in synchronization with Pφ. Therefore, the AC timing depends on the period of Pφ cycle tpcyc. When the Pφ frequency does not reach 5 MHz, the AC timing specifications of the I2C bus interface are not satisfied. 5. The SCL rising time tSr is defined as being within 1,000 ns (300 ns in the high-speed mode). The I2C bus interface monitors SCL in the master mode, and communication is synchronized in a bit-by-bit basis. When the rise time tSr (the time required to reach VIH from an initially low level) of SCL exceeds the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the highlevel period of SCL is extended. The time SCL takes to rise is determined by the pull-up resistance and the load capacitance. Therefore, to operate at the specified transfer rate, set the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that each time is within the corresponding value given in table 14.9. Table 14.9 Tolerance of the SCL Rise Time (tSr) Time [ns] I C bus specification (Max.) 1000 2 IICX 0 tpcyc 7.5 tpcyc Standard mode Pφ= 10MHz 750 ← ← ← Pφ= 16MHz 468 ← ← ← Pφ= 20MHz 375 ← 875 ← Pφ= 25MHz 300 ← 700 ← Pφ= 33MHz 227 227 530 ← Pφ= 40MHz 188 188 438 ← High-speed 300 mode 1 17.5 tpcyc Standard mode 1000 High-speed 300 mode 6. The rise and fall times of SCL and SDA are respectively prescribed as being 1000 ns or less and 300 ns or less by the I2C bus specification. The output timing of SCL and SDA for the I2C bus interface of this LSI are described by tpcyc as shown in table 14.8. However, due to the effect of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 14.10 shows the results of calculating the output timing for each available operating frequency, by considering the worst-case rise and fall times. tBUFO does not satisfy the specifications of the I2C bus interface specifications. Take either of the following countermeasures against this problem: A. Ensure that your program provides the required interval (approximately 1 μs) between issuing of the stop condition and of the next start condition. B. Select a slave device with an input timing that permits use with this output timing for connection to the I2C bus. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 529 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option For tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode, the I2C bus interface specification is not satisfied when the worst case for tSr/tSf is assumed. Take one of the following steps: A. Adjust the rise and fall times by changing the pull-up resistors and load capacitance. B. Reduce the transfer rate until the specification is satisfied. C. For connection to the I2C bus, select a slave device with an input timing that permits use with this output timing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 530 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Table 14.10 I2C Bus Timing (when the effect of tSr/tSf Is at its maximum) Time (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] Effect I C bus Pφ= Pφ= Pφ= Pφ= Pφ= of tSr/tSf specification Pφ= 10MHz 16MHz 20MHz 25MHz 33MHz 40MHz (max) (min) Standard mode High-speed -300 mode tSCLLO 0.5 tSCLO (−tSf) Standard mode -250 600 950 950 950 950 950 950 -1000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 2 Item tSCLHO tpcyc 0.5 tSCLO (−tSr) 4700 4750 1000*1 3900*1 850*1 4750 1000*1 3938*1 888*1 4750 1000*1 3950*1 900*1 4750 1000*1 3960*1 910*1 4750 1000*1 3970*1 920*1 4750 1000*1 3975*1 925*1 High-speed -250 mode tBUFO 0.5 tSCLO −1 tpcyc (−tSr) Standard mode High-speed -300 mode tSTAHO 0.5 tSCLO −1 tpcyc (−tSf) Standard mode High-speed -250 mode tSTASO 1 tSCLO (−tSr) Standard mode -1000 -250 -1000 1300 4700 1300 4000 4650 4688 4700 4710 4720 4725 600 900 938 950 960 970 975 4700 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 High-speed -300 mode tSTOSO 0.5 tSCLO +2 tpcyc (−tSr) Standard mode High-speed -300 mode tSDASO As master 1 tSCLL*3 −12 tpcyc*2 (−tSr) 1 tSCLLO*3 −3 tpcyc (−tSr) Standard mode High-speed -300 mode Standard mode -1000 -1000 -1000 600 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 4000 4200 4125 4100 4080 4061 4050 600 1150 1075 1050 1030 1011 1000 250 3400 3513 3550 3580 3609 3625 100 700 813 850 880 909 925 tSDASO As slave 250 2500 -200*1 2950 3100 3220 3336 3400 High-speed -300 mode 3 tpcyc Standard mode High-speed 0 mode 0 100 250 400 520 636 700 tSDAHO 0 300 188 150 120 91 75 0 300 188 150 120 91 75 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 531 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Notes: 1. Apply one or more of the following measures to satisfy the I C bus interface specification. • Ensure that the interval between the setting of the start condition and of the stop condition is sufficient. • Adjust the rise and fall times by changing the values of the pull-up resistors and load capacitance. • Adjust the system by decreasing the transfer rate. • Select a slave device with an input timing that permits the I/O timing. The values in the above table are changed by the setting of the IICX bit and the CKS2 to CKS0 bits. Since the maximum transfer rate may not be achievable, depending on 2 the frequency, check whether or not the I C bus interface specification is satisfied under the actual conditions that are set. 2. When the IICX bit is 1. When the IICX bit is 0, (tSCLL −6tPcyc). 3. Calculated from the I2C bus specifications (standard 4700 ns/min, high-speed: 1300 ns/min.) 2 7. Points for caution when reading ICDR at the end of master reception To halt the reception of data after a receive operation in the master receive mode has been completed, set the TRS bit to 1 and write 0 to BBSY and SCP. By doing so, the level on SDA will be changed from low to high while SCL is high, that is, the stop condition will be generated. The received data can be read by reading ICDR. If there is data in the buffer, however, the data received in ICDRS cannot be transferred to ICDR (ICDRR). Therefore, the second-byte of data cannot be read. When reading of the second-byte of data is required, set the stop condition in the master receive mode (with the TRS bit being 0). When reading the received data, confirm that the BBSY bit in ICCR is 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the bus is released. After that, read the ICDR register while TRS is 0. In this case, if an attempt is made to read the received data (data in ICDR) during the period from the execution of the instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP of ICCR) that sets the stop condition and the actual generation of the stop condition, it is not possible to generate the clock correctly for a the subsequent master transmission. Rewriting of the I2C control bit to change the mode of operation or setting of transmission/reception, such as clearing of the MST bit after the completion of transmission/reception by the master, must not take place in any period other than period (a) (after confirming that the BBSY bit in ICCR has been cleared to 0) in figure 14.29. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 532 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Stop condition (a) SDA SCL Internal clock BBSY bit Bit 0 8 A 9 Start condition Master-reception mode ICDR read-disabled period Execution of the instruction Confirmation of stop-condition that sets the stop condition (reading 0 from BBSY) (writing 0 to BBSY and SCP) Start condition set Figure 14.29 Points for Caution in Reading Data Received by Master Reception 8. Points for Caution in Setting the Start Condition for Re-transmission Figure 14.30 shows the timing and flowchart of the setting of the start condition for retransmission, and the timing with which the data is continuously written to ICDR. Write the transmit data to ICDR after the start condition for re-transmission is issued and then the start condition is actually generated. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 533 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option IRIC=1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR Set the start condition? Yes Read the SCL pin No [1] Wait for completion of one-byte transfer. No Other processing SCL=Low? Yes Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP of ICSR No [2] Decide whether or not SCL is low. [3] Execuse the instruction that sets the start condition for re-transmission. No IRIC = 1? Yes Write the data for transmission to ICDR [4] Confirm the start condition generation [5] Set the data for transmission (slave address+R/W) Note: Program so that steps 3 to 5 above are executed continuously. Start condition (re-transmission) SCL SDA ACK bit7 IRIC [5] Write to ICDR (transfer data) [1] Tasting of IRIC [4] Testing of IRIC [3] Start condition instruction issuance (re-transmission) [2] Testing of SCL=Low Figure 14.30 Flowchart and Timing of the Execution of the Instruction that Sets the Start Condition for Re-Transmission Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 534 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 9. Points for caution in the execution of the instruction that sets the I2C bus interface stop condition If the rise time in the 9th cycle of SCL exceeds the specified value due to a high bus-load capacitance, or if a slave device inserts a wait by setting the level on SCL low, read SCL after the rise of 9th cycle of the clock to confirm that the level is low, and then execute the instruction that sets the stop condition. Period for securing the high-level period SCL 9th cycle VIH SCL is detected as low since this waveform takes a long time to rise. SDA Stop condition IRIC [1] Decision on whether or not SCL is low [2] Stop condition instruction generation Figure 14.31 Timing for the Setting of the Stop Condition 10. Notes on WAIT function ⎯ Conditions to cause this phenomenon When both of the following conditions are satisfied, the clock pulse of the 9th clock could be outputted continuously in master mode using the WAIT function due to the failure of the WAIT insertion after the 8th clock fall. (1) Setting the WAIT bit of the ICMR register to 1 and operating WAIT, in master mode (2) If the IRIC bit of interrupt flag is cleared from 1 to 0 between the fall of the 7th clock and the fall of the 8th clock. ⎯ Error phenomenon Normally, WAIT State will be cancelled by clearing the IRIC flag bit from 1 to 0 after the fall of the 8th clock in WAIT State. In this case, if the IRIC flag bit is cleared between the 7th clock fall and the 8th clock fall, the IRIC flag clear- data will be retained internally. Therefore, the WAIT State will be cancelled right after WAIT insertion on 8th clock fall. ⎯ Restrictions Please clear the IRIC flag before the rise of the 7th clock (the counter value of BC2 through BC0 should be 2 or greater), after the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rise of the 9th clock. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 535 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option If the IRIC flag-clear is delayed due to the interrupt or other processes and the value of BC counter is turned to 1 or 0, please confirm the SCL pins are in L’ state after the counter value of BC2 through BC0 is turned to 0, and clear the IRIC flag. (See figure 14.32.) ASD SCL BC2–BC0 IRIC (operation example) A 9 0 1 7 2 6 Transmit/receive data A 7 2 1 8 SCL = ‘L’ confirm 0 IRIC clear 9 Transmit/receive data 1 7 2 6 3 5 When BC2-0 ≥ 2 IRIC clear 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear unavailable Figure 14.32 IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation 11. Points for caution of clearing the IRIC flag when the wait function is used While the wait function is used in I2C bus interface master mode, if the rise time of SCL exceeds the specified value or if a slave device in which a wait can be inserted by driving SCL low is used, read SCL in the following way to confirm that SCL has become low, and then clear the IRIC flag. If the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 with WAIT = 1 while SCL is extending the high level period, the SDA level may change before SCL becomes low, generate a start or stop condition erroneously. Secure period in which SCL is high SCL VIH SCL is detected as low SDA IRIC [1] Decision on whether or not SCL is low [2] IRIC clear Figure 14.33 Timing for Clearing IRIC Flag When WAIT = 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 536 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 12. Points for caution when reading ICDR and accessing ICCR in slave transmit mode In I2C bus interface slave transmit mode, do not read ICDR or do not read/write to ICCR during the period shaded in figure 14.34. However, in interrupt handling processing that is generated in synchronization with the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock, reading ICDR or reading/writing to ICCR causes no error because the shaded period has passed before making the transition to interrupt handling. To handle interrupts securely, be sure to keep either of the following conditions. ⎯ Before starting the receive operation of the next slave address, finish the read of ICDR data that has been received so far or the read/write of ICCR. ⎯ Monitor the BC2 to BC0 counter in ICMR; when the count is 000 (8th or 9th cycle of the clock), wait for at least two transfer clocks to let the shaded period pass. Then, read ICDR or read/write to ICCR. Erroneous waveforms Write to ICDR SDA R/W A Bit 7 SCL 8 9 TRS bit Address reception Data transmission Period in which read from ICDR and read from or write to ICCR are prohibited (6 peripheral clocks) Detection of rise of 9th transmit/receive clock Figure 14.34 Timing for Reading ICDR and Accessing ICCR in Slave Transmit Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 537 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 13. Points for cautions when setting TRS bit in slave mode In I2C bus interface slave mode, the value set to the TRS bit in ICCR immediately becomes valid if it is set from the time when the rising edge of the 9th cycle or the stop condition is detected until the time when the next rising edge on the SCL pin is detected (the period indicated as (a) in figure 14.35). However, if the TRS bit is set outside the period mentioned above (the period indicated as (b) in figure 14.35), the bit value does not become valid immediately because it is suspended until the rising edge of the 9th cycle or the stop condition is detected. Therefore, when the address is received after the re-transmission start condition input without the stop condition, the effective TRS bit value remains 1 (transmit mode) internally and thus the acknowledge bit is not transmitted after the address has been received at the 9th cycle of the clock. To receive the address in slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the time indicated as (a) in figure 14.35. To release SCL low-level fixation that is held by means of the wait function in slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 and then dummy-read ICDR. Resumption condition (a) SDA (b) A SCL 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TRS Data transmission Address reception Period in which TRS bit setting is retained ICDR dummy read TRS bit setting Detection of rise of 9th cycle Detection of rise of 9th cycle Figure 14.35 Timing for Setting TRS Bit in Slave Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 538 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option 14. Points for cautions when reading ICDR in transmit mode and writing to ICDR in receive mode When ICDR is read in transmit mode (TRS = 1) or ICDR is written to in receive mode (TRS = 0), the SCL pin may not be held low in some cases after transmit/receive operation has been completed, thus inconveniently allowing clock pulses to be output on the SCL bus line before ICDR is accessed correctly. To access ICDR correctly, read the ICDR after setting to receive mode or write to the ICDR after setting to transmit mode. 15. Points for cautions on ACKE and TRS bits in slave mode In the I2C bus interface, if 1 is received as the acknowledge bit value (ACKB = 1) in transmit mode (TRS = 1) and then the address is received in slave mode without performing appropriate processing, interrupt handling may start at the rising edge of the 9th cycle of the clock even when the address does not match. Similarly, in slave mode, if the start condition or address is transmitted from the master device in transmit mode (TRS = 1), the IRIC flag may be set as a result of the ICDRE flag set or receiving 1 as the acknowledge bit value (ACKB = 1), thus causing an interrupt source to occur even when the address does not match. To use the I2C bus interface module in slave mode, be sure to follow the procedures below. ⎯ When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit value for the final transmit data at the end of a series of transmit operations, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR once to initialize the ACKB bit to 0. ⎯ Set to receive mode (TRS = 0) before the next start condition is input in slave mode. Complete transmit operation by the procedure shown in figure 14.23, in order to switch from slave transmit mode to slave receive mode. 14.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting IIC is enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. IIC is disabled with the initial value. Cancelling module stop mode allows the register to be accessed. For details, see section 24, Power-Down Modes. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 539 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 14. I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Option Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 540 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter Section 15 A/D Converter This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure 15.1. 15.1 Features • 10-bit resolution • Input channels ⎯ 8 channels (two independent A/D conversion modules) • Conversion time: 5.4 µs per channel (at Pφ = 25-MHz operation), 6.7µs per channel (at Pφ = 20-MHz operation) • Three operating modes ⎯ Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion ⎯ Continuous scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels ⎯ Single-cycle scan mode: Single-cycle A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels • Data registers ⎯ Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel • Sample and hold function • Three methods for conversion start ⎯ Software ⎯ Conversion start trigger from multifunction timer pulse unit (MTU) ⎯ External trigger signal • Interrupt request ⎯ An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated • Module standby mode can be set ADCMS20B_010020020700 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 541 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter A/D0 Module data bus Bus interface AVCC AVref (only for SH7145) AVSS 10-bit D/A MTU ADTRG trigger Successive approximations register ADCSR_0 ADDR0 ADDR3 ADDR1 ADDR2 ADCR_0 ADTSR AN0 + Analog multiplexer AN1 AN2 AN3 Pφ/4 Control circuit Pφ/8 Pφ/16 Pφ/32 ADI0(DTC) interrupt signal Comparator Sample-and-hold circuit A/D1 Module data bus Bus interface Successive approximations register AVCC AVref (only for SH7145) AVSS 10-bit D/A ADCSR_1 ADDR4 ADDR7 ADDR5 ADDR6 ADCR_1 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 + Pφ/4 Pφ/8 Pφ/16 Pφ/32 Sample-and-hold circuit ADI1 (DMAC/DTC) interrupt signal [Legend] ADCR_0: ADCSR_0: ADDR0: ADDR1: ADDR2: ADDR3: A/D0 control register A/D0 control/status register A/D0 data register 0 A/D0 data register 1 A/D0 data register 2 A/D0 data register 3 ADCR_1: ADCSR_1: ADDR4: ADDR5: ADDR6: ADDR7: A/D1 control register A/D1 control/status register A/D1 data register 4 A/D1 data register 5 A/D1 data register 6 A/D1 data register 7 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 542 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Analog multiplexer Comparator Control circuit Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter 15. A/D Converter 15.2 Input/Output Pins Table 15.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. This LSI has two A/D conversion modules, each of which can be operated independently. The input channels are divided into four channel sets. The analog input pins are as shown in table 15.1. Table 15.1 Pin Configuration Module Type Common Pin Name AVCC AVref AVSS ADTRG A/D module 0 (A/D0) AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 A/D module 1 (A/D1) AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Function Analog block power supply and reference voltage A/D conversion reference voltage (Only for SH7145) Analog block ground and reference voltage A/D external trigger input pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 Note: The connected A/D module differs for each pin. The control registers of each must be set each module. The AVref pin is internally connected to the AVcc pin in the SH7144. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 543 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.3 Register Descriptions The A/D converter has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states in each processing state, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • A/D data register 0 (ADDR0) A/D data register 1 (ADDR1) A/D data register 2 (ADDR2) A/D data register 3 (ADDR3) A/D data register 4 (ADDR4) A/D data register 5 (ADDR5) A/D data register 6 (ADDR6) A/D data register 7 (ADDR7) A/D control/status register_0 (ADCSR_0) A/D control/status register_1 (ADCSR_1) A/D control register_0 (ADCR_0) A/D control register_1 (ADCR_1) A/D trigger select register (ADTSR) A/D Data Registers 0 to 7 (ADDR0 to ADDR7) 15.3.1 ADDRs are 16-bit read-only registers. The conversion result for each analog input channel is stored in ADDR with the corresponding number. (For example, the conversion result of AN4 is stored in ADDR4.) The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0. The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read. When reading the ADDR, read the upper byte before the lower byte, or read in word unit. The initial value of ADDR is H'0000. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 544 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register_0, 1 (ADCSR_0, ADCSR_1) ADCSR for each module controls A/D conversion operations. Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value ADF 0 R/W R/(W)* Description A/D End Flag A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. [Setting conditions] • • When A/D conversion ends in single mode When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels in scan mode When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 When the DMAC or the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and data is read from ADDR while the DTMR bit in the DTC is cleared to 0 [Clearing conditions] • • 6 ADIE 0 R/W A/D Interrupt Enable The A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request is enabled when 1 is set When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. 5 ⎯ 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 4 ADM 0 R/W A/D Operating Mode Select Selects the A/D conversion mode. 0: Single mode 1: Scan mode When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. 3 ⎯ 1 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 2 ⎯ 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 545 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter Bit 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value CH1 CH0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Channel Select 1, 0 Select analog input channels. See table 15.2. When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Table 15.2 Channel Select List Bit 1 Bit 0 Single Mode CH1 0 Analog Input Channels Scan Mode A/D0 AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0 to AN2 AN0 to AN3 CH0 0 1 A/D0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 A/D1 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 A/D1 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4 to AN6 AN4 to AN7 1 0 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 546 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.3.3 A/D Control Register_0, 1 (ADCR_0, ADCR_1) ADCR for each module controls A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal and selects the operating clock. Bit 7 Bit Name TRGE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Trigger Enable Enables or disables triggering of A/D conversion by ADTRG or an MTU trigger. 0: A/D conversion triggering is disabled 1: A/D conversion triggering is enabled 6 5 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Select 1, 0 Select the A/D conversion time. 00: Pφ/32 01: Pφ/16 10: Pφ/8 11: Pφ/4 When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. CKS[1,0] = b'11 can be set while Pφ ≤ 25 MHz. 4 ADST 0 R/W A/D Start Starts or stops A/D conversion. When this bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started. When this bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion is stopped and the A/D converter enters the idle state. In single or singlecycle scan mode, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 when A/D conversion ends on the selected single channel. In continuous scan mode, A/D conversion is continuously performed for the selected channels in sequence until this bit is cleared by a software, reset, or in software standby mode, or module standby mode. 3 ADCS 0 R/W A/D Continuous Scan Selects either single-cycle scan or continuous scan in scan mode. This bit is valid only when scan mode is selected. 0: Single-cycle scan 1: Continuous scan When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 547 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 2 to 0 — 15.3.4 A/D Trigger Select Register (ADTSR) The ADTSR enables an A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 3 2 TRG1S1 TRG1S0 0 0 R/W R/W AD Trigger 1 Select 1 and 0 Enable the start of A/D conversion by A/D1 with a trigger signal. 00: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) or MTU trigger is enabled 01: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled 10: A/D conversion start by MTU trigger is enabled 11: Setting prohibited When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST and TRGE bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. 1 0 TRG0S1 TRG0S0 0 0 R/W R/W AD Trigger 0 Select 1 and 0 Enable the start of A/D conversion by A/D0 with a trigger signal. 00: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) or MTU trigger is enabled 01: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled 10: A/D conversion start by MTU trigger is enabled 11: Setting prohibited When changing the operating mode, first clear the ADST and TRGE bit in the A/D control registers (ADCR) to 0. 7 to 4 — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 548 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes; single mode and scan mode. There are two kinds of scan mode: continuous mode and single-cycle mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCR. The ADST bit can be set at the same time when the operating mode or analog input channel is changed. 15.4.1 Single Mode In single mode, A/D conversion is to be performed only once on the specified single channel. The operations are as follows. 1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit in ADCR is set to 1, according to software, MTU, or external trigger input. 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to the channel. 3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. 4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the idle state. 15.4.2 Continuous Scan Mode In continuous scan mode, A/D conversion is to be performed sequentially on the specified channels. The operations are as follows. 1. When the ADST bit in ADCR is set to 1 by software, MTU, or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the channel with the lowest number in the group (AN0, AN1, ..., AN3). 2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to each channel. 3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. Conversion of the first channel in the group starts again. 4. Steps 2 to 3 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters the idle state. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 549 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.4.3 Single-Cycle Scan Mode In single-cycle scan mode , A/D conversion is to be performed once on the specified channels. Operations are as follows. 1. When the ADST bit in ADCR is set to 1 by a software, MTU, or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the channel with the lowest number in the group (AN0, AN1, ..., AN3). 2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to each channel. 3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. 4. After A/D conversion ends, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the idle state. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0 during A/D conversion, A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters the idle state. 15.4.4 Input Signal Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit for each module. The A/D converter samples the analog input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit in ADCR is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 15.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 15.3 shows the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 15.2, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and the input sampling time (tSPL). The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15.3. In scan mode, the values given in table 15.3 apply to the first conversion time. The values given in table 15.4 apply to the second and subsequent conversions. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 550 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter A/D conversion time (tCONV) Analog input A/D conversion start sampling time (tSPL) delay time (tD) ADCSR write cycle Pφ Address Internal write signal ADST write timing Analog input sampling time A/D converter Idle state Sample-and-hold A/D conversion ADF End of A/D conversion Figure 15.2 A/D Conversion Timing Table 15.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS1 = 0 CKS0 = 0 Item A/D conversion start delay Input sampling time A/D conversion time Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Min 31 — Typ — 256 Max 62 — 1055 Min 15 — 515 CKS0 = 1 Typ — 128 — Max 30 — 530 Min 7 — 259 CKS0 = 0 Typ — 64 — Max 14 — 266 Min 3 — 131 CKS1 = 1 CKS0 = 1 Typ — 32 — Max 6 — 134 1024 — Note: All values represent the number of states for Pφ. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 551 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) CKS1 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Conversion Time (State) 1024 (Fixed) 512 (Fixed) 256 (Fixed) 128 (Fixed) 15.4.5 A/D Converter Activation by MTU The A/D converter can be independently activated by an A/D conversion request from the interval timer of the MTU. To activate the A/D converter by the MTU, set the A/D trigger select register (ADTSR). After this register setting has been made, the ADST bit in ADCR is automatically set to 1 when an A/D conversion request from the interval timer of the MTU occurs. The timing from setting of the ADST bit until the start of A/D conversion is the same as when 1 is written to the ADST bit by software. 15.4.6 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 00 or 01 in ADTSR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge of the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the ADST bit has been set to 1 by software. Figure 15.3 shows the timing. CK ADTRG External trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 15.3 External Trigger Input Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 552 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.5 Interrupt Sources and DTC, DMAC Transfer Requests The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) upon the completion of A/D conversion. ADI interrupt requests are enabled when the ADIE bit is set to 1 while the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1 after A/D conversion is completed. The data transfer controller (DTC) or the direct memory access controller (DMAC) can be activated by an ADI interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC or the DMAC in response to an ADI interrupt enables continuous conversion to be achieved without imposing a load on software. When the DTC or the DMAC is activated by an ADI interrupt, the ADF bit in ADCSR is automatically cleared when data is transferred by the DTC or the DMAC. Table 15.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Sources Name Interrupt Source ADI0 ADI1 Interrupt Source Flag DTC Activation DMAC Activation Possible Possible Impossible Possible A/D0 conversion completed ADF in ADCSR_0 A/D1 conversion completed ADF in ADCSR_1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 553 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.6 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below. • Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes • Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 15.4). • Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'00) to B'0000000001 (H'01) (see figure 15.5). • Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see figure 15.5). • Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between zero voltage and fullscale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure 15.5). • Absolute accuracy The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, fullscale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 554 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter Digital output 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error 1 2 1024 1024 1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage Figure 15.4 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Offset error Analog input voltage Figure 15.5 Definitions of A/D Conversion Accuracy Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 555 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.7 15.7.1 Usage Notes Module Standby Mode Setting Operation of the A/D converter can be disabled or enabled using the module standby control register. The initial setting is for operation of the A/D converter to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module standby mode. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down Modes. 15.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 1 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 1 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. With a large capacitance provided externally for A/D conversion in single mode, the input impedance will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow a high speed switching analog signal (e.g., 5 mV/μs or greater) (see figure 15.6). When converting a high-speed analog signal or performing conversion in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. 15.7.3 Influences on Absolute Accuracy Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as AVss. Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not interfere in the accuracy by the digital signals on the printed circuit board (i.e, acting as antennas). This LSI Sensor output impedance of up to 1 kΩ Sensor input Low-pass filter C = 0.1 μF Cin = 20 pF A/D converter equivalent circuit 10 kΩ 20 pF Figure 15.6 Example of Analog Input Circuit Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 556 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter 15.7.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings If the conditions below are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. • Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn (VANn) during A/D conversion should be in the range AVss ≤ VANn ≤ AVcc. • Relationship between AVcc, Avss and Vcc, Vss The Relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss should be AVcc = Vcc ± 0.3V and Avss = Vss. If the A/D converter is not used, this relationship should be AVcc = Vcc and Avss = Vss. • Setting range of AVref input voltage (only for SH7145) Set the AVref pin input voltage as AVref ≤ AVcc. If the A/D converter is not used, set the AVref pin as AVref = AVcc. 15.7.5 Notes on Board Design In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN7), and analog power supply (AVcc) by the analog ground (AVss). Also, the analog ground (AVss) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (Vss) on the board. 15.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures A protection circuit should be connected in order to prevent damage due to abnormal voltage, such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7), to AVcc and AVss, as shown in figure 15.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVcc and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN7 must be connected to AVss. If a filter capacitor is connected, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding circuit constants. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 557 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 15. A/D Converter AVCC AVref Rin *2 *1 *1 100 Ω AN0 to AN7 0.1 µF AVSS Notes: Values are reference values. 1. 10 µF 0.01 µF 2. Rin: Input impedance Figure 15.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit Table 15.6 Analog Pin Specifications Item Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Min — — Max 20 1 Unit pF kΩ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 558 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) Section 16 Compare Match Timer (CMT) This LSI has an on-chip compare match timer (CMT) comprising two 16-bit timer channels. The CMT has 16-bit counters and can generate interrupts at specified intervals. 16.1 Features The CMT has the following features: • Four kinds of counter input clock can be selected ⎯ One of four internal clocks (Pφ/8, Pφ/32, Pφ/128, Pφ/512) can be selected independently for each channel. • Interrupt sources ⎯ A compare match interrupt can be requested independently for each channel. • Module standby mode can be set Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the CMT. Pφ/32 Pφ/512 Pφ/8 Pφ/128 Pφ/32 Pφ/512 Pφ/8 Pφ/128 CMI0 CMI1 Control circuit Clock selection Control circuit Clock selection Comparator CMCOR_0 CMCSR_0 CMCOR_1 CMCSR_1 CMCNT_0 Comparator CMCNT_1 CMSTR Module bus CMT Bus interface [Legend] CMSTR: CMCSR: CMCOR: CMCNT: CMI: Internal bus Compare match timer start register Compare match timer control/status register Compare match timer constant register Compare match timer counter Compare match interrupt Figure 16.1 CMT Block Diagram TIMCMT0A_000220020700 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 559 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.2 Register Descriptions The CMT has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • • Compare match timer start register (CMSTR) Compare match timer control/status register_0 (CMCSR_0) Compare match timer counter_0 (CMCNT_0) Compare match timer constant register_0 (CMCOR_0) Compare match timer control/status register_1 (CMCSR_1) Compare match timer counter_1 (CMCNT_1) Compare match timer constant register_1 (CMCOR_1) Compare Match Timer Start Register (CMSTR) 16.2.1 The compare match timer start register (CMSTR) is a 16-bit register that selects whether to operate or halt the channel 0 and channel 1 counters (CMCNT). Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 1 STR1 0 R/W Count Start 1 This bit selects whether to operate or halt compare match timer counter_1. (CMCNT_1) 0: CMCNT_1 count operation halted 1: CMCNT_1 count operation 0 STR0 0 R/W Count Start 0 This bit selects whether to operate or halt compare match timer counter_0. (CMCNT_0) 0: CMCNT_0 count operation halted 1: CMCNT_0 count operation 15 to 2 ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 560 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.2.2 Compare Match Timer Control/Status Register_0, 1 (CMCSR_0, CMCSR_1) The compare match timer control/status register (CMCSR) is a 16-bit register that indicates the occurrence of compare matches, sets the enable/disable status of interrupts, and establishes the clock used for incrementation. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 7 CMF 0 R/(W)* Compare Match Flag This flag indicates whether or not the CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched. 0: CMCNT and CMCOR values have not matched 1: CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched [Clearing condition] • • Write 0 to CMF after reading 1 from it When the DTC is activated by an CMI interrupt and data is transferred with the DISEL bit in DTMR of DTC = 0 15 to 8 ⎯ 6 CMIE 0 R/W Compare Match Interrupt Enable This bit selects whether to enable or disable a compare match interrupt (CMI) when the CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched (CMF = 1). 0: Compare match interrupt (CMI) disabled 1: Compare match interrupt (CMI) enabled 5 to 2 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 1 0 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W These bits select the clock input to CMCNT from among the four internal clocks obtained by dividing the peripheral clock (Pφ). When the STR bit of CMSTR is set to 1, CMCNT begins incrementing with the clock selected by CKS1 and CKS0. 00: Pφ/8 01: Pφ/32 10: Pφ/128 11: Pφ/512 Note: * Only 0 can be written for flag clearing. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 561 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.2.3 Compare Match Timer Counter_0, 1 (CMCNT_0, CMCNT_1) The compare match timer counter (CMCNT) is a 16-bit register used as an up-counter for generating interrupt requests. The initial value of CMCNT is H'0000. 16.2.4 Compare Match Timer Constant Register_0, 1 (CMCOR_0, CMCOR_1) The compare match timer constant register (CMCOR) is a 16-bit register that sets the period for compare match with CMCNT. The initial value of CMCOR is H'FFFF. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 562 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.3 16.3.1 Operation Compare Match Counter Operation When an internal clock is selected with the CKS1, CKS0 bits of the CMCSR register and the STR bit of CMSTR is set to 1, CMCNT begins incrementing with the selected clock. When the CMCNT counter value matches that of the compare match constant register (CMCOR), the CMCNT counter is cleared to H'0000 and the CMF flag of the CMCSR register is set to 1. If the CMIE bit of the CMCSR register is set to 1 at this time, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is requested. The CMCNT counter begins counting up again from H'0000. Figure 16.2 shows the compare match counter operation. CMCNT value Counter cleared by CMCOR compare match CMCOR H'0000 Time Figure 16.2 Counter Operation 16.3.2 CMCNT Count Timing One of four clocks (Pφ/8, Pφ/32, Pφ/128, Pφ/512) obtained by dividing the peripheral clock (Pφ) can be selected by the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of CMCSR. Figure 16.3 shows the CMCNT count timing. Pφ Internal clock CMCNT input clock CMCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 16.3 Count Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 563 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.4 16.4.1 Interrupts Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation The CMT has a compare match interrupt for each channel, with independent vector addresses allocated to each of them. The corresponding interrupt request is output when interrupt request flag CMF is set to 1 and interrupt enable bit CMIE has also been set to 1. When activating CPU interrupts by interrupt request, the priority between the channels can be changed by means of interrupt controller settings. See section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC), for details. The data transfer controller (DTC) can be activated by an interrupt request. In this case, the priority between channels is fixed. See section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC), for details. 16.4.2 Compare Match Flag Set Timing The CMF bit of the CMCSR register is set to 1 by the compare match signal generated when the CMCOR register and the CMCNT counter match. The compare match signal is generated upon the final state of the match (timing at which the CMCNT counter matching count value is updated). Consequently, after the CMCOR register and the CMCNT counter match, a compare match signal will not be generated until a CMCNT counter input clock occurs. Figure 16.4 shows the CMF bit set timing. Pφ CMCNT input clock CMCNT CMCOR Compare match signal CMF CMI N N 0 Figure 16.4 CMF Set Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 564 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.4.3 Compare Match Flag Clear Timing The CMF bit of the CMCSR register is cleared by writing a 0 to it after reading a 1 or the clearing signal after the DTC transfer. Figure 16.5 shows the timing when the CMF bit is cleared by the CPU. CMCSR write cycle T1 T2 Pφ CMF Figure 16.5 Timing of CMF Clear by CPU Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 565 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.5 16.5.1 Usage Notes Contention between CMCNT Write and Compare Match If a compare match signal is generated during the T2 state of the CMCNT counter write cycle, the CMCNT counter clear has priority, so the write to the CMCNT counter is not performed. Figure 16.6 shows the timing. CMCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Internal write signal Compare match signal CMCNT N H' 0000 CMCNT Figure 16.6 CMCNT Write and Compare Match Contention Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 566 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.5.2 Contention between CMCNT Word Write and Counter Incrementation If an increment occurs during the T2 state of the CMCNT counter word write cycle, the counter write has priority, so no increment occurs. Figure 16.7 shows the timing. CMCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Internal write signal CMCNT input clock CMCNT N M CMCNT write data CMCNT Figure 16.7 CMCNT Word Write and Increment Contention Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 567 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 16. Compare Match Timer (CMT) 16.5.3 Contention between CMCNT Byte Write and Counter Incrementation If an increment occurs during the T2 state of the CMCNT byte write cycle, the counter write has priority, so no increment of the write data results on the side on which the write was performed. The byte data on the side on which writing was not performed is also not incremented, so the contents are those before the write. Figure 16.8 shows the timing when an increment occurs during the T2 state of the CMCNT (Upper byte) write cycle. CMCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Internal write signal CMCNT input clock CMCNT (Upper byte) N M CMCNT write data CMCNT (Lower byte) X X CMCNT (Upper byte) Figure 16.8 CMCNT Byte Write and Increment Contention Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 568 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Section 17 Pin Function Controller (PFC) The pin function controller (PFC) is composed of registers that are used to select the functions of multiplexed pins and assign pins to be inputs or outputs. Tables 17.1 to 17.12 list the multiplexed pins of this LSI. Tables 17.13 and 17.14 list the pin functions in each operating mode. Table 17.1 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port A) Port A Function 1 (Related Module) PA0 I/O (port) PA1 I/O (port) PA2 I/O (port) PA3 I/O (port) PA4 I/O (port) PA5 I/O (port) PA6 I/O (port) PA7 I/O (port) PA8 I/O (port) PA9 I/O (port) PA10 I/O (port) PA11 I/O (port) PA12 I/O (port) PA13 I/O (port) PA14 I/O (port) PA15 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) RXD0 input (SCI) TXD0 output (SCI) SCK0 I/O (SCI) RXD1 input (SCI) TXD1 output (SCI) SCK1 I/O (SCI) TCLKA input (MTU) TCLKB input (MTU) TCLKC input (MTU) TCLKD input (MTU) CS0 output (BSC) CS1 output (BSC) WRL output (BSC) WRH output (BSC) RD output (BSC) CK output (CPG) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CS2 output (BSC) CS3 output (BSC) IRQ2 input (INTC) IRQ3 input (INTC) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DREQ0 input (DMAC) IRQ0 input (INTC) DREQ1 input (DMAC) IRQ1 input (INTC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 569 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.2 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port B) Port B Function 1 (Related Module) PB0 I/O (port) PB1 I/O (port) PB2 I/O (port) PB3 I/O (port) PB4 I/O (port) PB5 I/O (port) PB6 I/O (port) PB7 I/O (port) PB8 I/O (port) PB9 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) A16 output (BSC) A17 output (BSC) IRQ0 input (INTC) IRQ1 input (INTC) IRQ2 input (INTC) IRQ3 input (INTC) IRQ4 input (INTC) IRQ5 input (INTC) IRQ6 input (INTC) IRQ7 input (INTC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ POE0 input (port) POE1 input (port) POE2 input (port) POE3 input (port) A18 output (BSC) A19 output (BSC) A20 output (BSC) A21 output (BSC) Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 5 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ SCL0 I/O (IIC) SDA0 I/O (IIC) CS6 output (BSC)* ⎯ CS7 output (BSC)* ⎯ BACK output (BSC) WAIT input (BSC) ⎯ BREQ input (BSC) ⎯ ⎯ ADTRG input (A/D) ⎯ Note: ∗ Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Table 17.3 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port C) Port C Function 1 (Related Module) PC0 I/O (port) PC1 I/O (port) PC2 I/O (port) PC3 I/O (port) PC4 I/O (port) PC5 I/O (port) PC6 I/O (port) PC7 I/O (port) PC8 I/O (port) PC9 I/O (port) PC10 I/O (port) PC11 I/O (port) PC12 I/O (port) PC13 I/O (port) PC14 I/O (port) PC15 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) A0 output (BSC) A1 output (BSC) A2 output (BSC) A3 output (BSC) A4 output (BSC) A5 output (BSC) A6 output (BSC) A7 output (BSC) A8 output (BSC) A9 output (BSC) A10 output (BSC) A11 output (BSC) A12 output (BSC) A13 output (BSC) A14 output (BSC) A15 output (BSC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 570 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.4 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port D) Port D Function 1 (Related Module) PD0 I/O (port) PD1 I/O (port) PD2 I/O (port) PD3 I/O (port) PD4 I/O (port) PD5 I/O (port) PD6 I/O (port) PD7 I/O (port) PD8 I/O (port) PD9 I/O (port) PD10 I/O (port) PD11 I/O (port) PD12 I/O (port) PD13 I/O (port) PD14 I/O (port) PD15 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) D0 I/O (BSC) D1 I/O (BSC) D2 I/O (BSC) D3 I/O (BSC) D4 I/O (BSC) D5 I/O (BSC) D6 I/O (BSC) D7 I/O (BSC) D8 I/O (BSC) D9 I/O (BSC) D10 I/O (BSC) D11 I/O (BSC) D12 I/O (BSC) D13 I/O (BSC) D14 I/O (BSC) D15 I/O (BSC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)* AUDRST input (AUD)* AUDMD input (AUD)* AUDCK I/O (AUD)* AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)* Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Note: * F-ZTAT version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 571 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.5 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port E) Port E Function 1 (Related Module) PE0 I/O port PE1 I/O port PE2 I/O port PE3 I/O port PE4 I/O port PE5 I/O port PE6 I/O port PE7 I/O port PE8 I/O port PE9 I/O port PE10 I/O port PE11 I/O port PE12 I/O port PE13 I/O port PE14 I/O port PE15 I/O port Function 2 (Related Module) TIOC0A I/O (MTU) TIOC0B I/O (MTU) TIOC0C I/O (MTU) TIOC0D I/O (MTU) TIOC1A I/O (MTU) TIOC1B I/O (MTU) TIOC2A I/O (MTU) TIOC2B I/O (MTU) TIOC3A I/O (MTU) TIOC3B I/O (MTU) TIOC3C I/O (MTU) TIOC3D I/O (MTU) TIOC4A I/O (MTU) TIOC4B I/O (MTU) TIOC4C I/O (MTU) TIOC4D I/O (MTU) Function 3 (Related Module) DREQ0 input (DMAC) Function 4 (Related Module) TMS input (H-UDI)* DRAK0 output (DMAC) TRST input (H-UDI)* DREQ1 input (DMAC) TDI input (H-UDI)* DRAK1 output (DMAC) TDO output (H-UDI)* RXD3 input (SCI) TXD3 output (SCI) SCK3 I/O (SCI) RXD2 input (SCI) SCK2 I/O (SCI) ⎯ TXD2 output (SCI) ⎯ ⎯ MRES input (INTC) TCK input (H-UDI)* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SCK3 I/O (SCI) ⎯ RXD3 input (SCI) TXD3 output (SCI) ⎯ DACK0 output (DMAC) ⎯ DACK1 output (DMAC) IRQOUT output (INTC) Note: * F-ZTAT version only Table 17.6 SH7144 Multiplexed Pins (Port F) Port F Function 1 (Related Module) PF0 input (port) PF1 input (port) PF2input (port) PF3 input (port) PF4 input (port) PF5 input (port) PF6 input (port) PF7 input (port) Function 2 (Related Module) AN0 input (A/D) AN1 input (A/D) AN2 input (A/D) AN3 input (A/D) AN4 input (A/D) AN5 input (A/D) AN6 input (A/D) AN7 input (A/D) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 572 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.7 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port A) Port A Function 1 (Related Module) PA0 I/O (port) PA1 I/O (port) PA2 I/O (port) PA3 I/O (port) PA4 I/O (port) PA5 I/O (port) PA6 I/O (port) PA7 I/O (port) PA8 I/O (port) PA9 I/O (port) PA10 I/O (port) PA11 I/O (port) PA12 I/O (port) PA13 I/O (port) PA14 I/O (port) PA15 I/O (port) PA16 I/O (port) PA17 I/O (port) PA18 I/O (port) PA19 I/O (port) PA20 I/O (port) PA21 I/O (port) PA22 I/O (port) PA23 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) RXD0 input (SCI) TXD0 output (SCI) SCK0 I/O (SCI) RXD1 input (SCI) TXD1 output (SCI) SCK1 I/O (SCI) TCLKA input (MTU) TCLKB input (MTU) TCLKC input (MTU) TCLKD input (MTU) CS0 output (BSC) CS1 output (BSC) WRL output (BSC) WRH output (BSC) RD output (BSC) CK output (CPG) ⎯ WAIT input (BSC) BREQ input (BSC) BACK output (BSC) CS4 output (BSC)* CS5 output (BSC)* 2 Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ DREQ0 input (DMAC) ⎯ ⎯ DREQ1 input (DMAC) CS2 output (BSC) CS3 output (BSC) IRQ2 input (INTC) IRQ3 input (INTC) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DRAK0 output (DMAC) DRAK1 output (DMAC) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ IRQ0 input (INTC) ⎯ ⎯ IRQ1 input (INTC) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1 2 WRHL output (BSC) WRHH output (BSC) Notes: 1. F-ZTAT version only 2. Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 573 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.8 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port B) Port B Function 1 (Related Module) PB0 I/O (port) PB1 I/O (port) PB2 I/O (port) PB3 I/O (port) PB4 I/O (port) PB5 I/O (port) PB6 I/O (port) PB7 I/O (port) PB8 I/O (port) PB9 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) A16 output (BSC) A17 output (BSC) IRQ0 input (INTC) IRQ1 input (INTC) IRQ2 input (INTC) IRQ3 input (INTC) IRQ4 input (INTC) IRQ5 input (INTC) IRQ6 input (INTC) IRQ7 input (INTC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ POE0 input (port) POE1 input (port) POE2 input (port) POE3 input (port) A18 output (BSC) A19 output (BSC) A20 output (BSC) A21 output (BSC) Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 5 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ SCL0 I/O (IIC) SDA0 I/O (IIC) CS6 output (BSC)* ⎯ CS7 output (BSC)* ⎯ BACK output (BSC) WAIT input (BSC) ⎯ BREQ input (BSC) ⎯ ⎯ ADTRG input (A/D) ⎯ Note ∗ Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Table 17.9 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port C) Port C Function 1 (Related Module) PC0 I/O (port) PC1 I/O (port) PC2 I/O (port) PC3 I/O (port) PC4 I/O (port) PC5 I/O (port) PC6 I/O (port) PC7 I/O (port) PC8 I/O (port) PC9 I/O (port) PC10 I/O (port) PC11 I/O (port) PC12 I/O (port) PC13 I/O (port) PC14 I/O (port) PC15 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) A0 output (BSC) A1 output (BSC) A2 output (BSC) A3 output (BSC) A4 output (BSC) A5 output (BSC) A6 output (BSC) A7 output (BSC) A8 output (BSC) A9 output (BSC) A10 output (BSC) A11 output (BSC) A12 output (BSC) A13 output (BSC) A14 output (BSC) A15 output (BSC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 574 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.10 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port D) Port D Function 1 (Related Module) PD0 I/O (port) PD1 I/O (port) PD2 I/O (port) PD3 I/O (port) PD4 I/O (port) PD5 I/O (port) PD6 I/O (port) PD7 I/O (port) PD8 I/O (port) PD9 I/O (port) PD10 I/O (port) PD11 I/O (port) PD12 I/O (port) PD13 I/O (port) PD14 I/O (port) PD15 I/O (port) PD16 I/O (port) PD17 I/O (port) PD18 I/O (port) PD19 I/O (port) PD20 I/O (port) PD21 I/O (port) PD22 I/O (port) PD23 I/O (port) PD24 I/O (port) PD25 I/O (port) PD26 I/O (port) PD27 I/O (port) PD28 I/O (port) PD29 I/O (port) PD30 I/O (port) PD31 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) D0 I/O (BSC) D1 I/O (BSC) D2 I/O (BSC) D3 I/O (BSC) D4 I/O (BSC) D5 I/O (BSC) D6 I/O (BSC) D7 I/O (BSC) D8 I/O (BSC) D9 I/O (BSC) D10 I/O (BSC) D11 I/O (BSC) D12 I/O (BSC) D13 I/O (BSC) D14 I/O (BSC) D15 I/O (BSC) D16 I/O (BSC) D17 I/O (BSC) D18 I/O (BSC) D19 I/O (BSC) D20 I/O (BSC) D21 I/O (BSC) D22 I/O (BSC) D23 I/O (BSC) D24 I/O (BSC) D25 I/O (BSC) D26 I/O (BSC) D27 I/O (BSC) D28 I/O (BSC) D29 I/O (BSC) D30 I/O (BSC) D31 I/O (BSC) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQ0 input (INTC) IRQ1 input (INTC) IRQ2 input (INTC) IRQ3 input (INTC) IRQ4 input (INTC) IRQ5 input (INTC) IRQ6 input (INTC) IRQ7 input (INTC) DREQ0 input (DMAC) DREQ1 input (DMAC) DACK0 output (DMAC) DACK1 output (DMAC) CS2 output (BSC) CS3 output (BSC) IRQOUT output (INTC) ADTRG input (A/D) Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)* AUDRST input (AUD)* AUDMD input (AUD)* AUDCK I/O (AUD)* AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Note: * F-ZTAT version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 575 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.11 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port E) Port E Function 1 (Related Module) PE0 I/O (port) PE1 I/O (port) PE2 I/O (port) PE3 I/O (port) PE4 I/O (port) PE5 I/O (port) PE6 I/O (port) PE7 I/O (port) PE8 I/O (port) PE9 I/O (port) PE10 I/O (port) PE11 I/O (port) PE12 I/O (port) PE13 I/O (port) PE14 I/O (port) PE15 I/O (port) Function 2 (Related Module) TIOC0A I/O (MTU) TIOC0B I/O (MTU) TIOC0C I/O (MTU) TIOC0D I/O (MTU) TIOC1A I/O (MTU) TIOC1B I/O (MTU) TIOC2A I/O (MTU) TIOC2B I/O (MTU) TIOC3A I/O (MTU) TIOC3B I/O (MTU) TIOC3C I/O (MTU) TIOC3D I/O (MTU) TIOC4A I/O (MTU) TIOC4B I/O (MTU) TIOC4C I/O (MTU) TIOC4D I/O (MTU) Function 3 (Related Module) DREQ0 input (DMAC) DACK0 output (DMAC) DREQ1 input (DMAC) DACK1 output (DMAC) RXD3 input (SCI) TXD3 output (SCI) SCK3 I/O (SCI) RXD2 input (SCI) SCK2 I/O (SCI) TRST input (H-UDI)* TXD2 output (SCI) TDO output (H-UDI)* TCK input (H-UDI)* MRES input (INTC) DACK0 output (DMAC) DACK1 output (DMAC) Function 4 (Related Module) AUDCK I/O (AUD)* AUDMD input (AUD)* AUDRST input (AUD)* AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)* ⎯ TMS input (H-UDI)* SCK3 I/O (SCI) TDI input (H-UDI)* RXD3 input (SCI) TXD3 output (SCI) ⎯ ⎯ IRQOUT output (INTC) Note: * F-ZTAT version only Table 17.12 SH7145 Multiplexed Pins (Port F) Port F Function 1 (Related Module) PF0 input (port) PF1 input (port) PF2 input (port) PF3 input (port) PF4 input (port) PF5 input (port) PF6 input (port) PF7 input (port) Function 2 (Related Module) AN0 input (A/D) AN1 input (A/D) AN2 input (A/D) AN3 input (A/D) AN4 input (A/D) AN5 input (A/D) AN6 input (A/D) AN7 input (A/D) Function 3 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Function 4 (Related Module) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 576 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.13 SH7144 Pin Functions in Each Mode (1) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 21, 37, 65, 103 3, 23, 39, 55, 61, 71, 90, 101, 109 100 97 80 81 82 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function Vcc Vss PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Vss On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function Vcc Vss PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Vss AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14 PE15 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14 PE15 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 577 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 58 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function PB2 PB3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* RD WDTOVF WRH WRL CS1 CS0 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 PD15 PD14 PD13 PD12 PD11 PD10 1 1 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function PB2 PB3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 3 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 3 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* RD WDTOVF WRH WRL CS1 CS0 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA4/TXD1 PA3/RXD1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA1/TXD0 PA0/RXD0 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC* PD14/D14/AUDCK* 1 1 1 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA4/TXD1 PA3/RXD1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA1/TXD0 PA0/RXD0 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC* PD14/D14/AUDCK* 1 1 1 D15 D14 D13 PD13/D13/AUDMD* 1 PD13/D13/AUDMD* 1 PD12/D12/AUDRST* 1 D12 1 PD12/D12/AUDRST* 1 PD11/D11/AUDATA3* PD10/D10/AUDATA2* D11 D10 PD11/D11/AUDATA3* PD10/D10/AUDATA2* 1 1 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 578 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 59 60 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 91 92 93 94 95 96 98 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function PD9 PD8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* MD1 MD0 CK RES PE0/(TMS* * ) PE1/(TRST* * ) 12 12 1 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD9/D9/AUDATA1* PD8/D8/AUDATA0* PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI 1 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD9/D9/AUDATA1* PD8/D8/AUDATA0* PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 1 1 1 1 FWP* MD1 MD0 CK RES FWP* MD1 MD0 1 PA15/CK RES 12 PE0/(TMS* * ) PE1/(TRST* * ) 12 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PE2/(TDI* * ) PE3/(TDO* * ) PE4/(TCK* * ) PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 12 12 12 PE2/(TDI* * ) PE3/(TDO* * ) PE4/(TCK* * ) PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 12 12 12 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 579 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 99 102 104 105 106 107 108 110 111 112 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function PF7/AN7 PE5 PE6 PE7 PE8 PE9 PE10 PE11 PE12 PE13 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PF7/AN7 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/ SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/ SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function PF7/AN7 PE5 PE6 PE7 PE8 PE9 PE10 PE11 PE12 PE13 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PF7/AN7 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES Notes: 1. F-ZTAT version only 2. Fixed to TMS, TRST, TDI, TDO, and TCK when using the E10A (in DBGMD = high). 3. Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 580 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.13 SH7144 Pin Functions in Each Mode (2) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 21, 37, 65, 103 3, 23, 39, 55, 61, 71, 90, 101, 109 100 97 80 81 82 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function Vcc Vss PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Vss Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) PFC Selected Function Initial Function Possibilities Vcc Vss Vcc Vss AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14 PE15 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PB0 PB1 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14 PE15 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PB0 PB1 AVcc AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 581 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 58 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PB2 PB3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* PA14 WDTOVF PA13 PA12 PA11 PA10 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 PD15 PD14 PD13 PD12 PD11 PD10 1 1 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PB2 PB3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 3 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 3 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* PA14 WDTOVF PA13 PA12 PA11 PA10 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA4/TXD1 PA3/RXD1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA1/TXD0 PA0/RXD0 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC* PD14/D14/AUDACK* PD13/D13/AUDMD* 1 1 1 1 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PA4/TXD1 PA3/RXD1 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA1/TXD0 PA0/RXD0 PD15/D15/AUDSYNC* PD14/D14/AUDACK* PD13/D13/AUDMD* 1 1 1 1 PD15 PD14 PD13 PD12/D12/AUDRST* 1 PD12 1 PD12/D12/AUDRST* 1 PD11/D11/AUDATA3* PD10/D10/AUDATA2* PD11 PD10 PD11/D11/AUDATA3* PD10/D10/AUDATA2* 1 1 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 582 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 59 60 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 91 92 93 94 95 96 98 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PD9 PD8 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* MD1 MD0 CK RES PE0/(TMS* * ) PE1/(TRST* * ) 12 12 1 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PD9 PD8 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD9/D9/AUDATA1* PD8/D8/AUDATA0* PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI 1 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD9/D9/AUDATA1* PD8/D8/AUDATA0* PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 1 1 1 1 FWP* MD1 MD0 PA15 RES FWP* MD1 MD0 1 PA15/CK RES 12 PE0/(TMS* * ) PE1/(TRST* * ) 12 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PE2/(TDI* * ) PE3/(TDO* * ) PE4/(TCK* * ) PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 12 12 12 PE2/(TDI* * ) PE3/(TDO* * ) PE4/(TCK* * ) PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 12 12 12 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 583 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7144 99 102 104 105 106 107 108 110 111 112 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PF7/AN7 PE5 PE6 PE7 PE8 PE9 PE10 PE11 PE12 PE13 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PF7/AN7 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/ SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/ SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PF7/AN7 PE5 PE6 PE7 PE8 PE9 PE10 PE11 PE12 PE13 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PF7/AN7 PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES Notes: 1. 2. 3. F-ZTAT version only Fixed to TMS, TRST, TDI, TDO, and TCK when using the E10A (in DBGMD = high). Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 584 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.14 SH7145 Pin Functions in Each Mode (1) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 12, 26, 40, 63, 77, 85, 112, 135 6, 14, 28, 55, 61, 71, 79, 87, 93, 117, 129, 141 128 127 124 104 105 106 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function Vcc PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function Vcc PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Vss Vss Vss Vss AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23 PE14 PA22 PA21 PE15 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23/WRHH PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PA22/WRHL PA21/CS5* 3 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss WRHH PE14 WRHL PA21 PE15 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23/WRHH PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PA22/WRHL PA21/CS5* 3 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 585 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 22 23 24 25 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 PA20 PA19 PB2 PB3 PA18 PB4 ASEBRKAK* PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* RD WDTOVF PD31 PD30 WRH WRL CS1 CS0 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PD29 PD28 1 1 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 PA20/CS4* 3 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 PA20/CS4* 3 PA20 PA19 PB2 PB3 PA18 3 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* 1 3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* ASEBRKAK* 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* RD WDTOVF D31 D30 WRH WRL CS1 CS0 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 D29 D28 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PD31/D31/ADTRG PD30/D30/IRQOUT PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 PD28/D28/CS2 1 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PD31/D31/ADTRG PD30/D30/IRQOUT PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 PD28/D28/CS2 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 586 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 58 59 60 62 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 78 80 81 82 83 84 86 88 89 90 91 92 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) PFC Selected Function Initial Function Possibilities PD27 PD26 PD25 PD24 PD23 PD22 PD21 PD20 PD19 PD18 PD17 PD16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PD27/D27/DACK1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD24/D24/DREQ0 PD23/D23/IRQ7/ 1 AUDSYNC* PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK* 1 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) PFC Selected Function Initial Function Possibilities D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 PD27/D27/DACK1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD24/D24/DREQ0 PD23/D23/IRQ7/ 1 AUDSYNC* PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK* 1 PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD* PD19/D19/IRQ3/ 1 AUDATA3* PD18/D18/IRQ2/ 1 AUDATA2* PD17/D17/IRQ1/ 1 AUDATA1* PD16/D16/IRQ0/ 1 AUDATA0* PD15/D15 PD14/D14 PD13/D13 PD12/D12 PD11/D11 PD10/D10 PD9/D9 PD8/D8 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 1 PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD* PD19/D19/IRQ3/ 1 AUDATA3* PD18/D18/IRQ2/ 1 AUDATA2* PD17/D17/IRQ1/ 1 AUDATA1* PD16/D16/IRQ0/ 1 AUDATA0* PD15/D15 PD14/D14 PD13/D13 PD12/D12 PD11/D11 PD10/D10 PD9/D9 PD8/D8 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 1 PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST* 1 PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST* 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 587 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 107 108 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 118 119 120 121 122 123 125 126 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* PA16 PA17 MD1 MD0 CK RES PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 1 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI PFC Selected Function Possibilities XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* 1 FWP* 1 FWP* 1 PA16/AUDSYNC* PA17/WAIT MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES PA16 PA17 MD1 MD0 CK RES PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 PA16/AUDSYNC* PA17/WAIT MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES 1 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/ 1 AUDCK* PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/ 1 AUDMD* PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/ 1 AUDRST* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/ 1 AUDATA3* PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/ 1 AUDATA2* PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/ 1 AUDATA1* PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/ 1 AUDATA0* PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/ 1 AUDCK* PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/ 1 AUDMD* PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/ 1 AUDRST* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/ 1 AUDATA3* PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/ 1 AUDATA2* PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 1 /AUDATA1* PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 1 /AUDATA0* PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 588 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 130 131 132 133 134 136 137 138 139 140 142 143 144 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 0) Initial Function PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PE7 PE8/(TMS* * ) PE9/(TRST* * ) 12 12 On-Chip ROM Disabled (MCU Mode 1) Initial Function PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PE7 PE8/(TMS* * ) PE9/(TRST* * ) 12 12 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PFC Selected Function Possibilities PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PE10/(TDI* * ) PE11/(TDO* * ) PE12/(TCK* * ) PE13 12 12 12 PE10/(TDI* * ) PE11/(TDO* * ) PE12/(TCK* * ) PE13 12 12 12 Notes: 1. 2. 3. F-ZTAT version only Fixed to TMS, TRST, TDI, TDO, and TCK when using the E10A (in DBGMD = high). Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 589 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Table 17.14 SH7145 Pin Functions in Each Mode (2) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 12, 26, 40, 63, 77, 85, 112, 135 6, 14, 28, 55, 61, 71, 79, 87, 93, 117, 129, 141 128 127 124 104 105 106 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function Vcc PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function Vcc PFC Selected Function Possibilities Vcc Vss Vss Vss Vss AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23 PE14 PA22 PA21 PE15 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23/WRHH PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PA22/WRHL PA21/CS5* 3 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23 PE14 PA22 PA21 PE15 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 AVcc AVREF AVss PLLVcc PLLCAP PLLVss PA23/WRHH PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 PA22/WRHL PA21/CS5* 3 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/ IRQOUT PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 590 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 22 23 24 25 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PC13 PC14 PC15 PB0 PB1 PA20 PA19 PB2 PB3 PA18 PB4 ASEBRKAK* PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* PA14 WDTOVF PD31 PD30 PA13 PA12 PA11 PA10 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PD29 PD28 1 1 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PC13 PC14 PC15 PB0 PB1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 PA20/CS4* 3 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PB0/A16 PB1/A17 PA20/CS4* 3 PA20 PA19 PB2 PB3 PA18 3 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* ASEBRKAK* 1 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6* 1 3 PB4 ASEBRKAK* ASEBRKAK* 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 DBGMD* PA14 WDTOVF PD31 PD30 PA13 PA12 PA11 PA10 PA9 PA8 PA7 PA6 PD29 PD28 1 PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7* PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT 3 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PD31/D31/ADTRG PD30/D30/IRQOUT PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 PD28/D28/CS2 1 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG DBGMD* PA14/RD WDTOVF PD31/D31/ADTRG PD30/D30/IRQOUT PA13/WRH PA12/WRL PA11/CS1 PA10/CS0 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 PD28/D28/CS2 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 591 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 58 59 60 62 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 78 80 81 82 83 84 86 88 89 90 91 92 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PD27 PD26 PD25 PD24 PD23 PD22 PD21 PD20 PD19 PD18 PD17 PD16 PD15 PD14 PD13 PD12 PD11 PD10 PD9 PD8 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD27/D27/DACK1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD24/D24/DREQ0 PD23/D23/IRQ7/ 1 AUDSYNC* PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK* 1 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PD27 PD26 PD25 PD24 PD23 PD22 PD21 PD20 PD19 PD18 PD17 PD16 PD15 PD14 PD13 PD12 PD11 PD10 PD9 PD8 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PD27/D27/DACK1 PD26/D26/DACK0 PD25/D25/DREQ1 PD24/D24/DREQ0 PD23/D23/IRQ7/ 1 AUDSYNC* PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK* 1 PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD* PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST 1 * PD19/D19/IRQ3/ 1 AUDATA3* PD18/D18/IRQ2/ 1 AUDATA2* PD17/D17/IRQ1/ 1 AUDATA1* PD16/D16/IRQ0/ 1 AUDATA0* PD15/D15 PD14/D14 PD13/D13 PD12/D12 PD11/D11 PD10/D10 PD9/D9 PD8/D8 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 1 PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD* 1 PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST* PD19/D19/IRQ3/ 1 AUDATA3* PD18/D18/IRQ2/ 1 AUDATA2* PD17/D17/IRQ1/ 1 AUDATA1* PD16/D16/IRQ0/ 1 AUDATA0* PD15/D15 PD14/D14 PD13/D13 PD12/D12 PD11/D11 PD10/D10 PD9/D9 PD8/D8 PD7/D7 PD6/D6 PD5/D5 PD4/D4 PD3/D3 PD2/D2 PD1/D1 PD0/D0 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 592 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 107 108 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 118 119 120 121 122 123 125 126 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* PA16 PA17 MD1 MD0 CK RES PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 1 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI PFC Selected Function Possibilities XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI 1 PFC Selected Function Possibilities XTAL MD3 EXTAL MD2 NMI FWP* 1 FWP* 1 FWP* 1 PA16/AUDSYNC* PA17/WAIT MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES PA16 PA17 MD1 MD0 PA15 RES PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 PA16/AUDSYNC* PA17/WAIT MD1 MD0 PA15/CK RES 1 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/ 1 AUDCK* PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/ 1 AUDMD* PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/ 1 AUDRST* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/ 1 AUDATA3* PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/ 1 AUDATA2* PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/ 1 AUDATA1* PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/ 1 AUDATA0* PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/ 1 AUDCK* PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/ 1 AUDMD* PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/ 1 AUDRST* PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/ 1 AUDATA3* PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/ 1 AUDATA2* PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/ 1 AUDATA1* PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/ 1 AUDATA0* PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 593 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Pin Name Pin No. SH7145 130 131 132 133 134 136 137 138 139 140 142 143 144 On-Chip ROM Enabled (MCU Mode 2) Initial Function PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PE7 PE8/(TMS* * ) PE9/(TRST* * ) 12 12 Single Chip Mode (MCU Mode 3) Initial Function PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PE7 PE8/(TMS* * ) PE9/(TRST* * ) 12 12 PFC Selected Function Possibilities PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PFC Selected Function Possibilities PA0/RXD0 PA1/TXD0 PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 PA3/RXD1 PA4/TXD1 PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PE10/(TDI* * ) PE11/(TDO* * ) PE12/(TCK* * ) PE13 12 12 12 PE10/(TDI* * ) PE11/(TDO* * ) PE12/(TCK* * ) PE13 12 12 12 Notes: 1. 2. 3. F-ZTAT version only Fixed to TMS, TRST, TDI, TDO, and TCK when using the E10A (in DBGMD = high). Masked ROM version and ROM less version only Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 594 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1 Register Descriptions The PFC has the following registers. For details on the addresses of the registers and their states during each process, see section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Port A I/O register H (PAIORH)* Port A I/O register L (PAIORL) Port A control register H (PACRH)* Port A control register L2 (PACRL2) Port A control register L1 (PACRL1) Port B I/O register (PBIOR) Port B control register 1 (PBCR1) Port B control register 2 (PBCR2) Port C I/O register (PCIOR) Port C control register (PCCR) Port D I/O register H (PDIORH)* Port D I/O register L (PDIORL) Port D control register H1 (PDCRH1)* Port D control register H2 (PDCRH2)* Port D control register L1 (PDCRL1) Port D control register L2 (PDCRL2) Port E I/O register L (PEIORL) Port E control register L1 (PECRL1) Port E control register L2 (PECRL2) High-current port control register (PPCR) Note: * Can be set only in SH7145. These are not available in SH7144. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 595 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.1 Port A I/O Register L, H (PAIORL, PAIORH) The port A I/O register L, H (PAIORL, PAIORH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the pins on port A as inputs or outputs. Bits PA23IOR to PA0IOR correspond to pins PA23 to PA0 (names of multiplexed pins are here given as port names and pin numbers alone). PAIORL is enabled when the port A pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PA15 to PA0), and SCK0 and SCK1 pins are functioning as inputs/outputs of SCI. In other states, PAIORL is disabled. PAIORH is enabled when the port A pins are functioning as general-purpose input/output (PA23 to PA16). In other states, PAIORH is disabled. A given pin on port A will be an output pin if the corresponding bit in PAIORH or PAIORL is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0. Bits 7 to 0 of PAIORH are, however, disabled in SH7144. Bits 15 to 8 of PAIORH are reserved. These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. The initial values of PAIORL and PAIORH are H'0000, respectively. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 596 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.2 Port A Control Registers L2, L1, H (PACRL2, PACRL1, PACRH) The port A control registers L2, L1, and H (PACRL2, PACRL1, and PACRH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to select the functions of the multiplexed pins on port A. • Port A Control Registers L2, L1, and H (PACRL2, PACRL1, and PACRH) in SH7144 Register Bit PACRH PACRH PACRH PACRH PACRH PACRH Bit Name ⎯ ⎯ Initial Value All 0 All 0 All 0 All 0 All 0 0 All 0 R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 15, 13 ⎯ 11, 9 10, 8 2 to 0 3 13, 11, 9, 7, 5 ⎯ ⎯ 14, 12 ⎯ 7 to 4, ⎯ PACRL1 15, PACRL2 9, 7, 3, 1 PACRL1 14 ⎯ PA15MD All 0 0*1 R R/W PA15 Mode Selects the function of the PA15/CK pin. 0: PA15 I/O (port) 1: CK output (CPG) PACRL1 12 PA14MD 0* 2 R/W PA14 Mode Selects the function of the PA14/RD pin. 0: PA14 I/O (port) 1: RD output (BSC) PACRL1 10 PA13MD 0*2 R/W PA13 Mode Selects the function of the PA13/WRH pin. 0: PA13 I/O (port) 1: WRH output (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 597 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* 2 Register Bit PACRL1 8 Bit Name PA12MD R/W R/W Description PA12 Mode Selects the function of the PA12/WRL pin. 0: PA12 I/O (port) 1: WRL output (BSC) PACRL1 6 PA11MD 0* 2 R/W PA11 Mode Selects the function of the PA11/CS1 pin. 0: PA11 I/O (port) 1: CS1 output (BSC) PACRL1 4 PA10MD 0* 2 R/W PA10 Mode Selects the function of the PA10/CS0 pin. 0: PA10 I/O (port) 1: CS0 output (BSC) PACRL1 3 PACRL1 2 PA9MD1 PA9MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA9 Mode Select the function of the PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 pin. 00: PA9 I/O (port) 01: TCLKD input (MTU) 10: IRQ3 input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL1 1 PACRL1 0 PA8MD1 PA8MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA8 Mode Select the function of the PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 pin. 00: PA8 I/O (port) 01: TCLKC input (MTU) 10: IRQ2 input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 598 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PACRL2 15 PACRL2 14 Bit Name PA7MD1 PA7MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PA7 Mode Select the function of the PA7/TCLKB/CS3 pin. 00: PA7 I/O (port) 01: TCLKB input (MTU) 10: CS3 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL2 13 PACRL2 12 PA6MD1 PA6MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA6 Mode Select the function of the PA6/TCLKA/CS2 pin. 00: PA6 I/O (port) 01: TCLKA input (MTU) 10: CS2 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL2 11 PACRL2 10 PA5MD1 PA5MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA5 Mode Select the function of the PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 pin. 00: PA5 I/O (port) 01: SCK1 I/O (SCI) 10: DREQ1 input (DMAC) 11: IRQ1 input (INTC) PACRL2 8 PA4MD 0 R/W PA4 Mode Selects the function of the PA4/TXD1 pin. 0: PA4 I/O (port) 1: TXD1 output (SCI) PACRL2 6 PA3MD 0 R/W PA3 Mode Selects the function of the PA3/RXD1 pin. 0: PA3 I/O (port) 1: RXD1 input (SCI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 599 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PACRL2 5 PACRL2 4 Bit Name PA2MD1 PA2MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PA2 Mode Select the function of the PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 pin. 00: PA2 I/O (port) 01: SCK0 I/O (SCI) 10: DREQ0 input (DMAC) 11: IRQ0 input (INTC) PACRL2 2 PA1MD 0 R/W PA1 Mode Selects the function of the PA1/TXD0 pin. 0: PA1 I/O (port) 1: TXD0 output (SCI) PACRL2 0 PA0MD 0 R/W PA0 Mode Selects the function of the PA0/RXD0 pin. 0: PA0 I/O (port) 1: RXD0 input (SCI) Notes: 1. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM enabled/disabled external-expansion mode. 2. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 600 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) • Port A Control Registers L2, L1, and H (PACRL2, PACRL1 and PACRH) in the SH7145 Register Bit PACRH PACRH PACRH PACRH PACRH 15 13 11 9 3 13, 11, 9, 7, 5 PACRL2 9, 7, 3, 1 PACRH 14 PA23MD 0 *3 R/W PA23 Mode Selects the function of the PA23/WRHH pin. 0: PA23 I/O (port) 1: WRHH output (BSC) PACRH 12 PA22MD 0*3 R/W PA22 Mode Selects the function of the PA22/WRHL pin. 0: PA22 I/O (port) 1: WRHL output (BSC) PACRH 10 PA21MD 0 R/W PA21 Mode Selects the function of the PA21/CS5 pin. 0: PA21 I/O (port) 1: CS5 output (BSC)* PACRH 8 PA20MD 0 R/W PA20 Mode Selects the function of the PA20/CS4 pin. 0: PA20 I/O (port) 1: CS4 output (BSC)* PACRH PACRH 7 6 PA19MD1 0 PA19MD0 0 R/W R/W PA19 Mode Select the function of the PA19/BACK/DRAK1 pin. 00: PA19 I/O (port) 01: BACK output (BSC) 10: DRAK1 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 601 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 4 4 Bit Name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 All 0 R/W R R R R R R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. PACRL1 15, ⎯ All 0 R 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value Register Bit PACRH PACRH 5 4 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PA18 Mode Select the function of the PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 pin. 00: PA18 I/O (port) 01: BREQ input (BSC) 10: DRAK0 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PA18MD1 0 PA18MD0 0 PACRH 2 PA17MD 0 R/W PA17 Mode Selects the function of the PA17/WAIT pin. 0: PA17 I/O (port) 1: WAIT input (BSC) PACRH PACRH 1 0 PA16MD1 0 PA16MD0 0 R/W R/W PA16 Mode Select the function of the PA16/AUDSYNC pin. 00: PA16 I/O (port) 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)* 1 PACRL1 14 PA15MD 0*2 R/W PA15 Mode Selects the function of the PA15/CK pin. 0: PA15 I/O (port) 1: CK output (CPG) PACRL1 12 PA14MD 0* 3 R/W PA14 Mode Selects the function of the PA14/RD pin. 0: PA14 I/O (port) 1: RD output (BSC) PACRL1 10 PA13MD 0*3 R/W PA13 Mode Selects the function of the PA13/WRH pin. 0: PA13 I/O (port) 1: WRH output (BSC) PACRL1 8 PA12MD 0* 3 R/W PA12 Mode Selects the function of the PA12/WRL pin. 0: PA12 I/O (port) 1: WRL output (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 602 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* 3 Register Bit PACRL1 6 Bit Name PA11MD R/W R/W Description PA11 Mode Selects the function of the PA11/CS1 pin. 0: PA11 I/O (port) 1: CS1 output (BSC) PACRL1 4 PA10MD 0* 3 R/W PA10 Mode Selects the function of the PA10/CS0 pin. 0: PA10 I/O (port) 1: CS0 output (BSC) PACRL1 3 PACRL1 2 PA9MD1 PA9MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA9 Mode Select the function of the PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 pin. 00: PA9 I/O (port) 01: TCLKD input (MTU) 10: IRQ3 input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL1 1 PACRL1 0 PA8MD1 PA8MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA8 Mode Select the function of the PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 pin. 00: PA8 I/O (port) 01: TCLKC input (MTU) 10: IRQ2 input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL2 15 PACRL2 14 PA7MD1 PA7MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA7 Mode Select the function of the PA7/TCLKB/ CS3 pin. 00: PA7 I/O (port) 01: TCLKB input (MTU) 10: CS3 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited PACRL2 13 PACRL2 12 PA6MD1 PA6MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA6 Mode Select the function of the PA6/TCLKA/ CS2 pin. 00: PA6 I/O (port) 01: TCLKA input (MTU) 10: CS2 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 603 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PACRL2 11 PACRL2 10 Bit Name PA5MD1 PA5MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PA5 Mode Select the function of the PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 pin. 00: PA5 I/O (port) 01: SCK1 I/O (SCI) 10: DREQ1 input (DMAC) 11: IRQ1 input (INTC) PACRL2 8 PA4MD 0 R/W PA4 Mode Selects the function of the PA4/TXD1 pin. 0: PA4 I/O (port) 1: TXD1 output (SCI) PACRL2 6 PA3MD 0 R/W PA3 Mode Selects the function of the PA3/RXD1 pin. 0: PA3 I/O (port) 1: RXD1 input (SCI) PACRL2 5 PACRL2 4 PA2MD1 PA2MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PA2 Mode Select the function of the PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 pin. 00: PA2 I/O (port) 01: SCK0 I/O (SCI) 10: DREQ0 input (DMAC) 11: IRQ0 input (INTC) PACRL2 2 PA1MD 0 R/W PA1 Mode Selects the function of the PA1/TXD0 pin. 0: PA1 I/O (port) 1: TXD0 output (SCI) PACRL2 0 PA0MD 0 R/W PA0 Mode Selects the function of the PA0/RXD0 pin. 0: PA0 I/O (port) 1: RXD0 input (SCI) Notes: 1. F-ZTAT version only. Setting prohibited for the masked ROM version and ROM less version. 2. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM enabled/disabled external-expansion mode. 3. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. 4. Masked ROM version and ROM less version only. Setting prohibited for the F-ZTAT version and emulator. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 604 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.3 Port B I/O Register (PBIOR) The port B I/O register (PBIOR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set the pins on port B as inputs or outputs. Bits PB9IOR to PB0IOR correspond to pins PB9 to PB0 (names of multiplexed pins are here given as port names and pin numbers alone). PBIOR is enabled when port B pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PB9 to PB0). In other states, PBIOR is disabled. A given pin on port B will be an output pin if the corresponding bit in PBIOR is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0. Bits 15 to 10 are reserved. These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. The initial value of PBIOR is H'0000. 17.1.4 Port B Control Registers 1, 2 (PBCR1, PBCR2) The port B control registers 1 and 2 (PBCR1 and PBCR2) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to select the multiplexed pin function of the pins on port B. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 605 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) • Port B Control Registers 1 and 2 (PBCR1 and PBCR2) Register Bit PBCR1 PBCR1 PBCR1 PBCR2 PBCR1 PBCR1 15, 14 13, 12 9 to 4 3, 1 3 2 Bit Name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PB9MD1 PB9MD0 Initial Value All 0 All 0 All 0 All 0 0 0 R/W R R/W R R R R PB9 Mode Select the function of the PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG pin. 00: PB9 I/O (port) 01: IRQ7 input (INTC) 10: A21 output (BSC) 11: ADTRG input (A/D) PBCR1 PBCR1 1 0 PB8MD1 PB8MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PB8 Mode Select the function of the PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT pin. 00: PB8 I/O (port) 01: IRQ6 input (INTC) 10: A20 output (BSC) 11: WAIT input (BSC) PBCR2 PBCR2 15 14 PB7MD1 PB7MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PB7 Mode Select the function of the PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ pin. 00: PB7 I/O (port) 01: IRQ5 input (INTC) 10: A19 output (BSC) 11: BREQ input (BSC) Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 606 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PBCR2 PBCR2 13 12 Bit Name PB6MD1 PB6MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PB6 Mode Select the function of the PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK pin. 00: PB6 I/O (port) 01: IRQ4 input (INTC) 10: A18 output (BSC) 11: BACK output (BSC) PBCR2 PBCR2 11 10 PB5MD1 PB5MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PB5 Mode Select the function of the PB5/IRQ3/POE3/CS7 pin. 00: PB5 I/O (port) 01: IRQ3 input (INTC) 10: POE3 input (port) 11: CS7 output (BSC)* 2 PBCR2 PBCR2 9 8 PB4MD1 PB4MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PB4 Mode Select the function of the PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CS6 pin. 00: PB4 I/O (port) 01: IRQ2 input (INTC) 10: POE2 input (port) 11: CS6 output (BSC)* 2 PBCR1 PBCR2 PBCR2 11 7 6 PB3MD2 PB3MD1 PB3MD0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W PB3 Mode Select the function of the PB3/IRQ1/POE1/SDA0 pin. 000: PB3 I/O (port) 001: IRQ1 input (INTC) 010: POE1 input (port) 011: Setting prohibited 100: SDA0 I/O (IIC) 101: Setting prohibited 110: Setting prohibited 111: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 607 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 0 Register Bit PBCR1 PBCR2 PBCR2 10 5 4 Bit Name PB2MD2 PB2MD1 PB2MD0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PB2 Mode Select the function of the PB2/IRQ0/POE0/SCL0 pin. 000: PB2 I/O (port) 001: IRQ0 input (INTC) 010: POE0 input (port) 011: Setting prohibited 100: SCL0 I/O (IIC) 101: Setting prohibited 110: Setting prohibited 111: Setting prohibited PBCR2 2 PB1MD 0* 1 R/W PB1 Mode Selects the function of the PB1/A17 pin. 0: PB1 I/O (port) 1: A17 output (BSC) PBCR2 0 PB0MD 0* 1 R/W PB0 Mode Selects the function of the PB0/A16 pin. 0: PB0 I/O (port) 1: A16 output (BSC) Notes: 1. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. 2. Masked ROM version and ROM less version only. Setting prohibited for the F-ZTAT version and emulator. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 608 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.5 Port C I/O Register (PCIOR) PCIOR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set the pins on port C as inputs or outputs. Bits PC15IOR to PC0IOR correspond to pins PC15 to PC0 (names of multiplexed pins are here given as port names and pin numbers alone). PCIOR is enabled when the port C pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PC15 to PC0). In other states, PCIOR is disabled. A given pin on port C will be an output pin if the corresponding bit in PCIOR is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0. The initial value of PCIOR is H'0000. 17.1.6 Port C Control Register (PCCR) PCCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to select the multiplexed pin function of the pins on port C. • Port C Control Register (PCCR) Register Bit PCCR 15 Bit Name PC15MD Initial Value 0* R/W R/W Description PC15 Mode Selects the function of the PC15/A15 pin. 0: PC15 I/O (port) 1: A15 output (BSC) PCCR 14 PC14MD 0* R/W PC14 Mode Selects the function of the PC14/A14 pin. 0: PC14 I/O (port) 1: A14 output (BSC) PCCR 13 PC13MD 0* R/W PC13 Mode Selects the function of the PC13/A13 pin. 0: PC13 I/O (port) 1: A13 output (BSC) PCCR 12 PC12MD 0* R/W PC12 Mode Selects the function of the PC12/A12 pin. 0: PC12 I/O (port) 1: A12 output (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 609 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* Register Bit PCCR 11 Bit Name PC11MD R/W R/W Description PC11 Mode Selects the function of the PC11/A11 pin. 0: PC11 I/O (port) 1: A11 output (BSC) PCCR 10 PC10MD 0* R/W PC10 Mode Selects the function of the PC10/A10 pin. 0: PC10 I/O (port) 1: A10 output (BSC) PCCR 9 PC9MD 0* R/W PC9 Mode Selects the function of the PC9/A9 pin. 0: PC9 I/O (port) 1: A9 output (BSC) PCCR 8 PC8MD 0* R/W PC8 Mode Selects the function of the PC8/A8 pin. 0: PC8 I/O (port) 1: A8 output (BSC) PCCR 7 PC7MD 0* R/W PC7 Mode Selects the function of the PC7/A7 pin. 0: PC7 I/O (port) 1: A7 output (BSC) PCCR 6 PC6MD 0* R/W PC6 Mode Selects the function of the PC6/A6 pin. 0: PC6 I/O (port) 1: A6 output (BSC) PCCR 5 PC5MD 0* R/W PC5 Mode Selects the function of the PC5/A5 pin. 0: PC5 I/O (port) 1: A5 output (BSC) PCCR 4 PC4MD 0* R/W PC4 Mode Selects the function of the PC4/A4 pin. 0: PC4 I/O (port) 1: A4 output (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 610 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* Register Bit PCCR 3 Bit Name PC3MD R/W R/W Description PC3 Mode Selects the function of the PC3/A3 pin. 0: PC3 I/O (port) 1: A3 output (BSC) PCCR 2 PC2MD 0* R/W PC2 Mode Selects the function of the PC2/A2 pin. 0: PC2 I/O (port) 1: A2 output (BSC) PCCR 1 PC1MD 0* R/W PC1 Mode Selects the function of the PC1/A1 pin. 0: PC1 I/O (port) 1: A1 output (BSC) PCCR 0 PC0MD 0* R/W PC0 Mode Selects the function of the PC0/A0 pin. 0: PC0 I/O (port) 1: A0 output (BSC) Note: * The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. 17.1.7 Port D I/O Registers L, H (PDIORL, PDIORH) The port D I/O registers L and H (PDIORL and PDIORH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the pins on port D as inputs or outputs. Bits PD31IOR to PD0IOR correspond to pins PD31 to PD0 (names of multiplexed pins are here given as port names and pin numbers alone). PDIORL is enabled when the port D pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PD15 to PD0). In other states, PDIORL is disabled. PDIORH is enabled when the port D pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PD31 to PD16). In other states, PDIORH is disabled. A given pin on port D will be an output pin if the corresponding bit in PDIORL or PDIORH is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0. Note that bits 15 to 0 in PDIORH are disabled in the SH7144. The initial value of PDIOR is H'0000. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 611 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.8 Port D Control Registers L1, L2, H1, H2 (PDCRL1, PDCRL2, PDCRH1, PDCRH2) The port D control registers L1, L2, H1, and H2 (PDCRL1, PDCRL2, PDCRH1, and PDCRH2) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to select the multiplexed pin function of the pins on port D. • Port D Control Registers L1, L2, H1, and H2 (PDCRL1, PDCRL2, PDCRH1, and PDCRH2) in SH7144 Register Bit PDCRH1 15 to 0 PDCRH2 15 to 0 PDCRL2 7 to 0 PDCRL2 15 PDCRL1 15 Bit Name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initial Value All 0 All 0 All 0 2 R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. PD15 Mode Select the function of the PD15/D15/AUDSYNC pin. 00: PD15 I/O (port) 01: D15 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)* 11: Setting prohibited 1 PD15MD1 0 PD15MD0 0* PDCRL2 14 PDCRL1 14 PD14MD1 0 PD14MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD14 Mode Select the function of the PD14/D14/AUDCK pin. 00: PD14 I/O (port) 01: D14 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDCK I/O (AUD)* 11: Setting prohibited 1 PDCRL2 13 PDCRL1 13 PD13MD1 0 PD13MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD13 Mode Select the function of the PD13/D13/AUDMD pin. 00: PD13 I/O (port) 01: D13 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDMD input (AUD)* 11: Setting prohibited 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 612 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 2 Register Bit PDCRL2 12 PDCRL1 12 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PD12 Mode Select the function of the PD12/D12/AUDRST pin. 00: PD12 I/O (port) 01: D12 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDRST input (AUD)*1 11: Setting prohibited PD12MD1 0 PD12MD0 0* PDCRL2 11 PDCRL1 11 PD11MD1 0 PD11MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD11 Mode Select the function of the PD11/D11/AUDATA3 pin. 00: PD11 I/O (port) 01: D11 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)*1 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 10 PDCRL1 10 PD10MD1 0 PD10MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD10 Mode Select the function of the PD10/D10/AUDATA2 pin. 00: PD10 I/O (port) 01: D10 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)*1 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 9 PDCRL1 9 PD9MD1 PD9MD0 0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD9 Mode Select the function of the PD9/D9/AUDATA1 pin. 00: PD9 I/O (port) 01: D9 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* 11: Setting prohibited 1 PDCRL2 8 PDCRL1 8 PD8MD1 PD8MD0 0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD8 Mode Select the function of the PD8/D8/AUDATA0 pin. 00: PD8 I/O (port) 01: D8 I/O (BSC) 10: AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)*1 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 613 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* 3 Register Bit PDCRL1 7 Bit Name PD7MD R/W R/W Description PD7 Mode Selects the function of the PD7/D7 pin. 0: PD7 I/O (port) 1: D7 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 6 PD6MD 0* 3 R/W PD6 Mode Selects the function of the PD6/D6 pin. 0: PD6 I/O (port) 1: D6 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 5 PD5MD 0* 3 R/W PD5 Mode Selects the function of the PD5/D5 pin. 0: PD5 I/O (port) 1: D5 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 4 PD4MD 0*3 R/W PD4 Mode Selects the function of the PD4/D4 pin. 0: PD4 I/O (port) 1: D4 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 3 PD3MD 0*3 R/W PD3 Mode Selects the function of the PD3/D3 pin. 0: PD3 I/O (port) 1: D3 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 2 PD2MD 0*3 R/W PD2 Mode Selects the function of the PD2/D2 pin. 0: PD2 I/O (port) 1: D2 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 1 PD1MD 0* 3 R/W PD1 Mode Selects the function of the PD1/D1 pin. 0: PD1 I/O (port) 1: D1 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 0 PD0MD 0* 3 R/W PD0 Mode Selects the function of the PD0/D0 pin. 0: PD0 I/O (port) 1: D0 I/O (BSC) Notes: 1. F-ZTAT version only. Setting prohibited for the masked ROM version and ROM less version. 2. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled 16-bit external-expansion mode. 3. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 614 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) • Port D Control Registers L1, L2, H1, and H2 (PDCRL1, PDCRL2, PDCRH1, and PDCRH2) in SH7145 Register Bit PDCRL2 7 to 0 Bit Name ⎯ Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. PDCRH1 15 PDCRH1 14 PD31MD1 0 PD31MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD31 Mode Select the function of the PD31/D31/ADTRG pin. 00: PD31 I/O (port) 01: D31 I/O (BSC) 10: ADTRG input (A/D) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH1 13 PDCRH1 12 PD30MD1 0 PD30MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD30 Mode Select the function of the PD30/D30/IRQOUT pin. 00: PD30 I/O (port) 01: D30 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQOUT output (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH1 11 PDCRH1 10 PD29MD1 0 PD29MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD29 Mode Select the function of the PD29/D29/CS3 pin. 00: PD29 I/O (port) 01: D29 I/O (BSC) 10: CS3 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH1 9 PDCRH1 8 PD28MD1 0 PD28MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD28 Mode Select the function of the PD28/D28/CS2 pin. 00: PD28 I/O (port) 01: D28 I/O (BSC) 10: CS2 output (BSC) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 615 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 2 Register Bit PDCRH1 7 PDCRH1 6 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PD27 Mode Select the function of the PD27/D27/DACK1 pin. 00: PD27 I/O (port) 01: D27 I/O (BSC) 10: DACK1 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PD27MD1 0 PD27MD0 0* PDCRH1 5 PDCRH1 4 PD26MD1 0 PD26MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD26 Mode Select the function of the PD26/D26/DACK0 pin. 00: PD26 I/O (port) 01: D26 I/O (BSC) 10: DACK0 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH1 3 PDCRH1 2 PD25MD1 0 PD25MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD25 Mode Select the function of the PD25/D25/DREQ1 pin. 00: PD25 I/O (port) 01: D25 I/O (BSC) 10: DREQ1 input (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH1 1 PDCRH1 0 PD24MD1 0 PD24MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD24 Mode Select the function of the PD24/D24/DREQ0 pin. 00: PD24 I/O (port) 01: D24 I/O (BSC) 10: DREQ0 input (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PDCRH2 15 PDCRH2 14 PD23MD1 0 PD23MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD23 Mode Select the function of the PD23/D23/IRQ7/AUDSYNC pin. 00: PD23 I/O (port) 01: D23 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ7 input (INTC) 11: AUDSYNC I/O (AUD)*1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 616 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 2 Register Bit PDCRH2 13 PDCRH2 12 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PD22 Mode Select the function of the PD22/D22/IRQ6/AUDCK pin. 00: PD22 I/O (port) 01: D22 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ6 input (INTC) 11: AUDCK I/O (AUD)*1 PD22MD1 0 PD22MD0 0* PDCRH2 11 PDCRH2 10 PD21MD1 0 PD21MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD21 Mode Select the function of the PD21/D21/IRQ5/AUDMD pin. 00: PD21 I/O (port) 01: D21 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ5 input (INTC) 11: AUDMD input (AUD)*1 PDCRH2 9 PDCRH2 8 PD20MD1 0 PD20MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD20 Mode Select the function of the PD20/D20/IRQ4/AUDRST pin. 00: PD20 I/O (port) 01: D20 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ4 input (INTC) 11: AUDRST input (AUD)*1 PDCRH2 7 PDCRH2 6 PD19MD1 0 PD19MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD19 Mode Select the function of the PD19/D19/IRQ3/AUDATA3 pin. 00: PD19 I/O (port) 01: D19 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ3 input (INTC) 11: AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)*1 PDCRH2 5 PDCRH2 4 PD18MD1 0 PD18MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD18 Mode Select the function of the PD18/D18/IRQ2/AUDATA2 pin. 00: PD18 I/O (port) 01: D18 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ2 input (INTC) 11: AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)*1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 617 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 2 Register Bit PDCRH2 3 PDCRH2 2 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PD17 Mode Select the function of the PD17/D17/IRQ1/AUDATA1 pin. 00: PD17 I/O (port) 01: D17 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ1 input (INTC) 11: AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* 1 PD17MD1 0 PD17MD0 0* PDCRH2 1 PDCRH2 0 PD16MD1 0 PD16MD0 0* 2 R/W R/W PD16 Mode Select the function of the PD16/D16/IRQ0/AUDATA0 pin. 00: PD16 I/O (port) 01: D16 I/O (BSC) 10: IRQ0 input (INTC) 11: AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)* 1 PDCRL2 15 PDCRL1 15 PD15MD1 0 PD15MD0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD15 Mode Select the function of the PD15/D15 pin. 00: PD15 I/O (port) 01: D15 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 14 PDCRL1 14 PD14MD1 0 PD14MD0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD14 Mode Select the function of the PD14/D14 pin. 00: PD14 I/O (port) 01: D14 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 13 PDCRL1 13 PD13MD1 0 PD13MD0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD13 Mode Select the function of the PD13/D13 pin. 00: PD13 I/O (port) 01: D13 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 618 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 3 Register Bit PDCRL2 12 PDCRL1 12 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PD12 Mode Select the function of the PD12/D12 pin. 00: PD12 I/O (port) 01: D12 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PD12MD1 0 PD12MD0 0* PDCRL2 11 PDCRL1 11 PD11MD1 0 PD11MD0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD11 Mode Select the function of the PD11/D11 pin. 00: PD11 I/O (port) 01: D11 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 10 PDCRL1 10 PD10MD1 0 PD10MD0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD10 Mode Select the function of the PD10/D10 pin. 00: PD10 I/O (port) 01: D10 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 9 PDCRL1 9 PD9MD1 PD9MD0 0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD9 Mode Select the function of the PD9/D9 pin. 00: PD9 I/O (port) 01: D9 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited PDCRL2 8 PDCRL1 8 PD8MD1 PD8MD0 0 0* 3 R/W R/W PD8 Mode Select the function of the PD8/D8 pin. 00: PD8 I/O (port) 01: D8 I/O (BSC) 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 619 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0* 3 Register Bit PDCRL1 7 Bit Name PD7MD R/W R/W Description PD7 Mode Selects the function of the PD7/D7 pin. 0: PD7 I/O (port) 1: D7 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 6 PD6MD 0* 3 R/W PD6 Mode Selects the function of the PD6/D6 pin. 0: PD6 I/O (port) 1: D6 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 5 PD5MD 0* 3 R/W PD5 Mode Selects the function of the PD5/D5 pin. 0: PD5 I/O (port) 1: D5 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 4 PD4MD 0*3 R/W PD4 Mode Selects the function of the PD4/D4 pin. 0: PD4 I/O (port) 1: D4 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 3 PD3MD 0*3 R/W PD3 Mode Selects the function of the PD3/D3 pin. 0: PD3 I/O (port) 1: D3 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 2 PD2MD 0*3 R/W PD2 Mode Selects the function of the PD2/D2 pin. 0: PD2 I/O (port) 1: D2 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 1 PD1MD 0* 3 R/W PD1 Mode Selects the function of the PD1/D1 pin. 0: PD1 I/O (port) 1: D1 I/O (BSC) PDCRL1 0 PD0MD 0* 3 R/W PD0 Mode Selects the function of the PD0/D0 pin. 0: PD0 I/O (port) 1: D0 I/O (BSC) Notes: 1. F-ZTAT version only. Setting prohibited for the masked ROM version and ROM less version. 2. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled 32-bit external-expansion mode. 3. The initial value is 1 in the on-chip ROM disabled external-expansion mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 620 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.9 Port E I/O Register L (PEIORL) The port E I/O register L (PEIORL) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used to set the pins on port E as inputs or outputs. Bits PE15IOR to PE0IOR correspond to pins PE15 to PE0 (names of multiplexed pins are here given as port names and pin numbers alone). PEIORL is enabled when the port E pins are functioning as general-purpose inputs/outputs (PE15 to PD0), TIOC pins are functioning as inputs/outputs of MTU, and SCK2 and SCK3 pins are functioning as inputs/outputs of SCI. In other states, PEIORL is disabled. A given pin on port E will be an output pin if the corresponding PEIORL bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0. The initial value of PEIORL is H'0000. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 621 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.10 Port E Control Registers L1, L2 (PECRL1, PECRL2) The port E control registers L1 and L2 (PECRL1 and PECRL2) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that are used to select the multiplexed pin function of the pins on port E. • Port E Control Registers L1 and L2 (PECRL1 and PECRL2) in SH7144 Register Bit PECRL1 15 PECRL1 14 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W R/W Description PE15 Mode Select the function of the PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT pin. 00: PE15 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4D I/O (MTU) 10: DACK1 output (DMAC) 11: IRQOUT output (INTC) PECRL1 13 PECRL1 12 PE14MD1 0 PE14MD0 0 R/W R/W PE14 Mode Select the function of the PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 pin. 00: PE14 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4C I/O (MTU) 10: DACK0 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 11 PECRL1 10 PE13MD1 0 PE13MD0 0 R/W R/W PE13 Mode Select the function of the PE13/TIOC4B/MRES pin. 00: PE13 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4B I/O (MTU) 10: MRES input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 9 PECRL1 8 PE12MD1 0 PE12MD0 0 R/W R/W PE12 Mode Select the function of the PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 pin. 00: PE12 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4A I/O (MTU) 10: Setting prohibited 11: TXD3 output (SCI) PE15MD1 0 PE15MD0 0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 622 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value Register Bit PECRL1 7 PECRL1 6 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PE11 Mode Select the function of the PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 pin. 00: PE11 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3D I/O (MTU) 10: Setting prohibited 11: RXD3 input (SCI) PE11MD1 0 PE11MD0 0 PECRL1 5 PECRL1 4 PE10MD1 0 PE10MD0 0 R/W R/W PE10 Mode Select the function of the PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2 pin. 00: PE10 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3C I/O (MTU) 10: TXD2 output (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 3 PECRL1 2 PE9MD1 PE9MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE9 Mode Select the function of the PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 pin. 00: PE9 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3B I/O (MTU) 10: Setting prohibited 11: SCK3 I/O (SCI) PECRL1 1 PECRL1 0 PE8MD1 PE8MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE8 Mode Select the function of the PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2 pin. 00: PE8 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3A I/O (MTU) 10: SCK2 I/O (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 15 PECRL2 14 PE7MD1 PE7MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE7 Mode Select the function of the PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 pin. 00: PE7 I/O (port) 01: TIOC2B I/O (MTU) 10: RXD2 input (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 623 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PECRL2 13 PECRL2 12 Bit Name PE6MD1 PE6MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PE6 Mode Select the function of the PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3 pin. 00: PE6 I/O (port) 01: TIOC2A I/O (MTU) 10: SCK3 I/O (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 11 PECRL2 10 PE5MD1 PE5MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE5 Mode Select the function of the PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3 pin. 00: PE5 I/O (port) 01: TIOC1B I/O (MTU) 10: TXD3 output (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 9 PECRL2 8 PE4MD1 PE4MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE4 Mode Select the function of the PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/TCK pin. Fixed to TCK input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE4 I/O (port) 01: TIOC1A I/O (MTU) 10: RXD3 input (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 7 PECRL2 6 PE3MD1 PE3MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE3 Mode Select the function of the PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO pin. Fixed to TDO output when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE3 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0D I/O (MTU) 10: DRAK1 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 624 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PECRL2 5 PECRL2 4 Bit Name PE2MD1 PE2MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PE2 Mode Select the function of the PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/TDI pin. Fixed to TDI input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE2 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0C I/O (MTU) 10: DREQ1 input (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 3 PECRL2 2 PE1MD1 PE1MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE1 Mode Select the function of the PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST pin. Fixed to TRST input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE1 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0B I/O (MTU) 10: DRAK0 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 1 PECRL2 0 PE0MD1 PE0MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE0 Mode Select the function of the PE0/TIOC0A/ DREQ0/TMS pin. Fixed to TMS input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE0 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0A I/O (MTU) 10: DREQ0 input (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited Note: * F-ZTAT version only. Setting prohibited for the masked ROM version and ROM less version. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 625 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) • Port E Control Registers L1 and L2 (PECRL1 and PECRL2) in SH7145 Register Bit PECRL1 15 PECRL1 14 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W R/W Description PE15 Mode Select the function of the PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT pin. 00: PE15 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4D I/O (MTU) 10: DACK1 output (DMAC) 11: IRQOUT output (INTC) PECRL1 13 PECRL1 12 PE14MD1 0 PE14MD0 0 R/W R/W PE14 Mode Select the function of the PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 pin. 00: PE14 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4C I/O (MTU) 10: DACK0 output (DMAC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 11 PECRL1 10 PE13MD1 0 PE13MD0 0 R/W R/W PE13 Mode Select the function of the PE13/TIOC4B/MRES pin. 00: PE13 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4B I/O (MTU) 10: MRES input (INTC) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 9 PECRL1 8 PE12MD1 0 PE12MD0 0 R/W R/W PE12 Mode Select the function of the PE12/TIOC4A/TCK/TXD3 pin. Fixed to TCK input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE12 I/O (port) 01: TIOC4A I/O (MTU) 10: Setting prohibited 11: TXD3 output (SCI) PE15MD1 0 PE15MD0 0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 626 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value Register Bit PECRL1 7 PECRL1 6 Bit Name R/W R/W R/W Description PE11 Mode Select the function of the PE11/TIOC3D/TDO/RXD3 pin. Fixed to TDO output when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE11 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3D I/O (MTU) 10: Setting prohibited 11: RXD3 input (SCI) PE11MD1 0 PE11MD0 0 PECRL1 5 PECRL1 4 PE10MD1 0 PE10MD0 0 R/W R/W PE10 Mode Select the function of the PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI pin. Fixed to TDI input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE10 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3C I/O (MTU) 10: TXD2 output (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL1 3 PECRL1 2 PE9MD1 PE9MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE9 Mode Select the function of the PE9/TIOC3B/TRST/SCK3 pin. Fixed to TRST input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE9 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3B I/O (MTU) 10 Setting prohibited 11: SCK3 I/O (SCI) PECRL1 1 PECRL1 0 PE8MD1 PE8MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE8 Mode Select the function of the PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS pin. Fixed to TMS input when using E10A (in DBGMD = high).* 00: PE8 I/O (port) 01: TIOC3A I/O (MTU) 10: SCK2 I/O (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 627 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PECRL2 15 PECRL2 14 Bit Name PE7MD1 PE7MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PE7 Mode Select the function of the PE7/TIOC2B/RXD2 pin. 00: PE7 I/O (port) 01: TIOC2B I/O (MTU) 10: RXD2 input (SCI) 11: Setting prohibited PECRL2 13 PECRL2 12 PE6MD1 PE6MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE6 Mode Select the function of the PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0 pin. 00: PE6 I/O (port) 01: TIOC2A I/O (MTU) 10: SCK3 I/O (SCI) 11: AUDATA0 I/O (AUD)* PECRL2 11 PECRL2 10 PE5MD1 PE5MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE5 Mode Select the function of the PE5/TIOC1B/TXD3/AUDATA1 pin. 00: PE5 I/O (port) 01: TIOC1B I/O (MTU) 10: TXD3 output (SCI) 11: AUDATA1 I/O (AUD)* PECRL2 9 PECRL2 8 PE4MD1 PE4MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE4 Mode Select the function of the PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2 pin. 00: PE4 I/O (port) 01: TIOC1A I/O (MTU) 10: RXD3 input (SCI) 11: AUDATA2 I/O (AUD)* PECRL2 7 PECRL2 6 PE3MD1 PE3MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE3 Mode Select the function of the PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/AUDATA3 pin. 00: PE3 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0D I/O (MTU) 10: DRAK1 output (DMAC) 11: AUDATA3 I/O (AUD)* Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 628 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) Initial Value 0 0 Register Bit PECRL2 5 PECRL2 4 Bit Name PE2MD1 PE2MD0 R/W R/W R/W Description PE2 Mode Select the function of the PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST pin. 00: PE2 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0C I/O (MTU) 10: DREQ1 input (DMAC) 11: AUDRST input (AUD)* PECRL2 3 PECRL2 2 PE1MD1 PE1MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE1 Mode Select the function of the PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD pin. 00: PE1 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0B I/O (MTU) 10: DRAK0 output (DMAC) 11: AUDMD input (AUD)* PECRL2 1 PECRL2 0 PE0MD1 PE0MD0 0 0 R/W R/W PE0 Mode Select the function of the PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK pin. 00: PE0 I/O (port) 01: TIOC0A I/O (MTU) 10: DREQ0 input (DMAC) 11: AUDCK I/O (AUD)* Note: * F-ZTAT version only. Setting prohibited for the masked ROM version and ROM less version. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 629 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.1.11 High-Current Port Control Register (PPCR) The high-current port control register (PPCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used to control six pins (PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST*, PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO*, PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK*, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT) of the high-current ports. This register is not supported in the emulator. Bits are always read as undefined in the emulator. Note: * Only in the SH7145 Bit 7 to 1 Bit Name ⎯ Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 MZIZE 0 R/W High-Current Port High-Impedance This bit selects whether or not the high-current ports are set to high-impedance regardless of the PFC setting when detecting oscillation halt or in software standby mode. 0: Set to high-impedance 1: Not set to high-impedance If this bit is set to 1, the pin state is retained when detecting oscillation halt. For the pin state in software standby mode, refer to appendix A, Pin States. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 630 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 17.2 Usage Notes 1. In this LSI, the same function is available as a multiplexed function on multiple pins. This approach is intended to increase the number of selectable pin functions and to allow the easier design of boards. If two or more pins are specified for one function, however, there are two cautions shown below. ⎯ When the pin function is input Signals input to several pins are formed as one signal through OR or AND logic and the signal is transmitted into the LSI. Therefore, a signal that differs from the input signals may be transmitted to the LSI depending on the input signals in other pins that have the same functions. Table 17.15 shows the transmit forms of input functions allocated to several pins. When using one of the functions shown below in multiple pins, use it with care of signal polarity considering the transmit forms. Table 17.15 Transmit Forms of Input Functions Allocated to Multiple Pins Product SH7144 SH7145 OR Type SCK3, RXD3 SCK3, RXD3, AUDMD*, AUDATA0 to AUDATA3* F-ZTAT version only AND Type IRQ0 to IRQ3, DREQ0, DREQ1 IRQ0 to IRQ7, DREQ0, DREQ1, BREQ, WAIT, ADTRG, AUDRST*, AUDSYNC*, AUDCK* Note: * OR type: Signals input to several pins are formed as one signal through OR logic and the signal is transmitted into the LSI. AND type: Signals input to several pins are formed as one signal through AND logic and the signal is transmitted into the LSI. ⎯ When the pin function is output Each selected pin can output the same function. 2. When the port input is switched from a low level to the DREQ or the IRQ edge for the pins that are multiplexed with input/output and DREQ or IRQ, the corresponding edge is detected. 3. Do not set functions other than those specified in tables 17.13 and 17.14. Otherwise, correct operation cannot be guaranteed. 4. When pin functions are selected, set the port I/O registers (PBIOR and PDIORL) after setting the port control registers (PBCR1, PBCR2, PDCRL1, and PDCRL2). However, when selecting pin functions that are multiplexed with port A, port C, PD31 to PD16 of port D, and port E, no strict attention is required in setting the order of port control registers (PACRH, PACRL1, PACRL2, PCCR, PDCRH1, PDCRH2, PECRL1, and PECRL2) and port I/O registers (PAIORH, PAIORL, PCIOR, PDIORH, and PEIORL). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 631 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 17. Pin Function Controller (PFC) 5. When the system uses the external space, the data I/O pins must be set as follows according to the bus sizes in the CS space set by the bus control register 1 (BCR1). ⎯ When the CS space is the byte size (8-bit size), set all pins, D7 to D0, as data I/O pins. ⎯ When the CS space is the word size (16-bit size), set all pins, D15 to D0, as data I/O pins. ⎯ When the CS space is the longword size (32-bit size), set all pins, D31 to D0, as data I/O pins. If the contents in the external space are read by settings other than above ways, no correct data can be latched. This note applies to entire space, CS0 to CS7. 6. If a power-on reset is input to the RES pin in the state where the pin is a general output pin and set to output 1 (that is, the port control register is in the general I/O state, port I/O register is 1, and port data register is 1), a low level may occur in the pin at a power-on reset input. To avoid this low level from occurring, input a power-on reset after clearing the port I/O register to 0 (general input). The low level above will not occur when an internal power-on reset is input due to a WDT overflow. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 632 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Section 18 I/O Ports The SH7144 has six ports: A to F. Ports A, C, D, and E are 16-bit ports, and port B is a 10-bit port. Port F is an 8-bit input-only port. The SH7145 has six ports: A to F. Port A is a 24-bit port, port B is a 10-bit port, port C is a 16-bit port, port D is a 32-bit port, and port E is a 16-bit port. Port F is an 8-bit input-only port. All the port pins are multiplexed as general input/output pins and special function pins. The functions of the multiplex pins are selected by means of the pin function controller (PFC). Each port is provided with a data register for storing the pin data. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 633 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.1 Port A Port A in the SH7144 is an input/output port with the 16 pins shown in figure 18.1. PA15 (I/O) / CK (output) PA14 (I/O) / RD (output) PA13 (I/O) / WRH (output) PA12 (I/O) / WRL (output) PA11 (I/O) / CS1 (output) PA10 (I/O) / CS0 (output) PA9 (I/O) / TCLKD (input) / IRQ3 (input) Port A PA8 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) / IRQ2 (input) PA7 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / CS3 (output) PA6 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / CS2 (output) PA5 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / DREQ1 (input) / IRQ1 (input) PA4 (I/O) / TXD1 (output) PA3 (I/O) / RXD1 (input) PA2 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / DREQ0 (input) / IRQ0 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TXD0 (output) PA0 (I/O) / RXD0 (input) Figure 18.1 Port A (SH7144) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 634 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Port A in the SH7145 is an input/output port with the 24 pins shown in figure 18.2 PA23 (I/O) / WRHH (output) PA22 (I/O) / WRHL (output) PA21 (I/O) /CS5 (output)*2 PA20 (I/O) /CS4 (output)*2 PA19 (I/O) / BACK (output) / DRAK1 (output) PA18 (I/O) / BREQ (input) / DRAK0 (output) PA17 (I/O) / WAIT (input) PA16 (I/O) / AUDSYNC (I/O)*1 PA15 (I/O) / CK (output) PA14 (I/O) / RD (output) PA13 (I/O) / WRH (output) Port A PA12 (I/O) / WRL (output) PA11 (I/O) / CS1 (output) PA10 (I/O) / CS0 (output) PA9 (I/O) / TCLKD (input) / IRQ3 (input) PA8 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) / IRQ2 (input) PA7 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / CS3 (output) PA6 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / CS2 (output) PA5 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / DREQ1 (input) / IRQ1 (input) PA4 (I/O) / TXD1 (output) PA3 (I/O) / RXD1 (input) PA2 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / DREQ0 (input) / IRQ0 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TXD0 (output) PA0 (I/O) / RXD0 (input) Notes: 1. Only for the F-ZTAT version (no corresponding function in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). 2. Only for the Masked ROM version and ROM less version (no corresponding function in the F-ZTAT version and emulator). Figure 18.2 Port A (SH7145) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 635 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.1.1 Register Descriptions Port A is a 16-bit input/output port in the SH7144; a 24-bit input/output port in the SH7145. Port A has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port A data register H (PADRH) • Port A data register L (PADRL) 18.1.2 Port A Data Registers H and L (PADRH and PADRL) The port A data registers H and L (PADRH and PADRL) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that store port A data. Bits PA15DR to PA0DR correspond to pins PA15 to PA0 (multiplexed functions omitted here) in the SH7144. Bits PA23DR to PA0DR correspond to pins PA23 to PA0 (multiplexed functions omitted here) in the SH7145. When a pin functions is a general output, if a value is written to PADRH or PADRL, that value is output directly from the pin, and if PADRH or PADRL is read, the register value is returned directly regardless of the pin state. When a pin functions is a general input, if PADRH or PADRL is read, the pin state, not the register value, is returned directly. If a value is written to PADRH or PADRL, although that value is written into PADRH or PADRL, it does not affect the pin state. Table 18.1 summarizes port A data register L read/write operations. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 636 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports • PADRH Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: PA23DR PA22DR PA21DR PA20DR PA19DR PA18DR PA17DR PA16DR * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W See table 18.1* 15 to 8 ⎯ These bits are reserved in the SH7144. They are always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. • PADRL Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA15DR PA14DR PA13DR PA12DR PA11DR PA10DR PA9DR PA8DR PA7DR PA6DR PA5DR PA4DR PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description See table 18.1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 637 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Table 18.1 Port A Data Register (PADR) Read/Write Operations • PADRH bits 7 to 0 and PADRL bits 15 to 0 PAIORL, H Pin Function 0 General input Other than general input 1 General output Other than general output Read Pin state Pin state PADRH or L value PADRH or L value Write Can write to PADRH and PADRL, but it has no effect on pin state Can write to PADRH and PADRL, but it has no effect on pin state Value written is output from pin Can write to PADRH and PADRL, but it has no effect on pin state Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 638 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.2 Port B Port B is an input/output port with the 10 pins shown in figure 18.3. PB9 (I/O) / IRQ7 (input) / A21 (output) / ADTRG (input) PB8 (I/O) / IRQ6 (input) / A20 (output) / WAIT (input) PB7 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input) / A19 (output) / BREQ (input) PB6 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input) / A18 (output) / BACK (output) Port B PB5 (I/O) / IRQ3 (input) / POE3 (input) CS7 (output)* PB4 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input) / POE2 (input) CS6 (output)* PB3 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input) / POE1 (input) / SDA0 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) / POE0 (input) / SCL0 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / A17 (output) PB0 (I/O) / A16 (output) Note: * Only for the masked ROM version and ROM less version (no corresponding function in the F-ZTAT version and emulator). Figure 18.3 Port B 18.2.1 Register Descriptions Port B is a 10-bit input/output port. Port B has the following register. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port B data register (PBDR) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 639 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.2.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) The port B data register (PBDR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that stores port B data. Bits PB9DR to PB0DR correspond to pins PB9 to PB0 (multiplexed functions omitted here). When a pin functions is a general output, if a value is written to PBDR, that value is output directly from the pin, and if PBDR is read, the register value is returned directly regardless of the pin state. When a pin functions is a general input, if PBDR is read, the pin state, not the register value, is returned directly. If a value is written to PBDR, although that value is written into PBDR, it does not affect the pin state. Table 18.2 summarizes port B data register read/write operations. Bit 15 to 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value — All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. PB9DR PB8DR PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W See table 18.2 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 640 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Table 18.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) Read/Write Operations • Bits 9 to 0 PBIOR 0 Pin Function General input Other than general input 1 General output Other than general output Read Pin state Pin state PBDR value PBDR value Write Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin state Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin state Value written is output from pin Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin state Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 641 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.3 Port C Port C is an input/output port with 16 pins shown in figure 18.4. PC15 (I/O) / A15 (output) PC14 (I/O) / A14 (output) PC13 (I/O) / A13 (output) PC12 (I/O) / A12 (output) PC11 (I/O) / A11 (output) PC10 (I/O) / A10 (output) PC9 (I/O) / A9 (output) Port C PC8 (I/O) / A8 (output) PC7 (I/O) / A7 (output) PC6 (I/O) / A6 (output) PC5 (I/O) / A5 (output) PC4 (I/O) / A4 (output) PC3 (I/O) / A3 (output) PC2 (I/O) / A2 (output) PC1 (I/O) / A1 (output) PC0 (I/O) / A0 (output) Figure 18.4 Port C 18.3.1 Register Descriptions Port C is a 16-bit input/output port. Port C has the following register. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port C data register (PCDR) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 642 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.3.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) The port C data register (PCDR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that stores port C data. Bits PC15DR to PC0DR correspond to pins PC15 to PC0 (multiplexed functions omitted here). When a pin functions is a general output, if a value is written to PCDR, that value is output directly from the pin, and if PCDR is read, the register value is returned directly regardless of the pin state. When a pin function is a general input, if PCDR is read, the pin state, not the register value, is returned directly. If a value is written to PCDR, although that value is written into PCDR, it does not affect the pin state. Table 18.3 summarizes port C data register read/write operations. • PCDR Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC15DR PC14DR PC13DR PC12DR PC11DR PC10DR PC9DR PC8DR PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description See table 18.3 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 643 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Table 18.3 Port C Data Register (PCDR) Read/Write Operations • Bits 15 to 0 PCIOR 0 Pin Function General input Other than general input 1 General output Other than general output Read Pin state Pin state PCDR value PCDR value Write Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin state Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin state Value written is output from pin Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin state Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 644 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.4 Port D Port D of the SH7144 is an input/output port with 16 pins shown in figure 18.5. PD15 (I/O) / D15 (I/O) / AUDSYNC (I/O)* PD14 (I/O) / D14 (I/O) / AUDCK (I/O)* PD13 (I/O) / D13 (I/O) / AUDMD (input)* PD12 (I/O) /D12 (I/O) / AUDRST (input)* PD11 (I/O) / D11 (I/O) / AUDATA3 (I/O)* PD10 (I/O) / D10 (I/O) / AUDATA2 (I/O)* PD9 (I/O) / D9 (I/O) / AUDATA1 (I/O)* Port D PD8 (I/O) / D8 (I/O) / AUDATA0 (I/O)* PD7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O) PD4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O) Note: * Only for the F-ZTAT version (no corresponding function in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). Figure 18.5 Port D (SH7144) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 645 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Port D of the SH7145 is an input/output port with 32 pins shown in figure 18.6. PD31 (I/O) / D31 (I/O) / ADTRG (input) PD30 (I/O) / D30 (I/O) / IRQOUT (output) PD29 (I/O) / D29 (I/O) / CS3 (output) PD28 (I/O) / D28 (I/O) / CS2 (output) PD27 (I/O) / D27 (I/O) / DACK1 (output) PD26 (I/O) / D26 (I/O) / DACK0 (output) PD25 (I/O) / D25 (I/O) / DREQ1 (input) PD24 (I/O) / D24 (I/O) / DREQ0 (input) PD23 (I/O) / D23 (I/O) / IRQ7 (input) / AUDSYNC (I/O)* PD22 (I/O) / D22 (I/O) / IRQ6 (input) / AUDCK (I/O)* PD21 (I/O) / D21 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input) / AUDMD (input)* PD20 (I/O) / D20 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input) / AUDRST (input)* PD19 (I/O) / D19 (I/O) / IRQ3 (input) / AUDATA3 (I/O)* PD18 (I/O) / D18 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input) / AUDATA2 (I/O)* PD17 (I/O) / D17 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input) / AUDATA1 (I/O)* Port D PD16 (I/O) / D16 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) / AUDATA0 (I/O)* PD15 (I/O) / D15 (I/O) PD14 (I/O) / D14 (I/O) PD13 (I/O) / D13 (I/O) PD12 (I/O) / D12 (I/O) PD11 (I/O) / D11 (I/O) PD10 (I/O) / D10 (I/O) PD9 (I/O) / D9 (I/O) PD8 (I/O) / D8 (I/O) PD7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O) PD4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O) Note: * Only for the F-ZTAT version (no corresponding function in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). Figure 18.6 Port D (SH7145) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 646 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.4.1 Register Descriptions Port D is a 16-bit input/output port in the SH7144; a 32-bit input/output port in the SH7145. Port D has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port D data register H (PDDRH) • Port D data register L (PDDRL) 18.4.2 Port D Data Registers H and L (PDDRH and PDDRL) The port D data registers H and L (PDDRH and PDDRL) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that store port D data. Bits PD15DR to PD0DR correspond to pins PD15 to PD0 (multiplexed functions omitted here) in the SH7144. Bits PD31DR to PD0DR correspond to pins PD31 to PD0 (multiplexed functions omitted here) in the SH7145. When a pin functions is a general output, if a value is written to PDDRH or PDDRL, that value is output directly from the pin, and if PDDRH or PDDRL is read, the register value is returned directly regardless of the pin state. When a pin functions is a general input, if PDDRH or PDDRL is read, the pin state, not the register value, is returned directly. If a value is written to PDDRH or PDDRL, although that value is written into PDDRH or PDDRL, it does not affect the pin state. Table 18.4 summarizes port D data register L read/write operations. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 647 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports • PDDRH Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PD31DR PD30DR PD29DR PD28DR PD27DR PD26DR PD25DR PD24DR PD23DR PD22DR PD21DR PD20DR PD19DR PD18DR PD17DR PD16DR * Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description See table 18.4* These bits are reserved in the SH7144. They are always read as 0 and the write value should always be 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 648 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports • PDDRL Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD15DR PD14DR PD13DR PD12DR PD11DR PD10DR PD9DR PD8DR PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description See table 18.4 Table 18.4 Port D Data Register (PDDR) Read/Write Operations • PDDRH bits 15 to 0 and PDDRL bits 15 to 0 PDIORL, H Pin Function 0 General input Other than general input 1 General output Other than general output Read Pin state Pin state PDDRH or L value PDDRH or L value Write Can write to PDDRH or PDDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Can write to PDDRH or PDDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Value written is output from pin Can write to PDDRH or PDDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 649 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.5 Port E Port E in the SH7144 is an input/output port with the 16 pins shown in figure 18.7. PE15 (I/O) / TIOC4D (I/O) / DACK1 (output) / IRQOUT (output) PE14 (I/O) / TIOC4C (I/O) / DACK0 (output) PE13 (I/O) / TIOC4B (I/O) / MRES (input) PE12 (I/O) / TIOC4A (I/O) / TXD3 (output) PE11 (I/O) / TIOC3D (I/O) / RXD3 (input) PE10 (I/O) / TIOC3C (I/O) / TXD2 (output) PE9 (I/O) / TIOC3B (I/O) / SCK3 (I/O) Port E PE8 (I/O) / TIOC3A (I/O) / SCK2 (I/O) PE7 (I/O) / TIOC2B (I/O) / RXD2 (input) PE6 (I/O) / TIOC2A (I/O) / SCK3 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) / TIOC1B (I/O) / TXD3 (output) PE4 (I/O) / TIOC1A (I/O) / RXD3 (input) / TCK (input)* PE3 (I/O) / TIOC0D (I/O) / DRAK1 (output) / TDO (output)* PE2 (I/O) / TIOC0C (I/O) / DREQ1 (input) / TDI (input)* PE1 (I/O) / TIOC0B (I/O) / DRAK0 (output) / TRST (input)* PE0 (I/O) / TIOC0A (I/O) / DREQ0 (input) / TMS (input)* Note: * Only for the F-ZTAT version (no corresponding function in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). Figure 18.7 Port E (SH7144) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 650 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Port E in the SH7145 is an input/output port with the 16 pins shown in figure 18.8. PE15 (I/O) / TIOC4D (I/O) / DACK1 (output) / IRQOUT (output) PE14 (I/O) / TIOC4C (I/O) / DACK0 (output) PE13 (I/O) / TIOC4B (I/O) / MRES (input) PE12 (I/O) / TIOC4A (I/O) / TCK (input)* / TXD3 (output) PE11 (I/O) / TIOC3D (I/O) / TDO (output)* / RXD3 (input) PE10 (I/O) / TIOC3C (I/O) / TXD2 (output) / TDI (input)* PE9 (I/O) / TIOC3B (I/O) / TRST (input)* / SCK3 (I/O) Port E PE8 (I/O) / TIOC3A (I/O) / SCK2 (I/O) / TMS (input)* PE7 (I/O) / TIOC2B (I/O) / RXD2 (input) PE6 (I/O) / TIOC2A (I/O) / SCK3 (I/O) / AUDATA0 (I/O)* PE5 (I/O) / TIOC1B (I/O) / TXD3 (output) / AUDATA1 (I/O)* PE4 (I/O) / TIOC1A (I/O) / RXD3 (input) / AUDATA2 (I/O)* PE3 (I/O) / TIOC0D (I/O) / DRAK1 (output) / AUDATA3 (I/O)* PE2 (I/O) / TIOC0C (I/O) / DREQ1 (input) / AUDRST (input)* PE1 (I/O) / TIOC0B (I/O) / DRAK0 (output) / AUDMD (input)* PE0 (I/O) / TIOC0A (I/O) / DREQ0 (input) / AUDCK (I/O)* Note: * Only for the F-ZTAT version (no corresponding function in the masked ROM version and ROM less version). Figure 18.8 Port E (SH7145) 18.5.1 Register Descriptions Port E has the following register. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port E data register L (PEDRL) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 651 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.5.2 Port E Data Register L (PEDRL) The port E data register L (PEDRL) is a 16-bit readable/writable registers that stores port E data. Bits PE15DR to PE0DR correspond to pins PE15 to PE0 (multiplexed functions omitted here). When a pin functions is a general output, if a value is written to PEDRL, that value is output directly from the pin, and if PEDRL is read, the register value is returned directly regardless of the pin state. When a pin functions is a general input, if PEDRL is read, the pin state, not the register value, is returned directly. If a value is written to PEDRL, although that value is written into PEDRL it does not affect the pin state. Table 18.5 summarizes port E data register read/write operations. • PEDRL Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE15DR PE14DR PE13DR PE12DR PE11DR PE10DR PE9DR PE8DR PE7DR PE6DR PE5DR PE4DR PE3DR PE2DR PE1DR PE0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description See table 18.5 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 652 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Table 18.5 Port E Data Register L (PEDRL) Read/Write Operations • Bits 15 to 0 in PEDRL PEIOR 0 Pin Function General input Other than general input 1 General output Other than general output Read Pin state Pin state PEDRL value PEDRL value Write Can write to PEDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Can write to PEDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Value written is output from pin Can write to PEDRL, but it has no effect on pin state Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 653 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports 18.6 Port F Port F is an input-only port with the eight pins shown in figure 18.9. PF7 (input) / AN7 (input) PF6 (input) / AN6 (input) PF5 (input) / AN5 (input) PF4 (input) / AN4 (input) Port F PF3 (input) / AN3 (input) PF2 (input) / AN2 (input) PF1 (input) / AN1 (input) PF0 (input) / AN0 (input) Figure 18.9 Port F 18.6.1 Register Descriptions Port F is an 8-bit input-only port. Port F has the following register. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • Port F data register (PFDR) 18.6.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) The port F data register (PFDR) is an 8-bit read-only register that stores port F data. Bits PF7DR to PF0DR correspond to pins PF7 to PF0 (multiplexed functions omitted here). Any value written into these bits is ignored, and there is no effect on the state of the pins. When any of the bits are read, the pin state rather than the bit value is read directly. However, when an A/D converter analog input is being sampled, values of 1 are read out. Table 18.6 summarizes port F data register read/write operations. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 654 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7DR PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR Initial Value 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* 0/1* R/W R R R R R R R R Description See table 18.6* Notes: * Initial values are dependent on the state of the pins. Table 18.6 Port F Data Register (PFDR) Read/Write Operations • Bits 7 to 0 Pin Function General input ANn input (analog input) Read Pin state 1 Write Ignored (no effect on pin state) Ignored (no effect on pin state) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 655 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 18. I/O Ports Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 656 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Section 19 Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) The features of the flash memory in the flash memory version are summarized below. The block diagram of the flash memory is shown in figure 19.1. 19.1 Features • Size: 256 kbytes • Programming/erasing methods ⎯ The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 64 kbytes × 3 blocks, 32 kbytes × 1 block, and 4 kbytes × 8 blocks. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. • Reprogramming capability See section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. • Two on-board programming modes ⎯ Boot mode ⎯ User program mode ⎯ On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed. • PROM programmer mode ⎯ Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. • Automatic bit rate adjustment ⎯ With data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host computer. • Programming/erasing protection ⎯ Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing/verifying. ROM3251A_020020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 657 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Internal address bus Internal data bus (32 bits) Module bus FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 RAMER Bus interface/controller Operating mode FWP pin Mode pin Flash memory (256 kbytes) [Legend] FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: RAMER: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 RAM emulation register Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 658 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.2 Mode Transitions When the mode pin and the FWP pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 19.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. The boot mode, user program mode, and PROM programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash memory. The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 19.1. Figure 19.3 shows boot mode, and figure 19.4 shows user program mode. *1 User mode (on-chip ROM enabled) MD1 = 1, FWP = 1 RES = 0 Reset state MD1 = 1, FWP = 0 RES = 0 RES = 0 *2 RES = 0 PROM programmer mode FWP = 0 FWP = 1 MD1 = 0, FWP = 0 *1 User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. RAM emulation possible 2. This LSI transits to PROM programmer mode by using the dedicated PROM programmer. Figure 19.2 Flash Memory State Transitions Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 659 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode Total erase Block erase Programming control program* Yes No Program/program-verify User Program Mode Yes Yes Erase/erase-verify Program/program-verify Emulation Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 660 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 1. Initial state The old program version or data remains written in the flash memory. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. Programming control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in this LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is started and the programming control program in the host is transferred to RAM via SCI communication. The boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Host Programming control program New application program New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area SCI Application program (old version) Application program (old version) Programming control program 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Host 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Flash memory erase Programming control program This LSI SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area New application program Programming control program SCI Program execution state Figure 19.3 Boot Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 661 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 1. Initial state The FWE assessment program that confirms that user program mode has been entered, and the program that will transfer the programming/erase control program from flash memory to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. Host Programming/ erase control program New application program New application program 2. Programming/erase control program transfer When user program mode is entered, user software confirms this fact, executes transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. Host This LSI Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program This LSI SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program SCI RAM Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. Host 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program This LSI SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Programming/ erase control program SCI RAM Transfer program Flash memory erase New application program Program execution state Figure 19.4 User Program Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 662 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.3 Block Configuration Figure 19.5 shows the block configuration of 256-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash memory is divided into 64 kbytes (3 blocks), 32 kbytes (1 block), and 4 kbytes (8 blocks). Erasing is performed in these units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits H'00 or H'80. EB0 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB1 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB2 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB3 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB4 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB5 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB6 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB7 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB8 Erase unit 32 kbytes EB9 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB10 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB11 Erase unit 64 kbytes H'000000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'00007F H'000FFF H'001000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'001FFF H'002000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'003000 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'002FFF —————————— H'004000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'005000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'006000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'007000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'008000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'010000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'020000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'030000 Programming unit: 128 bytes —————————— H'003FFF H'004FFF H'005FFF H'006FFF H'007FFF H'00FFFF H'01FFFF H'02FFFF H'03FFFF Figure 19.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 663 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.4 Input/Output Pins The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 19.2. Table 19.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name RES FWP* MD1 MD0 TxD1 (PA4)* 2 2 1 I/O Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Flash programming/erasing protection by hardware Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input RxD1 (PA3)* Notes: 1. Protection cannot be made to flash memory programming/erasing regardless of the setting of the FWP pin when using E10A (when DBGMD is high) 2. In boot mode, SCI pins are fixed, and PA3 and PA4 pins are used as SCI pins. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 664 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.5 Register Descriptions The flash memory has the following registers. For details on register addresses and register states during each processing, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) Erase block register 1 (EBR1) Erase block register 2 (EBR2) RAM emulation register (RAMER) Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) 19.5.1 FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 19.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Bit 7 Bit Name FEW Initial Value 1/0 R/W R Description Flash Write Enable* Reflects the input level at the FWP pin. It is set to 1 when a low level is input to the FWP pin, and cleared to 0 when a high level is input. 6 SWE 0 R/W Software Write Enable When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW bit is 1, flash memory programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 bits and all EBR1 and EBR2 bits cannot be set. 5 ESU 0 R/W Erase Setup When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW and SWE bits are 1, the flash memory changes to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup state is cancelled. 4 PSU 0 R/W Program Setup When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW and SWE bits are 1, the flash memory changes to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program setup state is cancelled. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 665 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Bit 3 Bit Name EV Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Erase-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW and SWE bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify mode is cancelled. 2 PV 0 R/W Program-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW and SWE bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-verify mode is cancelled. 1 E 0 R/W Erase When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW, SWE and ESU bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled. 0 P 0 R/W Program When this bit is set to 1 while the FEW, SWE and PSU bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled. Note: * The value of this bit is 1 when using E10A (when DBGMD is high). 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. Bit 7 Bit Name FLER Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state. See section 19.9.3, Error Protection, for details. 6 to 0 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 666 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when a high level is input to the FWP pin. It is also initialized to H'00, when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0 regardless of value in the FWP pin. Do not set more than one bit at a time in EBR1 and EBR2, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB7 (H'007000 to H'007FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB6 (H'006000 to H'006FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB5 (H'005000 to H'005FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB4 (H'004000 to H'004FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB3 (H'003000 to H'003FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB2 (H'002000 to H'002FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB1 (H'001000 to H'001FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB0 (H'000000 to H'000FFF) are to be erased. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 667 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) EBR2 specifies the flash memory erase block. EBR2 is initialized to H'00 when a high level is input to the FWP pin. It is also initialized to H'00, when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0 regardless of value in the FWP pin. Do not set more than one bit at a time in EBR1 and EBR2, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0. Bit 7 to 4 Bit Name Initial Value — All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 3 2 1 0 EB11 EB10 EB9 EB8 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB11 (H'030000 to H'03FFFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB10 (H'020000 to H'02FFFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB9 (H'010000 to H'01FFFF) will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB8 (H'008000 to H'00FFFF) will be erased. 19.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating real-time flash memory programming. RAMER settings should be made in user mode or user program mode. To ensure correct operation of the emulation function, the ROM for which RAM emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately after this register has been modified. Normal execution of an access immediately after register modification is not guaranteed. Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 3 RAMS 0 R/W RAM Select Specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory emulation in RAM. When RAMS = 1, the flash memory is overlapped with part of RAM, and all flash memory blocks are program/erase-protected. When RAMS = 0, the RAM emulation function is disabled. 15 to 4 — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 668 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value RAM2 RAM1 RAM0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Flash Memory Area Selection When the RAMS bit is set to 1, these bits specify one of the following flash memory areas to be overlapped with part of RAM. 000: H'00000000 to H'00000FFF (EB0) 001: H'00001000 to H'00001FFF (EB1) 010: H'00002000 to H'00002FFF (EB2) 011: H'00003000 to H'00003FFF (EB3) 100: H'00004000 to H'00004FFF (EB4) 101: H'00005000 to H'00005FFF (EB5) 110: H'00006000 to H'00006FFF (EB6) 111: H'00007000 to H'00007FFF (EB7) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 669 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.6 On-Board Programming Modes There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables onboard programming/erasing, and PROM programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the MD pin settings and FWP pin setting, as shown in table 19.3. When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM via SCI1. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed. This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode, individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control program prepared by the user. Table 19.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes MD1 0 MD0 0 1 1 0 1 User program mode FWP 0 LSI State after Reset End Boot mode Expanded mode Single-chip mode Expanded mode Single-chip mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 670 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.6.1 Boot Mode Table 19.4 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming control program. 1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in section 19.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 2. The SCI1 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. 3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI1 bit rate to match that of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be pulled up on the board if necessary. 4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 19.5. 5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'FFFFE800 to H'FFFFFFFF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program. 6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations by SCI1 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of write data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high. The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc. 7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 25 states, and then setting the mode (MD) pins. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow occurs. 8. Do not change the MD pin input levels in boot mode. 9. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 671 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.4 Boot Mode Operation Host Operation Item Boot mode start Processing Contents Communications Contents LSI Operation Processing Contents Branches to boot program at reset-start. Boot program initiation Bit rate adjustment Continuously transmits data H'00 at specified bit rate. H'00, H'00 ...... H'00 Transmits data H'55 when data H'00 is received error-free. Receives data H'AA. Transfer of programming control program Transmits number of bytes (N) of programming control as program to be transferred 2-byte data (lower byte following upper byte) Transmits 1-byte of programming control program (repeated for N times) Flash memory erase H'00 H'55 H'AA • Measures low-level period of receive data H'00. • Calculates bit rate and sets it in BRR of SCI_1. • Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment end indication. Transmits data H'AA to host when data H'55 is received. Upper byte and lower byte Echobacks the 2-byte data received. Echoback H'XX Echoback Echobacks received data to host and also transfers it to RAM (repeated for N times) Boot program erase error Receives data H'AA. H'FF H'AA Checks flash memory data, erases all flash memory blocks in case of written data existing, and transmits data H'AA to host. (If erase could not be done, transmits data H'FF to host and aborts operation.) Branches to programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM and starts execution. Table 19.5 Peripheral Clock (Pφ) Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate Is Possible Host Bit Rate 9,600 bps 19,200 bps Peripheral Clock Frequency Range of LSI 4 to 40 MHz 8 to 40 MHz Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 672 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.6.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM or external memory, and execute it. Figure 19.6 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode. Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 19.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Reset-start Program/erase? Yes Transfer user program/erase control program to RAM Branch to user program/erase control program in RAM No Branch to flash memory application program FWP = low* Execute user program/erase control program (flash memory rewrite) FWP = high Branch to flash memory application program Note: * Do not constantly apply a low level to the FWP pin. Only apply a low level to the FWP pin when programming or erasing the flash memory. To prevent excessive programming or excessive erasing, while a low level is being applied to the FWP pin, activate the watchdog timer in case of handling CPU runaways. Figure 19.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 673 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.7 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM A setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to overlap with the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in real time. Emulation can be performed in user mode or user program mode. Figure 19.7 shows an example of emulation of real-time flash memory programming. 1. Set RAMER to overlap part of RAM with the area for which real-time programming is required. 2. Emulation is performed using the overlapped RAM. 3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, thus releasing the RAM overlap. 4. The data written in the overlapped RAM is written into the flash memory area. Start of emulation program Set RAMER Write tuning data to overlapped RAM Execute application program No Tuning OK? Yes Clear RAMER Write to flash memory emulation block End of emulation program Figure 19.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 674 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Figure 19.8 shows a sample procedure for flash memory block area overlapping. 1. The RAM area to be overlapped is fixed at a 4-kbyte area in the range H'FFFFE000 to H'FFFFEFFF. 2. The flash memory area to be overlapped is selected by RAMER from a 4-kbyte area of the EB0 to EB7 blocks. 3. The overlapped RAM area can be accessed from both the flash memory addresses and RAM addresses. 4. When the RAMS bit in RAMER is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all flash memory blocks (emulation protection). In this state, setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 to 1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. 5. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase algorithm. 6. Block area EB0 contains the vector table. When performing RAM emulation, the vector table is needed in the overlapped RAM. This area can be accessed from both the flash memory addresses and RAM addressed. H'00000 H'01000 H'02000 H'03000 H'04000 H'05000 H'06000 H'07000 H'08000 H'FFFFE000 Flash Memory EB8 to EB11 H'3FFFF On-chip RAM H'FFFFFFFF H'FFFFEFFF EB0 EB1 EB2 EB3 EB4 EB5 EB6 EB7 Figure 19.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation (RAM[2:0] = B'000) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 675 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase the flash memory in onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 and FLMCR2 settings, the flash memory operates in one of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in section 19.8.1, Program/Program-Verify Mode and section 19.8.2, Erase/Erase-Verify Mode, respectively. 19.8.1 Program/Program-Verify Mode When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in figure 19.9 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. 1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which programming has already been performed. 2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to figure 19.9. 4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory destination area must be H'00 or H'80. 5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 19.9 shows the allowable programming time. 6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed. 7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address to be read. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 8. The number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence to the same bit should not exceed the maximum number of programming (N). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 676 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Write pulse application subroutine Start of programming Apply Write Pulse Enable WDT Set PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tspsu) μs Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsp10, tsp30, or tsp200) μs Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcp) μs Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcpsu) μs Disable WDT START Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tsswe) μs Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. *7 *4 *7 Start of programming n=1 m=0 *5*7 Successively write 128-byte data from reprogram *1 End of programming data area in RAM to flash memory Sub-Routine-Call *7 Apply Write Pulse (tsp30 or tsp200) Set PV bit in FLMCR1 See note *6 for pulse width *7 Wait (tspv) μs H'FF dummy write to verify address *7 Wait (tspvr) μs Read verify data Increment address *7 *2 NG m=1 n←n+1 End Sub Note: 6. Write Pulse Width Number of Writes n Write Time (tsp) μs Write data = verify data? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 tsp30 tsp30 tsp30 tsp30 tsp30 tsp30 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 OK 6≥n? NG OK Additional-programming data computation Transfer additional-programming data to additional-programming data area Reprogram data computation *4 *3 *4 Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area 128-byte data verification completed? NG 998 999 1000 tsp200 tsp200 tsp200 OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcpv) μs 6 ≥ n? * Use a tsp10 write pulse for additional programming. *7 NG Reprogram RAM Program data storage area (128 bytes) OK Successively write 128-byte data from additionalprogramming data area in RAM to flash memory *1 Apply Write Pulse (tsp10) (Additional programming) Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes) m=0? NG *7 n ≥ N? NG Additional-programming data storage area (128 bytes) OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcswe) μs End of programming OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (tcswe) μs Programming failure *7 Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the start address to be written to must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 32-bit (longword) units. 3. Reprogram data is determined by the operation shown in the table below (comparison between the data stored in the program data area and the verify data). Bits for which the reprogram data is 0 are programmed in the next reprogramming loop. Therefore, even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to programming once again if the subsequent verify operation ends in failure. 4. A 128-byte area for the storage of programming data, a 128-byte area for the storage of reprogramming data, and a 128-byte area for the storage of additionalprogramming data must be provided in RAM. The contents of the reprogram data area and additional-program data area are modified as programming proceeds. 5. A write pulse of 30 μs or 200 μs is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See note 6 for details of the pulse widths. When writing of additional-programming data is executed, a 10 μs write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied. 7. The wait times and value of N are shown in section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Reprogram Data Computation Table Original Data Verify Data Reprogram Data Additional-Programming Data Computation Table (X) 1 0 1 1 Still in erased state; no action Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram (D) 0 0 1 1 (V) 0 1 0 1 Reprogram Data (X') 0 0 1 1 Verify Data Additional(V) Programming Data (Y) 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 Comments Additional programming to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Figure 19.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 677 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify Mode When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 19.10 should be followed. 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. 2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block register 1 (EBR1) and the erase block register 2 (EBR2). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. 3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time. 4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed. 5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to the read address. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before. The number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence should not exceed the maximum number of erasing (N). 19.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons: 1. An interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured. 2. If an interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions. 3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be carried out. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 678 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) *1 Erase start SWE bit ← 1 Wait (tSSWE) μs n←1 Set EBR1 and EBR2 Enable WDT ESU bit ← 1 Wait (tSESU) E bit ← 1 Wait (tSE) E bit ← 0 Wait (tCE) ESU bit ← 0 Wait (tCESU) Disable WDT EV bit ← 1 Wait (tSEV) Set block start address as verify address *3 H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (tSEVR) Read verify data No *2 n←n+1 Increment address Verify data = all 1s? Yes No Last address of block? Yes EV bit ← 0 Wait (tCEV) No *4 EV bit ← 0 Wait (tCEV) No n ≤ 100? Yes All erase block erased? Yes SWE bit ← 0 Wait (tCSWE) End of erasing SWE bit ← 0 Wait (tCSWE) Erase failure Notes: 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. 2. Verify data is read in 32-bit (longword) units. 3. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block register 1 (EBR1) and the erase block register 2 (EBR2). 4. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. Figure 19.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 679 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.9 Program/Erase Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 19.9.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), erase block register 1 (EBR1), and erase block register 2 (EBR2) are initialized. Protect Function Item FWP pin protect Description Program Erase Yes When a high level is input to the FWP pin, Yes FLMCR1, EBR 1, and EBR 2 are initialized, and the program/erase protection state is entered.* In the reset state (including the reset state when the WDT overflows) and standby mode, FLMCR1, EBR 1, and EBR 2 are initialized, and the program/erase protection state is entered. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. Yes Reset/standby protect Yes Note: * Protection by the FWP pin cannot be made when using E10A (when DBGMD is high). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 680 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.9.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. Protect Function Item SWE bit protect Description When the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is cleared to 0, all blocks are program/erase-protected. (This setting should be carried out in on-chip RAM or external memory.) By setting the erase block register 1 (EBR1) and the erase block register 2 (EBR2), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When both EBR1 and EBR2 are set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. Emulation protect When the RAMS bit in RAMER is set to 1, all blocks are program/erase-protected. Yes Yes Program Yes Erase Yes Block protect — Yes 19.9.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is forcibly aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered. • When the flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including vector read and instruction fetch) • Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing • When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode is forcibly aborted at the point when the error is detected. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P1 or E1 bit. However, PV and EV bit settings are retained, Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 681 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) and a transition can be made to verify mode. The error protection state can be cancelled by the power-on reset only. 19.10 PROM Programmer Mode In PROM programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a socket adapter, just as for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas 256-kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device type (FZTAT256V3A). 19.11 Usage Note 19.11.1 Module Standby Mode Setting Access to flash memory can be enabled/disabled by the module standby control register (MSTCR1). The initial value enables access to flash memory. Flash memory access is disabled by setting the module standby control register. For details, see section 24, Power-Down Modes. 19.11.2 Notes when Converting the F-ZTAT Versions to the Masked-ROM Versions Please note the following when converting the F-ZTAT versions to the masked-ROM versions, with using the F-ZTAT application software. In the masked-ROM version, addresses of the flash memory registers (refer to section 25.1, Register Addresses Table (In the Order from Lower Addresses)) return undefined value if read. When the F-ZTAT application software is used in the masked-ROM version, the FWP pin level cannot be determined. When converting the program, make sure the reprogramming (erasing/programming) part of the flash memory and the RAM emulation part not to be initiated. In the masked-ROM version, boot mode pin setting should not be performed. Note: This difference applies to all the F-ZTAT versions and all the masked-ROM versions that have different ROM size. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 682 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) 19.11.3 Notes on Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode, the RAM emulation function, and programmer mode are summarized below. Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing: Appling excessive voltage beyond the specification can permanently damage the device. Use an EPROM programmer that supports the Renesas' microcomputer device having on-chip 256-kbyte flash memory. Use only the specified socket adapter, otherwise a serious damage may occur. Powering on and off (see figures 19.11 to 19.13): Do not apply a low level to the FWP pin until VCC has been stabilized. Also, drive the FWP pin high before turning off VCC. If VCC is to be applied or disconnected, fix the FWP pin level at VCC and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state in advance. Conditions for this power-on and power-off timing should also be applied in the event of a power failure and subsequent recovery. FWP application/disconnection (see figures 19.11 to 19.13): If VCC is on or off while low level is applied to FWP pin, a voltage surge from low level on the RESET pin may cause unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory. Applying voltage to FWP should be carried out while MCU operation is in a stable condition. If MCU operation is not stable, fix the FWP pin high and set the protection state. The following points must be observed concerning FWP application and disconnection to prevent unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory: • Apply voltage to FWP while the VCC voltage is stable enough to satisfy the specification voltage range. • In boot mode, apply voltage to FWP or disconnect it during a reset. • Prior to applying voltage while FWP pin is in low level in boot mode, ensure that the RESET pin level is surely kept low despite the applying voltage is rising to VCC. Note that in a case where ICs for reset are used, the voltage level of RESET pin can transiently exceed 1/2 VCC while VCC is rising. • In user program mode, FWP can be switched between high and low level regardless of the reset state. FWP input can also be switched during execution of a program in flash memory. • Apply voltage to FWP while programs are not running away. • Disconnect FWP only when the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, P, and E bits in FLMCR1 are cleared. Make sure that the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, P, and E bits are not set by mistake when applying voltage to FWP pin or disconnecting. Do not apply a constant low level to the FWP pin: If a program runs away while low level is applied to FWP pin, incorrect programming or erasing may occur. Apply a low level to the FWP Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 683 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) pin only when programming or erasing flash memory. Avoid creating a system configuration in which a low level is constantly applied to the FWP pin. Also, while a low level is applied to the FWP pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent excess programming or excess erasing due to program runaway, etc. Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory: The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against program runaway, etc. Do not set or clear the SWE bit during execution of a program in flash memory: Wait for at least 100 μs after clearing the SWE bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten. Access flash memory only for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Also, do not clear the SWE bit during programming, erasing, or verifying. Similarly, when using the RAM emulation function while a low level is being input to the FWP pin, the SWE bit must be cleared before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. However, the RAM area overlapping flash memory space can be read and written to regardless of whether the SWE bit is set or cleared. Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased: All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during FWP application to give priority to program/erase operations. Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming: In onboard programming, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with the entire programming unit block erased. Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the EPROM programmer: Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the EPROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming: Casual contact with either of these by hand or something while programming can generate a transient noise on the FWP and RESET pins or cause incorrect programming or erasing due to bad electrical contact. Reset the flash memory before turning on the power: If VCC is applied to the RESET pin while in high state, mode signals are not correctly downloaded, causing MCU's runaway. In a case where FWP pin is in low state, incorrect programming or erasing can occur. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 684 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Apply the reset signal while SWE is low to reset the flash memory during its operation: The reset signal is applied at least 100 μs after the SWE bit has been cleard. Comply with power-on procedure designated by the programmer maker: When executing an on-board writing with a programmer, incorrect programming or erasing may occur unless the power-on procedure designated by the programmer makers is applied. Wait time: tsswe Programmable/ erasable Wait time: 100μs CK tOSC1 min 0μs Vcc tMDS*3 min 0μs FWP MD3 to MD0*1 tMDS*3 RES SWE set SWE bit SWE clear Prohibition time of accessing flash memory (tsswe : Wait time after SWE set)*2 Reprogrammable time of flash memory (Prohibition of program execution on flash memory and of reading data except verify) Notes: 1. Levels of mode pins (MD3 to MD0) should be fixed to pull down or pull up until power-off except mode switchimg occasion. 2. See section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. 3. See section 26.3.3, Control Signal Timing. Figure 19.11 Power On/Off Timing (Boot Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 685 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Programmable/ erasable Wait time: tsswe Wait time:100μs CK tOSC1 min 0μs Vcc FWP MD3 to MD0*1 tMDS*3 RES SWE set SWE bit SWE clear Prohibition time of accessing flash memory (tsswe : Wait time after SWE set)*2 Reprogrammable time of flash memory (Prohibition of program execution on flash memory and of reading data except verify) Notes: 1. Levels of mode pins (MD3 to MD0) should be fixed to pull down or pull up until power-off except mode switchimg occasion. 2. See section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. 3. See section 26.3.3, Control Signal Timing. Figure 19.12 Power On/Off Timing (User Program Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 686 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Wait Programmable/ time: tsswe erasable Wait Programmable/ time: tsswe erasable Wait Programmable/ time: tsswe erasable Wait Programmable/ time: tsswe erasable *4 *4 *4 *4 CK tOSC1 Vcc tMDS*2 min 0μs FWP tMDS*2 MD3 to MD0 tMDS*2 tRESW RES SWE set SWE clear SWE bit Mode switch*1 Boot Mode Mode switch*1 User mode User program mode User mode User program mode Prohibition time of accessing flash memory (tsswe: Wait time after SWE set)*3 Reprogrammable time of flash memory (Prohibition of program execution on flash memory and of reading data except verify) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. When transiting to boot mode or transiting to other modes from boot mode, mode switch by RES input is necessary. See section 26.3.3, Control Signal Timing. See section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Wait time: 100 μs Figure 19.13 Mode Transit Timing (Example: Boot Mode → User Mode ⇔ User Program Mode) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 687 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 19. Flash Memory (F-ZTAT Version) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 688 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 20. Mask ROM Section 20 Mask ROM This LSI is available with 256 kbytes of on-chip mask ROM. The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU, direct memory access controller (DMAC), and data transfer controller (DTC) through a 32-bit data bus (figure 20.1). The CPU, DMAC, and DTC can access the on-chip ROM in 8, 16 and 32-bit widths. Data in the on-chip ROM can always be accessed in one cycle. Internal data bus (32 bits) H'00000000 H'00000004 H'00000001 H'00000005 H'00000002 H'00000006 H'00000003 H'00000007 On-chip ROM H'0003FFFC H'0003FFFD H'0003FFFE H'0003FFFF Figure 20.1 Mask ROM Block Diagram The operating mode determines whether the on-chip ROM is valid or not. The operating mode is selected using mode-setting pins FWP and MD3-MD0 as shown in table 3.1. If you are using the on-chip ROM, select mode 2 or mode 3; if you are not, select mode 0 or 1. The on-chip ROM is allocated to addresses H'00000000 to H'0003FFFF of memory area 0. 20.1 Usage Note • Module Standby Mode Setting Access to the on-chip ROM can be enabled/disabled by the module standby control register (MSTCR1). The initial value enables the on-chip ROM operation. On-chip ROM access is disabled by setting the module standby mode. For details, see section 24, Power-Down Modes. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 689 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 20. Mask ROM Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 690 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 21. RAM Section 21 RAM This LSI has an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU, direct memory access controller (DMAC), data transfer controller (DTC), and advanced user debugger (AUD)* by a 32-bit data bus, enabling 8, 16, or 32-bit width access to data in the onchip RAM. Data in the on-chip RAM can always be accessed in one cycle, providing high-speed access that makes this RAM ideal for use as a program area, stack area, or data area. The on-chip RAM is allocated to address H'FFFFE000 to H'FFFFFFFF. The contents of the on-chip RAM are retained in sleep mode and standby mode, and by a power-on reset and a manual reset. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR). For details on the system control register (SYSCR), refer to section 24.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Note: * Flash version only. 21.1 Usage Note • Module Standby Mode Setting RAM can be enabled/disabled by the module standby control register (MSTCR1). The initial value enables RAM operation. RAM access is disabled by setting the module standby mode. For details, see section 24, Power-Down Modes. RAM0200A_010020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 691 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 21. RAM Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 692 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) Section 22 User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.1 Overview The user debugging interface (H-UDI) provides data transfer and interrupt request functions. The H-UDI performs serial transfer by means of external signal control. 22.1.1 Features The H-UDI has the following features: • Five test signals (TCK, TDI, TDO, TMS, and TRST) • TAP controller • Two instructions ⎯ Bypass mode Test mode conforming to IEEE 1149.1 ⎯ H-UDI interrupt H-UDI interrupt request to INTC Note: This LSI does not support test modes other than the bypass mode. HUD0001A_010020020700 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 693 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the H-UDI. TCK TMS TAP controller Internal bus controller TRST H-UDI interrupt signal TDI Decoder SDIR SDSR SDBPR SDDRH SDDRL TDO Mux [Legend] SDIR: SDSR: SDDRH: SDDRL: SDBPR: Instruction register Status register Data register H Data register L Bypass register TCK: Test clock TMS: Test mode select TRST: Test reset TDI: Test data input TDO: Test data output Figure 22.1 H-UDI Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 694 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral bus 16 Shift register 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.2 Input/Output Pins Table 22.1 shows the H-UDI pin configuration. Table 22.1 H-UDI Pins Pin Name Test clock Abbreviation TCK I/O Input Function Test Clock Input TCK supplies an independent clock to the H-UDI. As the clock input to TCK is supplied directly to the H-UDI, a clock waveform with a duty cycle close to 50% should be input (see section 26, Electrical Characteristics, for details). Test mode select Test data input TMS Input Test Mode Select Input Signal TMS is sampled at the rising edge of TCK. TMS controls the internal state of the TAP controller. TDI Input Serial Data Input TDI performs serial input of instructions and data to HUDI registers. TDI is sampled at the rising edge of TCK. TDO Output Serial Data Output TDO performs serial output of instructions and data from H-UDI registers. Transfer is synchronized with TCK. When no signal is being output, TDO goes to the high-impedance state. TRST Input Test Reset Input Signal TRST is used to initialize the H-UDI asynchronously. Test data output Test reset Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 695 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.3 Register Description The H-UDI has the following registers. For the register addresses and register states in each operating mode, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • • Instruction register (SDIR) Status register (SDSR) Data register H (SDDRH) Data register L (SDDRL) Bypass register (SDBPR) Instructions and data can be input to the instruction register (SDIR) and data register (SDDR) by serial transfer from the test data input pin (TDI). Data from the status register (SDSR), and SDDR can be output via the test data output pin (TDO). The bypass register (SDBPR) is a one-bit register that is connected to TDI and TDO in bypass mode. Except for SDBPR, all the registers can be accessed by the CPU. Table 22.2 shows the kinds of serial transfer that can be used with each of the H-UDI’s registers. Table 22.2 Serial Transfer Characteristics of H-UDI Registers Register SDIR SDSR SDDRH SDDRL SDBPR Serial Input Possible Not possible Possible Possible Possible Serial Output Not possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 696 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.3.1 Instruction Register (SDIR) The instruction register (SDIR) is a 16-bit register that can be read, but not written to, by the CPU. H-UDI instructions can be transferred to SDIR from TDI by serial input. SDIR can be initialized by the TRST signal, but is not initialized in software standby mode. Instructions transferred to SDIR must be 4 bits in length. If an instruction exceeding 4 bits is input, the last 4 bits of the serial data will be stored in SDIR. Bit 15 14 13 12 Bit Name TS3 TS2 TS1 TS0 Initial value R/W Description 1 1 1 1 R R R R Test Set Bit 0xxx: setting prohibited 100x: setting prohibited 1010: H-UDI interrupt 1011: setting prohibited 110x: setting prohibited 1110: setting prohibited 1111: BYPASS mode [Legend] X: Don’t care 11 to 0 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 697 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.3.2 Status Register (SDSR) The status register (SDSR) is a 16-bit register that can be read and written to by the CPU. The SDSR value can be output from TDO, but serial data cannot be written to SDSR via TDI. The SDTRF bit is output by means of a one-bit shift. In a two-bit shift, the SDTRF bit is output first, followed by a reserved bit. SDSR is initialized by TRST signal input, but is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit Bit Name Initial value R/W Description All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 11 ⎯ 1 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1. The write value should always be 1. 10 to 1 ⎯ All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 SDTRF 1 R/W Serial Data Transfer Control Flag Indicates whether H-UDI registers can be accessed by the CPU. The SDTRF bit is initialized by the TRST signal, but is not initialized in software standby mode. 0: Serial transfer to SDDR has ended, and SDDR can be accessed 1: Serial transfer to SDDR is in progress 15 to 12 ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 698 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.3.3 Data Register (SDDR) The data register (SDDR) comprises data register H (SDDRH) and data register L (SDDRL). SDDRH and SDDRL are 16-bit registers that can be read and written to by the CPU. SDDR is connected to TDO and TDI for serial data transfer to and from an external device. 32-bit data is input and output in serial data transfer. If data exceeding 32 bits is input, only the last 32 bits will be stored in SDDR. Serial data is input starting with the MSB of SDDR (bit 15 of SDDRH), and output starting with the LSB (bit 0 of SDDRL). SDDR is not initialized by a reset, in software standby mode, or by the TRST signal. The initial value of SDDR is undefined. 22.3.4 Bypass Register (SDBPR) The bypass register (SDBPR) is a one-bit shift register. In bypass mode, SDBPR is connected to TDI and TDO, and this LSI is bypassed in a board test. SDBPR cannot be read or written to by the CPU. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 699 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.4 22.4.1 Operation H-UDI Interrupt When an H-UDI interrupt instruction is transferred to SDIR via TDI, an interrupt is generated. Data transfer can be controlled by means of the H-UDI interrupt service routine. Transfer can be performed by means of SDDR. Control of data input/output between an external device and the H-UDI is performed by monitoring the SDTRF bit in SDSR externally and internally. Internal SDTRF bit monitoring is carried out by having SDSR read by the CPU. The H-UDI interrupt and serial transfer procedure is as follows. 1. An instruction is input to SDIR by serial transfer, and an H-UDI interrupt request is generated. 2. After the H-UDI interrupt request is issued, the SDTRF bit in SDSR is monitored externally. After output of SDTRF = 1 from TDO is observed, serial data is transferred to SDDR. 3. On completion of the serial transfer to SDDR, the SDTRF bit is cleared to 0, and SDDR can be accessed by the CPU. After SDDR has been accessed, SDDR serial transfer is enabled by setting the SDTRF bit in SDSR to 1. 4. Serial data transfer between an external device and the H-UDI can be carried out by constantly monitoring the SDTRF bit in SDSR externally and internally. Figure 22.2, figure 22.3, and figure 22.4 show the timing of data transfer between an external device and the H-UDI. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 700 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) Serial data H-UDI interrupt request SDTRF (in SDSR)*1 SDSR and SDDR MUX*2 SDDR access state Shift enabled Instruction SDTRF 1 Input 0 1 Input/ output Shift disabled Shift enabled SDDR SDSR SDDR SDSR Shift CPU Shift CPU SDSR serial transfer (monitoring) Notes: 1. SDTRF flag (in SDSR): Indicates whether SDDR access by the CPU or serial transfer data input/output to SDDR is possible. 1 0 SDDR is shift-enabled. Do not access SDDR until SDTRF = 0. SDDR is shift-disabled. SDDR access by the CPU is enabled. Conditions: • SDTRF = 1 — When TRST = 0 — When the CPU writes 1 — In bypass mode • SDTRF = 0 — End of SDDR shift access in serial transfer 2. SDSR/SDDR (Update-DR state) internal MUX switchover timing • Switchover from SDSR to SDDR: On completion of serial transfer in which SDTRF = 1 is output from TDO • Switchover from SDDR to SDSR: On completion of serial transfer to SDDR Figure 22.2 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 701 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 TDI TCK TDO TMS TDI Select-DR Capture-DR Shift-DR Exit1-DR Update-DR Select-DR Capture-DR TCK TMS TRST TDO SDTRF Bit 0 Bit 0 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) TRST Test-Logic-Reset Run-Test/Idle Select-DR Select-IR Capture-IR TS0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 702 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Shift-DR Exit1-DR Update-DR Select-DR Capture-DR Shift-DR Exit1-DR Update-DR Select-DR Capture-DR Bit 31 Bit 31 SDTRF Bit 0 Bit 0 SDTRF Shift-IR TS3 Exit1-IR Update-IR Select-DR Capture-DR Shift-DR Exit1-DR Update-DR Run-Test/Idle Figure 22.4 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (3) Shift-DR Exit1-DR Update-DR Figure 22.3 Data Input/Output Timing Chart (2) Bit 31 Bit 31 Test-Logic-Reset 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.4.2 Bypass Mode Bypass mode can be used to bypass this LSI in a boundary-scan test. Bypass mode is entered by transferring B'1111 to SDIR. In bypass mode, SDBPR is connected to TDI and TDO. 22.4.3 H-UDI Reset The H-UDI can be reset as follows. • By holding the TRST signal at 0 • When TRST = 1, by inputting at least five TCK clock cycles while TMS = 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 703 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 22. User Debugging Interface (H-UDI) 22.5 Usage Notes • The registers are not initialized in software standby mode. If TRST is set to 0 in software standby mode, bypass mode will be entered. • The frequency of TCK must be lower than that of the peripheral module clock (Pφ). For details, see section 26, Electrical Characteristics. • In serial data transfer, data input/output starts with the LSB. Figure 22.5 shows serial data input/output. • If the H-UDI serial transfer sequence is disrupted, a TRST reset must be executed. Transfer should then be retried, regardless of the transfer operation. • The TDO output timing is from the rise of TCK. • In the Shift-IR state, the lower 2 bits of the output data from TDO (the IR status word) may not always be 01. • If more than 32 bits are serially transferred, serial data exceeding 32 bits output from TDO should be ignored. • The TDI pin must not be in the high-impedance state. TDI SDIR, SDSR, SDDRH/SDDRL 31 30 Shift register Serial data input/output is in LSB-first order. 1 0 TDO Figure 22.5 Serial Data Input/Output Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 704 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) Section 23 Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.1 Overview This LSI has an on-chip advanced user debugger (AUD). Use of the AUD simplifies the construction of a simple emulator, with functions such as acquisition of branch trace data and monitoring/tuning of on-chip RAM data. AUD can be enabled or disabled using the AUDSRST bit in the system control register (SYSCR). Refer to section 24.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR), for SYSCR. 23.1.1 Features The AUD has the following features: • Eight input/output pins ⎯ Data bus (AUDATA3-AUDATA0) ⎯ AUD reset (AUDRST) ⎯ AUD sync signal (AUDSYNC) ⎯ AUD clock (AUDCK) ⎯ AUD mode (AUDMD) • Two modes ⎯ Branch trace mode ⎯ RAM monitor mode AUD0001A_020020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 705 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 23.1 shows a block diagram of the AUD. Internal bus AUDATA0 AUDATA1 AUDATA2 AUDATA3 AUDRST AUDMD AUDCK AUDSYNC Mode control Data buffer On-chip peripheral module Address buffer Bus controller PC output circuit Peripheral module bus On-chip memory CPU Figure 23.1 AUD Block Diagram Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 706 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.2 Input/Output Pins Table 23.1 shows the AUD's input/output pins. Table 23.1 AUD Pin Configuration Function Name AUD data AUD reset AUD mode AUD clock AUD sync signal Abbreviation AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 AUDRST AUDMD AUDCK AUDSYNC Branch Trace Mode Branch destination address output AUD reset input Mode select input (L) Sync clock (φ/2) output Data start position identification signal output RAM Monitor Mode Monitor address/data input/output AUD reset input Mode select input (H) Sync clock input Data start position identification signal input 23.2.1 Pin Descriptions • Pins Used in Both Modes Pin AUDMD Description The mode is selected by changing the input level at this pin. Low: Branch trace mode High: RAM monitor mode The input at this pin should be changed when AUDRST is low. AUDRST The AUD's internal buffers and logic are initialized by inputting a low level to this pin. When this signal goes low, the AUD enters the reset state and the AUD's internal buffers and logic are reset. When AUDRST goes high again after the AUDMD level settles, the AUD starts operating in the selected mode. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 707 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) • Pin Functions in Branch Trace Mode Pin AUDCK AUDSYNC Description This pin outputs 1/2 the operating frequency (φ/2). This is the clock for AUDATA synchronization. This pin indicates whether output from AUDATA is valid. High: Valid address data is not being output Low: Valid address is being output AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 1. When AUDSYNC is low When a program branch or interrupt branch occurs, the AUD asserts AUDSYNC and outputs the branch destination address. The output order is as follows: A3 to A0, A7 to A4, A11 to A8, A15 to A12, A19 to A16, A23 to A20, A27 to A24, A31 to A28. 2. When AUDSYNC is high When waiting for branch destination address output, these pins constantly output 0011. When an branch occurs, AUDATA3 and AUDATA2 output 10, and AUDATA1 and AUDATA0 indicate whether a 4-, 8-, 16-, or 32-bit address is to be output by comparing the previous fully output address with the address output this time (see table below). AUDATA1 and AUDATA0 Settings 00 01 10 Address bits A31 to A4 match; 4 address bits A3 to A0 are to be output (i.e. output is performed once). Address bits A31 to A8 match; 8 address bits A3 to A0 and A7 to A4 are to be output (i.e. output is performed twice). Address bits A31 to A16 match; 16 address bits A3 to A0, A7 to A4, A11 to A8, and A15 to A12 are to be output (i.e. output is performed four times). None of the above cases applies; 32 address bits A3 to A0, A7 to A4, A11 to A8, A15 to A12, A19 to A16, A23 to A20, A27 to A24, and A31 to A28 are to be output (i.e. output is performed eight times). 11 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 708 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) • Pin Functions in RAM Monitor Mode Pin AUDCK AUDSYNC Description The external clock input pin. Input the clock to be used for debugging to this pin. The input frequency must not exceed 1/4 the operating frequency. Do not assert this pin until a command is input to AUDATA externally and the necessary data can be prepared. For details, see the protocol description in the following. When a command is input externally, data is output after Ready transmit. Output starts when AUDSYNC is negated. For details, see the protocol description in the following. AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 709 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.3 23.3.1 Branch Trace Mode Overview In this mode, the branch destination address is output when a branch occurs in the user program. Branches may be caused by branch instruction execution or interrupt/exception processing, but no distinction is made between the two in this mode. 23.3.2 Operation Operation starts in branch trace mode when AUDRST is asserted, AUDMD is driven low, and then AUDRST is negated. Figure 23.2 shows an example of data output. While the user program is being executed without branches, the AUDATA pins constantly output 0011 in synchronization with AUDCK. When a branch occurs, after execution starts at the branch destination address in the PC, the previous fully output address (i.e. for which output was not interrupted by the occurrence of another branch) is compared with the current branch address, and depending on the result, AUDSYNC is asserted and the branch destination address output after 1-clock output of 1000 (in the case of 4-bit output), 1001 (8-bit output), 1010 (16-bit output), or 1011 (32-bit output). The initial value of the compared address is H'00000000. On completion of the cycle in which the address is output, AUDSYNC is negated and 0011 is simultaneously output from the AUDATA pins. If another branch occurs during branch destination address output, the later branch has priority for output. In this case, AUDSYNC is negated and the AUDATA pins output the address after outputting 10xx again (figure 23.3 shows an example of the output when consecutive branches occur). Note that the compared address is the previous fully output address, and not an interrupted address (since the upper address of an interrupted address will be unknown). The interval from the start of execution at the branch destination address in the PC until the AUDATA pins output 10xx is 1.5 or 2 AUDCK cycles. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 710 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) Start of execution at branch destination address in PC AUDCK AUDSYNC 0011 1011 AUDATA [3:0] 0011 A3 to A0 A7 to A4 A11 to A8 A15 to A12 A19 to A16 A23 to A20 A27 to A24 A31 to A28 0011 Figure 23.2 Example of Data Output (32-Bit Output) Start of execution at branch destination address in PC (1) Start of execution at branch destination address in PC (2) AUDCK AUDSYNC AUDATA [3:0] 0011 0011 1011 A3 to A0 A7 to A4 1010 A3 to A0 A7 to A4 A11 to A8 A15 to A12 0011 0011 Figure 23.3 Example of Output in Case of Successive Branches Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 711 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.4 23.4.1 RAM Monitor Mode Overview In this mode, all the modules connected to this LSI's internal or external bus can be read and written to, allowing RAM monitoring and tuning to be carried out. When an address is written to AUDATA externally, the data corresponding to that address is output. If an address and data are written to AUDATA, the data is transferred to the address. 23.4.2 Communication Protocol The AUD latches the AUDATA input when AUDSYNC is asserted. The following AUDATA input format should be used. Input format 0000 DIR Command A3 to A0 . . . . . . A31 to A28 D3 to D0 . . . . . . Dn to Dn-3 Address Data (in case of write only) B write: n = 7 W write: n = 15 L write: n = 31 Bit 3 Fixed at 1 Bit 2 0: Read 1: Write Bit 0 Bit 1 00: Byte 01: Word 10: Longword Spare bits (4 bits): b'0000 Figure 23.4 AUDATA Input Format Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 712 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.4.3 Operation Operation starts in RAM monitor mode when AUDRST is asserted, AUDMD is driven high, then AUDRST is negated. Figure 23.5 shows an example of a read operation, and figure 23.6 an example of a write operation. When AUDSYNC is asserted, input from the AUDATA pins begins. When a command, address, or data (writing only) is input in the format shown in figure 23.4, execution of read/write access to the specified address is started. During internal execution, the AUD returns Not Ready (0000). When execution is completed, the Ready flag (0001) is returned (figures 23.5 and 23.6). Table 23.2 shows the Ready flag format. In a read, data of the specified size is output when AUDSYNC is negated following detection of this flag (figure 23.5). If a command other than the above is input in DIR, the AUD treats this as a command error, disables processing, and sets bit 1 in the Ready flag to 1. If a read/write operation initiated by the command specified in DIR causes a bus error, the AUD disables processing and sets bit 2 in the Ready flag to 1 (figure 23.7). Bus error conditions are shown below. 1. 2. 3. 4. Word access to address 4n+1 or 4n+3 Longword access to address 4n+1, 4n+2, or 4n+3 Longword access to on-chip I/O 8-bit area Access to external area in single-chip mode Table 23.2 Ready Flag Format Bit 3 Fixed at 0 Bit 2 0: Normal status 1: Bus error Bit 1 0: Normal status 1: Command error Bit 0 0: Not ready 1: Ready Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 713 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) AUDCK AUDSYNC AUDATAn 0000 1000 DIR Input A3 to A0 Input/output changeover A31 to A28 0000 Not ready 0001 Ready 0001 0001 D3 to D0 D7 to D4 Ready Ready Output Figure 23.5 Example of Read Operation (Byte Read) AUDCK AUDSYNC Input/output changeover AUDATAn 0000 1110 A3 to A0 DIR Input A31 to A28 D3 to D0 D31 to D28 0000 Not ready 0001 Ready Output 0001 0001 Ready Ready Figure 23.6 Example of Write Operation (Longword Write) AUDCK AUDSYNC AUDATAn 0000 1010 A3 to A0 DIR Input Input/output changeover A31 to A28 0000 Not ready 0101 Ready (Bus error) 0101 Ready Output 0101 Ready (Bus error) (Bus error) Figure 23.7 Example of Error Occurrence (Longword Read) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 714 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.5 23.5.1 Usage Notes Initialization The debugger's internal buffers and processing states are initialized in the following cases: 1. In a power-on reset 2. When AUDRST is driven low 3. When the AUDSRST bit in the SYSCR register is cleared to 0 (see section 24.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR)) 4. When the MSTP3 bit in the MSTCR2 register is set to 1 (see section 24.2.3, Module Standby Control Register 1 and 2 (MSTCR1 and MSTCR2)) 23.5.2 Operation in Software Standby Mode The debugger is not initialized in software standby mode. However, since this LSI's internal operation halts in software standby mode: 1. When AUDMD is high (RAM monitor mode), Ready is not returned (Not Ready continues to be returned). However, when operating on an external clock, the protocol continues. 2. When AUDMD is low (branch trace mode), operation stops. However, operation continues when software standby is released. 23.5.3 Setting the PA15/CK pin Some debug tools have specification that the AUDCK signal is generated out of the CK signal. Decide the pin function controller setting after reading the manual of the debug tool to be used. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 715 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.5.4 Pin States 1. Module standby AUDMD Z AUDCK Z AUDSYNC Z AUDATA Z 2. AUDRST = low-level input AUDMD Input AUDCK (1) AUDMD = high: Input AUDSYNC (1) AUDMD = high: Input AUDRST Low-level input AUDATA (1) AUDMD = high: Input 3. Normal operation/software standby AUDRST = 1 AUDMD Input AUDCK (1) AUDMD = high: Input AUDSYNC (1) AUDMD = high: Input AUDRST High-level input AUDATA (1) AUDMD = high: Input/Output 23.5.5 AUD Start-up Sequence (2) AUDMD = low: High-level Output (2) AUDMD = low: High-level Output (2) AUDMD = low: High-level Output (2) AUDMD = low: Output (2) AUDMD = low: Output (2) AUDMD = low: Output Follow the sequence described below to start up the AUD. After selecting the AUD pin by the PFC, input at least three clocks to the AUDCK pin while retaining the AUDRST pin at low level. Then, set the AUD reset bit (AUDSRST) in SYSCR to clear the AUD reset. Low level input to the AUDRST pin and clock input to the AUDCK pin can be started prior to the selection of the AUD pin by the PFC. 23.5.6 RAM Monitor Operation Using the PD22/AUDCK Pin While using the PD22/AUDCK pin for RAM monitor function, the PE3/AUDATA3, PE4/AUDATA2, PE5/AUDATA1, PE6/AUDATA0, and PA16/AUDSYNC pins are not available. Instead of those unavailable pins, the PD19/AUDATA3, PD18/AUDATA2, PD17/AUDATA1, PD16/AUDATA0 and PD23/AUDSYNC pins must be used. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 716 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) 23.5.7 Settings of AUD-Related Pins when Using E10A When using the E10A and AUD functions of the SH7145, use port D and the multiplexed AUDrelated pins. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 717 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 23. Advanced User Debugger (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 718 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes Section 24 Power-Down Modes In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has three power-down modes in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip peripheral functions, and so on. This LSI's power-down modes are as follows: • Sleep mode • Software standby mode • Module standby mode Sleep mode indicates the state of the CPU, and module standby mode indicates the state of the onchip peripheral function (including the bus master other than the CPU). Some of these states can be combined. After a reset, the LSI is in normal-operation mode. Table 24.1 lists internal operation states in each mode. LPWSH21A_010020030800 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 719 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes Table 24.1 Internal Operation States in Each Mode Function System clock pulse generator CPU External interrupts NMI IRQ7 to IRQ0 Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Normal Operation Sleep Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Module Standby ⎯ Software Standby Halted Halted (retained) Functioning Halted (retained) ⎯ Functioning ⎯ Peripheral UBC functions DMAC DTC IIC I/O port WDT SCI A/D MTU CMT H-UDI AUD ROM RAM Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning ⎯ ⎯ Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Functioning Functioning Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Notes: 1. "Halted (retained)" means that the operation of the internal state is suspended, although internal register values are retained. 2. "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal state are initialized. 3. In module standby mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained). 4. There are two types of on-chip peripheral module registers; ones which are initialized by module standby mode or software standby mode, and those not initialized by that mode. For details, refer to section 25.3, Register States in Each Operating Mode. 5. The port high-impedance bit (HIZ) in SBYCR sets the state of the I/O port in software standby mode. For details on the setting, refer to section 24.2.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). For the state of pins, refer to appendix A, Pin States. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 720 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.1 Input/Output Pins Table 24.2 lists the pins relating to power-down mode. Table 24.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name RES MRES I/O Input Input Function Power-on reset input pin Manual reset input pin 24.2 Register Descriptions Registers related to power down modes are shown below. For details on register addresses and register states during each process, refer to section 25, List of Registers. • • • • Standby control register (SBYCR) System control register (SYSCR) Module standby control register 1 (MSTCR1) Module standby control register 2 (MSTCR2) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 721 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs software standby mode control. Bit 7 Bit Name SSBY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Software Standby This bit specifies the transition mode after executing the SLEEP instruction. 0: Shifts to sleep mode after the SLEEP instruction has been executed 1: Shifts to software standby mode after the SLEEP instruction has been executed This bit cannot be set to 1 when the watchdog timer (WDT) is operating (when the TME bit in TCSR of the WDT is set to 1). When transferring to software standby mode, clear the TME bit to 0, stop the WDT, then set the SSBY bit to 1. 6 Hi-Z 0 R/W Port High-Impedance In software standby mode, this bit selects whether the pin state of the I/O port is retained or changed to high-impedance. 0: In software standby mode, the pin state is retained. 1: In software standby mode, the pin state is changed to high-impedance. The HIZ bit cannot be set to 1 when the TME bit in TCSR of the WDT is set to 1. When changing the pin state of the I/O port to highimpedance, clear the TME bit to 0, then set the HIZ bit to 1. 5 — 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0, and should always be written with 0. 4 to 2 — All 1 R Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 722 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes Bit 1 Bit Name IRQEH Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description IRQ7 to IRQ4 Enable IRQ7 to IRQ4 interrupts are enabled to clear software standby mode. 0: Enable to clear the software standby mode 1: Disable to clear the software standby mode 0 IRQEL 1 R/W IRQ3 to IRQ0 Enable IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts are enabled to clear software standby mode. 0: Enable to clear the software standby mode 1: Disable to clear the software standby mode Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 723 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs AUD software reset control and enables/disables the access to the on-chip RAM. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name — Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. 5 to 2 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0, and should always be written with 0. 1 AUDSRST 0 R/W AUD Software Reset This bit controls the AUD reset by software. When 0 is written to AUDSRST, AUD module shifts to poweron reset state. 0: Shifts to AUD reset state. 1: Clears the AUD reset. 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable This bit enables/disables the on-chip RAM. 0: On-chip RAM disabled 1: On-chip RAM enabled When this bit is cleared to 0, the access the on-chip RAM is disabled. In this case, an undefined value is returned when reading or fetching the data or instruction from the on-chip RAM, and writing to the on-chip RAM is ignored. When RAME is cleared to 0 to disable the on-chip RAM, an instruction to access the on-chip RAM should not be set next to the instruction to write to SYSCR. If such an instruction is set, normal access is not guaranteed. When RAME is set to 1 to enable the on-chip RAM, an instruction to read SYSCR should be set next to the instruction to write to SYSCR. If an instruction to access the on-chip RAM is set next to the instruction to write to SYSCR, normal access is not guaranteed. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 724 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.2.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 and 2 (MSTCR1 and MSTCR2) MSTCR, comprising two 16-bit readable/writable registers, performs module standby mode control. Setting a bit to 1, the corresponding module enters module standby mode, while clearing the bit to 0 clears the module standby mode. • MSTCR1 Bit Bit Name Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. 11 10 9 8 MSTP27 0 MSTP26 0 MSTP25 0 MSTP24 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W On-chip RAM On-chip ROM Data transfer controller (DTC) Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Set the identical value to MSTP25 and MSTP24, respectively. When setting module standby, write b'11, while clearing, write b'00. 7, 6 — All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0, and should always be written with 0. 5 4 MSTP21 1 — 1 R/W R I2C bus interface (IIC) Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. 3 2 1 0 MSTP19 1 MSTP18 1 MSTP17 1 MSTP16 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Serial communication interface 3 (SCI_3) Serial communication interface 2 (SCI_2) Serial communication interface 1 (SCI_1) Serial communication interface 0 (SCI_0) 15 to 12 — Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 725 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes • MSTCR2 Bit 15, 14 Bit Name Initial Value — All 1 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. 13 12 MSTP13 MSTP12 1 1 All 0 R/W R/W R Multi-function timer pulse unit (MTU) Compare match timer (CMT) Reserved These bits are always read as 0, and should always be written with 0. 7, 6 — All 1 R Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and should always be written with 1. 5 4 3 2 1 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 — 1 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R A/D converter (A/D1) A/D converter (A/D0) Advanced user debugger (AUD)* User debugging interface (H-UDI)* Reserved This bit is always read as 0, and should always be written with 0. 0 Note: * MSTP0 0 R/W User break controller (UBC) 11 to 8 — Although this bit can be read from/written to when using E10A (in DBGMD=H), AUD or H-UDI is in normal operation regardless of the set value. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 726 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.3 24.3.1 Operation Sleep Mode Transition to Sleep Mode: If SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR = 0, the CPU enters sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops, however the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Peripheral functions except the CPU do not stop. In sleep mode, data should not be accessed by the DMAC, DTC, or AUD. Clearing Sleep Mode: Sleep mode is cleared by the conditions below. • Clearing by the power-on reset When the RES pin is driven low, the CPU enters the reset state. When the RES pin is driven high after the elapse of the specified reset input period, the CPU starts the reset exception handling. When an internal Power-on reset by WDT occurs, sleep mode is also cleared. • Clearing by the manual reset When the MRES pin is driven low while the RES pin is high, the CPU shifts to the manual reset state and thus sleep mode is cleared. When an internal manual reset by WDT occurs, sleep mode is also cleared. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 727 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.3.2 Software Standby Mode Transition to Software Standby Mode: A transition is made to software standby mode if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip peripheral functions, and the oscillator, all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers and on-chip RAM data are retained as long as the specified voltage is supplied. There are two types of on-chip peripheral module registers; ones which are initialized by software standby mode, and those not initialized by that mode. For details, refer to section 25.3, Register States in Each Operating Mode. The port high-impedance bit (Hi-Z) in SBYCR sets the state of the I/O port either to "retained" or "high-impedance". For the state of pins, refer to appendix A, Pin States. In software standby mode, the oscillator stops and thus power consumption is significantly reduced. Clearing Software Standby Mode: Software standby mode is cleared by the condition below. • Clearing by the NMI interrupt input When the falling edge or rising edge of the NMI pin (selected by the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) in ICR1 of the interrupt controller (INTC)) is detected, clock oscillation is started. This clock pulse is supplied only to the watchdog timer (WDT). After the elapse of the time set in the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) in TCSR of the WDT before the transition to software standby mode, the WDT overflow occurs. Since this overflow indicates that the clock has been stabilized, clock pulse will be supplied to the entire chip after this overflow. Software standby mode is thus cleared and the NMI exception handling is started. When clearing software standby mode by the NMI interrupt, set CKS2 to CKS0 bits so that the WDT overflow period will be longer than the oscillation stabilization time. When so&tware standby mode is cleared by the falling edge of the NMI pin, the NMI pin should be high when the CPU enters software standby mode (when the clock pulse stops) and should be low when the CPU returns from standby mode (when the clock is initiated after the oscillation stabilization). When software standby mode is cleared by the rising edge of the NMI pin, the NMI pin should be low when the CPU enters software standby mode (when the clock pulse stops) and should be high when the CPU returns from software standby mode (when the clock is initiated after the oscillation stabilization). • Clearing by the RES pin When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock oscillation is started, clock pulse is supplied to the entire chip. Ensure that the RES pin is held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin is driven high, the CPU starts the reset exception handling. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 728 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes • Clearing by the IRQ interrupt input When the falling edge or rising edge of the IRQ pin (selected by the IRQ7S to IRQ0S bits in ICR1 of the interrupt controller (INTC) and the IRQ7ES[1:0] to IRQ0ES[1:0] bits in ICR2) is detected, clock oscillation is started*. This clock pulse is supplied only to the watchdog timer (WDT). The IRQ interrupt priority level should be higher than the interrupt mask level set in the status register (SR) of the CPU before the transition to software standby mode. After the elapse of the time set in the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) in TCSR of the WDT before the transition to software standby mode, the WDT overflow occurs. Since this overflow indicates that the clock has been stabilized, clock pulse will be supplied to the entire chip after this overflow. Software standby mode is thus cleared and the IRQ exception handling is started. When clearing software standby mode by the IRQ interrupt, set CKS2 to CKS0 bits so that the WDT overflow period will be longer than the oscillation stabilization time. When software standby mode is cleared by the falling edge or both rising and falling edges of the IRQ pin, the IRQ pin should be high when the CPU enters software standby mode (when the clock pulse stops) and should be low when the CPU returns from software standby mode (when the clock is initiated after the oscillation stabilization). When software standby mode is cleared by the rising edge of the IRQ pin, the IRQ pin should be low when the CPU enters software standby mode (when the clock pulse stops) and should be high when the CPU returns from software standby mode (when the clock is initiated after the oscillation stabilization). Note: * If the IRQ pin setting is detection at the falling edge or detection at both rising and falling edges, clock oscillation starts at the falling edge detection. If the setting is detection at the rising edge, it starts at the rising edge detection. Do not set the IRQ pin to detection at the low level. Software Standby Mode Application Example: Figure 24.1 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the falling edge of the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at a rising edge of the NMI pin. In this example, when the NMI pin is driven low while the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) in ICR1 is 0 (falling edge specification), an NMI interrupt is accepted. Then, the NMIE bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification) in the NMI exception service routine, the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed to transfer to software standby mode. Software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge of the NMI pin. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 729 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes Oscillator CK NMI input NMIE bit SSBY bit NMI Program exception execution state handling LSI state Exception service routine Software standby mode Oscillation WDT start time setting time Oscillation stabilization time NMI exception handling Figure 24.1 NMI Timing in Software Standby Mode (Application Example) 24.3.3 Module Standby Mode Module standby mode can be set for individual on-chip peripheral functions. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module standby mode. The CPU continues operating independently. When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module standby mode is cleared and the module starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In some of the modules that have entered module standby mode, register values are initialized. Therefore, set registers again when operating the modules. After reset clearing, the I2C, SCI, MTU, CMT, and A/D converter are in module standby mode. The modules of registers in module standby mode cannot be read or written to. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 730 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes 24.4 24.4.1 Usage Notes I/O Port Status When a transition is made to software standby mode while the port high-impedance bit (HIZ) in SBYCR is 0, I/O port states are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in current consumption for the output current when a high-level signal is output. 24.4.2 Current Consumption during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period Current consumption increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period. 24.4.3 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module standby mode. Consequently, if the CPU enters module standby mode while an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC/DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module standby mode. 24.4.4 Writing to MSTCR1 and MSTCR2 MSTCR1 and MSTCR2 should only be written to by the CPU. 24.4.5 DMAC, DTC, or AUD Operation in Sleep Mode In sleep mode, data should not be accessed by the DMAC, DTC, or AUD. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 731 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 24. Power-Down Modes Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 732 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Section 25 List of Registers This section gives information on internal I/O registers. The contents of this section are as follows: 1. Register Address Table (in the order from a lower address) • Registers are listed in the order from lower allocated addresses. • As for reserved addresses, the register name column is indicated with ⎯. Do not access reserved addresses. • As for 16- or 32-bit address, the MSB addresses are shown. • The list is classified according to module names. • The register access size is shown. 2. • • • • Register Bit Table Bit configurations are shown in the order of the register address table. As for reserved bits, the bit name column is indicated with ⎯. As for the blank column of the bit names, the whole register is allocated to the counter or data. As for 16- or 32-bit registers, bits are indicated from the MSB. 3. Register State in Each Operating Mode • Register states are listed in the order of the register address table. • Register states in the basic operating mode are shown. As for modules including their specific states such as reset, see the sections of those modules. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 733 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers 25.1 Register Address Table (In the Order from Lower Addresses) Access sizes are indicated with the number of bits. Access states are indicated with the number of specified reference clock states. These values are those at 8-bit access (B), 16-bit access (W), or 32-bit access (L). Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. Correct operation cannot be guaranteed if these addresses are accessed. Register name ⎯ abbreviation ⎯ NO. of bits Address ⎯ H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFF819F Serial mode register_0 Bit rate register_0 Serial control register_0 Transmit data register_0 Serial status register_0 Receive data register_0 Serial direction control register_0 ⎯ SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SDCR_0 ⎯ 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF81A0 H'FFFF81A1 H'FFFF81A2 H'FFFF81A3 H'FFFF81A4 H'FFFF81A5 H'FFFF81A6 H'FFFF81A7 to H'FFFF81AF Serial mode register_1 Bit rate register_1 Serial control register_1 Transmit data register_1 Serial status register_1 Receive data register_1 Serial direction control register_1 ⎯ SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SDCR_1 ⎯ 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF81B0 H'FFFF81B1 H'FFFF81B2 H'FFFF81B3 H'FFFF81B4 H'FFFF81B5 H'FFFF81B6 H'FFFF81B7 to H'FFFF81BF Serial mode register_2 Bit rate register_2 Serial control register_2 Transmit data register_2 Serial status register_2 Receive data register_2 Serial direction control register_2 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SDCR_2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FFFF81C0 H'FFFF81C1 H'FFFF81C2 H'FFFF81C3 H'FFFF81C4 H'FFFF81C5 H'FFFF81C6 SCI (Channel 2) 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ SCI (Channel 1) 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ SCI (Channel 0) 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ Pφ reference B:2 W:4 Module ⎯ Access size ⎯ NO. of Access states ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 734 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name ⎯ abbreviation ⎯ NO. of bits Address ⎯ H'FFFF81C7 to H'FFFF81CF Serial mode register_3 Bit rate register_3 Serial control register_3 Transmit data register_3 Serial status register_3 Receive data register_3 Serial direction control register_3 ⎯ SMR_3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 SSR_3 RDR_3 SDCR_3 ⎯ 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF81D0 H'FFFF81D1 H'FFFF81D2 H'FFFF81D3 H'FFFF81D4 H'FFFF81D5 H'FFFF81D6 H'FFFF81D7 to H'FFFF81FF Timer control register_3 Timer control register_4 Timer mode register_3 Timer mode register_4 Timer I/O control register H_3 Timer I/O control register L_3 Timer I/O control register H_4 Timer I/O control register L_4 Timer interrupt enable register_3 Timer interrupt enable register_4 Timer output master enable register Timer output control register ⎯ Timer gate control register ⎯ ⎯ Timer counter_3 Timer counter_4 Timer cyclic data register Timer dead time data register Timer general register A_3 Timer general register B_3 Timer general register A_4 Timer general register B_4 TCR_3 TCR_4 TMDR_3 TMDR_4 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIORH_4 TIORL_4 TIER_3 TIER_4 TOER TOCR ⎯ TGCR ⎯ ⎯ TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TCDR TDDR TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ⎯ 8 ⎯ ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 H'FFFF8200 H'FFFF8201 H'FFFF8202 H'FFFF8203 H'FFFF8204 H'FFFF8205 H'FFFF8206 H'FFFF8207 H'FFFF8208 H'FFFF8209 H'FFFF820A H'FFFF820B H'FFFF820C H'FFFF820D H'FFFF820E H'FFFF820F H'FFFF8210 H'FFFF8212 H'FFFF8214 H'FFFF8216 H'FFFF8218 H'FFFF821A H'FFFF821C H'FFFF821E 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 MTU (Channels 3, 4) 8, 16, 32 8 8, 16 8 8, 16, 32 8 8, 16 8 8, 16, 32 8 8, 16 8 ⎯ 8 ⎯ Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 ⎯ SCI (Channel 3) SCI (Channel 3) 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ Module ⎯ Access size ⎯ NO. of Access states Pφ reference B:2 W:4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 735 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name Timer sub-counter Timer cyclic buffer register Timer general register C_3 Timer general register D_3 Timer general register C_4 Timer general register D_4 Timer status register_3 Timer status register_4 ⎯ abbreviation TCNTS TCBR TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TSR_3 TSR_4 ⎯ NO. of bits Address 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8220 H'FFFF8222 H'FFFF8224 H'FFFF8226 H'FFFF8228 H'FFFF822A H'FFFF822C H'FFFF822D H'FFFF822E to H'FFFF823F Timer start register Timer synchronous register ⎯ TSTR TSYR ⎯ 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8240 H'FFFF8241 H'FFFF8242 to H'FFFF825F Timer control register_0 Timer mode register_0 Timer I/O control register H_0 Timer I/O control register L_0 Timer interrupt enable register_0 Timer status register_0 Timer counter_0 Timer general register A_0 Timer general register B_0 Timer general register C_0 Timer general register D_0 ⎯ TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 ⎯ 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8260 H'FFFF8261 H'FFFF8262 H'FFFF8263 H'FFFF8264 H'FFFF8265 H'FFFF8266 H'FFFF8268 H'FFFF826A H'FFFF826C H'FFFF826E H'FFFF8270 to H'FFFF827F MTU (Channel 0) 8, 16, 32 8 8, 16 8 8, 16, 32 8 16 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 ⎯ Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 MTU (for all channels) 8, 16 8 ⎯ Pφ reference B:2 W:2 Module MTU (Channels 3, 4) Access size 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 16, 32 16 8, 16 8 ⎯ NO. of Access states Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 736 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name Timer control register_1 Timer mode register_1 Timer I/O control register_1 ⎯ Timer interrupt enable register_1 Timer status register_1 Timer counter_1 Timer general register A_1 Timer general register B_1 ⎯ abbreviation TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 ⎯ TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 ⎯ NO. of bits Address 8 8 8 ⎯ 8 8 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8280 H'FFFF8281 H'FFFF8282 H'FFFF8283 H'FFFF8284 H'FFFF8285 H'FFFF8286 H'FFFF8288 H'FFFF828A H'FFFF828C to H'FFFF829F Timer control register_2 TCR_2 8 H'FFFF82A0 MTU (Channel 2) Timer mode register_2 Timer I/O control register_2 ⎯ Timer interrupt enable register_2 Timer status register_2 Timer counter_2 Timer general register A_2 Timer general register B_2 ⎯ TMDR_2 TIOR_2 ⎯ TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 ⎯ 8 8 ⎯ 8 8 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF82A1 H'FFFF82A2 H'FFFF82A3 H'FFFF82A4 H'FFFF82A5 H'FFFF82A6 H'FFFF82A8 H'FFFF82AA H'FFFF82AC to H'FFFF833F MTU (Channel 2) 8 8 ⎯ 8, 16, 32 8 16 16, 32 16 ⎯ 8, 16 Module MTU (Channel 1) Access size 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ 8, 16, 32 8 16 16, 32 16 ⎯ NO. of Access states Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 737 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name ⎯ abbreviation ⎯ NO. of bits Address ⎯ H'FFFF8340 to H'FFFF8347 Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B Interrupt priority register C Interrupt priority register D Interrupt priority register E Interrupt priority register F Interrupt priority register G Interrupt priority register H Interrupt control register1 IRQ status register Interrupt priority register I Interrupt priority register J ⎯ IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF IPRG IPRH ICR1 ISR IPRI IPRJ ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8348 H'FFFF834A H'FFFF834C H'FFFF834E H'FFFF8350 H'FFFF8352 H'FFFF8354 H'FFFF8356 H'FFFF8358 H'FFFF835A H'FFFF835C H'FFFF835E H'FFFF8360 to H'FFFF8365 Interrupt control register 2 ⎯ ICR2 ⎯ 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8366 H'FFFF8368 to H'FFFF837F Port A data register H Port A data register L Port A I/O register H Port A I/O register L Port A control register H ⎯ Port A control register L1 Port A control register L2 Port B data register Port C data register Port B I/O register Port C I/O register Port B control register 1 Port B control register 2 Port C control register 2 PADRH PADRL PAIORH PAIORL PACRH ⎯ PACRL1 PACRL2 PBDR PCDR PBIOR PCIOR PBCR1 PBCR2 PCCR 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 H'FFFF8380 H'FFFF8382 H'FFFF8384 H'FFFF8386 H'FFFF8388 H’FFFF838A H’FFFF838C H’FFFF838E H’FFFF8390 H’FFFF8392 H'FFFF8394 H'FFFF8396 H'FFFF8398 H'FFFF839A H'FFFF839C PFC I/O PFC I/O 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 ⎯ 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ Module INTC Access size ⎯ NO. of Access states φ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 738 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name ⎯ abbreviation ⎯ NO. of bits Address ⎯ H'FFFF839E to H'FFFF839F Port D data register H Port D data register L Port D I/O register H Port D I/O register L Port D control register H1 Port D control register H2 Port D control register L1 Port D control register L2 Port E data register L ⎯ Port F data register Port E I/O register L ⎯ PDDRH PDDRL PDIORH PDIORL PDCRH1 PDCRH2 PDCRL1 PDCRL2 PEDRL ⎯ PFDR PEIORL ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ 8 16 ⎯ H'FFFF83A0 H'FFFF83A2 H'FFFF83A4 H'FFFF83A6 H'FFFF83A8 H'FFFF83AA H'FFFF83AC H'FFFF83AE H'FFFF83B0 H'FFFF83B2 H'FFFF83B3 H'FFFF83B4 H'FFFF83B6 to H'FFFF83B7 Port E control register L1 Port E control register L2 ⎯ PECRL1 PECRL2 ⎯ 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF83B8 H'FFFF83BA H'FFFF83BC to H'FFFF83BF Input control/status register 1 Output control/status register ⎯ ICSR1 OCSR ⎯ 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF83C0 H'FFFF83C2 H'FFFF83C4 to H'FFFF83CF ⎯ POE 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ ⎯ PFC 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ I/O ⎯ I/O PFC ⎯ PFC I/O 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 ⎯ 8 8, 16, 32 ⎯ Module ⎯ Access size ⎯ NO. of Access states φ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 739 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name Compare match timer start register Compare match timer control/ status register_0 Compare match timer counter_0 CMCNT_0 16 16 16 H'FFFF83D4 H'FFFF83D6 H'FFFF83D8 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 abbreviation NO. of bits Address CMSTR CMCSR_0 16 16 H'FFFF83D0 H'FFFF83D2 Module CMT Access size 8, 16, 32 8, 16 NO. of Access states Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Compare match timer constant register_0 CMCOR_0 Compare match timer control/ status register_1 Compare match timer counter_1 CMCNT_1 CMCSR_1 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF83DA H'FFFF83DC H'FFFF83DE to H'FFFF841F ⎯ 8, 16 8, 16 ⎯ ⎯ Compare match timer constant register_1 CMCOR_1 ⎯ ⎯ A/D data register 0 A/D data register 1 A/D data register 2 A/D data register 3 A/D data register 4 A/D data register 5 A/D data register 6 A/D data register 7 ⎯ ADDR0 ADDR1 ADDR2 ADDR3 ADDR4 ADDR5 ADDR6 ADDR7 ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8420 H'FFFF8422 H'FFFF8424 H'FFFF8426 H'FFFF8428 H'FFFF842A H'FFFF842C H'FFFF842E H'FFFF8430 to H'FFFF847F A/D (Channel0) 8, 16 8, 16 8, 16 8, 16 Pφ reference B:3 W:6 A/D (Channel1) 8, 16 8, 16 8, 16 8, 16 ⎯ ⎯ A/D control/status register_0 A/D control/status register_1 ⎯ ADCSR_0 ADCSR_1 ⎯ 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8480 H'FFFF8481 H'FFFF8482 to H'FFFF8487 A/D 8, 16 8 ⎯ A/D control register_0 A/D control register_1 ⎯ ADCR_0 ADCR_1 ⎯ 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8488 H'FFFF8489 H'FFFF848A to H’FFFF857F A/D 8, 16 8 ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 740 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 ⎯ abbreviation NO. of bits Address FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 ⎯ 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8580 H'FFFF8581 H'FFFF8582 H'FFFF8583 H'FFFF8584 to H'FFFF85FF User break address register H User break address register L User break address mask register H User break address mask register L User break bus cycle register User break control register ⎯ UBARH UBARL UBAMRH UBAMRL UBBR UBCR ⎯ 16 16 16 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8600 H'FFFF8602 H'FFFF8604 H'FFFF8606 H'FFFF8608 H'FFFF860A H'FFFF860C to H'FFFF860F Timer control/status register Timer counter Timer counter Reset control/status register Reset control/status register Standby control register TCSR TCNT* 1 Module FLASH (Only in FZTAT version) Access size 8, 16 8 8, 16 8 ⎯ NO. of Access states φ reference B:3 W:6 UBC 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ φ reference B:3 W:3 L:6 8 8 8 1 H'FFFF8610 H'FFFF8610 H'FFFF8611 H'FFFF8612 H'FFFF8613 H'FFFF8614 WDT *1: Write *2: Read 8*2/16*1 16 8 16 8 φ reference B:3 W:3 TCNT*2 RSTCSR* RSTCSR* SBYCR 8 8 8 2 Power-down modes 8 φ reference B:3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ H'FFFF8615 to H'FFFF8617 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ System control register ⎯ SYSCR ⎯ 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8618 H'FFFF8619 to H'FFFF861B Power-down modes 8 ⎯ Pφ reference B:3 W:3 Module standby control register 1 Module standby control register 2 MSTCR1 MSTCR2 16 16 H'FFFF861C H'FFFF861E 8, 16, 32 8, 16 L:6 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 741 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name Bus control register 1 Bus control register 2 Wait control register 1 Wait control register 2 RAM emulation register abbreviation NO. of bits Address BCR1 BCR2 WCR1 WCR2 RAMER 16 16 16 16 16 H'FFFF8620 H'FFFF8622 H'FFFF8624 H'FFFF8626 H'FFFF8628 FLASH (Only in FZTAT version) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ H'FFFF862A to H'FFFF86AF DMA operation register ⎯ DMAOR ⎯ 16 ⎯ H'FFFF86B0 H'FFFF86B2 to H'FFFF86BF DMA source address register_0 DMA destination address register_0 DMA transfer count register_0 DMA channel control register_0 DMA source address register_1 DMA destination address register_1 DMA transfer count register_1 DMA channel control register_1 DMA source address register_2 DMA destination address register_2 DMA transfer count register_2 DMA channel control register_2 DMA source address register_3 DMA destination address register_3 DMA transfer count register_3 DMA channel control register_3 SAR_0 DAR_0 DMATCR_0 CHCR_0 SAR_1 DAR_1 DMATCR_1 CHCR_1 SAR_2 DAR_2 DMATCR_2 CHCR_2 SAR_3 DAR_3 DMATCR_3 CHCR_3 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 H'FFFF86C0 H'FFFF86C4 H'FFFF86C8 H'FFFF86CC H'FFFF86D0 H'FFFF86D4 H'FFFF86D8 H'FFFF86DC H'FFFF86E0 H'FFFF86E4 H'FFFF86E8 H'FFFF86EC H'FFFF86F0 H'FFFF86F4 H'FFFF86F8 H'FFFF86FC DMAC (Channel 3) DMAC (Channel 2) DMAC (Channel 1) DMAC (for all channels) L:6 DMAC (Channel 0) 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ φ reference W:3 ⎯ ⎯ Module BSC Access size 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16 NO. of Access states φ reference B:3 W:3 L:6 φ reference B:3 W:3 ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 742 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name DTC enable register A DTC enable register B DTC enable register C DTC enable register D abbreviation DTEA DTEB DTEC DTED ⎯ NO. of bits Address 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8700 H'FFFF8701 H'FFFF8702 H'FFFF8703 H'FFFF8704 to H'FFFF8705 DTC control/status register DTC information base register DTCSR DTBR ⎯ 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8706 H'FFFF8708 H'FFFF870A to H'FFFF870F DTC enable register E ⎯ DTC enable register G ⎯ DTEE ⎯ DTEG ⎯ 8 ⎯ 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8710 H'FFFF8711 H'FFFF8712 H'FFFF8713 to H'FFFF87EF Serial control register X SCRX 8 H'FFFF87F0 I2C [Option] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ H'FFFF87F1 to H'FFFF87F3 AD trigger select register ADTSR 8 H'FFFF87F4 A/D 8 Pφ reference B:3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ H'FFFF87F5 to H'FFFF87F7 High-current port control register PPCR 8 H'FFFF87F8 Port E 8 Pφ reference B:3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ H'FFFF87F9 to H'FFFF8807 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 8 Pφ reference B:3 8, 16 ⎯ 8, 16 ⎯ 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ Module DTC Access size 8, 16, 32 8 8, 16 8 ⎯ NO. of Access states φ reference B:3 W:3 L:6 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 743 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register name I C bus control register I C bus status register ⎯ 2 2 abbreviation ICCR ICSR ⎯ NO. of bits Address 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF8808 H'FFFF8809 H'FFFF880A to H'FFFF880D Module IC [Option] 2 Access size 8, 16 8 ⎯ NO. of Access states Pφ reference B:2 W:4 I2C bus data register Second slave address register I C bus mode register Slave address register ⎯ 2 ICDR SARX ICMR SAR ⎯ 8 8 8 8 ⎯ H'FFFF880E* H'FFFF880E* H'FFFF880F* H'FFFF880F* H'FFFF8810 to H'FFFF8A4F ⎯ 8, 16 8, 16 8 8 ⎯ Instruction register Status register Data register H Data register L SDIR SDSR SDDRH SDDRL ⎯ 16 16 16 16 ⎯ H'FFFF8A50 H'FFFF8A52 H'FFFF8A54 H'FFFF8A56 H'FFFF8A58 to H'FFFFBFFF H-UDI (Only in FZTAT version) 8, 16, 32 8, 16 8, 16, 32 8, 16 ⎯ Pφ reference B:2 W:2 L:4 Note: * Registers that can be read from/written to differ according to the setting of the ICE bit in the IIC bus control register 0. In ICE=0, the registers read from/written to are the second slave address register 0 and the slave address register 0. In ICE=1, they are the IIC bus data register 0 and the IIC bus mode register 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 744 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers 25.2 Register Bit List Addresses and bit names of each on-chip peripheral module are shown below. As for 16-bit or 32-bit registers, they are shown in two or four rows. Register abbreviation SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SDCR_0 SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SDCR_1 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SDCR_2 SMR_3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 SSR_3 RDR_3 SDCR_3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DIR ⎯ SINV ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SMIF ⎯ ⎯ TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 ⎯ C/A ⎯ CHR ⎯ PE ⎯ O/E DIR STOP SINV MP ⎯ CKS1 SMIF CKS0 SCI (Channel 3) TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 ⎯ C/A ⎯ CHR ⎯ PE ⎯ O/E DIR STOP SINV MP ⎯ CKS1 SMIF CKS0 SCI (Channel 2) TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 ⎯ C/A ⎯ CHR ⎯ PE ⎯ O/E DIR STOP SINV MP ⎯ CKS1 SMIF CKS0 SCI (Channel 1) TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 Bit7 C/A Bit6 CHR Bit5 PE Bit4 O/E Bit3 STOP Bit2 MP Bit1 CKS1 Bit0 CKS0 Module SCI (Channel 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 745 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation TCR_3 TCR_4 TMDR_3 TMDR_4 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIORH_4 TIORL_4 TIER_3 TIER_4 TOER TOCR TGCR TCNT_3 Bit7 CCLR2 CCLR2 ⎯ ⎯ IOB3 IOD3 IOB3 IOD3 TTGE TTGE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit6 CCLR1 CCLR1 ⎯ ⎯ IOB2 IOD2 IOB2 IOD2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PSYE BDC Bit5 CCLR0 CCLR0 BFB BFB IOB1 IOD1 IOB1 IOD1 ⎯ ⎯ OE4D ⎯ N Bit4 CKEG1 CKEG1 BFA BFA IOB0 IOD0 IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCIEV OE4C ⎯ P Bit3 CKEG0 CKEG0 MD3 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGIED OE3D ⎯ FB Bit2 TPSC2 TPSC2 MD2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGIEC OE4B ⎯ WF Bit1 TPSC1 TPSC1 MD1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGIEB OE4A OLSN VF Bit0 TPSC0 TPSC0 MD0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGIEA OE3B OLSP UF Module MTU (Channels 3, 4) TCNT_4 TCDR TDDR TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TCNTS TCBR Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 746 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation TGRC_3 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module MTU (Channels 3, 4) TGRD_3 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TSR_3 TSR_4 TSTR TSYR TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 TCFD TCFD CST4 SYNC4 CCLR2 ⎯ IOB3 IOD3 TTGE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CST3 SYNC3 CCLR1 ⎯ IOB2 IOD2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CCLR0 BFB IOB1 IOD1 ⎯ ⎯ TCFV TCFV ⎯ ⎯ CKEG1 BFA IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCFV TGFD TGFD ⎯ ⎯ CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGFD TGFC TGFC CST2 SYNC2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGFC TGFB TGFB CST1 SYNC1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGFB TGFA TGFA CST0 SYNC0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGFA MTU (Channel 0) TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 747 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 Bit7 ⎯ ⎯ IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit6 CCLR1 ⎯ IOB2 ⎯ ⎯ Bit5 CCLR0 ⎯ IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit4 CKEG1 ⎯ IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 ⎯ ⎯ Bit2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 ⎯ ⎯ Bit1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Module MTU (Channel 1) TGRA_1 TGRB_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 ⎯ ⎯ IOB3 TTGE TCFD CCLR1 ⎯ IOB2 ⎯ ⎯ CCLR0 ⎯ IOB1 TCIEU TCFU CKEG1 ⎯ IOB0 TCIEV TCFV CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 ⎯ ⎯ TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 ⎯ ⎯ TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA MTU (Channel 2) TGRA_2 TGRB_2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 748 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation IPRA Bit7 IRQ0 IRQ2 IPRB IRQ4 IRQ6 IPRC DMAC0 DMAC2 IPRD MTU0 MTU1 IPRE MTU2 MTU3 IPRF MTU4 SCI0 IPRG A/D0, 1 CMT0 IPRH WDT ⎯ ICR1 NMIL IRQ0S ISR ⎯ IRQ0F IPRI SCI2 ⎯ IPRJ ⎯ IIC ICR2 IRQ0ES1 IRQ4ES1 ⎯ ⎯ Bit6 IRQ0 IRQ2 IRQ4 IRQ6 DMAC0 DMAC2 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI0 A/D0, 1 CMT0 WDT ⎯ ⎯ IRQ1S ⎯ IRQ1F SCI2 ⎯ ⎯ IIC IRQ0ES0 IRQ4ES0 ⎯ Bit5 IRQ0 IRQ2 IRQ4 IRQ6 DMAC0 DMAC2 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI0 A/D0, 1 CMT0 WDT ⎯ ⎯ IRQ2S ⎯ IRQ2F SCI2 ⎯ ⎯ IIC IRQ1ES1 IRQ5ES1 ⎯ Bit4 IRQ0 IRQ2 IRQ4 IRQ6 DMAC0 DMAC2 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI0 A/D0, 1 CMT0 WDT ⎯ ⎯ IRQ3S ⎯ IRQ3F SCI2 ⎯ ⎯ IIC IRQ1ES0 IRQ5ES0 ⎯ Bit3 IRQ1 IRQ3 IRQ5 IRQ7 DMAC1 DMAC3 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI1 DTC CMT1 I/O(MTU) ⎯ ⎯ IRQ4S ⎯ IRQ4F SCI3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQ2ES1 IRQ6ES1 ⎯ Bit2 IRQ1 IRQ3 IRQ5 IRQ7 DMAC1 DMAC3 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI1 DTC CMT1 I/O(MTU) ⎯ ⎯ IRQ5S ⎯ IRQ5F SCI3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQ2ES0 IRQ6ES0 ⎯ Bit1 IRQ1 IRQ3 IRQ5 IRQ7 DMAC1 DMAC3 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI1 DTC CMT1 I/O(MTU) ⎯ ⎯ IRQ6S ⎯ IRQ6F SCI3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQ3ES1 IRQ7ES1 ⎯ Bit0 IRQ1 IRQ3 IRQ5 IRQ7 DMAC1 DMAC3 MTU0 MTU1 MTU2 MTU3 MTU4 SCI1 DTC CMT1 I/O(MTU) ⎯ NMIE IRQ7S ⎯ IRQ7F SCI3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQ3ES0 IRQ7ES0 ⎯ ⎯ Module INTC Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 749 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation PADRH Bit7 ⎯ PA23DR PADRL PA15DR PA7DR PAIORH ⎯ PA23IOR PAIORL PA15IOR PA7IOR PACRH ⎯ PA19MD1 PACRL1 ⎯ ⎯ PACRL2 PA7MD1 ⎯ PBDR ⎯ PB7DR PCDR PC15DR PC7DR PBIOR ⎯ PB7IOR PCIOR PC15IOR PC7IOR PBCR1 ⎯ ⎯ PBCR2 PB7MD1 PB3MD1 PCCR PC15MD PC7MD Bit6 ⎯ PA22DR PA14DR PA6DR ⎯ PA22IOR PA14IOR PA6IOR PA23MD PA19MD0 PA15MD PA11MD PA7MD0 PA3MD ⎯ PB6DR PC14DR PC6DR ⎯ PB6 IOR PC14 IOR PC6 IOR ⎯ ⎯ PB7MD0 PB3MD0 PC14MD PC6MD Bit5 ⎯ PA21DR PA13DR PA5DR ⎯ PA21IOR PA13IOR PA5IOR ⎯ PA18MD1 ⎯ ⎯ PA6MD1 PA2MD1 ⎯ PB5DR PC13DR PC5DR ⎯ PB5IOR PC13IOR PC5IOR ⎯ ⎯ PB6MD1 PB2MD1 PC13MD PC5MD Bit4 ⎯ PA20DR PA12DR PA4DR ⎯ PA20IOR PA12IOR PA4IOR PA22MD PA18MD0 PA14MD PA10MD PA6MD0 PA2MD0 ⎯ PB4DR PC12DR PC4DR ⎯ PB4 IOR PC12 IOR PC4 IOR ⎯ ⎯ PB6MD0 PB2MD0 PC12MD PC4MD Bit3 ⎯ PA19DR PA11DR PA3DR ⎯ PA19IOR PA11IOR PA3IOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA9MD1 PA5MD1 ⎯ ⎯ PB3DR PC11DR PC3DR ⎯ PB3 IOR PC11 IOR PC3 IOR PB3MD2 PB9MD1 PB5MD1 ⎯ PC11MD PC3MD Bit2 ⎯ PA18DR PA10DR PA2DR ⎯ PA18IOR PA10IOR PA2IOR PA21MD PA17MD PA13MD PA9MD0 PA5MD0 PA1MD ⎯ PB2DR PC10DR PC2DR ⎯ PB2 IOR PC10 IOR PC2 IOR PB2MD2 PB9MD0 PB5MD0 PB1MD PC10MD PC2MD Bit1 ⎯ PA17DR PA9DR PA1DR ⎯ PA17IOR PA9IOR PA1IOR ⎯ PA16MD1 ⎯ PA8MD1 ⎯ ⎯ PB9DR PB1DR PC9DR PC1DR PB9IOR PB1 IOR PC9IOR PC1 IOR ⎯ PB8MD1 PB4MD1 ⎯ PC9MD PC1MD Bit0 ⎯ PA16DR PA8DR PA0DR ⎯ PA16IOR PA8IOR PA0IOR PA20MD PA16MD0 PA12MD PA8MD0 PA4MD PA0MD PB8DR PB0DR PC8DR PC0DR PB8 IOR PB0 IOR PC8 IOR PC0 IOR ⎯ PB8MD0 PB4MD0 PB0MD PC8MD PC0MD Port C Port B Port C Port B Port C Port B Module Port A Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 750 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation PDDRH Bit7 PD31DR PD23DR PDDRL PD15DR PD7DR PDIORH PD31IOR PD23IOR PDIORL PD15IOR PD7IOR PDCRH1 PD31MD1 PD27MD1 Bit6 PD30DR PD22DR PD14DR PD6DR PD30IOR PD22IOR PD14IOR PD6IOR PD31MD0 PD27MD0 PD23MD0 PD19MD0 PD14MD0 Bit5 PD29DR PD21DR PD13DR PD5DR PD29IOR PD21IOR PD13IOR PD5IOR PD30MD1 PD26MD1 PD22MD1 PD18MD1 PD13MD0 Bit4 PD28DR PD20DR PD12DR PD4DR PD28IOR PD20IOR PD12IOR PD4IOR PD30MD0 PD26MD0 PD22MD0 PD18MD0 PD12MD0 Bit3 PD27DR PD19DR PD11DR PD3DR PD27IOR PD19IOR PD11IOR PD3IOR PD29MD1 PD25MD1 PD21MD1 PD17MD1 PD11MD0 Bit2 PD26DR PD18DR PD10DR PD2DR PD26IOR PD18IOR PD10IOR PD2IOR PD29MD0 PD25MD0 PD21MD0 PD17MD0 PD10MD0 Bit1 PD25DR PD17DR PD9DR PD1DR PD25IOR PD17IOR PD9IOR PD1IOR PD28MD1 PD24MD1 PD20MD1 PD16MD1 PD9MD0 Bit0 PD24DR PD16DR PD8DR PD0DR PD24IOR PD16IOR PD8IOR PD0IOR PD28MD0 PD24MD0 PD20MD0 PD16MD0 PD8MD0 Module Port D PDCRH2 PD23MD1 PD19MD1 PDCRL1 PD15MD0 PD7MD PDCRL2 PD15MD1 PD6MD PD14MD1 PD5MD PD13MD1 PD4MD PD12MD1 PD3MD PD11MD1 PD2MD PD10MD1 PD1MD PD9MD1 PD0MD PD8MD1 ⎯ PEDRL PE15DR PE7DR PFDR PEIORL PF7DR PE15IOR PE7IOR PECRL1 PE15MD1 PE11MD1 PECRL2 PE7MD1 PE3MD1 ⎯ ICSR1 ⎯ POE3F POE3M1 OCSR OSF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE14DR PE6DR PF6DR PE14IOR PE6IOR PE15MD0 PE11MD0 PE7MD0 PE3MD0 ⎯ POE2F POE3M0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE13DR PE5DR PF5DR PE13IOR PE5IOR PE14MD1 PE10MD1 PE6MD1 PE2MD1 ⎯ POE1F POE2M1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE12DR PE4DR PF4DR PE12IOR PE4IOR PE14MD0 PE10MD0 PE6MD0 PE2MD0 ⎯ POE0F POE2M0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE11DR PE3DR PF3DR PE11IOR PE3IOR PE13MD1 PE9MD1 PE5MD1 PE1MD1 ⎯ ⎯ POE1M1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE10DR PE2DR PF2DR PE10IOR PE2IOR PE13MD0 PE9MD0 PE5MD0 PE1MD0 ⎯ ⎯ POE1M0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE9DR PE1DR PF1DR PE9IOR PE1IOR PE12MD1 PE8MD1 PE4MD1 PE0MD1 ⎯ ⎯ POE0M1 OCE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PE8DR PE0DR PF0DR PE8IOR PE0IOR PE12MD0 PE8MD0 PE4MD0 PE0MD0 ⎯ PIE POE0M0 OIE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MTU Port F Port E Port E Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 751 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation CMSTR Bit7 ⎯ ⎯ CMCSR_0 ⎯ CMF CMCNT_0 Bit6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMIE Bit5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit1 ⎯ STR1 ⎯ CKS1 Bit0 ⎯ STR0 ⎯ CKS0 Module CMT CMCOR_0 CMCSR_1 ⎯ CMF ⎯ CMIE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CKS1 ⎯ CKS0 CMCNT_1 CMCOR_1 ⎯ ADDR0 ⎯ AD9 AD1 ⎯ AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE ADIE ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ AD7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ AD6 ⎯ ADM ADM ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ AD5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ AD4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ AD3 ⎯ CH1 CH1 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ AD2 ⎯ CH0 CH0 ⎯ A/D ADDR1 AD9 AD1 ADDR2 AD9 AD1 ADDR3 AD9 AD1 ADDR4 AD9 AD1 ADDR5 AD9 AD1 ADDR6 AD9 AD1 ADDR7 AD9 AD1 ADCSR_0 ADCSR_1 ADF ADF Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 752 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation ADCR_0 ADCR_1 ⎯ FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 ⎯ UBARH Bit7 TRGE TRGE ⎯ FWE FLER EB7 ⎯ ⎯ UBA31 UBA23 UBARL UBA15 UBA7 UBAMRH UBM31 UBM23 UBAMRL UBM15 UBM7 UBBR ⎯ CP1 UBCR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TCSR * TCNT * TCNT* 2 1 Bit6 CKS1 CKS1 ⎯ SWE ⎯ EB6 ⎯ ⎯ UBA30 UBA22 UBA14 UBA6 UBM30 UBM22 UBM14 UBM6 ⎯ CP0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ WT/IT Bit5 CKS0 CKS0 ⎯ ESU ⎯ EB5 ⎯ ⎯ UBA29 UBA21 UBA13 UBA5 UBM29 UBM21 UBM13 UBM5 ⎯ ID1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TME Bit4 ADST ADST ⎯ PSU ⎯ EB4 ⎯ ⎯ UBA28 UBA20 UBA12 UBA4 UBM28 UBM20 UBM12 UBM4 ⎯ ID0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit3 ADCS ADCS ⎯ EV ⎯ EB3 EB11 ⎯ UBA27 UBA19 UBA11 UBA3 UBM27 UBM19 UBM11 UBM3 ⎯ RW1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PV ⎯ EB2 EB10 ⎯ UBA26 UBA18 UBA10 UBA2 UBM26 UBM18 UBM10 UBM2 ⎯ RW0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CKS2 Bit1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ E ⎯ EB1 EB9 ⎯ UBA25 UBA17 UBA9 UBA1 UBM25 UBM17 UBM9 UBM1 ⎯ SZ1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CKS1 Bit0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ P ⎯ EB0 EB8 ⎯ UBA24 UBA16 UBA8 UBA0 UBM24 UBM16 UBM8 UBM0 ⎯ SZ0 ⎯ UBID ⎯ CKS0 Module A/D ⎯ FLASH (Only in F-ZTAT version) ⎯ UBC ⎯ OVF ⎯ WDT *1: Write *2: Read 1 RSTCSR* 1 RSTCSR *2 ⎯ SBYCR SYSCR MSTCR1 WOVF ⎯ SSBY ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RSTE ⎯ HI-Z ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RSTS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MSTP21 MSTP13 MSTP5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MSTP12 MSTP4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MSTP27 MSTP19 ⎯ MSTP3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MSTP26 MSTP18 ⎯ MSTP2 ⎯ ⎯ IRQEH AUDSRST MSTP25 MSTP17 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRQEL RAME MSTP24 MSTP16 ⎯ MSTP0 ⎯ Power-down modes MSTCR2 ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 753 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation ⎯ BCR1 Bit7 ⎯ ⎯ A3LG BCR2 IW31 CW3 WCR1 W33 W13 WCR2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RAMER ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DMAOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SAR_0 Bit6 ⎯ ⎯ A2LG IW30 CW2 W32 W12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit5 ⎯ MTURWE A1LG IW21 CW1 W31 W11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit4 ⎯ ⎯ A0LG IW20 CW0 W30 W10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit3 ⎯ ⎯ A3SZ IW11 SW3 W23 W03 ⎯ DSW3 ⎯ ⎯ RAMS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit2 ⎯ ⎯ A2SZ IW10 SW2 W22 W02 ⎯ DSW2 ⎯ ⎯ RAM2 ⎯ ⎯ AE Bit1 ⎯ ⎯ A1SZ IW01 SW1 W21 W01 ⎯ DSW1 ⎯ ⎯ RAM1 ⎯ PR1 NMIF Bit0 ⎯ ⎯ A0SZ IW00 SW0 W20 W00 ⎯ DSW0 ⎯ ⎯ RAM0 ⎯ PR0 DME ⎯ FLASH (Only in F-ZTAT version) ⎯ DMAC for all channels DMAC (Channel 0) Module ⎯ BSC DAR_0 DMATCR_0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CHCR_0 ⎯ ⎯ DM1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DM0 DS ⎯ ⎯ SM1 TM ⎯ ⎯ SM0 TS1 ⎯ ⎯ RS3 TS0 ⎯ RL RS2 IE ⎯ AM RS1 TE ⎯ AL RS0 DE Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 754 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation SAR_1 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module DMAC (Channel 1) DAR_1 DMATCR_1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CHCR_1 ⎯ ⎯ DM1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DM0 DS ⎯ ⎯ SM1 TM ⎯ ⎯ SM0 TS1 ⎯ ⎯ RS3 TS0 ⎯ RL RS2 IE ⎯ AM RS1 TE ⎯ AL RS0 DE DMAC (Channel 2) SAR_2 DAR_2 DMATCR_2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CHCR_2 ⎯ ⎯ DM1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DM0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SM1 TM ⎯ ⎯ SM0 TS1 ⎯ RO RS3 TS0 ⎯ ⎯ RS2 IE ⎯ ⎯ RS1 TE ⎯ ⎯ RS0 DE Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 755 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation SAR_3 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module DMAC (Channel 3) DAR_3 DMATCR_3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CHCR_3 ⎯ ⎯ DM1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DM0 ⎯ ⎯ DTEA6 DTEB6 DTEC6 DTED6 ⎯ DTVEC6 ⎯ ⎯ SM1 TM ⎯ DTEA5 DTEB5 DTEC5 DTED5 ⎯ DTVEC5 ⎯ DI SM0 TS1 ⎯ DTEA4 DTEB4 DTEC4 DTED4 ⎯ DTVEC4 ⎯ ⎯ RS3 TS0 ⎯ DTEA3 DTEB3 DTEC3 DTED3 ⎯ DTVEC3 ⎯ ⎯ RS2 IE ⎯ DTEA2 DTEB2 DTEC2 DTED2 NMIF DTVEC2 ⎯ ⎯ RS1 TE ⎯ DTEA1 DTEB1 DTEC1 DTED1 AE DTVEC1 ⎯ ⎯ RS0 DE ⎯ DTEA0 DTEB0 DTEC0 DTED0 SWDTE DTVEC0 ⎯ DTC ⎯ DTEA DTEB DTEC DTED DTCSR ⎯ DTEA7 DTEB7 DTEC7 DTED7 ⎯ DTVEC7 DTBR DTEE DTEG ⎯ SCRX ⎯ ADTSR ⎯ PPCR ⎯ ⎯ DTEG7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTEE5 ⎯ ⎯ IICX ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IICE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTEE3 ⎯ ⎯ HNDS ⎯ TRG1S1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTEE2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TRG1S0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTEE1 ⎯ ⎯ ICDRF ⎯ TRG0S1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTEE0 ⎯ ⎯ STOPIM ⎯ TRG0S0 ⎯ MZIZE ⎯ ⎯ I2C [Option] ⎯ A/D ⎯ Port E ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 756 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation ICCR ICSR ICDR SARX ICMR SAR ⎯ SDIR Bit7 ICE ESTP ICDR7 SVARX6 MLS SVA6 ⎯ TS3 ⎯ SDSR ⎯ ⎯ SDDRH Bit6 IEIC STOP ICDR6 SVARX5 WAIT SVA5 ⎯ TS2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit5 MST IRTR ICDR5 SVARX4 CKS2 SVA4 ⎯ TS1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit4 TRS AASX ICDR4 SVARX3 CKS1 SVA3 ⎯ TS0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit3 ACKE AL ICDR3 SVARX2 CKS0 SVA2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit2 BBSY AAS ICDR2 SVARX1 BC2 SVA1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit1 IRIC ADZ ICDR1 SVARX0 BC1 SVA0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Bit0 SCP ACKB ICDR0 FSX BC0 FS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SDTRF ⎯ H-UDI (Only in F-ZTAT version) Module I C [Option] 2 SDDRL Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 757 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers 25.3 Register abbreviation SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SDCR_0 SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SDCR_1 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SDCR_2 SMR_3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 SSR_3 RDR_3 SDCR_3 Register States in Each Operating Mode Software Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained SCI (Channel 3) SCI (Channel 2) SCI (Channel 1) Module SCI (Channel 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 758 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation TCR_3 TCR_4 TMDR_3 TMDR_4 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIORH_4 TIORL_4 TIER_3 TIER_4 TOER TOCR TGCR TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TCDR TDDR TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TCNTS TCBR TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TGRC_4 TGRD_4 TSR_3 TSR_4 TSTR TSYR Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Software Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Module MTU (Channels 3, 4) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 759 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Software Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained MTU (Channel 2) MTU (Channel 1) Module MTU (Channel 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 760 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF IPRG IPRH ICR1 ISR IPRI IPRJ ICR2 PADRH PADRL PAIORH PAIORL PACRH PACRL1 PACRL2 PBDR PCDR PBIOR PCIOR PBCR1 PBCR2 PCCR Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Software Standby Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Module Standby ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Port C Port B Port C Port B Port C Port B Port A Module INTC Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 761 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation PDDRH PDDRL PDIORH PDIORL PDCRH1 PDCRH2 PDCRL1 PDCRL2 PEDRL PFDR PEIORL PECRL1 PECRL2 ICSR1 OCSR CMSTR CMCSR_0 CMCNT_0 CMCOR_0 CMCSR_1 CMCNT_1 CMCOR_1 ADDR0 ADDR1 ADDR2 ADDR3 ADDR4 ADDR5 ADDR6 ADDR7 ADCSR_0 Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Software Standby Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module Standby ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Retained Retained Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained A/D CMT POE Port E Port F Port E Module Port D Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 762 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation ADCSR_1 ADCR_0 ADCR_1 FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 UBARH UBARL UBAMRH UBAMRL UBBR UBCR TCSR TCNT RSTCSR SBYCR SYSCR MSTCR1 MSTCR2 BCR1 BCR2 WCR1 WCR2 RAMER Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized*2 Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained* Retained* Retained Retained* Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained 1 1 Software Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Module Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained FLASH (Only in F-ZTAT version) BSC Power-down modes WDT UBC FLASH (Only in F-ZTAT version) Module A/D 1 DMAOR Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Retained DMAC (for all channels) SAR_0 DAR_0 DMATCR_0 CHCR_0 Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained DMAC (Channel 0) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 763 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Register abbreviation SAR_1 DAR_1 DMATCR_1 CHCR_1 SAR_2 DAR_2 DMATCR_2 CHCR_2 SAR_3 DAR_3 DMATCR_3 CHCR_3 DTEA DTEB DTEC DTED DTCSR DTBR DTEE DTEG SCRX ADTSR PPCR ICCR ICSR ICDR SARX ICMR SAR SDIR SDSR SDDRH SDDRL Power-on reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Manual reset Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Software Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Module Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Retained Retained ⎯ Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained H-UDI (Only in F-ZTAT version) I2C [Option] A/D Port E I2C [Option] DTC DMAC (Channel 3) DMAC (Channel 2) Module DMAC (Channel 1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 764 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Notes: 1. Initialized by internal manual reset due to WDT overflow. 2. Not initialized by internal power-on reset due to WDT overflow. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 765 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 25. List of Registers Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 766 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics Section 26 Electrical Characteristics 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 26.1 shows the absolute maximum ratings. Table 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage All pins other than analog input pins Analog input pins Analog supply voltage Analog reference voltage (Only in SH7145) Analog input voltage Operating temperature Regular specifications (except programming or Wide range specifications erasing flash memory) Operating temperature (programming or erasing flash memory) Storage temperature Symbol VCC Vin Vin AVCC AVref VAN Topr Rating –0.3 to +4.3 –0.3 to VCC +0.3 –0.3 to AVCC +0.3 –0.3 to +4.3 –0.3 to AVCC +0.3 –0.3 to AVCC +0.3 –20 to +75 –40 to +85 TWEopr Tstg –20 to +75 –55 to +125 °C °C Unit V V V V V V °C [Operating Precautions] Operating the LSI in excess of the absolute maximum ratings may result in permanent damage. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 767 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.2 DC Characteristics Table 26.2 DC Characteristics Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Input high-level RES, MRES, NMI, voltage (except FWP, MD3 to MD0, Schmitt trigger DBGMD input voltage) EXTAL A/D port Other input pins Input low-level RES, MRES, NMI, voltage (except FWP, MD3 to MD0, Schmitt trigger EXTAL, DBGMD input voltage) Other input pins Schmitt trigger input voltage IRQ7 to IRQ0, POE3 to POE0, TCLKA to TCLKD, TIOC0A to TIOC0D, TIOC1A, TIOC1B, TIOC2A, TIOC2B, TIOC3A to TIOC3D, TIOC4A to TIOC4D, SCK3 to SCK0, RXD3 to RXD0 RES, MRES, NMI, FWP, MD3 to MD0, DBGMD A/D port Other input pins Three-state leak current (OFF state) Output highlevel voltage Output lowlevel voltage port A, B, C, D, E, | Itsi | VIL Symbol VIH Min. VCC−0.5 Typ. — Max. VCC+0.3 Unit V Measurement Conditions VCC−0.5 2.2 2.2 −0.3 — — — — VCC+0.3 AVCC+0.3 VCC+0.3 0.5 V V V V −0.3 VT+ (VIH) VT– (VIL) VT+–VT– VCC−0.5 — 0.2 — — — — 0.8 — 0.5 — V V V V Input leak current | Iin | — — 1.0 µA — — — — 1.0 1.0 1.0 µA µA µA ⎯ ⎯ All output pins All output pins PE9, PE11 to PE15 VOH VOL VCC−0.5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0.4 0.8 V V V IOH = –200 µA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 15 mA ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 768 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics Measurement Conditions Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25°C f = 40 MHz f = 50 MHz f = 40 MHz f = 50 MHz Ta ≤ 50°C 50°C < Ta VCC = 3.3 V f = 40 MHz Clock 1:1/2 Item Input capacitance RES NMI All other input pins Current 2 consumption* Symbol Cin Min. Typ. Max. 20 20 20 210 220 170 180 50 500 210 Unit pF pF pF mA mA mA mA µA µA mA ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 150 160 110 120 3 Normal Clock 1:1 Icc operation Clock 1:1/2 Sleep Clock 1:1 Clock 1:1/2 Standby ⎯ 150 Flash program ming Clock 1:1 ⎯ ⎯ AICC 160 220 mA VCC = 3.3 V f = 50 MHz Analog Power supply current During A/D conversion Waiting for A/D conversion Standby ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 2 5 2 5 2 2 5 ⎯ mA mA µA mA mA µA V VCC ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ — Reference power supply current During A/D conversion Waiting for A/D conversion Standby AIref ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 [Operating Precautions] 1. When the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open. 2. The current consumption is measured when VIHmin = VCC – 0.5 V, VIL = 0.5 V, with all output pins unloaded. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 769 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics Table 26.3 Permitted Output Current Values Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Output low-level permissible current (per pin) Output low-level permissible current (total) Output high-level permissible current (per pin) Output high-level permissible current (total) Symbol IOL Σ IOL –IOH Σ –IOH Min. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Typ. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Max. 2.0* 80 2.0 25 Unit mA mA mA mA [Operating Precautions] To assure LSI reliability, do not exceed the output values listed in this table. Note: * IOL= 15mA (max) about the pins PE9, PE11 to PE15. However, at least three pins are permitted to have simultaneously IOL ≥ 2.0 mA among these pins. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 770 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3 26.3.1 AC Characteristics Test conditions for the AC characteristics high level: VIH minimum value, low level: VIL maximum value high level: 2.0 V, low level: 0.8 V IOL Input reference levels Output reference levels LSI output pin DUT output CL V VREF IOH CL is a total value that includes the capacitance of measurement equipment, and is set as follows: 30 pF: CK, CS7 to CS0, BREQ, BACK, DACK1, DACK0, IRQOUT, AUDCK 50 pF: A21 to A0, D31 to D0, RD, WRxx, TDO 100 pF: AUDATA3 to AUDATA0, AUDSYNC 70 pF: Port output pin other than the above and peripheral module output pins It is assumed that IOL = 1.6 mA, IOH = 200 µA in the test conditions. Figure 26.1 Output Load Circuit Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 771 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.2 Clock timing Table 26.4 shows the clock timing. Table 26.4 Clock Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Operating frequency Clock cycle time Clock low-level pulse width Clock high-level pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time EXTAL clock input frequency EXTAL clock input cycle time EXTAL clock input low-level pulse width EXTAL clock input high-level pulse width EXTAL clock input rise time EXTAL clock input fall time Reset oscillation settling time Standby return oscillation settling time Clock cycle time for peripheral modules Symbol fop tcyc tCL tCH tCR tCF fEX tEXcyc tEXL tEXH tEXR tEXF tOSC1 tOSC2 tpcyc Min. 4 20 Max. 50 250 Unit MHz ns ns ns ns ns MHz ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ns Figure 26.4 Figure 26.3 Figure Figure 26.2 1/2 tcyc−5 ⎯ 1/2 tcyc−5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 4 80 35 35 ⎯ ⎯ 10 10 25 5 5 12.5 250 ⎯ ⎯ 5 5 ⎯ ⎯ 500 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 772 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics tcyc tCH tCL VOH CK 1/2VCC VOH VOL tCF VOL VOH 1/2VCC tCR Figure 26.2 System Clock Timing tEXcyc tEXH tEXL EXTAL VIH 1/2VCC VIH VIL tEXF VIL VIH 1/2VCC tEXR Figure 26.3 EXTAL Clock Input Timing CK VCC min tosc1 RES tosc2 VCC Figure 26.4 Oscillation Settling Time Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 773 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.3 Control Signal Timing Table 26.5 shows control signal timing. Table 26.5 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item RES rise time, fall time RES pulse width RES setup time MRES pulse width MRES setup time MD3 to MD0 setup time NMI rise time, fall time NMI setup time NMI hold time IRQ7 to IRQ0 setup time* (edge detection) IRQ7 to IRQ0 setup time* (level detection) IRQ7 to IRQ0 hold time IRQOUT output delay time Bus request setup time Bus acknowledge delay time 1 Bus acknowledge delay time 2 Bus three-state delay time Symbol tRESr, tRESf tRESW tRESS tMRESW tMRESS tMDS tNMIr, tNMIf tNMIS tNMIH tIRQES tIRQLS tIRQEH tIRQOD tBRQS tBACKD1 tBACKD2 tBZD Min. ⎯ 25 35 20 35 20 ⎯ 35 35 19 19 19 ⎯ 19 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Max. 200 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 200 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 100 ⎯ 35 35 35 Unit ns tcyc ns tcyc ns tcyc ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 26.7 Figure 26.8 Figure 26.6 Figure Figure 26.5 [Operating Precautions] * The RES, MRES, NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0 signals are asynchronous inputs, but when the setup times shown here are observed, the signals are considered to have been changed at clock rise (RES, MRES) or fall (NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0). If the setup times are not observed, the recognition of these signals may be delayed until the next clock rise or fall. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 774 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics CK tRESS tRESW VIL tRESf tMDS tRESS VOH VIH RES VIH VIL tRESr MD3 to MD0 VIH VIL tMRESS tMRESS VIH VIL tMRESW VIL MRES Figure 26.5 Reset Input Timing CK VOL tNMIr tNMIf tNMIH tNMIS VIH VIL tIRQEH VIH VIL tIRQES VIH VIL tIRQLS VOL NMI IRQ edge IRQ level VIL Figure 26.6 Interrupt Signal Input Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 775 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics CK VOH tIRQOD tIRQOD VOH IRQOUT VOL Figure 26.7 Interrupt Signal Output Timing VOH tBRQS BREQ (input) tBACKD1 BACK (output) RD, CSn, WRxx A21 to A0, D31 to D0 VOL tBZD Hi-Z tBZD Hi-Z VOH VOL VOH tBRQS VIH tBACKD2 VOH VOL CK Figure 26.8 Bus Release Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 776 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.4 Bus Timing Table 26.6 shows bus timing. Table 26.6 Bus Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Address delay time CS delay time 1 CS delay time 2 Read strobe delay time 1 Read strobe delay time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Write strobe delay time 1 Write strobe delay time 2 Write data delay time Write data hold time WAIT setup time WAIT hold time Read data access time Access time from read strobe Address setup time (Read) Address setup time (Write) Address hold time (Write) Write data hold time DACK delay time Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Symbol tAD tCSD1 tCSD2 tRSD1 tRSD2 tRDS tRDH tWSD1 tWSD2 tWDD tWDH tWTS tWTH tACC* tOE* tASR tASW tWR tWRH tDACKD 5 5 Min. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 15 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 12 3 tcyc × (n + 2) − 35* * 1 2 Max. 25 28 28 25 25 ⎯ ⎯ 25 25 30 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 28 1 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure Figures 26.9, 26.10 Figure 26.11 tcyc × (n + 1.5) − 33* 0*3 0* 3 4 Figures 26.9, 26.10 5* ⎯ 0*3 The letter n means the number of waits. When CS assert time is extended, this value is equal to tcyc × (n + 3) − 35. When CS assert time is extended, this value is equal to tcyc. When CS assert time is extended, this value is equal to 5 + tcyc. If access time is satisfied, there is no need that tRDS is satisfied. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 777 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics T1 VOH CK tAD A21 to A0 VOL T2 tCSD1 CSn tCSD2 tRSD1 RD (read) tASR tACC D31 to D0 (read) tWSD1 WRx (write) tOE tRSD2 tRDS tRDH tWSD2 tWR tWRH tWDH tASW tWDD D31 to D0 (write) tDACKD DACKn tDACKD Note: tRDH is specified from the negate timing of A21 to A0, CSn, or RD, whichever is first. Figure 26.9 Basic Cycle (No Waits) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 778 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics T1 VOH CK tAD A21 to A0 tCSD1 CSn tRSD1 RD (read) tASR tACC D31 to D0 (read) tWSD1 WRx (write) tASW tWDD D31 to D0 (write) tDACKD DACKn tDACKD tWSD2 tWR tWRH tWDH tRDS tRDH tOE tRSD2 tCSD2 VOL TW T2 Note: tRDH is specified from the negate timing of A21 to A0, CSn, or RD, whichever is first. Figure 26.10 Basic Cycle (One Software Wait) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 779 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics T1 CK TW TW TWO T2 A21 to A0 CSn RD (read) D31 to D0 (read) WRx (write) D31 to D0 (write) tWTS tWTH WAIT tWTS tWTH DACKn Note: tRDH is specified from the negate timing of A21 to A0, CSn, or RD, whichever is first. Figure 26.11 Basic Cycle (Two Software Waits + Waits by WAIT Signal) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 780 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.5 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) Timing Table 26.7 shows direct memory access controller timing. Table 26.7 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item DREQ0, DREQ1 setup time DREQ0, DREQ1 hold time DREQ0, DREQ1 pulse width DRAK0, DRAK1 output delay time Symbol tDRQS tDRQH tDRQW tDRAKD Min. 10 1.5 tcyc−10 1.5 ⎯ Max. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 30 Unit ns ns tcyc ns Figure 26.13 Figure 26.14 Figure Figure 26.12 CK tDRQS DREQ0 DREQ1 level input tDRQS DREQ0 DREQ1 edge input tDRQS DREQ0 DREQ1 level cancel tDRQH Figure 26.12 DREQ0, DREQ1 Input Timing (1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 781 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics CK DREQ0 DREQ1 edge input tDRQW Figure 26.13 DREQ0, DREQ1 Input Timing (2) CK tDRAKD tDRAKD DRAK0 DRAK1 output Figure 26.14 DRAK Output Delay Time Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 782 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.6 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit (MTU)Timing Table 26.8 shows Multi-Function timer pulse unit timing. Table 26.8 Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Output compare output delay time Input capture input setup time Timer input setup time Timer clock pulse width (single edge specified) Timer clock pulse width (both edges specified) Timer clock pulse width (phase count mode) Symbol tTOCD tTICS tTCKS tTCKWH/L tTCKWH/L tTCKWH/L Min. ⎯ 19 19 1.5 2.5 2.5 Max. 100 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Unit ns ns ns tpcyc tpcyc tpcyc Figure 26.16 Figure Figure 26.15 CK tTOCD Output compare output tTICS Input capture input Figure 26.15 MTU Input/Output timing CK tTCKS tTCKS TCLKA to TCLKD tTCKWL tTCKWH Figure 26.16 MTU Clock Input Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 783 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.7 I/O Port Timing Table 26.9 shows I/O port timing. Table 26.9 I/O Port Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Port output data delay time Port input hold time Port input setup time Symbol tPWD tPRH tPRS Min. ⎯ 19 19 Max. 100 ⎯ ⎯ Unit ns ns ns Figure Figure 26.17 [Operating precautions] The port input signals are asynchronous. They are, however, considered to have been changed at CK clock fall with two-state intervals shown in figure 26.17. If the setup times shown here are not observed, recognition may be delayed until the clock fall two states after that timing. CK tPRS Port (read) tPWD Port (write) tPRH Figure 26.17 I/O Port Input/Output timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 784 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.8 Watchdog Timer (WDT)Timing Table 26.10 shows watchdog timer timing. Table 26.10 Watchdog Timer Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item WDTOVF delay time Symbol tWOVD Min. — Max. 100 Unit ns Figure Figure 26.18 CK VOH tWOVD VOH tWOVD WDTOVF Figure 26.18 WDT Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 785 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.9 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing Table 26.11 shows serial communication interface timing. Table 26.11 Serial Communication Interface Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Input clock cycle (asynchronous) Input clock cycle (clock sync) Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Transmit data delay time Received data setup time Received data hold time Transmit data delay time Received data setup time Received data hold time Transmit data delay time Received data setup time Received data hold time clock sync (When SCK input) clock sync (When SCK output) asynchronous Symbol Min. tscyc tscyc tsckw tsckr tsckf tTxD tRxS tRxH tTxD tRxS tRxH tTxD tRxS tRxH 4 6 0.4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 100 100 ⎯ tpcyc + 25 tpcyc + 25 ⎯ Max. ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 1.5 1.5 100 ⎯ ⎯ tpcyc + 43 ⎯ ⎯ 65 ⎯ Unit tpcyc tpcyc tscyc tpcyc tpcyc ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 26.20 Figure Figure 26.19 0.5 tpcyc + 50 ⎯ 1.5 tpcyc Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 786 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics [Operating Precautions] The inputs and outputs are asynchronous in asynchronous mode, but as shown in figure 26.20, the received data is considered to have been changed at CK clock rise (two-clock intervals). The transmit signals change with a reference of CK clock rise (two-clock intervals). tsckr VIH VIL VIL tscyc VIH VIH VIL tsckf tsckw VIH SCK0 to SCK3 Figure 26.19 SCI Input Timing SCI input/output timing (clock synchronous mode) tscyc SCK0 to SCK3 (input/output) tTxD TxD0 to TxD3 (transmit data) tRxS RxD0 to RxD3 (received data) tRxH SCI input/output timing (asynchronous mode) T1 VOH CK tTxD TxD0 to TxD3 (transmit data) tRxS RxD0 to RxD3 (received data) tRxH VOH Tn Figure 26.20 SCI Input/Output Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 787 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.10 I2C Bus Interface Timing Table 26.12 shows I2C bus interface timing. Table 26.12 I2C Bus Interface Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item SCL input cycle time SCL input high pulse width SCL input low pulse width Symbol tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf tSP tBUF tSTAS tSTOS tSDAS tSDAH Cb 2 Min. 12 tpcyc* 3 tpcyc 5 tpcyc ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 5 tpcyc 3 tpcyc 3 tpcyc 3 tpcyc 35 0 ⎯ 1 Typ. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Max. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 7.5 tpcyc* 300 1 tpcyc ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 400 2 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns pF Figure Figure 26.21 SCL and SDA input rise time tSr SCL and SDA input fall time SCL and SDA input spike pulse removal time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time tSTAH Retransmission start condition input setup time Halt condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL and SDA capacity load Notes: 1. tpcyc (ns) = 1/(Pφ supplied to I C module (MHz) ) 2 2. Can be set to 17.5 tpcyc by selecting the clock to be used for the I C module. For details, refer to section 14.5, Usage Notes. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 788 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics SDA0 tBUF VIH VIL tSTAH tSCLH tSTAS tSP tSTOS SCL0 P* S* tSf tSCLL tSCL Sr* tSr tSDAH tSDAS P* Note: * S, P, and Sr represent the following conditions S: Start P: Halt Sr: Retransmission start Figure 26.21 I2C Bus Interface Timing 26.3.11 Port Output Enable (POE) Timing Table 26.13 shows port output enable (POE) timing. Table 26.13 Port Output Enable Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item POE input setup time POE input pulse width Symbol tPOES tPOEW Min. 100 1.5 Max. — — Unit ns tpcyc Figure Figure 26.22 CK tPOES POE input tPOEW Figure 26.22 POE Input/Output Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 789 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.12 A/D Converter Timing Table 26.14 shows A/D converter timing. Table 26.14 A/D Converter Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item External trigger input start delay time Symbol tTRGS Min. 50 Typ. — Max. — Unit ns Figure Figure 26.23 3–5 states VOH CK ADTRG input tTRGS ADCRn Register (ADST = 1 set) Figure 26.23 External Trigger Input Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 790 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.13 H-UDI Timing Table 26.15 shows H-UDI timing. Table 26.15 H-UDI Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item TCK clock cycle TCK clock high-level width TCK clock low-level width TRST pulse width TRST setup time TMS setup time TMS hold time TDI setup time TDI hold time TDO delay time Note: * Symbol ttcyc tTCKH tTCKL tTRSW tTRSS tTMSS tTMSH tTDIS tTDIH tTDOD Min. 60* 0.4 0.4 20 30 15 10 15 10 ⎯ Max. 500 0.6 0.6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 30 Unit ns ttcyc ttcyc ttcyc ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 26.26 Figure 26.25 Figure Figure 26.24 The value must not be under 2 × tcyc. tTCKH tTCKL TCK VIH VIH VIL ttcyc VIL VIH Figure 26.24 H-UDI Clock Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 791 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics TCK tTRSS TRST VIL tTRSS VIH tTRSW VIL VIL Figure 26.25 H-UDI TRST Timing VIH TCK VIL tTMSS TMS tTDIS TDI tTDOD TDO tTDOD tTDIH tTMSH VIH Figure 26.26 H-UDI Input/Output Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 792 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.3.14 AUD Timing Table 26.16 shows AUD timing. Table 26.16 AUD Timing Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item AUDRST pulse width (Branch trace) AUDRST pulse width (RAM monitor) AUDMD setup time (Branch trace) AUDMD setup time (RAM monitor) Branch trace clock cycle Branch trace clock duty Branch trace data delay time Branch trace data hold time Branch trace SYNC delay time Branch trace SYNC hold time RAM monitor clock cycle RAM monitor clock low pulse width RAM monitor output data delay time RAM monitor output data hold time RAM monitor input data setup time RAM monitor input data hold time PE3/AUDATA3, PE4/AUDATA2 Other AUDATA pins tRMSS tRMSH PA16/AUDSYNC Other AUDSYNC pins Symbol tAUDRSTW tAUDRSTW tAUDMDS tAUDMDS tBTCYC tBTCKW tBTDD tBTDH tBTSD tBTSH tRMCYC tRMCKW tRMDD tRMDHD tRMDS tRMDH Min. 20 5 20 5 2 40 ⎯ −10 ⎯ −10 80 35 7 5 10 Max. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 2 60 11 ⎯ 10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Unit tcyc tRMCYC tcyc tRMCYC tcyc % ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 26.29 Figure 26.28 Figure Figure 26.27 tRMCYC−20 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 15 + tRMCYC − ⎯ tRMCKW 15 10 ⎯ ⎯ RAM monitor SYNC setup time RAM monitor SYNC hold time 13 + tRMCYC − ⎯ tRMCKW 13 ⎯ Load conditions: AUDCK (output): CL = 30 pF AUDSYNC: CL = 100 pF AUDATA3 to AUDATA0: CL = 100 pF Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 793 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics tcyc CK (Branch trace) tRMCYC AUDCK (input) (RAM monitor) tAUDRSTW AUDRST tAUDMDS AUDMD Figure 26.27 AUD Reset Timing tBTCKW AUDCK (output) tBTDD AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 (output) AUDSYNC (output) tBTDH tBTCYC tBTSD tBTSH Figure 26.28 Branch Trace Timing tRMCYC AUDCK (input) tRMDD AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 (output) AUDATA3 to AUDATA0 (input) AUDSYNC (input) tRMDHD tRMCKW tRMDS tRMDH tRMSS tRMSH Figure 26.29 RAM Monitor Timing Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 794 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.4 A/D Converter Characteristics Table 26.17 shows A/D converter characteristics. Table 26.17 A/D Converter Characteristics Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item Resolution A/D conversion time Analog input capacitance Permitted analog signal source impedance Non-linear error (reference value) Offset error (reference value) Full-scale error (reference value) Quantization error Absolute error Min. 10 — — — — — — — — Typ. 10 — — — — — — — — Max. 10 6.7* /5.4* 20 1 ±3.0*3*4*5/±5.0*6 ±3.0* * * /±5.0* 3 4 5 6 1 2 Unit bit μs pF kΩ LSB LSB LSB LSB 3 4 5 6 ±3.0* * * /±5.0* 3 4 5 6 ±0.5 ±4.0* * * /±6.0* LSB Notes: 1. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1) and tpcyc = 50 ns. 2. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1) and tpcyc = 40 ns. 3. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1), tpcyc = 50 ns, and Ta = −20 to +75°C (regular specifications). 4. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1), tpcyc = 40 ns, and Ta = −20 to +75°C (regular specifications). 5. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1), tpcyc = 50 ns, and Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications). 6. This is a value when (CKS1, 0) = (1,1), tpcyc = 40 ns, and Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications). Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 795 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics 26.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 26.18 shows flash memory characteristics. Table 26.18 Flash Memory Characteristics Conditions: VCC = PLLVCC =3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, AVCC = VCC ± 0.3 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC , VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications*6), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications*6), When programming or erasing flash memory, Ta = –20°C to +75°C. Item 1, 2, 4 Programming time* * * Symbol tP tE NWEC NWEC Min ⎯ ⎯ 7 100* Typ 10 100 Max 200 1200 Unit ms/ 128 bytes ms/block Times Times Remarks 1, 3, 5 Erase time* * * Reprogramming count 8 10000* — Standard product Wide temperaturerange product — — 100 Data retained time Programming Wait time after SWE bit setting* 14 Wait time after P bit setting* * 1 1 Wait time after PSU bit setting* tDRP tsswe tspsu tsp30 tsp200 tsp10 10* 1 50 28 9 — 1 50 30 200 10 — ⎯ ⎯ 32 202 12 years µs µs µs µs µs Programming time wait Programming time wait Additionalprogramming time wait 198 8 Wait time after P bit clear* 1 tcp tcpsu tspv 1 5 5 4 2 2 100 ⎯ 5 5 4 2 2 100 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1000 µs µs µs µs µs µs Times 1 Wait time after PSU bit clear* 1 Wait time after PV bit setting* Wait time after H'FF dummy write* tspvr 1 Wait time after PV bit clear* tcpv 1 Wait time after SWE bit clear* tcswe 1, 4 Maximum programming count* * N Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 796 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics Item Erase 1 Wait time after SWE bit setting* Symbol tsswe tsesu tse tce tcesu tsev 1 Min 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 12 Typ 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 ⎯ Max ⎯ ⎯ 100 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 120 Unit µs µs ms µs µs µs µs µs µs Times Remarks Wait time after ESU bit setting* 15 Wait time after E bit setting* * 1 Erase time wait Wait time after E bit clear* 1 1 Wait time after ESU bit clear* Wait time after EV bit setting* Wait time after EV bit clear* 15 Maximum erase count* * 1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write* tsevr 1 tcev 1 Wait time after SWE bit clear* tcswe N Notes: 1. Make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify algorithm or erase/eraseverify algorithm. 2. Programming time per 128 bytes (shows the total period for which the P-bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR1) is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) 3. 1-Block erase time (shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) 4. To specify the maximum programming time value (tp (max)) in the 128-bytes programming algorithm, set the max. value (1000) for the maximum programming count (N). The wait time after P bit setting should be changed as follows according to the value of the programming counter (n). Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6: [In additional programming] Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6: tsp10 = 10 μs 5. For the maximum erase time (tE (max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after E bit setting (tse) and the maximum erase count (N): tE(max) = Wait time after E bit setting (tse) x maximum erase count (N) To set the maximum erase time, the values of (tse) and (N) should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. Examples: When tse = 100 ms, N = 12 times When tse = 10 ms, N = 120 times 6. See appendix C, Product Code Lineup for correspondence of the standard product, wide temperature-range product, and product model name. 7. All characteristics after rewriting are guaranteed up to this minimum rewriting times (therefore 1 to min. times). 8. Reference value at 25°C (A rough rewriting target number to which a rewriting usually functions) 9. Data retention characteristics when rewriting is executed within the specification values including minimum values. tsp30 = 30 μs Programming counter (n) = 7 to 1000: tsp200 = 200 μs Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 797 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 26. Electrical Characteristics Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 798 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Appendix A Pin States A. Pin State Pin initial states differ according to MCU operating modes. Refer to section 17, Pin Function Controller (PFC), for details. Table A.1 Pin States (SH7144) Pin State Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type Clock Expansion with ROM Singlechip Manual Pin Function Power-Down State Standby in Software Standby H* L I I I Z O Z Z I I I I Z* Z* 3 1 Bus Master- Bus MasterSleep O O I I I I O I O I I I I I I Pin Name CK XTAL EXTAL PLLCAP 8 bits 16 bits O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z 2 ship Release ship Release O O I I I I O I L I I I I I I O L I I I Z O I L I I I I Z* Z* 3 O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z 2 O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z 2 Z O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z 2 O O I I I I O I O I I I I I I System control RES MRES WDTOVF BREQ BACK Operation mode control MD0 to MD3 DBGMD FWP Interrupt NMI IRQ0 to IRQ3 IRQ4 to IRQ7 4 4 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 799 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type Interrupt Expansion Singlechip Pin State Power-Down State Standby in Software Manual Standby Bus Master- Bus MasterSleep O Pin Name IRQOUT 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z Z Z ship Release ship Release O Z* 6 Z O Z* 6 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) H* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) H* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Address bus A0 to A17 A18 to A21 Data bus Bus control D0 to D15 WAIT CS0, CS1 CS2, CS3 CS6, CS7 RD WRH, WRL DMAC DREQ0, DREQ1 DRAK0, DRAK1 DACK0, DACK1 H H Z Z Z H H Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O O I O O Z Z Z O* Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) O O I/O I O O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O Z Z Z H Z O Z Z Z H Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O O I/O I O O Z Z Z Z Z Z O O I O O Z Z I O O Z Z Z O* Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) MTU TCLKA to TCLKD Z Z Z Z I Z I I (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Z Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 800 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Pin State Power-Down Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type MTU Expansion Singlechip Manual State Standby in Software Standby K* 1 Bus MasterSleep ship Release I/O I/O Bus Mastership Release K* 1 Pin Name TIOC0A to TIOC0D TIOC1A, TIOC1B TIOC2A, TIOC2B TIOC3A, TIOC3C TIOC3B, TIOC3D TIOC4A to TIOC4D 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z Z Z Z I/O Z Z Z Z I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 I/O I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Port control POE0 to POE3 SCI SCK0 to SCK2, SCK3(PE6) SCK3(PE9) RXD0 to RXD2, RXD3(PE4) RXD3(PE11) (MZIZE in PPCR=1) I I/O I I/O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z I I/O Z Z Z Z Z Z I Z I I Z TXD0 to TXD2, TXD3(PE5) TXD3 (PE12) Z Z Z Z O O* 1 O O O* 1 Z Z Z Z O Z* 6 O O Z* 6 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 801 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Pin State Power-Down Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type Pin Name Expansion Singlechip Manual State Standby in Bus Software Bus Master- Master-ship Standby Sleep ship Release Release Z Z Z Z K* 1 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z A/D converter AN0 to AN7 ADTRG IC 2 Z Z Z Z Z I I I/O I/O I/O I I I/O I/O I/O I I I/O I/O I/O Z Z Z Z K* 1 SCL0 SDA0 I/O port PA0 to PA15 PB0 to PB9 PC0 to PC15 PD0 to PD15 PE0 to PE8, PE10 PE9, PE11 to PE15 Z Z Z Z I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 I/O I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) PF0 to PF7 Z Z Z Z I Z I I (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Z [Legend] I: Input O: Output H: High-level output L: Low-level output Z: High-impedance K: Input pins become high-impedance, and output pins retain their state. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 802 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Table A.2 Pin States (SH7145) Pin State Power-Down Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Expansion Singlechip Manual Pin Function State Standby in Software Standby H* L I I I Z O Z Z I I I I Z* Z* 3 1 Bus Master- Bus MasterSleep O O I I I I O I O I I I I I I O Type Clock Pin Name CK XTAL EXTAL PLLCAP 8 bits 16 bits with ROM O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z Z 2 ship Release ship Release O O I I I I O I L I I I I I I O O L I I I Z O I L I I I I Z* Z* 3 O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z Z 2 O O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z Z 2 Z O I I I Z O* Z Z I I I I Z Z Z 2 O O I I I I O I O I I I I I I O System control RES MRES WDTOVF BREQ BACK Operation mode control MD0 to MD3 DBGMD FWP Interrupt NMI IRQ0 to IRQ3 IRQ4 to IRQ7 IRQOUT (PD30) IRQOUT (PE15) 4 4 H* 1 H* 1 Z Z Z Z O Z* 6 O O Z* 6 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) H* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) H* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Address bus A0 to A17 A18 to A21 Data bus D0 to D31 O Z Z O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O O I/O Z Z Z O O I/O Z Z Z (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Z Z Z Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 803 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type Bus control Expansion Singlechip Manual Pin State Power-Down State Standby in Software Standby Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Bus Master- Bus MasterSleep I O O O O O I Pin Name WAIT CS0, CS1 CS2, to CS7 RD WRH, WRL WRHH, WRHL 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z H Z H H Z Z Z H Z H H H Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z ship Release ship Release Z Z Z Z Z Z I Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z I O O O O O I DMAC DREQ0, DREQ1 DRAK0, DRAK1 DACK0 (PD26), DACK1 (PD27) DACK0 (PE14), DACK1 (PE15) Z Z Z Z O O* 1 O O O* 1 Z Z Z Z O O* * 15 O O O* * 15 Z Z Z Z O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 O O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) MTU TCLKA to TCLKD TIOC0A to TIOC0D TIOC1A, TIOC1B TIOC2A, TIOC2B TIOC3A, TIOC3C Z Z Z Z I/O K* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) I I Z Z Z Z Z I Z I/O I/O K* 1 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 804 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type MTU Expansion Singlechip Manual Pin State Power-Down State Standby in Software Standby Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 Bus Master- Bus MasterSleep I/O Pin Name TIOC3B, TIOC3D TIOC4A to TIOC4D 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z Z Z ship Release ship Release I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 Z I/O (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Port control POE0 to POE3 SCI SCK0 to SCK2, SCK3(PE6) SCK3(PE9) RXD0 to RXD2, Z RXD3(PE4) RXD3(PE11) (MZIZE in PPCR=1) I I Z Z Z Z Z I Z Z Z Z Z I/O Z I/O I/O Z Z Z Z I Z I I Z TXD0 to TXD2, TXD3(PE5) TXD3 (PE12) Z Z Z Z O O* 1 O O O* 1 Z Z Z Z O Z* 6 O O Z* 6 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=0) O* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) A/D converter AN0 to AN7 ADTRG IC 2 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) I I I/O I/O I I I/O I/O Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z I I I/O I/O Z Z Z Z SCL0 SDA0 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 805 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Pin Function Reset State Power-On Software Expansion without ROM Type I/O port Expansion Singlechip Manual Pin State Power-Down State Standby in Software Standby K* 1 Bus Master- Bus Master- Pin Name PA0 to PA23 PB0 to PB9 PC0 to PC15 PD0 to PD31 PE0 to PE8, PE10 PE9, PE11 to PE15 8 bits 16 bits with ROM Z Z Z Sleep ship Release ship Release I/O I/O K* 1 Z I/O Z Z Z Z I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 I/O I/O Z (MZIZE in PPCR=0) K* 1 (MZIZE in PPCR=1) PF0 to PF7 Z Z Z Z I Z I I (MZIZE in PPCR=1) Z [Legend] I: Input O: Output H: High-level output L: Low-level output Z: High impedance K: Input pins become high-impedance, and output pins retain their state. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 806 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Table A.3 Pin States Pin State Reset Power-down Software Standby I I I O/Z I No Pin Function Type H-UDI Pin Name TMS TRST TDI TDO TCK Power-On (DBGMD=L) Z Z Z Z Z Power-On (DBGMD=H) I I I O/Z I Manual I I I O/Z I Test Reset I I I Z I Sleep I I I O/Z I Connection Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited O/Z Prohibited Table A.4 Pin States Pin State Reset PowerAUD Manual High-level input Reset Low-level input I AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: H AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: H AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: H Pin Function Power-down Software Standby High-level input I AUDMD = High: I/O AUDMD = Low: O AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: O AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: O AUD Module Sleep High-level input I AUDMD = High: I/O AUDMD = Low: O AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: O AUDMD =High: I AUDMD = Low: O Type AUD Pin Name AUDRST On Z Standby Z No Connection Prohibited AUDMD AUDATA0 to AUDATA3 Z Z I AUDMD = High: I/O AUDMD = Low: O Z Z Prohibited Prohibited AUDCK Z AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: O Z Prohibited AUDSYNC Z AUDMD = High: I AUDMD = Low: O Z Prohibited Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 807 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 A. Pin States Table A.5 Pin States Pin State Reset Power-On (DBGMD = L) Z Power-On (DBGMD = H) O Power-down Pin Function Type Pin Name Manual O Software Standby O Sleep O Operating mode ASEBRKAK control [Legend] I: Input O: Output H: High-level output L: Low-level output Z: High impedance K: Input pins become high-impedance, and output pins retain their state. Notes: 1. When the Hi-Z bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the output pins enter their high-impedance state. 2. This pin operates as an input pin during power-on reset period. This pin should be pulled up to prevent malfunction. In this case, the resistance value must be 1MΩ or higher. 3. This pin operates as an input pin when the IRQEL bit in SBYCR is set to 0. 4. This pin operates as an input pin when the IRQEH bit in SBYCR is set to 0. 5. This pin becomes high-impedance in the emulator. 6. In the emulator, this pin operates as an input pin when the Hi-Z bit in SBYCR is set to 0. Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 808 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 B. Pin States of Bus Related Signals Appendix B Pin States of Bus Related Signals B. Pin States of Bus Related Signals Pin States of Bus Related Signals (1) On-chip Peripheral Module On-chip ROM On-chip RAM 8-bit Space Space Space H H ⎯ H ⎯ H ⎯ H ⎯ H ⎯ Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z H H H H H H H H H H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z H H H H H H H H H H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z 16-bit Space Upper Byte H H H H H H H H H H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Lower Byte Word/Longword H H H H H H H H H H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z H H H H H H H H H H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Table B.1 Pin Name CS0 to CS7 RD R W WRHH R W WRHL R W WRH R W WRL R W A21 to A0 D31 to D24 D23 to D16 D15 to D8 D7 to D0 [Legend] R: W: Enabled: Read Write Chip select signals corresponding to accessed areas = Low The other chip select signals = High Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 809 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 B. Pin States of Bus Related Signals Table B.1 Pin States of Bus Related Signals (2) Normal External Space 16-bit Space Pin Name CS0 to CS7 RD R W WRHH R W WRHL R W WRH R W WRL R W A21 to A0 D31 to D24 D23 to D16 D15 to D8 D7 to D0 8-bit Space Enabled L H H H H H H H H L Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Upper Byte Enabled L H H H H H H L H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Hi-Z Lower Byte Enabled L H H H H H H H H L Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Word/Longword Enabled L H H H H H H L H L Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Data [Legend] R: W: Enabled: Read Write Chip select signals corresponding to accessed areas = Low The other chip select signals = High Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 810 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 B. Pin States of Bus Related Signals Table B.1 Pin States of Bus Related Signals (3) Normal External Space 32-bit Space Most Significant Least Pin Name CS0 to CS7 RD R W WRHH R W WRHL R W WRH R W WRL R W A21 to A0 D31 to D24 D23 to D16 D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Byte Second Byte Enabled L H H H H L H H H H Address Hi-Z Data Hi-Z Hi-Z Third Byte Enabled L H H H H H H L H H Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Hi-Z Significant Byte Upper Word Enabled L H H L H L H H H H Address Data Data Hi-Z Hi-Z Lower Word Longword Enabled L H H H H H H L H L Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Data Data Enabled L H H L H L H L H L Address Data Data Data Data Enabled L H H L H H H H H H Address Data Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Enabled L H H H H H H H H L Address Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z Data [Legend] R: W: Enabled: Read Write Chip select signals corresponding to accessed areas = Low The other chip select signals = High Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 811 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 C. Product Code Lineup Appendix C Product Code Lineup Product Type SH7144 Flash memory version Standard product Wide temperature range product Masked ROM version Standard product Wide temperature range product I C bus interface function product I C bus interface function/wide temperature range product ROM less version Standard product Wide temperature range product SH7145 Flash memory version Standard product 2 2 Part No. HD64F7144F50 HD64F7144FW50 HD6437144F50 HD6437144FW50 HD6437144WF50 HD6437144WFW50 Package (Package Code) QFP-112 (FP-112B) HD6417144F50 HD6417144FW50 HD64F7145F50 LQFP-144 (FP-144F) Wide temperature range product Masked ROM version Standard product Wide temperature range product I C bus interface function product I C bus interface function/wide temperature range product ROM less version Standard product Wide temperature range product 2 2 HD64F7145FW50 HD6437145F50 HD6437145FW50 HD6437145WF50 HD6437145WFW50 HD6417145F50 HD6417145FW50 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 812 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Appendix D I/O Port Block Diagrams RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR Peripheral data bus PAn/RXDm PADRL.RD RXDm (SCI) PFC Q PAnMD Q PAnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.1 PAn/RXDm Symbol in Figure D.1 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PA0/RXD0 PA3/RXD1 PAn PA0 PA3 RXDm RXD0 (SCI) RXD1 (SCI) F-ZTAT version √ √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 813 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TXDm (SCI) PAn/TXDm RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR PADRL.RD PFC Q PAnMD Q PAnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.2 PAn/TXDm Symbol in Figure D.2 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PA1/TXD0 PA4/TXD1 PAn PA1 PA4 TXDm TXD0 (SCI) TXD1 (SCI) F-ZTAT version √ √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 814 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PAn/SCKm/DREQm/IRQm SCKm (SCI) RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR PADRL.RD PFC Q PAnMD0 Q PAnMD1 SBYCR Q IRQEL Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.3 PAn/SCKm/DREQm/IRQm Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less PAn SCKm DREQm IRQm version version Pins version version PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA6 TCLKA CS2 √ √ √ √ √ (MTU) (BSC) PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PA7 TCLKB CS3 √ √ √ √ √ (MTU) (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 815 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Symbol in Figure D.3 Peripheral data bus SCKm (SCI) DREQm (DMAC) IRQm (INTC) Q PAnIOR Q Hi-Z D. I/O Port Block Diagrams CSx (BSC) PAn/TCLKm/CSx RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR PADRL.RD PFC Q PAnMD0 Q PAnMD1 SBYCR Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.4 PAn/TCLKm/CSx Symbol in Figure D.4 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PA6/TCLKA/CS2 PA7/TCLKB/CS3 PAn PA6 PA7 TCLKm TCLKA (MTU) TCLKB (MTU) CSx F-ZTAT version CS2 √ (BSC) CS3 √ (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 816 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TCLKm (MTU) Q PAnIOR Q Hi-Z D. I/O Port Block Diagrams RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR PAn/TCLKm/IRQx PADRL.RD PFC Q PAnMD0 Q PAnMD1 SBYCR Q IRQEL Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.5 PAn/TCLKm/IRQx Symbol in Figure D.5 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version/ROM version version less version √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins PAn TCLKm TCLKC (MTU) TCLKD (MTU) IRQx IRQ2 (INTC) IRQ3 (INTC) F-ZTAT version √ √ PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 PA8 PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 PA9 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 817 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TCLKm (MTU) IRQx (INTC) Q PAnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 1 PAn/Function 1 RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRL.WR PADRL.RD PFC Q PAnMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.6 PAn/Function 1 Symbol in Figure D.6 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ √ Pins PA10/CS0 PA11/CS1 PA12/WRL PA13/WRH PA14/RD PAn Function 1 F-ZTAT version √ √ √ √ √ PA10 CS0 (BSC) PA11 CS1 (BSC) PA12 WRL (BSC) PA13 WRH (BSC) PA14 RD (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 818 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus Q PAnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams CK (CPG) RES PA15/CK R Q PA15DR D C PADRL.WR PADRL.RD PFC Q PA15MD Q PA15IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby Bus release RES: Reset signal PADRL.RD: Port A data register L read signal PADRL.WR: Port A data register L write signal Figure D.7 PA15/CK Symbol in Figure D.7 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PA15/CK PA15 PA15 CK CK (CPG) F-ZTAT version √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 819 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams AUDSYNC (AUD) PA16/AUDSYNC RES R Q PA16DR D C PADRH.WR Peripheral data bus PADRH.RD AUDSYNC (AUD) PFC Q PA16MD0 Q PA16MD1 Q PA16IOR AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.8 PA16/AUDSYNC Symbol in Figure D.8 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PA16/AUDSYNC PA16 PA16 AUDSYNC AUDSYNC (AUD) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 820 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams RES PA17/WAIT R Q PA17DR D C PADRH.WR PADRH.RD PFC Q PA17MD Q PA17IOR Bus release SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.9 PA17/WAIT Symbol in Figure D.9 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PA17/WAIT PA17 PA17 WAIT WAIT (BSC) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 821 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus WAIT (BSC) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams DRAK0 (DMAC) PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 RES R Q PA18DR D C PADRH.WR PADRH.RD PFC Q PA18MD0 Q PA18MD1 Q PA18IOR Bus release SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.10 PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 Symbol in Figure D.10 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PA18 BREQ DRAK0 DRAK0 (DMAC) F-ZTAT version ⎯ PA18/BREQ/ PA18 BREQ DRAK0 (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 822 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus BREQ (BSC) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams DRAK1 (DMAC) PA19/BACK/DRAK1 BACK (BSC) RES R Q PA19DR D C PADRH.WR PADRH.RD PFC Q PA19MD0 Q PA19MD1 Q PA19IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.11 PA19/BACK/DRAK1 Symbol in Figure D.11 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PA19 BACK DRAK1 F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version √ PA19/BACK/ PA19 BACK DRAK1 (BSC) DRAK1 ⎯ (DMAC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 823 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams RES R PAn Peripheral data bus Q PAnDR D C PADRH.WR PADRH.RD PFC Q PAnMD Q PAnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.12 PAn Symbol in Figure D.12 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ ⎯ ⎯ Pins PA16 PA20 PA21 PAn PA16 PA20 PA21 PAnMD PA16MD0 PA20MD PA21MD F-ZTAT version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 824 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 2 PAn/Function 2 RES R Q PAnDR D C PADRH.WR PADRH.RD PFC Q PAnMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PADRH.RD: Port A data register H read signal PADRH.WR: Port A data register H write signal Figure D.13 PAn/Function 2 Symbol in Figure D.13 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ Pins PA20/CS4 PA21/CS5 PAn PA20 PA21 Function 2 CS4 (BSC) CS5 (BSC) WRHL (BSC) WRHH (BSC) F-ZTAT version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PA22/WRHL PA22 PA23/WRHH PA23 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 825 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus Q PAnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Am (BSC) RES PBn/Am R Q PBnDR D C PBDR.WR PBDR.RD PFC Q PBnMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.14 PBn/Am Symbol in Figure D.14 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PB0/A16 PB1/A17 PBn PB0 PB1 Am A16 (BSC) A17 (BSC) F-ZTAT version √ √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 826 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus Q PBnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PBn/IRQm/PQEm/Function 1 RES R Q PBnDR D C PBDR.WR PBDR.RD PFC Q PBnMD0 Q PBnMD1 Q PBnMD2 SBYCR Q IRQEL Software standby Function 1 RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.15 PBn/IRQm/POEm/Function 1 Symbol in Figure D.15 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins Function PBn IRQm POEm 1 PB2/IRQ0/ PB2 IRQ0 POE0 SCL0 (IIC) √ POE0/SCL0 (INTC) (POE) PB3/IRQ1/ PB3 IRQ1 POE1 SDA0 (IIC) √ POE1/SDA0 (INTC) (POE) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 827 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus IRQm (INTC) POEm (POE) Function 1 Q PBnIOR Q Hi-Z D. I/O Port Block Diagrams RES R Q PBnDR D C PBDR.WR PBn/IRQm/POEm PBDR.RD PFC Q PBnMD0 Q PBnMD1 SBYCR Q IRQEL Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.16 PBn/IRQm/POEm Symbol in Figure D.16 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ Pins PBn IRQm POEm F-ZTAT version √ √ F-ZTAT version √ √ PB4/IRQ2/ PB4 POE2 PB5/IRQ3/ PB5 POE3 IRQ2 POE2 (INTC) (POE) IRQ3 POE3 (INTC) (POE) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 828 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus IRQm (INTC) POEm (POE) Q PBnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PBn/IRQm/POEm/CSx CSx (BSC) RES R Q PBnDR D C PBDR.WR PBDR.RD PFC Q PBnMD0 Q PBnMD1 Q PBnIOR SBYCR Q IRQEL Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.17 PBn/IRQm/POEm/CSx Symbol in Figure D.17 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PBn IRQm POEm CSx F-ZTAT version PB4/IRQ2/ PB4 POE2/CS6 PB5/IRQ3/ PB5 POE3/CS7 IRQ2 POE2 CS6 ⎯ (INTC) (POE) (BSC) IRQ3 POE3 CS7 ⎯ (INTC) (POE) (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 829 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus IRQm (INTC) POEm (POE) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams BACK (BSC) PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK A18 (BSC) RES R Q PB6DR D C PBDR.WR PBDR.RD PFC Q PB6MD0 Q PB6MD1 Q PB6IOR SBYCR Q IRQEH Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.18 PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK Symbol in Figure D.18 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PB6 IRQ4 A18 F-ZTAT BACK version F-ZTAT version √ PB6/IRQ4/ PB6 A18/BACK IRQ4 A18 BACK √ (INTC) (BSC) (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 830 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus IRQ4 (INTC) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams A19 (BSC) RES R Q PB7DR D C PBDR.WR PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ PBDR.RD PFC Q PB7MD0 Q PB7MD1 Bus release SBYCR Q IRQEH Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.19 PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ Symbol in Figure D.19 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PB7 IRQ5 A19 BREQ F-ZTAT version √ PB7/IRQ5/ PB7 IRQ5 A19 BREQ A19/BREQ (INTC) (BSC) (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 831 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus IRQ5 (INTC) BREQ (BSC) Q PB7IOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams A20 (BSC) RES R Q PB8DR D C PBDR.WR Peripheral data bus PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT PBDR.RD IRQ6 (INTC) WAIT (BSC) PFC Q PB8MD0 Q PB8MD1 Q PB8IOR SBYCR Q IRQEH Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.20 PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT Symbol in Figure D.20 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PB8 IRQ6 A20 F-ZTAT WAIT version PB8/IRQ6/ PB8 A20/WAIT IRQ6 A20 WAIT √ (INTC) (BSC) (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 832 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams A21 (BSC) RES R Q PB9DR D C PBDR.WR Peripheral data bus PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG PBDR.RD IRQ7 (INTC) ADTRG (A/D) PFC Q PB9MD0 Q PB9MD1 Q PB9IOR SBYCR Q IRQEH Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PBDR.RD: Port B data register read signal PBDR.WR: Port B data register write signal Figure D.21 PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG Symbol in Figure D.21 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PB9 IRQ7 A21 ADTRG F-ZTAT version √ PB9/IRQ7/ PB9 IRQ7 A21 ADTRG A21/ADTRG (INTC) (BSC) (A/D) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 833 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams An (BSC) RES R Q PCnDR D C PCDR.WR PCDR.RD PFC Q PCnMD Q PCnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PCDR.RD: Port C data register read signal PCDR.WR: Port C data register write signal Figure D.22 PCn/An Symbol in Figure D.22 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PC8/A8 PC9/A9 PC10/A10 PC11/A11 PC12/A12 PC13/A13 PC14/A14 PC15/A15 PCn PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 An A0 (BSC) A1 (BSC) A2 (BSC) A3 (BSC) A4 (BSC) A5 (BSC) A6 (BSC) A7 (BSC) A8 (BSC) A9 (BSC) A10 (BSC) A11 (BSC) A12 (BSC) A13 (BSC) A14 (BSC) A15 (BSC) F-ZTAT version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 834 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus PCn/An D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PFC SBYCR PDn/Dn PDDRL.RD Din Q PDnMD Q PDnIOR Dout Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRL.RD: Port D data register L read signal PDDRL.WR: Port D data register L write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.23 PDn/Dn Symbol in Figure D.23 SH7144 Masked ROM F-ZTAT F-ZTAT version/ version ROM less version version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins PD0/D0 PD1/D1 PD2/D2 PD3/D3 PD4/D4 PD5/D5 PD6/D6 PD7/D7 PD8/D8 PD9/D9 PD10/D10 PD11/D11 PD12/D12 PD13/D13 PD14/D14 PDn PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD8 PD9 PD10 PD11 PD12 PD13 PD14 Dn D0 (BSC) D1 (BSC) D2 (BSC) D3 (BSC) D4 (BSC) D5 (BSC) D6 (BSC) D7 (BSC) D8 (BSC) D9 (BSC) D10 (BSC) D11 (BSC) D12 (BSC) D13 (BSC) D14 (BSC) PDnMD PD0MD PD1MD PD2MD PD3MD PD4MD PD5MD PD6MD PD7MD PD8MD0 PD9MD0 PD10MD0 PD11MD0 PD12MD0 PD13MD0 PD14MD0 PD15/D15 PD15 D15 (BSC) PD15MD0 ⎯ √ √ Internal data bus √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 835 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams AUDATAm (AUD) PDn/Dn/AUDATAm Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRL.RD Din AUDATAm (AUD) PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout AUDSYNC AUD reset AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PDDRL.RD: Port D data register L read signal PDDRL.WR: Port D data register L write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.24 PDn/Dn/AUDATAm Symbol in Figure D.24 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PDn Pins PD8/D8/ PD8 AUDATA0 PD9/D9/ PD9 AUDATA1 Dn D8 (BSC) D9 (BSC) AUDATAm AUDATA0 (AUD) AUDATA1 (AUD) AUDATA2 (AUD) AUDATA3 (AUD) PD10/D10/ PD10 D10 AUDATA2 (BSC) PD11/D11/ PD11 D11 AUDATA3 (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 836 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Dn (BSC) PDn/Dn/Function 1 RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRL.RD Din Function 1 PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR AUD module standby Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRL.RD: Port D data register L read signal PDDRL.WR: Port D data register L write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.25 PDn/Dn/Function 1 Symbol in Figure D.25 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ Pins PDn Dn Function 1 F-ZTAT version √ √ PD12/D12/ PD12 AUDRST PD13/D13 PD13 /AUDMD D12 AUDRST (BSC) (AUD) D13 AUDMD (BSC) (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 837 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 2 PDn/Dn/Function 2 Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRL.RD Din Function 2 PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PDDRL.RD: Port D data register L read signal PDDRL.WR: Port D data register L write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.26 PDn/Dn/Function 2 Symbol in Figure D.26 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT 2 version version version AUDCK (AUD) √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ Pins PD14/D14/ AUDCK PD15/D15/ AUDSYNC PDn PD14 PD15 Dn D14 (BSC) D15 (BSC) AUDSYN √ C (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 838 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Dn (BSC) PDn/Dn/IRQm RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din IRQm (INTC) PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR Q IRQEL(H) Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.27 PDn/Dn/IRQm Symbol in Figure D.27 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins PD16/D16/IRQ0 PD17/D17/IRQ1 PD18/D18/IRQ2 PD19/D19/IRQ3 PD20/D20/IRQ4 PD21/D21/IRQ5 PD22/D22/IRQ6 PD23/D23/IRQ7 PDn PD16 PD17 PD18 PD19 PD20 PD21 PD22 PD23 Dn IRQm D16 (BSC) IRQ0 (INTC) ⎯ D17 (BSC) IRQ1 (INTC) ⎯ D18 (BSC) IRQ2 (INTC) ⎯ D19 (BSC) IRQ3 (INTC) ⎯ D20 (BSC) IRQ4 (INTC) ⎯ D21 (BSC) IRQ5 (INTC) ⎯ D22 (BSC) IRQ6 (INTC) ⎯ D23 (BSC) IRQ7 (INTC) ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 839 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PDn/Dn/IRQm/AUDATAm AUDATAm (AUD) Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din IRQm (INTC) AUDATAm (AUD) PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout AUDSYNC AUD reset AUDMD SBYCR Q IRQEL Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.28 PDn/Dn/IRQm/AUDATAm Symbol in Figure D.28 SH7144 Available Products SH7145 Pins PD16/D16/ IRQ0/ AUDATA0 PD17/D17/ IRQ1/ AUDATA1 PD18/D18/ IRQ2/ AUDATA2 PD19/D19/ IRQ3/ AUDATA3 PDn PD16 Dn Masked ROM Masked ROM F-ZTAT version/ F-ZTAT version/ IRQm AUDATAm version ROM less version version ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ D16 IRQ0 AUDATA0 (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) D17 IRQ1 AUDATA1 (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) D18 IRQ2 AUDATA2 (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) D19 IRQ3 AUDATA3 (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) PD17 ⎯ ⎯ √ Internal data bus ⎯ PD18 ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ PD19 ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 840 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 1 Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din IRQm (INTC) Function 1 PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR Q IRQEH AUD module standby Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.29 PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 1 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less PDn Dn IRQm 1 Pins version version version version PD20/D20/ PD20 D20 IRQ4 AUDRST ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ IRQ4/ (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) AUDRST PD21/D21/ PD21 D21 IRQ5 AUDMD ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ IRQ5/ (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) AUDMD Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 841 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Symbol in Figure D.29 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 2 PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 2 Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din IRQm (INTC) Function 2 PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout AUDMD SBYCR Q IRQEH Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.30 PDn/Dn/IRQm/Function 2 Symbol in Figure D.30 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT IRQm 2 version version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ ⎯ Pins PD22/D22/ IRQ6/ AUDCK PD23/D23/ IRQ7/ AUDSYNC PDn Dn PD22 D22 IRQ6 AUDCK (BSC) (INTC) (AUD) PD23 D23 IRQ7 AUDSYN ⎯ (BSC) (INTC) C (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 842 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Dn (BSC) PDn/Dn/Function 3 RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din Function 3 PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.31 PDn/Dn/Function 3 Symbol in Figure D.31 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT 3 version version version DREQ0 (DMAC) DREQ1 (DMAC) ADTRG (A/D) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ Pins PD24/D24/ DREQ0 PD25/D25/ DREQ1 PD31/D31/ ADTRG PDn PD24 PD25 PD31 Dn D24 (BSC) D25 (BSC) D31 (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 843 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 4 PDn/Dn/Function 4 Dn (BSC) RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.32 PDn/Dn/Function 4 Symbol in Figure D.32 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT 4 version version version DACK0 (DMAC) DACK1 (DMAC) IRQOUT (INTC) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ Pins PD26/D26/ DACK0 PD27/D27/ DACK1 PD30/D30/ IRQOUT PDn PD26 PD27 PD30 Dn D26 (BSC) D27 (BSC) D30 (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 844 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams CSm (BSC) Dn (BSC) PDn/Dn/CSm RES R Q PDnDR D C PDDRH.WR Peripheral data bus PDDRH.RD Din PFC Q PDnMD0 Q PDnMD1 Q PDnIOR Dout SBYCR Q Hi-Z Bus release Software standby RES: Reset signal PDDRH.RD: Port D data register H read signal PDDRH.WR: Port D data register H write signal Din: Data input timing signal Dout: Data output timing signal Figure D.33 PDn/Dn/CSm Symbol in Figure D.33 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT version version version ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ Pins PD28/D28/CS2 PD29/D29/CS3 PDn PD28 PD29 Dn D28 (BSC) D29 (BSC) CSm CS2 (BSC) CS3 (BSC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 845 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Internal data bus D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1 TIOCxx (MTU) RES R Q PEnDR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD PFC Q PEnMD0 Q PEnMD1 SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.34 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1 Symbol in Figure D.34 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT 1 version version version DREQ0 (DMAC) DREQ1 (DMAC) RXD3 (SCI) RXD2 (SCI) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ √ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ Pins PEn TIOCxx TIOC0A (MTU) TIOC0C (MTU) TIOC1A (MTU) TIOC2B (MTU) PE0/TIOC0A/ PE0 DREQ0 PE2/TIOC0C/ PE2 DREQ1 PE4/TIOC1A/ RXD3 PE7/TIOC2B/ RXD2 PE4 PE7 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 846 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TIOCxx (MTU) Function 1 Q PEnIOR D. I/O Port Block Diagrams Function 2 TIOCxx (MTU) RES R Q PEnDR D C PEDRL.WR PEn/TIOCxx/Function 2 PEDRL.RD PFC Q PEnMD0 Q PEnMD1 Q PEnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.35 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 2 Symbol in Figure D.35 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT 2 version version version DRAK0 (DMAC) DRAK1 (DMAC) TXD3 (SCI) TXD2 (SCI) ⎯ ⎯ √ √ √ √ √ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ Pins PE1/TIOC0B/ DRAK0 PE3/TIOC0D/ DRAK1 PE5/TIOC1B/ TXD3 PE10/TIOC3C/ TXD2 PEn PE1 PE3 PE5 TIOCxx TIOC0B (MTU) TIOC0D (MTU) TIOC1B (MTU) PE10 TIOC3C (MTU) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 847 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TIOCxx (MTU) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams SCKm (SCI) PEn/TIOCxx/SCKm TIOCxx (MTU) RES R Q PEnDR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOCxx (MTU) SCKm (SCI) PFC Q PEnMD0 Q PEnMD1 Q PEnIOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.36 PEn/TIOCxx/SCKm Symbol in Figure D.36 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version √ √ ⎯ √ √ √ ⎯ √ Pins PE9/TIOC3B/ SCK3 PE8/TIOC3A/ SCK2 PEn PE9 PE8 TIOCxx TIOC3B (MTU) TIOC3A (MTU) SCKm SCK3 (SCI) SCK2 (SCI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 848 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams SCK3 (SCI) PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 TIOC3B (MTU) RES R Q PE9DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC3B (MTU) SCK3 (SCI) PFC Q PE9MD0 Q PE9MD1 Q PE9IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.37 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3 Symbol in Figure D.37 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PE9/TIOC3B/ SCK3 PE9 PE9 TIOC3B TIOC3B (MTU) F-ZTAT SCK3 version SCK3 √ (SCI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 849 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TIOC3D (MTU) RES R Q PE11DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 PEDRL.RD TIOC3D (MTU) RXD3 (SCI) PFC Q PE11MD0 Q PE11MD1 Q PE11IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.38 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3 Symbol in Figure D.38 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PE11/TIOC3D/ RXD3 PE11 TIOC3D PE11 TIOC3D (MTU) F-ZTAT RXD3 version RXD3 √ (SCI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 850 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TXD3 (SCI) PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 TIOC4A (MTU) RES R Q PE12DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC4A (MTU) PFC Q PE12MD0 Q PE12MD1 Q PE12IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.39 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3 Symbol in Figure D.39 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PE12/TIOC4A/ TXD3 PE12 TIOC4A PE12 TIOC4A (MTU) F-ZTAT TXD3 version TXD3 √ (SCI) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 851 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TIOC4B (MTU) RES R Q PE13DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PE13/TIOC4B/MRES PEDRL.RD TIOC4B (MTU) MRES (INTC) PFC Q PE13MD0 Q PE13MD1 Q PE13IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.40 PE13/TIOC4B/MRES Symbol in Figure D.40 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PE13/TIOC4B/ MRES F-ZTAT PE13 TIOC4B MRES version PE13 TIOC4B MRES √ (MTU) (INTC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 852 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams DACK0 (DMAC) PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 TIOC4C (MTU) RES R Q PE14DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC4C (MTU) PFC Q PE14MD0 Q PE14MD1 Q PE14IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.41 PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0 Symbol in Figure D.41 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ Pins PE14/TIOC4C/ DACK0 PE14 PE14 F-ZTAT TIOC4C DACK0 version TIOC4C DACK0 √ (MTU) (DMAC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 853 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams IRQOUT (INTC) PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT DACK1 (DMAC) TIOC4D (MTU) RES R Q PE15DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC4D (MTU) PFC Q PE15MD0 Q PE15MD1 Q PE15IOR SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.42 PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT Symbol in Figure D.42 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version √ √ √ √ Pins PE15/TIOC4D/ DACK1/ IRQOUT PE15 PE15 TIOC4D TIOC4D (MTU) DACK1 DACK1 (DMAC) IRQOUT IRQOUT (INTC) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 854 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/ Function 2 TIOCxx (MTU) RES R Q PEnDR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD PFC Q PEnMD0 Q PEnMD1 Q PEnIOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.43 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/Function 2 Symbol in Figure D.43 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Pins PE0/TIOC0A/ DREQ0/TMS PE2/TIOC0C/ DREQ1/TDI PE4/TIOC1A/ RXD3/TCK PEn PE0 PE2 PE4 Function TIOCxx 1 TIOC0A DREQ0 (MTU) (DMAC) TIOC0C DREQ1 (MTU) (DMAC) TIOC1A RXD3 (MTU) (SCI) Function 2 TMS (H-UDI) TDI (H-UDI) TCK (H-UDI) Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version √ √ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 855 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TIOCxx (MTU) Function 1 Function 2 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST DRAK0 (DMAC) TIOC0B (MTU) RES R Q PE1DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC0B (MTU) TRST (H-UDI) PFC Q PE1MD0 Q PE1MD1 Q PE1IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.44 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/TRST Symbol in Figure D.44 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE1/TIOC0B/ DRAK0/ TRST PE1 PE1 TIOC0B TIOC0B (MTU) DRAK0 TRST F-ZTAT version √ F-ZTAT version ⎯ DRAK0 TRST (DMAC) (H-UDI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 856 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TDO (H-UDI) PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO DRAK1 (DMAC) TIOC0D (MTU) RES Peripheral data bus R Q PE3DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD TIOC0D (MTU) PFC Q PE3MD0 Q PE3MD1 Q PE3IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby Test reset RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.45 PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1/TDO Symbol in Figure D.45 SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Available Products SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE3/TIOC0D/ DRAK1/TDO PE3 TIOC0D DRAK1 PE3 TIOC0D DRAK1 (MTU) (DMAC) TDO F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version ⎯ TDO √ (H-UDI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 857 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK AUDCK (AUD) TIOC0A (MTU) RES Peripheral data bus R Q PE0DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD TIOC0A (MTU) DREQ0 (DMAC) AUDCK (AUD) PFC Q PE0MD0 Q PE0MD1 Q PE0IOR AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.46 PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0/AUDCK Symbol in Figure D.46 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version √ ⎯ Pins PE0/TIOC0A/ DREQ0/ AUDCK PE0 PE0 TIOC0A DREQ0 AUDCK TIOC0A DREQ0 AUDCK (MTU) (DMAC) (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 858 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD DRAK0 (DMAC) TIOC0B (MTU) RES Peripheral data bus R Q PE1DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD TIOC0B (MTU) AUDMD (AUD) PFC Q PE1MD0 Q PE1MD1 Q PE1IOR AUD module standby Software standby SBYCR Q Hi-Z RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.47 PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0/AUDMD Symbol in Figure D.47 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Pins PE1/TIOC0B/ DRAK0/ AUDMD PE1 PE1 TIOC0B TIOC0B (MTU) DRAK0 DRAK0 (DMAC) AUDMD AUDMD (AUD) Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less version version version version ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 859 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST TIOC0C (MTU) RES Peripheral data bus R Q PE2DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD TIOC0C (MTU) DREQ1 (DMAC) AUDRST (AUD) PFC Q PE2MD0 Q PE2MD1 Q PE2IOR AUD module standby Software standby SBYCR Q Hi-Z RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.48 PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1/AUDRST Symbol in Figure D.48 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Pins PE2/TIOC0C/ DREQ1/ AUDRST PE2 PE2 TIOC0C TIOC0C (MTU) DREQ1 DREQ1 (DMAC) Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less AUDRST version version version version AUDRST ⎯ (AUD) ⎯ √ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 860 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams AUDATAm (AUD) PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/AUDATAm Function 1 TIOCxx (MTU) RES Q PEnDR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD PFC Q PEnMD0 Q PEnMD1 Q PEnIOR AUDSYNC AUD reset AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.49 PEn/TIOCxx/Function 1/AUDATAm Symbol in Figure D.49 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Pins PE3/TIOC0D/ DRAK1/ AUDATA3 PE5/TIOC1B/ TXD3/ AUDATA1 PEn PE3 Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ Function F-ZTAT ROM less F-ZTAT ROM less TIOCxx 1 AUDATAm version version version version TIOC0D DRAK1 (MTU) (DMAC) TIOC1B TXD3 (MTU) (SCI) AUDATA3 (AUD) AUDATA1 (AUD) ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ PE5 ⎯ ⎯ Peripheral data bus TIOCxx (MTU) AUDATAm (AUD) R √ ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 861 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2 AUDATA2 (AUD) TIOC1A (MTU) RES R Q PE4DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD PFC Q PE4MD0 Q PE4MD1 Q PE4IOR AUDSYNC AUD reset AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.50 PE4/TIOC1A/RXD3/AUDATA2 Symbol in Figure D.50 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less F-ZTAT version version ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE4/TIOC1A/ RXD3/ AUDATA2 PE4 PE4 F-ZTAT TIOC1A RXD3 AUDATA2 version TIOC1A RXD3 AUDATA2 ⎯ (MTU) (SCI) (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 862 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TIOC1A (MTU) RXD3 (SCI) AUDATA2 (AUD) D. I/O Port Block Diagrams AUDATA0 (AUD) PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0 SCK3 (SCI) TIOC2A (MTU) RES Q PE6DR D C PEDRL.WR PEDRL.RD PFC Q PE6MD0 Q PE6MD1 Q PE6IOR AUDSYNC AUD reset AUDMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby AUD module standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.51 PE6/TIOC2A/SCK3/AUDATA0 Symbol in Figure D.51 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version √ ⎯ Pins PE6/TIOC2A/ SCK3/ AUDATA0 PE6 PE6 TIOC2A SCK3 TIOC2A SCK3 (MTU) (SCI) F-ZTAT AUDATA0 version AUDATA0 ⎯ (AUD) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 863 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus TIOC2A (MTU) SCK3 (SCI) AUDATA0 (AUD) R D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS SCK2 (SCI) TIOC3A (MTU) RES R Q PE8DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC3A (MTU) SCK2 (SCI) TMS (H-UDI) PFC Q PE8MD0 Q PE8MD1 Q PE8IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.52 PE8/TIOC3A/SCK2/TMS Symbol in Figure D.52 Available Products SH7144 SH7145 Pins PE8/TIOC3A/ SCK2/TMS PE8 PE8 TIOC3A SCK2 TIOC3A SCK2 (MTU) (SCI) TMS F-ZTAT version Masked ROM Masked ROM version/ version/ F-ZTAT ROM less ROM less version version version ⎯ √ ⎯ TMS ⎯ (H-UDI) Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 864 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST SCK3 (SCI) TIOC3B (MTU) RES R Q PE9DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC3B (MTU) SCK3 (SCI) TRST (H-UDI) PFC Q PE9MD0 Q PE9MD1 Q PE9IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Q MZIZE Oscillation halt POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.53 PE9/TIOC3B/SCK3/TRST Symbol in Figure D.53 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version √ ⎯ Pins PE9/TIOC3B/ SCK3/TRST PE9 PE9 TIOC3B SCK3 TIOC3B SCK3 (MTU) (SCI) TRST TRST (H-UDI) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 865 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams TXD2 (SCI) TIOC3C (MTU) RES R Q PE10DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI PEDRL.RD TIOC3C (MTU) TDI (H-UDI) PFC Q PE10MD0 Q PE10MD1 Q PE10IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.54 PE10/TIOC3C/TXD2/TDI Symbol in Figure D.54 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE10/TIOC3C/ TXD2/TDI PE10 PE10 TIOC3C TXD2 TDI TIOC3C TXD2 TDI (MTU) (SCI) (H-UDI) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 866 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO TDO (H-UDI) TIOC3D (MTU) RES R Q PE11DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC3D (MTU) RXD3 (SCI) PFC Q PE11MD0 Q PE11MD1 Q PE11IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby Test reset Oscillation halt PPCR Q MZIZE POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.55 PE11/TIOC3D/RXD3/TDO Symbol in Figure D.55 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE11/TIOC3D/ RXD3/TDO PE11 PE11 TIOC3D TIOC3D (MTU) RXD3 RXD3 (SCI) TDO TDO (H-UDI) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 867 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK TXD3 (SCI) TIOC4A (MTU) RES R Q PE12DR D C PEDRL.WR Peripheral data bus PEDRL.RD TIOC4A (MTU) TCK (H-UDI) PFC Q PE12MD0 Q PE12MD1 Q PE12IOR DBGMD SBYCR Q Hi-Z Software standby PPCR Oscillation halt Q MZIZE POE RES: Reset signal PEDRL.RD: Port E data register L read signal PEDRL.WR: Port E data register L write signal Figure D.56 PE12/TIOC4A/TXD3/TCK Symbol in Figure D.56 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ F-ZTAT ROM less version version ⎯ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version ⎯ Pins PE12/TIOC4A/ TXD3/TCK PE12 PE12 TIOC4A TIOC4A (MTU) TXD3 TXD3 (SCI) TCK TCK (H-UDI) F-ZTAT version ⎯ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 868 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 D. I/O Port Block Diagrams PFDR.RD Software standby ANn (A/D) PFDR.RD: Port F data register read signal Figure D.57 PFn/ANn Symbol in Figure D.57 Available Products SH7144 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ SH7145 Masked ROM version/ ROM less version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Pins PF0/AN0 PF1/AN1 PF2/AN2 PF3/AN3 PF4/AN4 PF5/AN5 PF6/AN6 PF7/AN7 PFn PF0 PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 PF5 PF6 PF7 ANn AN0 (A/D) AN1 (A/D) AN2 (A/D) AN3 (A/D) AN4 (A/D) AN5 (A/D) AN6 (A/D) AN7 (A/D) F-ZTAT version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ F-ZTAT version √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 869 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Peripheral data bus PFn/ANn E. Package Dimensions Appendix E Package Dimensions The package dimensions that are shown in the Renesas Semiconductor Package Data Book have priority. JEITA Package Code P-QFP112-20x20-0.65 RENESAS Code PRQP0112JB-A Previous Code FP-112B/FP-112BV MASS[Typ.] 2.4g HD *1 D 57 84 85 56 bp b1 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. c1 *2 HE E c Terminal cross section ZE 112 29 Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol 1 ZD 28 F θ A1 L L1 Detail F e *3 y bp x M D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 θ e x y ZD ZE L L1 Nom Max 20 20 2.70 23.0 23.2 23.4 23.0 23.2 23.4 3.05 0.00 0.10 0.25 0.24 0.32 0.40 0.30 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.15 8˚ 0˚ 0.65 0.13 0.10 1.23 1.23 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.6 Min A A2 Figure E.1 FP-112B Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 870 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 c E. Package Dimensions JEITA Package Code P-LQFP144-20x20-0.50 RENESAS Code PLQP0144KB-A Previous Code FP-144F/FP-144FV MASS[Typ.] 1.4g HD *1 D 108 109 73 72 bp b1 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. c1 *2 HE E c Terminal cross section ZE 144 1 ZD Index mark 36 37 Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol F θ A1 L L1 e *3 y bp Detail F x M D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 θ e x y ZD ZE L L1 Nom Max 20 20 1.40 21.8 22.0 22.2 21.8 22.0 22.2 1.70 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.17 0.22 0.27 0.20 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.15 0˚ 8˚ 0.5 0.08 0.10 1.25 1.25 0.4 0.5 0.6 1.0 Min A A2 Figure E.2 FP-144F Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 871 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 c E. Package Dimensions Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 872 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Main Revisions for this Edition Item 5.1.3 Exception Processing Vector Table Table 5.3 Exception Processing Vector Table Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 64 Table and note amended Exception Sources On-chip peripheral module* 2 Vector Numbers 72 : 255 Vector Table Address Offset H'00000120 to H'00000123 : H'000003FC to H'000003FF Notes: 1. Only in the F-ZTAT version. 2. The vector numbers and vector table address offsets for each on-chip peripheral module interrupt are given in table 6.2. 11.4.5 PWM Modes Figure 11.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) 275 Figure amended Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA 11.4.8 Complementary PWM Mode Figure 11.34 Complementary PWM Mode Counter Operation 290 Figure amended TCNT_3 TCNT_4 Counter value TCNTS TGRA_3 TCDR TCNT_3 TCNT_4 TDDR H'0000 Time TCNTS Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 873 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Item 11.7.16 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing Figure 11.83 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 333 Figure amended Pφ TCNT input clock TCNT Counter clear signal TGF Disabled H'FFFF H'0000 TCFV 11.7.17 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow Figure 11.84 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 334 Figure amended TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Pφ Address Write signal TCNT address TCNT write data TCNT H'FFFF M TCFV flag 11.7.22 Note on Buffer Operation Setting 12.1 Features 13.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 13.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart 335 379 430 Newly added Description replaced Figure replaced Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 874 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Item 13.6.1 Clock Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 443 Description added … Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed, the clock is fixed high. However, during receive-only operation the synchronization clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. When receive operation in singlecharacter units is desired, select an external clock as the clock source. 13.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 13.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart 14.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) Table 14.3 Setting of the Transfer Rate 476 Table and note amended Transfer Rate P φ= 10MHz 357kHz 250kHz 208kHz 156kHz 125kHz 100kHz 89.3kHz 78.1kHz P φ= 16MHz 571kHz* 400kHz 333kHz 250kHz 200kHz 160kHz 143kHz 125kHz 2 444 Figure replaced P φ= 20MHz 714kHz* 500kHz* 417kHz* 313kHz 250kHz 200kHz 179kHz 156kHz P φ= 25MHz 893kHz* 625kHz* 521kHz* 391kHz 313kHz 250kHz 223kHz 195kHz P φ= 33MHz P φ= 40MHz 1.18MHz* 1.43MHz* 825kHz* 688kHz* 516kHz* 413kHz* 330kHz 295kHz 258kHz 1.00MHz* 833kHz* 625kHz* 500kHz* 400kHz 357kHz 313kHz Note: * Out of the I C bus interface specification (Normal mode: maximum100 kHz, High speed mode: maximum 400 kHz) Due to factors such as load conditions, it may not be possible to obtain the designated transfer rate when the value of IICX is 0 and the peripheral clock φ frequency exceeds 16 MHz. Set IICX to 1 when Pφ is greater than 16 MHz. 14.5 Usage Notes 10. Notes on WAIT function 535, 536 Description added Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 875 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Table amended Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value ADF 0 R/W R/(W)* Description A/D End Flag A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. [Setting conditions] • • When A/D conversion ends in single mode When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels in scan mode When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 When the DMAC or the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and data is read from ADDR while the DTMR bit in the DTC is cleared to 0 15.3.2 A/D Control/Status 545 Register_0, 1 (ADCSR_0, ADCSR_1) [Clearing conditions] • • 16.2.2 Compare Match 561 Timer Control/Status Register_0, 1 (CMCSR_0, CMCSR_1) Table amended Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value CMF 0 R/W Description R/(W)* Compare Match Flag This flag indicates whether or not the CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched. 0: CMCNT and CMCOR values have not matched 1: CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched [Clearing condition] • • Write 0 to CMF after reading 1 from it When the DTC is activated by an CMI interrupt and data is transferred with the DISEL bit in DTMR of DTC = 0 19.1 Features 657 Description amended • Reprogramming capability See section 26.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. 19.8.3 Interrupt Handling 679 when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory Figure 19.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Figure amended Erase start SWE bit ← 1 Wait (tSSWE) μs n←1 Set EBR1 and EBR2 *3 *1 19.11.3 Notes on Flash 683 Memory Programming and to Erasing 685 23.5.7 Settings of AUDRelated Pins when Using E10A 717 Description replaced Newly added Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 876 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Item 24.3.1 Sleep Mode Transition to Sleep Mode Clearing Sleep Mode • Clearing by the interrupt (masked version and ROM less version) • Clearing by the DMAC/DTC address error (masked version and ROM less version) 24.4.5 DMAC, DTC, or AUD Operation in Sleep Mode 26.2 DC Characteristics Table 26.2 DC Characteristics 731 Description amended In sleep mode, data should not be accessed by the DMAC, DTC, or AUD. 768 Table amended Item Schmitt trigger input voltage IRQ7 to IRQ0, POE3 to POE0, TCLKA to TCLKD, TIOC0A to TIOC0D, TIOC1A, TIOC1B, TIOC2A, TIOC2B, TIOC3A to TIOC3D, TIOC4A to TIOC4D, SCK3 to SCK0, RXD3 to RXD0 Symbol VT+ (VIH) VT– (VIL) VT+–VT– Min. VCC−0.5 — 0.2 Typ. — — — Max. — 0.5 — Unit V V V Measurement Conditions Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 727 ⎯ In sleep mode, data should not be accessed by the DMAC, DTC, or AUD. Description deleted 26.4 A/D Converter Characteristics Table 26.17 A/D Converter Characteristics 26.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 26.18 Flash Memory Characteristics Appendix E Package Dimensions Figure E.1 FP-112B Figure E.2 FP-144F 795 Table amended Item Non-linear error (reference value) Offset error (reference value) Full-scale error (reference value) Min. — — — Typ. — — — Max. 345 6 ±3.0* * * /±5.0* ±3.0* * * /±5.0* 345 345 6 6 Unit LSB LSB LSB ±3.0* * * /±5.0* 796, 797 Table replaced 870 Figure replaced 871 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 877 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Main Revisions for this Edition Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 878 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Index Index A/D conversion time............................... 550 A/D converter ......................................... 541 Absolute maximum ratings ..................... 767 Activation by interrupt............................ 134 Activation by software............................ 134 Address error exception processing .......... 68 Address map ..................................... 51, 141 Addressing modes..................................... 25 Advanced user debugger (AUD) ............ 705 Asynchronous serial communication ...... 426 Auto-request mode.................................. 182 Block configuration ................................ 663 Block transfer mode................................ 129 Boot mode............................................... 671 Branch trace mode .................................. 708 Buffer operation...................................... 266 Burst mode.............................................. 195 Bus arbitration ........................................ 161 Bus masters............................................. 161 Bus release state........................................ 46 Bus state controller (BSC) ...................... 137 Byte data ................................................... 19 Cascaded operation ................................. 269 Chain transfer.......................................... 130 Clock mode............................................... 48 Clock pulse generator ............................... 53 Clocked synchronous communication .... 443 Compare match....................................... 261 Compare match timer (CMT) ................. 559 Complementary PWM mode .................. 285 Continuous scan mode ............................ 549 Control registers........................................ 17 CPU .......................................................... 15 Crystal oscillator....................................... 55 Cycle-steal mode .................................... 195 Data format in registers............................. 19 Data formats.............................................. 19 Data formats in memory ........................... 19 Data transfer controller (DTC)................113 Delayed branch instructions......................21 Direct memory access controller (DMAC) ................................................................167 DTC vector addresses .............................124 Dual address mode ..................................190 Effective address .......................................25 Electrical characteristics..........................767 Error Protection.......................................681 Exception processing ................................61 Exception processing state ........................46 Exception processing vector table.............63 External clock input ..................................56 External request mode.............................182 Fixed mode..............................................184 Flash memory..........................................657 Flash memory emulation in RAM...........674 Free-running counters .............................260 Function for detecting the oscillator halt...57 Functions of multiplexed pins.................569 General illegal instructions .......................72 General registers (Rn) ...............................15 Global base register (GBR).......................18 Hardware protection................................680 I/O ports ..................................................633 I2C bus format .........................................493 I2C bus interface......................................467 Illegal slot instructions ..............................72 Immediate data format ..............................20 Input capture function .............................263 Internal clock ............................................53 Interrupt controller (INTC) .......................77 Interrupt exception processing ..................70 Interrupt response time..............................96 Interval timer mode .................................386 IRQ interrupts .....................................84, 87 Longword data ..........................................19 Manual reset..............................................66 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 879 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Index Mask ROM ............................................. 689 Master device.......................................... 496 MCU operating modes.............................. 47 Module standby mode............................. 730 Multi-function timer pulse unit (MTU) .. 213 Multiply-and-accumulate registers (MAC) ...................................................... 18 Multiprocessor communication function 437 NMI interrupts .......................................... 87 Normal mode .......................................... 127 On-board programming modes............... 670 On-chip peripheral module interrupts....... 88 On-chip peripheral module request mode ....................................................... 183 Permissible signal source impedance...... 558 Phase counting mode .............................. 276 Pin function controller (PFC) ................. 569 Pin functions in each operating mode..... 569 Port output enable (POE)........................ 368 Power-down modes ................................ 719 Power-down state...................................... 46 Power-on reset .......................................... 65 Procedure register (PR)............................. 18 Processing states ....................................... 45 Program counter (PC) ............................... 18 Program execution state............................ 46 PWM mode............................................. 271 RAM ....................................................... 691 RAM emulation ...................................... 674 RAM monitor mode................................ 709 Reading from TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR ................................................................ 390 Register ADCR ......................... 547, 740, 753, 763 ADCSR....................... 545, 740, 752, 762 ADDR......................... 544, 740, 752, 762 ADTSR ....................... 548, 743, 756, 764 BCR1 .......................... 144, 742, 754, 763 BCR2 .......................... 147, 742, 754, 763 BRR ............................ 416, 734, 745, 758 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 880 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 CHCR.......................... 172, 742, 754, 763 CMCNT ...................... 562, 740, 752, 762 CMCOR ...................... 562, 740, 752, 762 CMCSR....................... 561, 740, 752, 762 CMSTR....................... 560, 740, 752, 762 DAR ............................ 171, 742, 754, 763 DMAOR...................... 178, 742, 754, 763 DMATCR ................... 171, 742, 754, 763 DTBR.......................... 121, 743, 756, 764 DTCRA............................................... 118 DTCRB ............................................... 119 DTCSR........................ 120, 743, 756, 764 DTDAR............................................... 118 DTER .......................... 119, 743, 756, 764 DTIAR ................................................ 118 DTMR................................................. 116 DTSAR ............................................... 118 EBR1........................... 667, 741, 753, 763 EBR2........................... 668, 741, 753, 763 FLMCR1..................... 665, 741, 753, 763 FLMCR2..................... 666, 741, 753, 763 ICCR ........................... 477, 744, 757, 764 ICDR........................... 471, 744, 757, 764 ICMR .......................... 474, 744, 757, 764 ICR1.............................. 80, 738, 749, 761 ICR2.............................. 82, 738, 749, 761 ICSR.................................... 486, 744, 757 ICSR1.................. 370, 377, 739, 751, 762 IPR ................................ 85, 738, 749, 761 ISR ................................ 84, 738, 749, 761 MSTCR....................... 725, 741, 753, 763 OCSR .......................... 374, 739, 751, 762 PACR .......................... 597, 738, 750, 761 PADR.......................... 636, 738, 750, 761 PAIOR ........................ 596, 738, 750, 761 PBCR .......................... 605, 738, 750, 761 PBDR .......................... 640, 738, 750, 761 PBIOR......................... 605, 738, 750, 761 PCCR .......................... 609, 738, 750, 761 PCDR .......................... 643, 738, 750, 761 Index PCIOR ........................ 609, 738, 750, 761 PDCR.......................... 612, 739, 751, 762 PDDR.......................... 647, 739, 751, 762 PDIOR ........................ 611, 739, 751, 762 PECR .......................... 622, 739, 751, 762 PEDRL........................ 652, 739, 751, 762 PEIORL ...................... 621, 739, 751, 762 PFDR .......................... 654, 739, 751, 762 PPCR .......................... 630, 743, 756, 764 RAMER .............. 153, 668, 742, 754, 763 RDR ............................ 398, 734, 745, 758 RSR..................................................... 398 RSTCSR ..................... 384, 741, 753, 763 SAR (DMAC)............. 170, 742, 754, 763 SAR (IIC).................... 472, 744, 757, 764 SARX.......................... 473, 744, 757, 764 SBYCR ....................... 722, 741, 753, 763 SCR............................. 402, 734, 745, 758 SCRX.......................... 490, 743, 756, 764 SDBPR................................................ 699 SDCR.......................... 415, 734, 745, 758 SDDR.......................... 699, 744, 757, 764 SDIR ........................... 697, 744, 757, 764 SDSR .......................... 698, 744, 757, 764 SMR............................ 399, 734, 745, 758 SSR ............................. 407, 734, 745, 758 SYSCR........................ 724, 741, 753, 763 TCBR.......................... 257, 736, 746, 759 TCDR.......................... 257, 735, 746, 759 TCNT (MTU) ............. 249, 735, 746, 760 TCNT (WDT) ............. 381, 741, 753, 763 TCNTS........................ 257, 736, 746, 759 TCR ............................ 220, 735, 746, 759 TCSR .......................... 382, 741, 753, 763 TDDR ......................... 257, 735, 746, 759 TDR ............................ 398, 734, 745, 758 TGCR.......................... 255, 735, 746, 759 TGR .................................... 735, 746, 759 TGRA ................................................. 249 TGRB.................................................. 249 TGRC..................................................249 TGRD..................................................249 TIER............................ 244, 735, 746, 759 TIOR ........................... 226, 735, 746, 759 TMDR ......................... 224, 735, 746, 759 TOCR.......................... 253, 735, 746, 759 TOER .......................... 252, 735, 746, 759 TSR (MTU)................. 246, 736, 747, 759 TSR (SCI) ...........................................398 TSTR........................... 250, 736, 747, 759 TSYR .......................... 250, 736, 747, 759 UBAMR...................... 103, 741, 753, 763 UBAR ......................... 103, 741, 753, 763 UBBR.......................... 104, 741, 753, 763 UBCR.......................... 105, 741, 753, 763 WCR1 ......................... 152, 742, 754, 763 WCR2 ......................... 153, 742, 754, 763 Register address table..............................733 Register bit list ........................................745 Register states in each operating mode ...758 Repeat mode............................................127 Reset state .................................................46 Reset-synchronized PWM mode.............282 RISC-type .................................................21 Round robin mode...................................184 Serial communication interface (SCI).....393 Serial format............................................493 Single address mode................................188 Single mode ............................................549 Single-cycle scan mode...........................550 Slave device ............................................509 Sleep mode..............................................727 Smart card interface ................................451 Software protection .................................681 Software standby mode ...........................728 Status register (SR) ...................................17 Synchronous operation............................264 System clock (φ) .......................................53 System registers ........................................18 Trap instructions .......................................71 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 881 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Index User break controller (UBC)................... 101 User break interrupt .................................. 88 User debugging interface (H-UDI) ......... 693 User debugging interface (H-UDI) interrupt .................................................................. 89 User program mode ................................ 673 Vector base register (VBR)....................... 18 Vector No. ................................................ 90 Vectors table ............................................. 90 Watchdog timer....................................... 379 Watchdog timer mode............................. 385 Word data.................................................. 19 Writing to RSTCSR ................................ 389 Writing to TCNT and TCSR................... 389 Rev.4.00 Mar. 27, 2008 Page 882 of 882 REJ09B0108-0400 Renesas 32-Bit RISC Microcomputer Hardware Manual SH7144 Group, SH7145 Group Publication Date: 1st Edition, January, 2002 Rev.4.00, March 27, 2008 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div. Renesas Solutions Corp. © 2008. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: (408) 382-7500, Fax: (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: (1628) 585-100, Fax: (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: (21) 5877-1818, Fax: (21) 6887-7858/7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2265-6688, Fax: 2377-3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: (2) 2715-2888, Fax: (2) 3518-3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: 6213-0200, Fax: 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: (2) 796-3115, Fax: (2) 796-2145 http://www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: 7955-9390, Fax: 7955-9510 Colophon 6.2 SH7144 Group, SH7145 Group Hardware Manual